METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.
PORTUGUESE
CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR
BY
LOUISE EY,
TEACHER OF THE PORTUGUESE LANGUAGE AT THE COLONIAL INSTITUTE AND THE
SUPERIOR COMMERCIAL SCHOOL IN HAMBURG.
J804.
LONDOX.
DAVID MUTT, 67-59 Long Acre, W.C. DULAU & CO., 37 Soho Square, W.
SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON & CO., 100 Southwark Street, S.E.
NEW YORK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street.
DYRSEN & PFEIFFER (CHRISTERN'S), 16 West 33rd Street.
THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street.
G. E. STECHERT & CO., 151155 West 25th Street.
E. STEIGER & CO., 25 Park Place.
BOSTON: RITTER & FLEBBE, formerly C. A. KCEHLER & CO., 120 Boylston Str.
THE SCHOENHOF BOOK CO., 128 Tremont Street.
HEIDELBERG.
JULIUS GROOS.
1912.
E.23
The Gaspey- Otto -Sauer" Method has become my sole property by
right of purchase. These books are continually revised. All rights,
especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, arc
reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Any information
as to infringement of my rights always thankfully received.
London, Paris, Rome, St. Petersburgh, Heidelberg. Julius Oroos.
Preface,
i
This Portuguese Grammar is an adaptation of my
"Neue Portugiesische Konversations-Grammatik," issued
in 1910 by the same publisher, Julius Groos, of Heidel-
berg, who, in consideration of the extremely favourable
reception that work met with in German-speaking and
Portuguese -speaking countries, commissioned me to
compile a Portuguese Grammar for English use. This
work I undertook the more readily, as the close rela-
tionship existing between Great Britain and her Portu-
guese ally, the increasing commercial intercourse between
the two nations, and the evergrowing needs of tourists,
demand further means of linguistic correspondence.
In this Grammar, as well as in that employed as
a model, I have tried to overcome one of the greatest
difficulties of the Portuguese language i.e., the pro-
nunciation by adopting the phonetical system of the
Association phonetique Internationale. It was carefully
applied to the Portuguese language by Sr. Go^alves
Viana, who also kindly revised the chapter on Pro-
nunciation in this grammar.
As for the orthography the difficulty of which is
next in importance to the phonetical one, as hitherto
the Portuguese have apparently considered this as a
problem to be solved individually I have employed
that given in the "Novo Diccionario da Lingua portu-
guesa," by Candido de Figueiredo, member of the Aca-
demy of Sciences in Lisbon, which tends to simplify
the writing and to facilitate the pronunciation of Por-
tuguese.
IV Preface.
In compiling the Exercises I have felt the desira-
bility of furnishing objective material so far as this
is compatible with the grammatical Rules to be worked
out in the form of imaginative pictures. Further, I
have aimed at making the student acquainted not only
with the language, but with the countries where Por-
tuguese is spoken viz., Portugal and Brazil by giving
a geographical, historical, and cultural view of them.
Wishing to make use, so far as is possible, of
original Portuguese in the Reading Exercises, and this
of the purest and most popular kind, I was fortunate
enough to fall in with what proved to be a real mine
of legitimate linguistic gold, both in subject and in the
form in which it is presented. The student will notice
that the greater part of the Reading lessons is taken
from Trindade Coelho, a modern Portuguese writer
who is acknowledged to be the most accomplished in
popular language, whose literary excellence has been
recognised, and whose tragic destiny has called forth
expression of sympathetic sorrow wherever he has been
known. I have profited by this great pedagogue's
three "Livros de Leitura," described as "wonderful
reading-books for public instruction" by Dr. Carolina
Michaelis de Vasconcellos, the learned woman, respected
by all Romanists, hitherto holding a professorship in
the University of Lisbon.
These three books have been appreciatively referred
to by the Portuguese school-inspector, Senhor Brito
Moreno, in the Givilisa$ao Popular, a highly respected
pedagogical review, as "the very best of their kind to be
found in Portugal, as they combine an extreme clearness
with a lively and characteristic performance, uniting an
amiable simplicity to an honest conviction" and, we
may perhaps be allowed to add, a sincere devotion for
the subject to the utmost consideration for the reader.
Preface. V
I am gratified at finding that Portuguese and Bra-
zilian critics declare my selection of reading material
to be the most meritorious feature of my "Neue Por-
tugiesische Konversations-Grammatik" (which contains
substantially the same exercises as the present work),
while German critics highly appreciate the advantage
of being introduced through this medium to the Por-
tuguese countries and customs as to a home worthy of
our fullest sympathy and esteem.
I beg to express here my sincerest thanks to Mr.
W. G. Priest, of London, for his assistance in revising
the English portion of the work. Should any student
of Portuguese, in using this Grammar, meet with errors
or defects, I shall be grateful if he or she will com-
municate with me, in order that I may be able to
rectify the same in future editions.
Pinneberg (Holstein), October 1911.
Louise Ey.
VI
Remarks on the Recent Reform of
Portuguese Orthography.
While this Grammar was in course of preparation
when, in fact, nearly the whole of the work had been
printed the Portuguese Government officially adopted
the Reform of Orthography recommended by a Com-
mission of members of the Academia das Sciencias. In
order, however, to avoid, the confusion that would re-
sult from the universal application of so drastic an
alteration in spelling, its operation is for the present
limited to the "Diario do Governo" and official docu-
ments, the schools being accorded a period of three
3 r ears in which to accustom themselves to the change.
It has, therefore, not been considered advisable to
alter the orthography of this Grammar, more particularly
as all Portuguese literature is, of course, still written
in the style of spelling hitherto employed. At the
same time, it is obviously desirable that students of
the Portuguese language should acquaint themselves
with and prepare for the new method; accordingly, in
the Vocabulary at the end of the book, the letters ex-
cluded by the Reform have been indicated by paren-
theses , ' which system especially tends to establish a
concordance between the orthography and the phonetical
rendering.
The principal alterations are: the avoidance of
doubled consonants' where only one is pronounced (bb,
ff, gg, II, mm, nn, pp, tt now b, f, g, I, etc.); the
omission of the h in its combinations of th or ch (= k,
this sound being substituted by c or qu, e.g., patriarca,
), also its omission from the interior of words
Remark on the Recent Reform of Portuguese Orthography. VII
(e.g., proilirj coerente), even in those which conserve
the initial li justified by etymology when compounded
with a prefix. Thus the new orthography will be: haver,
hoje, homem, Jtonra, but: ontem, desumano, desonra, etc.
Instead of ph, f will be written: fotografo.
It is obvious, of course, that the doubled ss and rr
cannot be reduced to single s and r, as the pronun-
ciation would thereby be altered. Also the mm and nn
are conserved when the first m or n is nasal (e.g., em-
moldurar, ennervar).
For the accentuation, we have to distinguish, as
hitherto, by a graphical accent the tonical vowel of
those words which for want of some characteristic mark
might be confounded; e.g., sede, sede; gosto, m. t gosto, v.
Also those words ending by the generally atonic syllable
-em, -ens are marked by a " when this syllable is
tonical; e.g., contem contains (cf. contem they count),
porem however (cf. porem of por), armazem, armazens
magazine(s). ;> -
As the Reform admits though it does not pres-
cribe the vowels e and o to be written e and 6 wherever
they have the close pronunciation, it has been thought
convenient for the student, to accentuate them where
any doubt might arise, it being understood that the
tonical endings -oso and -or are always -oso and -or,
the latter presenting the following exceptions 1 : major,
suor, melhor, peor, maior, menor, where the o is pro-
nounced o, similar to the English a in "all."
These being the chief alterations, the remainder,
of a slighter nature, will be presented in a future
edition.
1 In sdror the ending -or is also or, but it is not tonical.
L. E.
VIII
Index.
First Part.
Pronunciation. Pa s e -
1. The Sounds of the Portuguese .... 1
2. Types 1
8. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet 2
4. Stress and Duration 8
5. Vowels . . . 3
6. Diphthongs 6
7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs .... 8
8. Triphthongs 8
9. Consonants 9
10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters . 11
11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their
Relation to the Port. Alphabet ... 12
12. Accentuation 13
13. Syllabication 14
14. Homonyms 15
15. Homographs 16
16. Abbreviations 17
17. Punctuation 18
1st Lesson. The Gender of the Noun and the Article 2024
Na Escola.
2nd The Plural of Substantives .... 2430
3rd The Address 3036
4th The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective 3640
5th The Auxiliary Verb estar 4046
Lisboa.
6th The Auxiliary Verb haver .... 4652
Os verbos auxiliares.
?th Employment and Concord of Tenses . 5259
Index. IX
Page.
8th Lesson. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs . . 59 64
Quintal e drvores.
Jardim e flores.
hordrio.
9th The Partitive Article 6468
Eefeiqoes.
.Qth The Complements and the most Frequent
Prepositions 6872
Numa loja.
1th The Attributive Adjective in Gender and
Number 7278
A visita.
2th The Position of the Attributive Ad-
jective 78-83
A habitagdo.
3th Comparison of the Adjective .... 8388
A trowada.
4 th The Absolute Comparative and Super-
lative 8893
Portugal.
5th The Numerals: I. Cardinal Numbers . 9399
A ligtio d'arithmtiica.
6th The Numerals: II. Ordinal Numbers . 99106
systema decimal ou mitrico.
7th The Numerals: III. Multiplicative Num-
bers 106111
Problemas de multiplicagao.
3th Regular Verbs: First Conjugation.
A. Simple Tenses 111120
Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.
) th Regular Verbs: First Conjugation. B. Com-
pound Tenses 120128
linho.
The Tower of Belem.
) th Pronominal or Reflective Verbs . . . 128 137
Alimentagao. SolicitaQdo d'um emprego.
The Foot and the Hand. The Egg
and the Nut.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations . 137146
The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.
X Index.
Page.
22rd Lesson. Phonetical and Orthographical Peculia-
rities of Otherwise Regular Verbs . . 146154
algodao. As pelles.
The Seamstress. The Tailor.
23rd Exercises on the Full Verbs . . . .154160
As batatas. As frutas; a lavra; a
sementeira ; a grade ; a monda
Conselhos duma mae etc.
vaqueiro.
24th On the Pronouns: Personal Pronouns . 161168
espiriheiro maldoso. cao e a
vacca. The Faithful Dogs.
25th On the Pronouns: Demonstrative and
Possessive Pronouns 168 174
A vibora e a cobra. mocho.
26th On the Pronouns: Interrogative and Re-
lative Pronouns 174 181
N'um album.
27th On the Pronouns: Indefinite Pronouns 182186
lido e a raposa. The Nut.
28th The Irregular Verbs 186194
cabrito e o lobo.
29th The Irregular Verbs (continued) . . . 195201
Annuncios. Building.
30th The Irregular Verbs of the Third Con-
jugation 201209
Carta. Eequerimentos.
31st Impersonal and Defective Verbs . . . 209216
Muu tempo. Annuncios. Correio.
32nd Verbs with a Double Participle . . . 216221
33rd The Adverbs , 221228
Os Pessegos. Soneto.
34th The Conjunctions 228236
A andorinha.
35th Interjections 236239
No theatro. Na rua.
Index.
XI
Second Part.
First Division: Flection.
1st Lesson. The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
Caule, franco ou haste.
2nd
1th
-,th
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued)
Vozes d'animaes.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns:
Compound Nouns
A Lusitdnia.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns .
Nuvens.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns
(continued;
Tomada de Santarem.
Use of the Article
Portugal continental e insular.
Use of the Article (continued) . . .
Portugal ultramarino.
Omission of the Article
Joao I.
Page.
240-246
246-255
255261
261-266
266270
271278
278284
284-291
Second Division: Syntax.
to Lesson. Congruence ......... 291296
Jodo I (continued).
10th Intransitive and Transitive Verbs. Com-
plements without Preposition . . . 296301
Tomada de Santarem.
11 th The Complement preceded by de and a 301307
A preposigao de.
12th Remarks on the Prepositions . . . 308313
A emigragao portuguesa.
13th Prepositions (continued): How to Ex-
press Certain English Prepositions . 313 320
automovel.
14th Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts
of Speech; Possessive Pronouns . . 321 324
Carlo ao Sr. G. P.
XII Index.
Page.
15th Lesson. Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns 324328
Trecho de Guerreiro e Monger.
16th Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns (continued) 328332
Dia no campo.
A Cigarra e a formiga.
17th Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns . . 332336
The Whistle.
trdbalho physico e mental.
18 th Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and
Participles ... ...... 336341
terremdto de Lisboa.
19th The Gerund and the Periphrastical Con-
jugation 341346
Brasil.
20th Tenses of the Indicative 346354
Extract from Portuguese History.
21st The Subjunctive Mood 354360
Passeio & Rivieira portuguesa.
22nd The Subjunctive Mood (continued) . . 360364
Dom Jodo de Castro.
23rd The Subjunctive Mood: Future Tense . 364368
Consiglieri Pedroso e o accordo luso-
brasileiro.
24th The Infinitive: I. General Use ... 368371
Hodrigues de Freitas.
25th II. Use of the Personal and the Im-
personal Forms of the Infinitive.
III. The Independent Infinitive . . 372374
rato. ledo e a lebre.
26th iv. The Dependent Infinitive (without
preposition) 374379
On Education of Children.
A ignorancia do povo portugues.
27th iv. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding de) 379382
Letter to a Friend.
A respiragao.
Index. XIII
Page.
28th Lesson. IV. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding a) . 382388
Women as Silkworm-breeders.
A Mulher portuguesa como serici-
cultora.
29th Construction 388-390
Preparation of Olive-oil.
Supplement 391405
English-Portuguese Vocabulary 406420
Portuguese-English Vocabulary 421457
XIV
Errata.
Page 5, Remark II, instead of border, read: bordar.
8, 1. 7 from below, instead of pvu, read : pi>u.
11, 1. 3 from above, instead of [ug'fajtus], read: [us'
17, 16 is to be added: "Paa = Fossa Serihoria.
40, 1. 6th, instead of Coimbra is, read: Coimbra was.
61, 1. 3 r d from below, inst. of tanto, read: tanta.
63, Pdlavras, inst. of irrdfa' 'etu, read: irrity'etu.
66, Palavras, inst. of Zetantar to get up, etc.
a mesa to rise, etc.
read: levantar a mesa to rise etc.
98, 1. 3 r( J from the end of the Exercise, inst. of As Por-
tugal . . . has, read : As Portugal had.
98, 1. 8 th of 39, inst. of so many hundreds, read: so many
tens, the next so many hundreds.
98, 1. 15th of 39, inst. of 106, read 105.
110, 1. 5th of 43, inst. of Twice five times five, read: Twice
the fivefold of five.
110, 1. 7th of 43, inst. of men where, read: men were.
135, title of 48, inst. of Alimentafd, read: AlimentaQao.
From the page 226 until the end of the 1st part the exercises
87-95 are to have the numbers of 92100.
Page 290, 1. 8, inst. of saltisfying, read: satisfying.
290, N 22, title, inst. of Jao, read: Joao.
353, 1. 3rd, i n8 t. O f 1583, read:
First Part,
Pronunciation.
1. The Sounds of the Portuguese.
The Portuguese orthography corresponds only im-
perfectly to the pronunciation. And there are signs
(as the til, the cedilla, the accents) and sounds (as the
nasal vowels, the lh, the nh) t which do not exist in the
English language. To give an idea of the Portuguese
pronunciation next to accuracy, we have had to recur to
a phonetic transcription and adopted that of the Asso-
ciation phonetique Internationale. In order to be easily
distinguished from the remaining text, the phonetic
signs are invariably put in parenthesis. Each of these
signs represents always the same sound, and each sound
is always given by the same figure. If you want to
acquire the most possible correctness in speaking the
Portuguese idiom, please to pay a careful attention to
the phonetics. Whenever you have an opportunity, let
the sounds be pronounced to you by a native of Lisbon,
the pronunciation of the Portuguese capital being the
one adopted for this grammar.
Be careful also in distinguishing voiced sounds
from dumb ones, in vowels as well as in consonants.
2. Types.
The Portuguese letters are equal to the English,
but their denomination is different for the most part.
The vowels and also some of the consonants have
several different values. In the alphabetic list here-
after we give their alphabetic value which mostly cor-
responds to their names:
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 1
2 Pronunciation.
Character. Name. Character. Name.
a a (like a in bar) p pe (as in pay)
}j b (aS in laij) Q ke (like the first syllable
> - yi x in kali)
c se ( s m say) r (er w (as in ere
d de ( in day) followed by a con-
/ . .*V sonant)
6 ? ..A 81 * air ' S (68)86 dike in English)
f (^^^**j* * ! te (as^ thirst syllable
without the initial d) ^ u ( as 00 )
* aga (dumb) v ye (as in wriw)
* i (ee in deep) w ^ dobrado
j ji (as in ^'ifir, but without (the English w>
^ k (the Tas^Lr) ^ C ^ S ( = Sn ^ s ^5 ^^ e
? (el)le (as in English) S >-
t \ II 1 erefifO (as in English).
M (em)me (as m English) y j=> &
/ \ 8 Z6 (as in English).
w (en)ne ( )
6 (like ai0 in Zaw)
Remark. The letter & is to be found in very few Por-
tuguese words, as tysto cyst; else (as also w) only in foreign
words.
8. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet.
1. The accents, which mark not only the tonical
accentuation, but also the colouring of a vowel, are
well to be distinguished from the French accents.
(a) The acute accent (') may be put upon any
vowel, conferring to it, besides the tonical accen-
tuation, an open, ringing sound: ma, si, alii, fwa+
bahu.
(b) The circumflex (*) gives to the (tonical) vowel
a dim and closed sound : chamdmos, sede, corte (cf. :
chamdmos, sede, corte).
(c) The grave accent f) is not obligatory. Where-
ever it is to be found (upon a, e or 0), it denotes
the open sound of an unaccented syllable (padeiro,
fregues, patetice, sbmente).
2. The cedilla ( b ) is placed under the letter c ($),
to which it gives the articulation of 5 before the vowels
a, o, u, where else the c would be pronounced like k:
louga, mopo, a$ude. (cf.: louca, moca, acudir).
Stress and Duration. Vowels. 3
3. The til (~) is a sign peculiar only to the Castilian
and the Portuguese languages. But being in the former
employed upon a consonant (n), it is found in the latter
only upon vowels and diphthongs, conferring nasality
to them: Id, mae, poo, pde (poi), mui. On the u it is
to be met with only in (the equally antiquated) mui
and muito (actually written only muito) ; it has altogether
disappeared from upon the i, being supplied by follow-
ing n or m: insua for isua, sim for si etc.
4. The apostrophe (') indicates that some vowel (e
or a, rarely an o) has been dropped: d'elle (de elle);
Sant' Anna (Santa Anna); Nun' Alvares (Nuno Alvares).
Formerly also the m of com was sometimes dropped.
(N.B. Actually the contraction of the elided words end-
ing in e is preferred to the apostrophe: delle, duma,
nesse, etc.)
5. The hyphen (-) unites two words to one idea:
agua-ardente brandy, mal-afortunado unhappy, bem-casado
well married, recem-chegado new-comer. N.B. These
words may be written in one (aguardente, etc.).
Remark. As for the (') employed in this grammar for
the prosodical accent, see 4.
4. Stress and Duration.
In the phonetics we indicate the prosodical accent
by an acute (') placed before the tonical syllable.
The vowels are of a middle length when having
the tonical accent; they are shorter before the accented
syllable and shorter still after it.
5. Vowels.
A has three chief sounds:
1. [a,] an open sound resembling the English far,
father, but with the throat less open and the tongue
less down: ma [ma], chave ['favd], caso ['~k&zu].
2. [a] a sound like the English a followed by w:
awe, saw. In Portuguese it is always followed by t or
u of the same syllable: mat [matj, mau [man].
3. [u] a close sound like a in bag or about. It is
tonical only before a nasal consonant: pan(n)o ['pvnu],
i*
4 Pronunciation.
lama f'lvmv], mariha ['mvyue] and in para ['pvruj and
cadaf'kvdvj; otherwise generally unaccented; ex.: lima
['Urn's], Europa [eu 'ropy], hater [by 'terj.
Remark. The e in the tonical diphthong ei, and when
followed by a prepalatal sound (x, ch, j, Ih, nh) has the same
sound: fecho f'fvfu], lei [lui], igrejaji'grvjv], espelho [tf-
f pvfiu], tenho [tvyiu] ; it is equally indicated by /#/.
IE in accented syllables has two different sounds:
1. [sj an open sound like ai in air or a in bare,
often indicated by an accent, as fe [fe] faith, se [sej
cathedral; prelo, prelo f'prelu] printing-press, sede, sede
[sefo] seat.
2. [e] a close sound (like ea in the English words
great, break); this sound may be indicated by the circum-
flex, as aldea [ai 'devj, rede [ 'rrefo], sede ['sefoj; comer
[ku'mer], perder [par'der].
3. [9] it is found short in unaccented open syllables
and before r in an unaccented syllable, if not final :
resoar, designar, perdido, like the e in matter; but in
ether f'eter], cadaver [Tee 'davsr], pi. cadaver es /7c#-
'davdrdf] the e is quite distinct, similar to very, but
more open. It is nearly inaudible between voiceless
consonants (repetir [rr9p(9)'tir]) and at the end of a
word, as lote ['lote], molde ['motddj, parte['partdj; while
at the beginning of a word it sounds like a short i
(== ee, phonetically^), as edade [i'dafo], emenda fi'mendv],
eleger [ifo'gerj; and still shorter fij in the terminal
syllable es (fazes ['faztf], deveres fdi'verifj) and before
cli (= sh) and the initial st, sq, sp: espago fef'pasuj,
estranho [if'trvyiu], esquadra fif'kwa&rvj, fechar [ft' Jar].
Remark. When in the middle of a word the e is fol-
lowed by a or 0, it is pronounced also like a short i: theatro
[ti'atru], deante [di'untd], peor [pi 'or], theologo [ti'dugu],
theoria [tiu'riv]. Also the conjunction e and is pronounced i,
when followed by a word beginning with a vowel.
4. see A, Remark.
J [i, i] sounds:
1. when long, like the English ee in been: riso
f'rrisu], estima fif'time], sentir [sen'tir] ;
2. short, it corresponds to the English i in gin,
gild: bilro ['bitrrul, viu [ f vm], virgula f'virgufej.
Vowels.
3. Before another vowel and not having the tonical
accent, it is very short and sounds nearly like the
English y: ocio ['osm] (but: macio [mv'siu]), inertia
[i'mrswj (but: vertia [vdr'tivj), rdio f'rramj (but:
sata sv'iv meia '
N.B. In those words containing two or more i- syl-
lables the last of which is stressed, only this one is pro-
nounced i (=- ee) while the preceding are pronounced
like voiceless e [d] : dividido [ddVd'didu] ; selicula [sd-
'likulv], divino [dy'vinu], This rule has various
exceptions.
O in accented syllables has two different sounds:
1. foj (6, o): an open sound like the o in nor, God,
short. When tonical it is a little longer and more
ringing than in unaccented syllables: cor [kor], avo
[e'vo], fora [forv] '; adoptar ft do' tar].
2. [o] (o, o, ou): a close sound as in lode, stone:
cor [kor], avo [v'vo]> lobo ['Itibu], grou [gro] '; solfar
[sol' far], colmaea fkot'masvj.
Remark 1. In northern Portugal the diphthong ou is
pronounced o-u, so that there is a difference between ougo
['ousuj I hear, and osso ['osuj bone, while these words are
similar in Lisbon as well as in Brazil.
Remark II. Before an I of the same accented or unac-
cented syllable, the o is generally close: solto f'sottu], colza
["kotev] ; voltear [voUi'ar] (exc.: volta [vtftv], volte ['&&?]
etc.). In open syllables and before r or s of the same syl-
lable. the unaccented o is pronounced u (= oo): barco f'barku],
moroso [mu 'rozu], border [bur 'dar], costura [kuf'turv].
Remark III. The definite article of the masculine
gender o, pi. os, always being unaccented, is pronounced u
(= oo is foot), us fufj; same pronunciation as for the con-
tractions of the article: dos, nos [duf, rntf], etc. N.B.: nos
( em os) is not to be confounded with the objective pronoun
nos (us), which corresponds to the subjective pronoun nds
[nofj we (cf. also vos [vof] you and vos [vuf] to you, you).
U.
1. [u] (u, u) sounds like oo in root, when ac-
cented: tu [tu], luva
6 Pronunciation.
2. (u, o) : It sounds like oo in foot when unaccented :
do [duj, disputar [dtfpu' tar] , lodo f'lo&uj.
N.B. Nearly every unaccented 0, if not nasal, is
pronounced u (cf. 0, Remark II.).
Remark. The u after a q and before a or o, is pro-
nounced like the English w: qual [Jurat]. It is the same
when at the end of a word, and after a voiceless consonant
the u meets with an o or a: vdcuo ['vakwu]. The u after
a g and before an e or i is mute. (Exc. : arguir [vrgu 'ir] and
derived words, unguento [ugu'entu], sanguento, etc., and some
others.) See also 10, end.
6. Diphthongs.
A. Falling Diphthongs.
Such diphthongs where the weight rests more upon
the first vowel than upon the second, are called falling
diphthongs. Their second vowel is either i or u.
1. Feeble /-sound.
a,i (ai) 1 ; Ex. : pat (pai or pae) father, like pie.
& (ei); rrs'if (reis) Portuguese copper-coins;
like a in rare, ai in fair.
vi (ai, ei); rrvif (reis) kings; a sound between
fair and way; almost identical
with the a of the diphthongised
a in late of the South of Eng-
land.
oi (6i> oi, oe); rroif (roes) lists; like oi in moist,
roisterer.
w (6i, oi): bot (boi) ox; same sound but with
a close o.
oiru (oiro or ouro) 2 gold ; same sound
but with a close o.
ui (ui); fu} (fui) I was, I went; like in ruin.
1 Here and in other places hereafter the phonetic sounds
are put in the first place, while the ortographical examples are
put in parenthesis.
2 The diphthong oi, not being terminal, may but for few
exceptions be supplied by ou (cf. 5, 0, Remark I.). In northern
Portugal the ow-sound is preferred, -while the south pronounces
oi or o.
Diphthongs.
a sound between
pouch and pause,
similar to the
German Haus
2. Feeble it-sound.
Ex.: pau (pau)
stick
mau (mau
or mao)
bad
seu (ceu or ceo) sky, the like
ai in mV (cf. 5, E 1).
breu (breu) tar, same sound
with a close c (cf. 5, E 2).
viw (WM,) he saw, in accor-
dance with the pronuncia-
tion of the simple vowels.
do(u)ru (Douro) 1 Douro, river
in Portugal.
B. Rising Diphthongs.
1. Feeble *-sound.
Such diphthongs where the weight rests upon the
second vowel, are called rising.
ia (ia or.ea); Ex.: d^'anu (diario) diary
vi'sidu (veado) hart
? (ie or ie); di'dv (dieta) diet
<i3 (io); m'i'oluf (miolos) brains
to (io); mi'olu (miolo) crumbs
iu (iu or eu) ; mi'udu (miudo or meudo)
small
(au or ao)
(eu or eo);
cw or
or io);
or ou (ou);
cf. 5, i 3
and a 1.
cf. 5, o
and u.
2. Feeble t*-sound.
wa (ua or oo); Ex.: mu'ar (muar) mule- . . in compound
words.
su'ar(suar) to sweat.
suar (soar) to sound.
ua (ua); ^'af (dual) dual,
we (we or oe,); sw'f^o (sueto) holiday.
mu 'fdv (moeda) coin.
ue (ue or oe): ru'er (roer) to gnaw.
pu'emv (poema) poem.
1 Nowadays written and pronounced only Douro (not Doiro).
Nor can the diphthong ou be supplied by oi in the following words :
ou or, ousar dare, omadia, ousado; outorgar, ouvir, ouvido, outubro,
ouco, couve, mouco, louco, and their derivatives, and never in a
verbal form e.g. comprou.
8 Pronunciation.
ui (ui or oi); Ex.: fu'ijiu (fuinJio) woodpecker.
mu'iyiu (moinho) mill.
7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs.
The nasal sound of a vowel is either indicated by
the til (s. 3, 3) or by placing m or n behind it. The
nasality of the vowel, especially when making part of
a diphthong, is not attainable without considerable
practice. It is not so pure and ringing as in French,
but rather squeezed. We shall try to approach the
sound by means of examples, as much as possible.
1. % (-a, an-, am-), %n before d or t, %m before b
or p, is the nasalised # (see 5, 3), almost alike to that
of pang: 'irma, 'santo, 'lampada.
2. e (en-, em-), en before d or t, em before b and
p, alike to that in length: 'tenro, 'lento, bem'posto, 'sendo,
em 'bora.
3. I (im, in; em-, en- as unaccented initial sounds):
alike to that in ring: fim, fins, findo, limpo.
4. o (om, on) alike to that in song, wrong: som,
onga.
5. u (um, un), alike to the German jung: urn, atum.
6. Nasal diphthongs with terminal feeble i or u.
(di, ae, em) ; Ex. : m^i (mdi or mae) | like the a in
mother \ pang, followed
~bv,i (bem) well ) by an i.
(oi, oe); pdi (pdi or pde) ] like the Q in
he ? UtS ^ i. song, followed
(dem); pdm (poem) they b ^ -
put
(ui); mfti (mui, mui) very (see 3, 3)
(do, am); pvu (pao) bread
(compram) they buy.
8. Triphthongs.
There are in Portuguese numerous triphthongs
which consist of a falling diphthong with preceding
feeble i or u. These latter vowels are never nasal,
even in nasal triphthongs.
Consonants. 9
Ex.: leais [h'aif], plural of leal [h'at] true; fieis
ff, P lural of ft el faithful; fieis [ft'wf] from fiar to
spin; miau [vn/tau] the mewing of the cat; poeira [pu-
dust; ledo [li'uu] lion, leoes [It'oif] lions.
9. Consonants.
1. Those Portuguese consonants which in their
denomination and pronunciation differ from the English,
have already been mentioned ( 2). F, &, m, n. p, t, v,
w are generally pronounced as in English.
2. As for the voiced consonants, they are very
carefully to be distinguished from the voiceless. Espe-
cially the ~b and the d which, standing between vowels
or between a vowel and an r, or being doubled, are
very soft (as, e.g., those letters in the English words
nob, lad), the b approaching the 0, and the d the voiced
English th in though; we indicate these letters so: 5, d.
Ex.: reboar frrdbu'str, nearly like rryvu'atrj; abbade
[v'fiatoj, addigao [vtfi's&uj. The b is mute when ter-
minal: Jacob fgv'koj.
3. The same as for the g, which sounds like the g
in give before a, o, u and consonants; and like g [%]
in gentle (but without the initial d) before e, i, y (or
rather like the g in agure): the terminal g [g] is soft
as in English (hug). If the g is to keep its g(ive)-souud
before e, i, y, a dumb u is put between the two letters
(cf. 5, U, Remark). Ex. : garfo ['g&rfu] fork, gume
['gumd] blade, gloria ['ghriv] glory, Gog [gs>g] ; gelo
C^elu] ice, gig [gif] chalk; guerraf'gtrirvj war; guiar
[gt'arj to guide.
4. The j has the pronunciation of the g before e,
i, y (the g in agure or the ,s- in pleasure] and is equally
represented by [$] : jd [3%] already, jejum [gd'j&J
fasting, joelho [gu'efiu] knee.
5. The initial I sounds like the English; when ter-
minal, it corresponds to the English U: falar [fu'Ur]
to speak; mal [mat] bad.
6. I united to a following "h (Ih) forms a sound
which corresponds to the Castilian U and may be com-
pared to the I and y in the combined English words
will you, e.g.: fttho. It is figured by [K].
10 ' Pronunciation.
7. A similar union forms the li with the n (nh)
figured by [yi] and pronounced like the Castilian n
in nino or the French gn in ligne: linha ['liyiv] line,
manhd [m^'jiv] morning. 1
8. As for the r, it must not be confounded with
the English vocal r (in far, further). Good Portuguese
speakers trill all r's, whether initial, medial, or terminal.
Only there is a difference in the energy employed with
the strongly rolled initial or doubled r and the weaker
r that is found after a consonant (not being , n or s)
between vowels or at the end of a syllable. We re-
present the former by rr and the latter by r. Ex.:
preto ['pretu] black; bravo f'bravuj brave; caro ["ka.ru]
dear; fior [florj flower; perto f'pertu] near; rei [rrei]
king; carro f'karruj carriage; bUro f'bitrruj bobbin;
honra ['drrvj honour; Israel [igrrv'd].
N.B. In some words the initial r is followed by a
mute h: rheuma ['rreumvj rheumatism ; Eheno ['rrenu]
Rhine.
9. S is pronounced like English s in such, silver.
[s] 1. at the beginning of a word and when
doubled. Ex.: servir [sdr'virj to serve; massa f'masvj.
2. after a consonant and before a vowel. Ex. :
cansar [kv'sar], arsenal [vrsd'nat], observar [obsdr'var].
Exc.: obsequio and derivatives, where it sounds soft:
[ofo ' ztkiu].
[z] like s in the English words loose, rose, when
between two vowels: luso ['luzu] ', rosa ['rrozv].
Exc.: after a prefix: resentir [msen'tir, presdgio [prt>-
'
/j7 before a voiced consonant: rasgo
lesmo
[f] At the end of a word before a pause, and be-
fore the consonants p, t, c, q, it sounds like English sh :
esperar [ifpd 'rarj, estd [if'ta,], escapa fifkapvj, esquerdo
1 In some words, as anhelo, inhibir, inhalar, inherente, iti-
hdspito irih&bil, enharmdnico, and others, where the n is part of a
prefix nh is pronounced like n; the h is mute.
Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters. 11
Bemark. The terminal [f] is changed into [z] when followed
by a vowel; Ex.: as aves [uz'avif]; and it' followed by a
voiced consonant, it is changed into [$] : os banhos [ug 'bvjius],
as rosas u '
10. X has various sounds. It is pronounced:
(a) [f] (= sh) at the beginning of a word: xadree
[fv'dref], xarope [fv'ropdj; generally in the middle of
the words: feixe ['Pnjiji sex ^ ['swftu] ;
(b) [ks] (= English x) in some words fixo f'fiksuj,
sexo f'seksuj;
(c) [s] in some words as auxilio [au'siUu], proximo
f'prostmu] ;
(d) [z] in some words as : exame [i 'gvntoj, exercicio
fizdr ' sisiu] ;
(e) [kf] (very rare): borax ['borvhfj;
(f) The prefix ex . ., when followed by a consonant,
is pronounced either [if] or [&!fj: expor [(tyfpor], ex-
pensas [(u)tfpesvf].
11. Z is pronounced like [z] in English zeal at
the beginning or in the middle of a word: zelo [' zdu];
fazer ffu'zerj; and like [f] at the end of a word: pea
fpefj, juiz [ 5 u'if] (cf. 9, Remark).
Eemark. In Brazil the terminal s and z are pronounced 5.
10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters.
1. The Ih, nh and rh have already been mentioned
in 9.
2. The h is still found in union with t (ih), where it
is mute (theatro [ti 'atruj), and with p (ph), where it
forms the sound f: apht(h)as ['aftuj thrush, photographo
ffo'togrrfuj.
3. Ph is mute before th: phthisica ['tiziku].
4. With the c (ch) it forms two sounds:
(a) [f]: chave ['fnvd], encher [i'fer], chilro [JitrruJ.
(b) [k] in words of Greek origin : chronica ['krwikv],
mdchina f'm&kinvj, monarcha [mu'narkvj.
5. The c is found compound also to t and a second
c, (ct, cc), where it is often mute: actual [atu'at], ac-
12
Pronunciation.
cento [u'sentu]; pacto ['paJctuJ, friccao [frik'suu]. It is
also mute after an initial s (sc): sceptro f'sftru], sciencia
6. The p is often mute before s and t (ps, pt): psalmo
f'satmu], adoptar [vfto'tar], prompto [prontu] ; ph is
mute before th: phthisica ['tistkej (cf. 3).
Remark. The vowels e and o, even when unaccented,
are open before the mute consonants c and p : director fdirs-
'tor], excepgao [(vjifsz'seuj ; while a is open before ct and pt
and in a few words before cc: activo [a'tivuj, aptidao [apti-
'dfru] ; accdo [a'suu], fracgao [fra(7c)'svu].
7. Doubled consonants are generally pronounced like
one (cf. 9, 2, 8 and 9): apparelJw [apv'refiu], matto
['matu], penna f'penv], commissao [kumi'svtij, fallar
[fu 'larj. Yet when, of two m's or 's, one belongs to a
prefix, it is pronounced with a nasal sound : emmalhar
ftmv'fiarj; ennovelar finu'vdlarj.
N.B. m is mute before n: gymndsio foi'naswu]) con-
demnar [kondd' nar] , somno f'sonuj.
8. As for the gu and qu see 5, w, Remark and
9, 3. In qu the u is mute before e or i: queda
[fadvj, quinMo [Ui'yivu]. Exc. : frequente ffrd'Jcwentd],
tranquitto [trv'Jcwihi] and derivatives, and also in some
scientific words. Before a and o it is sometimes mute:
quatorze [kvtorzd], quotisar fkuti' ' zar or kwuti'zarj.
11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their
Relation to the Portuguese Alphabet.
a, a, is
see 5
P
nh
&, o
9
0,
see 5
d, '9
9
P
P' PP
f, e, 9
5
r
-r-, -r
/>
9
rr
r-, rh-, -IT-
9, &
g( a ), g(u), g(r), -g
s
S', -ss-, (-)sc-, c(e),
etc. (see 9)
c(i), 9, -x
* ?, $
see 5
Jcs
-x-, -cs-
~k
9
2
z-, -s-, -x-
1 t
9
5
g(e), g(i); j, -s, -z
fi,
9
f .
x-, ch-; -s, -z
m
m, mm
t
t-, -tt-, th-; -ct, -pt-
n
n, nn
u
see 5
Accentuation. 13
* : Y-, -V- N.B. 1:
kiv : qu(a); qu(e), qu(i) -r signifies terminal r,
(rare) -r- medial sound,
v, e, t, r- initial .
o, u : see 7 N.B. 2: A letter in pa-
/ : after a vowel, stret- renthesis indicates that the
ches it one preceding has the pro-
: before a syllable, nunciation of the phoneti-
means the toni- cal sign only in this com-
cal accent. bination.
12. Accentuation.
1. Words of two or more syllables, ending by
a, e, o, have the stress generally on the penultimate
syllable: 'lama, 'vinte, cas'tello, anted' pado.
N.B. Another vowel (i, u or o), preceding those
vowels, does not form a diphthong, and is to be con-
sidered an independent syllable: 'lia, harmo'nia, 'crua,
'tua, ma'goa, 'broa.
2. Words ending in a consonant, a nasal vowel
or diphthong, or in i or u, generally bear the stress
on the last syllable; so, for instance, all the infinitives
(cha'mar, ven'dcr, inftu'ir); pa' pel, nacio'nal, ir'ma, ir-
'mao, ale'mdo, java'li, ba'hu. Principal exc. : the ad-
jectives ending in -vel (a'mavel, indefi'nivel) and some
in -il ('facil).
N.B. The s forming the plural of the nouns and
adjectives, or the termination of a verb, does not affect
the accentuation ('mesa, 'mesas; 'alto, 'altos; sa,'bias),
even when by the flection the last syllable is changed
into two: ta'ful, pi. ta'fues, in'gles, in'gleses; difficil,
difficeis.
3. Words with stress on the ante-penultimate syl-
lable are rarer and generally marked by a graphic ac-
cent: nitido, fotografo, comprdvamos; they are called
esdruxulas
4. A word consisting of many syllables frequently
has a secondary stress (marked thus: *) on a syllable
preceding the tonical, yet never upon one following
it. To this group belong (a) the adverbs formed of the
14 Pronunciation.
adjectives by adding the termination -mente (altlva'mente
haughtily); (b) the diminutives and augmentatives with
the intercalated letter -0-: cadeira' zinha small chair,
from cadeira; hbmemza'rrdo big man (from 'homem). In
such words it is the originally accented syllable which
has the secondary accent.
5. Atonic pronouns of only one syllable are added
to the verbs, melting together with them: sabe-lo (or
sabel-o), ver-nos, dar-lhe.
13. Syllabication.
1. Any vowel, whether accented or unaccented,
even nasal, may terminate a syllable.
2. Of the consonants, only the following ones may
do so: I, m, n, r, s, z. More rarely and only in scienti-
fic terms : p, c. k, b, g.
(Even here we meet words separated thus : corru-pgao, aprom-
ptar, au-gmentar, te-chnica, pra-gmatica, etc.)
3. Ih, nh must not be separated. They are found
only in the middle of a word and belong always to
the following vowel: mi-nha, ve-lho. An only apparent
exception form words from the Greek, as pkti-harmonica,
and from the Latin, as in-hibir, an-helar, in-Mspito, in-
habil, etc., where in- is a prefix (see p. 10, foot-note).
4. Not to be separated are the diphthongs and the
nasal syllables am, an, em, en, im, in, om, on, urn, un.
Vowels not forming diphthongs may be separated : ma-
gu-a-do.
5. A syllable may begin by one of the following
groups of consonants: pr-, br-, fr-, vr-, tr-, dr-, cr-,
gr-, cl-, gl-, pi-, U-, fl- (r or I with another preceding
consonant), and sc- (this only in foreign words).
N.B. There may also be read syllabications like:
comi-pgao, pra-gmatica, aprom-ptar,etc. (see 2), but as they
contradict the rules 1 and 5, given by the most learned
Portuguese phonetician, Mr. Goncalves Viana, they are
not to be imitated.
6. The consonantal combinations of st-, sp-, sph-,
spl-, spr- and sc- are found only in scientific or in
foreign words: sparadrapo, sphinx or sphince (pop.:
Homonyms.
15
esphinge); splenico, stylita, sciencia. (In genuine Portu-
guese or nationalised words they are always preceded
by e, spoken like a fugitive i, which with the following
,9 forms a syllable: espargo fif'pargu], estado, estilo, es-
casso, esplendor, espraiar) These groups cannot be se-
parated.
7. As for the consonantal gemination, the con-
sonants are distributed on two syllables: fer-renho, in-
nato, im-maculado, ap-parente, as-sistir, pel-les, ab~bade r
at-testar, dif-ficuldade.
14. Homonyms.
Homophonos [o'mofunufj.
There are a number of homonymical words in
Portuguese that is, words of equal sound and different
orthography.
Here some examples:
accento [v'sentu] accent
apregar [vprd'sar] to ap-
praise .
area ['aria] area
atestar [vtif tar] to fill up
to the top
bucho ['bufuj craw, maw
caga f'kasvj hunting, game
cegar [sd'garj to blind, to
dazzle
cella f'seluj cell
celleiro [sd'lwiru] granary
cem [sej hundred
assento seat
apressar to hurry
aria air
attestar to attest
buxo box-tree
cassa muslin
segar to mow
cerrar [sd'rrar] to shut
chamma ['femvj flame
concebo [ko'sebu] I under-
sella saddle
selleiro saddler
sem without
serrar to saw
chama he calls, call
com sebo with tallow
stand, I conceve
concelho [ko'svfttij council
condega [kdn'desvj willow-
basket
consigo fko'siguj I obtain
descripgao [difkri's&u] de-
scription
douto ['dotuj learned
conselho counsel
condessa countess
comsigo with(in) himself
discrigdo discretion
dou-to I give it you
16
Pronunciation.
ega ['esvj bier, cenotaph
hero, ['vraj ivy
maga f'masv] mace
pago ['pasu] palace
pello ['pelu] hair
pena ['penvj punishment,
pain
perdigao [prdi'suu] perdi-
tion
perfeito [pr'feitul perfect
rugo ['rrusuj grey
seio I'swuJ bosom
valle [vat] valley
essa that (one)
era was
massa paste
passo step
pelo = por o.
penna pen
predicgdo prediction
prefeito prefect
russo Russian
sei-o I know it
vale post-office order.
15. Homographs.
Homographos [o 'mstgrsfttfj.
A. Examples of Homographs with the same sound,
but different meaning.
a vista ['vifta] view, sight
o dado ['dadu] die
o eonto ['kontuj story
a conta ["kdntv] bill
a car a ['k&rvj face
a ferida ffi'riidv] wound
a conqitista [~ko'ltiftv] con-
quest
a saliida [sv'iiftv] issue
a alta ['attv] raising ; halt
a baixa fbattftoj decrease;
furlough; lower part of
the town (of Lisbon)
a aberta [v'berte] opening,
gap
aceito ft svitu] I accept
precise [prd 'siizu] I want
como f'JcomuJ I eat
entrc ['entrd] imper. of
entrar to enter
vista (pp. f. of ver to see)
dado given
conto I count
conta he (she) counts
cara (adj. f.) dear
ferida (pp. f. of ferir)
wounded
conquista (pp. f. of con-
querir) conquered
sahida (pp. f, of sahir)
gone out
alta (adj. f.) high
fiaixa (adj. f.) low
aberta (pp. f.) open
aceito accepted
preciso wanted
como as, like
entre between, among.
Abbreviations.
IB. Examples of Homographs with Different
Pronunciation and Meaning.
17
da [da:] give(s)
regia [rn'giv] imp. of reger
to reign
seria [sd'rivj cond. of ser
to be
governo [gu'vernu] govern-
ment
publico ['publiku] public
contrario ('kon'trariuj con-
trary
analise [v'ndizz] analysis
domino [domin 'o] domino
continuo [kon'tinuu] con-
tinual
concerto ['Jco'sertuJ concert
gosto ['goftu] taste
historia [if'tonv] history
presents [prd'zentdj present
da [dv] = de a of the
regia ['rreigwj adj. f. king-
ly, royal
seria [' svriu] adj. f. serious
governo [gu 'vernu] I govern
publico [pu 'blikuj I publish
contrario [Jcontrv 'riuj I con-
tradict
analise [wye 'li:0dj! analyse!
domino [du'mimu] I lord
continuo [konti 'nuuj I con-
tinue
concerto [ko'sertuj I mend
gosto [goftu] I like
historia [iftu'rivj he writes
history
presente [prd 'senfoj he
foresees.
16. Abbreviations.
Abreviaturas
ya jfi x cia = y ossa E xce i.
lencia Your
Excellence,
you
ya fle _ y ossa Merce
Your mercy/
you
= Fosse(abbr. of
ye
sr.
sr a
= sentior Mister,
Mr.
= senhora Mis-
tress, Mrs.
D., D a = Dom, Donna
S ta = Santa
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
S to , S. = Santo, Sao
Saint
dig mo = dignissimo
most worthy
ill mo , ill ma illustrissimo,
-a most il-
lustrious
ex mo , ex ma = excellentissi-
mo, -a most
excellent
Dr. = Doutor Doctor
P.E.F. =por especial
(addressing an fnvnr "hv PCS.
inclosed letter) / avo / DV
pecial fa-
vour
18
Pronunciation.
S. E. C. = sua ex ma casa, gr to , gr mo
(addressing a letter) here
m to = muito much,
very p. ex.
_ m te == .mente (see
12, 4) v. g.
att = attento respect-
ful(ly)
ven or , v or = venerador
venerator
cr do _ cr i a do servant
adm or = admirador ad- p a
mirer
gratis-
simo thank-
ful
por exemplo
for instance
= verbi gratia foT
instance
= a saber name-
ly? v ^ z -
= isto e that is
(to say)
= para for, to.
17. Punctuation.
Ponctuaqdo [pontuv '
1. The signs of punctuation are the same as in
English; they are called as follows:
. ponto (final) full stop;
, virgula comma;
; ponto e virgula semicolon ;
: dois pontos colon;
? ponto de interrogagao note
of interrogation;
! ponto de admiracao note
aspas or virgula do-
brada notes of quo-
tation ;
[:()] parenthese, -sis paren-
thesis ;
- hyphen or risca de unido-
hyphen;
* asterisco asterisk.
of exclamation;
risco or travessdo dash ' apostropho apostrophe.
. . . reticencAas points of
suspension or reti-
cence;
2. On the whole, the rules of punctuation do not
differ from the English. Before the conjunctions e-
(and) and ou (or), the comma is generally not em-
ployed; also not before a relative sentence. On the
other hand, elucidating adjectives and, frequently, ad-
verbs are separated by commas from their nouns or
verbs. When e or ou do not only add a particle, but
introduce an independent phrase, they are also pre-
ceded by a comma.
Punctuation. 19
Examples of Portuguese Punctuation:
Com bom vento, a canoa cacilheira atravessa o Tejo mais de-
sa do que os vapores.
Para o sen servi^o, ou para a rebocar em calma, a fragata
uma lancha que leva a reboque.
catraio e a mais pequena das embarca9oes que fazem ser-
190 not Tejo, e emprega-se ordinariamente DO transporte de passa-
jiros, e as vezes na pesca ao candeio. bote-fragata e uma
fragata pequena, que em geral transporta carga mais leve.
Onde houver pessoas, o pardal presume logo, como o rato,
que ha comida, e e ahi que elle esta bem, para comer sem grande
trabalho.
A cobra, pore'm, e inoffensiva . . .
A este respeito, contem-se coisas muito inter essantes ...
(Trindade Coelho.)
Eu, porem, observei-lhe que, sendp ess' outro artigo, na ver-
dade, notavel, elle, a meu juizo, estava incomplexo, e, insufficiente,
nao esgotava o assumpto. (Bruno.)
-*-
20
First Lesson. Li<jao primeira.
The Gender of the Noun and the Article.
genero dos substantivos e o artigo.
18. There are only two genders in Portuguese:
the masculine and the feminine; there is no neuter.
Those nouns which designate beings of masculine sex
(e.g., homem man, cavallo horse), are naturally also of
the masculine gender; while those which indicate beings
of feminine sex (e.g., mulher woman, egua mare), are
naturally of feminine gender. Neuter nouns are con-
ventionally ranged either amidst the masculine or the
feminine ones. Examples: mesa table, feminine; pais
country, partial sparrow, masculine.
19. The Portuguese language distinguishes the
gender, not only by the pronoun, but by the very
article; by:
(a) the definite article (o the 1 for the masculine
singular; a the 1 for the feminine singular), when there
is a definite person or thing spoken of amidst others
of the same kind;
(b) the indefinite article (urn a(n) for the mascu-
line, uma a(n) for the feminine), when we speak of an
indefinite person or thing among others of the same
kind (see 2 nd Lesson). Ex.: o homem the man; um
homem a man; a mulher the woman; uma mulher a
woman.
Remark. Before rei king there was generally used the
definite article el (of Spanish origin), when a reigning Por-
tuguese King was spoken of: El-Rei Dom Manuel II.
20. To signify the masculine sex (and gender)
and the feminine, the Portuguese language has various
ways:
1 The definite article the is consequently employed for the
two genders and even for the two numbers: o os, a as.
The Gender of the Noun and the Article.
21
((a) a different word (for persons nearly always):
em, mulher; frade monk, freira nun; cavallo, egua ;
touro bull, boi ox, vacca cow.
(b) a different termination e.g., pombo, pomba
n; mestre, mestra teacher; leitor, leitora reader.
21. In the latter case the feminine 1 is obtained
by the following rules:
1. Those nouns ending in -o (not being the second
vowel of a diphthong) change the -o into -a, ex. : filho,
filha child (= son and daughter); tio uncle tia aunt;
pombo, pomba.
Excep. diacono deacon, fern. : diaconisa deaconess.
2. Those ending in -do change the -do into -6a:
ledo lion, leoa lioness, abegdo head man-servant, abegoa
head maid-servant. --
The chief exceptions to this rule are: bardo baron,
baronesa; cidaddo citizen, cidadd; irmdo brother, irmd;
ladrdo thief, ladra; sultdo sultan, sultana; valentdo boaster,
valentona.
3. Those ending in -or (or) and -es (ez) add an a
for the feminine: senhor sir, senhora; leitor reader, leitora;
lavrador peasant, lavradora; ingles English, inglesa.
The chief exceptions are: actor actor, actriz; em-
baixador ambassador, embaixatriz; imperador emperor,
imperatriz; prior prior, prior esa.
Words. Palayras.
Isto ['iftuj 2 this (next to the
speaker)
sso f'isuj that (next to the
accosted)
aquillo [v'kiluj that (next to a
third person)
estefeftej, esta 2 this (one)
that (one)
esse, essa
aquelle,
aquella }
cd [kajj aqui here (next to the
[aldj speaker)
ahi [ui] there (next to
the accosted)
1 Also of the adjectives.
2 Isto, isso f aquillo are pronouns and consequently employed
independently (e.g. Que e isto? Isto e uma penna What is this?
This is a pen), while este, esse, aquelle are adjectives and employed
only with a noun clearly expressed or imagined (esta penna e
aquella. There is the same difference between este, esse, aquelle,
as between isto, isso, aquillo.
22
Lesson 1.
ali[u'li], Id [la], there (next to a | o chdo [u'fuu]
acold [isku 'lal third person) o banco [u'ft&ku]
the ground
the bench
i/y*
is (mostly an-
o gis [u'$if]
the chalk
swering to
o muro
the wall
what? or
[u'muru]
who?)
o tinteiro
the inkstand
estd ftf'ta]
is (mostly an-
[utrn'tviru]
swering to
o quadro preto
the blackboard
where?)
[u 'kwaffru-
eis [vtf] 2
pretu]
eis aqui
here is, this is
o lapis [u'lapif]
the lead-pencil
[vizis 'kij
o mappa
the map
eis ahi [vizis' i], there is
[u'mapis]
ali or acold
o caderno
the copy-book
que [fo, before
which, what (a)
[ukis 'd'ernu]
a vowel kij
que e [ki'sj ?
what is?
o menino
[umd 'ninu]
the boy
quern e [kui'ejs
onde 6 [ondi-
> who is?
o alumno [iw-
'lunuj
the pupil,
school-boy
'ej?
o lugar [ulu-
the place
onde estd
[ondiifta]
where is?
'garj
a mdi or mde
the mother
onde fica
[is 'mm]
[ondd'fikvj?
o rei [u'rrvi],
the king
tern [tUsi]
has (he, she, it)
El-rei [el-
o pae or pai
the father
'rrv}]
[upatj
a rainha
the queen
o mestre
[v'rnsiyu]
[u 'meftrdj
a escola
the school
o professor
the teacher
[vif'kolv]
[u'prufd-
a penna
the pen
'sorj ,
[is 'pews]
a mestra
a professora
the (female)
teacher or
governess
a tinta [is 'tint's]
a cadeira [vkv-
' fair "s]
the ink
the chair
o livro [u'livruj
the book
a caneta [vkv-
the penholder
o tecto [u'tstu]
the ceiling
'netis]
1 E, estd e f fica mean is, but they are very clearly to be
distinguished: E marks a quality inherent to a person or an object
(ex. : o pae e urn homem, e bom [good]), or the place of a person
or thing that it cannot or not easily be removed from (ex.: a es-
cola e aqui). Esta marks a passing or casual quality (ex. : o pae
estd doente [ill]); or the staying of somebody or something on a
spot that he (or it) can be easily removed from (ex.: o livro estd
na mesa ; a mesa estd na aula. Fica is employed to designate the
place appointed to something (rarely to somebody), ex.: a porta
fica perto (near) da janella. Sometimes you may doubt whether
to employ fica or estd or even estd or e ; there are cases where you
may indifferently employ the one or the other. (See 5th Lesson.)
2 Eis aqui or simply eis; also aqui e or (less correctly)
estd (cf. l ).
The Gender of the Noun and the Article.
23
parede fa pie- the wall
refo]
cidade [vsi- the town
'lozu] the slate
rua rruvj the street
esponja [vif- the sponge
lousa [
fr
aporta[u'portu] the door
a janella [v;$u- the window
'nelvj
a aula [u'aulu] the school-
room, the
class
a escola [uif- the school
yes, no
and ; or
too, also.
sim, nao
e, ou
tambem [tum-
a mesa ['mezu] the table
a menina the girl
a alumna the school-girl,
the pupil
tm [vi, i] in, on, at, contracted with the following article or de-
monstrative pronoun into no, na, rium, riuma, riisto, riisso,
n'este, etc. (or num, nisto, etc.).
de [dd] of, from, contracted with the following article or demon-
strative pronoun into do, da, d'um, d'uma, d'isto, d'isso, d'este,
etc. (or dum, deste, etc.), is equivalent to our genitive form.
[v] at, to, contr. with the following def. article or aquelle into
ao, a, aquelle, aquella, etc., is equivalent to our dative.
1. Exercicio. Leitura e versa o.
Na escola.
Aqui 6 1 a escola. Onde fica 1 (or e) a aula? Eis aqui 2 a
aula. Onde esta 1 o professor? professor esta na cadeira.
Onde e (or fica) o lugar do alumno ? lugar do alumno ou
da alumna 6 (or fica) ali no banco. Quern tern o giz? mestre
tern o giz e a esponja. Que e isto? Isso 3 1 o quadro preto. Que
e" isso? Isto e o mappa. E que e aquillo? Aquillo e o tecto.
2. Exercise.
Where is the window? The window is in the wall.
Has the reader the book ? The book is on the table. There
is a lead-pencil on the ground. Where is the copy-book of
the school-boy? The copy-book is on the chair of the teacher.
Who is that man ? That man is the head man-servant of the
baron. Has the daughter of the baroness a governess? Yes,
and the friend of the girl has also a governess. Where is
the inkstand? The inkstand is on the table. The pen-
holder too is on the table. Who is there? The father of
the boy is there. Who is at (a) the door of the school-room?
The pupil of the teacher is at the door. Is here the place
of the boy? Yes, here on the bench.
Conversation.
Quern 6 esse menino?
E quern 6 o professor d'esta
aula?
Conversac,ao.
E (He is) um alumno da aula.
E um cidadao d'esta cidade.
1 See note 1 of p. 22.
2 See note 2 of p. 22.
24 Lesson 2.
Que rua e esta? Esta e a rua do Abe.
Onde e (or fica) a escola? A escola e" (or fica) aqui.
Tern o menino um lapiz? Sim, eis um lapiz e uma ca-
neta.
(0 professor apontara para os objectos de que fala ou pegara
nelles, emquanto dirigir as seguintes ou semelhantes perguntas ao
alumno) :
JP. Que 6 isto? E. Isso e a me~sa. Isso 6 o giz. Isso e" o
quadro preto, etc.
P. Que 6 isso? E. Isto 6 o livro. Isto e a penna. Isto
e a cane"ta, etc.
P. Que e aquillo ? R. Aquillo e" o tecto, a porta, a janella,
o mappa, a parede, etc.
(The same exercise to be continued for all objects already
mentioned.)
Second Lesson. Licjao segunda.
The Plural of Substantives. 1
A formagao do plural nos substantives.
22. All nouns ending in a vowel or diphthong
(except -do) or in -n form the plural by adding -s, thus:
o banco the bench os buncos the benches
a janella the window as janellas the windows
o pae (or pai) the father ospaes the fathers, the parents
a mde (or mdi) the mother as mdes the mothers
o dia z the day 05 dias the days
a irmd [vir'mv] the sister as irmas the sisters
o dolmen [' udtfmen] the barrow os dolmens the barrows.
23. Nouns ending in -m change this letter into
-n before taking the -s of the plural:
o homem [u'dmvi] the man os homens the men
o jar dim [ugvr'dl] the garden os jar dins the gardens
o som [u'soj the sound os sons the sounds
um [u] a, one uns some, any.
24. Nouns terminating in -ao distinguish two
chief classes:
1 The rules given for the formation of the plural of the
noun are applied also to the adjective.
2 Those words ending in a are generally of the feminine
gender, but there are exceptions e.g., did, gramma, monarcha,
dilemma, patriarcha, clima (dimatej, drama, ihema, and others
derived from the Greek.
The Plural of Substantives. 25
(a) those where this termination is not accented
take simply an s:
o orfdo or orphdo ['vrfvu] os orfaos the orphans
the orphan
a bengdo['besSu] J the blessing as bengdos the blessings.
(b) those where this termination is accented may
be divided into three subdivisions:
(a) such as change -do into -dos (rare)
(p) -do -des (rarer still)
(f) -do - -5es.
(a) To the first class belong the following sub-
stantives :
o irmdo the brother os irmdos the brothers, the
brethren
o cidaddo the citizen os cidaddos the citizens
o christdo [krif'tvu] the os christdos the Christians
Christian
o cortesao [kurtd svu] the cour- os cortesdos the courtiers
tier
o villdo [vi'lvu] the peasant, osvilldos the peasants, villains
villain
o chdo /T^w/.the ground os chaos the grounds
a mao [men] the hand as mdos the hands.
((3) To the second class belong the following:
o cdo [kvu] the dog os cues [kvij] the dogs
o pao [pvu] the bread, the os paes [p&lf] the loaves
loaf
o alemdo [vld'mvu] the Ger- os alemdes [vld'mvif] the Ger-
man mans
o capitdo [kvpi'tvu] the cap- os capitaes [kvpi'tvif] the
-tain captains
o escrivdo [tfkri'vvu] the clerk os escrivdes ['tfkri'vuif] the
of the court clerks of the court.
(Y) Most substantives ending in -ao (among these
all abstract nouns ending in -do) form their plural by
changing -ao in -des, as:
o coragdo [Jcwe 'svu] the heart, o aldedo the peasant, os aldeoes 2
os coragoes [kurv'sotf] a acgdo the action, as acgoes
o lido the lion, os Hoes a divisdo the division, as di-
o can-do the song, os cangoes visoes
o meldo the melon, os meloes a ligdo the lesson, as UgSes.
1 bengao may also be accented on its termination.
2 aldedo [aldi'vuj may form the plural in aldeaos or aldeoes.
26 Lesson 2.
25. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in -r or -s or
-s add -es in the plural, as:
o mar [mar] the sea, os a paz [paf] peace, pases
mares [manf] [p***fj
o mes /we// the month, meses a flor [flor] flower, flores
o rapaz [rrv'paf] the boy, a mullier [mu'fier] woman,
rapazes mulheres women.
o portugues [purtu'guefj the superior [supdri'or] superior
Portuguese, Portugueses (sub. and adj.).
N.B. Many words may be written with an -s or a
-*, as : mes or me#, lapis (pencil) or lapis, ingles or ingles,
etc.; but nowadays the -s is preferred to the -s.
26. Words (nouns and adjectives) ending in ac-
cented -al, -ol, -ul, change the letter -I into -es:
o animal [vni'mal] the ani- os animaes [vni'maif]
mal
o sol [sol] the sun os soes ['sotf]
o taful [tv'ful] the gambler os tafues [tu'fuij]
geral [gd'ral] general geraes fez'raif]
azul [v'zul] blue azues [v'zutfj.
Exception. mal the evil; o consul fkosul] the consul;
a, cal [kal] form their plural by adding -es: os males, os con-
sules, as coles. real [rri'al] the ree (unit of the Por-
tuguese coin), forms the plural os reis [uz'rreif].
27. Nouns ending in -el or unaccented 41 change
these letters into -eis. N.B. If the termination -el
which is always pronounced [tf] is accented, -eis is
pronounced [eijj; if not accented, it is [vifj.
papel [pv'psl] the paper papeis [pv'peif]
o tonnel [tu 'net] the barrel tonneis [tu '
o tunnel ['lunei] the tunnel tunnels
agradavel [vgrv'davd] agree- agradaveis
able
reptil f'rrsptil] reptile reptis 1
fdcil ['fasti] easy fdceis
dijficil [dd'fisil] difficult difficeis
textil ['tviftil] textile texteis 1 .
1 Textil (with the accent on the first syllable) has the scien-
tifical plural-form: texteis, and the popular form: textis. Reptil
(scientifical form ['rrsptil], popular form: [rrsp'tilf) forms the
plural in reptis [rrtp'tif], instead of reptis [ 'rreptifj, as would be
correct.
The Plural of Substantives.
27
Exception. o mel honey, forms meles; o fel gall, bill,
las no plural.
28. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in accented
change the letter -I into -s, as:
funil [fu'nii] the funnel funis [fu'nif]
burril [bu'rrtt] the chisel burris
" [sd'vtt] civil (adj.) civis. a
29. Nouns ending in -s preceded by an un-
accented vowel or falling diphthong, do not change in
the plural: o(s) alferes [at'ferif] lieutenant(s) ; o(s) lapis
f'UpifJ pencil(s); simples simple.
Exception. o calls ['kalij] cup, calyx, glass, pi. calls or
calices; deus ['deufj god, deuses [deuztf].
30. Some substantives are only used in the
plural, as:
as calgas ["kalsvf] the trousers
as ceroulas [39 'rolvf] the dra-
wers
as tenazes [td'naztf] the tongs
os arredores [arrd'donf] the
os generos ['gendruf] the vic-
tuals
as fontes ['font?/] the temples
as costas [koftvf] the back
os dculos ['okuluf] the spec-
environs tacles.
Rule. As already mentioned, the adjective follows
the same rules as the noun, as for the feminine and
plural forms; so it agrees with the word qualified by it,
in gender and number, as:
o homem e alto the man is tall
a torre e alta the spire is high
as torres sao alias the spires are high.
31. Present Tense (Presente) of ter to have.
Eu tenho [eu'twyo] I have
tu tens [tu 'tm.Jj thou hast
die tern [elz'tvt] he has
etta tern [dv't&i] she has
nos temos [nof'temuf] we
have
v6s tendes [vof'tendifj you
have
elles teem [eltf'tvtvi] they
(masc.) have
ellas teem [elvf't$t$i] they
(fern.) have
tenho (eu)? have I?
tens (tu)? hast thou?
tern (elle)? has he?
tern (ella)? has she?
temos (nos) ? have we ?
tendes (v6s)? have you?
teem (elles) ?have they? (masc.)
teem (ellas) ? have they (fern.).
28
Lesson 2.
Eu nao tenho I have not, etc.
Nao tenho eu? have I not? etc.
Rule. The negative nao is put before the verb.
Remark. The conjunctive personal pronoun may be
omitted. Yet it must be employed: 1. when it has the em-
phasis e.g., eu (e que) tenho; 2. to avoid a misunderstand-
ing; 3. when necessary to the harmony of the phrase. In
the interrogative form it is put after the verb, but may also
stand before it.
N.B. As for you have, etc., see the following
lesson.
Palavras.
Men, minha my o sogro f'sogru] the father-in-
['meu, miyiis] law
seu, sua ['seu, his, her, its, a sogra ['sogre] the mother-in-
suv] your law
the lecturing-
desk
the prince
the princess
the reading
exercise
translation,
version
the heir
the heiress
the gentleman
the gentlewo-
man, the lady
the grand-
father
the grand-
mother
the dog
the bitch
the boy
the girl, the
young wo man
also.
dois,duas['doif, two
a cathedra
f dJ]
["katdftru]
quanta I kwvntu], how much?
o principe
quanta ?
['pristyd]
quantos f quantas how many ?
tres [tref] three
a princesa
[pri'sezu]
quatrof'JcwatruJ four
a leitura [lui-
cinco ['slTcu]
five
'turvj
o pe [u'ps]
the foot
a versdo [vdr-
o dedo [u&e&u]
the finger, the
'STSU]
toe
o herdeiro [ir-
o brago [u 'brasu
/ the arm
'dviru]
estes, estas
these
a herdeira
esses, essas
those
fir 'd#m?7
aquelles,aquellas those (cf. p. 21,
o fidalgo
footnote 2 )
[fi 'ffalgu]
cada [lus&ie]
each
a fidalqa
nao [nvu]
no, not
[fi'&algv]
sao favuj
o avo /# 'voj
estao ftf'tuu]
are
algum fai'guj
a av6 [v'vo]
alguma [al-
gumv]
alguns [al'gufj
some, any
o cao [k'BuJ
algumas [ai-
a cadella [kv-
gumuf]
'fclu]
ha [a]
there is, there
o rapaz
are
a rapariga
velho [vsfiu,
old, aged
[rrepv 'rigv]
vvfiu]
tambem [turn-
Rule. The possessive adjectives are generally pre-
ceded by the article, if the noun is not a title of re-
The Plural of Substantives.
29
tionship, in which case the article is generally
dtted. The article is dropped also at addressing per-
ms. Ex. : o meu lapis, a sua penna; but meu pae,
sua mde; my good friend 1
3. Exercicio. Leitura e versao.
Meu pai tern dois filhos e duas filhas. Seu sogro e um
homem velho, sua sogra 6 uma mulher velha. Na aula ha
uma cathedra, dois bancos, duas janellas e uma mesa. Na me"sa
ha uma esponja, tres canetas e quatro lapis. Os meus cadernos
estao tambem na msa. Tenho [um] avo e [uma] avo.
mestre 6 portugues. francos e um valentao. principe 6
o filho do rei e da rainha. fidalgo e o herdeiro do seu amigo.
Onde esta o cao do ingles? Esta ali no chao.
4. Exercise.
Translation.
I have two hands. Each hand has five fingers. We
have also two feet, and each foot has also five toes. These
are my copy-books and my pens. Is this your lead-pencil?
No, it is not 1 ; it is the pencil of my father. My mother's
father-in-law (= The father-in-law of my mother) is my
grandfather, and her mother-in-law is my grandmother.
These girls and those boys are pupils of my master. Have
you any brothers? Yes, I have three brothers; they are
in the garden. The princes are the sons of the king and
the queen. Those men are aged. They are German captains.
The English, the Portuguese, and the Germans are Christians.
There are four dogs in the street. Have we a map in the
school-room? Yes r there is a map on the wall.
Conversa<jao.
Tern o menino uma lousa?
Ha uma esponja?
Quantos alumnos ha aqui?
Quantos ha em cada banco?
Onde esta o menino Carlos
(Charles)?
Onde fica a porta?
Ha tint a no tinteiro?
Que tens tu ahi?
Sim, tenho uma lousa e dois
cadernos.
Nao ha esponja nesta aula.
Ha cinco alumnos e tr6s
alumnas.
Ha um em cada banco.
Esta na rua.
A porta fica acola.
Ha 2 , sim, senhor.
Eu tenho alguns meloes.
The impersonal it is is rendered by ^ without a pronoun.
2 The Portuguese generally answers by employing the same
verb as in the question; if the latter contains a compound form,
he generally employs in the answer only the auxiliary verb. Ex.:
Tern tido sorte? Have you had good luck? Tenho Yes, I have.
30 Lesson 3.
Isto e" uma m6sa. Isto 6 urn banco. Isso & a porta
da aula. Isso 6" o caderno do menino. Aquillo e a
cathedra do professor. A cadeira tern quatro pes 7 .
elle esta no chao. papel esta na mesa. Ha cinco
rapazes na classe. Cada rapaz tern dois lapis.
professor (apontando o objecto): Que e isto?, isso?,
aquillo?
alumno (apontando o objecto) : Isto e o meu caderno,
a minha penna; isso e o seu livro; aquillo e o
lapis do menino Carlos, etc.
professor: Onde esta o banco? Onde fica a porta r a
janella? etc. Que tern o menino?, a cadeira?, a,
m6sa?, etc. Que temos nos?, etc.
(The same exercise to be continued for all objects and forms
already mentioned.)
Third Lesson. Ligao terceira.
The Address. tratamento [trvfe'mentuj.
The Yerb ter to have.
32. The English address "you" is given in
Portuguese by different expressions:
(a) Mostly it is not expressed at all: Tern tempo?
Have you time? Ndo tens lugar? Have you no place?
Esta doente? Are you ill? Pode dieer-me . . .? Can
you tell me . . . ?
(b) You is rendered by the state or title of the
person addressed: senhor diz-me You tell me. A
senhora quer sentar-se? Will you sit down? Qual e a
opinido do senhor Doutor? Doctor, what is your opinion?
sr. Conde (count) deseja passar? Do you wish to pass,
sir? pae (a mde) que diz? What do you say, father
(mother)? Que manda o senhor patrao (principal)? What
do you command? meu amigo nao vd Id don't (you)
go there, my friend! viziriho (o menino) como esta?
Neighbour (my boy), are you well? A prima quando
vae? When shall you go, my cousin?
(c) You may be rendered by the name of a person:
Carlos jd foi ? Charles, did you already go there?
The Address. 31
disse a Maria? Mary, didn't you say? It is to
be considered, that with gentlemen the family name
(sometimes also the Christian name) is employed directly
after senhor, while with ladies only the Christian name
is used, but preceded by senMra Dona (D a ). sr.
(Antonio) Correa d'OUveira escreveu um novo poema ? Have
you written a new poem, Mr. d'Oliveira? Tern (uma)
creada a sr a D a Maria? Have you a maid-servant, Mrs.
(or Miss) Mary? Upon country people or person of low
condition, the title Dona is not bestowed.
Remark. In addressing somebody, the Portuguese general-
ly summons him by an introductory d/ (oh!).
(d) You must be rendered by Vossa Excellencia
(V a E a ) [vosvtfsz'lensw] in speaking to persons of rank,
especially to ladies and to strangers. This form may
be abbreviated toVossencia [vo'sesw].
N.B. In Brazil these forms (d) are not usual; they
are substituted by:
(e) Vossa Merce (V a Me) [wsu mw'se]. Your
grace, a title given in Portugal to lower people, maid-
servants, etc. This form may be abbreviated to:
(f) Vosse (V*) [vo'sej, used for men-servants,
etc.; in familiar conversation it is also used among
gentlemen.
(g) In commercial correspondence there is still the
now antiquated Vossa Senhoria fvoss siyu'rve], your
honour, to be found (abr. : V a Sr a ).
Remarks. 1. With all these addresses above mentioned
the verb is to be employed in the third person e.g., V a Ex a
tern or e . . ., V as Ex as teem or sao ; 2. as already said, you
need not employ the address at every verb. If on the one hand
it would not be polite to dispense with it, a too frequent em-
ployment would be heavy. 3. The pronoun M is used only
in familiar treatment and may be altogether avoided by
foreigners. 4. The pronoun ws, if not taken in the plural
(and even here it is better to substitute it by the third
person), is antiquated and only tfsed in pathos, at prayers,
and in solemn allocution, for instance, to the king.
32 Lesson 3.
33. The verb ter to have. 1
Present participle (participio presente): tendo having.
Past participle (participio passado) tido: f'tiduj had.
Indicative (Indicative).
Present Tense (Presente).
(See 2 nd Lesson.)
Imperfect Tense (Preterito imperfeito).
Eu tiriha ['tiyiv] I had nds tinhamos ['tinvmuf] we
tu tirihas you had (thou hadst) had
die, ella tinha he, she, it, had vos tinheis ['tinvtf] you had
elles tinham ['tiyivu] they had.
Perfect Tense (Preterito perfeito).
Eu live ['tivd] I have got, I nosiivcmos [ti'vemuj] we have
had got
tu tiveste [ti'vsftd] you have vos tivestes [ti 'veft9f] you have
got got
elle, ella teve ['tev*] he, she, elles, ellas tiveram [ti'vervu]
it has got they have got.
Present Perfect (Preterito composto).
Eu tenho tido I have had
tu tens tido you have had, etc.
Pluperfect (Mais-que-perfeito).
Eu tiriha tido I had had
tu tinhas tido you had had, etc.
Future (Futuro).
Eu terei fa'rvi] I shall have nds teremos we shall have
. , , / thou wilt \ , v6s tereis you will have
1 \ you will / L elles, ellas terao they will
ette t ella terd he, she, it will have,
have
1 We hesitated to give so early, in this lesson, the whole verb
ter, successively followed by the other auxiliary verbs ser, estar,
haver; but as these verbs cannot be dispensed with to form even
the simplest phrase, and as experience taught us that a summary
arrangement impresses more easily and lastingly, we resolved to do
so. Yet the student is not supposed to learn at once all the verbal
forms, so as to master them, as, indeed, these verbs with their
resemblances and differences constitute one of the greatest diffi-
culties of the Portuguese language for the foreigner. But he is ear-
nestly requested not to put these lessons aside before having at-
tained an absolute understanding of the meaning and employment
of the auxiliary verbs.
The Address. 33
Future Perfect (Futuro perfeito).
Eu terei tido I shall have had.
Conditional (Conditional).
Eu teria [td 'riv] I should elle, ella teria he, she, it would
have have
. | thou wouldst \ , nos teriamos we should have
Unas ^ you wou i ( j I ' vos terieis you would have
elles teriam they would have.
Conditional Perfect (Conditional perfeito}.
Eu teria tido I should have had.
Subjunctive (Conjunctiva). 1
Presente.
Eu tenha I have nos tenhdmos we have
tu tenhas you have vos tenhais you have
elle tenha he have elles tenham they have.
Imperfeito.
(Se) eu tivesse [ti'vesd] (if) (Se) nostivessemosfti'vesdmuf]
I had (if) we had
(Se) tu tivesses (if) you had (Se) vds tivesseis (if) you had
elle tivesse (if) he had elles tivessem (if) they had.
Futuro.
eu tiver [ti'ver] if (or when) I am to have or: if
tu tiver es (or when) I shall have, etc.
elle tiver
n6s tivermos [li'vsrmuf J
vos tiverdes
elles tiverem.
Personal Infinitive. Infinit(iv)o pessoal.
(Para) eu ter that 1 may have, to have (I)
tu teres you (you)
elle ter he (he)
nos termos we (etc.)
vds terdes you
elles terem they
Imperative (Imperative).
Tern (tu); tende (vos); tenha ndo tenhas (tu); nao tenhais;
(V*) have ndo tenha(m) (V*( s >) do not
have.
1 The Subjunctive Moods in Lessons 37 may be only read
over here, while well learned later on.
Portuguese Conversation- Grammar. 3
34
Lesson 3.
Remark. Ter que or ter de indicates necessity:
Tenho de Id ir I must go there.
Tens que fazer a tua obrigagao you must do your duty*
In the same manner are conjugated the compound
Yerbs, as :
abster-se to abstain, to for- entreter to entertain
bear manter to maintain
ater to stick to obter to obtain
conter to contain reter to retain
deter to detain suster to sustain.
Palavras.
A drvore the tree
o chd [fa] the tea
['arvurdj
o pudim [pu'&l] the pudding
a drvore fru- the fruit-tree
o pastel [pvj^tef] the pie
ctifera [fru-
a batata [bv- the potato
'tifdrvj
'tatvj
afructa['frutie] the fruit
a pimenta [pi- the pepper
(eatable)
'mentis]
o fructo [' 'frutuj the fruit (in
o sal [sal] the salt
general)
o vinho ['vijtu] the wine
andado [vn- \
o pdo [puuj the bread
'da&u] > gone
a carne [karndj the meat
ido ['iffu]
a volataria the poultry
ir [ir] to go
[vulvtu f riu]
asaude [se'u&d] the health
voltar [vol'tarj to return
a caga ['kasvj the game
a dgua ['agwvj the water
a carta ['kartvj the letter
a agrwrt ardente the brandy
a noticia [nu- the news
/r 'dent&J
'tisfvj
o pato ['patu] the duck
o trabalho [tru- the work,
o copo ['k-jpuj the glass
'baftu] trouble
o dinheiro [di- the money
por muito tempo for a long time
' tyveiru]
[pur muttu
o chocolate the chocolate
'tempuj
[fuku'latdj
ficar [fi'karj to stay
quando [kwvn- whenever
a casa ["kazv] the house
duj (algum
em casa at home
dia)
aordem,['ord3i] the order
precisar [prdsi- to want
nenhum [ni'jiu/ none
/ 7
zar]
o assucar the sugar
o jantar [gvn- the dinner
[v'sukarj
'ia;-7
o leite [luitd] the milk
o caldo ['kaiduj the broth
o queijo ['kviguj the cheese
o arroz [v'rrof] the rice
a manteiga the butter
a cerveja [sdr- the beer
o ovo ['ovu, pi. the egg
'ovuf]
a gaveta [g's- the drawer^
Wftf/
Rule. The nouns of material, taken in a partitive
and indefinite sense, are, as in English, used without
the article or a preposition: Tenlio pao I have (some)
bread. But: Tenho urn pouco de pao I have a little
bread.
5. Exercicio. Leitnra e versao.
6 menino, que tern na mao? Tenho uma canSta, Nao
tern tambem um lapis? Nao tenho. sr. vizinho tern um
cao? Tenho dois caes. Nao tinha meu Amigo (um) jardim
com algumas flores? Tinha, sim, senhor, e ainda tenho. Se
tivesse arvores fructiferas, tambem teria fructa. Tern a menina
andado a escola nestes dias? Nao tenho ido, tenho andado
(or estado) doente. Quando tiver saiide, terei muito gosto em
voltar a aula. Teve V a . Ex a . uma carta da sua amiga? Tive
hontem. Tenho tido noticias d'ella (from her) em cada m6s.
Temos tido muito trabalho, para termos uma creada. Agora
teem? Temos, mas nao a (her) teremos por muito tempo.
Nao tendo ordem para la ires, teras de (to) ficar em casa.
6. Exercise,
Have you some fruit, my friend? I have none. She
has the sugar. They have the milk. We had the cheese.
You had the butter. I shall have eggs. He will have tea.
We shall have a pudding. You will have a pie. They had
no potatoes. He has had pepper and salt. Had you some
wine? Will you have butter and cheese ? I shall have bread
and meat. The boy has -soup and meat. I shall have no
poultry, but I shall have game. Your horse will have bread
and brandy. Shall you have a duck? My daughter would
have a glass of milk. If you had money, you would have
chocolate. Whenever we are to have money, we shall have
everything we want fludo quanta precisarmos) .
Conversa^ao.
Que temos nos nesta msa?
Terao os rapazes pao e leite?
Nao teve V- queijo esta
manha ?
Nao terei eu carne de boi e
vinho para o meu jantar?
Onde tern a sua penna e a
caneta?
Nao teve ainda caldo com
arroz ?
Temos uma penna, tinta e
papel.
Nao, elles terao pao e agua.
Nao, eu tive manteiga.
Nao, tu teras um pastel e
cerveja.
Tenho-as (them) na minha
gave"ta.
Ainda nao (not yet), mas eu
tive um copo de leite.
3*
36 Lesson 4.
Teria o meu amigo escripto Teria, sim, senhor. Mas ha
uma carta, se tivesse tido muito que nao tenho tido
tempo? tempo.
(Oral exercises to be done on the subject, as indicated in the
preceding lessons.)
Fourth Lesson. Licjao quarta.
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.
verbo auxiliar seT e o adjectivo.
34. The verb ser to be.
Participio imperfeito: sendo ['senduj.
Participio perfeito: sido f'si&uj.
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu sou [sou] I am nos somos f'somuf] we are
tu es [sf] thou art | vos sois ['sotf] you are
(elle, ella) e he, I you are (elles, ellas) sao [svu] they
she, it is j (you) are.
Imperfeito.
Eu era ['srv] I was nos eramos we were
tu eras thou wast
(elle, ella) era he
she, was
vos ereis you were
you were elles, ellas eram they (you)
were.
Eu fui 1 f'fui] I was or have nds fomos ['fomufj
'if]
tu foste ['foftd] elles, ellas for am f'forvu].
fa
Preterito perfeito.
or have nds fov
been, etc. vos fostes [ fofti
', foste ['foftd]
elle, ella foi [foi]
Preterito perfeito composto.
Eu tenho sido ['sidu] I have been
tu tens sido you have been, etc.
Mais-que-perfeito.
Eu tinha sido I had been, etc.
1 As fui is also the preterite of ir to go, it means also I
"went (fui-me I went away); it is the same for tenses derived from
the preterito (fosse, for, fora); see 44 and 45.
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.
37
Future imperfeito.
Eu serei [sd'rvi] I shall be nos seremos [sd'remufj we
tu seras [sd'raf] you will be shall be
(elle, ella) serd [s9'ra] he, vos sereis [sd 'rmfj you will be
she, it, you will be, etc. elles, ellas serdo [sd'rvu] they
will be.
Futuro perfeito.
Eu terei sido I shall have been, etc.
Conditional imperfeito.
Eu seria [sd f riu] I should be, nos seriamos [so'rivmuj]
tu serias etc. vos serieis [sz'rivif]
ette, ella seria elles, ellas seriam.
Conditional perfeito.
Eu teria sido I should have been, etc.
Subjunctive.
Presente.
Eu seja ['svgv] I be, etc. nos sejdmos
tu sejas v6s Sfjais [
elles, ellas sejam.
Imperfeito.
were, etc. nds fossemos ['fosdmuf]
vds fosseis
elles, ellas fossem.
Futuro.
elle, ella seja
Eu fosse 1 ['fosd]
tu fosses [fos'ij]
elle, ella fosse
*
Eu for 1
tu fores
elle, ella for
nds formos
vos fordes
elles ellas forem
I am or happen to be
or if I shall be.
Infinitivo pessoal.
o> J3
H3 <D
o
a
I may be or to be (I,
you, etc.), etc.
Eu ser
tu seres
elle ser
nds sermos
vos serdes
elles, ellas serem
Imperative.
Se (tu); seja (V*.); sede (vds) be. nao sejas (tu);
nao seja (V*.); nao sejaes (vds) do not be.
1 See note ot the preceding page.
38
Lesson 4.
35. The Portuguese adjective follows, as already
mentioned, the same rules of inflexion as the substan-
tive with which it consequently agrees in gender and
number. It is the same as for the demonstrative, pos-
sessive, and indefinite adjectives, and the ordinal numbers,
which are all considered adjectives. Also the cardinal
numbers um and dois have a different form for the
feminine (cf. 2 nd Lesson): este livro, esta penna; meu
pae, minha mde; algum papel, alguma tinta; o primeiro
(first) alumno, a primeira alumna; dois francos, duas
mesas, etc.
36. There are adjectives, denominated uniforms,
which have only one form for both genders. This class
embraces those ending by -e, -I, -ar, -as, -iz, -02, -im,
-ea and -6, and those ending by -s in syllable not accen-
tuated. Ex.: doce, grande, leal, amdvel, fdcil, gentil,
singular, capaz, feliz, veloz, ruim, femea, so, simples.
Exceptions: este, esse, aquelle, mestre (chief e.g., muro
mestre}, which have the feminine: esta, essa, aquella, mestra.
37. The place of the Portuguese qualifying ad-
jective is for the most part after the noun as for those
denoting colour, form, dimension, nationality, religion;
while the demonstrative, possessive, and indefinite ad-
jectives precede the noun.
Palavras.
old
young, new
bad
good, kind
pregugoso lazy
[prdgi'sozuj
lello f'bduj beautiful, fine
cedo ['seduj early, soon
tarde ['tarfo] late
melhor [mi'ftor] better, best
duravel [du- durable, lasting
'r&wlj
caro ["karu] dear
Velho ['
novo ['novu]
ruim [rru'i,
'rrmj
mau [mau], adv.
mal [mal]
bom, boa [bo,
bov]
doente [du' entz] ill, sick
rico ['rrikuj rich
applicado [vpli- diligent
alto [attu] high, tall
grande [' grendd] great, grand,
large, big
sempre [semprd] always, ever
o caminho [kis- the way
'mijiuj
a invengdo [we- the invention
'svuj
o telegrapho the telegraph
[fo 'legrvfuj
o Paldcio de the Crystal
Crystal [crif- Palace
'tail
o edificio [}8d- the edifice
'fis'iuj
o poeta [pu'stv] the poet
opoema[puEi/ms] the poem
colhido [ku- gathered,
'fii&u] plucked
madurecido ripe
[rwsd'urd '
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.
39
<z crian^a fieri- the child
pequeno [p'l- little, small
'vsvl
'kenuj
o, fazenda [fis- the stuff, cloth
'zendv]
grosso ['grosu] thick, big
o marmelo [misr- the quince
opannof'pvnuj the cloth
'mclu]
o signal [si'nal] the sign, mark
situado [situ- situated
a duvida the doubt
'a&u]
[is 'ffumffv]
universidade the university
nao tern duvida is does not
[uniwrsi-
matter
'&afo]
&$rado[&i'ra,ffuj airy
o pdu [pau] the wood, stick
comprado fJcom- bought
a madeira [mu- the wood
bastante [bvf- enough, adv.
de madeira or of wood,
'tiintd] rather
de pdu wooden
o negociante the merchant
a infancia the childhood
[ndgusfi 'wntdj
[f'fSs^v]
o quarto the room
a manhd the morning
["kwartu]
[is mis 'yiv]
muito very, much
amanhd to-morrow
f'mumtuj-
[amis 'yiv]
ideia [i'faw] the idea
escovado I'ifku- brushed.
bonito [bu'nituj pretty
'VSL&U]
7. Exercicio. Leitura e versao.
Eu sou velho. Tu es muito novo. Elle 6 um homem
ruim. Ella 6 uma mulher nova. Essa penna ^ boa. Aquelle
menino e doente. Nos nao somos ricos. Vos sois applicados.
Elles sao pregui^osos. Ellas sao bellas. Eu era teu amigo.
Nos ja nao eramos cria^as. Era isso um bom conselho?
Nao, foi mal pensado. Eu fui tarde duma hora. Fostes vos
(fdste tu, foi V g .) mais cedo? Nao 6 V a . Ex a . de opiniao que
ja seja tarde? Se fosse mais cedo, seria melhor. Se as fructas
ja forem colhidas, 6 signal de ja terem madurecido. Isto que
sera? Sera um vestido para a menina. Nao teria sido melhor
escolher uma fazenda que fosse mais duravel? Se nao for
duravel, nao tern duvida; o panno nao foi caro. Tudo quanto
tenho comprado a esse negociante, tern sido bom. A nossa
casa era muito alta e tinha quartos bastante grandes e airados.
8. Exercise.
Translation.
You are a tall man. The rooms are very large. He is
[a] Portuguese. Those are big horses. It was a grand idea.
She was a pretty little girl. He has always been a good boy.
If it be late, you will not find (nao encontrard) the way. The
telegraph is a grand invention. Be kind to the boy ! Be good,
and I will give you the fine fruit. If the stick were not so thick,
40 > Lesson 5.
it would not be bad. If I were you, I should be diligent.
The Crystal Palace is a grand edifice. Camdes was a great
Portuguese poet. His best poem is "Os Lusiadas" He is an
heir. Is this an apple? No, it is a quince. We are no bad
boys. The dog of my cousin is good and useful. Coimbra
is the only university in Portugal. It is situated on the
Mondego.
Conyersaqao.
Nao 6 elle um bonito rapaz? Nao e tao bonito como (o)
Carlos.
E V 6 . tao velho como eu? Nao sou tao velho como V a .
Ex*.
Sao estas mesas de madeira? Sim, ellas sao de madeira.
Foste bondoso para com (to) Fui muito bondoso para com
o velho homem? elle.
Esta V a - E a - doente? Tenho sido doente desde
crianca (from childhood).
tempo amanha sera bom ou Sera bom tempo arnanha.
mau?
Estao escovados os vestidos? Estao; foram escovados pela
manha (this morning).
(0 professor dira, apontando paro o objecto, e o alumno
repetira:)
quadro preto 6 largo, a tinta 6 preta, o banco 6
alto. papel 6" branco, o giz tambem 6 branco, o
tecto 6 branco tambem. Assim o papel, o giz e o
tecto sao brancos. Este mata-borrao e amarello, esse
e" vermelho, aquelle 6 aznl. Como 6 o quadro
preto, o banco, a porta? Que c6r tern a tinta, o
papel? etc.
Fifth Lesson. Li<$o quinta.
The Auxiliary Verb estar.
Difference between ser and estar.
verbo auxiliar estar. Differenga entre ser
e estar.
38. The verb estar to be (to stand, to lie, to
dwell, etc.).
The Auxiliary Verb estar. 41
Participio imperfeito: estando
Participio perfeito: estado
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu estou [tf'tou] I am nos estamos (tf'tamufj we are
tu estas [tf'taf] thou
art
(elle, ella) estd [tfta]
vos estaes fiftaif] you are
elles, ellas estam [if'tsu] they
(you) are.
he, she, it is
Imperfeito.
Eu estava [if taw] I was, etc. nos estavamos fif'tavvmul]
tu estavas vos estaveis [tf'tavetf]
(elle, ella) estava elles, ellas esiavam.
Preterito perfeito.
Estive [if'tivd] I was or I have estivemos [tftivemuj]
been, etc. ^ estivestes [ifti'veftdf]
estiveste Mti'vsftd] estiveram [ifti'vsrvu].
esteve [if'tevd]
Preterito perfeito composto.
Teriho estado I have been, etc.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Tinha estado I had been, etc.
Futuro imperfeito.
Estarei I shall be, etc. estaremos
estards estareis
estard estardo.
Futuro perfeito.
Terei estado I shall have been, etc.
Conditional imperfeito.
Estar la I should be, etc. estariamos
estarias estarieis
estaria estariam.
Subjunctive.
Presente.
Esteja [if'tvgv] I be, etc. estejdmos [ffto'gvmufj
estejas estejaes
esteja estejam
Imperfeito.
Estivesse [ifti 'vest] I were, et c. estivessemos
estivesses estivesseis
estivesse estivessem.
42 Lesson 5.
Futuro.
Estiver [tfti'ver]
estiver
s estares
estivermos & } - P T , r n ,
eater** l sha11 be '
estiverem
Infinitivo pessoal.
Estar ~
I am or happen to be
5 * - - Q> +3 < or
estarmos
estardes
to be (F, you, etc.).
estarem
Imperative.
; esteja (V & .) be, estae(vds); ndo estejas (tu);
e
s^
ndo esteja (V e .); ndo estejaes (vos) do not be.
39. Difference between ser and estar.
A. Ser expresses:
1. Existence in a general meaning, and is therefore
called "Verbo substantive." Ex.: Eu respiro, pois sou
I breathe, consequently I am (existing).
2. A permanent state of existence, an essential and
lasting condition, which may be expressed by substan-
tive or adjective attribute or an infinitive. Ex.: A
terra e uma esphera the earth is a sphere. Sou fdiz I
am happy. E um lento morrer it is a slow dying.
Meu primo e soldado my cousin is a soldier. A rosa
e uma flor, e vermelha the rose is a flower, it is red.
3. Followed by the past participle of a transitive
verb, ser is employed to form the passive voice.
N.B. The past participle is submitted to inflection like
an adjective: Elles for am censurados, they were blamed.
4. Ser de means to belong to ; ex. : de quern e esta
casa? To whom does this house belong? E de meu pae
it is my father's. Estes livros sao do professor these
books belong to the master.
1 De before the Infinitivo pessoal corresponds to the English
of with the gerund preceded by a possessive adjective: A certeza
de estarmos salvos the certainty of our being safe.
The Auxiliary Verb estar. 43
B. On the contrary, estar is used:
1. If the attribute appears merely accidental or
smporary. Ex. : A rosa estd murcha the rose is faded.
Elle estd feliz he is (just now) happy. Estamos ricos
we are rich vis., we have at this moment and casually
some means, Estou doente, estou mal de saude I am
ill, I am in bad health. (Eu sou doente would mean
that I have bad health.) Estou bom (de saude) I am
well; sou bom I am good. Estd bem it is all right, he
(she) is well, you are well; estd mal it is bad, or he
(she) is ill, you are ill.
2. If a dwelling is to be expressed in any place
that can be left or the object can be removed from:
A criada estd na cozinha the servant is in the kitchen.
But: Onde e a cozinha? Where is the kitchen?
Remark. Here it may as well be said: onde fica a
cozinha? because the place of the kitchen has been appointed
from the beginning (cf. 1 st Lesson, Remark 2 nd ). Also : A
boca flea debaixo do naris the mouth is underneath the nose.
3. While ser with the past participle of the verb
forms the passive voice, estar with the same indicates
the state or condition, as: negocio estd feito the
business is done, finished. A casa estd construida the
house is built. Cf. : A casa e construida the house is
building. Elle estd pr< j so he is a prisoner. Foi preso
he has been imprisoned. A conta estd paga the bill is
paid. (Cf. : e pago de contado to be paid in cash.
Somos pagos aos meses we are paid monthly.)
4. Very often estar with another verb (in the In-
finitive or with the Present Participle) is employed as an
equivalent for to be with the Present Participle : Estou
a escrever, estou escrevendo I am writing. Estamos col-
leccionando (or a cotteccionar) estampilhas ha dois annos
we have been collecting stamps these two years. Estar
a ferver to boil, to be boiling. Such a paraphrase is
called: conjugagdo periphrastica periphrastical conju-
gation.
5. There is a certain number of adjectives that
are generally used with estar, such as : attento attentive,
contente content; satisfeito satisfied; cansado tired; zan-
gado angry e.g., estamos attentos, satisfeitos, zangados.
44
Lesson 5.
40. The verbs of the first coDJugation (in -ar)
form the participles in -ando and -ado; those of the
second (in -er) in -endo and -ido; those of the third
(in -ir) in -indo and -^0.
Palavras.
Situado, sito
situated
torto ['tortuj
crooked,
a foz [fof]
tortuous
a embocadura
the mouth
estreito /)/-
narrow, tight
[imbukv-
(of a river)
'trvitu]
fotrvj
sen, sua
his, her, your
bem conhecido
well known
its, their
[bekuyd'si&u]
inteiro [in-
entire, whole
a praia [' praiv] beach, (sea)-
't&iru]
shore
o bairro
quarter of a
balnear [balni- bathing- . . .
[u 'bairru]
town
'ar], adj.
destruir
to destroy
populoso [pupu- populous
[diftru 'ir]
'lozuj
o marquez
the marquis
a travessa [tru- cross-path
[mtir'kef]
'vsse]
o ministro
the minister
ingreme
steep
[tnz 'niftru]
['igrdmd]
a catdstrofe
the catastrophe
empedrado
paved
[kv 'taftrufd]
[impd'&rad'u]
mandou [man-
ordered
o terreno [td-
the ground
'doj
'rrenu]
(re)edificar
to (re)build
montanhoKo
mountainous
/(rrajifofi-
[monte 'yozu]
a calqada paved (or steep)
[kal'sa&e] street
a escada [}/- stairs
terrace on the
bank of a
a ribeira [rri-
%
que [kd
antes
de
o norte ['nortd]
conduzem['kon-
' duzv}]
a JBaixa
[v'baifv]
a Alia ['attu]
o terremoto
[terrd 'motu]
a maioria
[mvju '
river
rel. pr. which, who
before
the north
lead
the lower part
of the town
(of Lisbon)
the higher part
of the town
(of Lisbon)
the earthquake
the majority
'karj
direito [di-
'rvituj
regular [rrdffu-
'lar]
atravessar
[vtruvd 'sarj
cruzar [kru-
'zarj
entao [in'tvu]
reinar [rrvi-
'nar]
o sdcco ['soku]
a mectalha [md-
'cTafo]
o bronze ['brozd] the bronze
representar to represent
[rreprdzen'tar]
a cidade [si- the town
'd'a&d]
a collina [ku- the hill
'linie]
apra$a['prasv] the square,
market-place
straight
regular
to cross
to intersect
then
to reign
the sock, socle
the medallion
The Auxiliary Verb estar.
45
sete [sets] seven
como ['komu] as
leal [li'atj } fni -Ai, fn i
fiel [ft'el]
depois [dd'poif] after
o peixe f'pvifi] the fish
hontem ['dntvij yesterday
o passeio [pu- the walk
ante-hontem the day before
'SBIU]
[unti 7 yesterday ! concluir to conclude
a noite ['noitd] the night
[koklu'ir]
hontem a noite last night o estudo [if- the study
o theatro the theatre 'tu&u]
[ti'atru] a estada [if- the abode
o concerto the concert 'ta&v]
[ko'sertu]
ingrato ungrateful.
possivel [po- possible
[tgratu]
'siveij
9. Exercicio. Leitura e yersao.
Lisboa.
A cidade de Lisboa esta situada na foz do rio Tejo.
Ella foi edificada em sete collinas. E grande e populosa. As
suas ruas, pracas e travessas sao empedrados. Como o terrene
e" muito rnontanhoso, ha muitas cal$adas e escadas que con-
duzem da Baixa para a Alta. Antes do terremoto do anno
de 1755 (mil sete centos e cincoenta e cinco), as ruas na sua
maioria eram tortas e estreitas. Bairros inteiros foram destrui-
dos pelo terremoto. Foi o marquez de Pombal que, sen do
ministro do rei Dom Jos6 I (Primeiro), depois d'esta catastrofe
mandou reedificar a capital em bairros regulares que sao atra-
vassados e cruzados por ruas direitas e largas. Na Praca do
Commercio esta um monumento do rei Dom Jose I que entao
estava reinando. No socco deste monumento ha uma medalha
de bronze, representando o marquez.
10. Exercise.
Translation.
Yesterday I was 1 at church. Were you at the theatre
yesterday? No r sir, I was at the theatre the day before
yesterday; last night I was at the concert. Where is Charles?
He will be at his uncle's (em casa de sen tio). It is possible
that he has been ill. This hat is too large to be beautiful.
It would have been easy for Charles always to be faithful
to his master. We have always been very attentive. Are
you satisfied? He was angry while (emquanto) he was writing
that letter. The water is boiling. The fish is boiled. Our
walk has been beautiful. My sister had already been in
London.
1 A fact belonging to the past is commonly given by the
Preterito perfeito e.g., in the above sentence by estive.
46 Lesson 6.
Conyersa^ao.
men nome e" Fulano 1 . Qual meu nome e Sicrano 1 .
e o sen?
Eu sou alemao, mas estive Eu sou portugufis e tenho
por muito tempo em Por- estado naAlemanhahacinco
tugal. E o senhor? - annos para ca (these 5years).
Tem sempre sido alumno Nao, senhor, estive primeiro
d'esta escola? (first) num internato (board-
ing-house) de Berlim. -
Que tempo estara ainda aqui? Estarei ate estiverem con-
cluidos os meus estudos.
Esta satisfeito com a sua Estou, sim, senhor. Eu seria
estada aqui? um ingrato, se nao o
estivesse; pois e muito bo-
nito aqui.
Sempre tern estado com saiide Nem (not) sempre; mas agora
emquanto ca esta? estou bem e dou-me bem
(agree) com o clima.
Sixth Lesson. Li<?ao sexta.
The Auxiliary Verb haver to have, to be
(left), to take place, to get, to obtain, etc.
41. As for to be, there are also for to have
two corresponding verbs in Portuguese : ter (see 3 d Lesson)
and haver. The latter, less common in the meaning
to have than the former, is especially employed
1. As a true auxiliary verb to form the simple
Future (Indicative) and Conditional tenses of any verb,,
whereby it drops the h(av) and hangs its personal
endings on the Infinitive of the verb (see 33.
34, 38).
2. as an independent verb in its meaning to be
(existing or at hand) e.g., ha there is, there are (cf.
1 st . Lesson). While so employed, it is impersonal and
consequently used only in the third person singular
and without a pronoun:
1 The Portuguese indicates by Fulano (and in the 2nd place
Sicrano) a person (or persons) unknown or not to be named or, as.
meant here, a name to be substituted by the right one.
The Auxiliary Verb haver. 47
3. To form the compound Future (Indicative) and
Conditional tenses: eu hei or havia de comprar I shall
(should) buy. Here it may be used with the pronoun
and must be followed by de. (Modern writers join
this preposition to the verb by a hyphen : hei-de
comprar).
4. In the meaning of to obtain: Elle houve o per-
dao do rei he obtained the King's pardon. Havendo o
premio da nossa canceira obtaining the reward of our toil.
42. Haver.
Participio presente: havendo.
Participio perfeito: havido.
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu hei [vi] I have nos h(av)emos [(vv)emuf] we
tu has [af] you have have
elle ha [a] he has vos h(av)eis [(vv)vif] you have
ha there is elles hdo [vu] they have.
Imperfeito.
Eu havia [v'viv] I had nds haviawos [v'vivmuf] we
tu havias you had had
elle havia he had vds havieis [v'vivif] you had
havia there was elles hawam they had.
Preterito perfeito.
Houve 1 ['ovdj I had houvemos [o'vsmuf] we had
houveste [o'veftd] you had houvestes [o'veft'i)] you had
houve he had, there was houveram [o'vsrvu] they had.
Preterito perfeito composto.
Tern havido there has been.
Mais-que-perfeito.
Tinha havido there had been.
Future imperfeito.
Haverei I shall have, etc. haveremos we shall have, etc,
haverds havereis
haverd (there will be or is haverao.
to be)
1 As this verb, with the exception of the Present and Im-
perfect, is rarely employed personally, we leave the pronoun aside
and also the uncommon forms in the following tenses.
48 Lesson 6.
Futuro perfeito.
Terd havido there will be had, etc.
Conditional imperfeito.
Haveria there would be.
Conditional perfeito.
Teria havido there would have been.
Subjunctive.
Presente.
Haja ['a,gv] that I have, etc.
hajas
haja that there be
hajamos [v'gvmuf] that we have
hajaes [v'g&lf] that you have
hajam that they have.
Imperfeito.
I Houvesse [o'vesd] if I had ( houvessemos [o'vesmuj]
< houvesses if you had I houvesseis [o'vssdjf]
\ houvesse if there were \ houvessem
Futuro.
houver [o'ver] if or whenever I shall have
houveres
Jiouver if or whenever there will be
houvermos
houverdes
houverem.
Imperative .
Haja let there be. (All other imperative forms are
unusual.)
Infinite pessoal.
Haver, haveres, haver, havermos, haverdes, haverem
(that) I, you, he, etc., may have.
In the same manner is conjugated the compound
verb rehaver to have or get back ; but this verb is only
used in forms which have the -v- (rehavendo, rehavido,
rehavia, rehouve, etc.)
43. There are still other (compound) forms,
such as: tenha havido, tivesse havido, ter (and tendo)
havido, which we do not write at large, as they are
The Auxiliary Verb haver. 49
easily formed by themselves and rarely employed. The
same is to be said for the other auxiliary verbs, already
mentioned. The omitted tenses may easily be sub-
stituted.
44. Yet there is still a tense quite peculiar
to the Portuguese language, which we have not yet
spoken of, because we wanted to mention it apart: it is
the Simple Pluperfect (mais-que-perfeito simples). It is
formed from the 2 ud person sing, of the Perfect by
hanging the ending -ste into -ra (houveste: houvera;
-civeste; tivera; foste: fora; estiveste: estivera):
thouvera, tivera
houveras, tiveras
houvera, tivera
houveramos, tiveramos
houvereis, tivereis
Jiouveram, tiveram
fora, estivera
foras, estiveras
fora, estivera
foramos, estiveramos
foreis, estivereis
w foram, estiveram
1
^
i
-S3
45. The student may at the same time be
conscious that from the same person (2 nd pers. sing,
perf.) there are formed two other tenses : l ly . the Im-
perfect of the Subjunctive, by changing the ending
-ste into -sse, and 2 ly . the future of the same mood,
by changing -ste into -r (cf. the auxiliary verbs already
mentioned). This derivation is the same in any regular
or irregular verb.
46. As for the employment of the Compound
Future and Conditional tenses, there is some little
difference with the simple tense. Hei-de fazer expresses
not only that something will be done by me, but that
I intend or am willing to do it. que die havia-de
fazer corresponds to: what he ought to do. Nos ha-
viamos-de ser mais economicos we ought to be more
economical. Nos seriamos mais economicos we should
be more economical.
47. Haver-de, to be obliged to, may also be
used in other forms than Present and Imperfect tenses:
Houve-de ser cortes he had to be polite. Se nao houvesse-
de considerar isso if that were not to be considered. Se
liouver(mos)-de luctar com difficuldadas if there are diffi-
culties to be fought with, or if we are obliged to fight
against difficulties. Ha-de haver tempo para tudo there
must be time for everything.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 4
50 Lesson 6.
48. In some tenses the 3 rd person sing, of haver
indicates a time past and corresponds to these . . .]
since or ago: ha (havia, haverd, haveria) quinze (15)
dias a fortnight since or ago; haverd muito tempo it
will be long since. Ha tres horas que estamos esperando
or a espera we have been waiting these three hours.
49. Ha (houve, haverd, etc.) quern, followed by
a verb in the 3 rd person and in the Indicative or Sub-
junctive mood, means there is a person or theje are
persons who . . . e.g., Ha quern dw (or diga] = it is
said, somebody says.
Que ha? = what is the matter? Nao ha nada there
is nothing the matter.
50. Haver por bem means to think proper. It
is scarcely used but by or of the King or the govern-
ment. Haver por mal is rarely used and means: to*
take in ill part.
51. The reader will already have noticed that
in the Imperative mood the second person sing, when-
employed affirmatively is derived from the same person
of the Present tense Indicative by losing the s ; and
from the Present Subjunctive, when employed nega-
tively; e.g., estd! ndo estejas!
Yet there are still for the auxiliary verbs some
little irregularities to be noticed: 1. tens becomes after
losing the s: tern, because a verbal form is not al-
lowed to end in n; 2. es is changed into se; 3. the
Imperative of haver is not used in the 2 nd pers. sing.
Eemark. Addressing a plurality of persons, the Imper-
rative form is the 3 rd person plur. pres. subj. : tenham, sejam,
estejam (hajam not to be used). There is indeed an Impera-
tive of the 2 nd person plur., but it is antiquated and rarely
used by modern writers. The reader will find it in the?
general conjugation-table.
Palayras.
Traduzir to render | bem [bu}] well (very)
pouco(s) little (few)
['poku]
uma vez [vefj once
outra vez another time
as vezes [a$- sometimes-
outro(s) ianto(s) as much (as
many)
ultimo I 'ultimuj last
o uso ['itzuj the use, the
employment
a differenfa the difference
[difo'resv]
fazer [fu'zer] to make, to
do
The Auxiliary Verb haver.
51
a lingua
the language j a cordqem \
I'llgwe]
a distingao
[difti'suu]
fazer distingao
distinction
to distinguish,
discern
[ku'ra^i] \
o animo
['unimu] j
applicado
[vpU'kad'u]
the courage
diligent
a paciencia [pn-
the patience
em baixo
downstairs
's'les'i'ej
[tbaifu]
aprender
to learn
o erro f'erruj
the mistake,
[vpren'der]
error
depressa [dd-
quickly
o dinheiro
the money
'prssu]
[di'nviru]
a .s em ana fsj-
the week a fnglaterra
England
'imsms]
[UTS term]
sabemos
we know ; passear
to walk
coHJuyar
to conjugate [pies^'ar]
[kogu'garj
ir a casa
to go home
a interrupqao
the interrup- i em casa
tion ! as duas (horas)
at home
at 2 o'clock
urn dia santo
a saint's day
ja [$a]
already
as ferias
['ftfiuf]
the holidays
so [soj J
unico }
only
a doenga
the illness
a grammdtica
the grammar
[du'esie]
[qru'matikvl
cedo f'seffu]
soon desde [dezfo]
from
veneer [ve'ser]
to overcome ! o principio
the beginning.
p. p. of veneer | [prl'sip'iu]
11. Exercicio. Leitura e versao.
05 versos auxiliares.
Em portugues ha dois verbos auxiliares para traduzir o
verbo ingles to have, e outros tantos, para traduzir to be. Os
primeiros sao ter e haver; os ultimos ser e estar. No uso
d'elles (in their use) ha alguma differen9a. As vezes essa diffe-
ren^a e bem pouca, outras vezes nao ha nenhuma. Ha quern
considera uma das maiores difficuldades da lingua portuguesa
o fazer dist^ao dos verbos ser e estar. Se nao houvesse
maior difficuldade, ou se essa fosse a unica, o estudo da lingua
nao seria difficil. Mas haja paciencia, que havemos-de aprender
portugufis bem depressa. Ha poucas semanas que o (it) esta-
mos estudando e ja sabemos conjugar os verbos auxiliares.
Estes verbos, sendo os mais (most) irregulares, sao os inais
difficeis. Nao havendo interrup9oes, como ja as houve com
dias santos e ferias, e se nao houver doencas, cedo hao-de ser
vencidas as primeiras difficuldades. Tenham pois animo e
sejam applicados.
12. Exercicio.
Translation.
There is a man downstairs. There are two men down-
stairs. There is to be a saint's day this week. There must
4*
52
Lesson 7.
be some mistake. There being no one there, I went (see
36, note) away. Is there much money in England? Yes,
there is (transl. : there is, yes, sir). Will there be a concert
to-night? No, there has been a concert last night. What's
the matter? There's nothing the matter. I have been walk-
ing these two hours. I must go home. We all (todos) intend
to go home (see 46), we must (see p. 34, Remark) be at
home at two o'clock. Is it long since you have been learning
Portuguese? No, it is only a few weeks. And there has
been some interruption by holidays. Have you had a gram-
mar? Now we have, but we had not from the beginning.
Conversa^ao.
Que tern o alemao?
Ha ali grandes casas?
Houve terremoto em Portugal?
Tern havido terremotos mais
vezes ?
Nao foi o criado comprar
peixe no mercado?
alemao tern uma casa na
rua d'El-rei.
Ha, sim, senhor; e a d'elle
(his) e uma das maiores.
Houve, mas ja ha alguns
mezes.
Tern. (that) do anno 1755
(mil sete centos e cincoenta
e cinco) foi o maior.
Nao havia peixe no mercado ;
como o tempo estivera mau,
nao tinha havido guem fosse
(see p. 36, footnote) pescar
(to fish).
Seventh Lesson. Li?ao setima.
Employment and Concord of Tenses.
Emprego e concordancia de tempos.
52. As we have seen, there are two forms of
the Infinitive: the impersonal one corresponds in its
employment to the English form; the personal Infini-
tive is a peculiarity of the Portuguese language and
characteristic as for the personal terminations added to
the simple form. It is employed after a preposition.
(N.B. In the regular verbs it is consonant to the Sub-
junctive Future.) Ex.:
Faze diligencia para seres lorn.
Take pains to be good.
Employment and Concord of Tenses. 53
Instead of Passei sem ser visto, you may say:
Passei sem me verem I passed without being seen (lit.:
without their seeing me).
Depois de (nos) estarmos seniados, conversdmos.
After having sat down, we talked.
53. While the Present has only one tense, the
Past is divided into two, or taking also the Pluperfect
into three simple tenses:
A. The Preterito imperfeito is used:
(a) In descriptions of character, opinion, state, man-
ners and customs, representing an action as often re-
peated ; it embraces a space of time or a state already
existing and still continuing as for the time spoken of:
elle tinha lima casa; o homem era pobre\ Jiavia ruido
(noise); havia reuniao todos os sabbados, an assembly
took place every Saturday. Passdvamos o verdo no campo
we used to pass the summer in the country.
(b) If two actions are represented as being per-
formed at, .or as lasting, the same time, as:
Chovia emquanto eu passeava.
It was raining while I took a walk.
(As for an action being interrupted by another,
see B, (c)).
(c) The Imperfect is used for all actions that do
not immediately belong to the relation, but are added
by the speaker in order to express accessory circum-
stances or his own meaning, as:
Elles foram a urn sitio que ficava muito longe.
They went to a place that was very far off.
A lebre, como corria muito, fwu-se nas pernas.
The hare, being a good runner, trusted to its legs.
Eemark. As in English, the Imperfect may often be
substituted by the first Participle e.g., A lelre, sendo lorn
corredor . . .
B. The Preterito perfeito or deftnido is used to ex-
press actions following one another. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly appropriated to the narrative
style and therefore used:
54 Lesson 7.
(a) To mark a (point of) time positively fixed, en-
tirely elapsed relatively to the present or the time
spoken of:
cao foi .morto the dog was killed.
Na batalha de Aljubarrota os Portugueses venceram os
castelhanos.
In the battle of Aljubarrota the Portuguese vanquished
the Castilians.
(b) To mark the beginning of an action or a state:
Eu tlve (uma) carta I got a letter.
Elle teve medo he became frightened.
Houve gritaria there was a clamour.
(c) If one action is interrupted by another, the
Imperfect denotes the action that was going on when
the other began ; the latter requiring the Preterite per-
feito, as:
JEhnquanto Jiavia trovoada, elle entrou em casa.
Whilst there was a thunderstorm, he entered the house.
(d) Very often the Preterito is employed when in
English the compound Perfect is used, as:
Jd jantou ? Have you already dined (or had dinner) ?
Tive uma chicara de did I have had a cup of tea.
Comprdmos cafe we have bought coffee.
The compound Perfect is, indeed, always rendered
by the simple Preterite, and not by the compound,
when the action of the verb is altogether finished in
the past and has nothing to do with the present time.
Compare: Comprdmos assucar we have bought sugar,
and: Temos sempre comprado assucar ao ne-
gociante, nosso vizinho.
C. Another tense peculiar to the Portuguese is
the Simple Pluperfect (Mais-que-perfeito simples) already
spoken of in 44. There is no difficulty whatever in
its use. It may anywhere be substituted by the com-
pound form ; yet, as the Portuguese likes to employ
simple forms, the student will do well in equally prac-
tising the simple Mais-que-perfeito.
54. The first participle or gerund (Participio
imperfeito or gerundio) does not essentially differ in its
Employment and Concord of Tenses. 55
use from the English ; it is used to express some reason
or cause, condition or manner. Yet it must not be
employed after certain prepositions which in English
require the gerund, while in Portuguese the Infinitive
or the Past Participle is used (cf. 52, examples).
55. The Future of the Subjunctive Mood, also
a form connected solely with the Portuguese language,
is used to express some uncertain future event. It is
nearly exclusively employed after the conjunctions se
if, quando when, emquanto while, as long as. Ex.:
Quando tivermos dinheiro, compraremos essa casa.
When we shall have money, we shall buy that house.
8e estiver em casa, a porta estard aberta.
If he is (or be) at home, the door will be open.
Emquanto nao fizerem diligencia, nao serdo succedidos.
As long as they do not take pains, they will not
succeed.
56. The Conditional is employed as in English.
Examples :
Se tivesse diriheiro, compraria (or comprava) essa casa.
If I had money, I should buy that house.
Ainda gue fosse rico, nao a compraria (or nao a com-
prava).
Even if I were rich, I should not buy it.
Se nao tivesse sido tao tarde, o homem nao teria (or nao
tinlia) estado em casa.
If it had not been so late, the man would not have
been at home.
So we employ in the subordinate sentence the
Imperfect (or Pluperfect) of the Conjunctive, and in the
principal sentence the first (or second) Conditional.
Instead of the Conditional the Portuguese prefers to
employ the Imperfect (and Pluperfect) of the Indicative
(see Ex.).
57. The Subjunctive 1 being the mood of un-
certainty, it is used:
(a) After those verbs expressing a will, desire, hope,
command, expectation, aspiration, merit. (N.B. The
1 The rules on the subjunctive mood need be only read over
liere and can be learned thoroughly later on.
56 Lesson 7.
subordinate sentence is introduced by the conjunc-
tion
Quero (mando, desejo, espero) que sejam modestos.
I want (order, desire, trust) you to be modest.
Merecia que fosse attendido.
He would deserve to be attended to.
(b) After the verbs expressing thought, speech,
belief, employed in the negative or interrogative, and
the subordinate sentence containing an uncertainty:
Eu nao digo que seja assim.
I do not say that it is so.
Julga que die tenha comprehendido ?
Do you think he will have understood?
(c) After verbs expressing some emotion (joy, fear,
fright, etc,):
Receio que nao esteja em casa.
I fear he will not be at home.
Estimei que tivesse vindo.
I was glad he had come.
(d) After duvidar to doubt, ter duvida to have some
doubts, negar to deny, impedir, estorvar to hinder,
ignorar to ignore, because of the negation or uncer-
tainty already included in the verb:
Duvido que tenhas chegado a tempo.
I doubt that you have arrived in time.
Nao tenhas duvida que eu seja teu amigo.
Don't have any doubt that I am your friend.
pae ignordra que o filho estivesse doente.
The father did not know that his son was ill.
58. With respect to the concordance, it is to
be noticed that, as in English, to a main time (Pre-
sente, Preterito [perfeito e compostoj, and Futuro imperf*
indie.) in a principal sentence corresponds a main time
in the accessory clause; while to a secondary time in
1 This conjunction may not be omitted so easily as in English;
there are only a few verbs which dispense with it e.g., Pedir
to ask, beg: pego (que) esteja as duas horas I beg you will be
there at 2 o'clock; esperar to hope: esperamos (que) sejam pon-
tuaes we hope you (or they) will be punctual.
Employment and Concord of Tenses.
57
the principal sentence corresponds a secondary time in
the accessory clause, as:
Mando que escreva I order him to write.
Julgdra que tivesse escripto I thought he had written.
Palavras.
A empresa
the enterprise o atraso
the delay
[I'prezu]
[v 'trazu]
dar [dar]
to give
o reldgio
the watch
deu [deu]
(3rd pers. pret.
[ra 'logiu]
of dar} gave
adiantado
fast, advanced
o lucro ['lukru] the gain
[u&iun 'taftu]
dez [dsf]
ten
ou$a! f'osv]
hark!
o accionista
the shareholder
a noticia
the news
[as}u 'niftvj
[nu 'tis?vj
pensar [pe'sar] to think
triste ['triftd]
sad
a posigdo
the position
escrever
to write
[puzi'suu]
fifkrd 'ver]
parecer
to seem
outra vez
another time,
[pen'ser]
once more
realisar
to realise
o prazer
the pleasure
frvsli 'zar]
Iprv ' ztr]
melhorar
to ameliorate
a bondade
the kindness,
[miftu'rar] .
[bon 'dafo]
goodness
a ambigdo
the ambition
que horas sdo?
what o'clock is
[vtnbi'svuj
it?
ensinar I isi'nar] to teach
e uma liora
it is one o'clock
morar [mu'rarj to dwell, live
e hora e meia
it is half past
curioso
curious
one
[kurt'ozu]
sdo duas
it is two
a regido
the region
(horas)
o'clock
frdgi 'feu]
sdo horas
it is time
o temporal
the storm
dar horas
to strike
[tempu 'ralj
estar enganado
to be mistaken
diirar [du'rar] to last
[igv 'na&u]
causarfkau 'zar
/ to cause
aborrecido
tedious, bored
o damno
[isburrd 'si&u]
['dvnuj
o estrago
the damage
a quietagdo
the quiescence
[iftrayu]
o remedio
the remedy
estar a espera
to expect, to
[rd 'msd'}u]
fif'psru]
wait
gasto ['gaftu]
worn
acabar [vkv'bar] to finish, ter-
o caso f'kazuj
the case
minate
tardar
to be long
enorme
enormous
levar [Idvar]
to take along
/* nornw]
or away
avaliar
to appraise
o descanQO
the rest
[vwty'ar]
[dif'kvsu]
o comboio
the train
se Dens quizer
God willing.
fkom'botu]
[ki'zerj
58 Lesson 7.
13. Exercicio. Leitura c ycrsao.
Esta empresa tern dado bom lucro; deu dez por cento
aos accionistas no anno passado. Temos pensado muito na
sua posicao que no primeiro momento nos parecia (Imp. of
parecer) irnpossivel a realisar, mas que cedo havemos-de me-
Ihorar. Ha muito tempo que tern sido a minha ambicao saber
bem a lingua portuguesa. Se tivesse quern m'a (it to me) en-
sinasse, havia-de estudar essa bella lingua. Desde que ca
moro (1 st pers. pres. of morar) sempre tenho tido bons vizinhos.
E curioso seres tu que tenha essa ideia. Na nossa regifio,
<o temporal, que tern durado uns poucos de (several) dias, esta
causando enorme damno. Estamos a espera que elle acabe
para avaliarmos o estrago que tiver feito. Ja chegou o com-
boio? Ainda nao; tera atraso; ja sao seis boras no meu relo-
gio. Talvez esteja adiantado o seu relogio. Nao esta. Ouc.a!
Estao a dar as seis.
14. Exercise.
Translation.
What have you there? It is a letter. Is it for me
{mim)? No, it is not. It is for your neighbour who is there
at the door. Was there no letter for me? If there had been,
I should have given it you 1 . It is a long time that I have not
had any news from my friend. I am very sad. If there be
no letter to-morrow, I shall write (com p. Future) again. It
is long since we had the pleasure of seeing (Infinitive)
you (a V a - Ex a -}. Have the kindness to tell me (de
me dizer) what o'clock it is. It is two o'clock. No, I am
mistaken, it is half past one. It is time for me to go home.
Conversacjio.
Onde e (or fica) a sua casa? E (or fica) ali na rua vizinha.
Ha muito tempo que mora Tenho la morado ha quatro
n'ella? ou cinco annos.
Onde esteve V a - Ex a - no anno Estive n'uma praia balnear.
passado?
Houve la muito movimento? Nao houve; se houvesse, nao
teria la ido.
Mas nao havendo movimento, Nao 6. A quietacao 6 e sempre
sera (or ha-de s6r) aborre- tern sido o melhor remedio
cido? para os nervos gastos.
1 The complementary pronouns follow here immediately the
pronoun subject: eu Ih'a teria dado.
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
59
Ficando conhecido aquella
praia, nao tardera que haja
(or nao tardera haver) mais
mte.
Ex a - teve bom resultado
sua estada ali?
Pode ser (it may be) que as-
sim seja; nesse caso nao
hei-de la ir outra vez.
Tive. E este anno hei-de le-
var a minha familia, para
todos nos havermos bom
descanQO, se Dens quizer.
Eighth Lesson. Li<jao oitava.
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
Palayras.
O quintal the garden
a amendoeira the almond-tree
[ukln 'tal]
[vmendu'virvj
o arbusto the shrub, bush
florescia bloomed,
[upr'buftu]
[flurlf'siu] nourished
o carvalho the oak-tree
a neve [u 'nsvdj the snow, frost
[nkur 'vafluj
crest ar [kriftar] to blast
a faia [v 'faiv] the beech-tree
crestou-lhe blasted it
a tilia [u 'tilivj the linden
o olmo [u 'olmu]\
[kriftofo]
o casianheiro the chestnut-
o olmeiro ithe elm-tree
ukvftis'yis'iru] tree
[uol'muiru] }
a castanha the chestnut
o salgueiro the willow
fofaf'tvgv}
[used' guiru]
Todos os Santos All Saints
o platano the plane-tree
['to&uzuf-
[u 'platenuj
'svntufj
derribaram-no knocked it
o magusto embers to roast
[darn- down
[mis 'guftuj chestnuts in :
'fiarvunuj
the feast of
amattafv'matv] the wood
chestnuts on
o -grupo the group
All Saints
[u'grupu]
assado [v'sa&o] roasted
a drvore fructi- the fruit-tree | comer [ku'mer] to eat
fera [fru-
gostar [guf'tar] to like
'tifdra]
o damasco the apricot
<a cerejeira the cherry-tree j [u&a'mafku]
[vswt'jvirv] I a tdmara the date
$aboroso savoury /K 'tvmurvj
[svfiu'rozu] a nespera the medlar.
I /
15. Exercicio.
Quintal e drvores.
Temos um quintal ao pe da casa. No quintal ha muitos
Drupes de arbustos e algumas arvores velhas e altas: carva-
Ihos, faias, tilias e olmos. Perto do rio atras do nosso quintal
60
Lesson 8.
ha salgueiros. Tambem havia um platano muito alto, mas
os ventos derribaram-no. Ale"m das arvores de matta ha
arvores fructiferas. Esta cerejeira teve muita flor e tera muita
fructa saborosa. Aquella amendoeira tambem teria muitas
amendoas, mas quando florescia, a neve crestoa-lhe as flores.
castanheiro junto a porta da rua ha de dar bellas castanhas
que havemos de comer no dia de Todos os Santos, depois de
as termos assado no inagusto. Os meninos gostam de cerejas?
Gostamos, mas mais ainda de damascos, de tamaras e de nSs-
peras. Tivemos grande quantidade de nesperas no anno passado.
16. Exercise.
In which street is your house ? Have you not a garden
near your house? Yes (see L. 2, note), a large and beauti-
ful garden with many flowers and trees. What tree is that
behind the wall ? That is an elm -tree. And all these trees
are fruit-trees. We shall have very much fruit this year.
Last year we had very little. The trees had many leaves,
but few fruits. There you have also very fine roses. Yes,
1 like roses very much; also my mother likes them much.
Palayras.
jardim
the flower-
a margarida
the daisy
[gvr 'd i]
garden
[umargv 'riffvj
vir [vir]
to come
o amor-perfeito
the pansy
entre [entrd]
come in
[we 'morpdr-
o vizinho
the neighbour
'fvitu] (pi.
{uvd'ziyuj
amores-per-
a cancella
the trellis-gate
feitos)
[kv 'selej
o lilaz [uli'lif]
the lilac
abre [afira/
opens
a dahlia
the dahlia
a rua [rruis]
the street, way
[v ' fall]
o meio [misiu]
the middle,
midst ; means
o goivo [u' gojvu]
roxo ['rrofuj
the gillyflower
violet
o alegrete
the flower-bed
cheira [fair*]
smells
[wU'grete]
o jasmim
the jasmin
a especie
the sort, kind, [u^s^mi]
vlf'p8}9J
species o aroma
the aroma,
o cravo
the pink [we'roma]
smell
[u'kravu]
o girasol
the sunflower
a cor [vkor]
the colour farire'sdl
branco ['brvkuj
encarnado
white
pink
aUcenga[U'seseJ
offerecer
the permission
to offer
[inkvr 'na&u]
[of^r^ 'serj
amarello
yellow
off'erecel-as-ia
I should offer
[amis 'relu]
[of 3rd 'se
them
(de) cor de rosa
rose
Ivziv]
[korda 'rozu]
nao so [nvu so]
not only
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs. 61
mas [muf] but i a uva [v'uvv] the grape
oolher [ku'fier] to pick
o que quiser what(ever)
[ukdki'zer] you like
(quizer = Fut. will, desire)
COBJ. ofquerer
fa^a favor de vir please to come
'virj
prefir
'o[pra'firu] I prefer
a pera [u 'pew] the pear
a maga [emv 'svj the apple
o meldo the melon
o ramalhete the nosegay
[urrvme 'fietd]
nem . . . nem [nvi] neither . . . nor
a cliuva the rain.
[IB 'fuw]
17. Exercicio.
Jardim e flores.
Tenha a bondade de vir para o meu jardim. Entre por
sta cancella que abre para a rua do meio. Ao longo da rua
ha alegreies com flores de toda a especie: cravos de varias
<cores: brancos, encarnados, amarellos, cor de rosa; dahlias,
margaridas e amores-perfeitos. Estamos no verao. Na prima-
vera estavam em flor o lilaz e os goivos, que sao d'uma cor
roxa e cheiram muito bem. Tambem o branco jasmim tem
um bello aroma. V a - Ex a - gosta de girasoes ? Talvez ja haja
um em flor. Ainda nao ha, nao. Mas quando houver (supply
um), ha de me dar licenga de Ih'o offerecer. Ja nao temos
rosas bellas; se tivessemos, offerees!- as -ia. Hei de fazer para
termos flores todo o anno.
18. Exercise.
(a) Oh, what nice flowers you have in your garden! If
I had some white roses, I should give them to my mother.
I have great pleasure in offering you not only white roses,
but all kinds of other flowers. Have the goodness to pick
whatever you like. Do you like the aroma of the jasmin?
I clo, but I prefer that of the pinks. I shall have a very
fine nosegay of white roses, red pinks and violet pansies.
Please to come when(ever) you like to pick flowers and fruits.
In autumn we shall have much fruit: grapes, pears, apples,
melons, and others.
(b) Mother, I have got a beautiful nosegay to offer you!
Oh, the fine flowers! How much (quanta) I like them!
Look (olha) at these gillyflowers, how nice they are! And they
smell so good (bem). We had no daisies nor dahlias in our
garden; our neighbour had (. . . 6 que [as] tinha. KB. que
marks an emphasis). We also should have (some), if there
had not been so much (tanto) rain. If we are to have (or
If there be) fruit in autumn, we shall pick apples, pears,
and grapes.
62
Lesson
Palayras.
hordrio the time-table
[uo 'rarfu]
a UQUO de leitura the reading-
[Iv}' twn] lesson
a ligao de gram- the lesson of
mdtica grammar
a ligdo d'arith- the lesson of
metica arithmetic
[d'eritd 'mst'ilc'&j
a li<;do de dou- the lesson of
trina [do- doctrine
'trinvj
a ligdo de the drawing-
desenho lesson
the caligraphy
the needle-
work
the intuitive
lesson
to give or to
say a lesson
the cough
the problem
the cipher,
number
the number
to-day
a lingua ['
liontem ['
ao todo [to:&u
fazer
todo, toda
tddos, todas
que [kd, before
a vowel lei]
(do)que
cada
a semana
a calligraphia
[Iwligfe 'fivj
os lavores
[lis 'vorffj
a ligdo de coisas
dar ligdo
a tosse ['tosd]
o problema
[pru 7 "
'O algarismo
[atgv'rigmu]
o numero
fnumdru]
hoje [051]
the tongue-
yesterday
in all
to do
all
which, that,
who
than
each, every
the week
a manha the morning
[urn 'yv]
a tarde [tarddj the afternoon
a noite [is 'nofcfo] the night
o dia santo the saint's day
urn dia feriado a holiday
the holidays,
vacation
a working-dajr
so much, so
many
how much, how
many?
as much (as
many).
as ferias
urn dia de semana
urn dia util
tanto
ianta, tantos,
tantas
quanta [Icwvntu],
quanta, quan-
tos, quantas
tanto(s) quan-
to(s)
19. Exercicio verbal.
Conjugate: a) Eu tive (tenho tido, tivera) uma li^ao da-
leitura (desenho etc.)
b) que (quantas) ligoes terei (teras etc.) hoje ? etc*
c) hei de ter uma li^ao de . . ., duas Ii9oes de-
. . . etc.
d) teria (tido) mais tempo, se nao tivesse (tido)'
tantas lipoes.
e) se tiver tempo, hei de fazer o meu thema.
(desenho etc.).
20. Exercicio.
hordrio.
Quantas licoes tivestes (or tiveram) hoje? Tivemos uma>
de doutrina, outra d'arith me" tica e duas de desenho i
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
63,
quatro ao todo. Haviamos de ter cinco, mas o professor de
calligraphia tinha tosse e nao veio (did or had not come).
As segnndas e quintas feiras sempre tenho nma Ii9ao de gram-
matica francesa: as terras e sextas [feiras] 1 uma de lingua in-
glesa, e as quartas e aos sabbados uma ligao d'alemao. A
5 ta f a (quinta feira) e" meio feriada, os domingos e dias santoa
sao dias feriados. As liQoes sao das oito boras de manha at6
ao meio dia e das duas ate as quatro boras da tarde nos dias
liteis. Se tivessemos mais tr6s li^oes nas quintas, teriamos
seis licoes em cada dia. menino gosta da 1193,0 de coisas?
Gosto mais do que dos problemas; nao tenbo memoria para
os algarismos e os mimeros grandes. E a menina, de que
ligao gosta mais? A de que mais gosto, minba senhora, &
a Ii9ao de lavores, que ternos todos os dias das duas para,
as tie's.
Palavras.
Guilherme
William
a groselha the currant
[gi 'fisrmd]
[gru'zvfi'e]
Jodo [gu'vu]
John
geralmente generally
Helena [*'Uwe]
Ellen
[gdral'mentd]
America
America
prequigoso lazy
[v'msrikv]
[prdgi'sozu]
o dinheiro
the money
mais Ima'ifJ more
[di 'yiviru]
diligente diligent,
o pecego
the peach
[ddli'xentd] industrious
['peszgu]
irrequieto restless
estar falto
to be short of firwfa'etuj
[fattu] de
o crro [erru] the mistake
o morango
the strawberry
o thema ['temu] the task
[mu'rugu]
a uva de norte
gooseberry
bem que [bvikdj though (conj.)
nerihum [n'l ' nu] none, no (at all)
[nortd]
contente glad, satisfied.
[Tcon'tentd]
21. Exercise.
William is my friend. I am William's friend (the friend
of W.). Here is John's brother. Where is my sister Ellen?
She is in the kitchen. I had a cousin who went (see p. 36,
note) to America. Was he still a boy? Yes, he was very
young. The children had (== got) flowers and fruits. Had
you not money enough to buy some peaches? No (I had
not), I was short of money. Are there still strawberries.
[left] 1 ? There are no more (Jd nao ha), but we shall have
gooseberries and currants. The boys would have had a holi-
day if they had not been so lazy. Little girls generally are
1 The words in [] are not to be translated or may be dis-
pensed with, while those in () are to be employed in Portuguese.
4 Lesson 9.
more diligent than little boys. These are so restless. You
have had four mistakes in your task, though it was very
easy. When you happen to have no mistake at all, you will
have a nice (and) new book. I shall be glad if you be more
industrious for the future. And you, my boy, will be more
happy.
professor podera continuar estes exercicios, ate que os
alumnos tenham adquirido uma certa facilidade no emprego dos
verbos auxiliares em todos as suas formas.
Conversa^ao.
A que horas eomec,am as aulas? (As sete, oito, nove,
dez.)
Que lic.6es ha de manha? (de tarde?)
Quantas licoes de . . . teem os meninos durante a
semana?
Tiveram bom professor? (Answer: Tivemos, sim, senhor.)
Ha outras lic.6es e outros professores todos os dias?
Quantos dias ha na semana, e quaes (pi. of qual which)
sao os seus nomes?
Quantos dias liteis ha n'esta semana, visto haver (as
there is to be) um dia santo?
Ninth Lesson. Li<jao nona.
The Partitive Article.
59. To indicate an indefinite quantity or an
indefinite part of a whole, the Portuguese expression
is about the same as the English : bread is pdo, cheese
is queijo; I have taken tea eu tomei chd; give me water
de-me dgua.
N.B. The pleonastical some, used in English, is
only translated when you wish to indicate the quan-
tity referred to as little, or if followed by the plural:
Do you want some bread? Quer p&o? Have you got
some money? Tern algum dinheiro? I was some
moments Jate cheguei tarde de alguns mementos.
60. However, the quantity being determined by
a noun expressing measure, weight, or number, or by a
substantive adverb, the name of the substance is pre-
ceded by de: um pedago de pao a piece of bread; uma
The Partitive Article. 65
pouca de dgua a small quantity of water; uma garrafa
de vinho a bottle of wine; um tanto de leite a certain
quantity of milk.
Here also the employment is the same as in English.
61. If the word which denotes quantity has
not the form of a substantive, the substance is not
preceded by de (again the same as in English): Tern
muito vinho he has much wine ; temos tanto leite que . . .
we have so much milk that . . . ; ha pouca fructa there
is little fruit; tern havido bastantes batatas there have
been a good deal of potatoes.
62. (a) Nouns and Adverbs of Quantity with de.
Um metro de fasenda a meter of stuff.
Um arratel [v'rrattl) de assucar [v'sulcar].
A pound of sugar.
IDois arrdteis de farinha two pounds of meal.
Um par de botas a pair of boots.
Tres leguas ['hgwvj] de distancia three miles' distance.
Um quarteirao de ovos 25 eggs.
{Um) certo numero de cartas a certain number of letters.
Um grupo de pessoas a group of people.
(Uma) grande quantidade d'arame.
A great quantity of brass -wire.
Um pouco de paciencia a little patience.
Um nada de esperanga a want of hope.
(b) Pronouns and Adverbs of Quantity without de.
Algum tempo some time.
Muito ar much air.
Mais dgua more water.
Menos caminho less (= a nearer) way.
Pouca distancia little distance.
Bastante trabalho work enough, rather much trouble.
<Quanto dinheiro? how much money?
Quantas pessoas? how many persons?
I)emasiado vinho or vinho demais too much wine.
Poucas toalhas (too) few tablecloths.
Muitas collier es (too) many spoons.
63. The partitive genitive with de or d' is also
used in terms equivalent to adjectives denoting the
material of which a thing is made or its origin or
purpose, as:
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 5
Lesson 9.
Um vestido de seda a silk dress.
Um chapeu de palha a straw-hat or bonnet.
Uma camisa de linho a linen shirt or chemise.
Um fato de Id a woollen suit of clothes.
leite de vacca the cow's milk.
A sola de jantar the dining-room.
64. Present Tense of a Yerb of the First
Conjugation (ending: -ar).
Eu acdbo [v'kaftu] I finish
tu acabas you finish
elle, ella, V*. acdba he, she finishes, you finish.
nos acabamos we finish
vos acabaes you finish
elks, ellas, V' s . acabam they (or you) finish.
Participles :
Pres.: acdbando finishing.
Past.: acabado finished.
Palavras.
A refeigdo the refection, a manteiqa the butter
[rrdf&i'suu] meal, repast
/tmvn 'tetys]
chamar [fu 'mar] to call
a vontade the appetite
o almdgo the breakfast [vvdn't&fo]
[al'mosu] as seis (horas) at six (o'clock)
a ceia [sew] the supper
[*rw* eorvfl
vamos ['vvmuf] let us go ! i uma fatia de a slice of bread
f altar [fal'tar] to want pao
a comida the food tomar [tu'tnar] to take
[Ivu'mifo] cortar [kur'tar] to cut
o jantar the dinner
o copo [u'kopu] the glass
ftym'tur]
gosta de likes
jantar to dine ['gaftffoj
a sola de jantar the dining-room o vinho de mesa table-wine
/# ' 'salis fojisn-
'tar]
[u'viyufo-
'mesvj
a hora de almo- the breakfast-
levantar to get up, to
far [u'orvcri- hour
[l&Bn't&r] raise, to lift
almu'sar}
(up)
faga favor (de} please (to)
a mesa to rise from the
['fasvfv 'vor-
table
(de)]
a talhada the slice
(se) fas [faf] if you please
["etts 'fia&v]
favor
a carne [ukarnd] the meat
a cliicara the cup
o presunto the ham
/ 'fikere]
[uprd 'zuntuj
o leite [u'luite] the milk
nove [novd] nine
queria [kyriv] should like
dez [def] ten
The Partitive Article. 67
oj)rato [u'pratu] the plate, dish
a travexsa the dish
a faca [v'fakvj the knife
agora [v'gorv] now
a sobremcsa the dessert i dar [dfir], irr. to give
fvsobrz'meze/ da [da] 1 . ,
a sopa /u'sopuj the soup de [de] } &
a colher the spoon me [ma] me
[vku'Ker] a sede [seffj] the thirst.
o clw fu'fnj the tea
22. Exercicio verbal.
Please to conjugate the present tenses and participles
of the verbs: chamar, jantar, gostar, levantar, cortar. After
some practice you may add a complement and employ a noun
instead of the pronoun of the 3 rd person. You may also prac-
tise the interrogative and negative forms.
28. Exercicio.
Refeicoes.
Chamam para ; o almoco. Vamos para a sala de jantar.
Sao dez boras. E a hora de almocar. Ja aqui estao os
paes 4 , os tios 5 e os primes 6 , faltam ainda os avos 1 . Mama,
faz favor de me dar uma chicara de leite com um pouco de
assucar? Tanibem queria uma fatia de pao e manteiga.
Tenbo mnita vontade, ja a tinba ao levantar-me. tio gosta
do nosso vinho? E vinho de mfisa. De"-me um ovo 2 e uma
talhada de presunto, se faz favor. Quantas pessoas ha a mesa
de jantar? Nove; nao sao muitas. primo Jaime nao tem
prato de sobremgsa, nem colher de cha. Tem faca a menina
Henri quf-ta? Agora tem, mas nfio tinha.
24. Exercise.
When is your dinner-hour? At six [o'clock]. Is (the)
mother already in the dining-room? Yes (she is), but (the)
father and (the) brother Henry are not yet. The soup-plates
(plates of soup) stand (= are) on the table; also dessert-
dishes, coffee-cups and tea-spoons. There is broth (= soup
of meat), a big slice of meat, and potatoes. I should like
also [some] bread and some cheese and some fruits. Give
me a glass of wine and a small quantity of water, if you
please; I am thirsty (= I have thirst). We rise from the table.
Querendo dar mais pratica aos alumnos, p professor podera
fazel-o, reunindo-os como para um almoco, um jantar ou uma ceia,
e fazendo-os pedir e agradecer comestiveis.
1 Os paes the parents (pae e tnae) ; os tios = tio e tia ;
os primos = primo e prima; os avos = avo e avo.
2 avo, ovOj porto, olho and other words which in the singular
have [o], change it into fojin the plural (see 2nd Part, Lesson 5, 18).
5*
68 Lesson 10.
Examples: Estamos a mesa. Ha uma toalha branca na
mesa. Em cima da toalha estao pratos. Nas travessas ha comida.
Tomamos a comida das travessas, pondo-a (putting it} nos nossos
pratos. Os pratos estao em f rente (in front) das pessoas. As tra- j
vessas estao no meio da mesa. Ellas sao ovaes. Os pratos sao j
redondos. A mesa e quadrada. Tomamos cha n'uma chicara e i
vinho n'um copo.
Preguntas: Onde estamos? Que ha na mesa? Onde esta a
toalha? Onde estao os pratos? Que ha nas tra vessas? Onde
esta a comida? Para onde tomamos a comida? Que ha em frente
de cada pessoa? Que ha no meio da mesa? Onde estao as tra- \
vessas? Como sao ellas? etc. etc.
Tenth Lesson. Ligao decima.
The Complements and the Most Frequent
Prepositions.
65. The Portuguese does not speak of a declen-
sion of nouns. He merely distinguishes subject (su-
jeito) and object or complement (complemento) ; and as
for the latter, a complemento directo which corresponds
to the English accusative, and a complemento indirecto
which corresponds to the English dative or genitive.
The latter may also be called the restrictive complement,
as it indicates indeed a restriction in the meaning.
66. The object (accusative) is in the form
equal to the subject (nominative). The compl. indir.
(dative) is introduced by the preposition a, which is
contracted with the definite article into ao, d, aos, us
and with aquelle, etc., into dquelle(s), dquella(s), while
the compl. restrictivo (genitive) is introduced by the pre-
position de, contracted with the article, demonstrative
pronoun, etc., into do(s), da(s), dum(a), dims, deste, etc.
(see First Lesson).
67. The prepositions are always followed by the
accusative that is: by the noun in its unaltered form.
There is no form like the Saxon genitive.
68. Prepositions. Preposigoes.
a [v] to, at, in, within, alem de [v'lvidz] beyond,
towards, against, till, on, besides
upon, with, by, for, after, ante [vntz] before, in presence
according to. of (local)
The Complements and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 69
durante [duruntz] during
em 2 //??, *7in, into, to, on, upon,
during
em f rente de ft'frentddd] in
front of, opposite to
entre ['entre] between, among
excepto [(v)if sdii] except,
save
fora [fvrv] except, save, besides
fora de out of, without
junto a ['guntuv] joined to,
adjacent to
para ['pure] for, towards, to,
in order to
para com towards
por meio [mnu] de, mediante
[medi'vntd] by means of
perante [pd'nmtd] before
por 2 [pur] for, by, through
segundo 1 [sd'gundu] according
to
sob [sufrj] under
sem [svi] without
sobre ['sobrd] on, above
trds or trds de [
desde [degda] since behind.
diante (de) [divntd (dd)J before
69. Examples exemplos [i'zempluf].
Ante o perigo before (the) danger.
Perante Deus, o tribunal, a minlia consciencia.
Before God, the tribunal my conscience.
Antes da sua chegada before his arrival.
Diante (d)a casa before the house.
Na mesa (up)on the table, na parede on the wall, no
ar in the air.
A mesa at table.
Sobre a mesa upon or above the table.
Debaixo do banco under the bench.
Sob o ponto de vista under the point of view.
Para os pobres for the poor.
1 Conforme is used only of something very sure, undoubted?
while segundo is used also of something doubtful.
2 em is contracted with the following article or pronoun
into no, na, nelle, neste, etc. (see 1 st Lesson); por is contracted
with the following article into pelo, pela, pelos, pelas.
antes de //?wfoj de] before
(temporal)
ao lado de \ , , ,, .-,
/m-ziA*/ b y' b y. thes , ide
aope de I of > close "*>
fa't*] I near
ao longo de [uu 'logudd] along
a pesar de [vpz 'zardd] in spite
of, notwithstanding
apds [u'pof] after, behind
ate [v'te:] until
atrds de [u 'tra^da] behind (s.
tras)
atraves de [vtrv'vejda] through
com [Jco] with, at, after, upon,
in
conforme^ [Wformo] accord-
ing to
contra /'Jcdntrv] against
de [dd] of, from, for, by
debaixo de [dd'baifu dd] under,
beneath (s. sob)
abaixo de [v'baifu do] below,
beneath, under
depois de [d&poi-xto] after
70
Lesson 10.
Para comer (in order) to eat.
Para o sul towards south.
Olhar para alguem to look at or after somebody.
Ir pela rua to go through the street.
Trocar por prata to change for silver.
Por engano by mistake.
Feito pelo pintor N. made by the painter N.
Excepto o mzirilio except the neighbour.
Alem do vizinlio besides the neighbour.
Fora de casa out of the house.
Conforme o preceito, as leis.
According to the precepts, the laws.
Segundo a lei, um boato.
According to the law, a rumour.
Junto a esta carta joined to this letter.
Estar ao lado, ao pe de alguem.
To be (sitting, standing, etc.) at the side of somebody.
Estar com alguem to be with somebody.
Bondoso para com alguem kind to somebody.
Encostar-se contra a parede to lean against the wall.
Atrds de or trds (de) a casa behind the house.
Palavras.
Comprar
[kom 'prar]
acoisafu'ko'izv]
amigo, -a, adj.
to buy
a loja
a mercearia
[vmdrsiu 'riu]
o caixeiro
[ukai 'fviru]
o mostrador
[umufirv ' &or]
vdrio
os generos
a(s) passa(s)
o chocolate
[ufukulah]
me [mdj
os doces
as conservas
[vfko'scrvvf]
the thing
befriended,
kind
the shop
the retail shop
the clerk
the counter
various
the goods,
victuals
the raisin(s)
the chocolate
me
the sweetmeats
the preserves
a laranja
[vlv'rugu]
a noz [v'nof]
a avela [aw'lv]
diz [dif]
ver [ver]
o figo [u'fiyu]
o damasco
[ufte'mtifku]
a caixa [e 'kttifsj
a amendoa
[a'menduie]
o vidro [u'viffru]
a lata [ulatv]
o pau [upau] de
chocolate
o cesto /u'seftu]
mats [watf]
a conta [ukontv]
o lojista
[ulu' giftu]
o charuto
[ufe 'rutuj
the orange
the nut, walnut
the hazelnut,
filbert
says
to see
the fig
the apricot
the chest
the almond
the glass, pane
the tin box
the cake of
chocolate
the basket
but
the bill
the shopkeepe
the cigar
The Complements and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 71
perto de near to
a rua [v'rruv] the street
a praQa the square
[TS 'prasu]
esta^ao central central rail-
do caminho way-station
de ferro
ftftv 'svu sen-
'tralduku 'miyu-
dd'ferru]
o portao the portal,
[pur'tuu] porch
em forma de in the shape of
ferradura a horseshoe
[t'formv-
a escada /#?/- the staircase,
'ka&v] stairs
o elevador the elevator,
[ullwv 'fror] lift
conduz [konduf] .le&&8
<i plataforma the passengers'
[uplistv 'form's] platform
(dos viajantfs)
nos [nuj] us
$ubimos we ascend,
[su'bimufj mount, go up
.gar. (French)
estende-se extends,
fif'tend9S9]
stretches
a entrada
[um'trn&v]
o tunnel
[u'tuntl]
o tnonte
[u'montd]
o comprimento
[ukompri-
'w&ntu]
o kittmetro
[hi 'lomdtru]
o aluguel
the entry
the tunnel
the mountain
the length
the kilometre
the hire, rent
uma casa de
a house to be
aluauel or
let, a tene-
d'aluguer
ment house
uma casa minha
a house of my
own
desejar
to desire, wish
[ddzi'$ar]
mostrar
to show
[muf'trar]
andar
to go
[vn 'darj
pagar
to pay
[pu 'gar]
morar j
[mu'rar]
dwell, to live
viver [vi'verj }
apresentar
to offer,
[upmen 'tar]
present.
25. Leitura.
Numa loja.
Desejo comprar algumas coisas para pessoas amigas e da
minha familia. Entro n'uma loja. E uma mercearia. Falo
com o caixeiro que esta atras do mostrador. Elle mostra-me
varios generos: chocolate, doces, conservas, laranjas, nozes,
avelas, e diz: V a - Ex a - deseja v6r mais? Ainda tenho nrai-
tas caixas de passas, de figos e damascos seccos; grande mi-
mero de latas de conserva, muitos cestos de laranjas, diizias
de garrafas de vinho doce, saccos cheios de nozes e de amn-
doas. Compro alguns paus de chocolate, uns vidros com
doces, duas garrafas de vinho do Porto e mais coisas. Pago
a, conta do lojista e apresento a um amigo o vinho e uma
aixa de charutos: a tia um arratel de chocolate; a men
primo uma lata de conservas, e umas laranjas de Setubal a
minha irma.
72 * Lesson 11.
25a. Exercise.
The JRocio.
We live in Lisbon in the Avenida da Liberdade. Near;
to this street there is the Rocio, a large square. On this
square is a monument of Peter the Fourth and the Theatre.
Opposite to the theatre Dona Maria is the central railway
station Rocio. We enter by a porch in the shape of a horse-
shoe. By the side of the stairs there is an elevator. By
means of this elevator we ascend the upper passengers' plat-
form. The railway platform is behind the passengers' plat-
form and extends up to the entry of a tunnel which leads
us through the mountain. This tunnel has a length of some
kilometres.
ConYersacJio.
Onde mora(m) V a ( s )- Ex a ( s )- . . . o(s) seu(s) amigo(s)? . . . a(s)
senhora(s) Teixeira?
Mora(m) n'uma casa de aluguel ou n'uma casa sua?
A quern da V. o sen lapiz? . . a sua penna? . . . os sens
livros ?
Onde compra o seu papel ? . . . os seus charutos ?
Onde 6 o theatre Dona Maria?
For meio de qu6 subimos a plataforma superior da
esta^ao do Rocio?
Onde e o elevador?
caes da esta^ao do caminho de ferro, onde e?
Como se chama a esta9ao?
Que outra coisa tern o mesmo nome?
Que ha n'uma [loja de] mercearia?
Que deseja comprar?
A quern deseja apresentar o que compra?
Eleventh Lesson, Li<jao decima primeira.
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and
Number.
70. The Portuguese adjective is, like its sub-
stantive, variable in gender and number (cf. Lessons 2
and 3). There are 2 classes of adjectives:
1. The qualifying or attributive adjective (adjectivo
qualificativo or attributive), which attributes to the sub-
stantive any quality, thus representing the adjective in
its proper meaning: a grande torre, o homem alto, a
mesa e redonda.
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 73
2. The determinative adjective, which renders its
substantive prominent among and distinguishes it from
others e.g., esta casa, aquelle livro, cada alumno, mmha
irma, etc. These latter will be treated among the pro-
nouns (see L. 24).
71. The attributive adjective divides, according
to the form, into two classes of adjectives (Please to
repeat the rules given in 38 40):
(a) The adjectives unifornies i.e., those with only
one form for both sexes or genders and consequently
invariable. They consist of
1. Those ending in -e, -/, -ar, -az, -is, -oz, -im,
-ea and -6, and also by -s in a syllable not accentuated
(cf. 36).
2. Commum, common also has only one form for
both genders; and so have the Latin comparatives in
-or: anterior id., former; posterior id., latter; superior
id., upper; inferior id., lower; maior greater; menor
smaller, minor; melhor better; peor worse; etc. As for
the plural, they follow the rule of the words ending
by -r: super iores, etc.
(b) The adjectives Hformes i.e., those which have
two forms and consequently a special termination for
the feminine gender. To these belong all adjectives end-
ing by any other but the above mentioned termination,
namely:
1. Those ending by -o not accentuated and pre-
ceded by i, u or a consonant: frio, mutuo, justo, bon-
doso.
2. Those ending by -u preceded by a consonant:
mi, cru.
3. Those ending by -ao, -eu (-eo), -or (-or), -es (-es),
-om, -urn: sao, liebreu, tutor, ingles, bom, nenJmm.
72. Examples.
A. Adjectives Uniformes.
Singular. Plural
Leve [levd] light (of weight) Those ending by a vowel
verde ['verddj green take an s:
differente [difd'rentd] id. leves, verdes, differentes
74
Lesson 11.
leal [ti'al] faithful, loyal
amiable,
amdvel [v '
lovely
legivel [If 3 wet] legible
fdcil ['fasil] easy
gentil [jen'til] gentle
azul [v'zul] blue
singular [sigu'lar] id.
capaz [kv'paf] capable
feliz [fd'lif] happy
veloz [vd'ldf] quick
ruim [rru'%] bad, naughty
so [so] only, alone
femea ['femiv] female
simples ['slmpP/J simple
leaes or leais (al becomes aes
or ais)
am,dveis (el becomes eis)
legiveis (el becomes eis)
fdceis (il not accented: eis)
gentis (il accented: is)
asms (ul becomes ues)
singular es (adj. ending by -r
take es)
capazes (adj. ending by az take
es)
felises (adj. ending by intake es)
velozes (adj. ending by o#takees)
ruins (m changes into ns)
sos (those in 6 add s)
femeas (those in ea add s)
simples (s remains unaltered).
B. Adjectives Biformes.
Singular.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Quieto [ki'etu]
frio [friuj
formdso (s. 74)
nu fnu]
sao [svu]
christao [krif'tvu]
alemdo '
aldeao
comildo
[kumi '
beirdo [bvi'rvu]
breu]
'deu]
Jiebreu [I'
judeu [gu'deu
animador
[vmmv'dor]
portugms
torto [tortu]
(s. 74)
quieta quiet
fria cold
formosa beautiful
nua naked, bare
sd healthy, sound,
wholesome
christa Christian
alemd German
aided rustic, rural
comilona glutto-
nous, greedy
beiroa or beird
of the Beira
liebrea Hebrew
judia Jewish
animadora
encouraging
portuguesa
Portuguese
iorta crooked,
tortuous
quietas
Plural.
Masculine. Feminine,
quietos
frios
formosos
nus
saos
cliristdos
alemdes
aldedes
comiloes
beiroes
hebreus
judeus
animadores
formosas
nuas
sds
cJiristds
alemds
aldeds
comilonas
beiroas or
beirds
hebreas
judias
animadoras
Portugueses portuguesas
tortos tortas.
73. The feminine form of these adjectives is
obtained as follows:
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 75
(a) Those ending by unaccented -o change -o into
branco, branca.
(b) Those ending b}^ -u, preceded by a consonant,
-a: cru, crua raw, unripe.
(c) Those ending in -do lose the -o: vao, vd (or
vain.
N.B. The adjectives augmentativos 1 form their fe-
minine in -ona : comilao, comilona. - - Beirdo (native of
the province of Beira) forms beiroa or beird.
(d) Those ending in -eo (eu) change this diphthong
into -ea feivj : hebreu, hebrea.
Exceptions. Judeu, judia; sandeu, sandia foolish.
(e) Those ending in -or add -a: abrasador, -a
burning.
Exceptions. Incolor colourless; bicolor (tricolor) of two
(three) colours; multic(ol)or of many colours; semsabor tasteless,
insipid, which are uniforme.
(f) Those ending in -es (-eg) add -a: f ranees,
francesa.
Exceptions. Cortes courteous, polite; descortes un polite;
$oez low, vile, which are uniform.
74. Those adjectives which in their last syl-
lable but one have close o change this sound into
open o in the feminine (as well as in the plural) form.
To these belong:
1. All adjectives ending in -oso (or -050) : e.g., for-
moso [fur'mozu], formosa ffur'mosvj; formosos [fur-
'mozuf], formosas [fur'mozuf].
2. The adjectives cMco hatched, brood(ing); grosso
big; morno tepid; novo new, young; pdrco dirty; torto
crooked; fern.: grossa ['grosvj, f'mornvj, etc.
3. The past participle of por to put, and compound
words e.g., posto ['poftu], posta f'poftv], disposto, -a;
exposto, -a.
1 Augmentativos are those adjectives (and substantives) which
change their ending into or add the syllable -ao, sometimes pre-
ceded by some intercalary letter or letters, thus expressing high
degrees of a quality (in substantives an augmentation of shape,
weight, etc.) e.g., magando (from magano malicious, knavish [per-
son]); espertalhcio (from esperto brisk) cunning [fellow].
76
Lesson 11.
Preliminary Remark. By adding the syllable -mente to
tlie feminine form of the qualifying adjective, we form the
adverb ; e.g., antigo, antigamente formerly. CompreJiende-se
facilmente it is easily to be understood. N.B. Sometimes we-
may employ the adjective form instead of the adverbial, espe-
cially if accompanied by ser: facil de compreJiender. Elle
foi direito (instead of direitamente) para casa he went directly
home. (More particulars will be found under Adverbs.)
Palavras.
A visita [vd f zita]
the visit
a pelle [pzi]
the skin
passar Item
to be in good
revestir
to vest, cover
(mdl)
(bad) health
[rrdvtf'tir]
como passou?
how do you do ?
particulars ente
particularly
como tern pas-
*
fptirt}kuler-
sado ?
m&nto]
oxald [ofu'la]!
would to God!
o calgado
shoes, boots,
a importancia
the importance
[Wsaftu]
footgear
[impur 'tvs}u]
amottecido 1
softened
receitar
to prescribe,
[umuld' si&u]
[rrdsisi' tar]
order
servem f'szrvvij
serve
deve ['dtvdj
must
tirar de [tirar
to tear off
a consequencia
the con-
dd]
[kos9 'kwesw]
sequence
a beterrala
red beet, beet-
apesar de
in spite of
[bdtd 'rrabv]
root
[epd 'zarddj
raspar
to scrape,
pleno [plenuj
diligent e
full
diligent
[rruf'par]
a raiz [rns'if]
shave
the root
[ddli'$entd]
carnudo
fleshy, pulpous
estudioso
studious
[kvr'mio'u]
fiftufo 'ozuj
encarnado
red
assiduo
assiduous
[ikur'na&u]
[v 'siffwuj
o mel [met]
honey
premiado
rewarded
o vinagre
vinegar
fprdmt 'aduj
[vi 'nagrzj
a alegria
the joy, merri-
azedo [v'zedu]
sour
[eld 'griu]
ment
amargo
bitter
illustrado
illustrated,
[is 'm argu]
ftluf'tra&u]
instructed
o xarope
syrup
quadrupede
quadruped
[fv'ropa]
fkivn 'ffrupdfo]
o vestudrio
clothing,
a vitella
the calf
Viftu'ariu]
clothes.
fv} 'tele]
26. Leitnra.
A visita.
Bons dias, minha senhora! Como esta V a - Ex a -?
Bons dias, sr. doutor! Estou boa, obrigada! E o doutor r
1 The ending -ido is that of the past participle of the 2 n *
and 3rd conjugations, the 2nd C onj. having the infinitive in ~er and
the 8 r d in -ir.
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 77
como tern passado? -- Nao estou muito bom; tenbo estado
"(or andado) constipado ha algum tempo. Oxala que nao
seja nada de importancia! Quern, como o doutor, tem de re-
ceitar saude aos outros, nao dove estar nem ser doente. -
Hei de fazer para estar bom depressa. E uma consequencia
do tempo ruim. Apesar de estarmos em pleno^verao, os dias
estao frios e chuvosos como emnovembro. E verdade, tem
sido um verao pouco agradavel. Onde esta o filho de V a -
Ex a -? -- Esta na aula. ^ E um menino muito intelligente.
- Diligente e assiduo e o que elle e. Foi premiado por ter
sido o melhor alumno durante o anno passado. Tera sido
nrua grande alegria para V a - Ex a - E foi. Nao estaria (or
nao havia de estar) satisfeita, se nao fosse assim. Tendo sido
-estudioso em rapaz, sera illustrado quando for homem.
27. Exercicio oral e por escripto.
First repeat the rules of Lesson 2.
What is the plural of alto, mdu, orfao, sdo, alemdo,
<castellao, aldedo, comum, portugues, simples, brutal, azul, fdcil,
Mbil, cruel, civil, ruim, irmao, bondoso, torto, menor, maior,
superior, encantador ?
What is the feminine of the same adjectives?
What is the plural of the feminine form?
Join the uniform and biform adjectives to substantives
of different gender and number; e.g., um pensamento chris-
-tao, uma obra christa; missionaries christdos; igrejas chris-
ids, etc.
28. Translation.
The quadrupeds are covered with skins. The skins of
some animals serve particularly to make shoes and boots.
The skin, after being torn off the animal, is softened and
scraped. The beetroot is a plant with (de) [a] 1 very thick
and fleshy root of white or red colour. Out of the white
beetroot sugar is made. [The] Sugar, [the] honey and
|the] syrup are sweet; [the] vinegar is sour, and [the] beer
Is bitter.
Conversa^ao.
De que sao revestidos os (animaes) quadrupedes?
Para que 6* que nos servem as pelles dos bois, das vac-
cas, das vitellas?
Gomo se prepara a pelle, depois de tirada do animal?
De que plant a, produzida na Europa, se faz assucar?
1 The words in [] are not to be translated.
78 Lesson 12.
Que parte da beterraba e que serve para fazer assucar ?
Como & a raiz da beterraba?
Que qualidade tern o assucar? o mel? o xarope?
Conheceis fructos que tambem sao doces?
Que qualidade tern o vinagre? a cerveja? o sal?
Qual e o gosto das coisas que sao riem doces, nem aze-
das ou salgados ou amargos?
Nomeie um liquido que da sua natureza d insipido!
Twelfth Lesson. Li$ao decima segunda.
The Position of the Attributive Adjective.
75. The position of the adjective is greatly
influenced by: 1. its greater or lesser importance (if
accented or unaccented), 2. its category, and 3. the-
harmony of the phrase.
76. The following rules should be noted:
1. The unaccented adjective, which, being rather
ornamental than discriminative, forms a natural in-
herent characteristic, precedes its noun: um bom livro?
mau tempo ; a branca neve the white snow ; o doce mel >
a negra sorte the dark destiny. (Here bom and mau
are unaccented; branca and doce do not discriminate;
negra is employed ornamentally and figuratively). Of.::
um livro bom, tempo mau, papel branco, fructa doce+
capa negra. Of. :
A interessante crianga uma confer encia interessante^
Um simples aperto de mao a simple pressing of the-
hand; uma phrase simples; um vestido simples.
Um grande homem a great man.
um homem grande a tall man.
Remark. To this group belong also those adjectives
employed in mere formal addresses, as in writing letters, etc.. ,
e.g., Illustrissimo Senhor, Excellentissima Senhora; de
ya. -fi x a. attento servidor, respeitoso admirador, etc.; yet in i
these finishing formulas they may also follow, especially if :
several are employed to accompany the same noun; e.g., ad-
mirador respeitoso e gratissimo (abbr. : adm or - resp. - e grat mo -)~
2. The accented adjective, which, being rather
discriminative than ornamental, forms a mere accidental
characteristic, folloivs its noun. To this group belong r
The Position of the Attributive Adjective.
(a) Adjectives denoting nationality, religion, dignity,
employment, material e.g. :
A literatura espanhola the Spanish literature.
um pintor neerlandes a Dutuh painter
I a igreja cathdlica the Catholic church
a guarda municipal the town militia
o governador civil the (Lord) Mayor
o gado lanifero (or lanigero) wool-bearing animals
dgua mineral mineral water
a industria mineira the mining (industry).
(b) Adjectives denoting qualities perceptible by the
senses e.g., colour, shape, size, taste, smell, etc. e.g.:
Uma sola comprida a long hall
uma janella ogival a pointed or arched window
uma faca aguda a pointed knife
um vestido castanho a brown dress
uma herva aromdtica an aromatic herb
uma amtndoa amarga a bitter almond,
(but: uma amarga decepgao, because here the adjective
is employed figuratively).
(c) The verbal adjectives or participles e.g.:
Uma janella pintada a painted window
a rainha reinante the queen -regent.
(d) Adjectives accompanied by an adverb or an
adverbial phrase, such as muito very, pouco little,
lastante enough, demais or demasiado too, tdo so, etc.
Uma carta muito extensa a very long letter
uma tarefa pouco agraddvel a rather disagreeable task
uma porta demasiado estreita too narrow a door
um aluguel relativamente barato a hiring of relative
cheapness
um Jiomem digno de fe a man worthy of belief.
3. Many adjectives may precede or follow the noun,
this being often without any importance, but still
oftener denoting difference.
Um bom homem a good- um homem bom an honest
natured man man
um pobre homem a poor man um homem pobre an indigent
(to be lamented, unhappy) man
certa noticia a certain news uma noticia certa exact tidings
um bello Jiomem an excellent um Jiomem bello a handsome
man man
80 Lesson 12.
meu caro amigo my dear uma viagem cam an expensive
friend journey
uma alto, personagem a high um tecto alto a high roof
personage
um franco riso a frank a entrada franca free entry
laughter
uma leve duvida a slight doubt um fardo leve a light burden
meu proprio proceder [pru- uma maneira propria an ap-
SdderJ my own behaviour propriate manner
o proprio amor real love o amor proprio self-love.
77. If a noun is accompanied by several ad-
jectives, the harmony of the phrase decides the po-
sition of the adjective, yet without contradicting the
rules above. Cf. : urn bello dia um dia bello e (and !)
soallieiro (or: um bello dia soalheiro, as a fine day gene-
rally is a sunny day; uma grande batalha sanguinolenta
a great and bloody battle ; but : uma batalha sanguino-
lenta e victoriosa, as in English ; os tenues ramos floridos
or os ramos tenues e floridos the thin, blooming twigs, etc.
78. Though as a rule short adjectives precede
the noun, there are also those which always follow
it e.g. : frio, secco, gordo, guente, ameno, etc.
79. An adjective qualifying two substantives
must be plural:
Paulo e Carlos estdo crescidos.
Paul and Charles have grown, are tall.
Minlia irma e minha prima sao applicadas.
My sister and my cousin are diligent.
If the nouns (or pronouns) are of different genders,
the adjective is put in the plural masculine, provided
the nouns denote persons or living beings e.g.:
Homens e mulheres estavam satisfeitos.
Men and women were satisfied.
If, on the contrary, things are spoken of, the gender
of the last substantive prevails e.g.:
Contos e anecdotas bonitas, whereas :
Anecdotas e contos bonitos.
80. To a noun in the plural are added several
adjectives in the singular, if each adjective would be ac-
companied, when alone, by the noun in the singular;
As linguas inglesa e portuguesa.
The English and Portuguese languages.
The Position of the Attributive Adjective.
81
Palavras.
A J'abitamo the dwelling
a trave f'travd] the beam, joist
[ebiti? 'sen] (-place), habi-
a viga I'viyvJ the little beam
tation
or joist
habitar to dwell, live
a lenha ['IvyvJ the wood
o alicerce the foundation,
o lenho ['Ivyu] the block
[nli'sersd] basis
aparar to cut, clip
a parede the wall
[vpv 'rarj
[pe 're&d]
o machado the axe
o pavimento the pavement
[me 'fa&u]
ipvvt 'mentu]
a face [fvsd] the side
o sobrado the^floor
o quadrado the square,
[su'ftra&u]
[kwv '&ra&u] quadrangle
assentar to rest, settle
o rectangulo the rectangle
cresce [krsf'sa] grows up
[TVE 'tvgulu]
seguro [ss'guru] safe
o telhado the roof
o casco ['kafkuj the skull
[tv 'fiaffu]
geral [&'ral] general
atelha['tvfiv] the tile
geralmente, em generally
assente [v 'sentd] sitting; firm.
geral
solid
o tijolo [ti'golu] the (burnt)
a ripa ['rripu] the lath
brick
o zinco ['zlkuj the zinc
o adobo [v '&obu] the sun-dried
a lousa ['lozv] the slate
brick, adobe
tornar [tur 'nar] to make
o barro [ubarru] the clay
demasiado
cozido baked
[ddmuzi'a&u] too (much)
[fat'zi&u]
quente [kente] hot
cru [IcruJ raw
inclinado inclined
a madeira the wood
[ikli 'nad*u]
mv'fofrvj
a facilidade the facility
o madeiro the block
[fesdlt 'fraffdl
[nw 'tfuiru]
a chuva ['fuvvj the rain.
29. Leitnra.
A habitagao.
Os homens habitam em casas. Uma casa tern alicerce,
parades, pavimentos on sobrados, e telhado. alicerce
e a raiz d'onde a casa cresce. Sem bom alicerce nao ha casa
segura. As paredes sao o casco da casa; geralmente sao feitas
de pedra, mas ha paredes feitas de tijolos e tambem de
adobos. Os tijolos sao de barro muito bem cozido. Os adobos
sao tambem de barro, mas cru. Ha barro vermelho e barro
branco. Os pavimentos on sobrados sao em geral de madeira.
,0s sobrados assentam sobre vigas que sao madeiros mais on
menos grosses; e as vigas assentam sobre as traves, que sao
lenhos grossos e compridos, aparados a machado, com quatro
faces regulares em rectangulo. telhado e geralmente for-
mado de telhas assentes sobre ripas. Ha telhados feitos de
zinco, e tambem os ha feitos de lousa. Mas o zinco e a
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 6
v2 Lesson 12.
lousa tornam as casas demasiado quentes no verao. Os te-
Ihados sao inclinados para deixarem correr com facilidade a
agua das chuvas.
(Trindade Coelho : primeiro Livro de Leitura.)
30. Exercicio oral ou por escripto.
The verbs of the present tense of No. 29 to be changed :
1. into the preterite imperfeito, 2. into the futuro, 3. into the
presente do conjunctiva, 4. into the pret. imperf. do con- \
junctivo.
N.B. Cresce(r) forms 1. crescia, 2. crescera, 3. cres^a.
4. crescesse; assentar forms 1. assentavam, 2. assentarao;
3. assentem, 4. assentassem; tornar forms like assentar. -
In the Subjunctive begin each sentence by que.
Ex.: Os homens habitavam em casas. Uma casa tinha
alicerce . . .
Os homens habitarao em casas. Uma casa tera
alicerce . . .
Nao ha quern duvide que os homens habitem em
casas; que uma casa tenha alicerces . . .
Nao havia quern duvidasse que os homens habi-
tassem . . . etc.
31. Tema.
(The) Portuguese literature is very interesting, but little
known. The prevailing religion in Portugal is the Catholic.
In the Museum "das Janellas Verdes" in Lisbon are pictures
of Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, and German artists.
On (the) Portuguese soil are to be found many springs of
mineral water. In Germany there are besides the national
wines also French and Portuguese wines and good German
beer. Men and women are small in that country. The books
and letters on the table were open. The Spanish and Italian
languages are very melodious. Cervantes was a great Spa-
nish poet, and Raphael a celebrated Italian painter.
Conyersa^ao.
Se fosse rico, estaria mais contente ou feliz?
Quando eras novo, em que eolle~gio estavas?
Teremos de continuar a inarcha apesar de estarmos
cansados ?
Teve V a - Ex a - a visita d'uns parentes affastados (dis-
tant) antes de ir ao campo?
meu amigo (you) falar-lhe-ha, se ella estiver em sua,
casa?
Comparison of the Adjective. 83
No caso que nao esteja, dara o meu recado?
E este o caminho para a proxima cidade?
Esteja V a - Ex a - descansado (easy), que este e o caminho
certo (right).
Exercise : Conjugate the phrases of the conversation by
changing persons, numbers and genders ; as well as
the interrogative form into the negative or positive,
or negative-interrogative form.
Thirteenth Lesson. Licjao decima terceira.
Comparison of the Adjective.
81. The comparison of Portuguese adjectives is
analogous to the compound form of the English. As
for the Comparative, we distinguish 1. that of a higher
degree (comparativo de superioridade) and 2. that of a
lower degree (comparativo de inferior idade). The former
is formed by putting the adverb mais (more) before
the adjective, the latter by employing the word menos
(less) e.g.:
Positivo. Compar. de sup. Compar. de inferior.
bello t -a beautiful 1 mais bello, mais menos hello, menos
bella more beau- bella less beauti-
tiful ful
N.B. There is no comparison equivalent to the
simple or Anglo-Saxon form of English comparison
e.g.: alto high; mais alto higher; Superlative o mais
alto the highest.
82. The Superlative too has two forms; we
distinguish :
1. the relative Superlative (superlative relativo or ex-
clusivo). This compares several objects and denotes that a
certain quality exists in one of them in the highest
(or lowest) degree relatively to others of the same kind ;
excluding these from this same degree. It is formed by
the words o mais and o menos (cf. 81N.B.), the more
and the most;
1 In the comparison the adjective is subject to the same
rules concerning gender and number as in the positive form.
84
Lesson 13.
2. the absolute Superlative (superlative absoluto or
simples) which denotes simply that an object possesses a
quality in a very high degree. It does not compare
nor select, but attributes in an absolute manner some
quality in a very high degree. It corresponds to the
English most preceded by the indefinite article, or to
the adverbs very, extraordinary, extremely, etc.
The absolute or simple superlative is formed by
the ending -issimo added to the adjective (see the follow- '
ing Lesson).
83. There are some adjectives which, besides
their regular comparison, have an irregular Latin one,
as well as an absolute superlative.
Superlative Superlative abso-
Positivo. Comparative. relative or Into or simples
exclusive. superlative.
alto high
mais alto, su-
o mais alto, o su-
(oorum) altissi-
perior 'higher
premo, o summo
mo, supremo,
the highest
summo very
high, (a) most
high.
bom good
mais bom (rare),
o mais bom (rare),
(o or urn) 6ptimo\
melhor better
o melhor better
the best.
mau bad,
mais mau, peor
o mais mau, o peor
(o or urn) pessi-
evil
worse
the worst
mo very bad.
grande
mais grande
o mais grande
(o or urn) mdxi-
great
(rare), maior
(rare), o maior y
mo very great.
greater
o mdximo the
greatest
pequeno
mais pequeno
o mais pequeno
(o or um) mini-
little,
more little,
the most little,
mo very little,
small
menor smaller
o menor, o mi-
very small.
mwothe smallest
Please to notice that alto in its proper meaning,
mau in its meaning evil, and pequeno in its meaning
little, have a regular comparison; cf.: a drvore mais
alta: a mais alia or a suprema confianga; o summo
pontifice (pope); o solo mais mau; a medida peor; o pe-
da%o mais pequeno:, a menor duvida.
Comparison of the Adjective. 85
As an outer characteristic of the Latin absolute
Superlative you may notice that it can be employed
not only with the definite, but (and mostly) also with
the indefinite article e.g. : a hora suprema; umaprova su-
prema (or uma suprema or summa prova) de amor (N.B.
summo, -a always precedes the substantive.
84. "Much" before a comparative is bem or
iituito, which latter is also employed in the form of the
absolute Superlative: muito or muitissimo melkor; bem
mais alto, bem maior. These two adverbs, before a
Positive, are translated by "very" or "most": bem or
muito simples = very or most simple.
85. "Little" before a comparative is pouco,
equally employed in the superlative form: (muito) pouco
melhor.
N.B. The adverbs mais and menos, employed in
the comparison, are themselves comparatives (of muito
and pouco).
86. "Than" after a comparative is translated
by que or do que. By que (or do que), if the 2 nd degree
of a comparison is employed without a verb; only by
do que if it contains a verb e.g. :
A torre e mais alia que, (or do que) uma casa.
A torre e mais alta do que nos pensamos.
87. "As . . as" before an adjective in a com-
parison (comparative d'igualdade) is translated by (tao)
. . . como e.g.:
A casa e (tao) alta como uma torre.
88. "So (much . . .) that" in a comparativo d'igual-
dade is translated:
1. by tao . . . que which immediately precedes the
adjective: Tao adversa nos foi a sorte, que ... so ad-
verse was Destiny to us, that . . .
2. by tanto que, which is employed separated from
its adjective: Tanto nos foi adversa a sorte que . . .
89. "All the more (so), as," "the (more) . . . the
(more)" in a comparative is translated by tanto (mais);
quanto (or que)" e.g.:
86
Lesson 13.
A nossa surpresa foi tanto maior, tanto mais agraddvel,
quanto (or que} estavamos longe de esperdl-a.
Our surprise was so much the greater, all the more
agreeable, as we were very far from expecting it.
Quanta mais, melhor the more, the better.
Quanto mais tern, (tanto) mais quer.
The more he has, the more he wants.
Remark. Sometimes a Portuguese adjective has the form \
of a Comparative without there being a comparison:
Uma casa por mais modesta que seja, ha de ser limpa.
However modest be a house, it must be clean.
Por menos lisongeiro que fosse o nosso acolhimento . . .
Although our reception was little nattering . . .
Palavras.
A trovoada
the thunder-
eis ahi [eizv'i] that is (the
[truvu'a&e]
storm
reason)
o perigo
the danger,
porque
why
[pd'rigu]
peril
Ipur'queJ
perigoso
dangerous
a cruz [IcrufJ
the cross
[pari'gozu]
collocado
put
a gente [jentd]
people
[~kulu"ka&u]
o conductor
the conductor
bent como
as well as
[Mndu'tor]
fbe'komuj
a electricidade
the electricity
o ponto ['pontu] the point
[ilstrdsi '&a&d]
elevado
elevated, high
a atmosphera
the atmo-
[ilz'vaffu]
[vtmuf'fsrv]
sphere, air
terminam
terminate
a pessoa
the person
[tdr'minvu]
[pd 'son]
o objeto
the object
portanto
consequently
[obd r $etu]
[pur'tvntu]
o metal [md'tal] the metal
a probabilidade
the probability
de preferencia
with predi-
fprubvtoli-
[ddprdfd-
lection
f fiafi]
'renstu]
produzir
to produce
atacado
affected
[prudu'zir]
a descarga
the discharge
[vtv'ka&u]
o local [lu'kalj the locality
[dif'kargv]
electrico
[i'letriku]
electrical
o compartimento the room
[Wmpurti-
'mentuj
isolado [izu-
isolated
afastado
o raio [rraiu]
the flash of
[ufuftafru]
distante
distant
lightning
[diftvnte]
cae [kai]
falls
a chamine
the chimney
proximo (de)
next, near (to) [f-emt'ne]
['prosimu]
\ a altura[at'turvj the height
Comparison of the Adjective.
quer diser that is (to say)
[Tcerdi ' zer]
2)or exemplo for instance
[pwri'eemplu]
pelo menos at least
[plu'menufj
aindaque (subj.) though, even
[v'mdv Ted]
de mais a mais all the more
[djmaiz- so, moreover
aguentar
[u given 'tar]
pois que as
ficar enxarcado
fifvr'l&ffuj
ficar molliado
[mu'fiaffuj
o fato ffatu]
attreito
[u '
87
to suffer, bear
to become wet
or drenched
the clothing
affected by
82. Leitura.
A trovoadct.
E perigoso estarmos no meio de muita gente durante
uma trovoada, porque sendo cada pessoa um conductor da
electricidade da terra para a atmosphera, quanto maior for o
niimero das pessoas, tanto maior sera o niimero de condu-
ctores e portanto a probabilidade de se produzir a descarga
ele"ctriea. As arvores isoladas, os edificios altos etc. sao peri-
gosos quando ha trovoadas, pois o raio cae primeiro no que
mais alto, por ser o que Ihe fica mais proximo. Eis ahi por
que as cruzes altas collocadas sobre as egrejas, bem como o
ponto mais elevado das torres principalmente quando estas
terminam em algum objecto de metal mais ou menos agudo
- sao de preferencia atacados pelo raio. Dentro das casas,
o melhor local para se estar (for people to stay) durante uma
trovoada e o meio das salas, dos quartos ou dos comparti-
mentos, pois quanto mais afastado se estiver das parades ou
das chamines, menor sera o perigo.
(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)
88. Tema.
In the field, the best place during a thunderstorm is the
one, where we are the most separate, 1 [from] and never so near 2
[to] (de) a tree that the distance of it be less than its height. That
is [to say,] if, for instance, a tree has 3 a height often meters,
we must be distant from it by at least ten meters. Even
if we have 4 to bear the rain and become 5 drenched, all the
more so as (pois que de mais a mais) (the) wet clothing is
[a] better conductor than the dry [one]. (The) women are
less affected by the flash of lightning, than (the) men.
* See 81 footnote,
junctive. 5 Infinitive.
see 88, 1. 3 Gerund. 4 Sub-
88 Lesson 14.
Conversa^ao.
Qual e o lo^ar I mais se S ur . \ durante a tro '
I menos pengoso J voada:
(1) dentro das casas?
(2) no campo?
Onde e perigoso estarmos emquanto ha trovoada?
Porque (por que razao)?
raio, onde cae de preferencia?
Porque?
Quando sera menor o perigo de sermos atacados pelo
raio?
Quaes (sao) as pessoas menos attreitas ao raio?
Fourteenth Lesson. Li<jao decima quarta.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.
90. As already mentioned ( 82, 2), there is
beside the relative Superlative an absolute one, and also
an absolute comparative form of a certain number of
adjectives. This comparative absolute* is of Latin origin
and has the accented ending -or. They are the folio--
wing:
Comparative. Superlative.
anterior [untdn'or] former, anterior
posterior [pufidn'or] latter, hinder,
posterior
citerior [sitdn'or] hithermost
ulterior [uttdn'or] ulterior ultimo ['ultimu]
exterior [(v)'iftdri' or] outer, exterior, extremo [iftremu]
external
interior [vntdri'or] inner, inside, in- intimo ['Intimu]
terior
superior [supan'or] higher, superior supremo [su'premu],
summo ['sumu]
inferior [infen'or] lower, inferior mfimo ['fnfimuj.
91. Employed in a relative sense i.e., when
comparing several objects these adjectives are followed
by the preposition a (to)e .g. :
A descoberta da America e anterior d da India.
The discovery of America is anterior to that of India.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative. 89
92. The Superlatives corresponding to the ab-
solute Comparatives are employed in an absolute sense
as well as in a relative e.g.:
A descoberta do Brasil e ulterior d das costas da Africa,
e a da India e a ultima (rel. sup.) das descobertas.
Nos ultimos (abs. sup.) seculos os Portugueses nao fizeram
descobertas de maior valia (= importance).
Remark. Some of these Comparatives and Superlatives
are also employed as substantives, as in English.
93. Most usual is the pure absolute Superlative,
which, without comparing, denotes a very high degree of
a quality. It is formed by adding the ending -issimo to
the root of the adjective, and subject to the same
inflection v.g.: altissimo, -a (from alto) very high; for-
mosissimo, -a (from formoso) most beautiful ; extensissimo,
-a extremely vast.
94. According to the ending of the adjective or
its root, a certain number of them undergo a slight
change in the formation of the superlative absoluto:
(a) The adjectives ending in -co change this ter-
mination into -quissimo : branco, branquissimo. (Exc. :
parco, parsimonious, parcissimo).
(b) Those ending in -go change it into -guissimo,
largo, lar guissimo. (Exc. : amigo, befriended, amicissimo;
antigo, ancient, antiquissimo.)
(c) Those ending in -0 change this letter into c:
feliz, felicissimo.
(d) Those ending in -do (-an) and -m change this
termination into -(a)nissimo: sao, sanissimo; bom, bonis-
simoj commum, communissimo.
(e) Those in -vel form -bilissimo: agradavd, agrada-
biUssimo.
(f) Those in -r and -s form -issimo: particular, par-
ticular issimo, portugues, portuguesissimo.
(g) Those ending in -ftco change this termination
into -ficentissimo : magnifico, magnificcntissimo.
(h) The following adjectives form the absolute
Superlative by adding -illimo: fdcil, easy, facUlimo;
difficil, difficult, difficittimo; humilde, humble, humillimo;
semelhante, similar, similimo.
90 Lesson 14.
(i) The following adjectives form the superlative
in -errimo:
acre sharp, acerrimo.
dspero rough, asperrimo
celebre famous, celeberrimo
integro righteous, integerrimo
livre free, Uberrimo
misero miserable, miserrimo
poire poor, pauperrimo
salubre wholesome, salutary, saluberrimo.
(k) The following adjectives have an irregular
Superlative, derived from the Latin form:
cruel cruel, crudelissimo (beside cruelissimo)
doce sweet, mild, dulcissimo
fiel true, faithful, fidelissimo
frio cold, frigidissimo
geral general, generalissimo
nobre noble, nobilissimo
sdbio wise, learned, sapientissimo
sagrado sacred, holy, sacratissimo
simples simple, simplicissimo.
Note. You must not without any farther consideration
form an absolute Superlative of any adjective. There are a
good many of them that do not admit the addition of -issimo.
If not sure, it will be better to design a high degree of some
quality by employing muito, bem, summamente, etc. e.g.,
muito meigo, bem cortes, altamente lisongeiro, summamente
enfadonho (most tedious).
95. Present Tense of a regular Verb of the
second Conjugation (in er):
dever, must, ought, to be obliged to, to owe.
(For the present tense of the first Conjug. see 64.)
Eu devo feu 'devu] I must, am obliged, owe.
tu deves [tu 'dsvifj 1 you must, are obliged, owe.
elle, ella, V e - deve ['dew] he, she, you must, etc,
tods devemos [de'vemuf] we must, etc.
vos deveis [dz'v&f] you must, etc.
enes t ettas, V as - Ex as - devem ['devvi] they, you must, etc.
Part.pres.: devendo. Part, passado : devido.
1 The verbs which in their last syllable but one have un-
accented short e [9] change this vowel, when accented into close
e [e], if the last syllable contains o or a; and into open e [e], if'
the last svllable has an e.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.
91
34, Exercise.
Conjugate by word of mouth and in writing the Present
and the Compound Perfect (preterite indefinido composto) of
\.parecer 1 [perd'ser] to seem, 2. enternecer 1
to affect, move; 3. estender [iften'der] to extend.
A regiao
Palavras.
the region o perfume the perfume
a extensdo the extension
a myriade the myriad
[frXften'svu]
[m 1 } 'riv&d]
ainvejafi'vegvj the envy
embalsamar to embalm
o encanto enchantment, [wibalsu'mar]
[i"k%ntu] charm
a encosta the slope
caprichar to make a fancy
[i'ktfx]
[faepri'far] of ...
prodigo prodigal
em . . .
['proffiguj
accumular to heap
por toda a parte everywhere
[iskumu 'lar]
tudo [tu&u] everything
enlevar fih'var] to rejoice
perpetuo perpetual
amar [v'marj to love I [pw'pstwuj
a maravilha the wonder
esplender to beam,
[merie 'vifoj
['ifplen ' der] sparkle
raro ['rraru] rare
o riso ['rrizu] the smile
a joia [&WQ] the jewel
a campina the field, plain
lembrar to remember [kvm'pinv]
[lem'brar] a cldusula the clause
a concha ['kofvj the shell ['Wauzulv]
a saphira the sapphire exequivel practicable
[sv'fira] [izi'Ttiviwl]
de dia during day-
subtil [subd'til] subtile
time
tenaz fo'naf] tough,
engastar-se to be enchased
tenacious
[igvf'tarsy] o magistrado the magistracy
semelhar alguem to resemble [mvgif'tradu]
[sjm]''fi>ar] somebody a lei [lv}J the law
o taboleiro the flower-bed | a calamidade the calamity
a esmeralda
emerald
serpentear to wind,
[sdrpenft' ar] meandre
encrustar to incrust
[Ikruftar]
a crista ['hri/tv] the crest
o espectaculo the spectacle
fifpe'takulo]
beijar [b&i'jar] to kiss
ingreme
steep
com respeito a with respect to,
concerning
a vista the view
a residencia the dwelling-
[rasft 1 'densiv] place
chao, ehd plain
atroz [v'trjf] atrocious, cruel
1 c before o and a = $.
92 Lesson 14.
audaz [au'faf] audacious poremfpu'rvi] \ ,
feroz [fs'rofl wild, savage | no entretanto j
particular particular o diadema the diadein.
r] [diu'&emv]
35. Exercise.
Change the followmg adjectives, giving them the form of
the absolute Superlative. Inimigo acre. Pessoa affavel. Sabor
agradavel. Mao amiga. Costumes antigos. Inverno aspero.
Crime atroz. Homem audaz. Boa alma. Papel branco. Su-
jeito capaz. Autores celebres. Campinas chas. Delicto corn-
mum. Dor cruel. Questao difficil. Palavras doces. Hora
feliz. Tigre feroz. Servo fiel. Oausulas exequiveis. Li^ao
facil. Peia ingratidao. Voz fraca. Agua fria. Phrase hu-
milde. Magistrado integro. Lei justa. Vista linda. Vontade
livre. Espectaculo magnifico. Mas novas. Misero estado.
Accao nobre. Casos particulares. Gente pobre. Termos pro-
prios. Calculo provavel. Conselho prudente. Diadema rico.
Verdade sagrada. Sitio salubre. Ares saos. Estilo simples.
Coisa subtil. Substancia tenaz. Terrivel calamidade. Triste
situac,ao. Despesa util. Vaos cuidados.
36. Leitura.
Portugal.
Portugal 6 uina das mais lindas regioes do mundo. Pe-
queno em extensao, de nenhum outro deve ter inveja este pais
de encantos. A natureza parece ter caprichado em accumular
nelle bellezas de toda a ordem, que enlevam os olhos e en-
ternecem a alma. Portugal, minha patria bem-amada, es
uma pequenina 1 maravilha e uma rara joia! Debaixo do teu
ceu quasi sempre azul, que lembra uma concha de saphira,
onde de dia se engasta um formosissimo sol e de noite as mais
bellas estrellas, os teus campos semelham um taboleiro de
esmeralda, que os rios, serpenteando em todas as direc9oes,
encrustam de fios de prata. Montes verdes, cobertos d'arvores
ate as cristas, nao os tern mais pittorescos o mundo todo; -
e beijados por um clima dnlcissimo, que o perfume de my-
riades de flores embalsamam na primavera, os teus valles, as
tuas encostas, os teus campos sao no estio prodigos de fru-
ctos, e por toda a parte, e em tudo, parece esplender, per-
pe"tuo, o riso da natureza. (Trindade Coelho: Pao Nasso.)
37. Tema.
I got (= had) a most amiable letter from the very
learned professor. The airs of this region must be extremely
1 Diminutive of pequena small: a dear little . . .
The Numeral. 93
wholesome. Not only are the airs, but also the water is most
salutary. The climate of the northern countries of Europe is very
cold and rough, while that of the southern countries is extraor-
dinarily mild. The Avenida da Liber dade in Lisbon is a very
large and beautiful street with quite modern houses and
healthy habitations. In the quarter (of the) Mouraria, how-
ever, the streets are very strait and steep, showing extre-
mely poor and miserable little houses. That quarter is very
old; it is [originates] of the times of the Moors, and conse-
quently anterior to the Portuguese monarchy. Though it be
inferior as a dwelling-place, for its views, it is superior to
any other quarter.
Conversa^ao.
Que diz oescriptor Trindade Coelho de Portugal? (see 36).
Em que parece a natureza ter caprichado?
Que e que lembra o ceu de Portugal?
Que semelham os campos?
Como sao os montes?
Como e o clima?
Como sao os valles, as encostas, os campos?
Onde parece esplender, perpetuo, o riso da natureza?
Fifteenth Lesson. Ligao decima quinta.
The Numerals.
Adjectives e Substantives numeraes.
96. There are to be distinguished three classes
of numbers:
1. Cardinal Numbers (mimeros cardinaes);
2. Ordinal Numbers (numeros ordinaes) and
3. Multiplicative Numbers (numeros multiplicativos).
I. Cardinal Numbers. Numeros cardinaes.
Zero ['eeruj oito [oitu] 8
urn, uma 1 nove [now] 9
dots (dous), fern, duas 2 dez [dsf] 10
tres 3 onze [029] 11
qiiatro 4 doze [dozd] 12
cinco 5 trese [trese] 13
seis 6 quatorse [kv'torzs] 14
sete 7 quinse [kl89] 15
94
Lesson 15.
100
vinte
cincoenta [stku'entv] 50
sessenta [sa'sentv] 60
setenta [sd'tente] 70
oitenta fo'i'tente] 80
noventa [nu'ventvj 90
cem, cento [sut, sentu]
cento e um 101
duzentos 200
tresentos 300
quatrocentos 400
quinhentos [ki'yentuf] 500
seiscentos 600
setecentos 700
oitocentos 800
novecentos 900
m^ 1000
wn e Mm 1001
efows miZ 2000
cem wiZ 100,000
zm m^/Mo [mi'Mu] 1,000,000
dois milhoes 2,000,000.
um billido a milliard.
dezaseis [ddzu'suif] or dezeseis
16
dezaseteffddzv'sztd] or dezesete
17
dezoito [dd'soitu, dd'zottu] 18
dezanove [ddzu'novd] or
19
[vintd] 20
e wm [vinti'u] 21
e dfows 22
e tres 23
e quatro 24
e cmco 25
e seis 26
e sete 27
wwte e oito[mnii 'oitu, vln '
28
vinte e nove 29
^rm^a [trtntv] 30
trinta e um 31
tfnwfa e o^o [trZntvwtu] 38
quarenta [Iwvv'rentv] 40
97. Observation.
1. /m and ^ois have a
duase.g.: Tenho um nariz
duas maos.
2. Cento in the plural
adjective: -centos, -centas e.
seiscentas balas.
Remark. A. hundred, one hundred, if not followed by
another number (but mil or milhao), is rendered by cem
(without um!): a hundred men cem homens 1 ; but: cento e
um homens 101 men; cem mil reis; cem milMes de metres
cubicos. Cento is also employed as a substantive e.g.;
Quanto custa o cento d'estes 6vos? Um cento custa dois
mil reis, mas duzentos custam tres mil oitocentos.
So employed, cento must be preceded by the article and,
if followed by another substantive, joined to this by de.
3. Mil is never preceded by ^w^. 1 It must be
employed to render the English expressions: eleven
1 Cem, mil as, indeed, any other number, marking a plura-
lity may be preceded by uns, umas, which means some or about:
Uns cem homens, umas cem mulheres = some (or about) a hundred
men. women.
-.
feminine form: uma an
e uma boca, dois olhos
is also inflected like an
g. : quatrocentos soldados,
The Numerals. 95
hundred, twelve hundred, etc. mil e cem, mil duzen-
tos, etc.
4. The expression "in the year" is rendered by
no anno de or simply by em: In the year nineteen-
hundred and eleven = no anno de (or em) mil nove
centos e onze.
5. The number one being preceded by another, the
substantive follows in the plural form, as in English:
Mil e uma noites 1001 nights.
6. The units may be joined to the tenths by the
conjunction e or by a hyphen: trinta e oito or trinta-
oito, vinte-um, etc.
7. The days of the month (except "the first," o
primeiro) are expressed by cardinal numbers, preceded
by o, a, em or no dia: the 25 th of May em (or no dia)
vinte e cinco de maio; the 7 th of August em (or no dia)
sete de agosto.
Nasceu a dezoito de junho.
He was born on the 18 th of June.
In official writings the plural is usually employed :
Aos vinte e quatro dias de dezembro.
On the 24 th of Decembre.
Note. The names of the months are Janeiro, fevereiro,
marge y abril, maio, junho, julho, agosto, setembro, outubro,
novembro, dezembro. They are written with a small letter.
Trinta dias tern novembro,
Abril, junho e setembro;
Vinte- oito terd um,
E os outros mais: trinta e um.
The date of a letter is either given as in English,
as: Lisbon, the 4 th of February, 1911, Lisboa 4 de
fevereiro de 1911 or: Lisboa, em (or a) 4 de fevereiro
-de 1911. "What day of the month is it?" = A quantos
estamos de mez? It is the 2 nd of November: estamos a
'dois de novembro.
8. The age of a person is generally expressed by
ter . . . annos and fazer . . . annos, as: How old are you?
= quantos annos tern? (or less familiar: Que idade tern?
>Que idade e a sua? Qual e a sua idade?) I am 56
vears old = TenJio 56 annos.
96 Lesson 15.
Quando faz (or vae 1 fazer 2 ) annos?
When is (or will be) your birthday?
(Literally : when do you make (or when are you going
to make) years?)
Fago (or vou fazer) annos em quinze de marco.
My birthday is on the fifteenth of March.
Quantos annos faz (or vae fazer}?
How old will you be?
Faco (farei or vou fazer) doze annos.
I shall be 12 years old.
No men dia d 'annos or no dia dos meus (vinte) annos . . ,
On my birthday, on my twentieth birthday.
Minha irma vae fazer dezoito annos no mes que van.
My sister will be eighteen years old next month.
N.B. Minha irma terd 18 annos would be: my sister
is about 18 years old.
Elle casou (promoveu, morreu) aos 25 annos de (sua)
idade.
He married (was promoted, died) in his 25 th year.
98. The multiplication is expressed by vez, veses
(times) e.g. :
Quatro vezes cinco (sao) vinte.
Four times five are twenty.
Some (or about) 30, 40, etc. is: uns trinta, qiiarenta,-
or trinta (quarenta) e tantos.
99. Present Tense of a regular Terb of the
third Conjugation (in in) dividir [ddVddir 1 ] to divide.
Divido [dd'vidu] I divide dividimos [dwd'dimuf] we di-
divides [dd 'viddf] you divide vide
divide [dd'vidd] he, she di- dividis [ddvd'dif] you divide
vides, you divide dividem [dd 'vidvi] they divide.
Part.pres.: dividindo [davz dindu] .
Part, perf.: dividido [ddvs'didu].
Exercise: Write and practise the Present Tense and the
Participles of the following verbs:
diminuir [dvminu'ir] to diminish
repartir [rrdpvr'tir] to distribute, divide, part.
cumprir [Mm'prir] to fulfil
reunir [rrdunir] to unite, join.
Ex. : DiminuOy reparto, cumpro, reuno, etc.
1 3d pers. of ir to go. 2 to do, make. 3 see p. 5, KB.
u'tica
far it'
as "/ operaroes'
<rarith-
metica,
The Numerals.
Palavras.
arithmetic a parcella the entry
97
firgt four
[vpvr'setoj
a somma [' some] the sum,
addition
[maif] and, plus (lat.)
sommar to sum (up)
fsu'm&rj
miiltiplicar to multiply
[mufopli'kar]
a addigao the addition
[adi'suu]
a subtraccao \
a'S^cao (^subtraction
w7/ * '
a multiplied- the multiplica-
rflo [is mult)- tion
a prova
proof
o total futu' tat J the totality
tto iotaZ in the whole
o resto [it' 'rreftuj the rest
o numero addi- the minuend
tivofedrtivuj
o numero sub- the subtrahend
tractive
[subdtffi'tivu]
e assim em
seguida
o si/sterna
and so on
a divisao the division
[v&zvi'ziiuj
o problema the (arithmeti- j
[upru'blemv] cal) problem |
systema the system of
[sif'temv] de numeration
the value
populous
the census
to increase.
o valor
povoado
o censo
augmentar
[aumen'tar]
38. Leitura.
A Ugdo d'arithmetica.
As quatro operacoes fundamentaes da arithmetica sao as
seguintes: sommar, diminuir, multiplicar e repartir, ou
'addi9ao, subtrac^ao, multiplica9ao e divisao. - - Exemplo de
uma somma: tenho seis (6) ma9as e dao-me mais quatro (4):
.coin quantas maQas fico? Eesolve-se pela somma: 6 mais 4 7
dez (10). Fico com 10 ma9as y 6 chama-se uma parcella;
4 e outra parcella; 10 e a somma ou total. Outro exemplo:
vamos reunir os numeros sete centos e trinta e seis (736) e
quatro centos e vinte-um (421) n'um so numero: a somma e"
mil cento e cinquenta-sete (1157); isto e: 736 mais 421 6"
igual a 1157. Este ultimo numero 6 formado de 4 algaris-
mos, dos quaes o ultimo, 7, indica as unidades, que formam
a, primeira columna; o penultimo, 5, a classe das dezenas ou
i segunda columna; o antepenultimo, 1, a das centenas ou
terceira columna; e o primeiro a dos milhares que vem a ser
i quarta columna. - - Agora vamos fazer uma subtrac9ao,
irando do numero oito mil quatro centos e sessenta-oito (8468)
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 7
Lesson 15.
o numero cinco mil trezentos e vinte-um (532 Ij. primeiro
numero e o additive, o segundo o snbtractivo, e o resto e
tres mil cento e quarenta-sete (3147). Para fazer a c
dizemos assim : de 8 tirando 1 ficam 7; de 6 tirando 2 fica:
de 4 tirando 3 fica 1 etc. Podemos tambem operar diz
1 para 8, 7; 2 para 6, 4; 3 para 4, 1; 5 para 8, 3
(Trindade Coelho: Pao
39. Exercise.
We have ten fingers on our two hands and tr
on onr two feet; we may (== podemos) therefore say
ten is a natural number for numeration, and, as every one
knows, ten is the number on which our system of numeration
is based. Ten thousand plus one thousand plus one hundred
plus ten plus one, is written 11,111, that is: eleven thon
sand one hundred and eleven. The first number on the
signifies so many units, the next to the left so many hun-
dreds, the next so many thousands, and so on, the value
of each place increasing tenfold (see 106), as we go front
right to left Thus 200,000 + 40,000 + 5000 + 700 + 90 + 3
is two hundred and forty-five thousand seven hundred and
ninety-three, 245,793.
At the census of 1905 the population of the ten mos
populous towns of the world was the following: 1. (see 106]
London, with 4,715,000; 2. New York with 3,476,000;
3. Paris with 2,764,000; Berlin with 2,040,000; 5. Vienna
with 1,870,000; 6. Tokio with 1,820,000; 7. Chicago with
1,699,000; 8. Philadelphia with 1,294,000; 9. St. Petersb^B
with 1,265,000; 10. Constantinople with 1,125,000 inhate
tants. As Portugal at the census of the year 1900 has j
5,423,132 inhabitants, that whole country has only aboot
708,000 more than the capital of England.
Conversaf-ao com inn menino.
menino em que dia e mes Fa^-o annos era 25 de maio.
faz annos?
Entao ainda nao fez annos Nao fiz ainda, hei de faz&l-
n'este anno? os no proximo mes.
Seu irmao ja tern 16 annos Ja, sim, minha senhora; j
feitos? os fez ha quinze dias, em
18 de marco.
Quantos annos tern (a) sua Tera 21 annos; nasceu
prima Dona Virginia? 1889. E verdade (if
vae fazer 22 no mez
vem.
The Numbers.
99
Ha quantos annas o
ja Yae a escola?
^nantos alnmnos ha na sna
elasse?
Xao ha elasse, em qne o nu-
mero dos alnmnos chega a
1 que hora corner -am as aulas ?
Entrei (I entered) no primeiro
de abril do anno passado,
logo (so) ha ponco mais de
um anno qne ando (I go)
na escola.
Havera 50 e tantos.
Nao ha, nao, minha senhora:
o maximo e de 60; somos
ao todo 519 em toda a esool*.
Xo verao come^am as 7, e no
inverno as 8.
sixteenth Lesson. Licao decima sexta.
The Numbers.
IL Ordinal Numbers. Xumeros ordinaes.
100. The ordinal numbers are formed out of
he cardinal numbers and considered adjectives i.e..
hey are subject to the same inflection (feminine and
>lural form): primeiro, -a, -os, -as. Their formation
rom the unite is altogether irregular; there are besides
uso some modifications preceding the termination -esimo
dded to the number beyond vinte, as will be seen
>y the following.
The ordinal numbers are generally put before the
oun; they are:
o dedmo quarto the 14 th
o dedmo qmnto the 15 th
o dedmo sexto the 16
o dedmo setimo the 17 th
o dedmo otiavo the 18 th
o dedmo nono the 19*
o vigemmo [vi'^zimu, irizt-
simu] the 20*
o mgesimo primdro the 21
[prim'etru] the 1 st
9tmmdo l&'gunduj the 2^
teredro [tor'sinruj the 3^
quarto [kwaartu] the 4*
o [tint*] the 5*
/*/*/ the 6*
t> r***~] the 7*
> /bt'tew/ the 8*
fnonuj the 9*
&dmo I'dfstmvJ the 10*
**^n'*o or dedmo primdro,
o onzeno [ozenu] the 11*
[duu'otsimu] or
segundo the 12*
ferwaro the 13th
the 50*
o quadragesimo [kuedrv ]
the 40*
o qumquagesimo [ktcthn> 1
the 50*
100 Lesson 16.
o sexagesimo (szksv J the o quadrigentesimo the 400 th
60 th o qmngentesimo [kwigent ]
o septuagesimo [septw? ] the the 500 th
70 th o sfxcentesimo [sefsen'tczimu]
o octogesimo [oMu ] the 80 th the 600 th
o nonagesimo [none ] the o septingentesimo the 700 th
90 th o octingentesimo the 800 th
o centesimo [sen'tssimu, sen- o nonigentesimo the 900 th
'tcsimu] the 100 th o millesimo the 1000 th
o centesimo primeiro the 101 st o millionesimo the 1,000,000 th
o ducentesimo the 200 th o penultimo the last but one
o trecentesimo the 300 th o ultimo the last.
101. Use of the Numbers.
1. To distinguish monarchs of the same name,
ordinal numbers are used as for the units, like in
English, but without the Article e.g.: Eduardo Setimo;
Dom Manuel Segundo, Dom Pedro Quarto. With the
tens the cardinal numbers are generally employed : Luis
Quatorze; but Henrique Trigesimo segundo de Eeuss.
2. To catalogue books, chapters, etc., cardinal as
well as ordinal numbers may be employed ; in this latter
case they generally follow the noun: Tomo segundo or
dois; capitulo vigesimo terceiro or vinte-tres; pagina de-
cima oitava or dezoito.
3. Fractions (fracgoes) are mostly expressed by
a . . . parte e.g.: a terga, quarta, quintaparte; as quatro
decimas (paries), etc. They may, however, also be ex-
pressed by the substantivated ordinal numbers e.g.:
| meio, meia (without the 1 U um quarto
1 /2 | article) 3 /7 tres setimos
\ (a) metade 7 /io sete decimos
J /s um tergo 3 /s tres oitavos.
Partly is em parte; for the most part = pela maior part.
Examples.
Half a meter of cloth meio metro de panno.
Half a bottle of wine meia garrafa de vinho.
I got half of the money recebi (a) metade do dinheiro.
6 x /2 metres of linen seis metros e meio de panno de
linho.
2 x /2 yards of silk duas varas e meia de seda.
The Numbers. 101
4. Fractions smaller than a tenth are sometimes
formed by adding -avo to the cardinal numbers, as :
1 /ii urn onsavo (better: um undecimo, uma undecima
parte or uma decima primeira parte ; 3 /5o ires cinquentavos.
5. The decimal numbers (niimeros decimaes) are:
1 10 um decimo Viooo um millesimo
Vioo um centesimo ^jioooo um decimo -millesimo
etc.
or uma decima, centesima, millesima parte, etc.
102. Division of Measures and Weights.
o metro f'metru] the metre
o decimetro [dd'simotru] the decimetre
o centimetro [sen'timdtru] the centimetre
o millimetre [md'limdtru] the millimetre
o decdmetro [dd'kamdtru] the decametre
o hectometre [sk'fonidtruj the hectometre
a medida linear [mddidv lini'ar] the lineal measure
a medida de superficie a superficial measure
a medida de volume the cubic measure
a medida de capacidade [kupvsi' dadd] the measure of
capacity
a medida dp peso [pezu] the measure of weight.
o gramma ['grvmu] the gram
o kilo(gramma) [kilu'grvmv] the kilogram
o decigramma [desi'grvmv] the decigram
o centigramma [senti grvmv] the centigram
o decagramma the decagram
o hectogramma the hectogram
o metro quadrado the square metre
o metro cubico the cubic metre
o litro f'litru] the liter
o decilitro [disd'litru] the deciliter
o hectolitro fekh'litru] the hectoliter
a tonelada [tum'lada] (= 13 J /2 quintaes) the tun
o quintal [fan 'tat] the Portuguese quintal (of 58 3 /4 kilos)
o quintal metrico two hundredweights.
103. Division of Time.
Names of the Days.
Domingo [du'migu] Sunday quinta feira Thursday
segunda feira [fvirv] Monday sexta feira Friday
terca feira Tuesday sabbado f'sabvdu] Saturday.
quarta feira Wednesday
102 Lesson 16.
104. Observations.
1. On Monday, on Tuesday, etc. is na segunda
(feira), etc. or only segunda feira, etc.; feira is often
omitted. You may also write with a hyphen : segunda-
feira, terga-feira, etc.
2. The names of the days are written with a small
letter.
3. For the dates see 97, 7.
4. The hours of the day are expressed by the
cardinal numbers:
What o'clock is it? Que horas sao?
It is one o'clock, half past one e uma hora, e hora e
meia.
It is two o'clock sao duas horas.
It is half past three sao tres (horas) e meia.
It is a quarter past 4 sao quatro (horas) e (um) quarto.
At what o'clock a que hora(s)?
At 7, 8, 9 (o'clock) as sete, oito, nove (horas).
T , . , . / sao cinco menos um quarto.
It is a quarter past 5 > { , um ^^ pam a * dnco
It is noon e meio-dia, sao as doze da noite.
It is midnight e meia noite, sao as doze do dia.
About noon pelo meio dia.
About one o'clock pela uma hora.
About 2 o'clock pelas duas horas.
The train starts at ten minutes to 7 o comboio sae as
7 menos 10.
It is striking ten o'clock dao or estao a dar dez horas.
Has it already struck eleven? Jd deram as onze?
It will strike immediately . . . vao dar agora (doze horas).
It has just struck eight acabam de dar as oito.
5. Indicating a day-time by a certain hour, the
Portuguese says: da manha, da tarde, da noite e.g.:
as dez da manha, da noite; as quatro da tarde, at ten
o'clock in the morning, at night; at four in the
afternoon. If the day-time is not precisely indicated,
he says de manha, de tarde, etc., or pela manha, pela
tarde, etc., in the morning, in the afternoon: Irei de
tarde, I shall go in the afternoon.
6. The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a
year, etc., should be rendered by three months, six
months, etc., as: tres meses, seis. meses (or meio anno),
The Numbers.
103
HOi'c wiws. etc. A week : uma scmana or oito dias. A
fortnight, qiiinze diets.
105. The numeral adverb is expressed by the
I 'responding ordinal.
First(ly) is primeiro or primeiramente or em primeiro
lugar.
Secondly is segundo or segundamentc or em segundo
lugar.
Thirdly is terceiro or terceiramente or em terceiro lugar.
Palavras.
A parte inteira the whole
a linha /'liyvj
the line
a parte deci-
fractional
avaliar
to value
mal
number,
[vvvlt'arj
a dizima
decimal
o conjuncto
the totality
I'dizimv.]
fraction
[ko'junto]
a operaqao
a ajuda
the help
decimal
the decimal
h'xufo]
a opera$ao
operation a porcao
the portion
de dizima
[pur svu]
ao contrario de to the con-
seccos [sekuf]
dried fruit
trarv of
o feijao
the bean
consistir de, em to consist of, /M'j^w/
in a balanga
the wages
separar
to separate [bu'lunsfi]
a mrgula
the comma o anno bissexto
the leap-year
['mrgulu]
[bi'sviftu]
a casa
the partition, intercalado
intercalary
class
intdrkis Iciuul
cada um
each (one) o seculo
the century
a letra
the type f'sekidu]
o systema
the metrical a era ferx]
the Christian
metrico fsif-
system christao
era
'temv'msiriku] o solsticio
the solstice
o meridiano
the meridian
[solf'tisiu]
[mdrd&i'vnu]
o equinoxio
the equinox
terrestre
terrestrial
[il&> 'noks^u]
[tor 'reftnj
bastar
to be sufficient
o ylobo [globu]
the globe
a primavera
Spring
terrestre
[prime 'vervj
indicar
to indicate
o verao \
[indikar]
[vd'rvu]
Summer
. o guadrante
the quadrant
o estio [tf'tiu] }
[kwe'ffrvntj]
o outomno
Autumn
derivar
to derive
[o 'tonuj
medir
to measure
o inverno
Winter
a saber
namely
[t'vernu/
a e.'ctetisao
the extension
a Pascoa
Eastern
fj-ften 'swj
['pafkuv]
104
Leeson 16.
o Pentecostes Whitsuntide
arranjar
to arrange.
procure
emmalar
to embale
a mala f'maluj
r the box
a guia ['gw]
the luggage-
ticket
vou [vou]
I go, am going
vd [vaj
go!
ate logo
1
[ute'logu]
ate jd fa]
till presently.
o dia do anno New Year's Day
novo or do
anno bom
darasboas festas to send the
(pelo anno greetings of
novo, pela the season
Pdscoa, pdo
Natal)
o Natal [nv 'tat] Christmas
levar to take
40. Leitura.
systema decimal ou meirico.
Ao contrario do niimero inteiro, o qual tern so uma parte,
o numero decimal consiste sempre de duas partes, separadas
por uma virgula. A parte que fica a esquerda da \rirguia,
chama-se parte inteira; a que fica a direita da virgula,
chama-se parte decimal e tambem dizima: e cada uma das
suas letras represents uma casa. A parte inteira indica uni-
dades; a parte decimal indica fraceoes ou partes da unidade.
primeiro algarismo d'uma parte decimal indica decimas, o
segundo indica centesimas; o terceiro, se o tiver, indicara
Hiille"simas ; o quarto decimas millesimas. -- systema metrico
tern por unidade o metro. metro e uma medida. Esta
medida e" igual a decima millionesima parte do quarto (ou
quadrante) do meridiano terrestre. Do metro derivam todas
as medidas, a saber: 1. as medidas lineares, com que medi-
mos o comprimento ou extensao das coisas: das linhas por
exemplo; 2. as medidas de superficie, com que avaliamos
no seu conjuncto as coisas que teem ao mesmo tempo com-
primento e largura, como um campo; -- 3. as medidas de
volume, com que avaliamos no seu conjnncto as coisas que
teem ao mesmo tempo comprimento, largura e altura, como
e, por exemplo, uma sala, ou uma porcao de lenha ou de ma-
deira de comprimento igual ; 4. as medidas de capacidade,
com que medimos liquidos: por exemplo, vinho ou azeite; e
sSccos, como p. ex. trigo ou feijao; -- 5. e finalmente, as
medidas de peso, com as quaes avaliamos, com ajuda de uma
balanQa, o peso das coisas.
(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)
41. Thema.
The Year and its Divisions.
The first day of a year is New Year's Day. The
year is divided into 4 seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn and
The Numbers. 105
Winter) 12 months, (January, February, March, April, May,
: June, July, August, September, October, November, and De-
cember), 52 weeks, and 365 days. A leap-year has one day
more (= a mais} namely, 366 days. The intercalary day
is the 29 th day of the 2 nd month, which is denominated Fe-
bruary. (The) September was formerly the seventh, October
the eighth, November the ninth, and December the tenth
month of the year ; actually (= to-day) these months are the
ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth. The week-days are for the
most part (pela sua maior parte) indicated by "feira" i.e.,
fair, whereas the Sunday, as the day of the first fair, is not
indicated as such (== como tal), but as the day of the
i Lord (domingo being derived from Dominus the Lord). The
week has 7 days, and the day has 24 hours; every hour
counts 60 minutes and every minute as many seconds. In
the year take place two equinoxes: on the 21 st of March and
the 23 rd of September, and two solstices : on the 22 nd of June,
2 days before Saint John's, and on the 22 nd of Dezember,
3 days before Christmas. On Christmas, New Year's Day, and
Easter we send greetings of the season to our friends. The
31 st of December is the last day of the year. A hundred
years form a centary. We live in the twentieth century
of the Christian era.
Conversa^ao.
No Hotel.
! A que horas deseja V a - Ex a - V g - chame-me as sete e meia.
ser acordado?
E o almoco a que horas o Tres quartos de hora mais
deseja? tarde, as oito e um quarto.
Va. g x a. j a vae partir no com- Vou. V 6 - arrange-me um trem ;
boio das nove e dez? quantos minutos leva ate a
esta^ao ?
i Levara doze minutos quando Entao basta que o carro ca
muito. esteja as nove menos cinco.
* E a bagagem V a - Ex a - le- Nao, senhor. Ja esta tudo
va-a no carro? emmalado; as malas podem
ir ja para a estacao. senhor
leve-as para baixo!
Sim, senhor. Vou ja despa- Quando trouxer (fut. conj.
eha-las e entregar-lhe a guia. of trazer) a guia, traga
V a Ex a - manda mais al- (imper. of traser) tambem
guma coisa? uma chicara de cha!
As ordens de V a - Ex a - ; ate" logo ! Va com Deus ! ate ja !
106 Lesson 17.
Seventeenth Lesson. Li<jao decima setima.
Numbers (Continued).
III. Multiplicative Numbers.
106. The nmltiplicatives (mimeros multiplica-
tivos) are:
Simples simple o dobro (de)
double
-a I o triplicado, triplice, pop. o
triple threefold tresdobro, the triple
quadruple, -a fourfold (o) sextuple* septuple, octuple,
quintuple, -a fivefold decuple, centuple (the) 6, 7,
o inteiro the whole 8, 10, 100 fold
multiplu manifold.
All the other multiplicatives are not used; they
are generally periphrased (as, indeed, also most of the
mentioned may be) by the numbers of repetition (w&-
meros iterativos) ; uma vez, duas vczes, etc. e.g. 2 X 2
= 4, duas veses dois sdo quatro. Elle e cem veses mais
rico do qiie CM, he is a hundred times richer than I.
107. The most important collective Numbers
(mimeros collectives) are:
Urn par a pair, a couple (urn par de luvas; urn par de
magas)
urn casal de rolos a brace of doves
lima duzia a dozen
meia duzia half a dozen
duzia e meia one dozen and a half
uma groza or doze duzias a gross
uma quinzena fifteen
una vintena a score
uma trintena, quarantena some thirty, forty
uma sessentena threescore, sixty
urn quarteirao twenty-five
uma centena, um cento a (or some) hundred
urn milhar, um milheiro a (or some) thousand.
1 Vae, present of ir = to go: vou, vaes, me, vdmos, ides, vao.
2 Fazer to do, make, is irregular: Pres.: fago, fazes, faz,
etc.; Pret.: fis, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizestes, fizeram. Pan.: feito.
The Numbers. 107
108. The Augmentatives and Diminutives.
Augmentativos [aumentv'tim<f] e diminutives
[ddminu 'tivtifj.
As the ending -issimo modifies the adjective, other
terminations, peculiar only to the Portuguese langu-
age, modify the original meaning of substantives: cer-
tain terminations add to the noun the idea of some-
thing unusually hig (or clumsy or grotesque), they
augment some quality already prominent, while others
add the notion of littleness, daintiness; they diminish a
quality already existing. It is easily understood that
the former convey an idea of antipathy, while the
latter indicate one of sympathy or pity.
109. To form the Augmentativos, we add to the
noun the syllable -ao (fern.: -ona), sometimes modified
also according to the ending of the substantive. To
form the Diminutivos, we employ the ending -inho, -inlia
or -ito, -ita. Those derivations which intercalate a --,
generally denote only size without any secondary
meaning e.g.: cadeirazinlia = a little chair, while
cadeirinka means a sedan(-chair).
The employment of both the augmentative and
the diminutive modifications takes place only in familiar
intercourse, and may be avoided by a foreigner. Here
we bring them to the student's notice to enable him
to understand those words and for the sake of com-
pleteness.
1. Augmentativos (termination -do).
garrafao [gmrie'fuu] the great bottle (of a gar-
rafd)
urn bofetdo [bufd'tvu] a heavy slab (of a bofetada)
palavrdo [pelv'vruu] a long and difficult (also: an
ugly) word (of palavra)
o casacdo /ftvev'&jft*/ great-coat (of casaco)
o papelao [pups' luu] thick paper, pasteboard (of
papel)
o papdo [pv'pvu] bugbear (of papar devour or papas
pap)
o homenzarrao [omutev'rrvu] the great (or important)
man
o mocetao [musd'tuu] \ big fellow (of moco young man)
o rapagdo [rrvpv'gvu] f great boy (of rapaz the boy).
108 Lesson 17.
6. Diminutives (termination -(g)inho, -(z)ito, etc.).
Masculine. Feminine.
liomenzinlio the little man A mulherzirilia the little wo-
man
a mulherinha the intriguing
woman
o filhinho the little son a filhinha the little daughter
o rapazito, o rapazinho the a rapariguita, a rapariguinlia
little boy the little maid
o caozinlw the little dog a cadellinha the little bitch
o pobrezmho the little poor a probreziriha the poor (or
person or beggar beggar) maid.
coitadinho, -a poor darling!
Familiar language also adds to certain adjectives
and even to adverbs the diminutive endings. loni-
tinJia she is rather pretty; estd melliorzinlia she feels a
little better; uma casa pequenina quite a small house;
die estd grandinho he is rather tall (for his age); ella e
boasinha she is a dear little thing.
110. Examples from Portuguese Authors.
Velho tao velhinho nenhum outro havia . . .
Para cumprir cem annos Ihe faltava urn dia,
Ha noventa e quatro que 6ra ja pastor 1 ,
Zagalzinho 2 alegre, desde tenra infancia.
Ja de surraosito 3 cheio a tiracol 4
Branqueadinho 5 a neve 6 e doiradinho 7 a sol.
Gruia o jumentinho 8 uma velhinha errante . .
A molheirinha 9 atras, o jumentito adiante!
Descalcinha 10 e pobre . .
Pobres de pobres (= the poorest of the poor) sao pobresinhos . . .
Alvas ermidinhas 11 sob azues maguados 12 . .
Ao filhinho a noite nao Ihe causa medo . . .
Uma igrejasinha que e como um pombal 13
Nao se esquece da vaquinha 14 loira 16
Que se poz de joelhos ante a mangedoira 16 ,
Qnando nas palhinhas 17 dormitava 18 Deus 19 .
1 Herdsman. - shepherd. 3 bread-bag. 4 a tiracol in
bandoleer-belt. 5 branqueado whitewashed. 6 by the snow.
7 doirado gilded i.e., made brown. 8 o jumento ass. 9 moleira
the miller's wife. 10 descalga barefooted. n ermida hermitage.
12 magoado = bruised ; here violet-blue. 13 dove-house. 14 vacca
cow. 15 bright yellow, fair. 16 manger ; crib. 17 palha straw.
18 slumber. 19 Deus for Jesus.
The Numbers.
109
Palavras.
midtiplicando
the multi-
tirar [tirar]
to subtract
/multdpli-
'kvnduj
plicand
o ultimo
[ultimu]
the last
feito [fixtu]
executed, made,
o penultimo
the last but
done
[up<) 'nuttimoj
one
o multiplicador
multiplier
o antepenultimo
the antepenult
1 in uttsp li KB
dor]
'nultimu]
os factores
the factors,
o primeiro
first
[uj'fa'torif]
submultiples [pri'muiru]
o producto geral
the total (sum) primeiro
firstly
o producto par-
the quota saber ['svber]
to know
tial [upru-
seguinte
following
'ftutu pvr-
[sdgmtdj
f stal]
praticamente
practically
a unidade
the unit
['pratikv-
[uuni&afo]
'mentej
a dezena
the ten
dar um trago
to draw a line
[vfo'genv]
['trasuj
a conta [vkontv]
the account;
por baixo
underneath
bill
[pur baixuj
a centena
figure marking
chegar [f'l'qar]
to arrive, reach,
[usen'tenv]
the hundreds
to mount to
o milhar
figure marking apurar
to make clean,
[umi'fiar]
the thousands [vpu'rar]
to obtain
a eolumna
the column a virgula
the comma
[vku'lunv/
['mrgulv]
a taboada
the nmltiplica- a potencia
the power
[utvfiu' cifrv]
tion-table [pu'tesiv]
dao-me [dvumd]
they give me, o numerador
the numerator
I am given o denominador
the denomina-
re solver
to resolve
tor
[rrdzotver]
j o resto
the remainder
ramos ['vemuf]
we go; here: valente
brave
we are going i ao par
at par
to . . ., we
o principe
the Crown
shall
herdeiro
Prince.
fazer [fvzer]
to make
42. Problemas de multiplica^ao.
Para saber multiplicar 6 precise saber primeiro a ta-
boada. Eis aqui um exemplo de multiplica9ao : dao-me de-
zeseis ma^as por dia durante quatro dias: quantas ma^as me
dao ao todo? Este probl^ma resolve-se pela multiplica9ao.
multiplicando 16 6 multiplicado pelo multiplicador 4.
producto e egual a sessenta e quatro. Vejamos (Let us see)
agora como e practieamente feita a multiplica9ao seguinte:
Trezentos e vinte e oito a multiplicar por quarenta e cinco.
Collocam-se os dois factores (nome commum do multipli-
110 Lesson 17.
cando e do inultiplicador) um debaixo do outro, e, tendo dado
um trac,o por baixo, dizemos assim : cinco vezes oito, quarenta.
Escrevemos o ultimo algarismo, zero, e vao quatro (tr.: we
carry four); cinco vezes dois, dez, e quatro, quatorze; escre-
vemos quatro e vae um (= we carry one)-, cinco vezes trSs,
quinze, e um, dezeseis. Apuramos assim o primeiro producto
parcial, e mil seiscentos e quarenta. Depois de apurado da
mfisma maneira o segundo producto parcial, de trezentos e
vinte e oito por quatro, sommamos ambos para obtermos o
producto geral que vem a ser: quatorze mil setecentos e ses-
senta.
Uma fracc.ao e uma certa parte d'um todo. Ha frac-
e.6es decimaes das quaes so se escrevem (= are written) os
numeradores, sendo o denominador dez ou alguma potencia
de dez e fracc,6es vulgares. Emquantoque as primeiras
sao escritas n'uma linha com a parte inteira, separadas d'ella
apenas por uma virgula, as ultimas expressam-se em (se)
escrevendo tanto o numerador como o denominador (transl.
both num. and den.), com um trao entre elles 2 /s = dois
ter9os; 5 /is = cinco decimo oitavos. Um dia e uma vigesima
oitava, vigesima nona, trige"sima ou trige"sima primeira parte
de um mez. Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.
43. Exercise.
How little does one half of the world know how the
other half lives! How many more apples have I than you,
if I have 7 /i2 of a dozen, and you the remainder? 6 is three
times the fourth part of 8 ; because the fourth part of 8 is 2,
and 6 is 3 times 2. Twice five times five is half a hundred.
When I was young, I thought that five hundred years ago (the)
men where twice as strong, and twice as wise, and much
braver, and a thousand times happier than now. Portuguese
money is also subject to the decimal system : a hundred reis
form a tostoon, ten tostoons make up mil reis, and a thou-
sand times tail reis i.e., a million of reis is a conto. An
English pound is worth about four thousand five hundred reis
when the exchange is at par. Twenty reis are a vintem and
225 reis correspond to a shilling, while a tostoon corresponds
nearly to sixpence. The deposed king of Portugal, Manuel II. ,
ascended to the throne on the 1 st - of February, 1908, the day
on which his father, king Charles I., and his elder brother,
the Crown Prince, were shot.
Conyersa^ao.
Quaes sao as quatro ope^oes fundamentaes ?
De quantos algarismos 6 formado o numero de 17.580?
Regular Verbs. Ill
Jual e a primeira columna, e que classe de niimeros
contem ?
Quaes sao as mais classes?
Onde se escrevem as fraceoes decimaes e como?
Como se escrevem as fracsoes vulgares?
Porque se chamam as primeiras decimaes ?
Como se charnam os tres niimeros que prefazem uma sub-
trac^ao?
Como se chamam os tres niimeros que prefazem uma mul-
tiplica 93,0 ?
Em que anno subin ao throno o rei D. Manuel de
Portugal?
Em que anno subiu ao throno a rainha Victoria de
Inglaterra ?
Quando morreu ella?
Quantos annos reinou o rei Eduardo?
Em que anno e mez morreu?
Quern 6 que reina na Alemanha?
Que e que se entende por augmentativos e diminutives ?
Como sao formados?
Qual e o systema de medidos, contos e pesos, de que
as naQoes do continente se servem?
Donde.se tirou a norma para o systema metrico?
Eighteenth Lesson. Li<?ao decima oitava.
Regular Verbs. Verbos regulares.
111. By the termination of the infinitive mood
we distinguish three different forms of conjugation viz. :
The 1 st conj. with the infinitive ending in -ar, as:
comprar to buy.
The 2 nd conj. with the infinitive ending in -er, as:
vender to sell.
The 3 rd conj. with the infinitive ending in -?>, as:
partir to depart.
N.B. These terminations have always the tonical
accent.
112. That part of the verb before these termi-
nations is the root, which in regular verbs remains
unaltered. Those termination letters which characterise
the different persons and tenses, are added to the root.
112
Lesson 18.
113. We distinguish:
1 . Forms where the root has the tonical accent ; and
2. Forms where the termination has the tonical
accent.
Every verb has 11 of the former viz.:
Pres. ind. : singular and 3 rd pers. of the plural (4)
Pres. subj.: (4)
Imperative: (3).
All other forms have their tonical accent on the
termination e.g., compro, but comprdmos.
114. We distinguish further:
1. Primary tenses (raizes da formagao dos tempos):
(a) The infinitive (infinitivo or infinito).
(b) The present indie.: 1 st pers. sing, and 2 ud per-
sons sing, and plur.
(c) The preterite (preterito perfeito) : 2 nd pers. sing.
2. Derived tenses (tempos derivados), which com-
prehend all the rest and are formed as follows:
(A) From the Infinitive: 1. Present, 2. Imperfect,
3. Perfect, 4. Future indie., 5. Conditional, 6. The
two participles.
The terminations are added partly to the stem,
partly to the infinitive.
Indicative.
Infinitoi
1. Pres.
2. Pret. imp.
3. Pret. perf.
4. Future.
Gomprar:
vender :
compr-o
vend-o
cowpr-ava
vend-ia
compr-ei
vend-i
comprar-ei
vender-ei
partir:
part-o
part-ia
part-i
partir-ei
5. Conditional. 6. Part. imp.
7. Part. perf.
comprar-ia for compr-aria)
vender-ia for vend-eria)
partir-ia (or part-iria)
compr-ando
vend-endo
part-indo
compr-ado
vend-ido
part.ido.
(B) From the Present Indie. 1 st pers. sing.: The
Pres. Subj. by changing the ending -o into -e in the
1 st conj. and -a in the 2 nd and 3 rd conj.; and from the
2 nd persons sing, and plur.: the corresponding persons
of the Imperative by dropping the -s.
Regular Verbs.
llo
Pres. ind. l.Pres.conj.
Pres. ind.
2. Imperative
Compr-o :
compr-e
tu compras: \compra (tu)
vos compraes:
comprae (vos.
vend-o:
vend- a
tu vendes: vende (tu)
vos vendeis:
vendei (vos)
part-o:
part-a
tu partes:
parte (tu)
vos partis:
parti (vds).
2. Pret. imp.
3. Fut. imp.
con).
conj.
compra-sse
vende-sse
compra-r
vende-r
parti-sse
parti-r.
Note. The 3 rd person sing, and the 1 st and 3 rd persons
plur. of the imperative are equal to the same of the subjunc-
tive present, except that the subject, if employed, gene-
rally follows the verb e.g, : compre, venda, parta V a Ex a , o
senhor, etc. Yet it may also preceed: V* compre, venda,
parta! The negative form of the imperative takes also the
subjunctive mood e.g.: Ndo compres, ndo compreis! Don't
buy ! Ndo vendas, ndo vendaes ! Ndo partas, ndo partaes !
Ndo partdmos, ndo vendam V or V* s ndo vendam!
(C) From the Preterite perfeito, 2 nd pers. sing.
(cf. 48), by changing the termination -ste into -ra,
-sse or -r, we form the
1. Pret. mais-que-
perf.
compraste: comprd-ra
vende-ra
partiste: parti-ra
114. First Conjugation. Infinitive: Comprar
to buy.
A. Simple Tenses.
Infinitivo pessoal.
Para eu comprar to buy (I) para nos comprarmos to buv
(we)
para tu comprares to buy para vos comprardes to buy
(you) (you)
para elle comprar to buy (he) para elles comprar em to buy
(they).
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu compro I buy, etc. nos comprdmos we buy, etc.
tu compras vos compraes
elle compra elles compram.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 8
114 Lesson 18.
Imperfeito.
Compravct I bought, etc. compravamos we bought, etc.
compravas compraveis
comprava compravam.
Preterito perfeito (definido).
Comprei I bought, etc. comprdmos we bought, etc.
compraste comprastes
comprou compraram.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Comprdra I had bought, etc. comprdramos we had bought,
comprdras comprdreis [etc.
comprdra comprdram.
Futuro.
Comprarei I shall buy, etc. compraremos we shall buy,
comprards comprareis [etc.
comprard comprardo.
Conditional.
Compraria I should buy, etc. comprariamos we should buy,
comprarias comprarieis [etc.
compraria comprariam.
Imperative.
Compra! buy (thou)! compremos let us buy!
Compre V. Ex a - (o Senhor)! comprae buy (ye)!
buy! (sing.) comprem (V as Ex as )! buy!
(plur.)
Imperativo negativo.
Ndo cowvpres (tu) ! Ndo compremos (nos) !
Nao compre (Vfyl Ndo compreis (vos)!
Nao comprem (V)!
Conjunctivo or Subjunctive.
Presente.
Qiie eu compre that I buy, etc. que nos compremos that we
gue tu compres que vos compreis [buy, etc.
que elle compre que elles comprem.
Imperfeito.
Se eu comprasse If I bought, etc.
se tu comprasses
se elle comprasse
se nds comprdssemos
se v6s comprasseis
se elles comprassem.
Regular Verbs.
115
Futuro.
Se eu comprar If I shall (or am to) buy, etc.
se tu comprares
se elle comprar
se nos comprarmos
se vos comprardes
se elles comprar em.
Participio.
Passado.
Comprado bought.
Gerundio.
Presents. Gomprando buying.
115. Difference between Imperfeito and Pre-
terito perfeito (cf. 53). 1
The Imperfeito is employed: The Preterito perfeito is
employed :
1. If two actions are repre-
sented as being performed
at or as lasting the same
time (see Ex. 1).
2. If one action is interrupted
by another, the Imperfeito
denotes the action that was
going on when the other
began, while the latter re-
quires the Preterito perfeito.
8. In descriptions of character,
opinion, state, manners, and
customs, as well as repre-
senting an action as often
repeated (see Ex. 3 and cf.
120, A 3).
4. The Imperfeito is used for
all actions that do not im-
mediately belong to the re-
lation, but are added as ac-
cessory circumstances or the
own meaning of the speaker.
1. To mark a time positively
fixed, entirely elapsed, an
action quite accomplished.
2. To express actions following
one another, interrupting
others. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly ap-
propriate to the narrative
style.
3. While the Imperfeito des-
cribes, the Preterito perf.
narrates (cf. 2); it represents
an action as performed only
once.
4. The Preterito denotes a
changement in the state of
things; some action mark-
ing a progress of the events.
1 As these rules, already given for the most part in 53,
are very important, we repeat them here, completing them by
adding others.
116 Lesson 18.
5. It marks an indefinite or 5. The Preterito marks a de-
illimited duration. finite and limited duration;
one without any reference
to another action or state.
6. It is employed in a hypo-
thetical clause (instead of
the Conditional).
7. It is used in indirect
speech.
Remark. The Preterito perfeito is one of the most im-
portant, while most usual, tenses in the Portuguese language.
It is very often employed instead of the English Perfect (e.g.,
for "I have bought" eu cowprei cf. 53, B, d). More details
for the use of these tenses are given in the nineteenth lesson.
Examples.
1. Emquanto o cortejo passava pelas runs, os sinosj
tocavam.
Whilst the procession passed through the streets,
the bells were ringing.
2. Eu estudava a ligao, quando tu chegaste.
I was studying my lesson when you arrived.
3. Quando estava na praia, tomava banhos todos os
dias.
When I was at the seaside, I took baths every
day.
Eu fui d praia, mas ndo tomei banho.
I went to the beach, but did not take a bath.
Elle falava muito alto \ he spoke very loud (as a
habit)
Elle falou muito alto ( he spoke very loud (on a
) certain occasion).
4. Ghovia or estava a chover it was raining.
Choveu, principiou a chover, o tempo tornou-se chu-
voso.
It began to rain, the weather became rainy.
5. Eramos amigos we were friends (and are so still).
Fomos amigos we were friends (but now no longer).
6. Eu voltava (instead of: voltaria), se me mandassem
chamar.
I should go back if I were sent for.
7. Elle disse-me que ndo pensava em partir.
He told me that he did not think of departing.
Regular Verbs.
117
t find
Regular Verbs of the First Conjugation.
gastar [gvftar] to expend, use,
consume
gorgeiar [gurgiar] to warble
ignorar [ignurar] to ignore
illustrar to illustrate
imitar to imitate
lan$ar to throw
lavar to wash
levantar-se [hvvntarsd] to rise,
get up
levar [Idvar] to take (away)
limpar [limpar] to clean
livrar [livrar] to free
louvar [lovar] to praise
mandar [mvndar] to send, to
order
mandar chamar to send for
mudar (de) to change
nadar to swim
olhar to see
passar to pass, go
m \ to take
Abotoar to button
abreviar [vbrdViar] to shorten
acabar to finish
riccordar to awake
acMr /i?/ar/ I
encontrar \
admirar [vddmtrar] to admire
alisar to smooth
apanhar [vpvyar] to catch
assentar-se to sit down
afirar com to fling
avistar [vviftar] to perceive
i banhar to bathe
cacarejar to cackle
calgar to put on (shoes, gloves)
caminhar [kemiyar] to go,
stride, walk
cantar [Mntar] to sing, crow
cansar to tire
chamar [famar] to call, to be
called
collocar to put
cwr flco'rar] to bleach,
redden
deitar to lay down
deitar-se to lie down
deixar [dvifar] to leave off,
let, forbear
deleitar [ddlvitar] to delight
descansar to rest
doirar [doi'rar] to gild
encadernar [ikuddrnar] to
bind (books}
enfiar to thread; to put on
enxugar to dry (p.p.: enxuto)
escovar to brush
escutar to listen to
esfregar to rub
espantar [ifpvntar] to frighten
estacar [tftvlcar] to stop
esticar fiftikar] \ ,
A / to stretch
[fvlar] to speak
/to to spin
freqilentar to attend
pendurar to hang
pensar fpesar] to think
pentear to comb
praticar [pratilcar] to practise
precisar to want
principiar [prisipi r ar] to begin
procurar [prukurvr] to look
for
projectar [prugdar] to intend,
to have in view
quebrar-se [kd'brarsd] to be
broken
receiar to fear
recreiar [rrzkrvtar] to refresh,
delight
recusar [rrzkuzar] to refuse
[rrdgar] to water
to pray
[salvar] to save
sanar [svnar] to cure, heal
[svrar] to heal
to soil
118
Lesson 18.
tirar to take off, draw out
tomar [tumar] to take
tratar to treat, deal (with),
strive
viajar to travel
virar to turn
voar [vuar] to fly
voltar [vottar] to return.
Palavras.
ruido
the noise
a borboleta
the butterfly
[rru 'idu]
[burbu'letv]
o cabide
the rack
o banco
the bench
fkv 'bifoj
o gorgeio
the warbling
o casaco
the coat
[gur'jvtu]
[kv 'zaku]
o ouvido
the hearing,
o collete
the waistcoat
[o 'm&u]
ear
[ku'lefoj
o lavatorio
the washing-
os calQoes
the breeches
[luve'toriu]
stand
[kat'soifj
a toalha
the towel
as ceroulas
the drawers,
[tu'afo]
[39 Vote/7
pants
o no [n-j]
the knot
a camisola
the vest
o estabelecimento
the swimming-
[kvmi' zolis]
de nataQao
school
as chinellas
the slippers
o natatorio
the bathing-
[fi'ndvf]
place
o colarinho
the collar
o mestre de
the teacher of
[kulv'rinu]
nataqao
swimming
a gravata
the cravat
poe
put, he puts
[gre 'vatv]
em seguida \
o toucador
[tokv 'for]
the dressing-
table
entao [m 'tuu] \
then, after
cuidadoso
careful
depois
that.
a esteira
the mat
[d9'poif] 1
[tf'teirvj
43. Leitura.
Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.
Agora, Jose, deixa de regar as tuas flores! Sao oito
horas e tempo para acabares. Has de ir (to go) deitar-te. A
Maria ja te chamou, ella deseja levar-te & cama. Anda depressa,
mas sem ruido, para nao acordares tens irmaozinhos. Tira
o teu fato, mas nao atires com as tuas coisas para o chao!
Olha aquelle cabide: pendura ali o teu casaquinho, o collete
e as canoes. E nas eostas desta cadeira deitaras a tua camisa,
as ceroulas e as meias. Colloca as tuas botas ou sapatos
fora da porta para que o criado as limpe antes de tu te levan-
tares. As tuas chinellas, essas ficam bem ao pe da cama.
Poe o teu colarinho e a gravata em cima do toucador ! Assim
encontraras tudo no seu lugar, sem que precises procural-o
amanha de manha. Ja lavaste as maos? Bem, deita-te, reza
e dorme!
Regular Verbs. 119
Depois de ter bem passado a noite, Jose e accordado
pelo criado que o chama: 6 menino, accorde! Levante-se!
Seu papa ja o esta esperando no jardim! Ja sao sete horas!
E e verdade: o gallo canta, as gallinhas cacarejam e os pas-
saros gorgeiam, cleleitando os ouvidos. Jose esfrega os olhos,
estica as pernas e salta da cama. Elle muda de camisa, cal^a
as meias, as ceroulas e os calcoes, enfia as chinellas e depois
lava-se bem com uma esponja ao lavatorio. Elle usa de
muita agua fria e gasta bastante sabao. Elle gosta ate" to-
mar banho de manha, mas receia que leve muito tempo, por-
que sen pae esta a espera d'elle. Esfregando-se bem com
uma toalha, enxuga a cara e o peito; entao pega numa es-
I cova para escovar os dentes, e com urn pente alisa o cabello.
Depois de penteado enfia o coilete e a jaqueta, abotoa o
colarinho e ata um lindo no na sua gravata. Afinal tira as
chinellas e calc.a os sapatos que o criado ja limpou e collocou
fora da porta do quarto. Agora esta prompto para passar
para baixo e almocar com o pae que em seguida o acompanha
a escola. Pois o Josezinho freqiienta uma escola de meninos
onde trata de aprender quanto um menino precisa saber.
Mas logo que as aulas acabam, elle toma o seu fato de banho
e caminha para o estabelecimento de natac,ao, onde ha um
grande natatorio para os meninos nadarem debaixo da inspecc,ao
d'nm mestre de nata^ao.
44. Exercise.
(a) Read and write the first part of 43, changing the
2nd person of the Imperative into the 3 rd e.g. : Agora, Jose,
deixe de regar as suas flores !
(b) Read and write the 2 nd part (from : Depois de ter . . .),
, changing the Present Tense (1) into the Past Tenses and (2)
into the Future.
45. Thema.
Our little brother went to bed. He took off his things
and hung them (-as) for the most part on a rack behind the bed-
room door. But his shirt, vest, and pants were carefully put on
a chair near the bed, while the slippers and stockings remained
on the mat by the bedside. Before he lay down, he took a glass
of milk and a slice of bread and butter, for he had had no supper.
He had passed the afternoon in the garden, watering his flowers
and catching butterflies. When he was tired, he sat down on a
bench to rest, and delighted his (= the) ears by listening to the
i warbling of the birds. Then he thought that it would be time
rto finish and go to bed. In that moment his (= the) mother
sent for him, ordering the maid-servant to take him ftr. that she
120 Lesson 19.
took him) to bed. As by working in the garden he had soiled
(imp. subj.) his clothes and boots, the man-servant will have to
clean these, while the maid-servant will brush those. When little
Joe awakes (fut. subj.) to-morrow morning, he will find his
things clean and prepared.
Conyersa^ao.
A que horas ha-de o nosso irmaozinho ir para cama?
Quern o leva para la, ajudando-lhe a despir (undress)^
Que mais tera a criada que (to) fazer?
Como passou o Jose a tarde ?
Que fez (did) elle quando estava cansado ?
Que (e que) tomou antes de se deitar?
Onde collocou as suas coisas? (1) a jaqueta? (2) as cerou-
las? (3) as meias? (4) o collarinho?
Para que precisa elle de collocar tudo bem no seu lugar?
Que fara, depois de deitado e antes de adormecer (to fall
asleep) ?
A que horas ha de levantar-se ?
Como se prepara para almocar com seu pae?
Para onde o acompanha depois o pae?
Que faz o JosSzinho na escola ?
E que faz depois de acabadas as aulas?
Que ha no estabelecimento de natacjao?
Como nadam ali os meninos ?
Os meninos gostam de nadar e de tomar banho?
Que fazem depois de ter tornado banho?
Que parte de dia e a melhor para tomar banho ?
Ha entre os meninos algum que seja bom nadador ?
Porque nao se recommenda ficar muito tempo na agua?
Nineteenth Lesson. Li<jao decima nona.
Regular Verbs.
B. Compound Tenses with ter (Active Voice).
and er (Passive Voice).
117. As the compound tenses do not offer any
difficulty, as soon as we know the auxiliary verbs, we
gave their forms in the conjugation of those verbs
(cf. L. 3 6). The compound tenses of the auxiliary
verbs and of the active voice of the transitive verbs are
formed by aid of the verb ter, joined to their past parti-
Regular Verbs. 121
ciple, while the passive voice is formed by the verb
.sv.r, joined to the past participle. Haver is scarcely used
in compound tenses, but for the compound future and
conditional, where it is joined to the following infinitive
by de and, in contrast to the simple future or condi-
tional, expresses a necessity or intention.
Hei-de comprar I shall (I intend) to buy.
sol ha-de derreter a neve the sun will (= must) melt
the snow.
118. Note. The intransitive verbs follow on
the whole the same rules as in English. Their com-
pound tenses are formed by ter; yet, if you want to
express a state, the result of an action, you emplo} T
estar e.g. : o comboio estd chegado; a arvore estd cahida;
a casa estd voltada para o sul (lies towards the south) ;
a industria estd decahida, etc.
119. Ter comprado to have bought.
Indicativo.
Preterite composto.
Eu tenho comprado I have bought, etc.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tinha comprado I had bought, etc.
F-uturo composto.
Hei for tenho) de comprar { intend to buy.
terei de comprar I shall have to buy.
Futuro anterior.
Terei comprado I shall have bought.
Conditional imperfeito .
llama (or teria) \ 1 should have or I ought to buy,
de comprar / I should have been obliged to buy.
Conditional passado.
Teria comprado I should have bought.
Conjunctiva passado.
Que eu tenha comprado that I have bought.
122 Lesson 19.
Mais-que-perfeito.
Se eu tivesse comprado if I had bought.
Futuro anterior.
Quando eu tiver comprado when I shall have bought.
Infinitive e Participios.
Passado.
Ter comprado to have bought.
Futuro.
Haver for ter) de comprar to have to buy.
Participio composto.
Tendo comprado having bought.
120. As already said, the Preterito simples is
often employed instead of the Preterito perfeito com-
posto (the English "I have [done]"):
A. The Preterito simples B. The Preterito composto
indicates : indicates :
1. Something belonging to the 1. Something belonging to the
past: elle foi professor (he past and still continuing in
is no more). the present: Elle tern sido
professor (he is so still).
2. A past state : esteve muito 2. A still lasting state : tern
occupado he was very busy. estado muito occupado he
has been very busy.
3. An isolated singular action 3. A habit still enduring :
(even when repeated): Es- Tem escripto com regulari-
creveu algumas veses lie dade he has written regu-
wrote sometimes. larly (and still continues
writing).
Ex.: "Eu fago assim, eu tenho feito sempre assim, in-
conscientemente ; e o que escrevi ndo e mais do
que a revelagao do que tenho sentido" (Trindade
Coelho.)
As a rule you may recognise which tense to
employ by some adverb contained in the clause:
Havia cinco annos que era iwofessor he (then) had
been a teacher for 3 years.
Ha cinco annos que foi professor he (then) had been a
teacher 3 years ago.
Ha cinco annos que tern sido professor he has been a
teacher these 3 vears.
Regular Verbs. 123
121. Observations.
(a) The interrogative, negative, and interrogative-
negative forms of the verb may be formed, as already
said, by the transposition of the noun or pronoun after
the verb, or simply by the accentuation or punctuation
e.g.: Eu compro. Compro (eu)? Eu nao compro.
Nao compro (eu)?
(b) In the regular verbs the Infinitive pessoal is
equal to the Futuro do Conjunctiva.
122. The Passive Yoice (Vos passim) is formed
1 by joining the auxiliary ser to the past participle of
the active verb (cf. L. 4). The past participle, when
coupled with ser, is considered an adjective and conse-
quently agrees in gender and number with the noun
or pronoun to which it refers, even when the verb ser
is omitted:
terreno foi vendido the ground was sold.
A casa foi vendida the house was sold.
Os terrenos for am vendidos the grounds were sold.
As casas for am vendidas the houses were sold.
Note. Instead of ser we may employ also ficar:
livro ficou vendido, etc.
123. If there be several subjects belonging to
the same participle, this latter takes the form of the
plural. If the subjects are of different gender, the
masculine is preferred to the feminine in modifying the
* participle. If the participle follotvs such different sub-
jects, the masculine ending is applied to the participle;
if preceding, this is not necessary.
For am comprados muitas uvas e figos (or muitos figos
e uvas).
As uvas e os figos (que foram) comprados no mer-
cado . . .
Note. The subject being vds, employed for a single per-
son, the participle is employed in the singular; also if the
subject is V a Ex a , F, etc. the participle agrees with the sex
of the person addressed :
V a Ex a , senhor Nogueira, foi convidado.
V a Ex a , miriha senhora, foi convidada.
Vos sois adorado, Senhor, pelo ceu e pela terra.
124 Lesson 19.
124. Ser chamado to be called or summoned.
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu sou chamado, -a I am called or summoned, etc.
tu es chamado, -a
die e chamado
ella e chamada
Plur. nos somos chamados, -as
vos sois cliamados, -as
elles sao chamados
dlas sdo chamadas.
Imperfeito.
Eu era chamado, -a I was called or summoned, etc.
Preterito absolute.
Eu fui chamado, -a I was or have been called or sum-
moned, etc.
Preterito composto.
Eu tenho sido chamado, -a I have been called.
Preterito mais-gue-perfeito.
Eu fora chamado, -a I had been called.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tinha sido chamado, -a I had been called.
future.
Eu serei chamado. -a I shall be called, etc.
Futuro composto.
Eu liei de ser chamado, -a I shall or must be called
etc.
Futuro anterior.
Eu terei sido chamado, -a I shall have been called.
Conditional presente.
Eu seria chamado, -a I should be called, etc.
Conditional composto.
Eu teria sido chamado, -a I should have been called.
Imperative.
Se chamado, -a (May you) be called, etc.
Participio.
Sendo chamado, -a being called, etc.
Regular Verbs. 125
Participio passado.
Tendo sido chamado, -a having been (or as I was)
called.
Infiniti-vo passado.
[ J er sido chamado, -a to have been called., etc.
Subjunctive.
Presente.
eu seja chamado, -a that I be called.
Imperfeito.
Que eu fosse chamado, -a that I was called.
Prefer ito composto.
Que eu tenha sido chamado, -a that I have been called.
Preterito wais-que-perfeito composto.
Que eu tivesse sido chamado, -a that I had been called.
Futuro.
Se eu for chamado, -a if I shall be called.
Futuro anterior.
Se eu tiver sido chamado, -a if I shall have been called.
125. The passive voice may be and is frequently
expressed by the active form with the pronoun se i.e.,
reflectively; thus:
Com a farinha de milho faz-se a broa (== e feita a
broa). "*N
Out of the flour qf Indian corn is made bread of
maize. -
Yet this form must only be employed, if no
ambiguity result, as for instance : delinquente enfor-
cou-se or: enforcoti-se o delinquente would be rather:
the criminel hanged himself, while "was hanged" must
be rendered in this case by "foi (or ficou) enforcado."
126. The preposition "by" in the passive voice
is rendered by por.
Palavras.
a tecedeira
o fuso
em seguida
depois de
emfim [ifi]
the woman
weaver
the spindle
afterwards
after
at last, finally
liriho ['liyu] the flax
o fto ffiuj the thread
a substancia the substance
[subdf'tv&v]
o tear [ty'ar] the weaver's
loom
a urdidura the warp(ing)
126
Lesson 19.
assedar to hatchel
a estriga the strike (of
;?fiL. 1 th
[if'tricjv] flax)
a meada the skein
secco f'sekuj dry
[m'l'adis]
magar [mv 'sar] to break, brake
a estopa the (flax-)tow
6ater [bv 'ter] to beat
ftftopvj
o mafo ['masu] the flax-brake
grosseiro coarse
a magadeira the flax-dresser
[mvsv 'ffwirvj
[gru'sviru]
otecidoftd'siffu] the web, tissue
espadelar to swingle
o cabo ['kabuj cable, rope
[tfpvft'l&r]
ordinario ordinary
sedeiro the flax-comb
[ordi'nariu]
fo'fointj
a corda ['kordvj the cord, rope
d roca [rrokvl \ -, A - ?
o barbante the pack-
a maqaroca \ dlstatt [bvr'bvntd] thread, twine
estomentar to hackle o Jewfo ['lesuj the handker-
[ifhtme* 'tar] chief
o tomento the awn, chaff
Tanto whilst.
[tumentu] (of flax)
kwvntu]
^4 torre [torrd] the tower
a cruz fkruf] the cross
severo [sd'veru] severe
a varanda the veranda
erguer [ir'gerj to raise
o cobadelo sandy beach
[we 'rundu]
o arco ['arkuj the arch, bow
/"fcaBe '^eZwy
o parapeito the parapet
o terrago the terrace
[ptsve 'pvituj
[te'rr&vu]
rendilhar to indent
a descoberta discovery
frrendi' 'ftar]
[difku'forto] o andar the story
avan$ar to advance
a abdbada arched roof,
construir to construct
/ 'bobv&ej vault
f'koftru'ir]
o pavimento the ground
datar to date
ierreo floor
o dnqulo the angle
a nervura the nervure
o hexdgono hexagon
entrelagar interlace
/^ip 'zagunu]
[intrdlis 'sar]
o cupulo the cupola
a curtina the curtain
o ingresso ingress
[i'gresu]
/"fewr'^w^/
o accesso access
a aweia the battlement
[v'sesuj
a escada de winding stairs
grandioso grand
caracol
[grvndt'ozu]
[kerv'kti]
ornar [ur'nar] to ornate
a guarita the watch-
o escudo the shield
[gwe 'rite] tower.
o Zodo c?a terra the landside
46. Leitura.
linho.
linho e uma planta baixa de flor azul. Das hastes d'essa
planta util e tirado nm fio. Esse fio 6 a substancia de que e
Regular Verbs. 127
feito o panno de linho. Depois de estarern bem seccas, as
hastes da planta sao ma9adas ou batidas a ma^o pelas mae,a-
deiras. Em seguida sao espadeladas, depois levadas ao sedeiro
e emfim fiadas na roca. linho ha de ser espadelado para ser
estomentado ou para se Ihe (of it) tirarem os tomentos que e
a estopa. Os dentes de ferro do sedeiro separam o linho da
estopa : esse fica assedado. Esta e mais grosseira que o linho ;
lambem e fiada na roca, e d'ella serao feitas cordas e bar-
bantes, tecidos grosseiros, cabos ordinaries etc. Com o linho
assedado fazem-se as estrigas, e estas sao fiadas na roca. Ao
fiar, fazem-se no fuso as mac.arocas. Das ma9arocas fazem-se
meadas no sarilho. As meadas vao a lavar (go or are to be
washed) ; depois sao cosidas com cinza ; outra vez sao lavadas ;
e em seguida postas ao sol a (= to) corar. Depois de en-
xutas, as meadas vao a dobadoura, para se fazerem os novellos.
Os novellos vao para a tecedeira, e esta faz com elles a urdi-
dura no tear. Em seguida, lanqando o fio por entre a urdidura,
a tecedeira faz o panno. Para tudo isto ha tambem machinas
rnuito perfeitas nas fabricas de fia9ao e tecidos.
Trindade Coelho: primeiro Livro de Leitura.
47. Exercise.
The Tower of Belem.
One of the most beautiful monuments in Portugal is the
Tower of Belem, called also "Torre de Sao Vicente," magnificent
and severe, raised upon a rock on a sandy beach of the Tagus
t with its terrace advancing still over the river. The tower
was built in memory of the discoveries of the Portuguese,
and its construction dates from the beginning of the sixteenth
century. The square tower shuts up the terrace from the
landside. The two angles of the terrace which are looking
upon (para) the sea are cut so that by their base is formed
an hexagon, in the little angles of which (do qual) are rising
watch-towers with cupolas, as well os from the two inferior
and the four superior angles of the tower. The terrace and
the platform of the tower are protected by curtains of grand
battlements; each of these ornated by (com) its shield and
cross of Christ. At half the height of the tower projects
an open veranda with columns, arches, and indented parapets.
Inside in every story a large central room is (to be) found
whose arched roof in the ground-floor has no nervures, while
very rich interlaced nervures are in the upper stories. By very
little doors ingress is given to the very narrow interiors of
the square watch-towers. Winding stairs give access to the
superior stories.
128 Lesson 20.
Conyersa^ao.
Que especie de planta e o linho?
Qual e a parts util da planta?
De que servem os fios tirades da baste do linho?
Como se prepara a substancia que sao os fios, para se
fazer o fio de fiar?
Que vem a ser a estopa? Como e? E que se faz
d'ella?
Quaes sao os processes passados pelos fios depois de
fiados na roca?
Como se cbarnam os apparelhos que servem nesses pro-
Onde sao esses apparellos substituidos por machinas
muito perfeitas?
Como se chama um dos rnais bellos monumentos em,
Portugal?
Onde se encontra a Torre de Belem?
Com que intento (intention) foi ella construida?
De quando data a sua construc^ao?
De que duas partes consiste o monumento?
Como e construido o terra^o?
Como 6 protegido o terrao assim como a plataforina
da torre?
As ameias como sao ornadas?
Que e que projecta a meia altura da torre?
Que 6 que se encontra no interior?
Como sao feitas as abobadas no pavimento terreo? nos
andares superiores?
Como se entra nas guaritas? nos andares superiores?
Twentieth Lesson. Licjao vigesima.
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.
Verbos pronominaes ou reflexives.
127. As we learned in the last chapter ( 125),
the Passive Voice may be and is often rendered by
the reflective form of the verb. Thus employed, any
verb, even the intransitive one, may adopt the passive
form. This form may in English be rendered either
by the same passive form or by the active form with
the impersonal pronouns one, we, you, or tliey, or people
as a subject e.g.:
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 129
Juntam-se os papeis the papers are gathered, you or
we gather the papers.
Este livro le-se com agrado this book is read (one reads
or people read this book) with pleasure.
Fala-se d'elle com muito elogio he is spoken of (they
speak of him) with high praise.
Observations.
(a) In the last phrase we may also employ the
active form, with the verb in the plural, just as in
English :
Falam delle com muito elogio.
(b) In other cases we may substitute the passive
or impersonal form by the gerund e.g. : instead of
"quando se dorme, nao se precisa comer" :
Dormindo nao se precisa comer.
When you (we, people) sleep, you (we, people) need not
eat.
(c) Here also the second reflective form might
(be rendered by the active, as in English: Dormindo,
a gente nao precisa comer.
128. The following is the whole conjugation
of the reflective verb, the 3 rd person of which we have
'already learned.
As for the reflective pronouns (English : myself, etc.),
ithere is only the one characteristic form (se), already
dealt with, which marks the 3 rd pers. sing, and plur.
For the other persons the accusative of the pronoun
.is employed, thus : me [mdj, te [td], se [sd], nos [nzf],
[vos [vofj.
Infinitive.
Infinitivo impessoal.
Lavar-se to wash oneself.
Infinitivo pessoal.
Para eu me lavar that I (may) wash myself, etc.
para tu te lavares
para die se lavar
para nos nos lavarmos
para vos vos lavardes
para elles se lavarem.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 9
130 Lesson 20.
Participio.
Presente.
Lavando-me washing myself.
Pas sad o.
Tendo-me lavado (= depois de me ter lavado) after
having washed myself.
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu lavo-me, I wash myself, etc. nos lavdmo^-nos
tu lavas-te vos lavaes-vos
elk lava-se elles lavam-se.
Preterito imperfeito.
Eu lavava-me I washed my- nds lavavamo^nos
self, etc. vos lavaveis-vos
tu lavavas-te elles lavavam-se.
elle lavava-se
Preterito perfeito.
Eu lavei-me I washed myself nds lavdmo^nos
or I have washed myself, etc. vos lavdstes-vos
tu lavaste-te elles lavaram-se.
elle lavou-se
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Eu lavdra-me I had washed nos lavdramo l -nos
myself, etc. vds lavdreis-vos
tu lavdras-te elles lavaram-se.
elle lavdra-se
Preterito perfeito composto.
Eu tenho-me lavado I have washed myself.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito-comp osto.
Eu tinha-me lavado I had washed myself.
Futuro.
Eu hei-de me lavar or lavar-me-(h)ei or eu me lavarei I
shall wash myself, etc.
Futuro passado.
Ter-me-(h)ei lavado or eu me terei lavado I shall have
washed myself, etc.
Conditional.
Eu havia de me lavar or lavar-me-(h)ia I should wash
myself, etc.
Conditional passado.
Ter-me-(h)ia lavado or eu me teria lavado I should have
washed myself.
1 The s of the I 8 * pers. pi. drops before the pronouns o(s),
a(s), nos, vos.
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 131
Imperative.
Lava-te! Lave-se! Lavae-vos! Wash yourself!
Nao te laves! Nao se lave! Nao vos laveis! Do not
wash yourself.
Conjunctive.
Presente.
Que eu me lave that I wash myself, etc.
que tu te laves,
que elle se lave
que nds nos lavemos
que vos vos laveis
que elles se lavem.
Imperfeito.
Que or se eu me lavasse that or if I washed myself, etc.
que or se tu te lavasses
que or se elle se lavasse
que or se nos nos lavassemos
que or se vos vos lavasseis
que or se elles se lavassem.
Preterito composto.
Que eu me tenha lavado that I have washed myself, etc.
que tu te tenhas lavado.
Mais- que-perfeito- composto .
Que or se eu me tivesse lavado that or if I had washed
myself, etc.
que or se tu te tivesses lavado
que or se elle se tivesse lavado.
Futuro.
Se or quando eu me lavar if or when I shall wash
myself, etc.
56 or quando tu te lavares
se or quando elle se lavar
se or quando nos nos lavarmos
se or quando v6s vos lavardes
se or quando elles se lavarem.
129. The position of the reflective pronoun is:
1. in a simple principal phrase, if not negative, after
the verb (or the auxiliary), to which it is joined by a
byphen e.g.: Lavo-me; lavaste-te?
2. If however the phrase is negative, the pronoun
vrecedes the verb: Nao me lavo\ nao te lavaste? Nunca
lavava.
9*
132 Lesson 20.
3. If an adverb, conjunction, or complement begins
the phrase or, without beginning it, precedes the verb,
the pronoun may be put before or after the verb.
"0 homem precisa alimentar-se para viver: se nao
se alimentasse, morria. Os homens alimentam-se de
carnes, e tambem se alimentam de vegetaes."
4. In subordinate sentences the pronoun precedes
the verb: Quero que te laves (as maos). I want you
to wash yourself (your hands).
5. After the "verbo de realce" E que which is
employed to put an emphasis upon some word, you
may put the pronoun behind or before the verb : E que
esta lei presta-se (or se presta) a tudo quanto seja fraude.
The case is that this law complies with anything like
fraud.
Here also E que may be omitted or considered
as not existing, and thus the phrase becomes a prin-
cipal one.
Note. The same rules apply to the pronoun complement,
even if not employed reflectively, and whether accusative or
dative e.g.:
Eu law- a I wash her or it.
Lavaste-os? Did you wash them?
Nao as lavei I did not wash them.
Nunca te lavou a roupa she never washed your linen
(te is here dative).
Se a lavadeira nao me tivesse lavado a roupa ...
If the washerwoman had not washed my linen . . .
130. The reflective verbs in English and Por-
tuguese languages do not always correspond to each
other. As indeed the reflective verbs in English are
rare, some neuter or passive verbs in English require
the reflective form in Portuguese. Such verbs are:
Admirar-se to wonder chamar-se to be called
afogar-se to be drowned compor-se (see 213) to be
approximar-se \. . composed
chegar-se ^approximate eonten l r . se to be contented
apresentar-se a to wait upon or satisfied
(apresentar-se to offer oneself) decidir-se to decide
arrepender-se to repent , .. / to lie down,
(as)sentar-se to sit down G \ to go to bed
atrever-se to dare desctiidar-se de to neglect
calar-se to be silent dignar -se to deign, to be pleased
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 133
empenhar-se to endeavour lembrar-se to remember
encontrar-se to be (found) levontar-se to get up, to rise
encontrar-se com to meet queixar-se to complain
enganar-se to be mistaken referir-se to refer
escapar-se \ , s regosijar-se to rejoice
evadir-se \ resentir-se to resent
esquecer(-se de) to forget restdbelecer-se to recover
fazer-se to become retirar-se to retire
informar-se to inquire tornar-se to become, turn out
irritar-se to grow angry recusar(-se) to refuse
^r-5e (embora) to go away desanimar(-se) \ to discourage,
jactar-se to boast desalentar(-se) / to lose courage
. The three last verbs may be employed as active.
heater, or reflective verbs ; as for esquecer, it must be follow-
ed by de if employed reflectively, and personally. Without
le, it may be used as an active verb (which is considered a
gallicism); but more frequently as a neuter and in the 3 rd per-
son; neuter, it is employed without pronoun or de.
Esqueceu-se de alguma cousa \
Esqueceu alguma cousa / he forgot something.
Esqueceu-lhe alguma cousa }
Eu desanimei or desanimei-me \ I god discouraged, I
Eu desalentei or desalentei-me } lost courage.
seu mallogro desalentou-o his ill-success discouraged
him.
131. Whenever the Portuguese se, nos, vos have
lot a reflective sense, but express a reciprocal action,
hey are translated by each other or one another:
Os dois irmdos parecem-se (Nos parecemo-nos).
The two brothers resemble (we resemble) one another.
132. Very often we can hardly distinguish
[whether a verb, employed with -se (i.e. in the 3 rd per-
on), is reflective or passive. In this latter case it can
Iways be substituted by the past participle preceded
cy a form of the verb ser. sino ouve-se ( is heard).
ometimes the difference is immaterial : corpo alimenta-
!, the body is nourished or nourishes itself. If there is
second pronoun, we may be sure that the verb is
mployed in the passive voice e.g.:
A cavallo dado nao se Ihe olha o dente (= o dente nao
e olhado).
Look not a gift-horse in the mouth.
134 Lesson 20.
Quando Jia vento, molha-se a vela (= a vela fica mo-
lhada) (prov.).
Strike the iron while it is hot.
Contenta-te, gato, que farta o farto.
Great wealth, great weariness.
PalaTras.
Vestir-se to dress
a extremidade the extremity
[vi 'ftirsd]
[i'ftrdmiffi&foj
despir-se to undress
saliente prominent
[dtfpirsd]
[suli 'entdj
divertir-sd \
a uriha the nail
[divdrtirsd] { to amuse
['uyv]
recrear-se j oneself
guarnecer de to provide with
[rdkr'i'arsdj }
gwvrnd'ser]
dedicar-se a to give oneself
estar em pe to stand
up to
[if'tarlm'ps]
guardar-se de to beware of
pisar [pi'zar] to tread
[gwer 'darsdfoj
o trabalho the work
refrescar-se to refresh
[ire 'fiafiu]
[r9frif"karsd] oneself
o tacto ['tatuj the touch
olimentar-se to nourish
particularmente particularly
[ulimen'tarsd] oneself
[pvrtikiilar-
assemelhar-se to equal, to
'mentej
[usdmi r fiars9], resemble, to
o dedo pollegar the thumb
parecer-se be (alike)
[puU 'gar]
[pvrd' sersd]
o dedo pollegar the big toe
o vegetal the vegetable
- .
do pe
[vd$d'tal]
opponivel opposite
a bebida the drink
[opu 'nivsl]
[bs'MfoJ
a gemma d'ovo the yolk
engordar to fatten
[' emv '&ovu]
[igur'dar]
a clara (d'ovo) the white (of
solido ['soliffu] solid ; thorough
an egg)
molar a sede to quench one's
incolor colourless
(a fome) thirst
cozido boiled
figurar to figure
o miolo the kernel
suar to sweat
[mi'olu]
a baga [bagv] the drop
o suor [su'or] the sweat
oval [u'val] oval
envolver to involve
o estdmago the stomach
[ivul 'verj
fo'ftomvgu]
proprio para eatable
o succo f'sukuj, the gastric
comer
gdstrico juice
saboroso savoury
['gaftrikuj
[svfiu'rozu]
digerir to digest
nutritivo nourishing
[di&'rir]
[nutrd 'tivuj
o condimento the seasoning
o producto the production)
[Jcondi'mentuJ
[pru'dutu]
salivar to spit
o reino animal the animal
[svli'var]
kingdom
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.
135
o reino vegetal the vegetable
kingdom
o caixeiro the clerk
["katfvyrv]
delgado thin
o guarda-livros the book-
[dtiga&u]
keeper
acastanhado brownish
seja o que for whatsoever it
[ulitiftie 'yaffu]
be
liquido['likwi&u] liquid
rijo f'rriguj hard, strong
a respeito de as for
a escri(p)tura- the bookkeep-
alimentar alimentary
Q ao (mercantil) ing
a natureza Nature, quality
em (or por) par- by single and
o requerente the solicitor
tidos simples double entry
[nrjika 'rente]
e dobrados
o caixa the cashier
(em) caso (que) in case.
48. Leitura.
Alimentagd.
homem precisa alimentar-se paraviver: se nao se alimen-
tasse, morria. Os homens alimentam-se de carnes, e tambem se
alimentam de vegetaes. As carries e os vegetaes, chamados
alimentos solidos, ou comidas, matam-nos a fome. Ha alimentos
que nos engordam; e outros que nao nos engordam, mas pelos
quaes e" conservado ao corpo o seu calor natural. Os animaes
,e os vegetaes fornecem-nos os alimentos solidos; mas alem
d'estes, precisaroos tambem de bebidas. As bebidas matam-
nos a s6de. nosso corpo e formado de muitas substancias.
Entre as substancias que formam o nosso corpo figura a agua.
Quando o nosso corpo se resente da falta d'agua, somos avisados
pela sde de que precisa d'ella. Quando suamos perdemos
agua, pois esta sae-nos do corpo em bagas de suor. Eis ahi
porque suando sente-se (or a gente sente or porque quando sua-
;rnos sentimos) s6de. estomago produz um succo, chamado succo
gastrico, muito precise para digerir a comida. Os condimentos,
tque nos fazem salivar, fazem com que se produza esse succo
em maior abundancia. corpo humano carece de substancias
'varias para bem se nutrir. Essas substancias encontram-se
i.nos varios alimentos; e d'estes r uns possuem grande niimero
ide taes substancias, e outros so possuem algumas. pao, a
3arne, os legumes verdes e seccos, as batatas, os ovos, e tambem
i agua e o leite pertencem ao numero dos primeiros.
> Trindade Coelho: Primeiro Livro de Leitura (adapted).
49. Thema.
Solicitagdo d'um emprego.
Lisboa, 8 de Abril de 1908.
Ulmo e Ex mo1 Senhor:
Tenho a honra de apresentar-me como requerente do
imprego de caixeiro (guarda-livros, caixa, ou seja o que for)
~ 1 See 18.
136 Lesson 20.
na estimada casa de V a - Ex a -, annunciado no Diario de Xo-
ticias d'hoje.
Frequentei durante seis annos a Escolade..., e estive dois
annos em casa do sr. A. B. a quern tenho licenc.a de me
referir. Tive uma solida instruc9ao na arithmetica emquanto
a exactidao e promptidao; e esta carta informara a V a Ex*-
a respeito da minha letra. Tambem estou bem versado na
escriptura^ao mercantil em partidos simples e dobrados.
Gaso (que) V a - Ex a - deseje v6r-me antes de se decidir,
digne-se de m'o fazer saber, para que eu me apresente a
V a - Ex a - a qualquer hora que marcar.
Sou com toda a consideragao e respeito
De V a - Ex a criado att e obrg do
Joao da Silva Nogueira.
50. Exercise.
A. The Foot and the Hand.
The foot and the hand are both members of the human
body. They are composed of bones, flesh, and skin, and are
more long than large. On their extremities they have five
prominent parts provided with nails. These prominent parts
are called fingers. Of the two, the foot is the more solid and
big and the one which has the hardest bones. With the feet
people can stand, walk, and tread. With the hands we can
execute numerous works. Of the two members, the hand is
the one in which the sense of touch is the more refined. What
particularly characterises the hand is the thumb being (infini-
tive) separated from the other four fingers and opposite to
each of them, whilst the big toe is joined to the other toes.
B. The Egg and the Nut.
The egg and the nut resemble one another by their
exterior form. Both are oval. The interior of both is en-
cased by a shell. The interior is not only eatable, but also
nourishing and savoury. The egg is a production of the]
animal kingdom, and the nut is a production of the vegetable
kingdom. The shell of the egg is more or less white and
thin, and may easily be broken between the fingers. The
shell of the nut is brownish, thick and hard, and can only
with difficulty be opened by the hand. The nourishing sub-
stance in the egg is liquid, but when it is boiled, it becomes
firm. It is composed of the yolk and the white. The yolk
is yellow, and the white is colourless when raw, but white
1 See 18.
of the Regular Conjugations. 137
after being boiled. The nourishing substance of the nut,
called the kernel, is of a firm quality.
Coim>rsa<;ao.
A. (bate na porta.) B. Pode entrar! (or Entre quern 6!).
Abrfi-se a porta, dando ingresso a um homem que se approxima,
inclinando-se:
A. V* Ex a - da- me licen^a?
B. Don (see 184 and p. 29, note). Chegue-se para
ca. Que que deseja?
A. Falaram-me n'um emprego de caixeiro que se pre-
tende preencher.
B. E verdade. E V- encontra-se nas condicoes . . ?
A. Atr6vo-me de solicital-o. Chamo-me . . .
B. Sente-se! Pode dar-me informac.6es sob re alguma
collocaQao anterior?
A. P6de V a - Ex a - tomal-as com a casa dos senhores . . .,
donde me retirei ha um ni$s.
B. Porque se retirou? Descuidou-se das suas obriga^oes?
Nao se empenhou bastante em satisfazer os patroes?
A. Nao foi isso. Fiquei doente e tive de me ir embora
para me restabelecer. Levantei-me da cama ha dias
apenas.
B. Bern, hei-de informar-me, antes de me decidir. Mas
V 6 - lembre-se que tern de se contentar com pouco or-
denado e que espero dos meus empregados que nunca
se escapem a trabalho algum, nem se esque9am dos
sous deveres.
A. V a - Ex a - nao tera de queixar-se.
B. Muito bem. Caso (que) se dedique seriamente ao sen
emprego, nao terei eu de me irritar, nem V 6 - de
arrepender-se. Entao retire-se por emquanto (for
the present) e nao (se) desanime ate receber a
minha decisao! Va-se (see 217) com Deus!
A. Deus guarde a V fl - Ex a - !
Twenty-first Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
primeira.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
Paradigma das conjugates regulares.
Having in the three last lessons dealt with the
>rmations of the tenses and moods of a regular
138
Lesson 21.
verb and given all the forms (including the passive and
the reflective) of a verb of the first conjugation, we
now present a paradigm of all three, thus repeating
the first, in order to facilitate a summary view, yet
omitting the English translation, easily supplied, however,
after the 18 th lesson.
133. The Portuguese calls Yerbo adjective a verb
that unites in one word the verb ser or estar and an
attribute, thus expressing an action, a state, or a quality
of the subject e.g.: saltar, comer, partir; salto, I jump,
equivalent to estou saltando, I am jumping; come, he
eats, equivalent to estd comendo, he is eating, etc.
134. The verbo adjectivo may be transitive
or intransitive, according to its expressing an action,
or a state, respectively a quality of the subject. Being
transitive, it has an active and passive voice (voz activa
or passiva). In the compound tenses of the former, it
is conjugated with ter, in all tenses of the latter with
ser.
135.
Conjugates regulares do verfoo adjectivo.
Voz activa
l a . conjugagdo. 2 a . conjugagdo. 3 a . conjugagao.
Infinit(iv)os e Participios.
Presente impessoal.
Louv-ar, to praise Dev-er, to owe, Applaud-ir, to ap-
to be obliged, plaud.
must, ought
Louv-ar
louv-ares
louv-ar
louv-armos
louv-ardes
louc-arem.
Ter louvado.
Ter
teres
ter
louvado,
devido,
applaudido
Presente pessoal.
Dev-er
dev-er es
dev-er
dev-er mos
dev-erdes
dev-er em.
Preterito impessoal.
Ter devido.
Preterito pessoal.
termos j
terdes .
terem
Applaud-ir
applaud-ires
applaud-ir
applaud-irmos
applaud-irdes
applaud-irem.
Ter applaudido.
louvado,
devido,
applaudido.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
139
Futuro impessoal.
Haver or ter de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
Futuro pessoal.
Ter or haver \ de louvar, termos or haver mos\de louvar.
teres haver es \ de dever terdes haver des \de dever,
ter haver } de applaudir terem haverem } de applaudir.
Louv-ando.
Louv-ado.
Tendo louvado.
Louv-o
louv-as
louv-a
louv-dmos
louv-aes
louv-am.
Louv-ava
louv-avas
louv-ava
louv-dvamos
louv-dveis
louv-avam.
Louv-ei
louv-asle
louv-ou
louv-dmos
louv-astes
louv-aram.
Participio imperfeito.
Dev-endo.
Participio perfeito.
Dev-ido.
Applaud-indo.
Applaud-ido.
Participio perfeito composto.
Tendo devido. Tendo applaudido.
Indicative.
Presente.
Dev-o
dev-es
dev-e
dev-emos
dev-eis
dev-em.
Preterito imperfeito.
Dev-ia
dev-ias
dev-ia
dev-iamos
dev-ieis
dev-iam.
Preterito perfeito.
Dev-i 1
dev-este
dev-eu
dev-emos
dev-estes
dev-eram.
Applaud-o
applaud-es
applaud-e
applaud-imos
applaud-em.
Applaud-ia
applaud-ias
applaud-ia
applaud-iamos
applaud-ieis
applaud-iam.
Applaud-i
applaud-iste
applaud-iu
applaud-imos
applaud-istes
applaud-iram.
Preterito perfeito composto.
Tenho louvado, devido, applaudido.
1 In the meaning of must or ought this tense is not used,
but is replaced by the Imperfect.
140
Lesson 21.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito. l
Louvd-ra Deve-ra Applaudi-ra
louvd-ras deve-ras applaudi-ras
louvd-ra deve-ra applaudi-ra
louvd-ramos deve-ramos applaudi-ramos
louvd-reis deve-reis applaudi-reis
louvd-ram. deve-ram. applaudi-ram.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Tinha louvado, devido, applaudido.
Louv-arei
louv-ards
louv-ard
louv-aremos
louv-areis
louv-arao.
Futuro imperfeito.'
Dev-er&i
dev-erds
dev-erd
dev~eremos
dev-ereis
div-erao.
Applaud-irei
applaud-irds
applaud-ird
applaud-iremos
applaud-ireis
applaud-irdo.
Futuro imperfeito composto.
Hei or tenho de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
Futuro preterito composto.
Terei louvado, devido, applaudido.
Louv-aria
louv-arias
louv-aria
louv-ariamos
louv-arieis
louv-ariam.
Louvd-ra
louvd-ras
louvd-ra, etc.
Condicional.
Presente (imperfeito).
Dev-eria
dev-erias
dev-eria
dev-eriamos
dev-erieis
dev-eriam.
or
(cf. Mais-que-perfeito^).
Deve-ra
Deve-ras
deve-ra etc.
Applaud-iria
applaud-irias
applaud-iria
applaud-iriamos
applaud-irieis
applaud-iriam*
Applaud-ira
applaud-iras
applaud-lra etc.
Perfeito.
Teria louvado, devido, applaudido
Tivera louvado, devido, applaudido.
1 For the formation of this tense cf. 114, c.
2 For the formation of this tense cf. 44, 1.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
141
Imperative.
Louv-a (tu)
louv-ae (vos).
dev-ei (vds)
Applaud-e (tu)
applaud-i (vos).
N.B. The verb clever in its meaning "must" has
no Imperative. In its meaning "to owe" this form is
given periphrastically : fica devendo, ndo fiques devendo.
The above imperative forms of dever, one of the few
quite regular verbs in -er, is meant only for a gram-
matical model.
Louv-e
louv-es
louv-e
louv-Gmos
louv-eis
louv-em.
Louvd-sse
louvd-sses
louvd-sse
louvd-ssewios
louvd-sseis
louvd-ssem.
Conjunctivo.
Presente.
Dev-a
dev-as
dev-a
dev-dmos
dev-aes
dev-am.
Preterito imperfeito.
Deve-sse
deve-sses
deve-sse
deve-ssemos
deve-sseis
deve-ssem.
Applaud- a
applaud-as
applaud-a
applaud-amos
applaud- aes
applaud-am.
Applaudi-sse
applaudi-sse
applaudi-ssemos
applaudi-sseis
applaudi-ssem.
Louva-r
louva-res
louva-r
louva-rmos
louva-rdes
louva-rem.
Preterito perfeito composto.
Teriha louvado, devido, applaudido.
Preterito mais-qite- perfeito composto.
Tivesse louvado, devido, applaudido.
Futuro imperfeito. 1
Deve-r Applaudi-r
applaudi-res
applaudi-r
deve-res
deve-r
deve-rtnos
deve-rdes
deve-rem.
applaudi rmos
applaudi-rdes
applaudi-rem.
Futuro imperfeito composto.
Houver de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
1 Cf. 113, C.
142
Lesson 21,
136. Summary Table
of the Endings of Regular Verbs in their Simple Tenses.
First Primitive Tense, Infinitivo and Derived.
1. conj. 2. conj. 3. conj.
Infinite.
Pres. impessodl.
ar
er ir
Pres. pessoal.
ar
er ir
ares
eres ires
ar
er ir
armos
ermos irmos
ardes
erdes irdes
arem.
erem. irem.
Indicativo.
Presente.
as
es es
a
e e
dmos
emos imos
aes
eis is
am.
em. em.
Pret. imperf.
ava
ia ia
avas
ias ias
ava
ia ia
dvamos
iamos iamos
dveis
ieis ieis
dvam.
iam. iam.
1. conj.
ei
aste
ou
dmos
astes
dram.
2. conj. 3.
Pret. perf.
este
eu
emos
estes
eram.
iste
iu
imos
istes
warn.
Future imperfeito.
arei erei irei
ards eras irds
ard era ird
aremos eremos iremos
areis ereis ireis
ardo. erdo. irao.
Conditional.
aria eria iria
arias erias irias
aria eria iria
ariamos eriamos iriamos
arieis erieis irieis
ariam. eriam. iriam.
Participio imperf.
ando. endo. indo.
ado.
Participio perfeito.
ido. ido.
Second Primitive Tense, Indicativo presente (see above)
and Derived.
1. conj. 2. conj. 3. conj.
Conjunctive.
Presente.
1. conj. 2. conj. 3. conj.
Imperative.
e
a
a
a
e
e
es
as
as
e
a
a
e
a
a
emos
dmos
dmo
emos
dmos
dmos
ai
ei
i
eis
aes
aes
em.
am.
am.
em.
am.
am.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
143
Third Primitive Tense, 2 nd Pers. Sing, of the fret. perf.
(see above) and Derived.
Same endings in all 3 conjugations, whether regular or irregular.
Indicative. Conjunctive.
Mais-que-perf. Pret. imp. Futuro imperf.
Ira sse
ras sses
ra sse
ramos ssemos
reis sseis
ram. ssem.
r
res
r
rmos
rdes
rem.
137. Verbs of the 2 Ed and 3 rd conjugations.
N.B. Those verbs marked by * are irregular. Of
the regular ones, those ending in -cer, -ger, -guer, -guir
are subject to the well-known rules of the phonetic
law concerning c and g. Others submit to the phone-
tics mentioned in the following lesson (22).
abrir to open
affligir to afflict
aggredir to attack, assault
conduzir to lead ; -se to behave
consistir (de) to consist (of)
fransir to gather into plaits ;
as sobrancelhas to frown
fugir to flee, to fly
*impedir to hinder, prevent
insistir (em) to insist (upon)
*ir ter com to call upon, to
go to
luzir to light, to shine
mentir to lie
*ouvir to hear
partir to part, to divide; to
depart
*pedir to ask, beg
perseguir to persecute
possuir to possess
produzir to produce
prohibir to forbid, prohibit
proseguir to prosecute
*provir to come from
reduzir to reduce
sentir to feel, smell
Adoecer to fall ill
agradecer to thank (for)
amanhecer to dawn
apodrecer to make or grow
rotten
apparecer to appear
bater to beat
collier to pick, to gather
commover to move
conter to contain
converter to convert
coser to sow
cozer to cook
defender to defend
. desapparecer to disappear
esquecer(-se) to forget, to be
forgotten
*fazer to do, make
fornecer furnish
merecer to merit
nascer to be born; to spring,
parecer to seem [rise, grow
percorrer to run through
*poder can, to be able
proteger to protect
"saber to know
144
Lesson 21.
tecer to weave
varrer to sweep
*ver to see.
servir to serve, to be of use;
se de to make use of
sorrir to smile
Palavras.
O poente the west, oc-
obsequio
the favour
[pu 'enty] cident
[ot>' zskiu]
o chao [fun] the floor,
o trabalho de
the holiday-
ground
ferias
work
a direcgao the direction
Duarte
Edward
/cfo'rc 'sett/
[du'art9],
o alimento the nourish-
Eduardo
/#ft 'mentuj ment
precisar
to need
o legume the vegetables
[przsi'zar]
a 2?0na [pontv] the horn
o castigo
fkvf'tigu]
the punishment
o #ado vaccum the cattle
a preguiga
the laziness
['ga&u'vakumj
[prd'gisv]
o cervo ['ssrvu] the stag
a lebre ['leftrdj
the hare
a armagao the horns
a raposa
the fox
[vrrws 'svuj
[rra 'pozvj
descangado quiet
pardo ['parduj
grey
[dtfkun 'sa&u]
rachado
cleft
opapel [pv'pslj the part
[rrts 'faffuj
fazer o papel to play the part
o focinho
snout, mouth
de . . . of ...
[fu'siyu]
as palmas the applause
as barbas
the whiskers,
['palmisf]
f'barbvf]
the beard
a gallinha the hen
timido ['timt&u]
timid
[gv'liye]
a ave [avdj the bird
a casca f'kafkvj
cagar [kv'sar]
the bark
to hunt, catch
a ave de rapina the bird of prey
saboroso
estudioso studious, dili-
[svbu'rozuj
savoury
[iftu&'i' ozu] gent
o pelo f'pelu]
the hair
preguigoso lazy
o chapelleiro
[prdgi' sozu]
[fvpa 'Ivfru]
the hatter.
o pato f'patu] the duck
51. Leitura.
sol nasce no oriente e desapparece no poente. A herva
cresce no prado, enverdecendo o chao. Tejo, depois de
nascido na Hespanha, percorre este pais em direccao occidental
e, atravessado tambem Portugal, vae lancar-se no Atlantico
ao pe de Lisboa. alimento ordinario do homem consiste de
pao, carne, leite, ovos e legumes. Os animaes de pontas, taes
como o gado vaccum, os cervos e outros mais, receberam a
sua arma9ao para se defender(em), ao serem aggredidos.
Guilherme devia ser mais modesto ; assim mereceria a estima de
toda a gente. senhor appareca em minha casa na tarde de
amanha! Nao se esqueca! Nao me hei de esquecer, fique
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugation. 145
V a - Ex a - descanc,ado! A nossa melhor actriz adoeceu infeliz-
ineute; se nao tivesse adoecido (or: se nao adoecesse), teria
sido nmito applaudida. Ainda ante-hontem, fazendo o papel
da Ophelia, recebeu muitas palmas, que agradecia, sorrindo
commovida. alumno ja lia, escrevia e fazia contas, mas
ainda nao sabia desenhar. Nao sabias que a raposa persegue
as lebres ? Eu nao tenho duvida que ella persiga ( 224) as
lebres, mas queria que nao perseguisse as gallinhas e os
patos. Se conhecesse um meio que o impedisse e que prote-
gesse essas aves, havia-de empregal-o (or: empregal-o-ia).
52. Thema.
The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.
On the last day of the holidays Edward went to his
schoolfellow Joseph and asked him (Ihe) the favour that he
[might] let him copy his two holiday-tasks which (os quaes)
should be presented at school the following day. Joseph
asked, astonished, whether he had not yet begun them. 1
;Edward answered that he had had no time for it, that he
had played a great deal with his brothers and sisters, that he
jhad walked in the fields and woods, and that he had caught
butterflies. Then Joseph answered that Edward, having
walked so much, must be very tired and needed to rest; but
that the following day he would receive the just punishment
for his laziness.
53. Exercise.
Change the indirect language of the above into the
direct.
Conversacjao.
A Lebre.
(By aid of the words in parenthesis a whole sentence
is to be formed).
Que e uma lebre ? (animal quadrupede)
Que cor tern? (parda)
Como e a cabea? (arredondada)
Como sao as orelhas? (compridas e movedic.as)
Como 6 o bei90 superior? (rachado)
Que tern no focinho? (barbas)
Como sao os ps anteriores? (curtos)
Como sao os pe"s posteriores? (compridos)
Como e a cauda? (muito curta)
Como e a lebre? (timida)
Que come ella? (sementes, couves e cascas)
1 In indirect discourse the Indicative is to be employed.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 10
146 Lesson 22.
Quaes sao os aniraaes que a perseguem? (raposas, gatos
bravos, aves de rapina)
Quern a ca^a? (o homem)
Como e a carne? (saborosa)
Quern utilisa os pelos? (chapelleiros).
Twenty-second Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
segunda,
Phonetical and Orthographical Peculiarities
of otherwise Regular Verbs.
A. In the First Conjugation.
137a. (a) Those verbs of the 1 st conj. which in
their radical syllable have a close a [v], not followed
by m, n or nh, change this u into open a wherever
it has the tonical accent (cf. 5). Ex.: lavar [h'var] :
lavo f'lavuj. comboio para ['parvj.
(b) If, however, the # is followed by m, n or nh,
it remains close: chamar [fe'mvr] : chamo ['famuj ; sa-
nar : sano f'svnu], apanhar : apanho [v 'pvyiuj.
Except.: ganhar [ga jiar] : ganho ['gayiu] I gain.
138. (a) Those verbs of the 1 st conj. which in
their radical syllable have an atonic e [d], not fol- j
lowed by m, n, nh or by one of the palatals ^ ch, Ih
modify it, when tonical, into open e [e]. Ex.: con-
certar [Jcdsw't&rJ to mend : concerto [Jco'sertuJ; confcs-
sar:confesso [kd'fesuj; levar; medrar; seccar; segar.
(b) If, however, one of those consonants follows, i
as well as in the verb chegar, the atonic e [9 or i]
becomes close e [e] or fsj (see 5 A, Remark): remar :
remo ['rremuj; acenar : acena [v'senvj; chegar : chego
['fvgu], chegaf'fegvj; desejar [dd^'jarj : desejofdd'zvjuj;
fecher [ft' far] : fecho f'fvfuj; ajoelhar [vgwi'fiar] : ajoelho
fvgwvfiuj. Except.: invejar to envy : invejo fi'veguj
with open e [e].
(c) On the other hand another verb belongs to this
group (b): pesar in its meaning to be sorry: pesa-ine
['pezvmd] I am sorry, I worry, with close e, while the
isam e verb in its meaning to weight has open e [e] in
the tonical syllables: peso [pezu].
ion. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 147
139. Verbs ending in -ear change e into ei [m],
whenever the e would have the tonical accent: nomear
[numl 'urj to name : nomeio [nu 'wiv^u]. Except. : the verb
crear (or better criar) to create, breed, bring up; which
conjugates: crio, crias, cria, criam, etc., while its com-
posites follow the general rule : procrear to procreate :
procreio (but also procrio) ; recrear to delight, to recover :
recreia.
N.B. Recriar, to recreate, conjugates like criar.
140. Verbs ending in -iar conserve the i
even when tonical: copiar : copio [Tcu'piuJ.
Yet there is a small group of verbs which follow
the rule of those in -ear: negociar to negotiate : nego-
\ceio; diligenciar to endeavour, to effect, bring about:
diligenceio ; odiar to hate : odeio ; premiar to distinguish,
to reward ipremeio; remediar to remedy, repair : remedeia.
141. An atonic o [u], not followed by m, n
or nh, changes in accented syllables into open o [oj:
tocar to touch, to play (an instrument) : 'toco [tokuj ;
cortar to cut : corto ['fortuj.
If, however, followed by m, n, nln or a vowel (verbs
in -oar), the atonic o changes into close o [o] : assomar
\[vsu'mar] to climb up, to peep out, to appear : assomo
fv'somuj; abonar to bail : abdno [v'bonu] '; sonhar to
dream : sonho [' sojiu] iperdoar to pardon \perdoo [par'-
douj.
Exceptions to this rule are the verbs tomar to
take and domar to tame, which change close o into
open o [o] : t6mo ['tomu], donio ['tomu]. (N.B. Tomo
jis volume; domo dome).
142. The unaccented close o, which is found
before , is modified into open o [o] : soltar [sot 'tar] to
release, loosen, free : solto ['sottuj.
N.B. The nasal o [o] is and remains always
:lose: contar [kon'tar] to count : conto ['kontu].
143. The verbs in -gar intercalate u between
/ and a following e: pagar to pay : pagues, pague } pa-
'liiemos, pagueis, paguem; paguei.
The verbs in -car change before e the c into qu:
ocar : toques, toque, etc.
10*
148 Lesson 22.
The verbs in -car lose the cedilla before e: come-
car : comeces, etc.
Those in -jar may change the j into g before an
c or conserve it: viagei or viajei, viagemos or viajemos.
IS. In the Second Conjugation.
144. Unaccented close a [%] of the radical
syllable changes, when accented, into open a [*]:
abater [ubv 'terj to abate : abato [v 'fiattij.
145. Atonic e [d] of the radical changes:
1. Into accented close e [e] in the first person
sing. pres. ind. and the accented forms derived from
it (i.e.: the singular and the 3 rd pers. plur. of the sub-
junctive): gemer to groan : gemo ['gemuj, gema, gemas
['zemu(f)], gemam (N.B. a or o in the ending!);
2. Into open e [e] in the 2 nd and 3 rd pers. sing.
and in the 3 rd pers. plur. pres. ind. and the derived forms
(2 nd pers. imperative): gemes ['^intf], geme ['jenn],
gemem f'gtmvi] (N.B. e in the ending!).
146. Atonic o [u] becomes in the same cases:
1. close o [o]: comer to eat : como fkomuj, coma(s)
['Jcomv(f)J.
2. open o [o]: comes ['~kdmlf], come ['~kmw], etc.
147. Unaccented close o [o] becomes open o
[o] in all those forms where 9 becomes e (cf. 145,2):
volver to turn : volves, volve, volvem.
148. Verbs ending in -cer take a cedilla before
a and o: conhecer to know : conheco, conheca, etc.
149. Verbs ending in -ger change g into j be-
fore a and o: proteger to protect : protejo, proteja.
150. Verbs ending in -guer drop the u before
a and o : crguer to raise : ergo, erga, ergas, etc.
C. In the Third Conjugation.
151. Unaccented close a [vj of the radical syl-
lable changes, if not followed by m, n or rih, into open
a [a,] when accented: obrir [v'firir] to open : obro
f'abruj.
Phon. ar
and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 149
If, however, it is followed by m, n or nk, it remains
close: ganir to howl, yelp : gane ['gvny] ; bramir to roar:
bramo f'brvmuj.
152. The atonic e [9] of the radical syllable
changes :
1. Into i in the first person sing. pres. ind. and
the derived forms (pres. subj. N.B. before a and o):
despir to undress : dispo, dispa, etc. (cf. 156).
2. Into open e [e] in the 2 nd and 3 rd pers. sing, and
3 rd pers. plur. pres. ind. and sing, of the imperative
(N.B. before e): despes, despe, despem.
Remark. The verbs aggredir to assault, denegrir to
blacken, to slander, prevenir to anticipate, to prevent, pro-
gredir to proceed, to thrive, remir to redeem, transgredir to
transgress, change the e of the penultimate into i when ac-
cented: aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggridem, aggrida(s), etc.
153. Close e [e], whether oral or nasal, be-
comes i in the same forms where 9 becomes i (s. 152,1),
remaining e [e] in all others: sentir to feel, smell : sinto,
sinta(s), sintam (s. 156); sente(s), etc.
154. Atonic o [u] becomes:
1. U in the same forms where atonic e [9] be-
1 comes i (s. 152,1): dormir to sleep : durmo, durma,
durmas, durmam (s. 156).
2. Open o [o] in those persons where atonic e be-
comes // (s. 152, 2) : dormes, dorme, dormem.
Remark. In the verbs sortir to supply, cortir to tan,
ortftr to warp, to plot, o changes into u wherever accented:
curto, curies, curte, curtem, curta(s), curtam, surte, urdo, etc.
The same change occurs in cortir even in unaccented forms,
which might be confounded with those of cortar: curtdmos,
curtaes, etc. N.B. Instead of ordir you may write urdir,
i which is more modern.
155. Atonic u (and o) of the infinitive becomes
.open o [o] in the 2 nd and 3 rd pers. sing, and the 3 rd pers.
plur. pres. ind. and in the following verbs:
\Acudir to succour descobrir to discover
'bulir to stir cuspir to spit
consumir to consume destruir to destroy
cubrir (better: cobrir) to cover engulir to swallow
150 Lesson 22.
fugir to flee, fly, escape subir to mount, ascend
refugir to retrocede sumir to sink; se to vanish
sacudir to shake (off), to toss tussir (or tossir) to cough.
Thus: acodes, acode, acodem.
Pres. ind. of consumir: consume, consomes, consome, consumi-
mos, consumis, consomem.
> destruir: destruo, destroes, destroe, destruimos }
destruis, destroem.
Remark. In construir and reconstruir the u is generally
conserved : construo, construes (or constroes), construe (or con-
stroe), construimos, construis, construem (constroem).
156. The vowel of the radical syllable beiug
close e [e] or atonic e [9] or o [u] (see 152 154),
it undergoes the same modification in the 1 st and 2 nd
pers. plur. pres. subj. as in the sing, and in the 3 rd pers.
plur. of this form : ferir to wound : firamos, firaes.
Pres. conj. of vestir to dress : vista(s), vistdmos, vistaes, vistam.
mentir to lie: minta(s), mintdmos, mintaes,
mintam.
dormir to sleep: durma(s), durmdmos, durmaes,
durmam.
157. Those verbs, where the infinitive-ending
-ir is preceded by g, gu (or qu), are subject to the
rules of" 149 and 150. Ex.: corrigir : corrijo, corrija;
seguir to follow : siao, siaa, franquir (antiquated) to
cultivate : franco, franca.
Remark. In. arguir, to argue, the u is audible:
arguo, argues, argue, arguimos, arguis, arguem.
The same in delinqu'ir, to offend against a law:
delinquo, deUnqiies, delinque, delinquimos, etc.
158. In the verbs ending in -ahir, the h is not
a part of the radical, but serves merely to separate a
and i. So as not to leave any doubt, for instance, in the
1 st and 2 nd pers. plur. pres. ind, the i has the tonical accent,
and not the a: saMmos, sahis. Modern orthography
drops the h, putting an accent instead, thus : sdio, saes,
sae, saimos, sais, sdem; saia(s), saiamos, etc.; sdia(s),
saidmos, etc.
159. Verbs in -usir drop the e of the 3 rd pers.
sing, pres, ind., thus conduz instead of conduce. (N.B.
The imperative is: conduce.)
. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 151
Palavras.
nlgodao
the cotton alinhavar
to baste, to
[algu'&mi]
[Tslir)^ 'VH r]
stitch
o algodoeiro
the cotton-tree a costura
the sewing
[alguffu 'vim] [kuf'turv]
o ourii'O
the prickly o alfaiate
the tailor
[o'risu]
shell, hedge- [a^fui' ate]
hog o vestudrio
the clothing
a felpa \
[viftu'a,r}u]
f'ffJpv]
o fio, o liriho
the thread
a pennugem 1
[pj 'nugvij 1
the down
a agidha
the needle
o cot (to
o traje ['tragij
1 the costume
[tot'tsu]
curioso
curious
macio /me 'siuj
smooth
[kun'ozu]
a roda [rro&u] de round
padecer
o casulo
the capsule
[puffd 'sdr]
to suffer
[kv'zuluj
softrer
cardar
to card
[su'frer]
[kvr'&ar]
exercer
to practise
apropriar
to appropriate,
[izdr'ser]
[vprupri'ar]
make fit to
a raiz [rm'if]
the radical
o tecido
the tissue
abranger
to embrace
{fa 'sifru]
[vbrv'ger]
a pelle [pclz]
the skin
infelizmente
unhappily
o calcado
shoes and boots
[tfdlig 'mentdj
[kal 'saffuj
o mirihoto
the inhabitant
raspar
to scrape
[mi 'yotuj
of the Minho
[rrvfpar]
o ribatejdno
the inhabitant
o tanque [t&kd]
the tank
[rrifivt'i'gv'iiuj of the Riba-
a camada
the layer
tejo
[kv 'nia&ej
o alemtejdno
the inhabitant
o tanino
the tan
[vlvW 'z'enul
of the Alem-
[tv 'ninuj
tejo
repassar
o mirandes
the inhabitant
[fT9pv 'sarj
to soak [mirvn'def]
of Miranda
amottecer
\ 2)assar para
to pass to
[emuh'serj
abster [vof'ter]
to abstain
a cosiureira
the seamstress aftexao
the inflexion
1 kuftu'rvirv] fflsk'svuj
o restido
the dress, cloth acertar [usdrtar] to hit
[xij'iid'u]
i oral [o'rall
oral
a roupa branca the linen \ dtono [' atunuj
[ 'rropu 'bruke] surdo ['sur&u]
atonic
o fato f'fatu] the clothes a tr ans forma-
cortar [kur'tar] to cut gao [trvf-
the transforma-
a tesoura
ftd 'zoru]
the scissors furma'svu]
a modificacao
tiion
the modifica-
j. __
a fiia metrica the metric [moffyfica-
[' fits' metrikvj measure 'svu]
lion
the change
o molde
the pattern no entanto
meanwhile, yet
[ 'milfoj
[nmn'tuntu]
152 Lesson 22.
phonetico phonetical basear [buzi 'ar] to rest upon
[fu'netiku] a pronuncia the pronuncia-
patentear manifest fpru'nustv] tion.
54. Leitura.
(a) algodao.
algodao e produzido por uma arvore chamada algodoeiro.
algodoeiro produz uma especie de oui^os. Estes ouri^os
abrem quando estao maduros e mostram no meio uinas se-
mentes escuras. A. roda d'essas sementes escuras v6-se uma
felpe on pennugem macia, como cotao. Essa felpa e o algodao.
Depois de tirada do ouri90 ou casulo, a felpa e cardada e em
seguida reduzida a fio em machinas apropriadas; e com esse
fio fazem-se os tecidos ou pannos de algodao.
(b) As pelles.
As pelles servem principalmente para fazer caleado. Os
bois, as vaccas e as vitellas sao os animaes que nos fornecem
mais pelles para ca^ado. A pelle depois de tirada do animal
e mettida em agua para que amolleQa e em seguida e raspada
para que Ihe saia todo o pello e restos de carne. Depois de
bem raspadas, as pelles se curtem, sendo mergulhadas em tan-
ques e separadas umas das outras por camadas de casca de
carvalho pulverisada. A casca de carvalho contain muito tanino,
e este repassa as pelles e faz com que nao apodre^am. azedo
ou acre da casca de carvalho provem do tanino.
(Trindade Coelho: primeiro Livro de Leitura.)
55. Exercise.
Transpose No. 52 into the corresponding forms of in-
direct language, wherein it must be remembered to employ the
indicative.
Ex.: Affirmaram-me que o algodao era produzido . . .,
que o algodoeiro produzia . . .
56. Theina.
(a) The Seamstress.
The seamstress makes clothes and linen for women. She
makes also children's clothes and men's linen. The seamstress
first cuts what she intends to sew, making use of the chalk,
the scissors, the metric measure, and the ruler, and she might,
if she wanted to, employ also patterns. Thereupon she bastes
and then she sews, making use of a needle and thread. With
a hot iron she opens and irons (tr.: correr) the seams.
and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 153
(b) The Tailor.
The tailor occupies himself in making clothing for men.
The costumes of the Portuguese people are very curious
and in various regions of Portugal even very fine (sup. abs.).
People should always wear these clothes, which do not resemble
those of other nations. Unhappily, fashion allows (fas) national
clothing to fall into oblivion (calr em esquecimento). But
the inhabitants of the Minho, the Ribatejo, the Alemtejo and
of Miranda still dress after (d) their own fashion.
Conversaqao.
Previno os senhores que ainda
devemos exercitar os verbos
que apprenderam na ultima
li^ao. Qual a mudanQa que
soffreni os verbos da terceira
conjuga9ao, cuja raiz temum
e surdo?
Dizendo a flexao do presente,
abrangeu outra mudanQa dos
mesmos verbos. Qual e?
senhor nao conhece verbos
da mesma categoria que nao
transformem o e surdo em
e aberto?
Como e que se distinguem dos
outros verbos?
Ja nao duvido que os senhores
conhee.am tambem os verbos
que, parecendo-se com os ja
tratados,teem no entanto um
e fechado na penultima syl-
laba do infinite.
Bemjabasta! Naomintamais!
Exige a justiea que, pedindo
desculpa, se rectifique o que
eu dizia: nao mentiu, dizendo
e surdo passa para i na pri-
meira pessoa do singular do
presente indicativo e nas tres
do singular e terceira do plu-
ral do presente conjunctivo;
por exemplo: visto, vestes,
veste, vestimos, vestis,vestem.
e surdo passa para e aberto
n a segunda pessoa do singular
e nas terceiras pessoas do
singular e plural do presente
indicativo, assim como no
singular do imperativo.
Conhec,o, sim, senhor. Sao entre
outros os verbos aggredir,
denegrir, prevenir,progredir,
remir, transgredir.
Elles mudam o e surdo da penul-
tirna syllaba do presente do
infinitive para i todas as vezes
que e accentuada, p. ex. pre-
vino,prevines,previne,preve-
nimos, prevenis, previnem.
Nesses verbos, o e fechado, seja
elle oral ou nasal, passa para i
nas mesmas pessoas em que e
surdo passa para i, conservan-
do-se nas outras pessoas : min-
to,mentes, m en te,ment linos ,
mentis, mentem; minta,
mintas etc.
verbo fugir, pertencendo
aquelles que no infinitive
teem u oral, muda essa vogal
em o aberto na 2 a pessoa e
154
Lesson 23.
a flexao de mentir. Ate que
acertou; muito bem! Agora
desejo que conjugue fugir.
A l a pessoa sing, do pr. ind.
d'este verbo, sendo phonetica-
mente regular, patenteia to-
daviauma modincaeaoortho-
grapbica. Indique o senhor
em que consiste e a regra
em que se baseia.
na 3 a do singular e na 3 a
do plural do presente indi-
cative e no singular do
imperative : fujo, f6ges, foge,
fugimos, fugis, fogem; foge.
Na pessoa rnencionada, assim
como em todo o presente do
con j uncti vo (fuja, fujas, fuja,
fujdmos, fujaes, fujam), o g
passa para ,;', porque precisa
conservar a mesma proniincia
antes de a.
Twenty-third Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
terceira.
Exercises on the Full Verbs, especially of
the Preceding Lesson.
N.B. Here Lessons 37, especially the subjunc-
tive moods and their employment, are to be repeated.
The verbs printed in italics are to be conjugated
by word of mouth in those tenses which have some
peculiarity.
57.
As batatas.*
As batatas nascem de uma planta chamada batateira. 1
A rama 2 da batateira e verde. A batateira da flores cor de
violeta, ou brancas. Estas flores trans formam-se em fructo
com a forma de pequeninas bolas 3 cor de violeta. Estas pe-
queninas bolas sao venenosas. Arrancada* uma batateira, o
pe traz agarradas 5 [a elle] varias batatas, umas grandes, ou-
tras mais pequenas. Cada batata apresenta por fora varies
botoes 6 , gomos 6 ou borbulhas 6 , os quaes teem o nome de
olhos. Enterrando uma batata, nasce com o tempo uma
batateira. Partindo uma batata de modo a 7 separar inteiros
os varios olhos que ella apresenta, e enterrando em separado 8
cada um d'esses olhos, de cada um nasce uma batateira, que
com o tempo dard batatas.
* These excerpts 55 60 are taken from Primeiro Livro
de Leitura by Trindade Coelho. The student is advised to care-
fully read and translate these excerpts, as well as No. 61, and
to retranslate them into Portuguese.
Exercises on the Full Verbs. 155
As batatas sao um magnifico alimento nao so para as
pessoas mas para os animaes. Depois de apanhadas 9 , as
batatas devem ser conservadas em sitios seccos e frescos. A
humidade 10 faz apodrecer as batatas. calor faz com que
germinem. 11 A batata, depois de germinar 11 , adquire um gosto
pessimo, e nao se pode comer.
1 Potato-plant. 2 foliage. 3 ball. 4 arrancar = to pull
out, to root up. 5 aqarrar = to cling (cf. 54). 6 bud. 7 so
as to. 8 separately. 9 apanhar = to pick up, to gather. 10 damp-
ness, moisture. ll to germinate.
58.
As frutas.
As fructas nascem das arvores fructiferas, ou arvores de
fructo. Todas as arvores produzem fructo ; mas as chamadas
arvores fructiferas sao propriamente as que produzem fructos
que podemos comer. As arvores de fructo cobrem-se de flores
na primavera. Das flores nascem os fructos, e estes sao co-
Ihidos depois de maduros. 1
pecegueiro 2 dd pScegos 3 , a pereira 4 da peras, a ma-
cieira 5 da macas, a larangeira 6 da laranjas, a ameixoeira 7 da
ameixas, a amendoeira 8 da amfindoas, a cerejeira 9 ou cerdeira 9
da cerejas, a gingeira 10 da ginjas 11 , o castanheiro da castan-
has, o marmeleiro 12 da marmelos, o limoeira da limoes, o
damasqueiro 13 da damascos, a nogueira da nozes, a roman-
zeira 14 da romas, a figueira da figos, a tangerineira da tange-
rinas 15 , etc.
As arvores de fructo sao podadas 16 no inverno. po-
dador 17 serve-se principalmente da navalha 18 , do podao 19 e
da tesoura 20 , com os quaes corta os ramos iniiteis. As fru-
1 etas comem-se mais por goso 21 do que para sustento; mas
todas as fructas conteem elementos preciosos para a saude.
As fractas comem-se geralmente emquanto frescas, e so devem
comer-se bem maduras. As fructas tambem se podem con-
^servar, quer 22 seccando-as, como se faz por exemplo a ameixa,
ao figo e a pera; quer fazendo com ellas os chamados doces
de calda 23 , ou de compdta Z4: ; e ainda outros variedades de
doces. Com as fructas frescas, fasem-se tambem as chamadas
fructas de conserva.
1 Ripe. 2 peach-tree. 3 peaches. 4 pear-tree. 5 apple-
tree. 6 orange-tree. 7 peach-tree. 8 almond-tree. 9 cherrytree.
10 mahaleb. n mahaleb-cherries. 12 quince-tree. 13 apricottree.
14 pomegranate-tree. 15 oranges of Tanger. 1G podar = to prune,
lop, clip. 17 clipper. 18 knife. 19 pruning-saw. 20 pruning-shears.
1 pleasure. - 2 quer . . . quer either ... or. 23 juice, jam.
* 4 stewed fruit. 25 preserved.
156
Lesson 23.
Conversa^ao.
Porque plantamos um grao
de maca (um car69o de
p6cego, de ameixa) etc.?
Que esperamos (desejamos),
plantando uma arvore fru-
ctifera?
Que e precise para uma ar-
vore fructifera dar fructa no
verao ou outono?
Como e que se consomem as
fructas?
Porque sao podadas as ar-
vores ?
Quaes os instruments de que
o podador se deve servir?
Para que fim cultivamos a ba-
tata?
Como e precise conserval-a?
Que seria se as batatas esti-
vessem num sitio quente?
Porque se deve evitar que
germinem ?
Para que nasa uma macieira
(um pecegueiro, uma ameixo-
eira) etc.
Esperamos (desejamos) que
cres^a e que produza fru-
ctas.
E precise que na primavera se
cubra de flores.
Consomem-se (or: sao conso-
midas) frescas, seccas, co-
zidas, feitas em doces de
calda, de compota etc.
Podam-se as arvores para as
livrar dos ramos iniiteis.
E precise que se sirva (e pre-
cise servir-se) da navalha,
do podao e da tesoura.
Para que nos forneca alimento,
a nos e aos nesses animaes
domesticos.
E preciso que seja conservada
em sitio secco e fresco para
que a humidade nao a apo-
drec,a.
calor as faria germinar (or:
faria com que germinassem).
Para que com a germinacao
nao adquiram (ou ganhem)
um gosto pessimo que nao se
Ihes deixe comer.
59.
A lavra. 1
A lavra faz-se com o arado 2 ou com a charrua. 2
arado e a charrua sao puxados 8 por bois, e tambem o podem
ser por cavallos ou muares. 4 arado e a charrue rasgam*
a terra com a rfilha 6 , abrindo no chao sulcos 7 ou r6gos. 7 A
terra antes de lavrada 8 esta mais ou menos dura; depois de
lavrada fica fofa. 9 So depois de fofa r a terra esta propria
para receber a semente. 10 lavrador 11 que deitasse a se-
mente na terra antes de a lavrar, perdia o tempo e a semente,
May be extended and varied by the teacher.
Exercises on the Full Verbs.
157
4 mule. 5 tear.
n husbandman.
pois esta comiam-na os passaros, e a que nao comessem os
passaros nao nascia. A semente precisa de terra humida e
fofa para nascer e de se esconder 1 * debaixo da terra.
1 Tillage. 2 plough. 3 to pull, to draw.
6 coulter. 7 furrow. 8 till. 9 loose. 10 seed.
12 to hide.
60.
A sementeira. 1
Depois de lavrada a terra, o lavrador deita-lhe a se-
mente. A semente vae 2 n'um sacco, e este debaixo do braco
i esquerdo do lavrador, e dependurado 3 do hombro. lavra-
dor espalha* a semente, jogando 5 -a, com a mao direita, para
| a frente e para os lados, Ao mesmo tempo que semeia 6 , o
! lavrador vae andando. A sementeira faz-se tambem com in-
strumentos apropriados, chamados semeadores mechanicos. 7
1 Sowing. 2 present of ir (s. 214). 3 hanging. 4 to spread. 5 to
throw. 6 to sow. 7 sowing-machine.
Conversa^ao.
(See note p. 156.)
Porque se poem os bois a Para que a puxem (or: para
charrua? que seja puxada por elles).
Para que se emprega a char- Para que rasgue a terra com
rua ou o arado? a relha e abra sulcos ou
rgos.
Porque e precise rasgar-se a Para que fique fofa.
terra?
Que havia-de dizer V. se dese- Pegue com o sacco da semente
jasse ensinar a alguem a debaixo do bra0 esquerdo,
semear? de maneira que fique de-
pendurado do hombro e jo-
gue a semente, espalhando
-a com a direita para a
frente e para os lados.
61.
A grade. 1
Semeada a terra, o lavrador passa a grade por cima
d'ella. A grade alisa a terra; e alisando-a, faz com que de-
ibaixo d'ella se esconda a semente. Encontrando-se coberta 3 ,
a semente nao tarda a germinar. Pouco tempo depois, toda
a terra comeca a verdejar*, cdbrindo-se de uma especie de
relva. 5 E a seara 6 que come^a a nascer. Cada grao que
,germinou produziu uma pequenina haste; as hastes vao 7 cres-
158 Lesson 23.
cendo pouco a pouco; vao com o tempo creando espiga 8 ; e
na espiga vao medrando 9 os graos.
1 Harrow. 2 to smooth. 3 P. part, of cobrir. 4 to become
green. 5 turf, "(standing) corn. 7 Pres. of ir (s. 214); vao crescendo
periphrastically for crescent. 8 ear (of corn). 9 to grow, to thrive.
02.
A monda. 1
Na primavera, a seara esta ja muito desenvolvida, e ate
ondula 2 em dias de vento, produzindo a vista um agradavel
aspecto. 3 Mas misturados com as hastes da seara, apparecem
entao, frequentemente, hervas damninhas. 4 Essas herves e
precise arrancal-as, pois roubam 6 a terra o sustento que 6 so
para a seara, e portanto 6 nao deixam medrar esta. tra-
balho ou opera9ao de arrancar essas hervas damninhas chama-
se monda.
1 Weeding. 2 undulate. 3 sight. 4 weeds. 5 to rob. 6 therefore.
68.
Conselhos d'uma mae (A) e d'um amigo idoso (B) para
um mogo (C) em vesper as 2 de ir para fdra. 2
A. Meu filho, quando te fores embora (see 34 foot-note
and p. 37), nao te esqnegas de te 3 despedir dos tens
professores, para que te nao tenham em conta 4 de
malcriado! 5 Seria uma desapprobacao que me to-
casse a mim, porque fui eu quern te criei.
C. Nao receie minha Mae, que eu nao me comporte bem.
Diligenceio ( 139) sempre fazer honra a educa^ao
recebida.
B. E um cuidado que sempre se premeia, pois a um
joven bem comportado acolhe*-se com prazer em
toda a parte.
A. E faze para nao chegares tarde a estacao! Sabes a
que horas abre a bilheteira? 7
C. Acho que abre as tres menos dez, e consta-me 8 que
fecha cinco minutos antes da partida do comboio.
B. Se assim o deseja (or: desejar), tomo-lhe (or: tomar-
Ihe-ei) o bilhete e chamo tambem um portador 9 que
Ihe leve a bagagem. 10
C. Muito obrigado a V a -Ex a -, mas nao sera melhor que
tome um trem de prasa? 11
A. Ainda que tomes trem, nao escusas d'um portador
que te acompanhe ao caes (or: a plata -forma), e ate
a portinhola 13 do comportamento. 14 E escuta 15 : nao
te assomes muito a janella, para nao te constipares 16
Exercises on the Full Verbs.
159
(para que te nao constipes). E nao consintas 11 que
se abra a janella do lado do vento!
>. meu joven amigo pode dormir em caminho de
ferro?
C. Eu raras vezes durmo; receio que algnma paysagem
passe, sem que eu a perceba.
B. Tern razao. Seria pena que Ihe escapasse coisa al-
guma. Mas entao sera precise que se erga de vez em
quando, para nao ficar (or: para que nao fique) com
somno.
A. Sim, e nao comas muito, porque isso faz adormecer.
C. Tambem sinto pouca vontade de comer emquanto
viajo.
A. Tu ainda tens (por ahi) algumas pequenas dividas
que pagar?
C. Nao tenho, minha Mae. Paguei tudo quanto devi.
A. Melhor. Prefiro que nao haja nada que te pese
( 138 c) na alma. Lamental-o-ia, se nao me dissesses
a verdade.
C Perdoe-me, minha Mae! Nunca Ihe menti, nem Ihe
minto agora. Nao Ihe pese ( 138c) isso!
B. Como veste em viagem?
C. Visto fato 18 de flanella e levo casacao. 19
A. E olha, airtda que parega superfine lembrdl-o: nao
cuspas no chao, nem tussas quando puderes 20 evital-o,
para nao incommodares 21 os outros viajantes.
B. Agradeco todos os seus conselhos, minha Mae, ate
os superfluos.
1 On the point (= at the eve) of. 2 to go abroad. 3 to
take leave. 4 to take for. 5 ill-bred. 6 to receive. 7 book-
ing-office. 8 I am told. 9 porter. 10 luggage. ll cab, hansom.
12 platform. 13 door. 14 compartment. 15 to hark, listen atten-
tively. 16 to catch cold. 17 to consent. 18 clothes. 19 great-
coat. 20 fut. subj. of poder (s. 198). 21 to molest.
Palayras.
vaqueiro the cowherd
[ve 'kviruj
apascentar to pasture
[vpufsen 'tar]
a vacca ['vakv] the cow
contiguo contiguous
[kon 'tigwuj
'ctttrahir to attract
[vtrv 'irj
10 desejo the desire
trepar [trs'par] to climb
pisar [pi'zar]
enxotar
[if u' tar]
corar [Tto'rar]
irrational
[irrvsiu 'nal]
o appetite
a vergonha
[wrgoye]
indifferente
to tread
to drive away
to blush
irrational
the appetite,
covetousness
the shame
indifferent
160 Lesson 23.
soprar to blow
[su 'prarj
aspero f'afpdruj rough; harsh,
a constipagao the cold
[k8f tips' sew]
o corrente d'ar the draught
sharp : estorvar to disturb.
64. Leitura.
vaqueiro.
Um rapaz anda apascentando uma vacca n'um prado con-
tiguo a um jardim. N'essa occasiao ve" n'uma arvore uinas
cerejas maduras, que o attraem, e o movem a desejos de as
apanhar. Abandona no mesmo instante o animal, e trepa a
arvore. A vacca porem, quando nao ve o pastor, entra no
jardim, come a melhor herva, e pisa nmita outra com os pes.
rapaz desce furioso da arvore, enxota o animal, e bate-lhe
barbaramente. Aproxima-se logo o pae e diz-lhe: Quem
merece um tal castigo, tu ou o animal irracional? Obedeces
ao appetite menos do que elle? E o rapaz cora de vergonha
diante do pae.
65. Thema.
I am glad tbat you are determined to accompany us.
If to-morrow the weather be good, we shall ascend the
mountain which offers so beautiful a view. The weather
does not appear to become good, the wind blowing from east.
1 am afraid that we shall have rough weather for some days
more. If it was not for our journey, it would be indifferent
(not matter), but as it is, it disturbs rather (it is rather
annoying). Are you not afraid of catching a cold? I gave
you this great- coat that it might protect you from the
draught. Now it is time for us to go home (= it is time
that we go home), that we may sleep a couple of hours
before departing (infinitive).
Conversacjao.
Transforrne o exercicio n. 62 :
1. empregando o preterite;
2. sendo o prdprio rapaz que conta este caso;
3. sendo o pae que conta o caso ao rapaz ;
4. sendo dois rapazes em vez de um, e muitas vaccas
em vez de uma;
5. sendo os dois rapazes que contain o caso:
6. sendo o pae que conta o caso aos filhos.
On the Pronouns. 161
Twenty-fourth Lesson. Licjao vigesima
quarta.
On the Pronouns. Pronomes.
160. There are six kinds of pronouns viz.:
1. the Personal; 2. the Demonstrative; 3. the Possessive;
4. the Interrogative; 5. the Relative; 6. the Indefinite
Pronoun.
I. The Personal Pronouns. Pronomes pessoaes.
161. The personal pronouns are the only words
of Portuguese language which, like the Latin and Ger-
man, modify their original form (subject or nominative),
to express the different complements (genitive, dative or
accusative), as here represented:
Singular. Plural.
Norn.
Gen.
Eu
de mim de nos
Dat. I me; a mim nos; a nos
Ace.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
* Ace.
Nom.
f Gen.
,Dat.
'Aco.
nos
Tu vos
de ti de vds
te; a ti vos; a vos
te vos
Elle, ella elles, ellas
d'elle, d'ella; de si d'elles, d 1 ellas; de si
Ihe ; a elle } a ella ; a si Ikes ; a dies, a ellas ; a si
o, a; se os ; as; se.
162. (a) The forms nos, vos, elle(s), ella(s) are sub-
ject only when employed without a preposition, and may,
as well as the atonic forms of the complements, be
called conjunctive (conjunctos), as they are always joined
to the verb; while the others (mim, ti, si), being sepa-
rated from their verbs by a preposition, may be considered
absolute (absolutes).
(b) The absolute pronoun is often employed with
the conjunctive when a stress is laid on it e.g.: dd-
[llio a elle, give it to him, instead of dd-llio, give it
him. Yet the conjunctive forms of the subject may be
also employed quite alone, in which case they are also
absolute. Ex.: Eu? Tu nao, elle ou ella.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 11
162 Lesson 24.
163. (a) Eu and tu are alivays subject; nos, vos,
elle(s), ella(s) are, as already said, subject when em-
ployed without a preposition.
When governed by a preposition, they are com-
plements of the genitive, dative, or accusative e.g.:
lembra-se de nos; del a elles; recebemos para ella.
(b) Mim, ti, si are always complements and go-
verned by a preposition ; elle(s), ella(s), nos, vos are also
complements as soon as they are joined to a prepo-
sition (see a). Deu-me (a mim), he gave me; viu-me (a
mim), he saw me. Tenho-o d'elle, I have it from him.
(c) The first and second persons (sing, and plur.),
as well as the pronoun se of the third person, joined
to the preposition com, are assimilated with it and take
a new form viz. : com(m)igo, comtigo, comsigo, comnosco,
comvosco, with me (myself), thee (thyself), him(self), her-
(self), them(selves), us (ourselves) you(rself), yourselves.
Elle foi com(m)igo, he went with ine.
Venha comnosco, come with us.
Levou-o comsigo, he took it with him.
Isso ndo e comsigo, that is no concern of yours.
(d) Me, te, nos, vos, se do not admit of any preposi-
tion. They are forms of the accusative or dative and
correspond to the Portuguese: a mim, a ti, a nos, a vos,
a si to me, to you, to us.
Elle levou-me he took me.
Eu mostrei-te ... I showed you . . .
Nos persuadimo-vos we persuaded you . . .
Yds devolveste-nos . . . you gave us ... back.
Eu dei-vos o conselho I gave you the counsel.
(e) Lhe, Ihes are forms of the 3 rd person, without
distinction of the gender. They express the dative-
complement and are employed without a preposition:
mostrei-lhe(s), I showed it (to) him, her, them, you.
N.B. As Ihe, Ihes are also employed in addressing
somebody, you may avoid a misunderstanding by em-
ploying a double form:
Mostrei-lhe(s) a elle (a elles) I showed him (them)
T> a ella (a ellas) her
a voce (a voces) you.
On the Pronouns. 163
The prepositional form may also precede the other
e.g.: *Nesse meu artigo sobre o Coragao Doente, que
a voce Ihe agradou tanto . . . (Tr. Coelho : Cartas).
In that article of mine on the "Sick Heart," which
pleased you so well . . .
Or it may even substitute the simple form e.g.:
Homenagens que de todo a banda me vem chegando . . .
a elle as endosso* (ibid.).
Homages which from all sides come to me ... I endorse
them to him.
(f) 0, a, os, as, him, her, it, them, are complements
of the accusative of the 3 rd person of the transitive verb
with distinction of gender) and are employed without
i preposition.
Vejo-o (-a, -os, -as) I see him (her, it, them).
(g) The reflective pronoun se has the forms se, si,
sigo, and is employed without distinction of the number
md gender: se without a preposition; si with the pre-
oositions a, de, em, por (per), para, sobre; sigo with com
comsigo). Ex. :
Lava-se, he (she) washes himself (herself). (You) wash
yourself (see Remark II.).
homem nao vive sd para si.
Man does not live for himself alone.
Pensou comsigo he (she) thought by him-(or her-)self.
Remark L The absolute pronouns may still be streng-
,'aened by mesmo or proprio : N6s mesmos we ... ourselves,
u proprio I ... myself, para si mesmo, comigo mesmo, etc.
Remark //.As se is the reflective pronoun of the
rd person, and the person spoken to is always in the 3 rd person,
2 may be also "you" e.g.:
Lembrou-se, he or she or you remembered.
Remark ///.Also the forms si and sigo are employed,
hen addressing a person, but only in familiar style e.g.,
embrei-me de si I thought of you; irei comsigo I shall go
dth you.
164. (a) The forms me, te, se, nos, vos, Ihe, Ihes,
a, os, as, are joined by a hyphen (-) to their preced-
ig verb:
Offendeu-me (but: elle nao meoffendeu): desculpo-te;
c firmou-lhe(s) ; affirmei-o; perdoai-nos; feriu-se.
11*
164 Lesson 24.
(b) The pronouns o, a, os, as are changed into lo,
la, los, las:
1. when preceded by a verbal form ending in r,
s, or z, which ending is dropped. The vowel (a or e)
preceding these final letters may take an accent (a, e):
chamd-lo, chamdmo-las, trase-la, trasemo-los ; poe-lo tu? do
you put it? trd-lo! bring it or him I
Remark. This modification may also be expressed thus:
A verbal form ending in r, s or e changes into I when
followed by o(s), a(s) : chamdl-o, chamdmol-os, etc. This form
is even more modern.
2. When following the pronouns nos and vos or
the adverb eis, which then also lose their final s: es-
creve-no-lo he writes it to us; ei-lo here it is.
(c) These same pronouns o, a, os, as, take the forms
no, na, nos, nas, when preceded by a nasal sound:
deixam-no, deixavam-na, deixaram-nos, ddo-no; estdo-no
fazendo, they are doing it, pde-no he puts it or "put
it!" Ex.:
Jehovah disse a Moyses: Faze-te uma serpente ardente
e pde-na sdbre uma haste.
Jehovah said unto Moses: Make thee a fiery serpent
and set it upon a pole.
(d) The dative-complements me, te, the, being fol-
lowed by the accusative-complements o, a, os, as, drop
their e, substituting it by an apostrophe: disse-m'o;
mostrei-fas, affirmava-lh'o.
(e) Lhes joined to these accusative pronouns forms
Ih'os, Was, which may be "them to him," "them to her,"
or u them to them." Dou-ltios, I give them to her, to him,
or to them.
165. The position of the conjunctive pronoun-
complement is:
(a) In positive and simple sentences generally behind
the verb ; in negative sentences and those beginning with
an adverb, a preposition, conjunction, etc., before the
verb.
Elle disse-me; eu explico-te or eu te explico; elle we
nao disse or (elle) ndo me disse; se me ndo dissesse.
Eu dou-lhe; eu ndo Ihe dou; para que Ihe ndo de.
Nos temol-o; nos ndo o temos; hontem ndo o tinhamos.
On the Pronouns. 165
Remark I. In negative clauses, the adverb nao may
precede or follow the pronoun -complement; it always precedes,
when the subject is not expressed : die me nao disse; nao me disse.
(b) The conjunctive pronoun-complement must be
put after the verb of a positive sentence whenever the
pronoun subject is omitted, as the former cannot begin
a sentence 1 : tenho-o t conhego-os, and not: o tenho, as co-
nhego. Yet you may say: die honrou-me or elle me
lionrou.
(c) In the future and conditional tenses it is put
between verb and ending: responder-te~(h)ei, dar-lti o-(h)ia
I shall answer you, I should give it him.
(d) With the infinitive, the pronoun complement
may precede or follow it:
rei ha-de te chamar e dizer-te se me nao queres
vender, mas tu nao me vendas. (Anna de C. Osorio.)
e) It is the same with the compound tenses:
Nos temos-lhe dito ; eu o tenho sabido ha muito; but
only: tenho-o sabido, etc.
166. IiP there are several complements of different
cases, accusative and dative, in the same sentence, the
dative precedes the accusative : dei-lh'o. If the comple-
jOients are only of the accusative, that of the person
ur personified thing is put in the dative: Essa sonata
\mvi-lh'a tocar (a ella), I heard her playing this sonata.
167. In order to be emphasised, the conjunctive
pronoun-complement may be repeated by an absolute
cf. 162 [b]): Elle disse m'o a mim he said it to me. This
ibsolute pronoun may also precede: a mim me disse or
it mim disse-me; a elle eu ndo (Hie) disse nada. (N.B.
in this latter sentence the conj. pronoun-complement
,nay be omitted, but not the subject eu.)
Remark. This construction is also employed where in
iJnglish a possessive pronoun or a preposition is used e.g.,
^onhecia-lTie a wz I knew his voice, or I knew him by his
oice. Tomei-lhe a mao I took her (by her) hand.
168. When a personal pronoun is followed by
( n appositive noun or number, in Portuguese the ar-
icle is generally put between:
1 In Brazil the construction o tenho, as conhefo, Ihe diyo,
;tc., is also employed.
166 Lesson 24.
Nos, os inglezes gostamas viajar. But also: Nos re-
publicanos somos assim.
Vamos os dois or even: vamos ambos os dois, ambas
as duas; vamos os tres or todos (os) tres, let us go
both (or all three).
Palavras.
carvdo
the coal
voltar
to turn round,
[kvr 'vuuj
to return
o mineiro
the miner
tirar
to draw out,
[mi 'weiru]
to take from
advertir
to advertise
a pancada
the blow
pouco a pouco
by degrees
o mendigo
the beggar
a fenda [feud's]
the crack
[m&n digu]
reparar
to repair
arrastar
to drag
[rdpvrar]
[urrief'tar]
o espinheiro
the thornbush,
o pantano
the pool
[ifpi'yeiru]
brier
f'pvntvnuj
maldoso
wicked
voltar a si
\
[mat'dozu]
recobrar os
} to recover
o vime [vinw]
the osier
sentidos
1
cubifar
to covet
o gemido
the groan
[kubi 'sarj
famiffu]
por p6 de
near to
afflictivo
afflicting
dormir a sesta
to take a nap
[vfli 'tivuj
['**&]
approximar-se
to approach
o molho [mofiu]
the bottle
[vprosi-
o feno [fenu]
the hay
'marsd]
atar
to tie
o ladrao
the robber
esfomeado
famished
[ITS 'tfruu]
[iffomi'adu]
enxotar
to drive away
Hermano
Hermano
[if u' tar]
fir' menu]
bastante
rather
o cortador
the butcher
[bvf'tvntd]
[kurtu '&or]
maltratar
to treat ill
pedir esmola
to beg, ask
por nome
named
[ig'molv]
alms
comportar-se
to behave
novamente
anew.
66. Exercicio.
Se a luz do sol nao nos impedisse, veriamos as estrellas
durante o dia; mas assim esta luz impede que nos as per-
cebamos. carvao se encontra na terra; elle 6 extraido pelos
mineiros; sao elles (or: estes) que o extraem. amigo que
te adverte para que [tu] nao commettas uma falta, aquelle
que mais te estima. Estas paredes caem pouco a pouco, por
isso que as fendas n'ellas nao se reparam; e"ra preciso repara-
las. Nao quer vir comigo? Hoje nao r mas amanha vou ter
comsigo para Ihe falar numa coisa que muito nos interessa a
On the Pronouns. 167
ibos. Entao nao me pode dize-lo ja agora? Nao posso; so
amanha poderei dizer-lh'o.
67. Leitura.
P(a) espinheiro maldoso.
vime disse urn dia ao espinheiro : Dize-me ca! Porque
e que cubi9as tu tanto o fato das pessoas que passam por p<
de ti? que queres tu com isso? espinheiro respondeu:
Nao quero nada. Nao Ihes quero tirar o fato, mas apenas
i rasga-lo.
(b) cao e a vacca.
Um cao dormia a sesta sobre um molho de feno que
estava rnal atado. Aproximou-se uma vacca esfomeada.
cao, mal a viu, comeQOU a ladrar, e impediu que ella comesse
i do feno. A vacca, cheia de fome e de tristeza, disse: Se tu
nao podes comer o feno, porque nao queres que eu o c6ma?
68. Thema.
The Faithful Dogs.
A butcher, named Herman, went one day into the
country (ao campo) to buy some cattle. On the way a man
begged an alms from him. Herman turned round, that the
beggar should not perceive the money he had with him,
opened his purse, and took a silver coin from it. In the same
moment the man assaulted him by giving him so heavy a
blow on his head that he fell down (no chao). The two
dogs of the butcher threw themselves immediately on the
beggar, flung him to the ground (a terra), and dragged him to
the near pool. Then they returned to their master, licking his
face until he recovered. Hereupon Herman heard a distressing
groan. He approached and found the robber whom the dogs
were about to assault anew. But the butcher drove them away
and drew that man, who found himself rather ill-treated, on
to dry ground.
Conversacjao.
' Onde dormia o cao? (The answers to be formed
' Quern se aproximou? after No. 63 b).
Oomo se conduziu entao o
cao?
Que disse a vacca?
i Aonde foi o cortador? Foi um dia ao campo (para)
comprar algumas rezes.
'Que Ihe succedeu no caminho? No caminho pediu-lhe esmola
um homem.
168
Lesson 25.
Hermano como
porton?
se com-
E depois?
Que 6 que aconteceu entao?
Que fazem entao os caes do
cortador ?
E em seguida?
Elle voltou-se para que o
mendigo nao percebesse o
dinheiro que trazia comsigo.
Abriu a bolsa e tirou(-lhe)
urna moeda de prata.
No mesmo instante o homem
aggrediu-lhe, dando-lheuma
pancada tao forte na cab&ja
que elle caiu no chao.
Os dois caes saltam logo sobre
o mendigo, deitam-no a terra
e arrastam-no para um pan-
tano proximo.
E seguida voltam para o seu
dono e lambem-lhe a cara
tantas vezes que elle recobra
os sentidos.
Twenty-fifth Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
quinta.
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
A. The Demonstrative Pronouns.
169. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
demonstrative pronouns, indicating the former, which
accompany a noun, as adjectives (pronomes adjectives)
and the latter, used instead of a noun, as substantives
(pronomes substantives).
N.B. The noun indicated by a demonstrative ad-
jective may not be expressed, but only understood,
which does not influence its form.
Pronomes adjectivos :
Pronomes substantivos :
Masculino
este,
esse,
aquelle,
outro,
o mesmo,
tanto,
tal,
Feminino
esta this
., ,
aquella f t
outra the other
a mesma the same
tanta so much
tal such a
isto this
isso \
that
aquillo \
outrem somebody else
o mesmo the same
tanto so much
o, a, 05, as that or those
(which) ; he, she or they
(who).
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns. 169
170. The pronomes adjectives form their plural
alike the nouns; este, estes; tal, taes.
The pronomes substantives have only a masculine
and singular form, except o, which has a feminine
and a plural form.
171. (a) Este, esta, isto indicates an object near
to the person speaking or one mentioned in the last
place (= latter).
(b) Esse, essa, isso indicates an object near to the
person spoken to, or one mentioned in the first place
(== former); it may also be employed independently,
without any reference to another.
(c) Aquelle, aquetta, aquillo indicates an object equally
distant from both persons, the speaker and the one ad-
dressed. Ex.:
Estes (meus) olhos; esses (seus) ollios ; aquelle ceu:
aquella igreja. Que e isso?
N.B. Instead of aquelle, etc., you may also some-
times employ este, etc. e.g.: este ceu, esta igreja.
Remark. Esta, essa in commercial style and employed
absolutely, means: esta praca (or cidade), essa praga.
172. By an alliance of outro with este, esse or
aquelle the compound pronouns est'oiitro, ess'outro,
aguelVoutro, pi.: est'outros, etc., are formed.
173. These pronouns, being preceded by the
prepositions em, de, a, form a crasis with them (Port.:
erase) i.e., they melt together:
(a) With em: n'este (or neste), n'esta, n'isto, ri aquil-
lo, etc.
(b) With de: a" este (or deste), a" esse, d'isso, d'aqttel-
le, etc.
(c) With a: dquelle(s), dquella(s), aquillo. (Only
those demonstratives beginning with a.)
Remark. The Englishes, that, employed absolutely, is not
always rendered by isso, aquillo, but only when no substan-
tive is to be substituted e.g.:
What is that? Que e isso? Aquillo que e?
That is a book, isso e um livro.
But: Who is that? Quern e esse homem, aquella senhora?
That is my father, esse (homem) e meu pae.
170 Lesson 25.
Is this your book (= is this book yours) ?
E este o sen livro?
No, that is not iny book, that is my brother's.
Nao, esse nao e o men (livro), e o de meu irmdo.
174. Este, esta, esse, essa, aquette, aquella are
frequently employed for a noun or personal pronoun
strongly emphasised. Ex.:
Carlos, esse e que tern forgets.
It is Charles who has strength!
A natureza, essa e sempre victoriosa.
It is Nature that is always victorious.
A indulgencia cTelle? Com essa nao contes! Olha o
cavalleiro, aquelle e que sdbe montar!
Essa is frequently employed without any substan-
tive in the idioms: Or a essa! (Why!) Essa e boa! Mais
essa! etc., where graca or tasneira,* etc., is to be
supplied.
175. The English "he who," "she who," "they
who" are given in Portuguese by o (a, 0s, as) que or
agueUe(s), aquella(s) que.
B. The Possessive Pronouns.
176. It is a peculiarity of these pronouns that
they are preceded by the definite article:
Are excepted: 1. Those expressing parentage;
2. Those you address a person with (meu Amigo,
minha Senhora);
3. Those which constitute an essential part of a
title: Vossa Majestade, Sua Alteza, Vossa Excellencia,
Sua Reverendissima, etc.;
4. Those predicatively employed (see 178).
Note. The general rule and that under 1. are not I
always observed.
177. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
possessive pronouns (adjectivos e pronomes possessivos),
yet there is no other difference between them but that
the adjectivos are and the pronomes are not accompanied
by a noun.
Este e o meu chapeu; este chapeu e o meu.
This is my hat; this hat is mine.
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
171
men, fern, a minha Plur. os meus, fern, as minhas my ;
mine
ten, a tua os teus, as tuas (thy),
your; (thine), yours
sen, a sua os seus, fern, as suas his,
her, your; his, hers, yours
o nosso, a nossa os nossos, fern, as nossas our;
ours
o vosso, a vossa os vossos, as vossasyowr-
yours.
Declension.
N. & A. o men vestido my dress. G. do men vestido.
D. ao men vestido.
> a tua penna your pen. G. da tua penna.
D. d tua penna.
178. If predicative^ employed (with ser) or,
when governed by ser or a preposition, it expresses
rather origin than possession, the possessive pronoun is
also not preceded by the article. So employed, it may
precede or follow the noun. Ex.:
E men it is mine.
(Elle) e meu amigo, e amigo meu.
He is my friend or a friend of mine.
(j o meu amigo would mean: it is my friend.)
Onge rios sao seus tributdrios (do Tejo).
Eleven rivers are its tributaries (= are tributary to it).
A culpa e minha the fault is mine, it is my fault.
Foi culpa minha, por culpa minha.
It was rny fault, for my fault.
jfi ideia tua that is your idea.
tua esta ideia this idea is yours.
Por tua causa for your sake.
Com sua licenga with his (her, your) permission.
Para maior conveniencia nossa for our greater con-
venience.
Remarks.
1.' Your, yours is rendered by seu, sua, etc., when no
misunderstanding can result e.g. :
Have you got your paper? Becebeu V*- o seu jornal?
Where do you buy your pens?
Onde compra as suas pennas?
172
Lesson 25.
If, however, an ambiguity might take place, sen, sua is
supplied by o (a, os, as) de V a - Ex a -, etc.; or on the other
side by o (a, os, as) d'elle(s) or d'ella(s) e.g. :
Have you lost your glove or his?
Perdeu V a - Ex a - a sua luva ou a ffelle?
His money is safe, but yours is not.
dinheiro d'elle estd seguro, mas nao o estd o de V<-
2. The possessive pronouns are also sometimes employed
with the indefinite article or pronoun e.g.:
Urn amigo meu or um meu amigo.
A friend of mine, one of my friends.
Uma carta minha a letter of mine, one of my letters.
Alguns sens amigos some of his friends.
3. Also they are met together with the demonstratives:
Este meu piano this plan of mine.
Essa sua quinta that country-house of yours.
Aquettes seus parentes those parents of his.
These associations are more frequent in Portuguese than
in English.
Palayras.
A vibora
the viper
roir [rro'er]
to gnaw
['vibure]
velar [vd'lar]
to watch, to
a cobra [kobrvj
the snake,
wake
serpent
o naturalista
the natural
o reptil
the reptile [nvturv'liftv]
philosopher
[rrsp 'til]
o besoiro
the beetle,
corpolento
corpulent,
[bd 'zo}ru]
chafer
[kurpu 'lentuj
thick
o gafanhoto
the locust,
inoffensive
inoffensive
[gufu'yotu]
grasshopper
[mufen 'sivuj
damninho
pernicious
ao passo que
while
[d'e 'niyu]
msididso
insidious
parado
motionless
[isifft'ozu]
[pis 'rsi&u]
o dente canino
the eye-tooth
meditar
to meditate
[kv 'ninuj
[md&itar]
6co [oJcu/
hollow
o segredo
the secret
a mordedura
the sting
[sd 'gre&u]
[murffe' dwe]
nada ['na,d~u]
nothing
o orificio
the orifice,
primeiro
first
ford'fisj'Uj
opening
justo
just
o rato [rratu]
the rat, mouse
t'suftu]
o ratinho
the mouse
cctprichoso
capricious
[rrv 'tiyuj
a ra [rr'e]
the frog
[Jcvpri'fosu]
encobrir
to cover, hide
o mocho f'mofuj
the horned-owl,
fiku'brir]
wood-owl
descobrir
to discover
o roedor
the gnawer,
excellente
excellent
frrui'dorj
rodent
[vifsd 'lentej
o chape
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns. 173
chapeu de \
chura } the umbrella
averiguar to inquire, to
fgV9riffu'rJ determine
veneer to overcome
ora . . . ora now . . . now
'orv either ... or.
C/fw*tM* / I
o guarda-chuva }
a galocha india-rubber-
[gv'lofe] shoe
69. Leitura.
A vibora e a cobra.
Deante de uma vibora e de uma cobra, qualquer pessoa
que nao conhecesse a differen^a entre estes dois reptis, talvez
temesse mais a cobra do que a vibora. Pois esta raro (instead
of raramente) tern de comprimento mais de dois pes, e aquella
6 muito maior e em geral muito mais corpolenta. A cobra
inoffensiva, ao passo que a vibora, essa, com a sua apparencia
fraca, e um dos mais perigosos animaes. veneno d'este in-
sidioso reptil 6 muitas vezes mortal. Elle segue por um canal
finissimo at a raiz dos dentes caninos; e penetrando n'estes
por serem ocos, sae, na occasiao da mordedura, por um pe-
quenino orificio. A vibora alimenta-se de ratos, ras etc.
mocho.
Tambem o mocho se alimenta de ratos e outros roedores.
Calculou um naturalista que uma so d'estas aves destroe por
anno quasi 1500 roSdores, afora insectos, como besoiros, ga-
fanhotos e aves damninhas. Como os sabios e os que estudam,
o mocho vela tambem emquanto os outros dormem. Parado,
a posi^ao do mocho nao e outra, senao a (mesma) dos que
leem: parece dobrado sobre si mesmo, como a meditar.
(Trindade Coelho: Segundo Livro de Leitura.)
70. Thema.
My secret cannot be of any use to you, if I have not
first yours. Your wish is just, and so is mine also. I have
lost my handkerchief, please to lend me yours. Does this
lesson deal with the demonstrative or the possessive pronouns ?
It deals with one and the others. These are more easily to
be learned than those. But there is no great difficulty, neither
in the one kind nor in the other (tr. : in both). At any rate,
the difficulties are such and so many that we need all our atten-
tion to overcome them. Capricious children want now this,
now that; if you offer them a pear or an apple, they take
this and ask (pedir) for that. One lie covers the other, but
one truth discovers the other. The same causes do not always
produce the same effects. Health and wealth are two magni-
ficent things: but what is the use of the latter without the
former ?
174
Lesson 26.
ConyersaQao.
No guarda-roupa.
De quern e este chapeu de
chuva?
E est'outro guarda-chuva, 6 o
teu?
De quern sera? A quern per-
tence?
Este chapeu 4 o de V* Ex a ?
Um amigo meu usa chapeus
taes, deixe ver, se e d'elle.
E meu. Tambem essas galo-
chas sao minhas.
Nao e. E um guarda-chuva
de senhora.
A Lucinda procura o d'ella.
Sera esse?
Nao, deve ser de outrem. Eu
nao uso tal chapeu (or: eu
nao uso chapeus d'esses or
d'esses chapeus).
Isso e" muito difficil averiguar,
pois todos parecem os mes-
mos.
Twenty-sixth Lesson. Ligao vigesima
sexta.
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.
C. The Interrogative Pronouns.
quanto(s) ? how
much? how many?
de quanto(s) of how
much or many?
a quanto(s) to how
much or many?
quanto(s) how much
or many?
179. Use of the interrogative pronouns :
1. Quern is always employed absolutely as a sub-
stantive; it asks only for persons and may be employed
with the verb in the sing, or in the plur., in direct or
indirect speech e.g. :
Quern estd aM? Who is there?
Quern serdo os paes d'estes meninos?
Who may be the parents of these children?
Norn, quern?
who?
que (o que)
what?
which ?
qual, quaes?
which (of)?
Gen. de quern?
of whom?
whose?
de que of
what or
which?
de qual, de
quaes of
which?
Dat. a quern?
to whom?
a que to what
or which?
a qual, a
quaes? to
which?
Ace. quern?
whom?
que what?
which?
qual, quaes
which ?
..<
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 175
Ndo sei a quern eu disse . . .
I don't know to whom I said . . .
De quern e esta casa? Whose house is this?
Nao sei dizer de quern e.
I cannot tell to whom it belongs.
A quern falou nisso ? To whom did you speak of this ?
2. Que (que) is used interrogatively:
a) employed substantively and generally, for things
Que diz ? What do you say ?
De que precede isso? What does this come from?
Para que fez isso? What did you do that for?
(b) adjectively and generally employed, for per-
sons and things:
Que tempo estd? What sort of weather is it to-day?
De que autor e este livro ? By which author is this book ?
A que fim? To what purpose?
3. que (que) is used as an exclamation, yet also
a real interrogation:
que?! What?!
que sdo as descripgoes dos maiores poetas em com-
paragdo da linguagem viva da naturesa?! que e
a liberdade do homem mais livre? Fazer o seu
dever.
4. Qual, employed as a substantive and as an adjec-
ive, asks for persons as well as for things, but out of
* selection. It is either followed by a genitive in the
lural or this case is to be supplied:
Qual dos dois, das duas ? A qual d'estes senhores per-
tence o cavallo ? Quaes d } 'esses homens o aggrediram ?
De qual provincia e natural?
N.B. Here you may say: de que provincia . . .,
hich has a more general meaning, while de qual pro-
. . is employed with reference to a small num-
of provinces.
Remark I. Qual may be preceded by tal; in this case
as not an interrogative, but a comparative meaning: such
the same as e.g.:
Elle voltou tal qual foi, he came back the same as he
went.
176 Lesson 26.
Both pronouns may accompany a noun and be separated
from another:
Qual pae, tal filho like father like son.
Tal mulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu Hie sou.*
Would that she were such a wife to me as I am a
husband to her!
Remark II. Tal may be only supposed as accompaning
qual :
caracter deste sujeito e qual eu desejo. Quaes para
a cova as providas formigas levam as provisoes.
Qual . . . qual means the one ... the other: qual mais,
qual menos.
5. Quanta is used interrogatively:
(a) Employed without a noun and in a general
meaning, for things:
Quanta gastou? How much did you spend?
Quanta vae do Natal d Pdschoa?
How much (time) is it between Christmas and Easter?
Here quanta remains unaltered.
(b) Employed with a noun, after persons and
things, being subject to the rules of the adjective
(feminine and plural): Quanta espaga? -- quanta genie?
quantos dias? -- quantas noites?
Remark III.- Quanta is often employed instead oftudo
o que, meaning then "all that" or "whatever" e.g. :
Fiz quanta pude I did all (whatever) I could (cf. the
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.
Remark IV. ~ The interrogative quanta is not to be con-
founded with the adverbial quanta, which signifies "how,
how much," being employed exclamatorily and taking the
form qudo before adjectives e.g. :
Quanta e bonita esta vista! Qudo (or que) bonita e!
Not to be confounded neither with the exclamatory que
which may stand instead of qudo or quanta, nor this with
the adverbial que : Que de genie ! How many people ! (What
a crowd !) Que bonita vista ! Que vista tao bonita ! What a
nice view!
D. The Relative Pronouns.
180. These pronouns are in part the same as
the interrogative, from which, however, they are easily
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 177
e distinguished, as they refer only to an antecedent,
while the interrogative pronouns (and adjective) only
refer to something following:
1. Que who, which, that, is equally employed for
persons and things without distinction of gender and
number, as in English e.g.:
homem (a mulher, aquelle, aquella) que commetteu o
furto.
The man (woman) that (he, she who) committed the theft.
Os ratos (as ras) que escaparam.
The rats (the frogs) which escaped.
mais bello que ha the most beautiful existing.
2. Quern is synonymous with aquellefs), aquella(s) que
he, she, they who. It refers only to persons and is
invariable:
Quem tern telhado de vidro, nao atire pedras ao do
vizirilio.
Those who live in glass-houses should not throw stones
(lit. : He who has a glass roof must not throw stones
to that of the neighbour).
Thus employed, quern has the value of a relative
pronoun joined to a personal one; it is considered to
oe of masculine gender and singular number.
Quern has generally the verb in the singular, but
nay have it also in the plural e.g.:
Nao for am elles s6s quern vos mataram.*
As a merely relative pronoun, quern is employed
>nly joined to a preposition:
0(s) poeta(s) por quern tenho mais admiragao . . .
Preceded by the prepositions de or a, quern corre-
ponds to the genitive and dative (or accusative) of
who" or "he who."
De quern eu me queixo . . . He whom I complain of ...
A quern eu disse isso ... He to whom I said that . . .
A quern eu quero mais . . . He whom I like best . . .
3. Qual "which," has only one form for the two
exes, but it forms the plural quaes. It is mostly pre-
eded by the definite article, which is dropped, however,
/hen qual is preceded by tal (see 179, Remark I and II).
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 12
178 Lesson 26.
Encontrei um homem o qual me reconheceu.
Um povo ndo tern ideias, para as quaes ndo tenha pa-
lavras.
Declaro que desejo occupar-me immediatamente da
questdo Hinton, para resolver a qual deve mar car -se
successivamente sessdo todos os dias uteis (Affonso
da Costa).
Generally the pronoun que is preferred to qual Yet
you must employ qual and not que:
(a) Whenever the relative depends on certain pre-
positions (durante, para, sdbre, sob, em cima de, etc.):
inverno durante o qual estive em Lisboa . . .
(b) When by que a misunderstanding might be
caused. For instance, in the clause: A mde do pequeno
que encontrei, it is not clearly understood whom I met
with. So I must say: A mde do pequeno a qual en-
contrei, if I met the mother, and A mde do pequeno o
qual encontrei, if I met the boy.
(c) Whenever the relative clause is not a necessary
or ornamental complement of the antecedent, but con-
tains a new idea, a motive, etc.:
sapo devora as lesmas, as quaes fasem muitos estragos
nas hortas.*
The toad devours the slugs which cause a good deal of
damage in the kitchen-gardens.
4. Cujo "whose, of which" has different forms for
genders and numbers, in which it agrees with the
following noun.
aborrecimento e uma doenga cujo remedio e o trabalho.
Tediousness is an illness the remedy of which is labour.
A parede, cujas fendas ndo se reparam, cae pouco a
pouco.
The wall, whose clefts are not repaired, is falling to
ruin by degrees.
5. Quanto has the meaning of tudo o que "all or
everything that, whatever," having also different forms
for gender and number.
Fiz quanta pude.
1 did everything (all, whatever) I could.
Soffreu quantos males ha no mundo.
He suffered all the misfortunes in the world.
..
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.
179
6. que is "(that) which," "what," if not inter-
rogative or exclamatory.
que ndo tern remedio, remedlado estd.
What can't be cured must be endured.
Elle tinha sahido o que eu ndo sdbia.
He had gone away, which I did not know.
7. In English you may separate the preposition
from the relative pronoun, putting it at the end of the
clause; also the relative pronoun may be omitted. In
Portuguese the preposition always precedes the pronoun,
which cannot be omitted.
Tudo em que faldmos all (that) we spoke of.
A carta com que V a - Ex a - me konrou.
The letter (that) you honoured me with.
Remark. Relative clauses must not be confounded with
indirect interrogations. For instance:
Chegaram emfim das colonias os generos os quaes pedira
ha wuito.
There arrived at last from the colonies the goods I had
long since asked for. (Relative clause.)
Ndo sei dizer quaes (sdo) os generos que chegaram.
1 can't say which goods arrived. (Indirect interro-
gation. The direct interrogation would be: Quaes
sdo os generos que ... or elliptically: quaes os generos
que ... or quaes (or que) generos chegaram?
Palavras.
mundo the world
a regua nume- the measure,
['munduj
rada rule
a pmga ['pragvj the plague
ser de to belong to
tragar to draw
pretender to pretend
sandeu fool, foolish
[pryten'derj
[sun'deu],
o oleado the oilcloth
fern, sandia
[ol}'a&u]
[svn'div]
epico [' epiku] epic
a pasta [' paftvj the portfolio
sei /sej/ I know
porfiar to persist, per-
vi I saw or have
[purfi'ar] severe
seen
o feito f'fvrtu] the heroic
o modo ['mo&u] the manner,
deed, exploit
mode
a por$ao the portion
terno ['tsrnu] tender, affectio-
[pur'svuj
nate
de ordindrio ordinarily
tenro ['term] tender
os Lusiadas the Lusiad
ser capaz to be able
numerar to mark with
appreliender to apprehend,
cyphers
[vprien 'derj seize
12*
180
Lesson 26.
pezar [pd'zar]
posso fposuj
sorrow
I can
quotidiano
[~k(w)oti&i-
daily
fito, part. perf.
to fix, to stare
'vnu]
of fitar
at
requintado
refined
o ai [atf
the sish
[rrdJcin'taffu]
ofluidof'fluid'u] the fluid
a biissola
the compass
o esplendor
the splendour
f'busulv]
[ifplen'dor]
o norte [nortd]
the line, rule,
a ingratidao
the ingratitude
guide
[igruti' duu]
accusar
to accuse
a estrelta fixa
the fixed star
a procedencia
the origin
fcf'trelv'jiksu
/
[prust-
miserdvel
'ffensivj
fmizd'ravtl]
miserable
a petata
the petal
misero
['petvlis]
['mizdruj
verificar
to verify, to
elle qwr
he is willing to
[verdfikar],
prove
a vitrina
show-window
justificar
to justify
[w' trims]
fouftdfi'kar]
misturado(s)
confusedly,
desembocar
to discharge
[miftu-
pell-mell
[dezimbu'kar]
itself.
'ra&u(s)]
71. Exercicio.
Quern criou o mundo? Foi Deus quern o criou. Quaes
foram as dez pragas do Egypto? Nao me sabe dizer, quaes
ellas sejam ? Em que logar da terra ha perfeita felicidade? Nao
conhe^o logar algum em que a haja. Quern pode ser todo seu,
em ser d'outrem 6 sandeu (prov.). Mais faz quern quer do que
quern pode (prov.). Quern porfia mat a ca<?a (prov.). Camoes,
cujo poe'ma 6pico 0s Lusiadas* e um dos maiores monu-
mentos literarios de todos os tempos, cantou n'elle os feitos
dos Portugueses no oriente. Uma bahia 6 uma por^ao de mar
que entra pela terra e cuja entrada e de ordinario estreita.
As rdguas numeradas de que nos servimos, permittem dar as
linhas que se tra^am com ellas, o tamanho exacto que se
pretende dar-lhes. A pasta sobre a qual escrevemos e onde
mettemos papeis, 4 geralmente feita de papelao, coberto de
oleado. Quanto custou a tua? Nao me lembra (or: nao me
lembro) ja quanto paguei, nem a quern (or: de quern) a com-
prei; ainda esta tal qual a recebi.
Eu,olhos, sei d'uns
Que, desdequeosvi,
Nao vi mais ne-
nhuns .
72. Leitura.
N'um album.
V tu por ahi
Se os achas ; senao,
Descubro-os em ti.
Que lindosquesao!
Que modo de olhar!
Que terna expres-
sao!
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 181
Ja tenho pezar Suspires e ais Que doce esplendor !
De os vr, porque Foi o que tirei Tao d6ce, que eu
emfim ... De ver olhos taes. Nao posso suppor
Que posso esperar? Q6 vendo . os se Cr6
Vte fitos em mim Na graca, na cor
Taes olhos, jamais ; Nofluido, ounao sei
Decerto, e assim,
E esta vida um mar; e n'este mar
Qual e o astro que nos alumia?
Que norte, estrella ou biissola nos guia?
Um olhar de mulher! urn terno olhar (idem).
73. Thetna.
Which of the boys is the one whom you like best?
What black ingratitude! What sort of wine grows in the
region of the Douro? Stars which have their own light are
called fixed stars. There is nothing so miserable as a man
who is willing to do everything and not able to anything (nada
vode). That is indeed (bem) the most beautiful existing.
Sometimes there are goods behind the show-windows of the
shops which show the most refined taste, pell-mell with that
jyhich we need for our daily life. What did you think of
vhen doing this task? What were you occupied with and
i>vhat did you speak of? Look at those flowers, how beautiful
hey are! What perfume and what tender petals! What is
ic accused of? The crime he is accused of is a theft. The
.hings whose origin he was not able to prove were apprehended
,or seized), which is quite (muito) justified.
Conyersa^ao.
Quern e Camoes e qual (e") o poe'ma que escreveu?
Que e essa poe'ma? or: Que sao os Lusiadas?
De quern cantou elle os feitos?
Que (6 que) se entende por uma bahia?
Quaes sao os principaes rios de Portugal?
Em qual dos oceanos desembocam?
A quantos estamos do mez or que dia do mez temos?
(Or: Em que dia do mez ou da semana estamos?)
Corno se chama aquelle rapaz cuja mae esta doente?
Nao tern essa senhora quatro filhos, dos quaes o amigo
de V a Ex a - e o mais novo?
Que e que tornou tao triste aquella rapariga que de
ordinario esta tao alegre?
182 Lesson 27.
Twenty-seventh Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
setima.
Indefinite Pronouns. Pronomes indefinidos.
181. The indefinite pronouns are either joined
to a noun (pronomes adjectives), or they are of substantive
nature, being employed absolutely and only in the
singular number (pronomes substantives). N.B. The
noun may be not expressed.
I. Adjective Pronouns.
urn, uma; uns, umas a(n), one; some
algum, alguma; alguns, algumas some, any; such
nenhum, nenhuma; nenhuns, nenhumas no, none
outro, -a, -os, -as another, some more
tal, taes such a (one), such
certOj -a, -os, -as (a) certain
cada (m. and f.) each
todo, -a, -os, -as (followed by the definite article) the
whole; all
qualquer, pi.: quaesquer any, whosoever, whatsoever
urn e outro the one and the other, either
ambos, ambas both
um ou outro one or the other
nem um, nem outro neither one nor the other, neither
muito, -a many a; pi. muitos, muitas many
dwersos \ different various>
varios }
II. Substantive Pronouns.
Alguem somebody, anybody algo something
ninguem nobody, none alguma coisa something
oiitrem somebody else tudo everything, all
nada nothing cada um, cada uma, cada qud
quemquer whosoever everybody, anybody, each.
Note. The boundary-line between the indefinite and the
demonstrative pronouns is sometimes quite vague, so that the
grammarians count some of them now to the former, now
the latter. We also have already classed some (as outro, tal)
among the demonstrative, giving here a repetition of them.
Some, as muito, tanto, are often classed among the indefinite
numbers.
182. Explanatory Rules.
1. Nenlmm, ninguem and nada, pronouns which
include a negation, are employed, as in English,
Indefinite Pronouns. 183
without the negative adverb "not," when preceding the
verb: nenhum d'ettes veio none of them has come; nhi-
guem a viu nobody has seen her; ningiiem foi visto
nobody was seen; nada aconteceu nothing has happened.
Nada as an exclamation is "Not at all!" "God
forbid!"
If however these pronouns follow the verb, this is
preceded by *n&o* : nao veio nenhum d'elles; nao a viu
ninguem; nao aconteceu nada.
Nenhum may precede the noun or follow it: ne-
nhuma regra ... or regra nenhuma . . .
2. Algum is also employed in a negative sense and
then follows the noun: em tempo algum at no time(s).
3. Cada is never employed absolutely: when an ad-
jective, it precedes the noun; when a substantive, it is
followed by the indefinite article or by qual. A hydra
repuUicana tern cada uma das suas sete cabecas assente
em cada uma das sete collinas da cidade de Lisboa.
4. Ambos is always followed by the definite article
or a pronoun in the plural: ambos os (or estes, aquelles,
-.seus) rapazes; ambos elles.
5. Outro in the meaning of "another" is employed
without an article:
Este copo nao estd limpo, de-me outro.
6. Qualquer may precede or follow the noun. In
the latter case the noun is employed with the indefinite
article e.g.:
Qualquer dia Id irei. Dei-lhe uma coisa qualquer.
7. Certo is generally employed without an article; it
may, however, also be accompanied by one: Faloti com
certa energm. Tern um certo modo de falar.
8. Muito in its meaning "many a" has no plural:
Ha muita hora que se perde na ociosidade.
There is many an hour lost in idleness.
9. Algo is taken from the Spanish. It is better
to employ alguma coisa instead. If followed by some
complement, this is joined to either of them by de:
: alguma coisa or algo de bello.
184
Lesson 27.
N.B. Algo can be also an adverb, preceding thus
adjectives or adverbs:
Uma tarefa algo espinhosa a somewhat delicate task.
Trdbalhou algo difficultosamente.
He worked with some difficulty.
10. Quemquer and qualquer, if accompanied by que
and expressing an uncertainty, are followed by the verb
in the conjunctive inood:
Quemquer que seja; quaesquer perigos que possa haver.
Otherwise they are followed by the indicative:
Qualquer (pessoa) pode faze-lo. Quemquer se arremessava
d agua.
Palavras.
argueiro
the splint,
a comadre
the godmother
[vr'gvfru]
^straw
[Tcu'mcL&rd]
o ocio ['oMu]
o compadre
the godfather
a ociosidade
[o&uzi-
the idleness
[ko'padre]
mirar [mirar]
to look at
'ffafo]
o rasto [rraftu]
the track,
a communicagao the communi-
trace
[kumunikv-
cation
Ignaciofig 'nvgiu
/Ignace
'svuj
entender
to be of opinion
benevolo
benevolent
apanhar
to pick up
[bd'nevuluj
[upv 'yar]
recompensar
to recompense
travar-se
to come to
[rrdkdmpe-
[trv 'vars9]
blows
'sar]
a contenda
the quarrel
punir [pu'nirj
to punish
[Wntendie]
determinar
[fotermin&r]
to determine
a briga [brigv]
assanhado
the fight
hot
dispensar
to dispense
[usu'ya&u]
[difpesarj
collocar-se
to put oneself
bemfazejo-
beneficent
['kulu'karsd]
[bnfu' zu^u]
deste modo
thus, in the
o merito
the merit
following
['msritu]
manner
queixar
to complain
o miolo [mi'olu]
the kernel ; the
[to}' far]
brain
o entendimento
the intelligence
a casca
the shell
[entendi-
['kafkvj
'mentuj
guardar
to keep
fingir-se
to feign
[gwsr'dar]
[fi'girsd]
a sentenga
the sentence
o bicho [ubifu]
the animal,
[sen'tesis]
worm
o resultado
the result
a malicia
the malicious-
[rrdsul 'taffu]
[nvs 'lisiv]
ness
a demanda
the plea
a fera ['fsru]
the wild beast
[dd'imndv]
Indefinite Pronouns. 185
o paldcio do \ I o arrdbalde the suburb
muncpo > oll
a cdmara \ a uniftcagao the unification.
municipal | [unafikv 'svuj
74. Exercicio.
Ninguem ve" o argueiro no seu olho. Toda a energia se
perde na ociosidade. Alguns insectos vivem apenas urn dia.
Cada um deve fazer conhecer aos outros tudo o que (or tudo
quanto) julga util ; esta communicasao bene"vola produzira cedo
ou tarde aJgans fructos. Todo o homem sera recompensado
ou punido segundo os seus actos. Ningaem pode ser dispensado
de ser justo e bemfazejo. Certos ventos reinam em certos
mares em esta9oes deterrninadas. Todos os homens hao-de
morrer. Nenhuma criatura humana pode voar. Ninguem e
bom juiz em causa propria. A vontade de brilhar nao ajunta
realmente nada ao merito da pessoa. Cada nm queixa-se da
sua memoria, ninguem se queixa do seu entendimento. Mais
vale pouco que nada. Nada duvida quern nada sabe. Nin-
guem se metta onde o nao chamam. Cada qual com seu
egual.
75. Leitura.
lido e a raposa.
Era uma vez um liao muito velho, e que de velho que
era ja nao ia a caca. Lembrou-lhe entao fingir-se doente, e
'qualquer bicho que o ia visitar comia-o logo, e foi assim
comendo muito animal. Mas um dia urna raposa conheceu-lhe
a malicia, e em vez de entrar, disse-lhe da porta: 0' senhor
liao, esta melhorzinho?
- Nao, respondeu a fera. Cada vez peor! Entre e
descanse um bocadinho, 6 comadre . . . Mas diz-lhe a raposa
a mirar o chao:
- Nada, compadre! n'essa nao caio en. Aqui ha o rasto
le muitos que entraram, mas nao vejo o rasto dos que sairam
'or: de nenhuns que tenham saido)!
(Trindade Coelho: Segundo Livro de Leitura).
7G. Thema.
The Nut.
One day two boys found a nut. "This nut is mine,"
Called out Ignace, "for I was the first who saw it. "Not at
11!" replied Bernard, "I am of opinion that it is mine, be-
ause [it] was I who picked it up." And both came to blows
Q^a hot fight. "I shall (tr. : Eu vou) finish your quarrel,"
aid another and bigger boy who passed that way. He put
186 Lesson 28.
himself in the middle of the two boys, opened the nut, and
spoke thus : "One half of the shell belongs to him who first saw
the nut; the other to him who picked it up; and the kernel
I keep for myself for my sentence." "That," he added
laughingly (a rir), "is the ordinary result of most pleas."
Conyersa^ao.
Que cidade e esta em que estamos?
Onde e situada?
Qual (e") o niimero da sua popula9ao?
Quaes sao as ruas mais importantes?
Quaes sao os bairros mais bonitos?
Nomeiem alguns hoteis dos mais frequentados!
Quern sabe alguma coisa da histdria d'esta cidade?
Em que annos foi edificado o palacio do municipio?
Como se chamam os arrabaldes, as povoacoes visinhas
etc.?
A que Estado pertence esta cidade?
Quaes sao as provincias d'elle?
Quantos Estados pertencem ao Reino da Gran-Bretanha?
Quern e o Rei actual?
Em que anno subiu ao throno?
Nomeiem quaesquer outros monarchas ingleses!
Twenty-eighth Lesson. Licjao vigesima
oitava.
The Irregular Verbs.
Os verbos irregulares.
183. Note the following rules:
1. All compound and derived verbs follow the
original verb, if not indicated as an exception -e.g.:
demo(n)strar like mostrar; surprender like prender; re-
partir like partir, etc.
2. All tenses not indicated are regular. All irregu-
lar forms are given in italics.
The first conjugation (verbs in -ar) has only two
irregular verbs, of which one, estar, has alread}^ been
dealt with among the auxiliary verbs. The second is:
184. Dar to give.
Indicative.
Presents.
dou I give de that I give
elds
Conjunctive.
dd
damos
daes
dao.
des
de
demos
deis
deem.
Imperfeito.
dam I gave desse that I gave.
Preterito perfeito.
del I gave, I have given
deste
deu
demos
destes
der am.
Mais-que-perfeito simples.
dera I had given.
Futuro.
(se eu) der if I shall give, if
deres [I am to give
der
dermos
derdes
derem.
darei I shall give
dards
dard
daremos
dareis
darao.
All the rest is regular.
The irregular forms desse, dera, der are regularly
formed from deste (2 nd pers. sg. pret.) by changing the
ending -ste into -sse, -ra, -r.
185. Idioms with dar.
Dar um abrago a to embrace
dar entrada a to let in; to admit
dar fe a to believe or to have faith in
dar horas to strike (the clock)
dar occasiao to offer an opportunity
dd-se a occasiao de there is an opportunity for
dar parte to communicate; to impart
dar um passeio to go for a walk, to walk
dar um salto to jump
dar os bons dias to bid good day
188 Lesson 28.
dar as boas festas to send or express the compliments of
the season
dar os pesames to condole
dar os pardbens a to congratulate
dar a luz to publish (book); to bear, to bring forth
dar a to lead to, to end in
dar de esporas to spur
dar em alguem to strike one
dar em (doido) to become (mad)
dar no alvo to hit the mark
dar nos olhos or na vista to be evident or striking
dar pelo nome de to answer to the name of
esta janella dd para a rua, o jardim this window looks
or opens into the street, etc.
dar-se (a) to dedicate oneself; to thrive; to occur, to
happen
dar-se (bem) com to agree with
pouco se me dd I care but little
quern me dera (saber)! how fain would I (know)!
186. Concerning the verbs in -car, -car, -gar,
-jar see 143.
187. The verbs in -ear change e into ei in all those
forms where the radical is accentuated e.g. : nomear to
name, recear to fear, Usongear to flatter, gorgear to
chirp, warble:
nomeio, nomeias, nomeia, nomeamos, nomeaes, no-
meiam; nomeie, nomeies, nomeie, nomeemos, nomeeis, no-
meiem (cf. 139).
188. Or ear (or criar) to create, to bring up,
changes in the same forms the e in i : crio, crias, cria,
creamos, creaes, criam', eric, cries, crie, creemos, creeis,
criem (see 140).
N.B. The compound verbs of crear (with the ex-
ception of recrear (better recriar) to create once more,
to bring up again) change the e into ei:
procrear to procreate, to beget : procreio (yet also
procrio), procreia.
But: a natureza recria; and ella recreia she diverts,
delights.
189. The verbs in -iar keep their i, in the
pronunciation as well as in the orthography: copiar to
copy : copio.
The Irregular Verbs. 189
190. In some verbs in -iar the modification of
the i into el is admissible and usual. Such verbs are:
diligenciar, agenciar, remediar, negociar, odiar, premiar;
thus: diligenceio, agenceia, etc.
191. Not so in the verbs adiar, afiar, alumiar,
anmmciar, aviar, contrariar, confiar, copiar, fiar, miar,
piar, saciar, tosquiar, variar, which form: adio, alumia.
anmtnciam, etc.
Second Conjugation. Yerbs in -er.
192. Haver to have; to be, to exist (see L. 6).
Eehaver follows the same model, but is used only
in the forms that have -v-: rehavendo, rehavido, rehavia,
rehouve, rehaja, rehouvesse.
193. Fazer to do, to make, to cause, to let.
Pres. Indicat. Fago, fazes, faz, fazemos, fazeis, fazem.
Pres. Conjunct. Faga, fagas, faga, fagdmos, fagaes, facam.
Pret. imperf. ind. Fazio, , fazias, fazia, faziamos, fazieis, faziam.
Pret. perf. ind. Hz, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizestes, fizeram.
Imperfeito Conj. Fizesse, etc.
Mais-qiie-perf. Ind. Fizera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Farei, fards, ford, etc.
future Conj. Fizer, fizeres, fizer, etc.
Condicional. Faria.
Imperativo. Faze (tu),fazei (vos), f aga (V e -),f alamos (nos).
Participio. Feito.
Gerundio. Fazendo.
, 194. Compound verbs:
(a) contrafazer to counterfeit; to imitate; to disguise.
P. p. contrafeito, also adj., false, forced.
(b) desfazer to undo, to destroy, to abolish, to
annul;
(c) perfazer to complete, to perfect, to constitute;
(d) refazer to do or make again;
(e) satisfazer to satisfy, to pay.
Remark. To let is rendered by fazer whenever you wish
to express an active interference: fazer saber to let know, to
send word to, to acquaint with. Faca entrar ! Let him come
in. It is translated by deixar whenever you mean to express
admission: deixo-o falar I let him speak. (Fago-o falar would
be: I (shall) cause him to speak.)
190 Lesson 28.
195. Idioms with fazer.
Fazer caso de to esteem; to care for; to attend to
ndo fazer caso to despise
fazer annos to have one's birthday, to complete . . .
years of age (see 97, 8)
faz color, faz frio, fas vento, calma it is hot, cold,
windy, calm
faz bom (man) tempo it is fine (bad) weather
fa$a o favor de, faz favor de (if you) please to
fazer (com) que to cause, to oblige
Fiz (com) que elle fizesse isso I made him do that
ter (muito) que fazer to be (very) busy, to have
(much) to do
fazer em pedagos to break or cut to pieces
fazer (or mandar) fazer alg. c. to have something done
fazer construir (uma casa) to have (a house) built
fazer tengdo to intend
fazer a barba to shave, to get shaved
fazer as unhas to clean or cut one's nails
fazer leildo to hold an auction
fazer as contas to count, to calculate
fazer conta or de conta to suppose
fazer contas com alg. to make up (to settle) accounts
with a person; to argue it out
fazer justiga a alg. to do justice to a person
fazer gala de alg. c. to boast of something
fazer compras to purchase, to go shopping
fazer as pazes to reconcile (oneself)
fazer urn discurso to make (or deliver) a speech
fazer forga(s) to use violence
fazer falta to be absent, to miss, to die
faz-me muita falta I miss it very badly
fazer de bobo to make a fool of oneself
fazer de capitao to supply the captain
o navio faz dgua the ship is leaky
fazer cara a to defy, to face
fazer fogo to shoot, to fire
fazer nonra(s) to bestow honours, to do honour
fazer horas to wait for a certain hour, spend time
waiting
fazer o papel de to perform the figure of
estd a fazer it is being done
estd por fazer it is not yet done
da que fazer it is hard work
isso nao faz ao caso that is of no concern
fazer-se to become, to turn, to grow; to occur
The Irregular Verbs.
191
fazer-se velho to become old
fazer-se vermelho to blush
fazer-se pdllido, amarello to grow pale, yellow
fazer-se d vela to put to sea
fazer-se ao mar, ao alto to gain the open sea, to get
the offing
fazer-se d terra to steer towards (to head for) the land
fazer-se de novas to plead ignorance
'tas vezes se faz isso that occurs often.
196. IMzer to say, tell, speak, talk, relate.
Pres. Ind.
Pres. Conj.
Pret. imperf. Ind.
Pret. perf. Ind.
Imperf. Conj.
Mais-que-perf. Ind,
Futuro Ind.
Futuro Conj.
Conditional.
Imperative.
Participio.
Gerundio.
Digo> dizes, diz, dizemos } dizeis, dizem.
Diga, digas, diga, digamos, digaes, digam.
Dizia, dizias, dizia, diziamos, dizieis, diziam.
Disse, disseste, disse, dissemos, dissestes,
disser am.
Dissesse, etc.
Dissera, etc.
Direi, dirds, etc.
Disser, disseres, disser, etc.
Diria, etc.
Dize (tu), dizei (vos), diga (V*), digamos (nos).
Dito.
Dizendo.
197. Compound verbs:
condizer (com) to agree, suit, match, contradizer to
contradict; desdizer to deny; desdizer-se to unsay; interdizer
to interdict; maldizer to slander, curse; predizer to predict,
foretell.
198. Poder can, may, to be able.
Pres. Ind. Posso, podes, pode, podemos, podeis, podem.
Pres. Conj. Possa,possas,possa,possdmos,possaes,possam.
Pret. Imperf. Ind. Podia,podias,podia/podiamos,podieis,podiam.
Pret. perf . Ind. Pude, pudeste, pode, pudemos, pudestes,
puderam.
Imperf. Conj. Pudesse, etc.
Mais-que- Perf. Ind. Pudera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Poderei, poderds t etc.
Futuro Conj. Puder, puderes, puder, etc.
Conditional. Poderia, etc.
Participio. Podido.
Gerundio. Podendo.
Poder-se to be possible.
192
Lesson 28.
199. Saber to know, to learn, to be able, can.
Pres. Ind. Sei, sabes, sake, sabemos, sabeis, sdbem.
Pres. Conj. Saiba, saibas, saiba, saibdmos, saibaes, saibam.
Pret. imperf. Ind. Sdbia, sabias, sdbia, sdbiamos, sdbieis, sabiam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Soube, soubeste, soube, soubemos, soubestes,
souberam.
Imperf. Conj. Soubesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf.lnd. Soubera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Sdberei, saberds, etc.
Futuro Conj. Soiiber, souberes, etc.
Conditional. Sdberia, etc.
Imperative. Sabe, saiba, sabei.
Participio. Sdbido.
Gerundio. Sabendo.
Remark. Can j to "be able must be rendered by poder
whenever it means a physical power or disposition; it must
be rendered by saber if signifying an intellectual capacity
e.g., Men irmao sdbe ler, mas hoje nao pode porque estd rouco
my brother can read, but to-day he is not able to do so,
because he is hoarse.
200. Caber to be contained in, to fall to, to
belong to, to come or happen opportunely, forms like
saber, but for the 1 st pers. pr. ind.
Pres. Ind. Caibo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, cdbem.
mel [met]
a abelha
[TB 'bv/iv]
a cellula
o tumulo
['tumuluj
o cortigo
[Tcur'tisu]
a colmeia
o sobreiro
chupar
[fu'
sugar [su 'gar]
adocicar
[v&usikar],
adogar
[u&usar]
depositar
Palavras.
the honey
a casiriha do
the honey-cell
the bee
favo
o alvfolo
the cell, alveole
the cell
[ai'vetduj
o cabrito
the kid
the tomb
[kv 'ftrituj
tornar
to give back
pegar [pv'yar]
to seize
the bee-hive
em
entrar a fazer
to begin doing
alg. c.
something
the cork-oak
a flauta ['flautvj
the flute
largar a fugir
to put oneself
to flight
to suck
o magarefe
the blockhead
to sweeten
/ TW&Cp:* / j*|^J
o flautista
the flautist
[flau'tiftv]
a palavra
the word of
(d'honra)
honour
to deposit
outro dia
the other day
The Irregular Verbs.
193
o sapateiro
the shoemaker a vacancia
o recibo
frrd'sibnj
the receipt
a vagatura
the vacancy
inteiramente
entirely [vieqis 'turv]
um pagamento
an instalment : seguir [sa'gir]
to continue
a conta
(the way)
o emprego
the employ-
por signal
by way of
[in i 'pregu]
ment
[si'nal]
example
vago [vaguj
free, vacant
o monolitho
the monolith
conferir
to confer
[monu 'lituj
[kofd'rirj
lavrar
to work, to
fazer todas as
to take all
chisel
diligencias
pains
a columna
the column
[ddli 'ges'ivfj
[ko'lunu]
exercer
to exercise
a licenga
the license, per-
[tear 'serj
[li'sesu]
mission
fazer-se illusoes
to illude oneself especial
especial, par-
[ilu'zoif]
Rff98*'atJ
ticular
desanimar(-se).
to despair, to
a informagao
the information
desalentar(-se.
) despond
nao ha de que!
don't mention!
torcer [tur'ser]
to twist
passe muito bem
' good-bye!
77. Exercicio.
mel e fabricado (or feito) pelas abelhas. Estas fazem
o mel dentro dos corses ou colmeias. Os cortices sao feitos
da casca do sobreiro. Para fazerem o mel, as abelhas chupam
de certas flores o succo adocicado d'estas, o qual succo se
I chama nectar. Com o nectar sugado, as abelhas fazem o mel
que levam para os cor^os, depositando-o nas cellulas ou
casinhas dos favos, chamadas tambem alveoles. -- Dize neste
mundo o que tens para dizer: o tumulo e mudo. Dou-me
muito bem com os ares d'esta regiao y melhor do que me dei
*na Suissa. Ali se dava as vezes que nao podia aturar os
ventos asperos que me faziam mal. Mas nao sabia que fazer,
ate que me disseram da Eiviera portugufisa e que soube que
iate 'no inverno os ares aqui sao beneficos.
78. Leitura.
cdbrito e o lobo.
Era uma vez um cabrito que se tinha perdido num
nonte. Nao sei aonde, salta-lhe um lobo para o devorar, e
Mle volta-se para o lobo e diz-lhe assim:
- Senhor lobo! ja sei que me vae (see ir, 214) comer!
*Jas se faz favor, eu gostava muito de uma morte alegre!
Diz-lhe o lobo: -- Qual?
Torna o cabrito: Gostava muito de morrer a da^ar!
lobo por Ihe fazer a vontade, p^ga numa flauta e poe-
;e (see por, 212) a tocar, e o cabrito entra logo a bai-
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 13
194 Lesson 28.
lar ; - - mas uns caes que andavam perto, ouviram a fiauta e
vieram (see vir, 218) a correr, e o lobo largou logo a fugir
com medo dos caes.
Bern feito! dizia elle entao. Nao passo de magarefe,
para que me metti eu a ser flautista.
(Trindade Coelho: 1 Livro de Leitura).
79. Thema.
I give you my word of honour that I gave those 25
pounds which my father had given me the other day, to my
tailor, in order to pay his bill. Did you (tr. thou) also pay
the shoemaker, and did he give you a receipt? I could not
yet entirely pay the shoemaker; I made him an instalment
and told him that I should give him the rest as soon as I
should be nominated to the vacant appointment that is to be
conferred. How can you know whether you will be nominated
for it? I don't know, but I natter myself, that it will be
given to me, as I take all pains, and because there is perhaps
nobody else who is able to do the service as well. And I
tell you what I have always told you: I fear that somebody
else will be appointed, as you, however well knowing the (tr. do)
service, cannot exercise it on account of your health. Don't
give yourself up to illusions, but also don't despair if (by chance)
you know that another has been selected for the vacancy.
Conyersa^ao.
A. Sabe-me o senhor dizer, por onde eu posso (or puder)
chegar ao Palacio do Municipio?
B. Sei, sim, senhor. Faqa favor de se dirigir por esta
rua, que e a Rua do Ouro, abaixo ate" ao Terreiro
do Paco que da para o Tejo. Depois pode seguir a
direita pela Rua do Arsenal ate* ao Largo do Pelou-
rinho, onde e a Camara Municipal.
A. Ora diga-me, porque se nomeia aquelle largo do
Pelourinho.
B. Deu-lhe este nome um monumento, por signal muito
antigo, que esta no meio do largo e defronte do
Municipio, e que.e" formado por um monolitho lavrado
(or aberto) em trSs columnas torcidas uma em volta
da (round the) outra.
A. P6de-se entrar no Palacio?
B. Pode. Ate as 4 boras esta aberto. Depois e so com
licenca especial.
A. Muito obrigado oelas informacoes que me deu. Boa
tarde !
B. Nao ha de que\ Passe muito bem!
The Irregular Verbs,
195
Twenty-ninth Lesson. Li<jao vigesima
^The Irregular Verbs. (Continued.)
Second Conjugation. Terbs in -er.
201. Querer to be willing, to wish, to intend,
to feel disposed, to like.
Pres. Ind. Quero, queres, quer, queremos, quereis, quer em.
Pres. Conj. Queira, queiras, queira, queirdmos, queiraes,
queiram.
Pret. imperf. Ind. Queria, querias, queria, queriamos, querieis,
queriam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Quiz, quizeste, quiz, quizemos, quizestes,
quizeram.
Imperf. Conj. Quizesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf.Ind. Quizera, etc.
I Futuro Ind.
j Futuro Conj.
Conditional.
Imperative.
Gerundio.
Quererei, quererds. etc.
Quizer, quizeres, etc.
Quereria, etc.
Queira, queiram (only used in the 3 rd pers.
followed by an infinitive e.g. : queira,
dizer-me in the meaning "kindly tell me".
Querido. (As an adjective it means: be-
loved, dear).
Querendo.
202. JRequerer to solicit is regular but for the
1 1 st pers. pr. ind. and derived; it forms:
i Pres. Ind. Requeiro, requeres, requere.
*et. perf. Eequeri, requereste, requereu, requeremos, etc.
203. Trazer to bring, to carry, to wear, to x
[Pres. Ind. Trago, trazes, traz, trazdmos, trazeis, trazem.
\Pres. Conj. Traga, tragas, traga, tragdmos, tragaes,
tragam.
Pret. imperf. Ind. Trazia, trazias, trazia, traziamos, trazieis,
traziam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Trouxe ['trosd], trouxeste, trouxe, trouxemos,
trouxestes, trouxeram.
^mperf. Conj. Trouxesse, etc.
\iais-que-perf.lnd. Trouxera, etc.
7 uturo Ind. Trarei, trards, etc.
fiduro Conj. Trouxer, trouxeres, trouxer, etc.
13*
196 Lesson 29.
Conditional. Traria, etc.
Imperative. Traze (tu), traga (V*), trazei (vds).
Participio. Trazido.
Gerundio. Trazendo.
204. Valer to be worth, to be of value, to
help, to assist.
Pres. Ind. Valho, vales, vale or valj valemos, valeis,
valem.
Pres. Conj. Valha, valhas, valha, valMmos, valhaes,
valham.
Imperative. Used only in the 3 rd pers. e.g., Valha-m>-
Dem! God help me! Valha a verdade
to tell the truth!
All the rest is regular.
205. Perder to lose.
Pres. Ind. Perco, perdes, perde, perdemos, perdeis,
perdem.
Pres. Conj. Perca, percas, perca, percamos, percaes,
percam.
The rest is regular.
To this group of irregular verbs belong also ser,
ter and haver, already dealt with among the auxiliary
verbs.
206. Ler to read.
Pres. Ind. Leio, les, U, lemos, ledes, leem.
Pres. Conj. Leia, leias, leia, le(i)cimos, le(i)aes, leiam.
Imperf. Ind. Lia, lias, lia, liamos, lieis, Ham.
Pret. perf. Ind. Li, leste, leu, lemos, lestes, leram.
Imperf. Conj. Lesse, lesses, lesse, lessemos, lesseis, lessem.
Mais-que-perf. Ind. Lera, leras, lera, etc.
Imperative. Le (tu), leia, le(i)d,mos, lede (vos).
Participio. Lido.
Gerundio. Lendo.
207. Crer to believe, to think, to trust, and
descrer to disbelieve, are conjugated like ler. Modern
writers use the forms creiamos, creiaes instead of the
more correct creamos, creaes (cf. ler).
208. Ver to see, behold, consider, view.
Pres. Ind. Vejo, ves, ve, vemos, vedes, veem.
Pres. Conj. Veja, vejas, veja, vejdmos, vejaes, vejam.
Imperf. Ind. Via, vias, via, viamos, vieis, mam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Vi, viste, viu, vimos, vistes, viram.
The Irregular Verbs. 197
Imperf. Conj. Visse, visses, visse, etc.
Mais-que-perf.Ind. Vira, viras, mra, etc.
Futuro Ind. Verei, verds, verd, etc.
Futuro Conj. Vir, vires, vir, etc.
Conditional. Veria, verias, veria, etc.
Imperativo. Ve (tu), veja, vejdmos, vede (vos).
Participio. Visto.
Gerundio. Vendo.
209. Compound Verbs:
antever, prever to foresee
entrever to have a glimpse of, to discover
rever to review, to see again
prover to provide
desprover to deprive, to strip (of).
N.B. Prover and desprover are regular in the Pret.
perf. Ind. (provi, proveste, proven, etc.^ and in the forms
derived from it (provesse, provera, prover), as also in
the Past Participle (provido).
210. Jazer to lie, to be buried, a defective
verb of rare use, has become regular i.e.: it has no
longer the forms jaco, nor jouve (pret. perf.), nor an
open e [e] in the 2 nd pers. pret. pref. and derived forms:
Pres. Ind. Jazo, jazes, jaz, jazemos, jazeis, jazem.
Imperf. Ind. Jazia.
Pret. Perf. Jazi, jazeste, jazeu, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Jazera, etc.
Aqui jaz (jazem) here lies (lie).
From the 1 st Participle the verbal adjective jazente
or better jacente is formed.
Essas pobres gera^oes que de ha muito jazem sem vida.
Terras jacentes ao poente grounds lying towards the west.
Heran$a jacente heritage not jet distributed.
211. Those verbs ending in -cer, -ger and -guer
indergo analogous modifications as those ending in
'car, -gar and -gar, in order to conserve the original sound
)f the c and g (cf. 136 N.B. and 143).
212. Pdr to put, place, lay, set, suppose.
This verb apparently not belonging to any of the
hree conjugations, is to be considered as one of the
,f nd , having lost the e of the termination (po-er).
198
Lesson 29.
Pres. Ind. Ponho, poes, poe, pomos, pondes, p5em.
Pres. Conj. Ponha, ponhas, ponha, ponhdmos, ponhaes,
ponham.
Imperf. Ind. Punha, punhas, punha, punhamos, punheis,
punham.
Pret. Ind. Puz, puzeste,poz, puzemos, puzestes, puzer aw.
Imperf. Conj. Puzesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Puzera, puzeras, puzera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Porei, pords, pord, poremos, poreis, porao,
Futuro Conj. Puzer, puzer es, puzer, puzermos, puzer des,
puzerem.
Conditional. Poria, porias, poria, etc.
Imperative. Poe (tu), ponha (Ve), ponhdmos (nos),
ponde (vos).
Partitipio. Posto.
Gerundio. Pondo.
Por-se em pe to get up.
213. Compound verbs:
antepor to set before, prefer indispor to indispose, to unfit
compor to compose
contrapdr to oppose, to com-
pare
depor to state; to depose; to
deposit; to lay down
dispor to dispose
expor to expose, exhibit
impor to impose
interpor to put between, in
terpose
oppor to oppose
propor to propose
propor-se to intend, to design
suppor to suppose
transpor to transport, etc.
Palavras.
varao
[we 'rvuj
o ingeriho
the man, male
the skill, talent,
art, wit
o brazao the escutcheon
[bn'tfa]
herdar [ir'darj to inherit
o padre
the father
to speak aloud
falar em bom
som
o voto [votu]
a amizade
[vmi '$.
a infdncia
o tumulo
['tumulu]
the vote
the friendship
the childhood
the tomb
a pedra tumular the tombstone
o punhado the handful
[pu'ya&u]
a campa the burying-
place
saudoso
fsau'ffozuj
o annuncio
[v'nu&iu]
a prompto
(supply paga-
mento)
a prestagoes on payment by
[upriftie 'soifj instalments
o escriptorio the office
the bakery
melancholy
the advertise-
ment
on cash (pay-
ment)
a padaria
The Irregular Verbs.
199
trespassar
to alienate
quebt'ar
to break
[trjfpv 'sar]
[kj'brar]
o lucro f'lukruj
the gain, profit
tnlhar [tv'fiar]
to cut
tratar
to negotiate,
a alvenaria
the masonry
treat, deal
[alvdnv'rivj
as ali'igaras
the finder's
a argamassa
the mortar
[al'visvrvf]
reward
[vrgv 'masis]
moinho
the mill
o betao [b9 'tvuj
the beton, con-
fmu'inu]
crete
o colar fku'lar]
the collar
o cimento
the cement
a medalha
the medal
[& 'mentuj
[vnadafa]
a liga$ao
the binding
o capitalista
the capitalist
[lips 'sen]
cement
o socio f'sosi'uj
the sleeping
o instrumento
instrument
commanditdri
9 partner
o officio
the profession
a industria
the industry
[u 'fisiuj
[in'duftriv]
a colher
the trowel
o proprio
the same (ad-
[ku'/ier]
(supply: an-
vertiser)
a picadeira
the pickaxe
nunciador)
[pikv 'ff&irie]
o abaixo assi-
the signatory
adelga$ar
to thin
gnado
[vftElgv 'sar]
[usi'na&u]
picar
to hoe
a agenda
the agency
o estuque
the stucco
[is 'zest's]
fif'tukdj
o penhor
the pawn,
o camartello
the cutting-
[pt'yorj
pledge
[kvmvr'telu]
hammer
sufficients
sufficient
desbastar
to rough-hew
[suflgi'entd]
[digbuf'tar]
a casa de
the pawnshop
calcar [kalkar]
to fix by beat-
penhores
ing
montar
to establish
o prumo
the plummet
afreguezado
fvfrdg} 'za&uj
well accustom-
' ed
aprumar
o nivel f'niveij
to plumbline
the level
' o local [lu 'kal]
the locality
nivelar
to level
o esclareciment(
) the information
horizontal
horizontal
[tfkforysi-
[orizon 'taij
'mentuj
a cantaria
the masonry;
; a construcQao
the construc-
[kvnte 'riu]
the cut- stone,
fkoftru 'suu]
tion
blocking
o pedreiro
a enxada
the spade
[pd 'frrviru]
[j'fftCpB]
1 o trolha
the mason
amassar
to wet, to stir
f'trofoj
o cdche [koftf
the hod.
a trolha
the handle- or
['trofoj
mortar-board
80. Exercicio.
Rebello da Silva disse que valia mais o varao que se fazia
grande e famoso pelo ingenho e pelos actos, do que o homem
que ja nascera entre brazoes herdados. Dizia o padre Antonio
200 Lesson 29.
Vieira que se descompnnha a si mesmo, quern aos mais deseoin-
punha. Nao leias em meia voz, le alto e em bom som! Dou-lhe
os parabens ; nao caibo em mim de contente pelas boas novas de
que me deu parte. Vejo que Ihe trouxe fortuna o conselho que
algum dia Ihe de"ra. Deus queira que Ihe valham sempre os rneus
votes de boa aniizade e o muito que Ihe quero. Quem me dera
que pudesse ir ve-lo! Propor-lhe-ia que fossemos (see 214)
rever os logares da nossa infancia e os tiimulos onde jazem
aquelles a quern mais quizemos quando vivos. Que satisfac^ao
d'alma se, lendo nas pedras tumulares aquelles nomes queridos,
depuzessemos um punhado de flores na campa dos que nos
deram a vida. Mas ja perdi toda a confianca, descreio em que
jamais os reveja ou que torne a ver esses saudosos sitios os
quaes valha a verdade ! valem para mim o mais bonito
jardim.
81. Leitura.
Annuncios.
1. Piano alemao, novo, magnificas vozes, vende-se barato,
a prompto ou a presta9<5es, Na Eua da Palma 61, escriptd-
rio, se diz.
2. Padaria, trespasse-se uma em boas condisoes e muito
barata. Da 100 000 reis de lucro por mfis. Trata-se com
o abaixo assignado na Padaria Bijou a rua Escola Poly-
technica 247.
3. Alvigaras dao-se a quern entregar na Canada do Moinho
de Vento 32 um colar d'ouro com medalha que se perdeu
desde a dita rua ate ao Chiado.
4. Capitalista. Precisa-se de socio capitalista ou commandi-
tario para desenvolver uma indiistria. Capital garantido,
lucres certos 10/o (por cento). Trata-se com o proprio,
Carta a agencia NN. Eua dos Eetrozeiros.
5. Capitalista precisa-se que entre com o capital sufficients
para mais desenvolvimento de uma casa de penhores, ja
montada e afreguezada n'um dos melhores locaes da capital
Esclarecimentos, rua Capellistas No. 71.
82. Thema.
Building in Portugal.
Do you see that house in construction? The mason
makes the walls and all masonry with broken, uncut
stones or with bricks, joining the materials with clay, mortar,
beton, cement or another binding. Do you know of which
tools the mason makes use in his profession? I (shall)
tell you ; they are these : the trowel, with which he places
the clay and mortar; the pickaxe, with which he thins the
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.
201
sides of the bricks, cuts the walls and demolishes the stucco ;
the cutting-hammer, with which he cuts the stone and fixes
the materials out of which he builds the walls; the plumb,
which helps (valer em) him to plumbline the walls; the level,
with which he levels the blockings; the handle-board where
he puts the chalk; the spade he stirs the chalk with; the
hod, which serves in transporting the chalk, etc.
Conversacjao.
Que tempo faz, (or esta)?
Porque cr isso?
Valha-nos Deus ! Antes queria
que continuasse enxuto, por-
que com a chuva perco a
occasiao de dar passeios.
Ora veja o jornal que trouxeram
e que ja prediz mudanca de
tempo. Quer que Ih'o leia?
Pois ja ficamos sabendo que,
se o tempo se puzer a mal,
sera por muitos dias.
Por emquanto tern feito (or
estado) bom tempo, mas
creio que vae mudar.
Porque se levantou muito
vento, e receio que nos traga
ehuva.
Pois nao ve aquellas nuvens
que se juntam no horisonte ?
Vera que amanha teremos
chuva, a nao sr que o vento
acalme.
Se quizer fazer esse favor . . .
corno eu nao sei ler . . . Gom-
tudo ja prevejo o que diz.
Pois seja o que Deus quizer!
Visto a gente nao pudermos
fazer nada .
Thirtieth Lesson. Licjao trigesima.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.
214. Ir to go (as for the compound tenses of
this verb see 118).
Pres. 1ml. Vou. vaes (vais), vae (vai), vamos (imos),
ides, vao.
} res. Conj. Vd, vds, vd, vamos, vades, vao.
et. imperf. Ind. la, ias, ia, iamos, ieis, iam.
. perf. Fui, foste, foi, fdmos, fostes, fordo,
iperf. Conj. Fosse, etc.
ais-que-perf. Fora, foras, fora, formos, foreis, foram.
Fid. Ind. Irei, irds, ird, iremos, ireis, irao.
Fut. Conj. For, fores, for, formos, fdrdes, forem.
Conditional. Iria, etc.
Imperativo. Vae (tu), vd, vamos (nos), ide (vds).
202 Lesson 30.
Participio. Ido. (In the adjective meaning "past" there
Gerundio. Indo. is also the fern, form "ida"
and the plural forms "idos,
Mas.")
215. Ir followed by an infinitive expresses an
intention, that which tho English expresses by "to be
going to" e.g.: vou fazer o meu thema I am going to do
my task; iamos dar um passeio we were just about to
take a walk.
216. Idioms with ir.
Ir a pe to go on foot
ir de (or em) carruagem to go in a carriage, to drive
ir a cavallo to go on horseback, to ride
ir a melhor to grow or become better
ir ter com alguem to call upon somebody
vae melhor he (she, it) is better, it is going better
Gomo vae? how do you do? how is it going on?
Que vae nisso? what does it matter?
par mal que vd if the worst come to the worst
Quanto vae d'aqui a . . . ? How far is it from here to . . . ?
Esta rua vae ter a ponte this street leads to the bridge
Vae em tres annos about three years ago
Vae-lhe bem it suits you well
Isso jd la vae that's a thing past and done.
217. Ir-se to go away, be off, to set out,
disappear, die.
Vou-me I go away, I am going away.
Foi-se he is gone.
Vd-se embora! get you gone! be off!
Vamo-nos! let us go away
(Vae-se fazendo tarde (escuro) it is growing late (dark).)
Remark L While ir expresses a movement towards a
place, ir-se expresses one away from it. The former answers
to the question ''where to?", the latter to "whence?"
Remark II. In the last example se is not part of the
verb ir, but of fazer, being joined to the former only for
the sake of harmony.
218. Vir
Pres. Ind. Venho, vens, vem, vimos, vindes 7 veem.
Pres. Conj. Venha, verihas, veriha, venhamos, venhaes,
venham.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 203
?rf. Ind. Vinha, vinhas, vinha, vinhamos,
vinham.
Pret. perf. Vim, vieste, veio, vihnos, viestes, vieram.
Imperf. Conj. Viesse, viesses, viesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Viera, viSras, etc.
Fut. Ind. Virei, virds, vird, mremos, vireis, virdo.
Fut. Conj. Vier, vieres, vier, viermos, vierdes, vierem.
Conditional. Viria, etc.
Imperativo. Vem {tu), venha, venhdmos, vinde (vos).
Participio. Vindo.
Gerundio. Vindo.
Remark. The singular of the imperative terminates by
m : vent. The same ending has the 2 nd pers. sing. pres. iiid.,
when followed by an objective pronoun (-0, -a, -os, -as)
e.g., cem-lo tu dizer? do you come to tell it? (About lo
cf. 164 (b).)
Idioms: Vir as boas to reconcile oneself. Vir-se e desejar-
se com ... to be in difficulties with . . .
219. Compound Yerbs:
advir to intervene, to arrive desavir to disunite
contravir to contravene, in- intervir to intervene
fringe provir to come from
convi.r to agree, to be fit or sobrevir to supervene.
convenient
220. Rir to laugh.
Pres. Ind. Rio, ris, ri, rimos, rides, riem.
Pr.es. Conj. Ria, rias, ria, ridmos, riaes, riam.
Compound verbs: sorrir to smile and rir-se (de)
to laugh (at).
221. The verbs medir, pedir and ouvir to hear,
are regular but for the 1 st pers. pres. ind. and derived
forms.
Medir (cf. 152) to measure, appreciate.
Pres. Ind. Mego, medes, mede, medimos, medis, medem.
Pres. Conj. Mega, megas, mega, megdmos, megaes, megam.
Imperativo. Mede, mega, megdmos, medi.
Pedir to ask, to beg.
Pres. Ind. Pego, pedes, pede, pedimos, pedis, pedem.
Pres. Conj. Pega, pegas, pega, pegdmos, pegaes, pegam.
Imperativo. Pede, pega, pegdmos, pedi.
Compound verbs: despedir to dismiss and expcdir
to dispatch.
204 Lesson 30.
Ouvir to hear.
Pres. Ind. Ouco (oico), ouves, ouve, ouvimos, ouvis,
ouvem.
Pres. Conj. Ouga (oica), ougas, ouga, ougamos, oucaes,
N.B. The u before g may be supplied by i.
222. Dormir to sleep (see 154).
Pres. Ind. Durmo, dormes, dorme, dormimos. dorntis,
dormem.
Pres. Conj. Durma, durinas, durma, durmdmos, durmaes,
durmam.
223. Concerning the verbs in a(h)ir see 158.
Cair (sometimes, but incorrectly: cahir) to fall.
Pres. 2nd. Cdio, caes, cae, caimos, cais, cdem.
Pres. Conj. Cdia, cdias, edict, caidmos, caiaes, cdiam.
Sahir or sair to go out, to go forth.
Pres. Ind. Sdio, saes, sae, sahimos (saimos), sahis (sais) }
Pres. Conj. Sdia, sdias, saia, saidmos, saiaes, saiam.
All the rest is regular.
224. Concerning the verbs adherir, advertir, ferir,
mentir, repetir, seguir, sentir, servir and compound ones
cf. 152, 153, 156.
The following is a model conjugation of these
verbs:
Pres. Ind. Visto, vestes, veste, vestimos, vestis, vestem.
Pres. Conj. Vista, vistas, vista, vistdmos, vistaes, vistam.
Imp. Ind. Vestia, vestias, vestia, vestiamos, vestrns,
vestiam.
Pret. perf. ind. Vesti, vestiste, vestiu, vestimos, vestistes,
vestiram.
Imp. Conj. Vestisse, vestisses, vestisse, vestissemos,
vestisseis, vestissem.
Mais-que-perf. Vestira, vestiras, vestira, vestiramos, vestireis,
vestiram.
Fut. Ind. Vestirei, vestiras, vestira, etc.
Fat. Conj. Vestir, veslires, vestir, vestirmos, vestirdes,
vestirem.
Condidonal. Vestiria, vestirias, etc.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 205
-..iperatieo. Veste (tu), vista (V*), vistdmos, vesti (vds).
Participio. Vestido.
Gerundio. Vestindo.
Thus are conjugated:
(a)
TntJ Pres.Subj.
andlwpcr.
a) Adherir to adhere, to stick to . adUro adhira
(b) advertir to advise advirto advirta
(c) ferir to bless firo fira
(d) mentir 1 to lie, to deceive . . . minto minta
(e) repetir to repeat repito repita
(f) seguir* to follow sigo siga
(g) sentir to feel sinto sinta
(h) sermr to serve; to be of use; to
lay (the table) sirvo sirva
(i) vestir to dress visto vista
(j) despir 3 to undress dispo
225. The verbs aggredir, denegrir, pro-
yredir, remir, transgredir, prevenir change
equally the radical e into i, yet not only in the 1 st pers.
! pr. ind., but in all accented forms of this tense, as
also through the whole pres. subj. (cf. 152, 2, Remark).
Aggredir to assault.
i Pres. Ind. Aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggredimos,
aggrediSj aggridem.
I Pres. Cony. Aggrida, aggridas, aggrida, aggriddmos,
aggridaes, aggridam.
Prevenir to advise, to warn, to prepare, to prevent.
Pres. Ind. Previno, prevines, previne, prevenimos, preve-
ms } previnem.
'Pres. Conj. Previna, previnas, previna, previndmos, pre-
wnaes, previnam.
226. Those verbs of the 3 rd conj. whose radical
vowel is u modify this u into open o [o] in the 2 nd and
3 rd pers. sing, and in the 3 rd pers. pi. of the pres. ind.,
is also in the sing, imper. (cf. 155) e.g.:
1 Instead of mentir you will better employ faltar d verdade.
2 For the orthography seguir and sigo, cf. 157.
3 This verb conserves in the first and second persons pi. pres.
ponj. its radical e: dispa, dispas, dispa, despdmos, despaes, dispam.
206
Lesson 30.
Fugir to flee, fly.
Pres. Ind. Fujo, foges, foge> fugimos, fugis, fog em.
Pres. Conj. Fuja, fujas, fuja, fujdmos, fujaes, fujam.
Imperative. foge, fuja? fujdmos, fugi, fujam.
All the rest is regular.
N.B. Concerning the g changing into j see 157.
227. After this model are conjugated:
Acudir to run, to help, to aid engulir to swallow
bulir to touch, to stir sacudir to shake
consumir to consume subir to ascend, to mount
cobrir (cubrir) to cover tussir to cough
descobrir to un- or discover sumir to hide
cuspir to spit sumir-se to disappear
destruir to destroy surgir to appear, to rise.
Remark. Construir and reconstruir to build and re-
build are also often conjugated like this, yet they better keep
their u: construes, construe, const ruem instead of constroes,
constroe, constroem.
228. Affligir to aflict; affligir-se to care, to
be in sorrow, to grieve; corrigir to correct; fingir to feign;
dirigir to direct, change the g before a and o into j
e.g., que die corrija that he may correct (cf. 157).
229. Frigir to fry, modifies moreover the i
into e in the 2 nd and 3 rd pers. sing, and the 3 rd pers. pi.
Pres. Ind. Frijo, freges, frege, frigimos, frigis, fregem.
Participio. frito besides frigido.
Remark. The verbs in uzir, as: conduzir, produzir,
induzir, reduzir, (re)luzir, etc., are regular, but they lose
the e of the 3 rd pers, sing, of the pres. ind. e.g., produz;
the imperative, however, conserves the e: produze!
Palayras.
Parar to stop, to stay
o cavalheiro the gentleman
a presenQa de the presence of
espirito mind
[kvvv 'fi'Biru]
andar doente, to be ill, sad
o cavalleiro the rider
triste etc.
[kvvB 'IsfruJ
o desastre the disaster
a estrada real the high-road
[dd'zaftrd]
[iftra&isrri'at]
a (primeira) the temporary
o grito ['gritu] the scream
Ugadura dressing (of a
a desfilada in full speed
[ligs 'durv] wound)
[afoffi'lAfo]
sentir d falta de to miss
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.
207
o apparelho the apparatus
o tribunal criminal court
[vpv 'rvftu]
criminal
os sentidos the senses,
a instrucgdo primary in-
conscience
primdria struction
effectivawente indeed
a direcgdo geral central school-
a complicagao the complica-
de instrucgdo board
fTcompliku- tion
f7
o documento the document
[doku'mentu]
de passagem by the bye
constar to be said or
de dia a dia from day to day
[konf'tar] reported
o medico the assistant
acerca [a, 'serkvj with regard to
assistente surgeon
de
fracturar to break
a frequezia the parish
[fratu'rarj
[frd&ziv]
o requerimento the petition
collocar to place
[rrdkri-
[kulu'karj
'tnentuj
referido mentioned
o ministerio da the ministry of
o levantamento the raising
justi$a justice
a suspensdo the suspension
depois d'dmanha the day after
fsufpe'svu]
to-morrow
o despacho the despatch
a urgencia the urgency
[dif'pafu]
[ur'gesiie]
o deputado the deputy
a sentenga , the sentence
[ddputsi&u]
[sen'tesu]
d'aqui em dianie henceforth
oficial [ofisi'cd] official
assim que as well as, also
absolvitorio absolving
contar com reckon upon
[ubsolvi-
alquem someone
toriuj
auxiliar to help.
a nota ['note] the note, list
[ausili 'arj
83. Exercicio.
Men bom Amigo!
Ha muito que nada 01190 de ti. Nem eu sei ja onde
paras e como vaes. Disseste-me que virias ver-me um dia
qualquer de que havias de prevenir-nie. Mas nao vieste, nem
me preveniste. Sin to muito que nao tenhas vindo na semana
passada, quando demos um passeio a Cintra, sitio de que de
certo ja ouviste falar. Fui eu com meus paes e irmaos e
fomos de carruagem e nao em caminho de ferro. Alguns
.cavalheiros, indo a cavallo e em bycicleta, seguiam a nossa
carruagem pela estrada real. De repente ouve-se um grito -
olho para tras e vejo que um dos cavalleiros caido abaixo, jaz
no chao, emquanto o cavallo foge a desfilada. Oh, se visses
aquillo ! Mas nao perco a minha natural presenca de espirito,
e, querendo valer ao ho mem jacente, que cria ferido, ponho-
ine em pe e fa^o parar a carruagem. Saio d'ella precipitada-
tnente e os outros acodem. Tu sabes que geralmente ando
.prevenido, como que presentindo sempre algum desastre. Trago
208 Lesson 30.
comigo, para fazer umas primeiras ligaduras, um apparelho,
que n'aquella occasiao tambem trazia comigo. E se o nao
trouxesse (or: trago), ter-nos-ia (or: tinha-nos) feito muita
falta. Pois o homem perdera os sentidos. Proponho que se
puzesse na carruagem, onde effectivamente foi posto, dispondo-
se de maneira que nos outros viemos a pe, ate que nos adveio
outra carruagem de que fizemos uso. Consome-me ainda o
receio que sobrevenha alguma complica9o no estado do ferido
que diga-se de passagem sente melhoras e vae a melhor
de dia a dia. Sirvo-lbe de medico assistente, visto-o e dispo-o,
pois fracturou um bra90. Bile agora dorme e e bom que durma,
para que se ponha bem de todo. Se nao sobrevier febre,
espero que elle se possa levantar depois d'amanha. Na
esperan9a de te v6r brevemente, pe90 me creias
sempre teu muito amigo
Jose.
84. Leitura.
Requeiro que pelo ministerio da justi9a me seja enviada com
urgencia copia da senten9a absolvitoria de 26 de julho de 1907,
do tribunal criminal do Porto, dada no processo em que res-
pondeu o professor official da escola de C. senhor Paulo Fer-
reira de Azevedo.
Requeiro que pela direc^ao geral de instruc9ao primaria
me sejam enviados com urgencia os seguintes documentos:
1. Nota de tudo quanto se souber e constar acerca do ex-
professor primario da freguezia de Paranhos, do Porto, sr. P. F.
de A., actualmente collocado na escola official de C. ; 2. Copia
do requerimento do referido professor a direc9ao geral de ins-
truc9ao primaria, pedindo o levantamento da suspensao que
Ihe foi imposta, com o despacho dado pela mesma direc9ao geral.
Lisboa, 3 de junho de 1908.
deputado
Affonso Costa.
85. Thema.
My dear friend!
I congratulate you that you so quickly have (conj.) run
to help that gentleman fallen from his horse, and that you
could provide his injuries with temporary dressing. I appreciate
all the interest and satisfaction with which you follow the pro-
gress in the recovery of the wounded man. I beg that you will
continue to let me know how he is going on and whether he is
growing better. Also that you will tell me whether I can help
you (cf. 204) or be of any use to you (see 224 h). You
well know that you may reckon upon me and that I am
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 209
good for something. Communicate to me, whatever I may be
able to do for you or your patient. I repeat that I will
come (= ir) at once as soon as you write me "Come!"
I suppose that you are (conj.) without a soul to help
you (= a soul that [may] help you) and grieve about
it. Should it be convenient, advise me, and I will run to
(your) help.
Yours most heartily (= teu do cora^ao)
James (Jayme).
86. Exercise (oral).
Instead of a conversation the student is recommended
to transfer the address "tu" in 78 and 80 into the more
ceremonious form, remembering that it may be given either
' by the mere verb (3 rd pers.) or by o Senhor, o Amiga, V a Ex a ,
etc. (see 32).
Thirty-first Lesson. Li<$o trigesiina
primeira.
Impersonal and Defective Verbs.
Os verbos unipessoaes e os defectives.
230. Impersonal are those verbs the activity of
which is not exercised by persons or even by any
distinct subject, and which are only used with the
3 rd pers. sing, and the indefinite subject it. We di-
stinguish three groups:
1. Such verbs as are always and merely used in
the 3 rd person, the essentially impersonal ones. To these
belong those expressing natural phenomena. Some
of them are employed with the subject o tempo; ama-
nliecer, to dawn, is sometimes accompanied by the
pleonastical subject o dia; acontecer may have a noun
for its subject.
\Consta it (he, she, etc.) is chovisca it drizzles
said to ... graniza it hails
acontece it happens neva it snows
\(o dia) amanhece it dawns gela it freezes
'anoitece it grows night, dar- degela it thaws
kens relampeja it lightens
chove it rains venta it blows
\troveja it thunders escurece it darkens
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 14
210 Lesson 31.
o tempo estia it (the weather) resulta it results
settles pesa-me I am sorry l
o tempo aclara it (the weather) apraz-me I am pleased. 2
clears up
2. Such verbs as may also be employed with a
personal subject and in all persons: the accidentally
impersonal ones e.g. :
parece it appears nao admira it is not astonish-
entende-se it is understood ing, I don't wonder
tarda muito, leva muito tempo recommenda-se it is to be re-
it tarries commended
nao admette duvida it is convem it is convenient
doubtless verificou-se it was verified.
3. Compositions of the 3 rd pers. of the verbs ser,
estar, fazer, haver, ir, etc. with an adjective or substan-
tive e.g. :
E or estd claro it is clear estd (or faz) luar it is moon-
e evidente it is evident light
e (im)possivel it is (im)possible estd (or faz) sol it is sunshine
e preciso it is necessary estd (or faz) nevoa it is foggy
e indispensavel it is indis- ha duvida there is some doubt
pensable nao ha duvida it is doubtless;
e justo it is just it does not matter
e verdade it is true, indeed nao ha novidade it is all right
e provavel, certo it is probable, ha gente there are some people
sure ha que fazer it is much to do
e lastima it is to be deplored ha um anno a year ago
e pena it is a pity ha muito (tempo) long ago
e (uma) vergonha it is a shame vae melhor it (he, she) is
faz arranjo it is convenient, growing better
fit or opportune (also em- vae em ires annos about three
ployed personally) years ago.
estd (or faz) color it is hot me fazer um m $ s nearly a
esta (or faz) fno it is cold month ago.
231. Eule. Impersonal verbs and locutions
which express uncertainty, necessity, feeling or wish,
are followed by the subjunctive in the dependent clause,
if introduced by que; otherwise by the infinitive.
Examples.
E indispensavel que va levar esta carta ao correio.
E lastima que nao tenha vindo mais cedo (or: e lastima
nao ter vindo . . .).
1 See pesar 137 (c).
2 See prazer 234.
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 211
E justo que o operario venca um ordenado correspondente
ao seu trabalho (or: e justo o operario veneer . .).
E (uma) vergonha que um rapaz tao intelligente nao
se applique mais (or: e vergonha um rapaz . . . nao
se applicar mais).
Pesa-me que Ihe tenha feito essa injustice (or : pesa-me
ter Ihe feito . . .).
Nao admira que nao se sinta bem depois d'uma noite
d 'insomnia.
Tardava muito que chegassem noticias d'elle.
Nao admittia diivida que o reu fosse culpado (or: de o
re*u se"r culpado).
Foi preciso que se Ihe fizesse uma ligadura (or : foi pre-
cise fazer-lhe . . .).
However: E verdade que nao veio a tempo.
E claro or certo que fez o seu dever.
Parece que nao deseja ser visto, etc.
232. Defective are such verbs as are lacking in
some forms. Their number is very limited. The following
are used only in those forms where the final consonant
of the radical is followed by i (i.e., in the Inf. pers.
and impers., in the 1 st and 2 nd pers. pi. pr. ind., in the
pret. imp. and perf., the future and cond., the parti-
ciples) :
Adir (uma heranga) to accept emollir to soften, mollify
(an inheritance) empedernir to petrify, harden
banir to banish extorguir to extort
brandir to brandish fattir to fail, to become bankrupt
parpir to moan, lament florir to flourish
wlorir to colour munir to furnish
\iemolir to demolish renhir to combat
Uscernir to discern retorquir to retort
ifescomeeftr-se to be immoderate, submergir to submerge, and
to fall into a passion other rare verbs.
The missing forms of these verbs are periphrasti-
;ally formed (see P. II., L. 20) for instance: estou de-
molindo I demolish. Espero que faga por banir esse
>ensamento I hope you will banish this idea from your
aind.
233. Precaver to warn, caution, precaver-se (de)
o beware of, fremir to tremble, are employed only in
tie forms where the final consonant of the radical is
allowed by i or e: precavia, precavendo; fremia,
, fremem, etc.
14*
212 Lesson 31.
234. The impersonal verb prazer (and apraser)
to please, to be pleased, wants the dative complement
and is employed only in the following forms:
Pres. Ind. Praz.
Pres. Conj. Praza.
Imperf. Ind. Prazia.
Pret. perf. Prouve.
Imperf. Subj. Prouvesse.
Mais-que-perf. Ind. Prouvera.
Fut. Ind. Prazerd.
Fut. Subj. Prouver.
Partidpio. Prazido.
Gerundio. Prazendo.
Examples.
rei disse: Praz(or apraz)-me conservar o men governo.
Aprazia-lhe (or aprouve-lhe) tomar essa resolugao. Prazerd
a Deus . . . Prazendo a Dens . . . Se a Deus prouver . . .
Prouve a el-rei . . .
This verb, wanting a complement (Infinitive or
objective clause with que and the subjunctive) is not
to be exchanged for agradar or gostar. For instance:
o espectdculo agradou the spectacle pleased; gostei do
quadro I was pleased with the picture. Prouve ao des-
tine conduzi-lo cd for que o conduzisse cd) Destiny was
pleased to lead him here.
235. Grassar to rage, prevail, only employed
in the 3 rd persons: grassa a febre amarella; grassaram
as bexigas (small-pox).
236. Jazersee 210.
237. Pesar to afflict, to grieve, is also used only
in the 3 rd persons and completed by the dative com-
plement : Pesa-me I grieve, I am sorry. Pesou a familia
enlutada nao ter assistido aos ultimos momentos do falle-
cido. The survivors were sorry for not having assisted
at the last moments of the deceased.
238. Eehaver to get back is used only in the
forms which have a v: rehavemos, rehavia, rehouve,
rehavendo, etc.
PalaTras.
Sombrio gloomy, dark
carregado loaded
a tempestade the tempest
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 213
subtil [sub 'til] subtil
o guarda-liwos book-keeper
o remoinho the whirl(wind)
[qwardv-
[rrdmu'iyu]
/ , . /-T
livrufj
a ramagem the branches
a cobranfa the receiving
frm'masvi]
[ku'brusv]
a bdtega sudden shower
o pagamento the payment
fbatdQu]
[pTsge 'mentuj
(de dgua)
o registo the register,
assustador frightful
[m'giftuf list
[vsuftu 'dor]
as entradas de entrance-money
emmudecer to grow durab
fundos
[imu&d 'serj
as saidas de the sale
esconder to hide
fundos
[ifkon'der]
de uma (hora) from one
rouco ['rrdku] hoarse, hollow
em diante o'clock
deleitar to delight
immediatamente immediately
[ddlm'tar]
o correio geral the central
incendiar to set on fire
[ku'rrviugd- post-office
[isendi'ar]
raij
o rebombo the re-echoing,
regist(r)ar to register
[m'bdmbuj cracking
regist(r)ado registered
enfraquecer to slacken
mediante by means of;
[ifrvkd'ser]
on payment
crepitar , to crepitate
i [krdpi'tar]
of
a taxa [tafu] the tax
to raio frraiuj the flash of
o registo the registration;
lightning, the
fm'xifto] register-office
thunder-clap a franquia the postage
p continue official of a
[frv'TewJ
[ 'kdn 'timvu] government
a carta-postal the letter-card
office
o sello [seloj the seal,
3 ordenado the salary
postage-stamp
[ordd'nadu]
tanto . . . como as well ... as
\nensdl monthly
a cinta ['sintu] the wrapper
[me 'sal]
o impresso the printing
lesembaragado agile
[im'prssu]
[djzimbvr'G-
a remessa de the remittance
'sa&u]
amostras of samples
'', abonasao security
o arranjo the arrange-
[wfhtnv'svuj
ment
\>rocurar to procure
o endere$o the address,
^ fpruTcu'rarJ
[mdd 'resuj direction
referenda reference
o destinatdrio the receiver
[rrdfd'resiv]
fdtftyiv-
' nogao the notion
'tariu]
[nu'seu]
o consumo the consump-
i collocagao collocation,
[ko'sumu] tion
[Icululca'svuJ place
caixa ["kaifu] cashier; cash-
o bilhete the picture
illustrado post-card
book
a receita the receipt,
cargo ["kargu] charge, em-
fm' 'suite] income
ployment
a respeito de with respect to
214
Lesson 31.
pretender to pretend
o competidor competitor
[kdmpsti'forj
identico identical
preencher to accomplish
[prilnfer]
pleno [plenu] full
o superior the superior
fsupr} 'or]
deixar-se ficar to remain
veneer [ve'ser] to earn
aproveitar to profit
o vencimento the earnings,
salary
a instrucQao the instruction
[iffou'svu]
polytechnico polytechnical
[poli'tsTcniku]
mediocre mediocre
[md 'ffiukrd]
a mecdnica mechanica
o acordo the agreement.
87. Exercicio.
Man tempo,
dia amanhece sombrio. Parece que o tempo se poe de
chuva. Ja chovisca, e nao admirava que nevasse, pois esta
muito frio. Seria lastima que caisse neve ou que granizasse,
por que faria muito estrago nas arvores fructiferas que estao
em flor e que perdem muito quando gela ou venta. Sopra um
vento gelido. Nuvens carregadas ^escurecem os ares. E evi-
dente que teremos tempestade. E precise que fechSmos as
janellas, para que a chuva nao possa entrar. Veja, como o
po subtil sobe em remoinhos e como o vento sacode a ramagem.
Ja caem grandes bategas de agua. Graniza ate. Os passaros,
precavidos pela escuridao assustadora, emmudeceram e escon-
deram-se fremindo debaixo das folhas que fremem como elles.
Elles que a esta hora costumam voar e cantar alegremente,
nao Ihes apraz deleitar-nos com o seu canto. Relampeja. Aos
raios segue-se-lhes o rouco travao. Praza a Deus que nao nos
incendeiem a casa. Agora os terriveis rebombos enfraquecem.
Extinguem-se os raios crepitantes e ja nao troveja. astro
de dia reapparece e sorri de novo. Faz sol e o tempo aclara.
Vejamos se ha novidade. Ha muito que nao houve tempo tao
mau, e haverd que fazer. E possivel que a graniza tenha cau-
sado algum estrago. Deus queira que nao seja assim!
88. Leitura.
Annuncios.
1. Empregado precisa-se para continue ; ordenado reis
10000 mensaes e casa. Prefere-se homem novo e desembara-
9ado que de abona9oes. Carta escripta pelo proprio a agencia,
dando todas as informa9oes e onde se pode procurar.
2. Empregado offerece-se com boa calligraphia e perfeito
conhecimento de correspond^ncia em portugues e allemao. Da
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 215
ferencias de l a ordem. Quern pretender dirija-se ao caixeiro
da casa X.
3. Commerciante estrangeiro, novo, offerece-se para casa
commercial de exportacao. Escreve e fala as linguas allema,
francesa e inglesa e tern boas rupees das linguas portugnesa
e italiana. Prefere colloca9ao como caixa ou guarda-livros,
tendo na sua posi^ao actual a seu cargo cobran9as e pagamen-
tos, assim como o registo das entradas e saidas de fundos. Para
tratar, das 6 em diante, Rua NN.
89. Thema.
Correio.
Francis, you must at once take this letter to the post.
Read here: "Registered!" You will have it registered on pay-
ment of twopence. Here are 5 shillings : pay the registration
and the postage and bring me ten stamps at (a) a penny
and as many at a halfpenny and twopence. For the rest bring
letter-cards. It is most convenient to employ these latter for
short communications, and it is well to be provided with
them.
Actually I am altogether out of postage-stamps. And
yet I need them every day for letters for the inland post as
well as for foreign countries (o estrangeiro), for wrappers for
f book-post, for remittances of samples, etc. Also the post-card
j is most convenient, especially since this new arrangement
has been made that the consigner may use half of the
front side for written communications. But it is indispensabJe
I that you leave free the room destined to the address of the
[ receiver. With this innovation the consumption of the picture
\ post-card will be further increased, as well as the receipts of
(the Post Office.
Conversa^ao.
Solicitagao de emprego.
A. Venho a respeito d'um emprgo vago que me consta
haver n'esta casa commercial e de que se deu parte
por annuncios.
B. E o Senhor quern pretende ser competidor de F.?
A. Sou, sim, senhor. Vim apresentar-me e pedir o
interesse de V a Ex a .
B. Como se chama o senhor?
A. Ghamo-me Ricardo de Sousa Almeida, criado de
V a Ex a (your humble servant). 1
1 This or something identical (sen criado, um seu criado) is
generally added to a self-introduction.
216 Lesson 32.
B. Faca favor de se assentar, sr. Almeida! E natural
que ja tenha tido colloca^ao identica ou parecida, nao
e verdade?
A. Ja, sim, senhor; vae em oito annos que estou em-
pregado na casa d'exportapao de Fulano 1 onde tenho
tido a meu cargo as cobran^as e os pagamentos, e
posso dizer que tenho preenchido o meu logar com
plena satisfaccao dos meus superiores.
B. E porque nao se deixa la ficar? Que e que o
determina a mudar?
A. Tenho pouco ordenado. E indispensavel que venca
mais.
B. E quaes sao os titulos que Ihe dao direito a urn
vencimento mais elevado?
A. Falo e escrevo correctamente tres linguas, conheci-
mentos esses que nao me aproveitam na minha
posi^ao actual, tao pouco como uma instruceao poly-
technica e um talento, mais que mediocre, para a
mecanica.
B. Muito bem! Nao havera duvida que cheguemos a
um accordo.
Thirty-second Lesson. Li<?ao trigesima
segunda.
Verbs with a Double Participle.
239. There are a certain number of verbs which,
besides their regular participle, form an irregular one.
The former is used for the active voice, so it has the
function of a verb; while the latter is employed in the
passive voice and as an adjective. In some of these
verbs one and the other participle are employed in-
differently for the active and passive voices.
N.B. We place before the forms an a (= activo)
or a p (= passive), adding to the 2 nd form wherever
this includes an adjective meaning different from that
of the participle the English adjective. Those forms
marked * occur only as adjectives; those marked t are
unusual or incorrect, consequently to be avoided.
1 Fulano (and in 2nd place Sicrano) is employed for some
name not expressed (our "What's his name?").
Verbs with a Double Participle.
The most important of these verbs are:
(1) Of the First Conjugation.
217
(c)eitar to accept (a-,p-) ac(c)eitado
Assentar to place; to (a., p.) assentado
register
Descalcar to pull off
(shoes, etc.)
Despertar to awake
(p.) ac(c)eito
(p.) assente sitt-
ing; firm,
solid
(p.) descalcado (a.?p.) descalgo
barefooted
(p.) desperto
sprightly;
(p.) despertado
Dispersar to dis- (a. y p.) dispersado
perse, scatter
Entregar to deliver, (U-,P') entregado
hand
Enxugar to dry (a., p.) enxugado
Escusar to excuse, (a.,p.) escusado
to justify; to
exempt (see escon-
der)
Expressar to express (a., p.) expressado
(see also exprimir)
Expulsar to expel (see
also expellir)
Fartar to satiate
Findar to finish
(a.) expulsado
(a.) fartado
a.jp.) findado
Fixar to fix (a,p.) fixado
Ganhar to earn, gain (a., p.) ganhado
Gastar to expense, (a.) gastado
use, consume
\Ignorar to ignore (a>,P>) ignorado
_ lietar to disquiet, (a., p.) inquietado
trouble
ir to exempt, to (a.) isentado
free
tar to join
(a., p.) juntado
intelligent
(p.) disperse
(p.) entregue
(p.) enxuto dry
(p.) escuso secret ;
unnecessa-
ry
(p.) expresso
express ;
explicit
(p.) expidso
(p.) farto
abundant ;
satisfied ;
weary
(p.) ftndo last,
past
(p.) fixo
(a.,p.) ganho
(a., p.) gasto
(p.) ignoto
unknown,
obscure
(*) inquieto
uneasy
(p.) isento exempt
or free (by
privilege)
(a.,p.) junto
together
218
Lesson 32.
Limpar to clean
Manifestar to mani-
fest
Matar to kill
(see also marrer)
Misturar to mix
Occultar to hide
Pagar to pay
Quietar 1 to quiet,
calm
Salvor to save
Sepultar to bury
Soltar to untie, re-
lease
Sujeitar to subject,
subdue
Suspeitar to suspect
Vagar to be vacant or
void ; to stroll about
(a.) limpado
(a., p.) manifestado
(a.) matado
(a., p.) misturado
(a.) occultado
(a.) pagado
(a.) quietado
(a., p.) salvado
(a., p.) sepultado
(a.) soltado
(a., p.) sujeitado
(a.. f p.) suspeitado
(a.) vagado
(a., p.) limpo clean
(*) manifesto
manifest,
apparent
(a. } p.) morto dead
(*) misto or
mixto
(p.) occidto
(a.,p.) pago
(*) quieto quiet,
calm
(a., p.) salvo safe,
(p.) unhurt
(p.) solto loose;
free
(p.) sujeito
(p.) suspeito
suspicious
(*) vago vacant,
void; vague.
(2) Of the Second Conjugation.
Absolver to absolve (a.) p.) absolvido (p.) absolto
(a. } p.) absorvido
(a., p.) accendido
(a.) corr<
(a.) elegido
Absorver to absorb
Accender to light
Corromper to corrupt
Eleger to elect
Esconder to hide
(see also escusar)
Escrever to write
Estender to extend
(a.)
(p.) absorto
(p.) acceso
(p.) corrupto
(a., p.) eleito elect,
chosen
(p.) esc'uso
(a.) escrevidof (a., p.) escripto
(a.?p.) estendido
(*) extenso ex-
tensive
(p.) incurso
(p.) involto
(a., p.) morto dead
(p.) preso fast,
imprisoned
(p.) pretenso
(p.) resoluto
resolute
1 More usually: aquietar, which has the only participle
aquietado. In quietar as well as in vagar only the irregular par-
ticiple is used and in its adjective meaning.
Incorrer to incur
Involver to involve
Morrer to die
(see also matar)
Prender to seize, to
catch, to arrest
Pretender to pretend (a., p.) pretendido
Resolver to resolve (a-,p-) resolvido
(a.) incorrido
(a.) involvido
(a.) morrido
(a.) prendido
Verbs with a Double Participle.
219
Rotuper to break, tear (a.) rompido (p.) roto ragged
Surpre(h)ender to sur- (a., p.) surpre(li)en- surpreso
prise dido
ispender to suspend (a.) suspendido (p.) suspense
suspense
-cer to twist (a-,P>) torcido (p.) torto crooked,
tortuous.
(3) Of the Third Coiijugation.
tnr to open
Afftigir to afflict,
grieve
Gobrir to cover
Conduir to conclude
Contrdhir to contract
Distinguir to dis-
tinguish
Erigir to erect
Espargir to spread
Expellir to expel
(see also expulsar)
Exprimir to express
(see also expressar}
(a.) abridof
(a.) affligido
(a.) cobridof
(a., p.) concluido
(a., p.) contraliido
(a.) distinguido
(a., p.) erigido
(a.) espargido
(a.) expellido
(a.) exprimido
Extinguir to
tinguish
Extrahir to extract
Frigir to fry
Imprimir to print
Induir to include
Inserir to insert
Opprimir to oppress,
afflict
Instrtiir to instruct
Possuir to possess
Reprimir to repress
Surgir to anchor
Tingir to dye
ex- (O",P.) extinguido
(a., p.) extrahido
(a.) frigido
(a., p.) imprimido,
(a., p.) induido
(a.) inserido
(a., p.) opprimido
(a., p.) instruido
(a., p.) possuido
(a. , p.) reprimido
(a.) surgido
(a.) tingido
Palayras.
fa.,p.) aberto open
(p.) afflicto sorry
(a., p.) coberto
(p.) conduso
(p.) contracto
(p.) distincto
distinct
(p.) erect o erect
(p.) esparso
(p.) expulso
(p.) expresso
express,
explicit
(p.) extincto
extinct
(p.) extracto
(a., p.) frito
(a., p.) impresso
(p.) induso
(a., p.) inserto
(p.) oppresso
(p.) instructof
(*) possesso
(p.) represso
(p.) surto
(p.) tinto.
Aviuvafa'uvv] the widow
os pesames
a assento
o prazo
the condolence
the seat
the term, ap-
pointed day
the competition
o chcfe [fefdj
o jurado
par conseguinte
the chief; head;
principal
the juryman
consequently
o concurso
a roupa ['rropvj the linen,
clothes
o recem-chegado the newcomer
the appearance
the ingredient
a apparencia
o ingrediente
'entdj
220
Lesson 32.
a droga ['drogvj
' the drug
a COCQOLO
the coction
[hole' suu]
o deputado
the deputy
o liberal
the liberal
[lifo'ral]
a offerta
the offer
apresentar
to present
cor de laranja
orange-
coloured
1 a circular
por-se
a dnimo
['vnimuj
j a oppressao
1 emquanto
continuar
\ o. por do sol
\
the circular
to set
the mind
the oppression
while
to continue
the setting (of
the) sun.
90. Exercicio.
A viuva do sr. N. tern ac(c)eitado todas as pessoas que
foram dar-lhe os p^zames pelo fallecimento do marido; foram
todas ac(c)eitas. Eu tinha-me assentado num assento baixo e la
fiquei assentada. Este muro esta bem assente. Na semana finda
tem-se findado (better: findou-se) o prazo fixo para o concurso
do emprego vago. Assim que tiver entregado a carta, ella estara
entregue. sol tern enxugado bem a roupa; agora ella ja esta
enxuta. chefe tinha expressado aos empregados a sua vontade
expressa. Tambem tinha fixado o ordenado de todos e deter-
minado os dias fixes em que seria pago. reu que foi suspeito e
preso, como involto no crime, ficou absolvido ; absolveram-no os
jurados; ja esta solto e salvo. A mae d'elle, a quern a desgraca do
filho tinha affligido muito, ja nao esta afflicta, mas quieta.
governo tinha suspend ido as garantias que por conseguinte
estavam suspensas. E de admirar que nao tivessem distin-
guido os recem-chegados, pois teem apparencia muito distincta.
rapaz, com medo manifesto, tinha-se escondido n'um logar
muito escuso. Para fazer esta droga tinhamos misturado varies
ingredientes bem limpos que, depois de bem mistos, foram
sujeitos a uma coccao cuidadosa. Viemos num comboio misto.
Os olhos ja muito abertos, tinham-se-lhe abrida mais ainda.
91. Tliema.
Who has been elected deputy? A Liberal has been
chosen. Had you already resolved to insert an advertisement
on account of the vacant place? Yes, it has been already
inserted, and I am resolved to accept the place if it is offered
to me, for it is exempt from taxes. Enclosed I present you an
open letter of Mr. N. N., which I opened at his express desire.
In a printed circular he communicates that, his partner
having died last month, the old firm is extinct, bat that he
has resolved to continue the old business under a new name.
See how beautifully the sun has dyed the clouds! Some
are rose, others are yellow, those others orange- coloured
or fire-coloured. The whole sky on (por) which they are dis-
The Adverbs. 221
persed is covered by them. Also the masts of the ships
anchored in the harbour are gilded by the setting sun. Calm
your minds! Those who were oppressed are safe and free
from oppression, while the oppressors have been expelled.
Thirty-third Lesson. Li$ao trigesima
terceira.
The Adverbs. Adverbios [s&'v&rbiuf] .
240. The adverbs express the circumstances in
which an action, a quality, or a state has occurred, and
so determine either a verb, an adjective, or another
adverb. We distinguish: 1. original adverbs; 2. derived
adverbs; 3. those which in their form are equal to the
adjective; 4. adverbial expressions.
241. The original adverbs are divided into:
1. Interrogative and Relative
(interrogativos e relatives).
These generally are the same when relating to place
j or time: onde (d'onde, aonde), quando. Onde estd? Aonde
\ vae? D'onde vem? No jardim, onde estive, aonde fui,
d'onde vim . . . Quando veio? No dia quando veio . . .
2. Adverbs of Place (de logar).
These answer to the questions "where, whither,
; whence?" onde? d'onde? aonde? por onde?:
ij cd here abaixo, debaixo down, below
y all, Idj acold there aguetn on this side
dSj detrds behind alem on the other side
adiante, deante before,, in front ; algures anywhere
to the front nenhures nowhere
dentro within ; inside perto \
, , ., > near
fora outside cerca /
\ up, above U "f far
arnoa | embora away.
3. Adverbs of Time (de tempo).
These answer to the question "when?" quando?
Hoje to-day antehontem the day before
iontetn yesterday yesterday
222 Lesson 33.
amanlia to-morrow tarde late
sempre always, ever entao then
nunca, jamais never agdra, ora now
depots afterwards logo presently, directly
outr'dra formerly jd already, now, immediately
primeiro before, first ainda still
antes sooner, before amiudo, amiude often.
cedo soon
4. Adverbs of Manner (de maneira).
These answer to the question u how?" como?
Bern well antes rather
mal badly sequer at least
melhor better assim so, thus
peor worse assim assim so so.
aparte separately
5. Adverbs of Quantity (de quantidade).
These'answer to the question "how much?" quanta?
quao?
Tao, tanto so, so (or as) much quasi almost, nearly
muito much, very urn bocado de a little, some-
(o) metis more, most what
pouco little apenas hardly, scarcely
(o) menos less, least quanto mais . . . tanto mais
iSj demasiado too (much) the more . . . the more
bastante \ , s6, somente only
assaz I nada nothing.
6. Adverbs of Affirmation (affirmatives) , of Negation
(negatives), and of Doubt (de duvida).
Sim yes nada not at all
certamente certainly, to be sure jd nao \
ate even nao . . . jd }
ainda moreover nunca never, ever
alias else, moreover acaso perhaps
realmente really, indeed gui$a \ pernaps
nao no, not, neither talvez | *
nem not even; nor; neither
242. Derived Adverbs.
These adverbs are formed by adding the syllable
-mente to the feminine form of the attributive adjective
(in the positive degree as well as in that of the absolute
superlative) or to that of the past participle of the pas-
The Adverbs. 223
sive voice, employed as an adjective: justamcnte justly,
exactly, at that very moment; devidamente duly; assi-
(jnaladamente remarkably; riquissimamente most richly,
etc. In some adjectives ending in -es (formerly having
been uniform), the adverb is composed with the mascu-
line form: portuguesmente in a Portuguese manner.
N.B. It is understood that uniform adjectives add the
ending -mente to their form common to both genders: feliz-
mente happily.
243. Of two or more adverbs following one
another, only the last adds the ending -mente, while
the preceding take only the feminine form : darei franca,
sincera e lealmente o meu voto. I shall give my vote
frankly, sincerely, and truly.
244. The derived adverb is as subject to com-
parison as the adjective, being governed by the same
rules : Fiquei ainda mais agradavelmente surpre(h)endido.
I was still more agreably surprised.
245. As already stated, the Portuguese prefer,
wherever possible, the simple form to the complicated.
They like to employ the adjective instead of the derived
adverb or the adverbial locution. The adjective so
employed is put with or without a preposition imme-
diately behind the verb and is called:
Adjective apposto ou circumstancial.
Examples.
tempo passa rdpido (instead of com rapidez or ra-
povo escuta dvido (instead of com avidez or avidamente).
pulso batia desordenado (instead of em desordem or
desordenadamente) .
Saltou de contente (instead of de contentamento).
Quando se respira fundo, o ar enche completamente os
pidmoes.
When you breathe deeply, the air completely fills the
lungs.
In some locutions the use of the adjective instead
the adverb is obligatory; e.g. :
Falar alto, baixo to speak loud, low
voar alto (baixo) to % high, deep
224 Lesson 33.
andar direito to go upright or straight on ; to act
honestly
ir direito a to go straight on
ir seguro to go or be safe
ir or andar ligeiro to go quickly
vender caro to sell dear
comprar barato to buy cheap
levar caro to charge (too) much
custar caro to be expensive.
246. Remarks to 241.
1. The comparative of bem is melhor or mais bem;
the one of mat is peor or mais mal. The latter form
is used before a participle: mais bem feito; menos mal
pensado.
2. After antes (== rather) "than" can be ren-
dered by que or do que: Antes quero isto (do) que
aqtittlo.
3. Certain adverbs correspond, with respect to their
origin or meaning, to certain pronouns e.g.:
aquij cd corresponding to the demonstrative este
ahi esse
alli,Uj acold aquelle.
Such adverbs are therefore denominated adverbios
pronominaes and divided into:
(a) demonstratives : aqui, ahi, ali, acold, entao, tao,
tanto ;
(b) relativos: onde, d'onde;
(c) interrogativos: onde? quando? como? quao?
quanto?
(d) indefinidos: algures, nenhures.
4. Tao and qudo correspond to tanto and quanto
(see Pronouns), with the difference that the former
determine adjectives and other adverbs, while the latter
only modify verbs.
N.B. Instead of quao you may in most cases
put que.
Falou tao alto que . . . Falou tanto que . . . Era tao rico
que . . .
Era tao amante da verdade que nem zombando (not even
in joke) mentia.
The Adverbs.
225
Ndo faz ideia qitao (or que) bella e a vista e qudo (or que)
sagazmente aproveitada! (and how cleverly taken ad-
vantage of).
Elle bem sabia quanta eu o estimava.
>eside the true adverbs, there are a great many
adverbial locutions (locucoes adverbiaes), formed out of
several words one of which generally is a preposition e.g. :
A custo hardly, with diffi-
culty
de continue* continually
por ventura happily, by chance
d mao (de) at hand
por dentro inwardly
por fora inwardly
do mesmo modo in the same
way
de outro modo \ otherwise
de outra forma }
de certo, por certo certainly
de mddo algum by no means
ao certo exactly
d uma altogether
n'um pronto in an instant
por alto superficially
de alto a baixo from top to
toe
longe d'isso by far
de contente \
de alegria }
.,,
wlth
pessego
the peach
de fame with hunger
de cor by heart
de balde \ ,
> vainly
em vao }
de vagar slowly
por acaso by chance
de proposito intentionally, on
purpose
a proposito de with regard to
a saber namely
as aoessas oppositely
de bom grado willingly
de mao grado unwillingly
mao grado meu against my
wish
d toa at random
por acaso by chance
alem d'isso moreover
ao de leve slightly
d pressa, de fugida hastily,
hurridly
em media on an average.
Palavras.
menear a cabe$a to shake one's
head
o lavrador
the country-
engerihoso
ingenious
[I'swe'd'or]
man [igi 'yozuj
extasiar-se
to be enchanted o cdlculo
the calculation
r TI * ~i
[ytv z^arsdj
with
['kattulu]
partir-se
to part with
enleiado
bashful
guardar
to guard
[llui 'ad'u]
[giwr'dar]
enternecido
touched
o caroc.0
the stone
fttdrnd'si&uj
[ku 'rosu]
etl>ereo [i'tenuj
ethereal
tocar (dig. c.) a
to fall to one's
subsistir
to subsist
alguem
share
[subsdftir]
acudir
to interrupt
o assento
the seat
guloso [gu'lozu]
greedy [TB 'sentuj
apanhar
to snatch up | merecer
to merit, be
[vpv'yar]
fm^rd 'serj
worth
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
15
226
Lesson 33.
o mano ['menu] brother
o remedio the remedy
[rrd'ms&iu]
a memoria the memory
a mdgua
f'magivvj
encurtar
fikur'tar]
a chaga ['fagu]
a desfeita
[dif'fvitv]
o osculo
['ofkuluj
traidor
[trui dor]
the grief, pang
to shorten
the wound
the offence
the kiss
treacherous
o atlas ['atlefj
the atlas
provar
to taste ; to try
Ipru 'varj
on
talhar [tie fiar]
to cut
escuro
dark
desbotar
to discolour,
[digbu'tar]
fade
embasbacar
to be quite
[ibugbu 'karj
taken aback
o solsticio
the solstice
[sotf'ti^u]
revezar-se \
to relieve one
[rrdV9 r zars3]\
another, to
olternar-se 1
do ... by
[aUdr'narsd]]
turns.
87. Exercicio. 1
Os Pessegos.
Um lavrador que tinha quatro filhos trouxe-lhes urn dia
cinco pessegos magnificos. Os pequenos, que nunca tinham visto
semelhantes fructos, extasiaram-se bastante deante das suas cores
e da fina pennugem que os cobria. A' noite o pae perguntou-
Ihes: -- Entdo comestes os pessegos?
- Eu comi, sim, senhor disse o mais velho. Que
bom que era! Guardei cd o car690. e hei-de planta-lo logo,
para depois nascer uma arvore.
- Fizeste bem! respondeu o pae satisfeito.
- Eu -- disse o mais novo, saltando de contente -
men pessego comi-o logo; e a mae ainda me deu metade do
que Ihe tocou a ella. Era doce como mel!
Ah!
acudiu o
pae,
censurando-o brandamente -
foste urn bocadinho guloso, mas na tua edada ndo admira.
Espero sinceramente que, quando fores homem, te has-de corrigir.
- Pois eu cd disse o terceiro apanhei prontamente
o caro^o que o meu irmao deitou fora, quebrei-o a, custo e
comi o que estava dentro, que era como uma noz. Vendi o
meu pessego, e com o dinheiro hei de comprar coisas mais tarde
quando for a cidade. pae meneou a cabe9a, descontente:
Pensaste engenhosamente, mas eu preferia menos cal-
culo e que tivesses obrado de outro modo. Dize-me cd tu,
Eduardo, acaso provaste o teu pessego?
Eu, meu pae, -- respondeu enleiado o pequeno, -
levei-o a casa do visinho onde o Jorge, coitado, esta com a
febre. Deixei-lh'o em cima da cama e vim-me embora imme-
diatamente.
1 State to which class of adverbs belong those printed in
italics in the Exercicio 87.
The Adverbs. 227
- Or a Item -- perguntou o pae -- qual de vos e que
empregou melhor o pessego?
- Foi o mano Eduardo! disseram os tres pequenos d
uma e num pronto. Esse, entretanto, nao dizia palavra, e a
mae abracou-o enternecida. (After Guerra Junqueiro.)
88. Leitura.
Sontto.
Alma minha gentil, que te partiste
Tao cedo d'esta vida descontente,
Repousa la no ceo eternamente,
E viva eu ca na terra sempre triste.
Se la no assento ethereo, onde subsiste,
Memoria d'esta vida se consente,
Nao te esquec.as d'aquelle amor ardente,
Que ja nos olhos meus tao puro viste.
E se vires que pode merecer-te
Alguma coisa a dor que me ficou
Da magua, sem remedio, de perder-te,
Roga a. Deus que teus annos encurtou,
Que tao cedo de ca me leve a ver-te,
Quao cedo de meus olhos te levou. (Canutes.)
Antes a pobreza honrada
Do que a riqueza roubada.
Antes a chaga feita Que a desfeita
For amor, De uni osculo traidor.
(Joao de Deus.)
89. Thcma.
Where can my atlas be? Have you perhaps seen it?
;No, I have not; if you had duly laid it on its place, you
would find it there. But look, there it is! Not there where you
;look for it, but there, near the window. - When did the
lilor bring my coat? Yesterday afternoon about four o'clock,
[e went hurriedly away, saying that he would come here to-day
to-morrow, to try it on you. The coat seems to be some-
rhat wide. Not only somewhat but very wide, nearly too
ride; but it is most carefully sewn and well cut. How do
like the colour? So so; perhaps it might have been a
little darker. I do not like dark colours much ; and, moreover,
this colour does not fade so much as another darker. Was
ie cloth very expensive ? Good cloth is never bought cheap.
The better it is, the dearer it is sold. And also the tailor
isks rather a high price. By (tr. : com) his bills I have been
'ometimes quite taken aback.
15*
228 Lesson 34.
Conversa^ao.
Onde nasce o sol e onde se poe?
A que horas se levanta o sol nos dias de solsticio?
Quando temos o dia mais cumprido e a noite mais
curta?
Donde vem que ha varias estates ?
Porque e que se revezam o dia e a noite?
Como se move uma locomotiva? um navio de vela? um
autoraovel etc.?
Onde desemboca o rio Tejo ? o rio Douro ? o rio Mon-
dego? o Guadiana?
Acaso me sabe dizer onde e a esta9ao do caminho de
ferro?
Quanto tempo leva ate la?
Thirty-fourth Lesson, Licjao trigesima
quarta.
The Conjunctions. As Conjunc$oes [Itd^u styf] .
247. The conjunction joins sentences or por-
tions of sentences, and is invariable e.g.: Desejo, mas
temo I desire, but fear. Here mas is a conjunction
which joins the two predicates desejo and temo, opposing
one to the other. If we say : desejo e o temor inquie-
tani-mc, the conjunction e joins desejo and temor, subjects
of the same predicate.
248. A conjunction not only joins sentences
or parts of them, but it brings them into a certain
relation, making the one dependent on the other ac-
cording to their tenor. Therefore we distinguish:
1. According to their signification two great classes
of conjunctions : the co-ordinates (coordinativas) and the
subordinates (subordinativas).
2. According to their form we distinguish simple
(simples) and compound conjunctions (locugoes conjunc-
tivas).
249. The co-ordinate conjunctions only join sen-
tences, etc. There are:
(a) copulative (copidativas c continuativas) ;
(b) explicative (explicativas) ;
The Conjunctions. 229
disjunctive (disjuncMvas) ;
(d) adversative (adversativas) ;
(e) conclusive (condusivas) ;
(f) comparative (comparativas);
(g) correlative (correlativas).
250. The subordinate conjunctions join sen-
tences, etc., making them dependent on one another.
There are:
(a) conditional (condicionaes) ;
(b) causative (causaes);
(c) final (finaes);
(d) concessive (concessivas) ;
(e) temporal (rirciimstanciaes do tempo);
(f) integral and dubitative (integr antes e dubita-
tivas).
251. Summary of the Conjunctions.
Remark. Those marked with * require the verb of the clause
in the subjunctive mood; those marked with (*) may be followed
; by the subjunctive or indicative, according to the certainty or un-
certainty expressed by the sentence. Those compounded with de
are followed by the infinitive.
A. Coordenativas.
(a) Copulativas.
Conjunccoes simplex. Locngoes equivalentes.
[E and bem assim yet
ntto so(mente) . . . mas tambem
not only . . . but also
nem sequer not even
tampouco no more, as little
nao . . . mas sim not . . . but
on the contrary
tanto . . . como as well as; both
. . . and
assim como as also
alem de besides
jd (que) . . . jd (que) since;
as soon as; now . . . now.
em or na verdade indeed
com effeito indeed; really
alem d'isso besides, moreover
alem de que or do que except or
save that
B, <le mais a mais moreover.
also
nor
well, why
now, yet; why
trosim also, likewise, moreover.
230 Lesson 34.
(b) Explicalivas.
Como as. assim como }
hem como } as wel1 a3
*como se as if
(*}de (tal) sorte que \ in a way
(*)de maneira que \ that;
(*}de modo (or geito) so as
<?ue to
*c0wo guer <jwe however
(c) Disjunctivas.
OM or. (*}ou . . . ote or ... or
nem . . . nem neither . . . nor
ora . . . ora now . . . now
*quer . . . quer whether ... or.
(d) Adversativas.
Mas but apesar de in spite of
porem yet comtudo yet, however
todavia however. nao obstante notwithstanding
sem embargo de }
ainda assim \ nevertheless
(*]antes rather
no entanto however
senao otherwise ; but
quanta a with regard to.
(e) Conclusivas.
Logo \ so, therefore, con- por conseguinte }
pois \ sequently. por consequencia } c
por isso, por tanto accordingly
por onde, peh que wherefore
(*}assim que } ,,,
(*}de maneira que ) s
(*}com que wherewith.
(f) Comparativas.
Mais (do) que more than '''antes que } ^
mcnos (do} que less than *primeiro (que) \
como as
(gr) Correlativas.
axsim . . . como such as assim como . . . assim (tambem)
tao . . . que so that such as ... so also
quanto . . . tanto the (more) . . .
the (more)
qual . . . tal like . . . like
co mo se as if
(*)tal . . . que so that, etc.
The Conjunctions.
231
whether.
B. Subordinativas.
(a) Condicionaes.
*cor tanto que
*caso or caso que if, in case
*dado caso que of
(*)quando
*sem que without, except
*a nao ser que
a menos de if not, unless,
*a menos que saving
salvo se
(*)uma vez que if ever.
(b) and (c) Causaes e flnaes.
Porque, que because Jd que
(*)como as pois que
pois because, as. por quanta que
visto como
(*}visto que
sendo que
as, considering
*Embora though
Como }
quando j
when
para que nao lest
por isso que by reason of, on
account of
pelo muito que for (the sake of).
(d) Concessivas.
(*)ainda que even if, though,
although
*comquanto que j
*se bem que \ though
*pois (que)
(*)posto que ] supposed
*supposto que \ or provided
*dado or caso que J that
por mais (or muito) que however
much
como quer que (seja) however
(it be).
(e) Circumstanciaes de tempo.
(*)tanto que inasmuch as, so far
(*)logo que \
(*)assim que \
(*}antes que \ , f
(*)primeiro que J C
desde que since
(*~)depois que after
ao passo que
(*)emquanto (que)
as soon as
while
232 Lesson 34.
(*}ate que until
em (with the Gerund.) in, while
(*}sempre que whenever
(*)todas as vezes que any time
when
(f) Integrantes e duMtativas.
(*)Que that, if *se porventuar \ - f ,
ifw w>iPtJir *** C/. lf Perhaps.
if, whether
*se if
*quando when
252. Remarks:
(a) A great many of the conjunctions are simply
adverbs, nouns, or adjectives with prepositions:
(b) By the preposition a and the infinitive you
may supply conditional conjunctions.
A ndo haver que fazer i.e., se ndo houver or caso ndo
haja que fazer.
(c) Se, introducing a condition or supposition, is
generally followed by the subjunctive (future); employed
in an indirect question, by the indicative; if in any
other indirect speech, it may be followed by the sub-
junctive or the indicative, according to the certainty or
uncertainty it expresses e.g. :
Se fizer bom tempo if it be good weather.
Perguntei se fazla bom tempo.
I asked if the weather was good.
Vet ver (QIC diz-me), se faz bom tempo.
See (or tell me) if the weather is good.
Ndo sei se faz (or faga) bom tempo.
I don't know whether the weather is (or be) good.
(d) The conjunction que most commonly introduces
a dependent substantive clause (which may be also
elliptical), as:
Creio que tern razao I believe you are right.
Creio que ndo I think not.
Creio que sim I think so.
In English the conjunction "that" is frequently
understood, whereas que is not only always expressed
The Conjunctions.
233
'ortuguese, but repeated before each clause of the
sentence, as:
t.'rdo que teni razdo e que sera bem succedido.
RI think you are right and (that you) will succeed.
(e) When a conjunction governs several verbs, it
laced before the first verb only, and que may be
used instead before the other verbs. This is especially
the case with the conjunctions compounded with que. Ex. :
Se for (or caso seja) applicado e (que) tenha intelligencia.
it he is (or be) diligent
and has intelligence.
Palavras.
Esfalfado exhausted
i o comedo the beginning
Mfat'faffu]
[Jcu 'mesu]
nudavel changeable
\ a doQura the softness
[mu'ffavd]
[du'surv]
trescindir to prescind,
! meigo ['mviciu] soft, tender
[pnfsm'dir] to extract
presenter to feel, anti-
' carvao de the coal
[prdsen'tirj cipate
i pedra
o ninho ['niyu] the nest
i conibustivel full
> chocar [fu"kar] to breed
[kombuf tivetj
educar [i&u 'Jcar] to bring up
gaz [gaf] the gas
o macho the male
otctvel potable,
[pu'tavil] drinkable
['mafuj
afemeat'femtu] the female
,-esprezar to despise
extremoso
[dtfprz'zar]
[iftrd'mozu] loving, fond,
tperior superior
amoroso tender
nova [now] the news
[umu'rozu]
" (name) the packet boat
animar to animate
paquete
[vni 'mar]
acaso the accident,
o sentido the sentiment
chance
[sen 'ti&u]
\nformar-se to comply with
rasteiro low
com alg. c.
[rrvf'tviruj
sta-me I find difficult
o piso [pizu] the ground
or hard
estar irado to be angry
madador the swimmer
contre alg. with someone
[wedu '(for]
sorihar [su'yar] to dream
tuientiroso the liar
mogoar to hurt
.[menti'rozu]
[mvg.u'ar]
t a pique [pik] to sink
o candrio the canary-
(andorinha the swallow
[kv 'nariu] bird
r vndu 'riyv]
anestico tame, domestic
o melro [' mslru] the blackbird
passar por to be considered
r du 'meftiku]
esperto clever, sly
C'duir to conclude
fcfpertuj
f^itry fe'fo'itu] hardy
o yrito the warbling
234
Lesson 34.
o chamariz
[fvme'rij]
a delicia
the bird-call
the delight
selvagem
savage, wild
o cantador
[kuntv'&or]
pobre f'pobri/
the singer
poor
j o fregues
the customer
o moQO [ mosuj the waiter
fluminense of Rio de
[flumi'nenss] Janeiro
a revista the review
[rrd'viftv]
o trdco ['trokuj the change, ex-
change.
90. Exercicio.
cavallo correu tan to que ficou esfalfado. A belleza e
a riqueza sao mudaveis. homem nao p6de prescindir nem
do alimento nem da roupa. Nao so esta, mas tambem aquelle
sao-lhe precisos. carvao de pedra emprega-se como com-
bustivel, com elle tambem se prepara o gaz. A agua do mar
nao e" potavel ; nem ella pode empregar-se na cozinha. ho-
mem nao deve ter demasiado cuidado no seu exterior; tam-
pouco elle deve despreza-lo. Londres e maior do que Lisboa:
comtudo esta cidade esta numa posicao superior. Assim (que)
eu me veja em porto seguro, podes estar certo que hei de dar-
te novas minhas; emquanto porem estiver em viagem, nao
havera occasiao, a nao ser que se encontre um navio (paquete).
Como nao se pode contar com este acaso, melhor e que nao
contes com noticias, por mais que eu desejasse mandar-t'as para
que te nao afflijas. Pec,o que te conformes com isso, posto que te
custe. nadador e o mentiroso, se abrirem muitas vezes a boca,
ir-se-hao a pique.
91. Leitnra.
A andorinha.
A andorinha e essencialmente dom^stica: nao vive senao
(or a nao ser) ao pe do homem. Onde virmos uma andorinha,
podemos concluir, sem que haja receio de errarmos, que nas
visinhancas ha habitacoes. E ella a toda a hora entra afoita-
mente nas habitacoes, como se ella propria fosse da familia.
Todavia, a andorinha passa metade do anno longe de nos,
na Africa d'onde vem no comeco da primavera, procurando a
meiga doQura do nosso clima, e para onde se retira no comego
do outono ; logo que presente os primeiros frios. A mesma
andorinha volta ordinariamente aos mesmos logares, e ate ao
mesmo ninho ; mas se o local Ih'o consente r faz um ninho novo
ao pe e por cima do anterior, e ahi vive com o seu compa-
nheiro pacifica e amorosamente : ella, a chocar os ovos, em-
quanto elle occupa e protege a entrada do ninho. Macho e
femea sao extremosissimos pelos filhos e educam-nos maravilho-
samente: emquanto pequeninos nao cessam de Ihes trazer de
comer. Depois dao-lhes as suas licoes de voo; e nao someute
The Conjunctions.
235
os ensinam a voar, mas ainda os animam n 'esses exercicios
quer com tilo expressivos gorgeios que o sentido d'estes quasi
se adivinha; quer voando elles proprios (ou) adeante dos filhos
ou ao lado, para que Ihes possam acudir quando for precise. -
As andorinhas vivem dos insectos ; e como estes ora voam mais
alto, ora mais baixo, segundo faz mais ou menos calor, acon-
tece que a andorinha os persegue em voos rasteiros, sobre as
folhas, sobre as hervas, e ate" no piso das ruas.
(After Trinde Coelho : 2 Livro de Leitura).
92. Thema.
I forbid it him, nevertheless he went. Though he said
nothing, I well felt that he was angry with me, since I
had blamed him. I shall go, whether it rain or be good
weather. You do not know, you don't even dream how you
are hurting me. A canary-bird if treated as it ought to be, can
live for twenty years. The blackbird is generally considered
i very clever, but it is not so much (or: less) so as it seems.
Moreover, it makes its nest very often near to man and
| is lured (atrair) by the bird-call, though this be only a poor
instrument. As all of us know already the warbling of the
r blackbird, we can declare that it is a delight. Yet it is not
i on account of its wild song that the blackbird merits the
, reputation which it has as a singer ; but. rather on account of
i that which it learns after being taken, be it by "learning by
heart what it is taught or what it hears of the elder birds,
or by imitating all it hears, consequently also the sounds
of instruments and the voice of persons.
Conversa^ao.
N'um cafe.
Fregues: 6 sr. Manuel, faz o favor d'uma chavena
de cafe e os jornaes d'hoje?
Moco: Pronto, senhor! Eis o Commercio doPorto,
o Fluminense l , o Diario Illustrado ;
tambem deseja alguma revista?
Fregues: Queria. Ha a Illustrac.ao portugu6sa e a
Revista de Bem?
Mo 90: Ha, sim, senhor. Tambem 0s Seroes* 8 , o
Bran co e Preto e outras.
1 Fluminense is the adjective formed of Rio de Janeiro,
Fluminense is a newspaper published there.
2 uSerdes*, pi. of serdo = evening-party. Os Seroes, Branco
Preto and Illustra$ao portugnesa are illustrated reviews.
236
Lesson 35.
Fregues: Bern, traga-m'as. E olhe que hei de querer
mais assucar!
Moco: Quanto V a Ex a quizer, sr. doutor. Manda
mais alguma coisa?
Fregues: Sim. Depois deter percorrido estes jornaes,
queria escrever alguns bilhetes postaes.
Tem-nos illustrados?
MOQO: Tenho. Eil-os. Queira V a Ex a escolher.
Fregues: Esta bem. E estampilhas? Como teem des-
tine para o estrangeiro, cada urn precisa
d'uma a vint^m ou de duas a dez reis.
Aqui tern dois tostoes.
Mo 90: Nao tenho troco ; vou trocal-os la dentro.
Fr eg tie's: Deixe estar, que estao em boas maos.
Mo 90: Muito obrigado a V a Ex a .
Thirty-fifth Lesson. Li<jao trigesima
quinta.
Interjections. Interjeigoes [inUr^'stif].
off!
253. Interjections are cries or exclamations
which express sudden emotions. They are invariable
and mostly short. The most common are:
bravo! bravo! very well!
bis! once more!
cdspite! the deuce
catrapuz ! bounce ! dash !
plump!
6! oh! (used as a vocative)
coitado! coitadinho! poor man
(dear darling)!
silendo! silence!
psch! schiu! hush!
diabo! \ the deuce!
diacho! / zounds!
apre! hang it! confound it!
arrel gee-ho! ho!
xo! shue!
Ah! Ah!
oh! oh! oh! bless me!
hui! ai l ! oh, dear! alas!
ih! lo!
fora! begone! hence!
come out! (for actors)
irra
! zounds ! for shame ! It's
too much!
oxald! would to God!
old, hold! holla! halloo!
ole, ole! zounds!
zas! slap! crack!
basta! enough! stop!
will do!
eia! sus! ammo! cheer up!
viva! Long live! hurrah! hail!
that
1 Ai de mim poor me! at de TOS (d'elles)! woe unto you
(them)!
Interjections.
237
254. Besides these there are several interjections
which (as already the two last do) express a call for
animals e.g.: big-biz! 1 pussy, pussy! to call cats; ff!
to incite cats; ks! to incite dogs. There are also a
series of imitation-sounds, as: trus! trus! tap! knock!
rap! rat-tat-tat!; toe! toe! tramp! tramp!; ttim-lim; tlim-
tlom! ting! ting-tang! ding-dong! clatter!; tique-taque
tick-tack.
255. Finally, other particles, especially verbs in
the imperative mood, are used as interjections.
Examples.
pois! what next?
Andal go on!
anda cd! come here!
da cd! give hither!
to ma Id! take this!
escuta! hark!
\ouve cd! listen to me!
some-te! vae-te ! begone ! away !
\ama-te! be quick!
Vamos! let us go on (or
(away) ! ^
gira! go on! move!
par a ahi! stop!
\pudera! to be sure! I say!
wouldn't it suit (him)!
vois nao! certainly! why not?
isn't it?
oois entao! you see!
^luem (me) dera! that would
suit me to ,a marvel!
\ii Jesus! Senhor! Jesus
' Senhor! mercy on us! Good
Heavens !
ideus! farewell! good-bye!
good morning (or day)!
cautela! agua vae z ! take cara
or heed!
aqui d'el-rei 3 / Acudam ! \ , , .
6 da guarda! f n '
por quern e! I pray!
por amor de Deus! for God's
Deus me livre! God forbid!
Oh, no!
valha-me Deus ! Oh Lord ! bless
me!
Amen Jesus 4 / Amen !
thank Heaven!
por Deus! egad! by Jove!
se Deus quizer! (if it) please
God! Deo volente!
seja o que Deus quizer! as
God will
Deus guarde a V a Ex a B !
God be with you!
sabe Deus! God knows!
Remark. Every interjection expresses a whole sentence
r even several sentences. Thus ail means "how painful it is!"
1 Biz biz, a quickly repeated "bicho, bicho!"
2 Agua vae!, literally "water is going," a traditional warn-
ig for passers-by, survived from former times, when things were
ung out of the windows.
8 Aqui d'el-rei, elliptic al for "acuda aqui a genie d'el-rei!"
* Amen, Jesus, popular for Amen.
5 Final form in official letters or documents.
238
Lesson 35.
or "how unfortunate I am!" So the interjection differs by
its nature, which is synthetic, from all other particles, these
being essentially analytic.
Palavras.
theatro lyrico the opera
atar to tie
(-house)
a enchente the fulness
o palco ['paikuj the stage
rugir [rru'$ir] to roar
[I'fentd]
a procella the storm,
desmaiar to faint, swoon !
[pru' sslis] hurricane
[digmvt'ar]
o sino ['sinuj the bell
o scenario the scenery
os sinos a defun- the tolling-
[sz'nartu]
tos[dd'funtuf] bells
aprimeira dama the prima
bemdito deceased
donna
[bvi 'dituj
bisar to repeat
sisudo [si'zuftu] judicious
guiar [gi'ar] to lead, guide
o jumento the ass
impor to impose
[$u'mentu]
o baritono the baritone-
a reboque in tow
/& 'ritunuj singer
[rrd'boJcJ
o baixo the bass-singer
o cocheiro the coachman
as palmas the applause
[ku'fviru]
levar palmas to be applaud- !
obedecer to obey
ed
doer to ache, hurt
ww sem numero innumerable
tocar as to chime the
de (vezes) (times)
trindades Angelus
a corda the garland
[trln 'dad~if]
a festa artistica the benefit
o toque ftolcj das the chimes of
a pomba the pigeon,
trindades the Angelus.
dove |
93. Exercicio.
No theatro.
Hontem no theatro lyrico foi tal a enchente que algumas
senhoras, coitadas, desmaiavam. Mas oh, se visse aquillo!
Ai, que lindo scenario! E os artistas? A esses levantavam-se
muitos vivas, e os espectadores gritavam bravo! e bis! a
nao poderem mais (till they could not any more). A primeira
dama teve de bisar uma aria ole, ole ! e depois tornaram a
romper os vivas e os bis, para obriga-la a repetir segunda
vez. Mas entao o piiblico mais sisudo fez psch! e schiu!,
para impor silencio. Tambem o baritono e o baixo levaram
muitas palmas e foram pedidos fora urn sem numero de
vezes, at alguns gritaram basta! Mas, caspite, que bellas
vozes! Atiraram-lhes muitas flores e coroas, visto que tiveram
a sua festa artistica, e ate soltaram pombas, as quaes, atadas
a duas e dnas zas! -- foram cair no palco.
Interjections. 239
94. Leitnra.
E em Novembro, rugem procellas . . .
Deus nos acuda, nos livre d'ellas!
Ai, que ditosos os lavradores !
Sinos a defuntos! ai, quern morreria!
Viverao sempre na eterna luz,
Pobres bemditos, amen, Jesus! . . .
Pela estrada plan a, toe, toe, toe,
Guia o jumentinho uma velhinha errante,
Como vao ligeiros, ambos a reboque,
Antes que anoitece, toe, toe, toe,
A velhinha atras, o jumentito adiante ! . . .
Toe, toe, toe, lindo burriquito,
Para as minhas filhas quern m'o dera a mim!
(Guerra Junqueiro.)
95. Thema.
Na rua.
Take care! Come here! Be quick! Don't you see that
a carriage is eoming along? Lord, bless me! Take heed not
to fall (Olha, se caes !) Oh, coachman, stop ! The coachman
calls to the horses: "Gee-ho! ho!" and then "Shue!" But they
do not obey him. Help! help! There they (tr.: eil-os que)
stand, thank God! But you have fallen (pret.), poor darling!
Are you hurt? No, thank Heaven! Give hither your little
hand! Let us go on! Cheer up! Zounds, what a fright!
Nothing hurts you, does it? Hark! Do you hear the bells?
Ding-dong! They chime the Angelus (or: it is the chimes of
the Angelus). Listen ! Come, say an Ave-Maria ! Well ! Amen !
240
Second Part,
First Division: Flection.
First Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
(Cf. 2nd Lesson of Part. I.)
1. The gender of the noun may be recognised
by its meaning or by its ending or by both. By
their meaning are
(a) Masculine. 1 . The denominations of male
persons and their professions: Jose, o rapaz, ojar-
dineiro, o doutor^ o monarcha, o patriarcha, etc.
2. The cardinal points, the winds, the seasons,
the months and those days as are not indicated by
"feira": o leste or este (also: nascente, oriente, levante 1 ),
o oeste (also: poente or Occidents), o norte (also: se(p)-
tentriao, o sul; o verao or estio, o outo(m)no, o inverno;
o Janeiro, o fevereiro, etc.; o sdbbado, o domingo (but a
segunda feira, etc.).
Exc.: a primavera Spring.
3. Mountains, capes, rivers and seas: o Etna,
o Gerez, o Cdbo da Roca; o Mondego, o Lima, o G-ua-
diana, o (oceano) Atlantico, o (mar) Bdltico.
1 The names of the cardinal points (with the exceptions of
those in parenthesis) indicate also the winds blowing from there
e.g. : o norte or septentriao (poetical name) is employed for north
and north -wind. Another denomination for north-wind (rarely
for north) is a tramontand. Feminine are also a brisa the breeze.
a araffem, a veraqao gentle breeze.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 241
N.B.H the name of mountains is preceded by serra,
the article, etc., concords with this noun: a serra da Estrella,
a serra do Gerez.
4. Metals: o ouro, o ferro, o cobre, o zinco, etc.
Exc. : a prata, a platina, a lata or folha de Flandres
sheet-iron.
5. Characters and notes: o A, o B, o L, dois cc;
o do, o re.
6. Many names of trees and shrubs: o carvalho,
o freixo, o salgueiro, o sobreiro, o tremoceiro. N.B. Fruit-
trees are generally feminine: a pereira (pear-tree).
7. Those words (adjectives, infinitives, participles)
converted into a substantive: o bello, o falar, o sim.
N.B. If by an adjective so employed a female person
is indicated, it is naturally preceded by the feminine article:
a bella, a velha.
(b) Feminine. 1. The denominations of female
persons and their professions: Maria, amae; aleiteira,
a autora.
Exc.: o mulherao the strong and stout woman.
2. Continents, and generally towns, countries,
provinces and isles, especially those ending in a:
a Africa, Lisboa, Londres, a Dinamarca; a Beira,
a Guine; a Isldndia; however: o Brasil, Portugal (mas-
culine, but without article), o Trds-os-Montes , o Sao
Thome, o Porto, o Funeral, o Eio de Janeiro, Paris m.
3. Arts, sciences, professions, moral qualities and
abstract nouns: a musica, a historia, a olaria (pottery),
a esperanca, a fe, a moralidade, a discregao.
Exc.: o amor Love, o vicio Vice.
2. To indicate the natural sex in persons and
animals, the Portuguese language has either a different
expression or a different ending (cf. 3 of this Lesson
and L. 2 of the 1 st Part.).
Masculine. Feminine.
rapaz the boy A rapariga the girl, maid
o homem the man a mulher the woman
o pae the father a mde the mother
o padrasto the stepfather a madraste the stepmother
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 16
242 Lesson 1.
o padrinho \ ,, ^ f ,, a madrinha \ ,,
o corner* / the g dfather a ^arfre } <* godmother
o m the king a rainha the queen
o dom = a title of nobility, a dona = title bestowed upon
employed before the Christ- any lady and followed by
ian name the Christian name.
o genro the son-in-law a nora the daughter-in-law
o frade the monk a freira the nun
o didcono the deacon a diaconisa the deaconess
o avo the grandfather a avo the grandmother
o tsar or cear the czar a tsarina the czarina
o gallo the cock a gallinlia the hen
o cavallo the horse a egua the mare
o carneiro the ram, mutton a ovelha the sheep
o bode the buck- goat a cobra the goat
the dwarl a ana the female dwarf.
3. By their ending are:
(a) Masculine. 1. Those nouns ending in un-
accented -o or in any accented vowel e.g. tio, dedo,
alvard (charta), cafe, aleli (gillyflower), javali (wild
boar), do (pain), no (knot), avo.
Exc. : a pa (shovel), a chamine, a fe, a gale (galley),
a libre, a mare (tide), a pole (pulley), a rale, a re (the
female prisoner or defendant, but o re the D [musical
note]), a se; a avo, a enxo (adz[ej).
2. Those nouns ending in -en, -em (exc. those in
-gem], -im, -om, -urn, -do (cf. b, 3): o germen, o bem, o
armasem, o setim, o som, o atuni, o orgdo.
Exc.: a ordem the order.
3. Those nouns ending in -ae (-ai), -ao (au), -co
(-eu), eo (eu), -oe, -oi e.g.: pae (pai), pdo (patt), ceo
(ceu), breo (breu), heroe (heroi), boi.
Exc.: a ndo (ndu) the ship.
4. Those in -al, -el, -il, -ol, -ul: o areal, o annel,
o funil, o paiol, o paul (swamp), o consul.
Exc.: a cal the chalk, a vogal the vowel, as well
as cathedral and credencial, which properly are ad-
jectives, to be supplied by se and carta.
5. Those in -ar, -er (-er), -ir, -or, -ur: o altar, o
talker, o prazer, o elixir, o senhor, o andor (beer for
saints), catur (little Indian man-of-war).
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 243
Exc.: a beira-mar (properly: a beira do mar the
shore), a collier (spoon), a cor, a dor, a flor.
6. Those in -az, -bz, -02, -us, -uz: o cabas (basket
of twigs), o algbz (hangman), o arrbz, o jus (jus, law),
o capuz (hood), o abestruz (ostrich).
Exc. : a pas (peace), a tenas (tongs), a foz (mouth
of a river), a noz (nut), a vog (voice), a cruz (cross), a
luz (light).
Remark L Are masculine also those nouns in -os, em-
ployed only in the plural: os bredos (notch-weed, s pin age) ;
os brocolos (broccoli).
(b) Feminine. 1. Those nouns in -a or -a 1 : tia,
alma, la, maga.
Exc.: o dia, o belga, o persa, o planeta, o cometa,
o enigma (riddle), o capitalista, o cambista (money-changer)
and all those, mostly taken from the Greek and indi-
cating a male person, as poeta, monarcha, democrata,
atheista, etc.
2. Those in -e, and -ei: a merce (mercy), a lei (law).
3. Those in -ade, -gao, (-c)gao, -so, -ddo (cf. a, 2):
adoragao, direcgao, extensdo, confusfto, aptidao (aptness),
! miiltiddo (multitude).
Exc.: o coragdo (heart).
4. Those in -gem: a imagem, a impigem (tetter), a
, ferrugem (rust).
Exc.: o pagem (page, cabin-boy), o almargem
(meadow). 2
Remark II. Are also feminine those nouns ending in
-as and employed only in the plural, and also the proper
names ending in -as; e.g. as exequias (exequies), as nu-
pcias (wedding), as bodas (de prata, de oiro the silver or
golden wedding) ; as caZf as (trousers), as vitualhas (victuals) ;
Bruxellas (Brussels), Athenas (Athens).
1 The ending ~a may be also written -an: Ian, magan. But
this latter is feminine only when identical with -a, otherwise it
is masculine: o afan (toil), o ademan (generally employed in the
plural ademanes gesture).
2 Personagem is employed now and then as a masculine,
but the correct form is feminine.
16*
244 Lesson 1.
4. As for the denomination of animals and plants,
their species is partly indicated by the masculine,
partly by the feminine gender e.g., o corvo (raven), o
rouxinol (nightingale), o cordeiro (lamb), a dguia (eagle),
a ovelha (sheep), a lebre (hare), a raposa (fox), o myrto
(myrtle), o castanheiro (chestnut). To indicate the
natural sex, you have to supply the name of the
species by macho (male) or femea (female) e.g., a femea
do rouxinol, o corvo femea, a dguia macho, etc.
N.B. The words of the reading and translating tasks
should now be looked up in the vocabulary at the end of
this book, or as this, being chiefly intended to furnish
typical examples of a correct pronunciation, does not pretend
to be complete from a dictionary. In the Pocket Dictio-
nary of the Portuguese and English Languages by H. Michaelis,
an abridgement of the larger Dictionary of the same author,
published by Broclthaus, Leipzig, and the best of its kind
we know of, the reader will find everything that is required.
1. Reading Lesson.
I.
A lebre corre. peixe nada. A andorinha voa. cabrito
pula. ca$ador caca. juiz julga. homem pensa. boi
rumina. orgao soa. A luz alumia. general commanda. A
torre e alta. savel e" um peixe. A aguia e uma ave de
rapina. cysne e" uma ave aquatica. A plaina 6" um instru-
mento. cravo 6" uma flor. Diz-se vulgarmente que o sol e
a lua estao no ce*u. altar esta na igreja. A nuvem esta no
ar. vento (o norte, a tramontana) sopra. trovao brame
ou estrondeia. leao ruge. mar brame. A ovelha bala.
cavallo rincha ou relincha. cao ladra, uiva ou geme (gane).
rouxinol e o melro cantam. A ra grasna. burro zurra.
A serpente silva. porco grunhe. lobo uiva. pardal
chia. A raposa regouga. touro berra. gato mia. mos-
quito zumbe. A rola geme. pato e o ganso grasnam.
gallo cucurita e canta. A gallinha cacareja.
II.
Caule, tronco ou haste (pe, pedunculo).
caule 4 o que nos vulgarmente chamarnos tronco ou
haste. Um carvalho tern tronco; a papoula e o trigo teem
haste. caule d'uma flor tambem se chama pe (ou pediinculu).
caule (ou tronco) de algumas arvores chega a ter 400 metres
de altura: o dos musgos tern apenas alguns millimetres. caule
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 245
e pois a parte da planta que se eleva no ar. Eleva-se ver-
ticalmente, ou mais ou menos inclinado. E do caule que nas-
cem as folhas, as flores e os fructos. caule das arvores
compoe-se de cinco partes: por fora a casca; por baixo da
casca o liber, que e uma camada branca e tenra; por baixo
do liber outra camada que se chama alburno; ainda outra,
a mais interior, chamada cerne; e ao centre a medulla. Para
aguentar o caule, algumas plantas teem gavinhas, tambem
chamadas elos ou abracos. Veem-se na videira, no melao, na
ervilhaca etc. Algumas gavinhas teem na ponta uns pequeni-
i nos discos. Estes discos introduzem-se as vezes nas fend as
das paredes, e incham dentro das fendas. Inchando, os discos
, nao saem, e as gavinhas aguentam melhor o caule. Essas
gavinhas que teem disco, chamam-se adhesivas (air roots).
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
2. Thema.
Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing
in front the definite or the indefinite article:
The horse, cavallo. The pear, pera. The metal,
- metal. A winter, inverno. The spring, primavera.
The chestnut, -- castanheiro. The apple-tree, macieira.
The gold, -- ouro. The platinum, platina. The vapour,
- vapor. The working, trabalhar. The author, autora.
! The ship, navio, nau. The prophet, propheta. The
sun, -- sol. The moon, -- lua. The image, -- imagem.
The sparrow, - - pardal. The fox, raposa. The he-fox,
- raposa macho. A lion, liao. A region, regiao. The
heart, -- cora9ao. The modesty, modestia. The faith, -
1 fe. The foot, -- pe". The chimney, ~ chamine. The vowel,
- vogal. The pair, -- par. The peace, paz. The piece,
- pedaco. The Belgian, belga. The mercy, merce.
The hare, lebre. The wool, la. The sound, som.
A frog, -- ra. A swamp, paiil. The chalk, cal. The
salt, -- sal. The sky, -- cthi. The eagle, -- aguia. The
bird, - ave, - - passaro. The trousers, ca^as. The
wedding, -- nupcias. Asia, Asia. Italy, Italia. Nor-
mandy, - - Normandia. Portugal, Portugal. Brazil,
Brasil. The Thames, -- Tamisa. The Tejo, -- Tejo.
3. Thema.
Write down the translation and the feminine of the
following nouns. The neighbour; the prisoner; the dwarf;
the grandfather; the monk; the doctor; the author; the
; gardener; the lion; the hare; the nightingale; the bode;
246 Lesson 2.
the cousin; the stepfather; the son-in-law; the cock; the
bull; the Jew; the prince; the master; the Portuguese; the
German; the boy; the dog; the orphan; the wolf; the hus-
band; the son; the godfather; the horse.
Conyersa^ao.
Quaes sao os principaes quadnipedes domesticos?
Quaes sao os principaes quadnipedes bravos ou as prin-
cipaes feras?
Qual e o movimento da lebre? 7 do peixe? 7 da aguia?,
do homein?
Qual e a voz da ovelha?, do cavallo?, do cao?, do
porco?, etc.
Quaes sao as principaes aves domesticas?, as aquaticas?,
as de rapina?
Quaes sao as vozes das aves?
Que se entende por "caule"?
Como se chama tambem o caule d'uma nor?, d'uma
arvore?, d'uma espiga?
De quantas partes se cornpoe o caule d'uma arvore e
quaes sao?
Que 6 que nasce do caule?
Que teem algumas plantas para aguentar o caule?
Diga(m) alguns exemplos!
Second Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued).
2. Nouns with a Double Gender.
(a) With special ending for the feminine (cf. P. I,
21):
(a) The ending o changes into a: pombo, pomba.
Exc.: didcono, diaconisa.
(p) The ending do changes into 6a: patrao principal,
patroa.
Ex.: barao, baroneza; cidadao, cidada; irmao,
irma, etc. (see 21).
(f) The ending or (or) adds a: leitor, leitora.
Ex.: actor, actris, etc. (see 21).
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
247
(b) The ending es (ez) adds a : portugues, portuguesa.
Exc.: (only for adjectives) cortes, which is
the same for both genders.
(e) Nouns with any other ending do not follow de-
terminate rules.
Alfoade abbot abbadessa
alcaide alcalde, mayor alcaidessa
archiduque archduke archiduqueza
avo grandfather aw
czar czar czarina
conde count condessa
deus god deusa
dugue duke duqueza
heroe hero heroina
hospede host; landlord, guest hdspeda
infante infant; foot-soldier infanta
mestre master, teacher ntestra
parente parent parenta
marques marquis marquesa
monge monk monja
peru turkey-cock pertia
poeta poet poetisa
principe prince princesa
propheta prophet prophetisa
reo criminal, delinquent re
sacerdote priest sacerdotisa
visconde viscount viscondessa.
(b) Without changing their ending or meaning the
following words are distinguished only by the article
(o for the masculine, a for the feminine). As they are
common to both genders, they are called "communs de
dois."
Artista artist
regente \
governante J
gerente manager
suicida suicide
regicida regicide
conjugicida conjugicide
consorte consort
mdrtir martyr
espia spy
compatriota country-man,
country-woman
persa Persian
belga Belgian
commensal \ table fellow,
conviva \ commensal
cumplice accomplice
convalescents convalescent
pateta blockhead
parasita parasite
indigena indigenous
herege heretic
guia guide
joven youth, young girl.
248
Lesson 2.
(c) Besides these "communs de dois" which still are
distinguished by the different gender of the article,
there are others which are indiscriminately employed for
both genders, ones with the masculine, others with the
feminine article. They are called in Portuguese "sobre-
communs." Please to note the following:
conjuge the married man a testemunha the witness
or wife
o gemeo 1 the twin boy or girl
o interprete the interpreter
a crianqa the child
(d) Without changing
different meaning:
guarda the watchman,
keeper, guard
o cabega the chief, leader
o planeta the planet
o trombeta the trumpeter
o corneta the horn -blower
o vogal the voter
o crescente the crescent, half-
moon
o atalaia the sentinel
o vigia the guard
o capital the capital, principal
o lingua the interpreter
o cura the parson
a sentinella the sentinel
a criatura the creature e.g.,
o grande estilista e infeliz
criatura . . ..
of the ending, but with a
a guarda the guard, defence
a cabega the head
a planeta sort of chasuble
a trombeta the trumpet
a corneta the horn
a vogal the vowel
a crescente the flood
a atalaia the watch-tower
a vigia the watching
a capital the capital
a lingua'ihe tongue
a cura the cure, healing.
Exchange, bank
o barco* the bark, boat
(e) With changing of the ending or meaning, gene-
rally indicating in the masculine a greater idea of size.
(N.B. Sometimes the contrary; we mark these by *.)
Obanco the bench; shop- board; a banca the writing-table;
bar; basset
a barca the bark, ferry-boat,
lighter
a cesta the basket, maund
a fossa the pit, hole
a carvalha the little oak
a caleira the gutter
a horta the kitchen-garden
a caldeira the kettle
a madeira the wood
o cesto* the basket
o fosso the ditch, trench
o carvalho the oak
o caleiro the gutter
o horto* kitchen-garden
o caldeiro* the kettle
o madeiro the block
o mosco* the mosquito
a mosca the fly
1 Employed also as an adjective: irmaos gemeos.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
249
o pio the basin, winepress
o pogo the well
o riso* the laughter, smile
o sacco* the bag
a pia the basin
a poga (poga) the pool
a risa the shout of laughter
a sacca the bag.
6. Please to pay attention to the gender and
meaning of the following nouns, different in their ter-
mination and consequently in their gender:
Masculine.
aro the hoop
o arco the bow; arch
o barbo the barbel
o barro the clay
o bico the beak; bill; thorn
o bolo the cake
o bolso the pocket
boneco the doll; fig. puppet
o bordo the board
o cabego the top of a moun-
tain; chief
o cabide the rack
o cabido the chapter of a ca-
thedral
o campo the field
1 o cargo the office, employment
o carogo the stone of a fruit
o carpo the wrist
o carrasco the hangman
'o carreiro the narrow path;
carter
>o carreto the waggonage;
freight
o carreteiro the cart-man, carter
o carteiro the postman
o casco the skull; cask; hull
o caso the case
o castello the castle, tower
o caudal the rapid
o cavallo the horse
o cepo the stump, block
o cerco the circle, circuit ; siege
o cevo the bait; decoy, lure
o chdco the brooding
Feminine.
A ara the altar(- stone)
a area the chest, coffer
a barba the chin; beard
a barra the bar; spar
a bica the water-pipe
a bola the ball
a bolsa the purse ; B Exchange
a boneca the doll, baby
a borda the border, edge
a cabega the head
a campa the grave
a carga the load, burden,
freight
a carroga the coach
a carpa the carp
a carrasca red -oak
a carreira the run, race, road ;
career
a carreta the cart
a carete the grimace, mask
a carreteira the lighter
a carteira the pocket-book
a casca the bark, rind
a casa the house
a Castella Castilian
a cauda the tail, train
a cavalla the mackerel
a cepa the vine -stock, vine
a cerca the enclosure, hedge
a ceva the masting; food; lure
a choca the bowl ; cattle-bell ;
brood-hen
250
Lesson 2.
o cigarro the cigar
o cimo the top; summit
o cobertor the blanket; quilt
o colchao the mattress
o colchete the clasp
o collo the neck, lap
o conto the tale, story
o cdrte the edge ; cut ; incision
o cunho the stamp, coin
o custo the cost, expense
o espinho the thorn
o esquadro the square
o estado the state
o fado the fate ; popular song
o fardo the burden, pack
o fecho the bolt, bar
o ferro the iron
o folho the flounce, frill
o folio the folio; page
o goivo the gillyflower
o golo the draught
o gorgete the half- shirt
o grado the will, accord
o jorro the jet, shoot of water
o lance the throw, cast; trait,
lucky chance
o lango the throw ; suit ; space ;
turn
o linho the flax, linen
o lixo the filth, dirt
o lombo the loins, reins
o luto the mourning
o maco the mallet
o malho the mall, mallet;
sledge
o mango the handle of a flail
o meado the middle, half
o medo the fear
o meio the half, middle ; means
o modo the mode, manner
a cigarra the balm-cricket,
grasshopper
a cima the top
a coberta the cover(ing) ; shelter
a colcha the counterpane, quilt
a colcMta the eye(let)
a colla the glue
a conta the bill, account
a cdrte the court; as Cortes
the Parliament
a curiha the wedge, quoin
a custa the cost, charge
a espiriha the fish-bone; spine
a esquadra the squadron
a estada the abode
a fada the fairy, fay
a farda the uniform
a feclia the conclusion
a ferra the fire-shovel
a follia the leaf, sheet
a forma the form, shape
a forma the matrice, model
a goiva the gouge, hollow
chisel
a gola the throat, gullet
a gorgeta gratuity, tip
a grade the harrow, grate
a jorra the tar
a langa the lance, spear
a liriha the line; row
a lixa the sea-calf; seal(-skin)
a lomba the hill, eminence
a luta the wrestling, combat
a maga the mace, club
a malha the mash; stitch;
speck
a manga the sleeve
a meada the hank, skein
a meda the stack of straw or
corn
a meia the stocking
a moda the fashion
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
251
o mofo the mould
o monte the mountain
o morto the dead man, corpse
o mote the motto, device
o moto the motion, impulse
o novel(l)o the clew; ball
o pago the reward
o palmo the span
o papo the maw, crop
o papa the pope
o partido the party, faction ;
resolution
o passo the step
o pasto the pasture, feed
o pato the duck
o pego the whirlpool, pit
o pel(l)o the hair, down
o pinheiro \ the fir-tree, pine
o pinho / tree
o pinto the chicken
o pito = pinto ; pipe
o ponto the point, stitch
o porte the freight, postage ;
deportment
o porto the port, harbour
o paste the stake, pillar
o posto the place ; post
o prdtico the pilot
o preso the prisoner
o quarto the room, quarter;
watch
o queixo the jaw(-bone)
o raio the beam, ray; flash;
spoke
o rato the rat
o risco the danger; stroke of
a pen
a mofa the mockery
a monta the amount, quan-
tity
a morte the death
a mota the terrace; dam,
rampart
a novella the novel
a paga the pay
a palma the palm-leaf, palm-
tree
a(s) papa(s) the pap
o papa the pa(pa), daddie
a partida the part, lot ; match
a passa the raisin
a pasta the portfolio; paste
a pata the female duck; paw,
claw
a pega the handle, ear, tedder
a pega the magpie
a pella the ball, tennis-ball
a pelle the skin
a pinha the pine-cone
a pinta the spot, mark
a pita the fibre of the aloe
a piteira the aloe
a ponta the point; top, tip
a porte the bridge
a porta the door
a posta the slice, cut; post-
(age); courier
a prdtica the practice, ex-
perience
a presa the prey, booty
a quarto, the fourth part or
class
a queixa the complaint; pro-
cess, action
a raia the stroke, dash; bor-
der; ray
a rata the she -rat; share
a risca the dash; parting (of
the hair)
252
Lesson 2.
o rodo long stick to heap up
corn
o rolo the roll(er), ball; taper
o rolete the small roll
o seguro the insurance
o sello the stamp, seal
o sino the bell
o siso the good sense
o solo the soil, ground
o telho the earthen cover
o tento the counter ; maulstick;
care
o testo the cover, lid
o tiro the shot
o toldo the covering; awning
o torno the turn(bench)
o trinco the latch
o troco the change, small coins
o vaso the vase, vessel; urn;
pot
o vello the fleece '
o vento the wind
o verbo the verb, word
a roda the wheel; circle;
round slice
a rdla the turtle-dove
a roleta the roulette
a segura the hoop -knife
a sella the saddle
a sina the flag; fate
a sisa the excise
a sola the leather; sole
a telha the tile, brick
a tentdiihe probe
a testa the forehead
a lira a strip
a tolda the quarterdeck ; awn-
ing
a torna the return; compen-
sation
a trinca a series of three ana-
logous things
a troca the truck, exchange
a vasa the slime, mud
a vel(l)a the candle; sail
a venta the nostril
a verba the clause, article
7. There are a few nouns which by the mas-
culine gender indicate the individual and by the femi-
nine the collective sense e.g. :
o fructo the fruit a fructa the fruitage, fruit
o grito the scream a grita the crying, clamour
o marujo the mariner a maruja the crew
o ramo the bough, twig a rama the foliage, branches.
8. There is some affinity between these nouns
( 7 and 5 (e)) and
(a) the so-called augmentativos, formed by the trans-
formation of the final syllable of certain nouns into
-ao, which adds to the noun an idea of bigness and
sometimes that of deformity and ugliness; and
(b) the so-called dimunitivos, which attribute to the
noun an idea of smallness, of somebody or something
needing protection, and therefore that of a certain
tenderness (cf. P. I, L. 16).
The Gender of the Portuguese ttouns. 253
4. Thema.
'his boy tears his stockings so that there is no possibility
of darning them. In the Botanical Garden of Lisbon are palm-
trees of more than sixty spans height. As this needle has
no point, not a stitch can be done with it. The duck filled
its maw with pap. Please to give me some small coins, I
want to buy a few stamps. Of the whole crew only one
mariner was saved. Waiter, there are some guests who have
not yet had a slice of fish; you ought to be more attentive.
In the action brought (movida) against that spy, several
witnesses were summoned; amongst them as [an] interpreter
a native of Africa. Our globe, the moon, and other stars
are planets; the sun is a fixed star. When the moon is vi-
sible in the sky, we have moonshine. She renews her light
in the phases of each revolution and is a satellite of the earth.
Her four phases are; new moon, half moon, full moon, and
waning inoon. The ebbtide and flood are phenomena in
connection with the crescent and the wane. Where there is
the most capital and paper currency (papel moeda) is in
the banks of the capital of England. As you so warmly take
the part of the Portuguese republicans, are you a republican
yourself? I do not belong to any political faction, but I sym-
pathise with the republican party and its leaders. An English
squadron performs its maritime manoeuvres in the bay of
Lagos on the Portuguese seashore. A square is used at
drawing. The crickets chirp during the hot season (a calma)
in the months of June, July, and August. Flies and mosqui-
tos may be driven away by the smoke of a cigar or a ciga-
rette. Consorts are often martyrs of society, and the children
of the married couple sometimes are unconsciously the cause
of domestic strife.
5. Leitura e Versao.
Nao 6" saudavel para gente sadia, quanto m6nos para gente
doente, a estada n'uma casa d'um estado m&nos salubre. A
prisao nas cidades portugusas encontra-se muitas vezes na
melhor e maior pra9a: Chama-se terraco ou eirado o telhado
piano d'uma casa ou seja o espaco descoberto sobre uma casa
ou ao nivel d'um andar d'ella. Chama-se chifres, chavelhos ou
pontas as excrescencias corniformes ou armac.ao do gado corni-
fero (or cornuto). Na partida do deputado do partido pro-
gressista estiveram na gare os correligionarios e amigos pessoaes
d'elle. Neste anno ha pouca fructa: nao vingaram os fructos
das macieiras e pereiras. Em compensate de"ram boa colheita
os castanheiros. Por isso se veem agora muitas castanheiras
na rua a venderem castanhas assadas.
254 Lesson 2.
6. Para decorar (to be learnt by heart).
Vozes d'animaes.
Palram pega e papagaio Opardal,damninhoaoscampos,
E cacareja a gallinha, Nao aprendeu a cantar;
Os ternos pombos arrulam, Como os ratos e as doninhas,
Geme a rola innocentinha. Apenas sabe chiar.
Muge a vacca, berra o touro; negro corvo crocita;
Grasna a ra, ruge o leao; Zune o mosquito enfadonho;
gato mia, uiva o lobo; A serpente, no deserto,
Tambem uiva e ladra o cao. Solta assoUo medonho.
Eelincha o nobre cavallo; Chia a lebre, grdsna o pato;
Os elephantes dao urros; Ouvem-se os porcos grunliir;
A timida ovelha Mia; Libando o succo das flores,
Zurrar e proprio dos burros. Costuma a abelha sumbir.
Hegouga a sagaz raposa Bramam os tigres, as on9as;
(Brutinho muito matreiro) : Pia y pia o pintainho ;
Nos ramos cantam as aves; Cucurita e canta o gallo;
Mas pia o mocho agoureiro. . Late e gdne o cachorrinho.
Sabem as aves ligeiras A vitellinha da berros;
canto seu variar; cordeirinho balidos;
Fazem gorgeios as vezes, macaquinho da guinchos;
As vezes poem-se a chilrar. A creancinha vagidos.
A falla foi dada ao homem
Eei dos outros animaes,
Nos versos lidos acima,
Se encontram, em pobre rima.
As vozes dos principaes.
(Pedro Diniz.)
Conversaqao.
Que se entende por substantives communs de dois?
Quaes (sao) os substantives que teem a mesma forma
para ambos os sexos?
Que desinSncia da forma feminina teem os substantives
communs : irmao, barao, leao, ladrao, propheta, monge,
rapaz, imperador, mestre . . .?
Qual a differen9a entre um c6sto e uma cesta? um
horto e uma horta? o trombeta e a trombeta? um
vogal e uma vogal?
Quaes sao os substantives que, designando individuos,
sao masculines, e femininos quando exprimen um
sentido de collectividade ?
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 255
Como se formam os augmentativos? os diminutives?
Qual o sentido accrescentado ao substantive pela syllaba
augmentativa ? e pela syllaba diminutiva?
Third Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued).
Compound Nouns.
9. The Portuguese language does not contain so
many compound words as the English. It substitutes
them in different ways:
1. By adding a determinative noun, preceded by
de to the appelative e.g., oculo de mao eyeglass; amo-
lador de tesouras (e navalhas) knife-grinder; escuma de
mar meerschaum; caixa de correio letter-box; cJiapeu de
palha straw-hat; criada de quarto house-maid; bomba de
fogo fire-engine.
2. By joining an adjective to the noun e.g. bilhete
postal post-card; ministerio publico Attorney-General;
1 calgado caseiro house-shoe; mina hulMfera coal-mine;
pinheiro manso nut-pine; empregado subalterno subaltern
functionary.
Note. Sometimes the noun drops altogether (as also in
' English), taking the adjective in its form and meaning; e.g.,
o postal; o subaltern.
3. By a genitive: casa da fructa fruit-cellar; costa
do mar sea-coast; empregado do correio post-official ;
assento do cocheiro coach-box; porta da cidade town-gate.
4. By two nouns joined by another preposition than
' de: compartimento para fumistas smoking-compartment;
banho aos pes foot-bath; papel para cart as letter-paper;
correspondencia por cartas epistolary intercourse; colher
para paixe fisht-rowel; medo a morte fear of Death.
5. By the junction of any other particles e.g.
os afazeres (= a faser) the business; os parabens
(= para bem) the congratulation ; a sempre-verde the
evergreen.
256 Lesson 3.
10. Yet there is a certain number of compound
nouns, formed by various particles. Their gender cor-
responds, for living beings, to the natural sex or to
the conventional one. For inanimate things the
gender corresponds to that of the noun in such
compound words as are formed by a noun and another
particle (cf. however bate-folha, saca-rolha, quebra-nos,
etc.). In substantives compounded of two nouns, the
gender mostly corresponds to that of the last or the
one which logically is of the greater importance.
Remark. As there are a great many exceptions th<
only means of attaining proficiency is by learning the article
If you are in doubt, please to consult a dictionary.
11. Examples of Compound Nouns formed: j
(a) by two Substantives:
o mestre-escola the schoolmaster
o mestre-sala the master of ceremonies
o mestre sapateiro the master shoemaker
o goma-gut(t)a the gamboge
a goma-lacre the gumlack
o guarda-portao the door-keeper
o guarda-louga the cupboard
o (or a) guarda-roupa the (keeper of the) wardrobe
o guarda-livros the bookkeeper
a porta-cocheira the gateway
o tenente -general the lieutenant-general
o consul geral the consul-general
o tenente-coronel the lieutenant-colonel
o logar-tenente the lieutenant
a mao-tenente the small distance
o paquete the packet-boat, ship
o pontape the kick, spurn
a pedra-iman the magnet
o usufructo the usufruct
o varapau the (shepherd's) staff
a beira-mar the sea-shore
a couve-flor the cauly-flower;
also a great number of nouns compound with pa\
(pdu-balsamo, pdu-barro,pdu-canelaetc.), designating tree
and shrubs and being all of masculine gender.
(b) by Substantive and Adjectives:
a dguardente (dgua ardente) the brandy
a dguaforte the aquafortis
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 257
o amdr-perfeito the pansy
o cantochuo the church choir
o cavallo-marinho the hippopotamus
o porco-marinlio the dolphin
a guinta-feira santa the Maundy Thursday
o terrapleno the terrace
a idade-media the middle age
.
uma mao-cheia a handful
o mordomo-mor the Lord Steward of the Household
o porto-franco the free port
a pedra-infernal febe nitrate of silver
o terra-nova Newfoundland (dog).
(c) by Adjective and Substantive:
a cenlopeia the centipede
o gentilhomem the gentleman
a macha-femea the (door-)hinge (and hasp)
o meia-dia the midday
a meio-noite the midnight
o meiorcorpo. the bust, half body
a meia-lua the half moon, crescent
a menoridade (minoridade) the minority
o salvo-conducto the safe conduct
o porto franco the free port.
(d) by Verb and Substantive:
o guarda-po the dust-cloak
o guarda-chuva the umbrella
o guarda-fato the wardrobe, clothes-press
a lesa-majestade the lese-majeste"
a Usa-poesia the offence against poetry
a lesa-bom-gosto the offence against taste, tactlessness
o porta-bandeira the standard-bearer
o porta-cocheira the coach -gate
o porta-chapeus the hat-box
o porta-lapis the port- crayon
o porta-relogio the watch-stand
o porta-voz the speaking-trumpet
o lavapes the maundy, nipter
o lavapratos the dish-washer
o catavento the weathercock
o cliupa-flor, o beija-flor the humming-bird
o batefolha the gold-beater
o cJntpamel the honeysuckle; humming-bird
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 17
258 Lesson 3.
o girasol the sunflower
o para-raios the lightning-conductor
o passatempo the pastime
o passaporte the passport
o quebramar the breakwater, pier
o quebra-luz the light-screen
o saca-rolha(s) the corkscrew
o salva-vidas the safety-buoy; life-preserver, life-boat
um papa-leguas a stout walker
o pesa-cartas the letter-balance
o pesa-dgua the watergauge
o or a papamoscas the gaper
o or a papa-jantares the sponger, parasite
o or a papa-nostias \
o or a papa-missas \ the devotee; hypocrite.
o or a papa-santos J
(e) by two Verbs:
o bule-bule (or bole-bole) the quaking-grass
o ganhaperde sort of play at cards in which the winner
loses.
o vae-vem the to and fro; up and down
o passe-passe the juggling(-trick).
(f) by Preposition and Substantive:
a antecdmara \ he antechambei . ante room
a antesala }
a antemuralha 1 ^ u
o antemuro }
a ante-data the antedate
o antepasto the first dish
a anteporta the double door, screen
a antepdpa the forepart of the stern
a antivespera the day before the eve
o antipapa the antipope
o antidoto the antidote
a antithese the antithesis
a contrabanda the contraband
a contra-escritura the counterbond
a contra-ordem the countermand
contrasenha the watchword, counter -ticket
o contratempo the annoyance ; vexation ; inconvenience
a entrefolha the inter-leaf
a entrelinha the interlineation
o entremeio the insertion
os parabens the congratulation
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 259
a semrazao the groundlessness
o semsabor the insipidity, disgust
o sobresalto the (sudden) emotion, fright
a sub-ordem the subdivision
post-escrito the postscript
concidadao the fellow- citizen
consoeio the companion, associate.
(g) by Adverb and Substantive:
o bemfeitor the benefactor
a malquerenga the malevolence
o malgrado the displeasure
o malnascido the one who is born under an evil star,
unlucky fellow
o acima-mencionado the aforesaid
o abaixo-assignado the undersigned.
(h) by three words:
o mal-me-quer (malmequer) \ -, .
o bem-me-quer (bemmequer) J
o nao-me-deixes the forget-me-not
o pe-de-gallo the hop(s)
o pe-de-liao the lion's-foot
o pdu-de-lacre the gumlac-tree
o pdu-de-cabelleiro the milliner's block
o rabo-de-gallo the thunder- cloud
o valete de pdu the knave of clubs
uma tuta-e-meia an insignificance.
7. Thema.
Hamburg is a free port since 1888. The countermand
of the lieutenant colonel concerned only the subdivision
of the pioneers who were about to open a ditch near the bul-
wark. The congratulation of his book-keeper gave pleasure to
my partner; but the postscriptum of his letter containing,
the news of the bankruptcy of a bank, caused him a sudden
emotion and was a great annoyance to him. It is indeed an act
of tactlessness giving such news in a letter of congratulation.
In the great kitchen-garden is still much cauliflower and other
vegetables; but in the small kitchen- garden there is only to
be found quaking-grass, daisies, forget-me-nots, and pansies.
The Newfoundland dogs are dogs belonging to a race which
is said to originate (que dizem procedente) of Newfoundland.
The gum-bearing croton (arvore gummifera) and the gam-
boge-tree (guteira) are trees of the tropics from which the
gumlac and the gamboge are extracted.
17*
260 Lesson 3.
8. Yersao.
Quando estavamos na beira-mar, vimos muitas vezes os
porcos-marinhos, como vulgarmente se chamam os delfins ou
golfinhos, a saltar fora das ondas da resaca. Um catavento 6
um aparelho que indica a direc9ao dos ventos; tern a forma
d'uma bandeirinha, geralmente de ferro ou lata, enfiada n'uma
haste, e collocada no alto dos edificios. para-raios e um
aparSlho, formado principalmente de uma haste metallica e
destinado a attrahir as descargas electricas da atmosphera, li-
vrando d'ellas os logares ou edificios proximos. Na quinta-feira
santa ha lavapes em muitas igrejas catholicas, executado pelos
prelados ou outros altos sacerdotes. No Porto vi o cardeal,
em Lisboa o patriarchs a celebra-lo. Os muitos afaz^res pro-
prios do acima-mencionadoj assim como do abaixo-assignado
nao Ihes permittem occuparem-se dos afazeres alheios.
9. Leitura.
A Lusitdnia.
Antes de haver aqui hespanhoes e mouros, n'um peda9o
do que e hoje Portugal, havia os lusitanos. Esses lusitanos
eram os naturaes de uma regiao chamada Lusitania, regiao
que occupava especialmente, a principio, os territories entre o
Douro e o Tejo, e depois chegou a alastrar-se pelos que formam
hoje as provincias todas de Portugal, menos o Minho, Tras-
os-Montes e parte do Douro. Estes lusitanos viviam muito
descanc,ados ca em sua casa; mas com o rodar dos tempos,
os carthaginfises, que eram uns povos oriundos da cidade
de Carthago, ao norte da Africa, chegaram a domina-los, at6
que esses mesmos carthaginSses foram tambem vencidos
pelos r oman os que passaram depois a dominar elles sos.
Esses romanos viram-se e desejaram-se com os lusitanos, princi-
palmente com um tal Viriato que a frente da rapaziada
lusitana Ihes deu que fazer, e os venceu em muitos combates
at6 que o mataram a trai9ao quando dormia. Dizem que
Viriato era um pastor da Serra da Estrella e ainda hoje ha
em Vizeu um sitio a 1 que chamam Cava de Viriato, por
ser fama que morou ali esse valente capitao, que e o mais
antigo dos herdes Portugueses.
(Trindade Coelho: 3. Livro de Leitura.)
Conyersa^ao.
The answers to be given with the wording of No. 9.
Quaes foram os habitantes de Portugal antes dos por-
tugufises ?
i See P. II, L. 11, 48 (a) (p).
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 261
Quando ainda nao havia hespanhoes e mouros, quern
habitava o pai's?
Donde eram naturaes os lusitanos?
Qual era a regiao comprehendida, a principio, pela Lu-
sitania ?
quaes eram os territories que occupava depois?
Como viviam os lusitanos?
Quern chegou a domina-los?
Quern eram os carthagineses ?
Que tempo durou o dominio dos carthagineses?
Com quern se viram e desejaram os romanos, principal-
mente ?
Como morreu Viriato?
Onde ha a chamada Cava de Viriato ?
Porque se chama assim esse sitio?
Que dizem que Viriato era?
E como e considerado?
Fourth Lesson.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns.
The general rules for forming the plural of the nouns
have been given already in the 2 nd Lesson of the First
Part. They will here be repeated in coherence and duly
completed.
N.B. The same rules apply to the adjective.
12. (a) By adding an -s is formed the plural
of all those substantives (and adjectives) which end in
a vowel, an n, or a diphthong e.g., rede(s), pae(s), ir-
md(s), germen(s), pau(s), grdo(s). Exc. : o canon the
church law, canon, catalogus, forms the plural cdnones',
o ademan the gesture, ademanes.
Remark. Of those words ending in accented -do only
a few take an -s without changing the form of the singular ;
e.g., irmao(s), christdo(s), cidaddo(s), mdo(s), ben$ao(s) (this
only if accented on the first syllable, else bengdes. Those
ending in unaccented -do (allowed to be written also -am)
follow the general rule: o 6rfdo, orfdos (orphans).
(b) Some words in accented -do change their ter-
mination into -des e.g. : pdo, pdes; alemdo, alemdes] es-
crivao, escrivaes] cdo, cdes.
262 Lesson 4.
(c) Most words in accented -do change this termi-
nation into -oes: conddo gift, magic wand condoes; coragdo,
coragdes; lido (lefto), lioes; aldefto, aldeoes; cancdo, cangdes;
meldo, meloes etc.
(d) The nasal endings -em, -im, -om, -urn change -m
into -n before adding -s, thus: -ens, -ins, -ons, -uns; ar-
mazem, armazens; bem, bens', fim, fins; som, sons; atum,
atuns.
(e) Nouns ending in -r, -s or -z add -es e.g. : doutor
doutores; mulher, mulheres; portugues, Portugueses, pas,
pases.
N.B. Cardcter modifies its accent in the plural: ca-
racteres.
Jf) Remain unaltered those nouns ending in -s pre-
by an unaccented vowel or falling diphthong
e.g.: o(s) alferes the ensign(s); o(s) simples the simple-
ton(s), (the plural simplices being antiquated); o(s) lapis
the pencil(s) ; o(s) caesthe quay(s); o(s) arrais the master(s)
of a boat.
Exc. : calis (or calix) forms calls or calices-, deus
forms deuses.
Those few nouns in -x with preceding unaccented
vowel change ~x into -ces: o appendix (or appendice); o
index (or indice), indices. See also calix.
(g) Nouns ending in -al, -ol, -ul drop the -I and
add -es: animal, animaes: sol, soes; paul, paues.
Exc.: Consul (vice-consul, proconsul) and mal keep
the -I in the plural: consules, males; o real forms reis.
(h) Those words ending in -el loose the -I, adding
-is: annel, anneis', fiel, fieis.
(i) Those in accented 41 drop the -I, adding -s:
funil, ftmis, civil, civis.
(j) Those in unaccented -il change -il into -eis:
projectil, projecteis; fdcil, fdceis.
13. Proper names and foreign words form their
plural regularly by adding -s or changing the ending
after the rule: 05 Bragangas, os Gramas, as Indias, os
Formation of the Plural of Nouns.
263
Algarves, as Americas] os deficits, as erratas 1 , as quotas,
os quocientes, etc.
KB. Names of towns ending by -s are singular: a rica
Londres; a sdbia Athenas; Bruxellas foi fundada no seculoVIl
(cf. 3, Remark II).
14. Some nouns are used only in the Plural
at least in their meaning here given:
as dncias sickness as entradas the beginning and
as andas stilts as sahidas the end in the
as andadeiras leading-strings connection of: desejar 'boas
sahidas do anno velho e boas
entradas do anno novo wish-
ing a happy new year
os espinafres spinage
as exequias exequies, funeral
os imponderdveis imponderable
matters
os midlos brains
os nimbus (or nimbos) nimbus
os dculos spectacles
os parabens felicitation
as semcias ill treatment, cruelty
os stratus stratus
os trdpicos tropics.
KB. There may also be read funeraes instead of funeral;
but the plural, being a gallicism, is to be avoided as in-
correct.
15. Only in the Singular are employed the
names of sciences, arts, qualities and other abstract
nouns, of metals, elements and materials, as also the
infinitives applied as nouns and in their proper meaning.
Being used in the plural form, they have another,
though cognate, meaning. Ex.:
j os ambages subterfuge, excuse
os amoricos flirtation
os annaes annals
as b6das \
as nupcias J
os bredos notch-weed, spinage
os brdccolos broccoli
1 os cdnones church-law
i os cereaes cereals
os cirrus cirrus
os ciumes \ . ^
' OS Z&lOS f J J
os cumulus (or cumulos) cu-
mulus
direito the right, law, juris-
prudence
o desenho the (art of) drawing
a pintura the (art of) painting,
picture
a bondade the kind(li)ness
Plural: duties
o drawings
pictures
kindnesses
1 So according to modem grammarians. Others indicate
errata as subst- f. 2 } l- an d employ the singular o errata after the
; model o problema, o dilemma, o programma, etc. Errata is also
1 employed as subst. f. s. in the meaning of English errata.
264
Lesson 4.
o amor the love
a saude the health
o cdbre the copper
o fogo the fire
a seda the silk
o vidro the glass
o trigo the corn, wheat
panno the cloth ; shawl ;
sails
o ferro the iron
a tinta the ink
o ar the air
a dgua the water
o gesso the gypsum
o dever the being obliged;
duty
o andar the striding
Plural : beloved ones ; flirtation
toasts
coins or objects of
copper
fireplaces
> silks; bristles
window-panes
cereals; bread
shawls
chains
colouring, colours
prevailing winds ; cli-
mate
medicinal waters ; wa-
tering
figures in plaster
duty, obligation
stories, floors.
10. Oral Exercise. Exerdcio oral.
Please to put the sentences of the Reading Lesson I. in
the first Lesson into the Plural.
11. Thema.
Those gentlemen are German teachers and well instructed
authors. Some courteous Englishmen have been our amiable
guests these last months. On those fertile fields where a few
weeks ago still grew green seeds, are now only faded grasses
and flowers to be found. Among the quadrupeds there are
wild beasts and domestic animals. (Os) Dogs, cats, cows,
sheep, horses belong to the domestic animals; (the) lions,
wild cats, panthers, lynxes are beasts of prey; (the) hares,
foxes, stags, roes and other horned animals are game. The
magic wands are said to have the gift of finding the springs
out in the ground. There are many villages in the Alemtejo
with less than a hundred fires. Of glass are made drinking-
glasses, panes, spectacles, eyeglasses and telescopes, as well
as many other things. The funeral of the infant followed
very fast (== de perto) her wedding. The climate of the Isle
of Madeira is most beneficent for consumptive people. Also
the climate and the medicinal-waters of the Gerez in northern
Portugal are most famous. The State has the right to collect
new duties. The community sang a church-choir, while a
group of young men, boys and girls entuned in a loud voice
(pi.) Christian songs and hymns.
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 265
12. Yersao.
tigre e o lobo sao animaes ferozes. chumbo e o
ferro sao metaes pesados. A aguia e o abutre sao valentes
aves de rapina. ferro e a pedra sao duros. A torre e a
casa sao altas. A legoa e o kilometro sao distancias com-
pridas. cao e o gato sao animaes dom^sticos uteis.
diamante e a esmeralda sao pedras preciosas. sal e a pi-
menta sao temperos necessaries. As flores naturaes e as
(flores) artificiaes sao bonitas. A marinha inglesa e a (ma-
rinha) fraucesa sao fortes. As baleias e os tubaroes sao
1 grandes. vinho e a cerveja sao boas bebidas. Os proje"cteis
tinham-lhe penetrado os pulmoes.
13. Leitura.
Nuvens.
Da terra e do mar elevam-se vapores que se espalham pel a
atmosphera. Nas regioes elevadas da atmosphera esses vapores
i encontram urn ar frio; e ao contacto d'esse ar, os vapores
resfriam: resfriando, formam as nuvens. Da mesma maneira,
quando no espaco se encontram duas massas de ar, uma mais
1 quente e mimida do que a ontra, a mistura d'essas duas
massas de ar tambem da origem a nuvens. Estas sao pois
i pequenas gottas d'agua suspensas na atmosphera e provenientes
do resfriamento do vapor. Apertando o frio com ellas, essas
gottas, reunindo se r caem em chuva ; ou esfriando mais, tornam-
se solidos, caindo em forma de neve ou geada.
As nuvens teem varias formas : quando semelham mon-
\ tanhas d'algodoes, arredondadas, umas encastelladas por cima
sdas outras, chamam-se cumulus. Quando lembram pequenos
filamentos desligados de la cardada, denominam-se cirrus.
; Quando formam camadas delgadas e continuas, mais ou menos
extensas, limitadas por linhas horizontaes, teem o nome de
\stratus. E quando lembram um panno cinzento-escuro, fran-
jado ou esfarrapado nos bordos, chamam-se nimbus.
Os cumulus denominam-se tambem algodoes, e sao mais
frequentes no verao do que no inverno. -Formados de manha 7
; desapparecem geralmente de tarde, quando se nao misturam
uns com os outros e dao chuva. Os cirrus, chamados tambem
,rabos-de-gallo, sao as nuvens mais elevadas. Annunciam mu-
de tempo: chuva no verao, e frio ou gelo no inverno.
Os stratus veem-se em geral ao por-do-sol, perto do hori-
zonte. Os nimbus chamam-se vulgarmente nuvens de chuva,
e sao conhecidos ainda por tiguaceiros.
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
266 Lesson 5.
Conyersa^ao.
Como se chama a mulher de um abegao? de um archi-
duque? de um barao? de um campones? de um
cidadao ? de um conde ? de um czar ? de um duque ?
de um embaixador? de um imperador? de um
marque's ? de um principe ? de um rei ? de um sultao ?
de um visconde?
Qual e a forma feminina de doutor, auctor, artista, in-
terprete, hospede, mestre, deus, mdrtyr, conviva, in-
digena ?
Como se chama a femea do bode? do boi? do cao? do
carneiro? do cavallo? do gallo? do pato? do leao?
do pavao? do peru? do veado? do lobo?
Fifth Lesson.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns
(continued).
16. Difference of meaning between the singular
and plural forms.
(a) Besides those nouns mentioned in 15 and
other analogous words, there are such the Plural of
which has a second meaning besides that of the Sin-
gular. Please to notice:
a arma the weapon, arm as armas arms, weapons
a bexiga the bladder as bexigas small-pox
a corte the court as Cortes House of Commons
a entranha the bowels as entranhas heart, character
a feria the pay, s alary ; list as ferias holidays
of appointments
o folle the pair of bellows os folles bagpipe
a fonte the spring as fontes temples
o gSnero the gender os generos victuals
a letra the letter, character as letras literature
o miolo the crumb, braia os miolos brains
o dculo the telescope os dculos spectacles
o zelo the zeal os zelos jealousy
a venta the nostril as ventas nose
a vespera the eve as vesperas vespers.
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 267
(b) Some substantives indicate in the singular form
the male individual and in the plural the totality of
the respective male and female persons:
pai the father os pais the parents
o filho the son os filhos the children
o it-moo the brother os irmdos the brothers and
sisters
o criado the man-servant os criados the men- and maid-
servants
o avo the grandfather os ayos the grandfather and
grandmother
o tio the uncle os ^'os the uncle and aunt
9 conde the count os condes count and countess
10 homem the man os hdmens mankind.
17. For the Plural of the Compound Words
sure and satisfying rules cannot be given. However, it
may be noticed that:
(a) those words compound by an unalterable par-
icle and a noun, add an -s to the latter: antedatas,
wbrenomes, abaixo-assignados ;
(b) those compound by a verb and a noun, add
she -s of the plural only to the noun: passa-tempos,
[ iorta-bandeiras, guarda-chuvas, girasoes, quebramares ;
(c) words compound of two nouns add the -s only
the last: guarda-portoes, beira-mares, couve-flores,
lestre-salas. On the contrary : a porta-cocheira (= porta
e cocheira). portas-cocheiras\ tenentes-generaes; tenentes-
oroneis-, capitdes-tenentes.
(d) Those formed of a substantive and an adjective
ake the -s of the plural partly only at the end, partly
3r both elements e.g.: as aguardentes, os cantochtios,
s mao-cheias, os meio-dias, as meia-noites, os salvo-con-
uctos. But: os amores-perfeitos; os cavattos-marinhos.
(e) Those formed of two verbs take the -s at the
nd: os bule-bules, os vae-vens.
(f) Of nouns compound of three words, those joined
y de generally take the plural form for the first word,
ids being a substantive; the others add the -s on their
ad: os paus de cahellewo-, os paus de lacre\ but mal-
je-queres.
268 Lesson 5.
18. Observations on the Pronunciation of the
Plural of Certain Nouns,
A certain number of substantives ending in -o,
whose accented vowel of the penultima is a close 6 [o],
change this 6 in the plural into open 6 [v] e.g. : o ovo
['ovu] the egg, ovos fwuf] (cf. Part. I, 74).
These substantives to which belongs also avo are:
abrolho cliff, rock, avo grandfather, cachopo boy; carogo
kernel, stone; clioco cuttle-fish, brooding, adj.: hatched;
o choro weeping, composto mixture, corcovo jump, ca-
priole, corno horn, coro choir, chorus, corpo body, cdrvo
raven, despojo cover, destrogo ruins, escolho reef, esforgo
effort, esposo husband (pi. also esposos besides esposos),
estbrvo hindrance, fogo to fire, fol(e)go breath, rest, forno
oven, fdro jurisdiction, forro lining, fosso ditch, imposto
duties, jogo play, miolo brains, olho eye, osso bone, ovo
egg, pescogo neck, pogo well, porco fJeSc, porto harbour,
posto post, pdvo people, preposto or proposto substitute,
reforgo supply, renovo shoot, spring, rogo demand, soro
whey, serum, soccorro succour, supposto supposition,
tijolo brick, tojo gorse, tordo throstle, tor-no lathe,
tremdco grain of lapine, troco small coin, trogo stump,
fragment, body of soldiers, etc.
Thus: dbrolhos, avos, cachopos, carogos etc.
This modification does not take place in the words
adbrno ornament, a tire, amor love, bolsa purse, lolso
pocket, estojo case, box, follia leaf, folho flounce, frill,
globo globe, gosdo grease, fat, gorra cap, gorro hood,
cape, goso joy, enjoyment; gorto taste; goto, drop; molko
sauce, tronco trunk, stump; thus: adornos, bolsos, estb-
jos, etc.
14. Theiua.
Among the persons who assisted at the funeral (exequies)
of the brother and sister, there were besides their parents ;
their grandparents and the servants, more than a hundred
men, but only a few women. All men are mortal. Of what
died the children of the count and countess? They are said
to have succumbed to the measles or small-pox. The arms
over the chief entry has been covered with crape in sign
of mourning. To make these tasks correct, every care is to
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 269
e employed and particular attention to be bestowed upon gender
and number of the nouns. The shopkeeper of the next corner
sells victuals and other goods of all kinds. I bought there
5 pounds of sugar, 2 kilos of coffee, 3 litres of wine, and
6 J /2 meters of ribbon, as also half a dozen pairs of gloves
and three dozens and a half of handkerchiefs. In Lisbon
there are in the halls (= portal or vestibulo) of the better
houses doorkeepers sitting behind ornamental tables, to give
information to the visitors and to receive and hand over to
the residents visiting-cards or any kind of commissions. The
Portuguese peasants like to eat boiled grains of lupine. (The)
tastes differ: while some like pork, others prefer eggs,
and others still like sauces best. The Portuguese woods are
j full of gorse, a prickly plant of which there are various kinds.
, These gorses generally grow on dry ground and bear (= dar)
yellow blossoms.
15. Versao.
Todas as segundas e quintas-feiras os guarda-livros d'aquel-
j las casas d'exportacao teem mais que fazer do que nos outros
dias da semana, por serem vesperas da partida dos paqu6tes.
| As vezes nao bastam os esforc.os d'esses empregados para
senhorear todos os trabalhos, mas e" precise pedir reforQO aos
: prepostos e mais empregados. Destes tro^os d'arvore reben-
taram alguns renovos, e por entre estes destroys de tijolos e
esses abrolhos ha muitas gavinhas de hera agarradas as fendas
i pelas adhesivas. Os zelos muitas vezes sao signal, ou de poucos
miolos ou de poucas entranhas. Chama-se Cortes ao parla-
mento portugugs, assim como ao edificio, onde esta o parla-
mento; de ordinario sao abertas no dia dois de Janeiro. Em
j Lisboa ha guarda-portoes em todas as melhores casas particu-
! lares. Nos mercados compram-se muito baratas todas as hor-
\ tali9as, taes como as couve-flores, os brdccolos, os espinafres,
j as aze"das, os brfidos e outras hervas; e os rnal-me-queres e
! amores-perfeitos as mao-cheias.
16. Leitura.
Tomada de Santarem 1 (1147).
Na noite do sabbado, destinada para o assalto, tornava-se
probabilissimo que os atalaias e roldas 2 estivessem descuidados.
Se, como parece, o calculo foi este, calculo na verdade nao
i ^___
1 Santarem, a town upon the Tagus in the province of
Estremadura, the ancient Scalabis of the Eomans and once one
' of the strongest bulwarks of the Saracens.
2 Rolddj antiquated, modernly ronda = patrol.
270 Lesson 5.
exempto de perfidia, as esperancas dos christaos falharam em
parte. No logar onde habitualmente nao havia sentinellas,
descobriam-se agora duas, que mutuamente se espertavam
a vozes.
A pequena hoste, cuja rectaguarda o principe l fechava,
parou entao no meio de uma seara, esperando que os vigias
adormecessem com a modorra do quarto d'alva. Largas horas
Ihes deviam parecer estas em que esperavam; mas os dois
musulmanos cederam por fim ao somno. Pelo tecto da casa
de um olleiro contigua ao muro, Mem Eamires coseu-se com
este e procurou com a ponta da lan$a segurar uma escada as
ameias; mas, falhando-lhe o tiro, a escada caiu com grande
ruido. Nao titubeou elle entre a vida e a morte e, curvando-se,
ergueu sobre os hombros um soldado, que lancou as maos a
aresta da muralha, e, pulando acima, pode amarrar a escada
a uma das ameias. N'um relance o alferes subiu com o pendao
real e hasteou-o. Quasi a um temgo Mem Ramires se achou
ao pe d'elle. Tudo isto foi obra de um instante ; mas o ruido
despertara, de feito, as sentinellas. Olharam : o pavoroso estan-
darte do tyranno Ibu Errik estava la como o espectro da morte.
Estupefactos, perguntaram ambos com voz tomada: Quern
sois? Fora impossivel enganal-os. Tres vozes clamaram em
brados confuses: Nazarenos! Tres eram tambem os christaos
que se achavam no adarve. Mem Eodrigues respondeu com
o grito de guerra: Santiago e rei Affonso! (Continua.)
Conyersaqao.
Que e" Santarem? Como se chamava antigamente?
Que importancia tinha sob o dominio dos saracenos
(mouros) ?
Por quern foi tomada? E em que anno?
Quern e"ra Affonso Henriques? E quando reinava?
Qual era o calculo dos assaltadores ?
Quern deu o primeiro assalto? e como?
Qual foi o resultado d'essa tentativa?
Como reparou Mem Ramires o mallogro?
Como se descreve o encontro dos portugue"sens com os
saracenos ?
1 Affonso Henriques, first king of Portugal, 11281185.
Use of the Article. 271
Sixth Lesson,
Use of the Article.
19. The definite Article (artigo definido) is not
only employed before nouns (nomes communs) but also
in the following cases:
(a) It substantiates any other particle, any letter
or even a whole sentence employed as a subject, attri-
bute, or object, namely:
(a) attributive adjectives: o hello, o licito, o
sublime',
(p) infinitives: A natureza fez o comer para o
viver. gabares-te de sdbio mostra seres igno-
rante;
(Y) prepositions: adverbs, conjunctions, letters
e.g. : Defender o contra d'uma questao.
como, o quando, o porque, o A(bc) ;
(6) phrases: nao posso dos negligences e o nao
quero dos contumazes, valem quasi o mesmo.
(b) It changes appellatives into proper names; for
instance o Porto ( harbour); a Extremadura (= the
, extreme border) ; a Beira (= brink, bank) ; o Funchal
(= a field set with fennel) ; a Bahia (= bay) ; o Rio de
Janeiro ; a Granja ( farm, grange), o Espinho (= spine)
' Portuguese bathing-places ; a Terceira (= the third),
. island of the Azores.
(c) On the other hand, it changes proper names into
1 appellatives : os Albtiquerques, os Castros, os Camoes i.e.
prominent naval leaders such as Affonso d 1 Albuquer-
que and D. Joao de Castro, or famous poets like Camoes ;
for instance : Gil Vicente foi ckamado o Plauto portugues
Gil Vicente was called the Portuguese Plautus.
N.B. Also family names indicating totality may be em-
ployed in the plural.
(d) The definite Article is also employed with proper
names preceded by an adjective (young, old, little, poor
; included) or followed by an apposition e.g. : o eloquente
Cicero ; Guilherme o Conquistador, young Henry o joven
Henrique.
272 Lesson 6.
Are excepted from this rule santo (Santo) and sao
(Sao) Saint, as also the ordinary numbers employed
with names of regents, and several other appositions:
Santo Antonio e o padroeiro de Lisboa. A biblia, tradu-
zida por Sao Jeronymo, e conhecida pelo nome de Vul-
gata. Luis Quatorze, Carlos-Quinto, Alexandre Magno]
Deus Poderoso.
(e) The definite article is employed with the names
of the seasons : a primavera Spring, no verdo in Summer,
durante o inverno during winter.
(f) Sometimes the definite article is found without
a substantive, which is to be substituted. It then often
corresponds to our that, those. Ex. : As merces que recebi
sao manifestas a todos; aos de fora com esponto da sua
grandeza, aos de casa com inveja de minha fortuna.
(g) Contrary to the English, the definite article is
generally employed before a possessive adjective, not
indicating parentship : o meu jar dim, a vossa casa etc. ;
but minha prima, seu marido etc.
N.B. This rule is not alway strictly observed.
The word indicating possession being a pronoun,
it has no article^ Este livro e meu (this book is mine)',
esse e teu, aquelle nao e nosso.
(h) The definite article is employed with parts oi
the body or its clothing, bodily qualities or states,
and also wherever the relation between possessor and
possession is evident (in English there is employed the
indefinite article or the possessive adjective instead).
Ella tern os cabellps louros e os olhos pretos.
She has fair hair and black eyes.
Falava com a cabega erguida e o brago estendido.
He spoke with his head raised and his arm extended
Maria 6 muito paredda com a mde.
Mary is much resembling her mother.
Tiraram os chapeus.
They took their hats off.
Calgdmos as luvas we put our gloves on.
Ella tern a garganta inflammada.
She has her throat inflamed.
Use of the Article. 273
Elle tern a bocca rasgada, as pernas compridas, a cinta
delgada.
He has a large mouth, long legs, a fine waist.
Ter uma dor de denies, uma dor de cabega.
To have a tooth -ache, a head-ache, as in English, but in
the plural form: ter dores de denies, de cabega.
20. The definite Article is omitted:
(a) before proper names (cf. however 19, (b), (c)
and (d).
N.B. In familiar speech the article is often employed
before names of persons : Carlos foi levar a carta. Ber-
nardino Machado e republicano. Also the article may be put
before the names of well-known artists e.g., As Sodas de
Cana, pintadas pelo Veronese, e a Kermesse do Rubens . . .
Exc. : Are excepted from this rule the names of the
seas, rivers, mountains and continents, as well as certain
countries and provinces which are always employed
with the article (o Atlantico, o Mondeao, o Caramulo,
a Europa, a Alemanha, a Japao, a Extremadura etc. ;
but without the article: Portugal, Trds-os-Montes). Also
the article is found always before a plural name of
countries: as Indias; os (dois) Algarves; os Estados
Unidos (do Brasil) etc.
(b) before nouns, especially abstract ones, which (a)
lare quite generally employed, or ((3) as an attribute
i e.g. : Pobreza nao e mleza poverty is no crime. Padecer
\por, fbrga e fraqu&sa; nao desanimar nos trabalhos, neces-
isidade. Yet you may also read and say: Inveja e um
vicio envy is a vice.
(c) in vocatives i.e., addressing persons or personi-
fied beings : Filhos (my sons) jd sei que nao posso durar
muito. ffervas do prado, vossa vida e morte e innocente
fYe herbs of the meadow, your life and death are in-
nocent.
(d) with the names of the months: Estamos em
november. Foi em margo do anno passado que . . .
However: Todo o (mez de) Janeiro esteve frigidissimo.
(e) with the names of diseases, generally employed
in English with the article: Elle tern bexigas (the small-
pox), tiriha sarampo (the measles) : tern typho he has the
i typhus.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 18
274 Lesson 6.
21. The article, though generally omitted before
names of islands and towns, is employed:
(a) when they are accompanied by an adjective or
some other attributive determination e.g. : terremoto
de 1755 destruiu quasi completamente a velha Lisbba] da
qual a Lisboa d'hoje e muito differ ente]
(b) with those proper names formed by an appel-
lative (cf. 19, (b): a Madeira, a Guarda (town of
Portugal); o Cairo (formed after the Arabian).
22. Contrary to the English, the definite article
is generally employed:
(a) before material and abstract nouns in the nomi-
native (as a subject, sometimes also as a predicate).
ar e mais leve do que a dgua air is lighter than water;
Cf.: vinho e feito de uvas . . . esse liquido e (o) vinho
... vinagre e vinlio azedo . . . o vinagre e feito de
vinho . . . Tambem se fas vinagre de cerveja . . . da beter-
raba se faz assucar. chumbo e mais pesado que o ouro.
medo 6 mau conselheiro ;
(b) before nouns which, in contrast to 20, (b),
are employed in a restrictive meaning e.g.:
A pobreza de bens mater iaes ndo e villeza, mas sim a
pobreza de dignidade.
Poverty of material goods is no disgrace, but poverty
of dignity is.
Antes a pobreza honrada,
Do que a riqueza roubada.
Rather honourable poverty than robbed riches.
A rega ou a chuva excessivas prejiidicam as plantas.
Excessive watering or rains damage the plants.
(c) before the cardinal points North and South and
before the names of the feasts e.g.: para o sul, para
o norte, ao sul, ao norte ; e.g. : da norte para o sul from
North to South; but: de leste or d'este, a (or ao) deste
from East to West; pela Pdsc(h)oa about Easter, ao
Natal at Christmas;
(d) with collective names of corporations, govern-
ments, the names of sciences, religious creeds, seasons,
metals, etc., as:
nobility a nobreza monarchy a monarchia
government o governo history a historia
Use of the Article. 275
geography a geographia Judaism o judaismo
philosophy a philosophia winter o inverno
posterity a posteridade spring a primavera
mankind a humanidade gold, silver o ouro, a prata
Christianity o christianismo iron, steel o ferro, o ago.
(e) With nouns denoting a whole class, genus, or
species, as:
Man is mortal o homem e mortal.
The voices of animals are very different.
As vozes dos animaes sao muito differentes.
The rich (men) are not always happy.
Os ricos nao sao sempre felizes.
(f) before the following and other nouns taken in
a general sense:
Man o homem hell o inferno
men os liomens tea o chd
Nature a natureza dinner o jantar
heaven o ceu breakfast o almogo
earth a terra supper a ceia.
(g) also in compositions of adjectives and abstract
nouns, which in English are used without the article,
it cannot be omitted (cf, (b) examples) e.g.:
human understanding o intendimento humano
human power a forga humana
human nature a natureza humana
human life a vida do homem
high life a alta roda or sociedade
ancient history a historia antiga
modern history a historia moderna
universal history a historia universal
high treason a alta traigao
royal favour a real graga
divine religion a divina (or santa) religiao
English history a histdria inglesa
English poetry a poesia inglesa
kingly power o poder real.
(h) "Town" in the terms "to go to town, to live
in town," etc., is ir d (viver na) cidade. Also the names
iof streets, squares and public buildings are employed
with the article. A rua de Garrett, do Ouro, Garrett
Street, Gold Street; a Praga de Dom Pedro Quarto, o
>Eocio Rocio Square; Largo de Camoes Camoes Place.
18*
276 Lesson 6.
(i) Geographical names are, contrary to the English,
generally employed with the article (cf. 1, (a), 3; (b), 2
20 (a) Exc. and 21) : a Inglaterra England, o Vesuvio
Vesuvius, a Alsdcia Alsace, a JBritanha Brittany, etc.
The terms Western, Southern, etc., which form one idea
with the following names, are rendered in Portuguese
by do oeste, do sul, etc. or occidental, oriental, septentrional,
meridional e.g.: Eastern Africa a Africa de leste or
oriental. Southern Portugal o Portugal meridional or
de sul.
(k) as in English the names of the months are
employed without article, if not meant in a restrictive
sense: Janeiro geralmente e frio: o Janeiro d'este anno
esteve excessivamente frio.
(1) with the article are employed todo all, the whole,
every, ambos, ambas both, and qual which, when rela-
tive. Todo o pais the whole country; todo o homem
every man, o mesmo autor o qual jd citei the same
author whom I cited already. Todos os mares os quaes
percorri All the seas I ran through. Ambos os irniaos,
ambos as minhas mdos both the brothers, both my hands,
(m) The article is employed in certain idiomatic
expressions, as:
dar os bons dias to say good morning
dar as boas festas (os pardbens) to send the compliments
of the season, to felicitate
dar os pfaames a alguem to condole with a person
fazer as suas despedidas to bid good-bye
pela manha, pela tarde in the morning, in the after-
noon
ds sete horas at 7 o'clock
ao meio-dia at midday
saber o portugues to know Portuguese (cf. : falar por-
tugues).
a maioria, os mais dos homens most men
as mais das vezes mostly
viver da mao a boca to live from hand to mouth.
ds armas! to arms!
17. Tema.
The ostrich has long legs, a long neck, and very shod
wings. The fox has a more slender form than the wolf. Mj
children have fair hair and blue eyes. Do you know thai
girl with the brown eyes? Yes, I know her; she is th<
Use of the Article. 277
daughter of a German in Alsace. In Germany people have
mostly light eyes; the more towards south, the more dark
eyes are met with. In Northern Europe most persons have
flaxen hair. America is bathed in the east by the Atlantic
Sea, and in the west by the Pacific. Do you learn French?
Not yet; I shall learn it as soon as I know Portuguese. I
thought I had already heard you speaking Portuguese. In-
deed, but I do not yet know it well. Folar, from the French
poularde (= fattened poultry), is a present given in Portugal
at Easter, in some places also at Christmas. At Christmas time
you may send the compliments of the season from Christmas
Eve until Epiphany (dia dos [tres] reis [magos]). I wish you
a happy New Year with all my heart (see 14). My sister
has her throat inflamed and my friend has a head-ache.
January was very cold. Japan is now a great Power. The
i Emperor of China died young.
18. Versao.
Portugal continental e insular.
Portugal, a Lusitania dos antigos, e" um dos estados da
i Europa occidental. Elle occupa quasi toda a parte d'oeste da
peninsula iberica, tendo por limites ao norte (N.) e a leste
(E.) o reino de (a) Espanha, ao sul (S.) e a oeste (0. or W.) o
oceano. seu maior comprimento, desde Chaves junto a
, Melga90 ate ao cabo de Santa Maria no Algarve, e de 103
leguas, a sua maior largura de n ascent e a poente desde Campo
! Maior ate ao cabo da Roca, e de 44 leguas. A superficie 6
de 3150 leguas quadradas. A populaQao no continente 6
poueo mais de 5 milhoes. A capital e a cidade de Lisboa
' sobre o Tejo. Outras cidades importantes sao: o Porto,
i Coimbra, Vizeu, Braga, Setiibal. Comprehende este reino,
ale"m do continente, as ilhas chamadas adjacentes, que sao as
dos AQores, da Madeira (vulgarmente denominada a Ilha) e
Porto Santo. Outras ilbas sao o archipelago de Cabo Verde,
as ilhas de Sao Thom6 e Principe. archipelago de Cabo
Verde forma dois grupos, a saber: o de Barlavento ao norte
que se compoe das ilhas de Santo Antao, Santa Luzia, Sao
Vicente ; Sao Nicolau, Sal, Boa Vista; e o de Sotavento ao
sul, o qual consta das ilhas de Sao Thiago, Maio, Fogo e
Brava. Na Oceania ha a ilha de Timor, que serve de degredo.
Conversa^ao.
Onde esta (ou fica) situado Portugal?
De que peninsula faz parte?
Quaes sao os seus limites?
Qual e o seu maior comprimento?
278 Lesson 7.
E qual e a sua maior largura?
Qual < a sua snperficie?
De que numero e a populate?
Quaes sao as cidades mais importantes ?
Quaes sao as chamadas ilhas adjacentes?
De quantos grupos se compoe o archipelago de Cabo
Verde?
E quaes sao?
Seventh Lesson.
Use of the Article (continued).
23. The Definite Article before the Attribute.
(a) The nouns nome, titulo, mes, fdlta are joined to
the following noun or proper name (if this be not a geni-
tive) by de without article, o nome de Defensor, titulo
de rei, mes de dbril, a fdlta d'dgua. (Of.: titulo do rei
de Portugal era "Fidelissimo" ; Mingua e a fdlta do ne-
cessdrio).
(b) The appellatives ilha, cidade, villa, reino, estado,
provincia, porto, rua, imperio, regido, serra, cabo, etc., are
joined to the following proper name by de with or
without the article (see Task 18).
N.B. In a mere enumeration of names the appellative
with de and article is omitted (id.).
The employment of the article and its form after
these appellatives depends on the following proper name
being used, when alone, with or without the article,
and whether this be in the masculine or feminine, sin-
gular or plural form e.g.:
A ilha de Timor, do Fogo, do Haiti, da Madeira,
da Trindade, as ilhas de Hyeres, dos Azores, das Ca-
ndrias. Yet without article: a ilha Terceira (i.e., the
third);
A cidade de Setubal, do Porto, do Funchal, da
Guarda, da Figueira da Foz, de Sao Cosme, das Pedras
Salgadas, das Torres Vedras, etc.
The same with villa, porto, if these appellatives
are not a part of the proper name as, for instance, in
the following:
Use of the Article. 279
Villa Franca. Villa Franca de Xira, Villa Franca
do Campo, Villa Fria, Villa Vigosa, Porto-Alegre, Porto
Cabreiro, Porto de Mots, Porto da Guarda, etc.
Cabo 1 dc Sao Vicente, da Boca, Cabo Delgado,
Cabo Negro, do Norte, da Praia, da Boa Esperanca, das
Formentas.
A rua (travessa, escada, calcada, praca, o beco, ca-
minho, largo, caes, passadigo) de El-Eei, de Joao de Deus,
de D. Fernando, do Forno do Tijolo, da Fdbrica das
Sedas, das Cavallarigas do Infante, dos Cardeaes de Jesus,
do Sodre, do Terreiro Publico.
iinperio de AUemanha, do Japao; o reino de
\ Portugal, os Estados Unidos do Brasil, o imperio da
India.
As provincias da Beira, da Estramadura, do Alem-
tejo, de Trds-os- Monies.
(c) Rio is always employed without de if indi-
cating a river e.g.: o rio Douro, o rio Tejo, o rio Lima;
but o Rio de Janeiro.
24. The Definite Article and the Apposition.
1. A noun in apposition is generally employed wit-
, liout the article, when following the name : A rainha
D. Leonor, regente do reino, confidra o governo do Alem-
', tejo a D. Jodo, Mestre d'Aviz. Estivemos no Porto,
cidade episcopal, a segunda da monarchia em popula^ao.
2. The apposition is employed with the article in
, the' following cases :
(a) When the proper name is preceded by a title
,(not being Dom, Dona, Frei, Sor, etc.): doutor Nogu-
eira] a menina Maria-, o padre Jose. (But Dom Carlos
Berquo, Dona Carolina Michaelis', Frei Luis de Sousa\
Sor Marianna.) N.B. If these titles are preceded by
\senhor, senJiora, rei, rainha, they too are employed with
the article:
a ex-rainha Dona Amelia, o ex-rei (El-rei) Dom Ma-
nuel, etc.
A senhora Dona Beatriz Artgelo foi a primeira mulher em
Portugal que em 1911 votou nas eleigoes parlamentares.
1 Cabo, making part of the name, is written with a capital
letter, as also Villa, Porto, Rio in the same case.
280 Lesson 7.
(b) When it is an historical addition after a personal
name, without being an ordinal number e.g.:
Dom Joao II (Segundo), o Principe perfeito, iniciou a
epoca dos grandes descdbertas dos Portugueses.
(c) As a superlative (which, not being one ending
in -or, may also folloiv the noun):
Trindade Coelho, o melhor contista moderno e um dos
caracteres mais nobres que Portugal teve, morreu em
9 de agosto 1908.
0s Lusiadas e o titulo do poema de Camoes, poeta
portugues o mais celebre do seu tempo.
(d) When indicating something notorious or famous.
Foi Vasco de Gama, o grande navegador, que descobriu
o caminho maritimo das Indias.
25. The Indefinite Article and the Predicative
Noun.
1. The predicative noun is employed without
article and preposition, when indicating in a general
way a state, profession, title, parentship, office or em-
ployment, dignity, character, nationality, etc., with the
verbs :
(a) ser, ficar, fazer-se, tornar-se, dizer-se, nascer,
morrer, parecer, padecer etc. Ex.:
Dizia-se correligiondrio dos monarchistas } para ficar
deputado.
He passed himself off as a partisan. of the monarchists,
in order to remain a deputy.
Meu amigo e portugues e auctor; tornou-se sdbio.
My friend is a Portuguese and an author; he became
a learned man.
Bern que tivesse nascido filho do povo, morreu presidente.
Though he was born a child of the vulgar, he died a
president.
(b) nomear to nominate, appoint, acclamar, pro-
clamar to proclaim, eleger to elect, crer, consider ar, jul-
gar to think, armar cavalleiro to create a knight.
Dom Joao I. foi eleito Mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado
cavalleiro por seu pae, (o rei) Dom Pedro I. Em
1385 foi acclamado rei de Portugal.
Use of the Article. 281
2. The predicative noun is employed without ar-
ticle, but with preposition after the verbs escolher (-se)
para to chose (to be chosen); passar por, ser tido por
to pass for, to be taken for ; tomar or ter por to think,
consider.
Escolheram-se os homens mais resolutos para combatentes;
escolheu-se para general urn capitdo experimentado.
Passava por homem capaz e recto, sempre o tinha tornado
(or tido) por tal.
3. The indefinite article is omitted with a noun in
apposition, as:
A Ceia dos Cardeaes, comedia por Julio Dantas.
The Cardinals' Supper, a comedy by Julio Dantas.
4. Omitted also on the title-page of a book:
Grammdtica portuguesa a Portuguese Grammar.
Historia da Inglaterra a History of England.
5. A, an when used in the sense of "per" is ren-
dered by por or the definite article:
Five pounds a month cinco libras por (or o) mes.
So much a lesson tanto por (or a) ligao.
To give so much a head dar tanto por (or a) cabega.
26. Repetition of the Article.
(a) The article, as also its substitutes e.g., the
possessive or demonstrative adjectives, is repeated before
several nouns or adjectives expressing diversity of
meaning: Vird a julgar os vivos e os mortos. Os soldados
mogos e os velhos.
(b) The article is not repeated when those words
do not express diversity, but similarity, even though
their gender be different e.g.: "Entre as ruinas e mo-
numentos antiquissimos que se cncontram ainda pelo
pais . . "
(Concerning the adjective in the plural see Lesson 9.)
19. Thema.
Harbours, bays, capes, provinces and towns of Portugal.
(See the map in the innerside of the front cover of this book.)
Portugal being a shore-land (pais d beira-mar), it has on
its coast some important harbours, where ships may sail into
282 Lesson 7.
and cast anchor in order to embark and disembark passengers
and goods. The principal harbours of Portugal are: that of
Lisbon, the best of all and one of the largest and most beau-
tiful in the world. There may enter it at any hour of the
day or night ships of any size, and there would be room
for (= caber) all the ships in the world. Following the
coast from north to south, we meet with the following
harbours: that of 1 Caminha, Vianna, Espozende, Povoa de
Varzim, Leixoes, an artificial harbour near the fishing-
villages of Lega and Mattosinhos; Sao Joao da Foz near
Oporto; Aveiro, Figueira da Foz, Vieira, S. Martinho; those
of (da) Ericeira, of Cascaes, a beautiful bay called "the Por-
tuguese Riviera"; of Setiibal, a very ancient commercial town
situated on the Ria 2 do Sado; of Sines, Villa Nova de Mil-
fontes, Sagres, a harbour made famous by the Infant Dom Hen-
rique with the surname "the Navigator" ; Lagos, a bay where
the English fleet used to have its manoeuvres; Villa Nova de
Portimdo, Faro, Tavira, Villa Eeal de Santo Antonio.
As Portugal is a littoral, the land stretches now and then
into the ocean (tr. : pelo mar dentro), forming greater and
smaller capes or points. The principal capes of Portugal are
the following: The cape of Mondego, of Carvoeiro, da Eoca,,
the most occidental cape of Europe; the cape of Espichel,
of Sines, of Saint Vincent, of Santa Maria.
Portugal has eight provinces, each of which has its capital:
that of the Mirilio, the most northern province, is called
Braga; that of Trds-os- Montes : Braganga; that of the province
of Douro: Oporto; that of the Beira-Alta: Vizeu; of the Beira-
Baixa: Guarda; of Estremadura: Lisbon, at the same time
capital of the country; of Alemtejo: ficora; and that of Al-
garve: Faro.
20. Yersao.
Portugal ultramarino.
(Vide o mappa na parte antero-interior da capa d'este livro.)
As provincias ultramarinas, vastos territories situ ados na
Africa, Asia e Oceania 3 , e sujeitos a, um regimen adminastra-
tivo especial, comprehendem : na Africa: ale"m das provincias
insulares de Cabo- Verde (see Less. 18), S. Thome e Principe, as
continentaes de Guine, Angola e Mo9ambique; na Asia: o
1 Substitute always "that of."
2 Ria is the mouth of a river enlarged to a sea. (Of. on
the map: Sado, Tejo; Ria de Vigo (in Spain).
3 Oceania or Oceania. The former accentuation is scientific,
the latter popular.
Use of the Article. 283
estado da India e a provincia de Macau; na Oceania: o dis-
tricto autonomo de Timor.
A provincia da Guin compoe-se de territories na costa
occidental da Africa, e de muitas ilhas. D'essas ilhas, as mais
importantes sao: Bissau, Bolama, Jatte, todas perto da costa;
e mais ao largo as 12 ilhas do archipelago de Bijagos. A
provincia de Angola esta quasi toda no continente da A-
frica, pois defronte da costa apenas tem uma ilha de areia.
seu territorio 6 enorme, e alguns o avaliam em um milhao
e 300 mil kilometres quadrados. A capital de Angola 3 a
cidade de Loanda; e as suas principaes povoac.oes, alem de
i Loanda, sao as seguintes : Cabinda, Ambaca, Malange, Benguella
e Mossamedes. -- Mozambique, provincia ultramarina na costa
1 oriental da Africa, e formada por extensos territorios litoraes
e ainda por muitas ilhas fronteiras, proximo e ao longo da
costa. A provincia comprehends os districtos de Mozambique,
Zambezia, Inhambane e Lourenzo Marques etc. A capital
e a cidade de Mozambique, situada na ilha do mesmo nome.
As suas principaes povoa^oes, alem da capital, sao: Quelimane,
Inhambane, Lourenzo Marques, Sofala. Estado da India
comprehende os territorios de Goa (capital : Nova Goa ou
Pangim), de Damao e de Dia. A provincia de Macau e for-
mada de parte de uma peninsula a entrada do rio de Cantao, e
de duas ilhas muito proximas d'aquella: Taipa e Colovane. A
cidade de Macau, capital d'esta provincia, occupa quasi toda
i a parte portuguesa da peninsula a entrada do rio de Cantao.
districto de Timor consta de parte da ilha de Timor e de
uma pequena ilha, chamada de Pulo-Cambing. A ilha de Timor
j e" uma das ilhas do archipelago de Sonda, archipelago que
alguns geographos modernos entendem pertencer a Asia e nao
i a Oceania. Dilly, capital do districto portugues de Timor fica
na costa septentrional da ilha.
Foi durante o reinado de D. Joao I e sub a direcQao de
D. Henrique o Navegador, seu filho, que se descobriram mais
de 360 le"guas da costa africana, desde o cabo Bojador ate" a Serra
Leoa, e as formosas ilhas do Atlantico, de que foram ventu-
rosas primicias as ilhas de S. Miguel, S a - Maria, Terceira,
Azores, Porto Santo e Madeira.
Conyersa^ao.
Quaes sao os portos principaes de Portugal?
Quaes sao os seus principaes cabos, seguindo do norte
para o sul?
Quantas provincias tem esse reino?
Quaes sao os nomes d'ellas e das suas capitaes?
Que se entende por Portugal ultramarino?
284 Lesson 8.
Quaes sao as suas colonias africanas?
Como se chamam as principaes povoa^oes de Angola?
de Mozambique?
De que territories se compoe o Estado da India?
De que e formada a provincia de Macau?
De que consta o districto de Timor?
Eighth Lesson.
Omission of the Article.
(Cf. 20, 21, 24 (1) a, 25, 1 and 2).
27. The article (or its substitute) is omitted:
(a) in mere numerations (cf. 23 (b) N.B.) e.g.:
Roubou-lhe reUgio, corrente, anneiSj tudo.
(b) often with nem . . . nem neither . . . nor (also often
omitted in English):
N^isto nao ha nem honra nem proveito. Eu m nem casa
nem jardim.
(c) after jdrnais and nunca before the subject, if
not determinate:
Nunca honra maior foi offerecida a ninguem.
Never a greater honour was offered to anybody.
Jdmais haverd amigo mais leal.
(d) in sentences denoting doubt, negation as well
as in questions expressing uncertainty, supposition, or
negation :
Duvido que haja qualidade melhor.
I doubt whether there be a better quality.
Nao havia coragao mais nobre do que o d'elle.
There was no heart more generous than his.
Tens amigo dedicado, e>n que possas fiar-te?
Have you a devoted friend that you may depend upon ?
Cabega de rapaz sobre a qual esses olhos admiraveis
pousassem um instante, era cabe$a perdida.
Any young man's head those admirable eyes rested upon
for a moment, was lost.
Jd se viu pessoa mais ingrata?
Was there ever seen a more ungrateful person?
Omission of the Article.
285
(e) before a noun or substantiated
iployed in a general meaning e.g.:
estado e de guerra.
The situation is that of war.
participle
pais ndo se resigna jd a situagao de vencido.
The country resigns itself no longer to the situation
of a vanquished (nation).
(f) before the adjectives tao, outro, tal, qual, tal
quad, qual outro, semelhante, igual, meio, certo, tamanho
(also subst.), and the substantives mtmero, parte, porcao,
quantidade, quantia, somma, gente, pessoa, coisa.
(N.B. Before the nouns and certo the article may be
employed.)
Em certa occasiao a indignagao foi tamanha que . . .
On a certain occasion indignation was so strong that . . .
Nao querendo dar-lhe avultada quantia, dett-lhe meia
Not feeling inclined to give him a big sum, he gave
him a half promise.
Houve grande quantidade de gente e muita somma de
intelligencia.
There was a great number of people and a large
amount of intelligence.
Grande parte dos pedintes recebeu porgao igual d dos
asylados.
A great part of the poor got a portion equal to that
of the inmates of a charitable institution.
De-me outro cdpo d'agua.
Give me another cup of water.
caracter deste sujeito e qual eu desejo.
The character of this man is such as I desire.
Tal mulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu Ihe sou.
Were she such a wife to me as I am a husband to her.
Elle aoriu caminho qual outro Arnaldo de Winkelried.
He made a way like a second A. W.
(g) before coisa in connection with alguma or nen-
huma.
Viu alguma coisa? Nao m coisa alguma (or nenhuma).
(h) often in titles and headings: Tomo segundo;
Capitulo primeiro-, Descoberta da India;
286 Lesson 8.
(i) before nouns employed predicatively : sr. Jose
e primo do Carlos. Carlos e amigo do primo. Francisco
d' Almeida foi vice-rei da India;
(k) with parts of the body spoken of in a general
meaning: (cf.19(h)): corpo humano tern dois bracos,
duas pernas, cabeca e tronco. Temos mdo direita e mdo
esquerda, pe direito e pe esquerdo;
(1) in dates : Lisboa, (em) 18 de junho, Lisbon, June
the 18 th . An exception to this is the official dating:
Lisboa^ aos dezoito dias de junho de 1861.
(m) in phrases like these:
prestar juramento to take an oath
prestar servigo to do a service
pdr termo or metier cdbo a to put an end to
foliar (a) verdade to tell the truth
fazer de bobo to make a fool of oneself
fazer boa (md) figura to make a good (bad) figure
fazer numero to elevate or complete a number
dar bom resultado to give a good result
tirar bom lucro to get a good profit
exhalar mdu cheiro to exhale a bad smell
abrir banca to establish an office
ter (por) costume to be in the habit
convocar cortes to convoke the House of Commons
abrir caminho to make a way
estar a ponto de . . . to be on the point of
e costume it is the custom
fazer aposta to lay a wager
a pretexto de under a pretence
morrer de febre to die of the fever
morreu victima da revolugdo he fell a victim to the re-
volution
ir a acto to go in for an examination.
fazer examen to pass an examination
viver em casa de . . . to live in the house of
ndo dizer palavra to say not a word
ter costume to be in the habit
correr risco to run a risk.
j (uma) pena it is a pity
ter appetite to have an appetite
estar com press a to be in a hurry
estar com raiva to be in a fury
ficar com raiva to fly into a passion
Omission of the Article. 287
ter fim to have an end
fazer barulho to make a noise
ter vontade to have a mind
ter como regra to make it a rule
(em) termo medio on an average
com vista with a view
fazer signal to make a sign
fazer presente (de) to make a present (of)
dar batalha to fight a battle
tomar exemplo to take an example
falar em voz baixa (alia) to speak in a low (loud) voice
nao ha meio de there is no means of.
e moda it is the fashion
e fora de questao it is out of the question.
Note that the indefinite article is not used with que:
What a noise you make! Que barulho estd a fazer!
What a misfortune! Que desgraga!
28. The article may be omitted:
(1) In enumerating several substantives which are
! joined by e, ou, etc., or separated by a comma, and
not denote a contrast (cf. 26) however being of diffe-
rent gender e.g.:
Os habitantes dos vdrios bairros, aldeias e arrabaldes.
It is the same for several adjectives which acorn-
pany the noun:
A primeira, segunda e terceira classe or: as classes pri-
meira, segunda e terceira.
N.B. If such a noun precedes, it is used in the plural.
80 with such adjectives as, by their nature, follow the noun :
As linguas portuguesa e inglesa.
The Portuguese and English languages,
noun not being employed in the plural, the article must
be repeated:
A lingua portuguesa e a inglesa.
Equally repeated is the article, if living beings of different
ex are spoken of:
Os bois e as vaccas. Os burros ou as jumentas.
29. The partitive article is omitted after the
prepositions com, sem, por, in certain idiomatic ex-
pressions; also after de denoting the instrument or
cause. Ex.:
288
Lesson 8.
com prazer with pleasure
com paciencia with patience
com cuidado with care
com elegancia elegantly
sem dinheiro without money
sem ceremdnia without cere-
mony
sem mais nada with no more
ado
por dia daily, a day
por anno yearly, a year
por mes monthly, a month
por mar by water, by sea
por terra by land
por tal forma in such a manner
por 6ra for the moment
por causa de for the sake of
por ventura by chance
sob pena de morte on pain of
death
encher de beneficios to load
with benefits
viver de pao to live upon
bread
morrer de fome to be starved
to death
saltar de alegria to jump with
joy.
30. No article is used (a) before a substantive
which is repeated with a preposition, as:
a gota by drops
folha a folha leaf upon leaf
dia a dia day after day
de dia para dia from one day to another
promessas sdbre promessas promises upon promises
de tempo(s) a tempo (s) from time to time
de seculo em seculo from age to age.
(b) In the following expressions, where the noun
forms an indivisible unity with the verb, the article is
omitted in both languages:
ter razao to be right
ndo ter razao to be wrong
ter vontade to have a mind
ter precisdo to want
lanQar dncora to cast anchor
levantar dncora to weigh
anchor.
ter cuidade to take care
ter fome to be hungry
ter sMe to be thirsty
ter somno to be sleepy
ter boa cara to look well
ter piedade to have pity
ter vergonha to be ashamed
ter medo to be afraid
(c) In certain expressions formed with de, em, a,
sobre, as:
estar em risco to be at stake
estar sobre dncora to be at anchor
pegar em armas to take up arms
ser de opiniao to be of opinion
pdr em fugida to put to flight
perder de vista to lose sight of
comprar em segunda mao to buy second hand
,
Omission of the Article.
a cavallo to go on horseback
de carrudgem to go in a carriage
estar em casa to be at home
ir a casa to go home
estar de (or em) pe to be standing
estar a pe to be up
tomar parte eni to join in
tomar cuidado to be upon one's guard
tomar assento to take a seat
tomar sentido to be aware
tomar fogo to catch fire
tomar folego to breathe
dar gragas to say grace
dar (or fazer) attengdo to pay attention
fazer caso de to value
fazer mengdo de to mention
fazer fortuna to make one's fortune
pedir licenga to ask leave
pedir perdao to beg pardon
dar credito a to give credence
pdr-se em pe, to rise
vir a pe. to come on foot
estar em paz to be at peace.
31. In some expressions the indefinite article is
employed, as in English, in the sense of one e.g.:
d'um folego in a breath
n'uma palavra in a word
d'uma assentada \ ol1
71 A } all at once
d uma vez J
d'um trago at a draught.
32. Employed in the plural, the indefinite article
has the meaning of some or about:
Uns dias depots; durante umas horas ;
Serdo preciso uns seis metros de fazenda.
21. Thema.
Virtue is the highest good. Men are mortal. Modesty
adorns youth. Human life is short. Man is liable to a variety
of changes. Gold and silver cannot render man happy. Beer
is sold at fivepence a pot. This coffee costs two shillings a pound.
The love of glory and the fear of shame are often the cause
of great valour. Summer is warm, but winter is cold. Geo-
graphy is a very useful science. Good and bad seem to be
blended together through the whole of nature. Do you know
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 19
290 Lesson 8.
General Knox? Yes, I know him. The knife and fork are
broken. Let us go to church. The boys were at school this
morning, but now they are at home. When did they come
home? After two o'clock.
What books have you got there ? Langenscheidt, a Por-
tuguese pocket-dictionary and Ey, a Portuguese conversation-
grammar. What cold weather to-day! Did you find some
means of saltisfying him? I do not know, he said not a
word. His mother made us a sign to leave the room. The
poor woman was dying from hunger and cold. You are
always right; I have been wrong. Have pity on my weakness.
I must ask your leave. Many poor people live on bread and
potatoes only. The rent of this house is twenty pounds a
year. We expected our friend every day (say: from, day to
day), but day after day elapsed without bringing him. Cha-
rity begins at home (by itself). Necessity knows no law. Games,
conversation, theatre, nothing entertains him.
Mr. Teixeira Lopes is a Portuguese and a sculptor. He
lives at Villa Nova de Gaya, in front of Oporto, on the left
side of the Rio Douro, Hua Direita. He is a most famous
artist. Some of his most important works are in Lisbon for
instance, the monument to Ega de Queiroz, one of the most
eminent novelists, the so-called Portuguese Zola; it is erected
on the Largo do Quintella. In Catholic countries it is the
custom to hear the Mass every day.
22. Versao.
Jdo I (primeiro).
Dom Joao I r rei de Portugal, cognominado o de Boa
3Iemoria, mas mais conhecido pelo seu titulo de Mestre d'Aviz,
foi fiiho de el-rei D. Pedro I e de D. Thereza Louren90. Nasceu
em Lisboa a 15 de abril de 1358, e na idade de 11 annos foi
eleito mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado cavalleiro por seu
pae. A prudencia e valor deste monarcha deveu Portugal a
conserva^ao da sua independencia, que esteve a ponto de perder
com a morte de D. Fernando I. Mestre de Aviz, a quem
a rainha D. Leonor, regente do reino, confiara o governo do
Alemtejo, para o afastar de Lisboa, aonde era benquisto do
povo, foi ao pa$o a pretexto de conferenciar com ella. Em-
quanto fazia espalhar a noticia de que ali o retinham prisio-
neiro, apunhalou o conde de Ourem, valido da rainha, vingando
assim a affronta de que este fora criminoso autor. N'um ins-
tante appareceu armada a populasao de Lisboa. D. Joao
publicou a morte do conde, e foi logo acclamado regente e
defensor do reino, que jurou defender contra Castella.
D. Leonor retirou-se para Alemquer, villa da provincia de
Extremadura, e o monarcha castelhano entrou em Portugal,
Congruence. 291
empenhando todo o seu poderio, para tomar Lisboa. Porem
as bem acertadas medidas e o valor de D. Joao e do grande
condestavel D. Nuno Alvares Pereira, inseparavel companheiro
das suas glorias militares, fizeram com que os Portugueses
sustentassem o sitio, ate que o grande exercito sitiador se viu
obrigado a retirar-se. (Continua.)
Conyersacjao.
Corno foi cognominado D. Joao I?
Qual o titulo pelo que era ainda mais conhecido?
Quando nasceu?
Que e que Ihe deve Portugal?
Quern foi D. Leonor?
Qual foi o acto com que o Mestre d'Aviz vingou a af-
fronta feita ao povo e a memoria do rei pela rainha
viuva e o seu favorite castellao?
Que succedeu depois d'este acto?
Quern foi o companheiro d'armas de D. Joao I?
Qual foi o resultado das medidas e do valor de ambos ?
Second Division: Syntax.
Ninth Lesson.
Congruence.
33. The adjective, the article and the past
participle conjugated with ser or estar agree in gender
and number with their noun or pronoun e.g.:
amigo certo corihece-se na occasiao incerta.
Exceptions. 1. The subject being the pronoun vds (or
que referring to v6s), and indicating only one person, those
words are in the singular: Vos sereis feliz. V6s sois amado
or amada.
2. The subject being quern followed by the verb ser and
a substantive in the plural as a predicative noun, the verb
agrees with the latter (as in English): Quern foram os pro-
genitores de D. Affonso L?
3. See L. 16, 72, N.B.
Contrary to the English, the verb ser, when used im-
personally, agrees with the following predicative noun: Sao
quatro horas it is 4 o'clock. Sao dezoito do mes it is the
19*
292 Lesson 9.
eighteenth of the month. Quern e? Sou eu. Who is it?
It is I.
34. (a) Several nouns in the singular being
accompanied by the same adjective or past participle,
the latter takes the form of the plural: a lingua, (a)
grammdtica e (a) literatura portuguesas. Sao necessdrias
a circumspeccao e a prudencia. A senhora e a crianga
estavam cangados. Com as suas tdo apregoadas probidade
c distingao teem tecido toda esta trama.
(b) The nouns being of different gender, without
diversity in their meaning, the adjective or participle,
when employed in the singular, agrees with the next
to it: amor e amizade verdadeira or: a amizade e
amor verdadeiro. Com verdadeiro amor e amizade. E
necessario o esforgo e a vigilancia. E necessaria a vigi-
lancia e o esforco.
(c) Those nouns being of different gender and
meaning, or the adjective (or participle) being in the
plural, it agrees with the masculine noun: Urn dia e
uma noite eram passados. Nem o sangue, nem as lagrimas
estavam enxutos. A cortiga e os couros foram declarados
de commercio livre.
(d) The same adjective or participle referring to
several nouns in the plural and of different gender, it
agrees with the next to it: Seus temores e esperancas
eram vas, or: eram v&os seus temores e esperangas.
(e) The same adjective referring to a noun in the
plural and another in the singular, it generally agrees
with that of the plural: As fazendas e o dinlieiro eram
muitas. 1
35. (a) The verb agrees with its subject in
person and number:
tempo foge; eu escrevo; nos vamos.
1 Cf. No dia e horas indicados, as irmas dirigiram-se ao
Vaticano. (Manual Politico by Trindade Coelho). For these rules
given in 34, there are many contrary examples met with even
in the classics, as, e.g.: Eosto e cabega descoberta. "Porque essas
honras Das, esse ouro puro, melhor e merecel-os sem os ter que
possuil-os sem os merecer."
Congruence. 293
(b) Several subjects belonging to one verb, tbis is
used in the plural. If these subjects belong to different
grammatical persons, the first is preferred to the second,
the second to the third e.g. : Eu e tu (tu e eu) temos
saude. Tu e Maria estaes bons.
(c) If there be several subjects of the third person,
the verb is also
(a) in the third person and plural when the sub-
jects are in the plural:
Andam sempre de companhia os erros e as desculpas.
(P) in the third person plural when the subjects are
in the singular and precede the verb:
A comida, a bebida, a vigilia e o somno sem certa me-
dida nao aproveitam.
(Y) in the third person singular when the subjects
follow the verb:
Sem certa medida nao aproveita a comida, a bebida, etc.
(see Note I).
(6) in the first person plural if the person who
speaks belongs to the subjects:
(0 mestre e) todos os officiaes somos teus amigos (cf. :
mestre e todos o officiaes sois meus amigos.
Note I. With following subjects the verb is also met
with in the plural:
Fallecem-nos (or fallece-nos) o pdo e a agua.
Note II. If two or more subjects indicate only one and
the same person or thing, the verb agrees with that next
to it:
JEste soldado valente, este poeta sublime, esta gloria national
(Camoes) foi desamparada no leito da dor.
(d) The impersonal verbs, except haver, which is
always employed in the singular, agree with the logical
subject v.g. :
Chegaram muitos viajantes there arrived a great many
travellers. (French: il arriva beaucoup de voyageurs.)
Ha muitos Jiomens que . . . there are many people who . . .
Houve muitas pessoas there were many persons.
294 Lesson 9.
36. (a) If the subject be a partitive collective
in the singular with following genitive in the plural,
the verb and attribute are generally in the plural.
[N.B. The genitive may not be expressed) e.g.:
Parte (dos soldados or dos quaes), para fugir ao ferro
dos nossos, se lanQarem a uma lagoa a nado.
(b) If the subject be a general collective i.e., one
only to be considered as a totality the verb is employed
in the singular, even if a genitive plural accompanies
the subject:
exercito dos inimigos foi derrotado.
37. (a) In relative clauses the verb agrees in
its person not with the relative pronoun, but with its
antecedent :
Tu que nunca estiveste no estrangeiro . . .
Eu sou aquelle mesmo (aquella mesma) que setnpre te amei.
(b) It is the same for the relative que which, joined
to the verb ser, is employed as Particula de realce after
a personal pronoun (cf. L. 16, 64 (c)):
Fdste tu (o) que disseste . . . fdmos n6s quern dissSmos.
(c) However, if a relative clause is introduced by
quern, in order to render a personal pronoun prominent,
the verb agrees with quern.
Fiu eu quern disse; es tu quern ouve; fdmos nds quern
23. Thema.
I play the piano, you write letters. You are satisfied, my
son, but your sister is not satisfied. During the fine season
concerts are often given here. Most of the Portuguese content
themselves with two daily refections. I and my children will
pass the summer in the country and the autumn at the sea-
side. You (V6s) wanted to deceive me, but perhaps it is
you who will have been deceived. His cold blood and intre-
pidity amaze the bravest men. The earth, the stones, the
animals, the plants, all are the work of God. Incredible things
succeed every day. The refined fashion and taste of the last
season created quite a new branch of industry. His brother
and 1 made this discovery. Was it you who helped that poor
family? It was I who made the suggestion, but it was you
who have given the necessary money. It was the women who
made the great revolutions.
Congruence. 295
24. Versao.
Joao I (continuagao).
Ja antes d'isto tinha D. Nuno desbaratado os hespanhoes
na batalha dos Atoleiros, junto a Fronteira. * Convocadas
cortes em Coimbra, n'ellas discutiu com agudeza e resolveu
com liberdade o c^lebre jurisconsulto Joao das Regras, que a
coroa portuguesa estava vaga, que podia o povo eleger prin-
cipe que o governasse, e que nenhum Ihe convinha mais do
que D. Joao, Mestre de A viz. A 6 de abril de 1385, nao
tendo ainda completes 27 annos, foi D. Joao acclamado rei
de Portugal. Elevado ao throne mostrou-se logo digno d'elle,
nao so pela escolha que fazia das pessoas para os diversos
cargos, como pelo valor com que defendeu o reino. A victoria
de Trancoso e outras, seguiu-se a de Aljubarrota, dada a 15 de
agosto de 1385, e na qual com 6500 homens derrotou o exer-
cito castelhano que se compunha de 30 000 homens. N'este
numero se contava a flor da nobreza castelhana e o proprio
monarcha, que so deveu a vida a velocidade do seu cavallo.
Em commemorate d'esta batalha, e no proprio si'tio d'ella
edificou o novo rei, para cumprir o vOto que fizera, o sump-
tuoso templo de Santa Maria da Victoria, vulgo da Batalha.
Nao contente com as victorias terrestres, D. Joao I meditou
fazer o seu nome immortal com as navaes, e preparando uma
armada de 200 velas, n'ella embarcou com seus filhos D. Duarte,
D. Pedro e D. Henrique, e tomou em 1415 a pra$a de Ceuta.
Quatro annos depois (1419) os descobrimentos das ilhas de
Porto Santo e da Madeira vieram abrir a Portugal as portas
das suas vastas conquistas. (Lacerda.)
ConYersaqao.
Qual 6 a regra fundamental de concordancia com relacao
ao adjective, o artigo e o participio?
Para que numero vae o adjective ou participio, ha-
vendo 2 ou mais substantivos no singular?
Quando concorda o adjective com o substantive mais
proximo?
Quando concorda com o substantive do genero masculine ?
Quando concorda elle apenas com o ultimo?
Qual a regra da concordancia do verbo?
Havendo varies sujeitos de differentes pessoas, qual a
pessoa com que concorda?
Qual o numero do verbo, havendo varies sujeitos da
3. pessoa do singular?
L Villa e freguezia no Alemtejo, districto de Portalegre.
296 Lesson 10.
Em que mimero esta o verbo, sendo o sujeito nm col-
lective?
Com que palavra eoneorda o verbo em phrases relativas?
Tenth Lesson.
Intransitive and Transitive Verbs.
I. Intransitive Verbs.
38. The intransitive verbs generally form their
compound tenses, as in the English language, with the
auxiliary ter or haver:
Tenho andado uma legoa todos os dias.
I have walked a mile every day.
Elle sempre tern ido (vindo) chegado, voltado) a tempo.
He has always gone (come, arrived) to time.
39. Yet some take also the auxiliaries ser or
estar or ficar, but only when a condition or the result
of an action is to be indicated. The participle with
ser, estar or ficar has the value of an adjective. If,
however, you want to indicate, not a condition, but an
action continually going on, you must employ ter or
haver.
As in English, a great many verbs are employed
transitively and intransitively.
Examine the following examples, distinguishing the
transitive from the intransitive meaning of the same verb.
Sabe que elle esta de volta?
Do you know he is returned?
As actrizes estavam voltadas para os espectadores.
The actresses stood (with their faces) turned to the
spectators.
A caneca esta or ficou partida.
The jug is gone or went asunder.
He has departed, is gone can only be rendered by:
elle partiu or foi(-se) ; elle tern partido would be : he has
broken or he belongs to a faction; elle e partido he is
party,
Estao idos aquelles tempos those times are gone.
Ella tinha adormecido.
She had lulled (somebody) to sleep; she had fallen asleep.
The Complements and their Cases. 297
Ella estava adormecida she was asleep.
N6s temos corrido muito we have run fast.
J6s temos corrido mundo we have travelled about.
fds estamos (or ficdmos) corridas.
We are (or became) vexed.
Tern caido bastante chuva there has fallen much rain.
Estd caido he is dejected.
A sua fortuna tern augmentado consider avelmente.
His fortune has been increasing considerably.
A sua fortuna estd consider avelmente augmentada.
His fortune has been considerably increased.
II. Transitive Verbs and their Complements.
40. Every transitive verb requires a complement
i.e., an object on which the activity of the subject
passes over directly or indirectly; e.g.:
If directly, the complement is the accusative
(complemento directo or objectivo propriamente dito), and
generally employed without preposition; if indirectly, it
is the dative (complemento indirecto), generally employed
with the preposition a (to). N.B. Personal pronouns
have special forms for the complements (cf. P. I, L. 23).
Dom Affonso Henriques conquistou Santarem aos
Portugueses.
The Complements and their Cases.
A. The Complement of the Accusative.
(Complemento directo.)
41. As a rule, this complement, as in English,
has no preposition:
Eu comprei um livro I bought a book.
42. With a certain group of verbs, however, it
may be joined by a preposition, especially if referring
to persons; e.g.:
Vejo a elle I see him.
Amae aos vossos proximos love your fellow-creatures.
As coisas qiie possam interessar aos meus designios.
The things which may influence my intentions.
Ninguem p6de servir ao mesmo tempo a dois senhores.
Nobody can serve two masters at the same time.
298 Lesson 10.
This a is always employed in Amar a Deus (of.
L. 11, 48 (a) p) and in the locution um a outro one
another : defendem-se um ao outro they defend one another.
With the verb chamar, when this has two comple-
ments. The complement of the person or the per-
sonified object is generally employed with the prepo-
sition a (or the pronoun in the dative).
ELle chamava amigo a quern nao o era.
He called friend a one who was not.
Chamaram "Principe Perfeito" ao rei Dom Joao II.
que ganhei com o meu trabalho, chamo-lke men.
What I earned by my work, I call my own.
The preposition a with the accusative is found also
with the verbs ouvir (dizer), ver, saber, cheirar, and others:
Ouvimos dizer ao sr. Fulano.
"Paris a Helena roubou" (Camoes).
"Querendo ver a Diana, Acteon perdeu a vida" (id.).
Este pao sabe (cheira) a mofo this bread tastes (smells)
of mould.
Note I. The complemento directo is the one which, the
active voice being changed into the passive, becomes the sub-
ject: livro foi comprado por mim the book was bought by me.
Note II. There are verbs that have two constructions;
so you may say : ensinar alguma coisa a alguem (alguma coisa
is the complemento directo), and ensinar alguem a fazer uma
coisa (alguem is the complemento directo).
B. Other Complements without Preposition.
43. There are transitive verbs which, besides the
complemento directo, require the addition of an adjective
(or some word thus applied) or substantive referring,
as a qualification, to the complemento directo and serving
to complete the signification of the verb ; e.g. :
Nomear alguem ministro, fazer alguem feliz. A corte
suppunha o duque de Braganga, D. Joao, incapae
de qualquer pensamento ousado.
This qualifying word is called nome predicativo do
complemento directo, predicative noun of the accusative.
The active voice being changed into the passive,
the predicative noun of the complement becomes the
predicative noun of the subject; e.g.:
duque de Braganga, D. Joao, era pela corte supposto
incapaz de qualquer pensamento ousado.
The Complements and their Cases. 299
The chief verbs thus constructed, are:
fazer to make appelidar \ nickname
tornar to turn, become cognommar j
eleger to elect achar to find, judge
nomear to name considerar to consider
jurar to swear crer to believe, think
declarar to declare julgar to judge
constituir to constitute reputar to repute
instituir to institute suppor to suppose
sagrar to consecrate descrever to describe
ww^'r to anoint pintar to paint
' coroar to crown representar to represent.
chamar to call
Remark 1. With some of these verbs the predicative
noun may be joined to the verb by the particle como e.g.:
considerar justa uma coisa or considerar uma coisa como justa.
With some verbs the qualification of the complemento
directo, instead of being a simple predicative noun, may be
ruled by the preposition por, and also para (expressing an
aim) e.g.: instituir alguem por herdeiro. The employment
of por (or como) is obligatory with the verbs ter and haver
I in their meaning to judge, think, suppose, and with the verbs
dar and tomar and their synonyms e.g.: ter alguem por feliz.
Remark 77. Instead of the predicative noun, an equi-
, valent expression may form the complement of the above verbs :
Os historiadores reputam D. Jodo III de intelligencia
apoucada.
45. As an adverbial complement the accusative
without preposition is employed to indicate:
(a) the price or value with the verbs custar to cost,
voter to be worth, avaliar (em) to value, to tax, apreciar
to appreciate, conceituar to value, think, etc. e.g.:
Entao a vida em Lisboa custava os olhos da cara.
(b) the manner:
Elle passeava o chapeu na nuca e as mdos nas algibeiras.
He walked about with his hat on his neck (at the back
of his head) and his hands in his pockets.
46. Elliptically the accusative is employed in
colloquial language:
Eil-o! there he is!
Desgra^ado que es! Unlucky man!
Boa tarde, minha senhora! Boas festas!
300 Lesson 10.
25. Exercise.
Serve your fatherland whenever it is threatened or its
dominions are invaded by enemies. Do not contradict those who
wish you well and advise you. They will help you (passive
voice), and you will thank them for your rescue. Do not be-
lieve, however, those who flatter you. Imitate always those
who precede you with a good example. Follow them, and
all true friends will felicitate you (pass. v.). Here it
smells of fresh hay. This cake tastes of lemon. The poli-
cemen summoned the crowd to disperse, but they were not
obeyed. They menaced the public with their arms, but the
people even defied the gun-barrels. Fool that you are, to be-
lieve that you will be considered a victim of the intrigues of
your adversaries. Thou shalt love God above all things and
thy fellow-creature as thyself.
26. Leitura.
Tomada de Santarem (see Less. 16).
A voz do rei, sobrelevando as do tropel que o cercava,
retumbou entao por cima de estriipida. 1 Bradava por Santiago
e pela Virgem, e ao mesmo tempo dizia aos que estavam no
adarve: Eis-me aqui! eis-me aqui! Mettei-os a espada!
Nem um escape do ferro!
Entretanto tinham arvorado outra escada, e 25 homens
d'annas estavam em cima. A vozearia dentro e fora do cas-
tello era ja confusa e medonha. Affonso dividiu as suas pe-
quenas for^as em dois corpos, um que tentasse escalar o muro
pela direita, outro que tomasse o caimnho do arrabalde assen-
tado na margem do rio, para que os sarracenos nao viessem
por aquella parte impidir-lhe o approximar-se da entrada. Ao
mesmo tempo os 25 esfor^ados tentavam quebrar as portas,
arremessando pedras contra ellas, mas debalde, ate que, ati-
rando ao de fora um malho de ferro por cima do muro, pu-
deram os que se achavam dentro, partir com elle os ferrOlhos.
Despeda^ado o dique, a torrente precipitou-se dentro do
castello. Affonso, movido pelo impeto do enthusiasmo religiose,
ajoelhou no limiar d'aquellas portas que mal cuidava se haviam
tao facilmente de abrir para o receberem vencedor.
Seguiu-se uma resistencia iniitil e uma larga carnificina.
Os raios do sol, que nascSra entretanto, nao encontraram ja
sobre o roqueiro castello o estandarte do Islam ,derribado n'essa
noite (15 de marco), para nunca mais se erguer sobre as torres
da opulenta Santarem. (Alexandre Herculano).
1 Estrupida s. estrepito.
The Complements and their Cases.
301
CoiiYersacjao.
Jue se diz da voz do rei Affonso?
J or quern bradava e que dizia?
Jue tinham feito entretanto?
)omo dividiu Affonso as suas for^as?
|ue deviam fazer os dois corpos?
Jue fcentavam fazer os esfor^ados ao mesmo tempo e com
que effeito?
Jue fez Affonso, quando a torrente dos sitiadores se
precipitou dentro do castello?
Que se seguiu a entrada ftm^ada d'*elles?
Que 6 que ja nao encontraram os raios do sol?
Em que dia e anno houve logar a toinada de Santarem?
Eleventh Lesson.
The Complements and their Cases (continued).
C. Complements with a Preposition.
(Complemento indirecto.)
47. The Complement preceded by the
Preposition de.
The preposition de is employed:
(a) With nouns:
(a) as a genitive complement of the subject: o
amor de Deus, the love of God (God loves);
(p) as a genitive complement of the object: o
temor de Deus, the fear of God (God is feared) ;
(Y) to indicate property: o pago d'el-rei, the king's
palace ;
(5) to denote time, place, material, form, price,
character, extension: na era de Christo; o com-
mercio do Porto; uma perna de pdu; luvas de
seda; chapeu de tres bicos (three-cornered hat);
cadeira de bragos; charuto de vintem; coisa de
valor; esquadra de quince velas; cinco metros de
altura (or de alto) por tres de largura (or de largo) ;
(e) in a partitive condition (cf.L.9 ofP.I): um copo
de dgita; um pouco de assucar; nada de bom;
tudo qiianto ha de mais bello;
302 Lesson 11.
(I) before an attribute (cf. P. II, 23) : o rei da Ingla-
terra; o imperio daAlemanha; homem de intrigas\
(r|) to express a destination: a sola de jantar; uma
penna de escrever; papel de cartas; quarto de
dormir; estar de guarda;
(&) to indicate a characteristic: o homem das barbas
negras tbe man with the black beard ; uma sa-
lada d'hervas finas (de alface) a salad of fine
herbs (lettuce);
(b) After certain adjectives and participles which
mostly indicate physical or moral qualities:
cego de ambos os olhos blind of both eyes
surdo do ouvido direito deaf of the right ear
alegre de semblante with a merry face
sou mais velho de cinco annos I am older by 5 years.
Such words are:
leve de (dinheiro) short of (money)
tranquillo de (alma) quiet of (mind)
provido de provided with
capaz de capable of, etc.
(c) With verbs such as: ter de, haver de with a
following noun or infinitive: accusar de, arrepender-se
de, ser de to belong to, to come from; vingar-se de,
desforrar-se de to revenge oneself on and others, in
English mostly employed with of.
accusar de to accuse of precisar de to (be in) want
arrepender-se de to repent of (of)
ser de to belong to, to come abster-se de to abstain of
from desconfiar de to distrust of
ter de \ to have to queixar-se de to complain of
haver de ( to be obliged to soffrer de to suffer from
aproveitar-se de to profit by morrer de to die of
acabar de fazer to finish doing tremer de to tremble with
vingar-se de to revenge oneself nao passar de not to pass
of beyond
desforrar-se de to pay back passar-se de to do without
for gostar de to like
felicitar de to wish joy for vestir de to clothe with or in
gozar de to rejoice for revestir de to invest with
prevenir de to inform of ornar de to furnish or trim
with.
The Complements and their Cases. 303
(e) After the past participle of the passive voice of
verbs expressing a feeling, de may be employed instead
of por: ser amado de to be loved by.
(f) In elliptical phrases like: aqui d'el rei! (a cry
for help); ai de mim woe unto mel pobre de mim poor
me! felizes de nos! infeliz d'elle! etc.
(g) As an expletive in familiar language: a boa da
mulher the good soul, o garoto do rapaz the naughty
boy; o pobre do homem the poor man; o malandro do
jardineiro the sluggard of a gardener.
(h) In comparatives de may be employed before
que: Elle sdbia mais do que outros.
(i) In absolute superlatives as: o rei dos reis the
king of kings; o cdntico dos cdnticos the Song of Songs.
Remark. De may join several complements to one noun
without being repeated: Berlim tern uma academia de sciencias
mechanicas e architectural muitas sociedades de sciencia e lite-
ratura; gabinete de histdria natural e de medalhas, galeria de
quadros e estdtuas.
(k) In adverbial locutions, such as:
de or por certo to be sure estar de costas or de barriga
de cima from above para o ar to lie ' on one's
de dentro from within back
de novo anew de manhd in the morning
de fora from without de tarde in the afternoon or
de todo altogether evening
de joelhos kneeling de noite at night
de pressa quickly de madrugada at dawn
de vagar slowly de vez em quando sometimes
de veras (deveras) indeed de accordo com in agreement
de prop6sito on purpose with
de facto really de mans(inh)o softly
de resto besides de chapeu na mao with one's
de modo so that hat in one's hand
de repentej de salto suddenly de brago dado arm in arm
de justiga right(ly) de bragos abertos with open
de verao in summer arms
de vez at once de mao a (or em) mao from
estar de volta to be back hand to hand, etc.
48. The preposition a is employed:
(a) Before nouns, thus indicating:
304 Lesson 11.
(a) the dative complement: o jardineiro deu uma
macd ao ftlho;
(p) the accusative complement of the person after
certain verbs which need two complements, one
of the person and another of the thing, and
always in the phrase amar a Deus.
Examples: Devemos amar a Deus sdbre todas as
coisas e ao proximo como a nos mesmos. "A partilha do
mundo 1 chamou D. Joao II ao convenio que se estava
negociando. A nacdo acclamou rei de Portugal a JD.Jodo.
Also if a misunderstanding is to be avoided : De que
soffre? perguntou o medico a meu amigo. Pede ao que
for mais leal (cf.42).
N.B. After como we employ a when without this pre-
position it is not evident whether como refers to the subject
or to the object:
Tratei-o como a homem de bem.
I treated him as a man of honour.
Tratei-o como homem de bem.
I treated him as a man of honour.
(Y) space and direction: a cinco Jcilometres d'dqui;
vou a casa (home) a direita (a esquerda) to the
right (left);
(b) time: a que ~horas? as seis horas; aos vinte an-
nos; ao por de sol;
(e) instrument or means: morto a bala; impresso a
muitas cores', aberto ao cinzel; pintado a oleo, a
esfuminlio (stump), a crayon;
(I) aim: sais a ver; partir a negocios importantes;
([}) manner: a pe, a cavallo, a nado, a medo, a cos-
tume, ao parecer, etc.;
(0) measure, price, tax: comprar or medir a metros;
pesar as arrobas; comprar or vender a vintem;
juro or cdmbio a cinco por cento;
(i) measure of time or space: a tiro de bala; a tres
leguas de distancia; d'aqui a dez annos; a tantos
dias;
(K) a near future: o combdio estd a chegar;
(\) a repetition or duration: andar a saltar; ensinar
a ler; continuar a falar (cf. d of this ).
The Complements and their Cases.
305
After adjectives, such as:
acostumado a
affeicoado a
ajfeito a
agradavel a
anterior a
attento a
bom a
caro a
conforms a
contrdrio a
desagradavel a
disposto a
ensinado a
equivalente a
favoravel a
fiel a
hostil a
identico a
igual a
indinado a
indifferente a
(in)docil a
inferior a
inexoravel a
insensivel a
sensivel a
necessdrio a
nocivo a
obediente a
parallelo a
posterior a
preciso a
prejudicial a
prestes a
propenso a.
rebelde a
semelhante a
sobranceiro a
superior a
surdo a
util a
(c) After verbs, such as: agradar a, autorizar a,
comprar a, conquistar a, falar a, fazer bem a, faltar a
(foliar as obrigacdes, ao dever, d sua palavra to neglect
one's duties, break one's word), orar a, succeder a, pedir
a, pertencer a, ensinar a, obrigar a, pintar a (oleo), tra-
balhar a (agidha) etc.
N.B. I. -If the verbs fazer, deixar, mandar, ouvir, v$r,
sentir are followed, not only by an accusative of the person,
but also by a transitive infinitive with an accusative of things
or a complementary clause, the complement of the person
is generally put into the dative: Fiz-lhe perceber a ndo-razdo
dos sens escrupulos; mandei-lhe copiar a carta; but: mandei-o
conduzir a casa; fizeram-no proclamar regente.
N.B. II. Cheirar a to smell of; saber a to taste of
(saber a meldo, cheirar a vinho).
(d) Before the infinitives of the verbs: estar, ser,
andar, ir, passar, ouvir etc.: estar a sair, a chegar, a
morrer; andar a procurar, a estudar; passar (o tempo)
a ler, a nao fazer nada; ouvir passar os a cantar, fontes
a correr; "Como se fosse apenas a deitar-me . . . / e o teu
olhar ainda a ensinar-me / a morrer com amor e con-
fian^a".
Cf.: estar d espera to be waiting; estar d morte
to be dying; andar d procura de to be looking for.
(e) Instead of a relative clause: o melhor a fa^er
the best to be done; o primeiro a entrar the first enter-
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 20
306 Lesson 11.
ing; "a tua vida a rir na minha vida" your life smiling
into my own.
(f) In adverbial locutions, such as:
a tempo in due time a sos alone by oneselves
d pressa in a hurry d vontade at ease
a contento with satisfaction d mdo at hand
d francesa in a French manner a pedagos, aos bocados in
a conselho (de) on the advice pieces
(of) ao certo surely, exactly
pouco a pouco little by little, as vezes sometimes
by degrees as escuras at dark
a mais e mats more and more as claras openly, evidently
dia a dia day by day d espera de waiting for
folha a folha leaf by leaf a ser assim in this case
gotta a gotta drop by drop a nao ser assim (or isso) in
a urn, a uma one by one the other case
dois a dois \ , a dizer a verdade to tell the
duas a duas / two b ^ two truth
a par de beside, in comparison isso nao faz ao caso, (ao ne-
with gdcio, d questdo) that does
salto a salto by leaps and not matter
bounds d vista d'isso thereupon
a tremer trembling a menos de if not, unless
a suar sweating a proposito by the bye.
(g) Elliptically in exclamations: a saude de V a Ex a !
as armas! to arms! d memoria dos grandes heroes!
27. Thema.
Oxford has a university which counted among its professors
Max Miiller, Mattew Arnold, and Sir Hubert von Herkomer (cf.
42). Will you have the kindness to give me the Didrio de No-
ticias* and the Primeiro de Janeiro-* 1 In Portugal newspapers
are bought at the price of ten reis from the sellers or the boys (ga-
rotos) in the streets. The Commercio dd Porto is sold at a
vintem a copy. In summer or on hot days you may sometimes see
gentlemen with their hats in their hands walking in the Ave-
nida da Liberdade. It does no good to the nerves to be
too sensible to impressions of any kind. If you want to
enjoy good health, you must be deaf and indifferent to im-
pressions injurious to health. If we walk so slowly, we shall
not arrive home before evening. Let us walk quicker, so as to
be back sooner than our sluggard of a cousin, who, to tell
the truth, needs a reprimand. The least we can do is to profit
by the experiences of others and to be attentive to all things
The Complements and their Cases. 307
that may be favourable, pernicious, or adverse to our projects.
By the bye: On the 5 th of March of next year that is,
in three months from to-day you have to pay the bill of ex-
change of 50. Abstain from any superfluous expenses and
content yourself with what you have. If, however, you need
money, communicate with me in due time. Who is that lady
in the violet dress? That one with the fair hair? No, that
one with the red hair and the lace-trimmed dress with a train.
28. Versao.
De, preposi9ao que denota o logar d'onde vem ou sae
1 alguma pessoa ou cousa (venho de Roma; cartas, noticias de
Londres); a origem (lei de Deus); a relac,ao (parente, amigo
cfe); a propriedade (livro de Antonio); a materia de que 6
feita alguma cousa (annel de ouro, copo de crystal) o estado,
: as qualidades de alguma pessoa ou cousa (anno de fome, dia
de calma, homem de honra, coberto de chagas); o modo (andar
de pressa, fazer alg. c. de caso pensado) ; a causa, o motivo
(morrer de fome, tremer de medo) ; o uso ou destino (tribunal
de justi9a, tempo de estudo); o tempo em que se faz, ou
succede alg. c. (de dia, de noute, de verao, de inverno).
De serve tambem de particula extractiva (peda$o de pao) ;
e designativa (prodigio de virtude, exemplo de valor, cidade
de Coimbra). Faz as vezes de outras preposi9oes, como desde
(de Madrid a Lisboa, de tempo immemorial), tocante, sobre
I (falar de . . .), por (amado de todos). Serve para ligar dois
verbos (acabar de lr, de escrever ; gosta de estudar) ; um verbo
e um substantivo (ambisao de reinar) ; um verbo e um adjec-
tivo (difficil de crer, facil de entender). Precede os infinites dos
verbos para formar o futuro composto (quern ha de ganhar honra,
'nao.se ha de entregar ao descanso); e antepoe-se aos adverbios
(de perto, de longe, de baixo, de cima) ; ou a outras preposicoes
(de sobre a porta). Algumas vezes, por elegancia e propriedade
da lingua, usa-se esta preposi9ao entre dois substantives (o
ladrao do rnogo, a embusteira da velha); ou entre um adjectivo
ou substantivo e um substantivo ou pronome (o mau de Thyo-
neu, o pobre do homem; triste de mim, coitados de nos). Pela
mesma razao tambem se poe depois de alguns verbos e antes
da dic^ao em que elles passam a exercer o seu significado;
mal se faz de crer o que se nao cuida nem espera.
(After Lacerda: Diccionario eneyclopedico.)
20*
308 Lesson 12.
Twelfth Lesson.
Remarks on the Prepositions.
(Cf. L. 11: de and a.)
49. The frequently employed prepositions a, de,
em, por are generally repeated: Folio a die e ao irmao
d?elle; pensei n'isso e n'aquillo; fago-o por ti e por elle.
50. Several prepositions may be joined to the
same noun or pronoun. If joined to a pronoun, all
prepositions precede; if to a noun, one precedes, the
other follows, the noun being repeated by a pronoun:
with or without him com ou sem elle; coffee with or
without sugar cafe com assucar ou sem elle; before and
behind the house deante da casa e atrds d'ella.
51. Sometimes several prepositions are joined
with one another or with adverbs: atrds de, atraves de,
deante de, para com, por debaixo de, de ao pe de (from
the neighbourhood of).
52. Some Portuguese Prepositions in English
Translation.
(1.) J&m (no, na, nelle, neste etc.) in, at, on:
Em Londres; na Inglaterra, em Portugal. Em casa at home.
Na casa in the house; em casa delle, em nossa casa;
num did, em um instante ; nesse tempo ; numa palavra;
em breve; em breves lirihas ; ensinar em musica; estar
em ftrias, em agosto ; no ar ; em geral; em particular,
em extremo (to the utmost); em cumprimento ou exe-
cuQdo das or dens; d sombra d'um carvalho.
na mesa; na praga, no chao, no mar alto (in the
offing, on the high seas, at the main) ; encostar-se no
cotovello, na esperanga; metter-se em cavallarias alias
(to mount the high horse); avaliado em cinco mil reis.
Estd-lhe o vestido em (her dress comes to) duas libras;
insistir em.
illustre em fama; rico em conhecimentos ; pobre em
bens; agarrar-se em, pensar em; em si (in the abstract,
in itself); no sdb(b)ado, nesse dia.
em castigo de; em signal de; em honra de; em pro-
ceito de, em damno de; passar de mao em mdo (to go
from hand to hand) ; de boca em bdca; numa assentada
at one pull.
Remarks on the Prepositions. 309
vir em soc(c)6rro, no vapor; em toda a horn.
em (or por) ddio da pessoa ; em razao de amizade.
Que horas sao no seu reUgio?
Em is also sometimes employed before the infinitive or the
gerund of a verb : o dominio do mundo nao consists em
o possuir, consiste em o pisar. Em estudando a gram-
mdtica da prdpria lingua, fica o homem apto para aprender
com facilidade outro qualquer idioma.
(2.) Para indicates direction, aim, use (after estar)
something imminent; it answers to the question: where
(to)? whither? what for? to what purpose? when?
Examples. Partiu para Inglaterra. Esta madeira e
boa para navios. Os Portugueses sao bons para ma-
rujos. Para a semana next week; para o mes que
vem next month. Para o sul, o norte; para a direita.
Estavamos para dar a vela. Estou prompto para fazer
o ajuste. Das plantas umas dirigem os ramos para
o ar, outras para a terra. Estuda para medico, para
letrado, a ftm de ter um modo de vida decente. Estas
luvas sao para a menina. Vem para o Natal. Sera
para sempre. Ha seis para sete annos.
(3.) Idioms with para:
Ser para ... to be fit for ; este sttjeito e para pouco . . .
Estar para to be disposed or appointed for : nao
estou para isso, para aturdl-o: Essa quinta estd para
vender. De mim para mim, de si para si unto me,
unto him. Pensei de mim para mim. Para vergonha
nossa for our shame.
(4.) Before an infinitive para corresponds to "in
order to":
Fil-o para Ihe ser agradavel. Nao e para admirar it
is not to be wondered at. Para dizer a verdade.
(5.) Para is sometimes joined to com and has the
meaning of towards.
Ser bom, affavel, justo para (com) os companheiros, dis-
cipulos ou para com todos.
(6.) Para may be employed for por (see (7.) of this
paragraph) in order to express the cause of an action
or an intended effect:
Procurou cortar a conversagao para (or por} nao expbr-se
a dizer mais do que quizera.
310 Lesson 12.
There is, however, a difference between para and
por: para hints to the effect as being certain, por as
being uncertain:
Movo os pes para andar ando muito por ver se posso
dormir melhor. Saio de casa para, ir ao campo, onde
darei um passeio por dissipar a melancolia.
(7.) Por has a manifold employment expressing,
however, in spite of apparent diversity, its original
meaning i.e.: the space between the subject and its
aim, a space which may be considered as such, or as
a way or means for its design.
Examples. Ir por mar, por terra (by sea, by land),
por um lado, por caminho direito, por todo o reino.
Entrar por uma rua, por um rio ou porto. A bala
entrou pelo (= por o) muro (beat through the wall).
A espada entrou por elle (pierced him). Ir por al-
guem to call for or go to meet somebody; ir por
dinheiro. Pelos annos de mil nove centos about 1900.
Por outra parte somewhere else, on the other side;
por outro lado on the other side. mez por vir
next month ; o (tempo) por vir or poroir the future.
Um por um one by one. Cada um por seu turno
each by his turn. Deixar por morto to leave for
dead. Comegar por to begin with. Passar por alle-
mao to be taken for a German.
Por isso therefore; por isso mesmo for that very reason;
nem por isso nevertheless. Por mim as for me, for
my part; por quern e I say! Por quern me toma?
Whom or what do you take me for? Por falta de
for want of. Por medo que for fear of, lest. Feito
por mini, por elle done by me, by him. Isto estd
por fazer this is still to be done. Por pouco que
nao alcangasse o comboio he had nearly lost the train.
Por rico que seja however rich he may be.
Por essa razao, por falta (de), por isso, por ordem, por -<
mandado, por culpa. Foi condemnado por uma pe-
quena falta; por commodidade; por costume; por in~\
veja; por forga ou por vontade obliged or of one's
own accord. Por bem ou por mat. Por (or pelo)
amor de Deus, por amor do proximo. Por ser amigo
d'elle because he is his friend. Por carecer, por merecer.
Mandar por embaixador to send as an ambassador.
A obra ficou por acabar . . . remained unfinished; as
Remarks on the Prepositions.
311
eartas estao por responder . . . are still to be answered.
Pedir, interceder por alguem. Por parte de on the
part of. Por Deus for God's sake. Tomar pela mao.
Por ordem alphdbetica. Ter alguem por amigo, por
lionrado, por douto to take one for a friend, for
honest, for learned. Ter por certo, por dumdoso.
Comprei por cincoenta mil reis este armdrio. Rece'beu
esse livro por prhnio. Semeei milho pelo campo;
distribui esmolas pelos pobres.
(8.) Por in adverbial locutions expressing space,
duration, etc.
por nenhum modo or caso by
no means
por que razao for what reason ?
porque why, because
por causa de on account of
por quanto as, because
portanto therefore, consequent-
por cima (de) above, besides,
beyond
por baixo (de) underneath
por dentro (de) within
por fora (de) without
por aqui this way
por alii that way
por onde where? which way?
por diante (from) before
por detrds (de) (from) behind
por entre (from) between
por ora for the present
por ventura by chance
por inteiro totally
ly
morrer por morrer let the
worst come to the worst
por ser pobre ndo deixa de
mostrar soberba though he
be poor . . .
por conta (de) on account of
por tal forma que so (much) por certo (to be) sure
that.
por ad t lie on purpose
trdbalhar, comer por ires to
work, eat for three.
29. Thema.
Our Country-seat.
On certain Sundays of the month we receive in our house
a small number of friends who, however bad the weather may
be, appear about noon on those days, to lunch with us.
The windows of our dining-room look towards the riverside, and
before the wide panorama of the town and in the shadow of
the trees, we so agreeably pass the afternoon on the terrace
under our windows, that i blame myself for so long depriving
myself of my friend's company. However, since the tramway
passes before our door, the time of rural peacefulness is over for
me. And it is not to be wondered at, as this modern institution
is accompanied by much noise. I take it for certain that
these innovations, however useful they be for social and com-
mercial intercourse, exercise a destructive effect upon the
nerves. On the other hand, they signify indeed a great con-
venience. And, willingly or unwillingly, we have to accept them.
312 Lesson 12.
30. Leitura.
A emigragao portuguesa para o Brasil.
Queixam se numerosos proprietaries territoriaes da escassSz
de operarios campestres, apesar do augmento de salarios. Era
natural que ao mesmo tempo se pedisse como remedio o er-
guer obices a emigra9ao; comtudo nao me recordo que se
levantassem jamais importantes clamores tao desarrazoados que
cegamente a combatessem. Pedia-se reforma da lei do recru-
tamento por mode que a lavoura nao soffresse com a manu-
teneao da forQa militar. Chegou-se a pedir isen9oes para o
jornaleiro campestre, por se entender que o imposto de sangue
era uma das principaes causas, senao a maxima, de emigra-
rem para o Brasil tantos rapazes. lam clandestinamente ou
arranjavam passaportes por maneiras fraudulentas. Esta repug-
nancia ao servi90 militar, innata em todo o Minho, e bem expli-
cavel, por isso que o filho, ajudando desde cria^a seus paes nos
diversos grangeios agricolas, e d'elles violentamente arrancado,
com grave prejuizo do casal agricola. Prefere, pois, tentar em
regioes desconhecidas a sua independencia a servir a patria no
exercito. A repuguancia pela vida militar v6mol-a confirmada
na emigra^ao claudestina, que em tao grande escala se effectua
n'esta regiao, constituida em grande parte por mancebos fu- j
gindo ao recrutamento. Esta repugnancia, habilmente explo-
rada pelos engajadores, que enxameiam na regiao, facilitando
passaportes para os criminosos fugirem a justi9a e os mancebos
se esquivarem ao servi9o do exercito pelo modica quantia de
nove mil reis, e em extreme auxiliado pela facilidade de trans-
portes e extensa raia da provincia. Supponha-se modificada
a lei do recenseamento militar a contento dos lavradores, e
extincto portanto a principal origem da clandestina sahida de
muitos Portugueses. Restava saber se nao augmentaria ipso
facto (=por isso mesmo) a sahida legal. Por outras palavras:
todos os que se expatriam clandestinamente, haveriam deixado
de tomar o caminho do estrangeiro, desde que nao ficassem
sujeitos ao servi90 no exercito, ou elle se tornasse compativel
com os labores campestres? Cuido que muitos dos emigrantes
clandestinos iriam as claras para o Brasil, e, sendo assim, as
modificac.aes na lei do recrutamento poderiam ser seguidas por
accrescimo da emigragao legal. Na corrente exportadora de
Portugueses esta um caracteristico signal da nossa decadencia
economica, (Rodrigues de Freitas).
ConYersaqao.
Em que circumstancia se ve a principal causa da emi-
gra^ao portuguesa?
Prepositions Continued.
313
Qua! e" a consequencia imrnediata d'essa emigrate?
Que reme"dio se Ihe pediu?
Em que se baseava o pedido de isen9ao?
Qaal a maneira de emigrarem os rapazes?
Como se explica a repngnancia ao servi90 militar?
Que e que os mancebos preferem?
Por quern e como 4 explorada essa repugnancia?
Que v o economista Kodrigues de Freitas na emigra9ao
para o Brasil?
Que cuida elle, suppondo-se modificada a lei do recru-
tamento ?
Thirteenth Lesson.
Prepositions Continued.
53. How to express Certain English Prepositions*
(a) About.
About: 1. in the sense of "round" is to be rendered
by em volta de, em roda de, em redor de; 2. in the sense
of "concerning" by com respeito a, sobre, acerca de;
3. in speaking of things which people carry about them,
it is translated by com or may be not translated at all;
4. when it means near a certain number or quantity,
by pouco mais on menos, cerca de, por ahi; 5. when ex-
pressing nearness to a particular time, it is translated
by perto de, por.
(1) All thronged about the orator.
Todos acotovellavam-se em volta do orador.
(2) I will speak to him about this affair.
Hei-de Ihe falar com respeito a este negocio.
He could not give me any information about what had
happened.
Elle nao poude dar-me informacao alguma acerca do que
se tinha passado.
(3) I had no money about me.
En, nao trazia dinheiro (commigo).
(4) We are about 300 people.
Somos pouco mais ou menos (or por ahi) trezentas pessoas.
The dinner lasted about two hours.
jantar levou perto cie (cerca de) duas horas.
314 Lesson 13.
(5) The train arrived about three o'clock.
combdio chegou pelas tres horas.
(b) At.
At: 1. is most commonly rendered by a or em
with or without an article; sometimes it is not trans-
lated at all; 2. after nouns or verbs denoting derision,
anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., it is rendered by de (or
com); 3. "at," meaning "at the house" is em casa de;
"at the shop" is na loja de or a (or de) with the article.
(1) At six o'clock we were at home and at dinner.
As seis horas estavamos em casa e a jantar.
Do you play at cards ? jog a as cartas ?
(2) She laughed at him ella riu-se cTelle.
To tremble at tremer de or com.
1 am surprised (angry) at what you say.
Estou surpreendida (zangada) do que diz.
(3) We were at our aunt's estavamos em casa da tia.
We buy our coffee at the grocer's.
Compramos o nosso cafe ao (or do) merceeiro.
(c) By.
By: 1. Denoting the agent or cause, is translated
by de or par:
An honest man is respected by everybody.
Um homem honrado e respeilado por todas.
We are beloved by our parents.
Somos amados de nossos paes.
I took the child by its hand.
Tomei a crianga pela mao.
2. After verbs denoting to sell, to buy, to work, etc.,
and preceding a noun of weight or measure, day,
week, month or year, "by" is rendered into Portuguese
by a with the definite article or by por:
How much do you sell the tea by the pound?
A quanto vende o chd por arratel ?
We work by the hour or by the day.
Trabalhamos a hora ou as dia.
3. When preceding a numeral immediately followed
by an adjective of dimension, "by" is rendered by "por":
Prepositions Continued.
315
This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide.
Esta sola tern quinze pes de comprido por dez de largo.
4. "By" following verbs denoting to kill, to wound
etc., is translated by dum golpe de, com or de um ataque
de, etc., to express the use of the instrument by which
a man was wounded or the disease he was killed of:
The officer was wounded by the sword of his adversary.
official foi ferido por um golpe de espada do seu ad-
oersdrio.
His father was killed by an inflammation of the lungs.
Seu pae morreu com um ataque de pneumonia.
If the blows have been repeated, a golpes de (a
setadas, apedradas) is used, in which case it is most com-
monly rendered in English by "with." Ex.:
They knocked him down with a stick.
5. "By" is employed in the following idiomatic ex-
pressions:
By day de dia; day by day
de dia em dia
by night de noite
by means of a meio de, medi-
ante
one by one um por um
two by two dois a dois
by turns por turnos
by the bulk em grosso, por
grosso
by heart de cor
by letter por escrito
by no means de modo algum
by and by logo, ao depois
hard by pegado, proximo (a)
by that time nisso, entao
by this time twelvemonth
d'aqui a um anno
by name de nome, pelo nome
by myself por mim mesmo, so
by Jove por Dem!
by to-morrow evening pela
noite de amanha
by four o'clock pelas guatro
horas.
81. Thema.
1. My father was not above (mais de) twenty -two years
old when he was married. My uncle's country-house is very
handsome, but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. It
is about a year since my friend set off for America. Rome
was built by Romulus. The poor man has been driven out
of his house by his creditors. I will get up to-morrow at
six o'clock. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? Yes,
I was there. I will pay you at the end of this month.
316 Lesson 13.
2. I rejoice greatly at your good luck. She always
smiles at everything that is said. Where was your sister this
morning? She was at her aunt's. My box is one foot and
a half deep by two wide and four long. Harold was wound-
ed by a sword. William the Second was killed by an arrow
in the New Forest. He is so strong that with his fist he
could knock down an ox. They killed the dog with stones.
The soldiers kill one another with bayonets.
(d) From.
1. "From" after or in connection with the verbs
to come, to send, etc., is generally rendered by da
parte de, de ao pe de, when followed by a noun or pro-
noun denoting a person:
Many compliments from Dr. 0.
Muitos cumprimentos da parte do serihor doutor 0.
I come from him or her.
Venho da parte d'elle or d'ella. Venho de ao pe d'elle
or d'ella.
Tell him from me diga-lhe da miriha parte.
2. "From" with a possessive = ("from someone's
house,") is da casa de:
I come from my uncle's, aunt's, etc.
Eu venho da casa do meu tio y da minha tia.
3. "From . . to . .", when denoting progress from
place to place or time to time, is rendered by de . . . a
(para, em, ate):
He went from street to street, from town to town.
Til f - { de rua a rua, de terra a terra.
' \ duma rua a outra, duma terra a outra.
From day to day, from time to time.
De dia a (or em) dia, de tempos a tempos.
4. "From" is rendered by desde (or de), and "to"
by ate, when speaking of extent or time.
From Easter to Christmas.
Desde a Pdscoa ate ao (or ate o) Natal.
From the Rhine to the Ocean.
Desde o Rheno ate o oceano.
From Lisbon to Porto.
Desde Lisboa ate ao (or ate o) Porto.
Prepositions Continued.
(e) On or upon.
317
1. "On" or "upon" generally = em, em cima de,
ra cima de, sobre:
Your gloves are on the table.
As suas luvas estdo em cima da mesa.
I am sitting on a chair.
En, estou (assentado) numa cadeira.
A cover is spread on the bed.
Uma coberta estd estendida sobre a cama.
"On to" with verbs of motion = para cima de.
The cat sprang on to the table.
gato saltou para cima da mesa.
2. After the verb "to play," on or upon is not
translated; after "to live," "to depend," and the like,
"on" or "upon" is rendered by de:
You play on the violin, and I play on the flute.
V a Ex a toca rebecca e eu toco flauta.
The prisoner lives on bread and water.
preso vive de pao e dgua.
A good end often depends on a good beginning.
Um bom fim muitas vezes depende d'um bom principio.
3. "On" before the days of the week is rendered
by em with the article; in letter-dates, it is dropped in
Portuguese :
Come on Sunday or Monday.
Venha no domingo ou na segunda feira.
On the 19 th of April.
No dia dezanove de Abril, em 19 de . . .
Lisbon, on the 7 th of May Lisboa, 7 de Maio.
People go to church on Sundays.
Vae-se d igreja aos domingos.
4. "On," followed by a substantive expressing
action, or meaning "when" with a verb, is translated
by a and em:
On his marriage (when he married) ao seu casamento.
On that occasion nessa occasiao.
318 Lesson 13.
(f) Over.
1. "Over" generally is translated by em (or a) eima
de, sobre when it signifies a stay; by por cima de, when
it means movement:
The looking-glass hangs over the chest of drawers.
espelho estd em cima da cdmmoda.
The cat passed over the live coal.
gato passou por cima das brasas.
2. When it is equivalent to "more than" or "longer
than," it is rendered by mais de, alem de:
The fight lasted over four hours.
A luta durou mais de qimtro horas.
Note. Distinguish carefully from this the use of "over"
as an adverb:
As soon as the rain is over.
Logo que a chuva tiver passado.
Is dinner over? Jd acabou o jantar?
That's over and gone isso passou, isso jd Id vae.
(g) With.
1. "With" is rendered by de (or com] after verbs
denoting to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load,
to cover, to fill, and after adjectives meaning pleased,
contented, etc. Ex.:
He is dying with cold elle morre de frio.
The waggon is loaded with goods.
carro estd carregado de mercadoria.
2. "With" is expressed by a without the article
before nouns denoting the means by which a thing is
done or made. Ex.:
To draw with a pencil desenhar a lapiz.
To "fight with" (a weapon) is : bater-se a (espada etc.).
3. "With" must not be expressed after certain
verbs, such as: to meet with encontrar (with direct ob-
ject; but: encontrar-se com)', to trust with confiar alg. c.
a alg. ; to supply with fornecer alg. c. a alg. ; to reproach
with lancar em rosto, reprehender alg. c. a. alg. Ex.:
We shall supply him with everything.
Havemos de Ihe fornecer tudo.
Prepositions Continued. 319
I reproached him with his ingratitude.
Eu repreliendi-lhe a sua ingratidao.
4. "With" governing a noun together with which
forms an adjective phrase in translated by de.
A bonnet with feathers um chapeu de plumas.
The boy with black hair o rapaz de cabellos pretos.
5. "With" meaning amongst, in, is rendered by
com and em:
With us, said the Frenchman . . .
Comnosco, dizia o frances.
With woman, maternal love is the strongest feeling.
Na mulher o amor maternal e o sentimento mais forte*
Remark.
As already stated, prepositions must always come before
the words they govern, and never (as often in English) at
the end of a sentence :
Whom are you speaking to? A quern fala?
What's that for? Para que e isso?
The man whom you are interested in.
homem em que estd inter essado.
32. Thema.
1. Go to Mr. Smith and tell him from me that I am
expecting him. From whom do you come? I come from
Miss B. I never received such an (= tamanJio) insult from a
Frenchman. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not in his
'leg. I will call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening
(I will) go to the play. Upon what instrument does your
sister play? She plays the piano. That happened on the
12 th of March. I am in the habit of taking a cup of coffee
as soon as dinner is over.
2. Do not meddle with my affairs ; attend to your own.
Is that house covered with slates or tiles ? It is covered with
tiles. This picture seems to be done with pencil. When you
meet with a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty.
France extends from the Rhine to the Atlantic Ocean. What
does he complain of? We have travelled from Switzerland to
Italy. You spend all the day in going from house to house,
'from street to street, from place to place. Those .labourers
work from morning to night. I walk every day from twelve
to three.
320 Lesson 13.
33. Leitura.
automdvel.
automovel, como a propria palavra o esta a indicar, e
urn carro que se move por si rnesmo, ou independente de qual-
quer for^a exterior. Para comprehendermos facilmente o me-
chanismo do automovel, notemos, antes de mais nada, certos
factos conhecidos de todos, que nos levarao, sem o menor es-
for90, a comprehensao d'aquelle mechanismo. Quando pomos
em movimento a roda de uma bomba r acontece que o movi-
mento que imprimimos a essa roda faz com que o embolo da
bomba suba e des^a ; o que e o mesmo que dizer que o movi-
mento da roda se transmittiu ao 6mbolo; -- e suppondo o
caso inverso, isto e, que, em vez de fazermos girar a roda da
bomba, faziamos subir e descer, com o auxilio das maos, o seu
mbolo, tambem o movimento d'este faria com que a roda en-
trasse a girar. Por outra: o movimento do fimbolo transmittir-
se-hia igualmente ao volante da bomba.
Quer isto dizer que se uma roda pode por em movimento
um e"mbolo, tambem este pode por em movimento uma roda.
Ora no automovel e precisamente o movimento de um embolo
(movimento rectilmeo alternativo, ou de vae-vem) o que faz
mover as rodas d'este vehiculo. Se n'um apparelho fizermos
com que o Smbolo se desloque n'um movimento de vae-vem,
subindo e descendo constantemente, claro que a roda, que
esta ligada a esae embolo por uma haste, entrara a girar, e
girara emqnanto o embolo estiver em movimento.
Conyersa^ao.
Que e" um automovel?
D'onde ja deduzimos que se move por si mesmo?
Que havemos de notar, para comprehendermos o seu
mechanismo ?
Que acontece quando pCmos em movimento a roda d'uma
bomba?
E que se daria, suppondo-se o caso inverso?
Que quer dizer isso?
Qual 6 o movimento que faz mover as rodas d'um auto-
movel?
Como entrarao as rodas a girar?
E durante que tempo continuarao a girar?
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 321
Fourteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech.
Pronouns.
A. Possessive Pronouns. Pronomes possessivos.
54. Like the article, the possessive pronoun is
repeated before all nouns when designating persons or
things of different kind; equally before all adjectives
when referring to beings of different kind and preceding
the noun. Ex.:
Os meits desgostos e as minhas alegrias. Partilhei comtigo
os tens bons e os teus maus momentos.
55. If there be no contrast of kind, or if the
adjectives do not refer to the same noun, the poss.
i pronoun is not repeated:
Todos admiram as nossas vastas e Bellas florestas.
' 56. The gender of the nouns being different,
the possessive pronoun agrees with the one next to it:
meu poder e gloria; a minha gloria e poder.
} 57. A poss. pronoun which belongs to several
adjectives is not repeated if one or all of them follow
the noun:
Partilhei eomligo os teus bons momentos e os maus (os
teus momentos bons e maus).
58. The poss. pronoun may be strengthened:
(a) By adding proprio: vi-o com os meusproprios olhos.
(b) By adding a demonstrative pronoun:
Ouvi por estes meus ouvidos dizer aquelle seu amigo.
59. Contrary to the English, the Portuguese
employs instead of the poss. pronoun:
(a) The definite article in those cases where the
relation between owner and object is evident:
Escreceu d avd (to his grandmother).
Vendeu a casa (his house).
Estendo o bra$o (my arm).
Tapa a boca (your mouth).
Cola a boca hold your tongue.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 21
322 Lesson 14.
KB. If the object is an abstract noun in the plural,
the article may be omitted:
Eecobrei (os) sentidos: redobrdmos (as) diligencias.
(b) De or another preposition after certain verbs:
Mudar de fato to change dress.
Mudou d' aviso he changed his mind.
Cumpri com a (miriha) palavra I kept my word'.
Ella cam de joelhos she fell on her knees.
(c) De with the personal pronoun of the 3 rd per-
son, whenever the poss. pronoun seu, sua might cause
a misunderstanding:
Vi a irma d'elle, d'ella (his, her sister).
Fomos a casa d'elles (to their house),
60. Before the same noun two poss. pronouns
are not admissible:
Os sens amigos e os meus.
Your and my friends, your friends and mine.
61. If to a noun belong a poss. pronoun an<
a possessive genitive, the latter must be preceded by
o, a, 05, as, esse, aquelle or the like:
Li as tuas cartas e as (essas, aquellas) de tua irma.
I read your and your sister's letters.
62. If the noun depending on the poss. pronoun
expresses a quality, the definite article may be employed
instead, while to the verb will be added the respective
personal pronoun in the dative:
Estranhei-lhe a franquesa I wondered at his frankness.
Admiro-lhes o sangue-frio I admire their self-possession
(or coolness).
Como te conhego a indole ... as I know your character.
Recorihed-lhe uma boa voz.
I noticed him to have a good voice.
N.B. This construction may be employed with persons
and must be employed with things:
Avistdmos a cidade: jd se Ihe distinguiam (jd Hie
distinguimos) as torres.
We got a sight of the town: its spires could already
be distinguished.
63. While the adjective and participle always
agree with the possessive in gender and number, titles
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 323
of which the possessive forms an essential part, are
excepted from this rule, the adjective agreeing with the
natural sex of the person:
Vossa Alteza que e bom e justo (respectively : boa e
justa).
Santidade estd bem lembrado.
34. Thema.
He sacrificed his and his sister's fortune, though an ac-
quaintance of mine warned him. If he had doubled his efforts,
' and if somebody had come to his help, he might have succee-
ded in saving his family from ruin. As I know his honesty, I
did whatever I could to guide his steps. But alas ! my friend,
all my measures were in vain. His own father gave him up.
I am wet through, I must change my dress. My friend changed
his mind, he will remain at home with his parents. My head
I aches. I wrote a long letter to my aunt, who had asked me
to give her some news from me. May I also give her your
kind regards? The woman fell on her knees. I have a
i thorn in my foot. I have only lived a fortnight in this town ;
so I don't yet know all its places and streets.
35. Leitura e yersao.
Carta ao Sr. 6r. P. sobre Feminismo.
Nao imagina V a Ex a o prazer que me deu a sua carta,
sabido como 6 que da discussao intelligente e sincera t6m sahido
as mais claras verdades; conhecido como e quanto se ganha
em fazer interessar pelas nossas opinioes, ainda os adversaries
que mais as combatem. E nao sendo V a Ex a um adversario,
mas urn confesso adepto, embora moderado, maior prazer o
meu em Ihe vir expor serenamente as ideias feministas, taes
como as comprehendo e preconiso. Diz V a Ex a que e femi-
nista, embora moderado, que o e, como todos os illustrados
nao poderao deixar de o ser, segundo a sua propria phrase.
Eis o nosso primeiro triumpho, a nossa principal batalha ven-
eida . . . Que victoria immensa nao representa essa sua simples
phrase! E se pensarmos que esta primeira, mas definitiva
conquista do espirito masculino, representa o trabalho de quasi
meio seculo, temos vontade de dizer . . . que as mulheres,
apresentando as suas ideias e luctando pela educacao que as
superiorize, lembram a paciencia das alluvioes que fazem re-
cuar o mar e mudam o aspecto de um pais. Entendo que o
ser humano que pertence ao sexo feminine, nao deve ser coa-
gido (influenced) pela educa9ao, nem pelos costumes, nem pelas
21*
324 Lesson 15.
conversas, nem pelos paes que tern a mania de talhar muito
discrecionariamente o future dos filhos a v6r no casamento
um fim, um ideal complete e unico, quasi uma obriga<jao.
Assim como o homem pode ser professor, jornalista, sabio,
artista, empregado, operario, tudo emfim, sem que ninguem Ihe
pergunte pela certidao do matrimonio, sem embargo de serem
quasi todos chefes de familia, nao vejo inconveniente a que
a mulher procure a sua colloca^ao, tenha o seu curso scien-
tifico, estude, trabalhe para si, para o seu futuro, para a sua
vida autonoma, sem se Ihe inquirir do seu estado . . .
(Anna de Castro Osorio: As mulheres portugusas.)
Fifteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech (continued).
B. Personal Pronouns.
64. To put an emphasis upon a personal (or
demonstrative) pronoun (or a substantive), the Portu-
guese employ:
(a) The indefinite pronoun mesmo, (-self):
Escreveu elle mfomo he wrote himself (cf.: escreveu com
o seu prdprio punho he wrote with his own hand or
autographically).
Vimo-la a ella mesmo we saw her herself.
Vimo-la nds m$smos we saw her ourselves.
(b) The verb ser with the pronoun o (a os as) and
a relative clause: ser o que (a que, etc.) or ser quern:
Tu foste o que me salvaste (instead of "tu me salvaste")
it was you who saved me.
N.B. "0" may be dropped :Tu e que me salvaste.
(c) The periphrase e (era, foi, etc.) que:
Tu e que me salvaste. $ a ti que devo a minha salvagao.
Here que is not a relative, but a particle of emphasis
("Particula de realce 1 ). In both periphrases (b) and (c)
the dependent verb generally agrees with the personal
pronoun: tu salvaste.
tactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 325
If, however, a pronoun so emphasized is followed
>y quern, the verb agrees with this latter i.e., it is put
into the 3 rd person singular. Ex.:
Eu fui (o) que affirmei isso
It was I who affirmed that
It was not we who said that
Eu e que affirmei isso
Fui eu (o) que affirmei isso
Fui eu quern affirmou isso.
Nos e que o nao dissemos
Nos nao fomos (os) que o dis-
seram
Nao fomos nos (os) que o
disseram
Nao fomos n6s quern o disse.
(d) The particle to be emphasized may be also put
at the beginning of the sentence, being generally
repeated by a personal pronoun. Ex.:
A mim reputo-me um pobre filho de povo que por acaso
veio ter cd cima.
Essas Tiervas e preciso arrancd-las.
Aquelles individuos que desejarem orientar-se no estudo
dum tal problema nao deixarei de Ihes recommendar
a leitura de dois bellos livres, que venho de compulsar.
65. When two or more subjects (noun or pro-
noun) of different persons belong to the same verb,
this agrees with the plural of the most prominent per-
son (the 1 st pers. is more prominent then, the 2 nd and
this more than the 3 rd ):
Eu, tu e elle partiremos juntos. Tu e elle partireis juntos.
Eu e men irmao partimos juntos.
Note. In southern Portugal and in familiar speech the
verb is employed in the 3 rd person pi. instead of the 2 nd :
Tu e teu irmao partirao juntos.
66. The absolute reflective pronoun is si, which
does not distinguish number or gender. It is employed
with the prepositions a, de, em, por (per), para, sobre.
With com it assimilates to comsigo. Sometimes it is
strengthened by mesmo:
Nao estar em si to be out of one's mind
estar muito em si \ , ,
estar senhor de si f to be conscious of oneself
326 Lesson 15.
cair em si \ ,
tornar *obre si f to come to oneself
fazer alg. c. de per si to do something separately
fazer para si to do for oneself
o mundo em si the world by itself
pensar de si para si to think by oneself
tomar sobre si to take upon oneself
trazer comsigo to carry about oneself
ndo caber em si de . . . to be beside oneself with . . .
67. "Si" depending on another preposition may
be translated by elle(s), ella(s):
Elle(s) tinha(m) todos contra elle(s) or si.
He (they) had everybody against him (them).
Viram o ceu azul por cima d'elles (or de si).
They saw the blue sky above them.
N.B. The same translation takes place when "si" being
in familiar speech employed also for "you," might cause a
misunderstanding. Pensa sempre em si may be: he thinks
always of you or ... of himself. So, to express the latter, it
is better to say: pensa sempre em si mesmo.
68. The conjunctive reflective pronoun is se, which
takes the forms me, te, nos, vos, according to the person
and number. Its place is:
(a) In an affirmative direct capital phrase after
the verb:
apresentou-se ; eu lembro-me; nds affastdmo-nos.
(b) In such a phrase beginning with an adverb
or some complement, se may be placed before or after
the verb:
Hontem lembrei-me; Id se ficou ; pouco a pouco nos
aproximdmos.
(c) In a negative and interrogative capital phrase
and always in a dependent clause before the verb:
Elle ndo se approximou; tu ndo te applicas; a egua e
que se ndo esquecia; nem me fale nisso.
69. How to translate "it is" with a predicative
complement :
(a) This being a noun with an article, possessive
or demonstrative pronoun, an adjective or a noun
em
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 327
ployed as an adjective and followed by que or an in-
finitive, "it is" is translated by e:
E uma lastima it is a pity.
E men it is mine^; e isto that's it.
fi o teu dever. fi certo, e verdade que se foi embora.
E facil a gente enganar-se a si mesmo.
Seria justo (seria justiga) que fosse absolvido.
(b) The predicate being an adverb or a noun which
designs a transitory state, "it is" is rendered by "estd" :
Estd bem it's all right; estd urn horror it's a horrible
thing; estd uma belleza it's a beautiful sight.
70. "So" or "that' r supplying the place of an
adjective, or of a noun used adjectively, or of a phrase,
is translated by o or isso or remains untranslated:
Portugal e um povo triste, e e-o ate giiando sorri (and it
is so even when smiling).
Durante algum tem,po, o systema liberal foi uma palavra.
Hoje nem isso e.
For some time the Liberal system was (but) a word.
To day it is not even that.
86. Thema.
Louis Philip, King of the French, wrote most of his
letters with his own hand. It's to you that I owe my liberty
and my life. Mrs. S. speaks always of herself and blames
everything she did not do herself. Have you your spectacles
about you ? Yes, I never go out without them. I never saw these
gentlemen in your house. Are they your nephews? Yes,
they are. She will think of us when she is unfortunate,
for she will certainly become so. Is that your house? Yes,
it is. Are those your shoes ? Yes, they are. "Is it you, my
friend?" exclaimed I, when I heard somebody come up the
stairs. "Yes, it is I," answered he; "I bring you good news."
Was it you, my boys, who planted this tree? Virtue by it-
self is worthy of esteem ; but vice by itself is hateful. I and my
children will pass the summer in the country. Then you and
your friends will no longer stay there.
37. Leitura.
Nao perdia o seu tempo aquelle veneziano que viera re-
commendado a Salomao Zacuto e se disfar^ava em mercador
flamengo. Era um espirito perspicaz e observador. Desagra-
328 Lesson 16.
dara-lho o caracter de Salomao. Nao era evidentemente o judeu
que elle suppozera encontrar.
Um outro Ihe parecera excellente para informador e auxi-
liar, em terra que tao completamente Ihe era desconhecida.
De um relance d'olhos o avaliara e Ihe percebera os me'ritos.
Esse outro era Ananias, o comico judeu, que a canalha de
Lisboa apupava cruelmente.
Que importava ao veneziano que elle f6sse ridicule ? Sabia
muita cousa da vida de Lisboa, conhecia e apreciava perspi-
cazmente os homens de Villa Nova da Gibraltar, seus corre-
ligionarios, e nao seria difficil conseguir que falasse desassom-
bradamente.
Aquelle seria o sen precioso guia. Leu-lhe a alma no
olhar, sentiu-lhe vibrar a ambisao em breves referencias re-
passadas de malicia, em palavras soltas que vinham esbraze-
adas de rancor. Comprehendeu a especie d'homem que a for-
tuna Ihe deparava, e logo procurou acercal-o bem de si,
lisongeando-lhe as cobic,as e malquere^as, tao rapidamente
surprehendidas. (Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)
Conyersa^ao.
Que nos diz Campos Junior d'aquelle veneziano no seu
celebre romance Guerreiro e Monge ?
Quaes foram as relagoes d'elle com Salomao Zacuto?
Como vinha disfar9ado?
Qual foi o juizo que o seu espirito observador formou do
judeu que o acolhera?
Quern Ihe parecia melhor para informador?
Como Ihe tinha percebido os meritos?
Que circumstancia tornava Ananias precioso aos olhos
do veneziano?
Que procurou elle fazer em seguida?
Por que meios o acercou de si?
Sixteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech (continued).
Personal Pronouns (continued).
71. If the modal verbs (querer, saber, dever,
poder, ir, deixar, fazer, mandar, vir, ouvir, sentir, etc.)
are followed by an infinitive and a personal pronoun,
jl 1_
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 329
this latter is placed in a direct sentence, whether affir-
mative or interrogative;
(a) After or before the infinitive, if it is its object:
Devo-o fazer or devo fazel-o ? vou buscdl-o ; posso dizer-
Ih'o or posso-lh'o dizer; mandei-a dbrir; vi castigdl-o.
(b) Before the infinitive, when it is its subject:
Mandei-o buscar pao; vi-o castigar o cao; ou$o-a chamar
a filha; fago-o vir; ouviram-no falar; mandaram-me
entrar.
71. In negative sentences the place of the pro-
noun is before the verb:
Nao m'o tinhas dado; ndo Ih'o deste?
In the case of 70 (a) also in a negative sentence
the pronoun may be placed before the verb or after
the infinitive:
Ndo o devo fazer (?) ; nao devo fazSl-o ('?).
In a dependent negative clause, the pronoun may
precede or follow the "nao":
11 Jd porque me nao (or ndo me) esquego que e pobre,
muito pobre, o nosso povo"
72. If the phrase begins by a complement (ad-
verb, conjunction, relative pronoun, etc.) the conjunctive
pronoun is generally put before the verb or its auxiliary :
Emquanto o ndo vejo . . .; quantas vezes IWo ndo
tenho dito!
Deus vol-o pague! (Here the conjunction "qtte" is
omitted.)
N.B. The verbs ver, ouvir, deixar, mandar, fazer being
followed by an infinitive and an accusative complement of
the 3 rd person (o, a, os, as), the dative pronoun (Ihe, Ihes)
may be employed instead (see 62) :
Eu vejo-lhes lancar Idgrimas tristes.
The same is to be said of the verb chamar: chama-lhe sever o;
chamo-lhe meu. (See also 62.)
73. Conjunctions of the Pronouns.
(a) A pronoun of the dative or accusative may be
joined to a gerund, but never to a past participle:
Dizendo-lhe isto; tenho-lh'o dito (but not: tenho dito-lh'o!)
330 Lesson 16.
(b) "Se" may be joined to another conjunctive
pronoun:
Ndo se me lira da cabega que foram injustos comnosco.
(c) In the future and conditional tenses the pro-
noun complement is intercalated between the root of
the infinitive and the termination:
fechdl-o-d; sel-o-ei; far-lhe-ia falta; vel-o-emos ; dir-lh'o-ei.
Popularly, these forms are not employed, but are
replaced by others for instance:
Eu digo-lh'o ao depois; vamos vel-o.
(d) Sometimes a dative complement (especially of
the pronouns) is joined to a verb instead of a possessive
pronoun before a noun:
Ficava-nos tambem na amada terra o coragdo.
Also our heart remained in our beloved country.
(e) The English ''there were four of us," instead
of "we were four," is rendered in Portuguese by:
Eramos quatro ao todo.
(f) In familiar speech the pleonastical "me" is used
in sentences like this:
Porque ndo me estuda? Why don't you study?
Ndo me saias d'aqui! Don't go out of this place.
(g) To the pronouns nos and vos is added some-
times an also pleonastical outros:
N6s-outros Portugueses we Portuguese,
(h) In familiar speech sen, sua are employed with
a following noun or an adjective used as such:
Seu garoto! Naughty boy!
Seu felizardo ! Fortunate man that you are !
Seu tolo! Fool that you are!
38. Thema.
From where do you get your coffee? I get it sent from
Guatemala. Is it good? I have always heard it hghly praised.
I have also noticed it always to have the best flavour (cf.
62). Some time ago there was a revolution in Catalonia,
but the Government succeeded in suppressing it. That province
strives to render itself independent, but until now it has
not yet succeeded. Get up ! You intended to rise at cock-crow.
Don't you hear it crow? I have heard it crowing already
kolf ov,
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 331
half an hour ago. To this poor woman a letter was given
in which she was informed of her son's misfortune. She
melted into tears (= desfazer-se em pranto) so that she was
not to be calmed. Saint Anthony, the patron saint of Lisbon,
is said to have been preaching when a raving madman entered
the church and with wild words and gestures demanded the string
that fastened his hood. The saint immediately took it off, and
as soon as he clasped it round the madman, this latter changed
into one of his most attentive hearers.
39. Leitnra.
Dia no campo.
A tarde principiava a coar-se atraves das grandes arvores
I da nossa deveza. Os campos estavam solitaries; neste, na-
quelle, dois ou tres bois corno esquecidos. Tinhamos passado o
dia pouco communicativos e repassados de uma doce saudade
maguada: e r sem me sentir com coragem de Ihe dizer que
j abrisse o piano, poisei sobre a cadeira a rabeca que quiz fazer
1 cantar e que gemeu em torn menor uma amargura. Eramos
tres ha dez mezes e somos so dois agora. E, como o peque-
nito morrra aqui, desde entao a nossa casita de campo, aldea
branca, no declive d'um monte verde, entre pinheiros, fechou-se
e nunca mais falei n'ella.
Quando me pediu que voltassemos, quiz dissuadil-a ter-
t namente; mas ella tinha o riso nos labios; e um ramo de flores
! outonaes para a campa do nosso fllho, uma visita matinal ao
cemiterio que e como uma singella quadra campestre, a missa
conventual dita pelo tio Jose" na egreja fresca, o almo90 na
nossa salita de jantar rescendendo ainda a lua de mel ... 6
i coracao egoista! attraiste-me e nao fui superior ao encanto
dum dia recolhido com ella na pacificadora naturSza. Ainda
para mais a quadra ia deliciosa e eu amo o tempo em que
as arvores se despem dos seus atavios e entram na meditacao
e na penitencia.
dia estava bellisimo, os caminhos cheios de sol e ainda
humidos das chuvas anteriores. De manhasinha atravessamos
a aldeia com o nosso ramo de flores na mao. Uma pontita
i de pallidez dava-lhe mais realce ao rosto meigo.
cemiterio estava alegre, tinha muitas rosas de toucar
e o seu muro caiado, ao fundo, d'onde se descortina o rio e
um panorama de verduras. Ajoelhamos piedosamente na campa
! do nosso filho : cantara n'esse momento uma avesita n'um car-
valho proximo, e o sino dava as primeiras badaladas. Ella
limpou os olhos e fomos entao beijar a mao ao tio Jose e
ouvir-lhe a missa. (Guilhermo Gama.)
332 Lesson 17.
40. Para decorar.
A Cigarra e a formiga.
Tendo a cigarra em cantigas Amiga (diz a cigarra),
Folgado todo o verao, Prometto, a fe d'animal,
Achou-se em penuria extrema, Pagar-vos antes de agosto
Na tormentosa esta^ao. Os juros, e o principals
Nao Ihe restando migalha, A formiga nunca empresta,
Quo trincasse a tagarella, Nunca da, por isso ajunta.
Foi valer-se da formiga, No verao, em que lidavas ?
Que morava perto d'ella. A pedinte ella pergunta.
Rogou-lhe que Ihe emprestasse, Responde a outra : Eu cantava
Pois tinha riqueza e brio, Noite e dia, a toda a hora.
Algum grao, com que manter-se 0h ! Bravo ! (torna a formiga)
TC" voltar o acceso estio. Cantavas? Pois dan$a agora*.
(Bocage.)
Seventeenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.
74. The demonstrative "this," "that," "these,"
"those," "the one(s)," followed or not by a relative, is
rendered:
(a) By este(s), esta(s) for objects near the speaker;
(b) By esse(s), essa(s) for such near the person
spoken to;
(c) By aquelle(s), aquella(s) for such distant to the
one and the other;
(d) By o(s), a(s) in any case, but only with a
following relative:
E este (esse, aquelle, o) que ve it is the one you see.
N.B. These pronouns, being employed adiectively and
referring to nouns of different gender, agree with the nearest:
Estes homens e mulheres; estas mulheres e homens.
75. "This," "that," employed without a noun
which, however, is to be supplied, is rendered by este,
esse or is altogether omitted:
Esse nao e o meu livro. esta a minha porta,
aquella e (a) do meu amigo. Quern e? who is that?
meu pae. That is my father.
,
yntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 333
76. If "this," "that" does not refer to a deter-
minate person or object, it is rendered by isto, isso,
aquillo.
Que e isto (isso)? Ndo percebo isso (aquillo).
77. "That which" or "what" is rendered by o que.
que vi nao me agradou.
That which (what) I saw did not please me.
Remark. Isto, isso, aquillo, tudo, o que (= aquillo que)
are masculine and singular. If, however, followed by the
verbs ser or parecer with a noun or pronoun in the plural,
the verb generally agrees with the predicative noun : Isto nao
\sao palavras de animagao: que vimos pareciam drvores.
Eram tudo memorias de alegria.
78. . The difference between outro and outrem is
this: the former is an adjective and variable; the second
is a noun and invariable. The former refers to per-
sons and things; the latter only to persons and in a
general and indeterminate manner:
Mas como entdo nao liavia no mundo outro amor, nem
outrem a quern amar, que faria Addo para provar o
amor que desejava encarecer?*
79. "He who" is rendered by aquelle que, o que
or quern. The latter is always employed in proverbs
and in a general meaning:
Quern tern capa, escapa. Quern porfia, mata caga. Quern
com caes se langa, compulgas se levanta (cf. 180, 2
of the 1 st Part).
80. Tal, taes without distinction of gender, is
the English "such," "like"; it is employed conjunctively
or absolute:
Taes desgostos soffreu e taes foram as suas dores . . .
Such troubles he suffered and such were his pains.
Tal amo, tal criado like master, like man.
81. Also quern may be employed for "such":
Ndo faltard quern por alguns punhados de dobras de
oiro os favorega e acclame.
There will be no want of such who for some handfuls
of doubloons will favour and acclaim them.
82. The pronoun que in certain conjunctions is
employed predicatively and may not be translated:
334 Lesson 17.
Os ribeiros quasi nao murmuram de debeis e exhaustos
que vao.
The rivulets flow so feebly and exhausted that they
don't even murmur, or the rivulets hardly murmur
with debility and exhaustion.
83. Quanto as a pronoun is correlative; it is
employed either with tanto or with tudo, antecedents
which also may be only understood:
Dei-Hie (tanto or tudo) quanta tinlia. Foi sonlio (tudo)
quanta vi.
84. The relative cujo whose, of whom, corre-
sponds to "do qual," expressing the preposition de with a
possessive meaning. It is immediately followed by the
noun, with which it agrees in gender and number:
Este e o homem cujo talento admiramos.
If, however, this noun does not express possession,
but is a predicative, "whose," "of whom" must be
rendered by de quern (dos quaes), de que (do qual).
Os viajantes de quern (or dos quaes) foi companheiro.
pais de que (or do qual) era rei . . .
85. The relative que ("which," "that") may refer
to persons or objects. In the latter case it may be
preceded by one of the prepositions em, a, or de.
papel em que escrevo ; o livro de que me falou; a coisa
a que se refere.
If, however, "which" or "that" is employed with
another preposition, it must be rendered by o qual (see
180, 3 of. P. I).
41. Thema.
The Whistle.
I was still a child of seven years of age, so related the
famous Franklin, when my parents on a holiday filled my
pockets with coppers. I went directly to a shop where they
sold toys for children. Yet the sound of a whistle that I saw
by the way in the hands of another boy charmed me so much
that I voluntarily offered him all my money for this one ob-
ject. The boy consented. Satisfied with my bargain, I ran
home, where I went whistling all over the house, for rny
whistle gave me as much pleasure as it disturbed the whole
family. When my brothers and sisters knew of my bargain,
Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 335
they affirmed that I had given for times as much four it as
it was worth, and they laughed at me so much for my folly
that I began to cry with vexation. At the same time it came
to my mind what good things I might have bought with the
rest of the money ! Repentance then caused me more chagrin
than the whistle had given me pleasure. As this occurrence,
however, had made on me an ineradicable impression, it was
afterwards of great use to me. Often when I was tempted to
buy some unnecessary thing, I said to myself: "Don't give too
much for the whistle!" and so I saved my money.
42. Leitura e yersao.
trdballio pliysico e o mental.
Todo o homem deve ter uma profissao, uma arte ou urn
!officio: n'uma palavra, uma occupa9ao ou modo de vida.
trabalho e um beneficio para a propria saiide, tanto do corpo
como do espirito, e 6 o linico remedio efficaz para as necessi-
dades. homem que trabalha 6 util a si, aos seus e a so-
ciedade; e e do trabalho de todos, seja qual for, que depende
10 progresso e o bem-estar geral.
A unica nobreza actual e a do trabalho: um artista, um
artifice, um operario, um commerciante, um industrial, um
iavrador, e" tao indispensavel ao bem geral, como o sacerdote,
o mestre, o me"dico, o engenheiro, o advogado, o magistrado,
jo escriptor ou o sabio. Perante a virtude de trabalho sao
todos iguaes, e mais se distingue o que mais ou melhor produz.
Aquelles que pelo seu trabalho concorrem para facilitar,
desenvolver e tornar mais productivo o trabalho dos outros,
jisto e y para os ensinar e educar, habilitando-os a serem bons
( e fejizes, esses sao benemeritos no mais elevado grau : e nesse
'grupo esta o sabio. que no seu gabinete, sosinho, pensa e
medita no que convem ao bem geral, e escreve o resultado
.das suas cogita9<5es, no proposito de ensinar coisas ignoradas
que elle descobre, ou de aperfeicoar ou propagar pelo seu
trabalho as ja conhecidas, esse e" o obreiro por excellencia,
; por que e o mestre dos mestres, a luz e o guia dos traba-
ilhadores.
Gloria e esses, e em geral aos trabalhadores do pensa-
mento, que a sua vida consomem no mais alto e difficil labor
^que nenhuma remunera9ao material saberia pagar nem paga;
- e depois d'esses, gloria aos seus apostolos que sao os pro-
jfessores, os mestres, os que ensinam e explicam ao povo os
livros e a obra dos pensadores.
Neste momento, as profissoes, artes e officios mais com-
,muns em Portugal sao os seguintes, -- e a especialidade de
336 Lesson 18.
cada uma d'estas occupa9oes aprende-se em livros, que os ha
a respeito de tudo e que tudo ensinam.
(Trindade Coelho: Pequeno Diccionario de profissoes, artes e
officios, appSndice do 3 Livro de leitura.)
Conversa^ao.
The preceding task 40 may be varied : 1. by having the
story told to the school-fellows by one of them (Franklin era
ainda uma crianga).
2. By allowing the father of Franklin to tell it him:
{ Tu ainda eras . . .) .
Eighteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives
and Participles.
86. The adjective and the participle employed
as an adjective (= verbal adjective) serve:
(a) To determinate the noun (pronominal adjective;
see pronouns) or
(b) To describe it (predicative or attributive ad-
jective) Ex.:
Alguns peixes teem formas singulares.
(c) To qualify the action or the state of a noun:
A empresa saiu feliz. A aurora rompeu meiga e serena.
In the latter case the adjective is employed ad-
verbially or in apposition i.e., it is added to the noun
or the verb to explain and complete it (see P. I, 245).
(Cf.: Como era a aurora? Meiga e serena.
Como rompeu a aurora? Meiga e serenamente).
87. The verbal adjective agrees with its noun
in gender and number like a predicative adjective. Ex.:
As ondas vinham espraiar-se preguicosas no areal da
bahia.
Sentiu a fronts aquecida por febre ardente. Eu mm
cansado.
soldado, temeroso on irresoluto, deu parte do negdcio.
The adjectives of the last example express cause
(por temor ou irresolugao). In such a case you may
hav
Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 337
have the adjective preceded by de in order to put an
emphasis upon a state or quality (cf. 82):
Elle cahiu de cansado he fell down with weariness.
A crianga salta de contente the child jumps with joy.
De alegres que estavam, ndo pensavam em mal algum.
They were so merry that they did not think of any evil.
89. The position of the adjective or participle
apposition may be before or after the verb, according
o its meaning (see the preceding examples):
Entramos em uma batalha, onde vencidos (= se formos
vencidos) honraremos nosso Deus com o sangue.
(a) If accompanying a noun, the adjective precedes it:
Acabada a refeigao, saimos.
The repast over, we went away.
(b) The past participle, acompanied by a comple-
ment, is placed after the noun and before the com-
plement; yet in elevated stile it may even be put after
the complement:
... Com exclusao dos trechos indicados pela mesma
commissao ...
Depois de eliminados os trechos pela commissao technica
indicados ...
Those excerpts which the technical commission had in-
dicated having been eliminated.
(c) The past participle may even take the plural
form before a subject in the singular, if this latter is
one of the pronouns coda um, cada qual, nenkum, ninguem
and refers to persons or things already mentioned:
Sobresaltados com esta vista, procurava cada um a toda
a pressa por-se a salvo.
N.B. Many participles may be employed as mere adjec-
ves; others may have an active meaning in spite of their
ive form ; for instance ido (tempos idos times past), vindo
noticia vinda de fdra), lido (homens lidos well-read or learned
men).
This is especially the case with participles of reflective
verbs: arrependido from arrepender-se ; lembrado, etc. Ficd-
arrependidos we repented or changed our mind. Ella
lembrada she reminds herself.
89. Sometimes the adjective as well as the par-
iciple is employed substantively:
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 22
338 Lesson 18.
Muros de dois metros de alto (= de altura) e meio
metro de largo (= de largura).
Dd esmolas ao pobre, consola o afflicto e (o) abandonado.
Give alms to the poor (man), comfort the afflicted and
abandoned (one).
(N.B. Here poire, afflicto and abandonado are singular,
and not, as in English, plural, though they have a plural
meaning. The Portuguese adjective, when substantively em-
ployed, has the verb in the plural only if it has itself -the
plural form: Os pobres pedem esmola the poor ask for alms.)
90. In certain cases you may employ instead
of an abstract noun, complement to a verb, an adjective
preceded by de, or supply the verb ser or estar:
Accusar alguem de negligente, de desleal (= de negli-
gencia, de deslealdade or de ser negligente etc.) to
accuse somebody of negligence or of being negligent.
Deu mostras de (ser) insofrida, de (estar) nervosa.
She gave proofs of being impatient, of feeling nervous.
91. A small number of adjectives may be used
adverbially in tbe singular and masculine form i.e.,
unaltered (see P. I, 245):
Luctas nao raro estereis; li$des demasiado fdceis; falar
serio.
92. A verbal adjective is, besides the past par-
ticiple employed with ser, estar, ficar etc., the form on
-ante, -ente, -inte (the so-called Participio active], derived
from the gerund (-ando, -endo, -indo). While the gerund
is invariable (see the following Lesson), the Participio
active and the passive are subject to all the rules go-
verning the adjectives:
Ficaram castigados. Ndo estamos lembrados.
Aguas dormentes; plantas dormentes; judeu errante.
Of. the adjectives presidente ( presidindo), amante
(= amando), previdente (= prevenindo) provident, previdenie
foreseeing ( prevendo), proponente ( propondo), abstinente
(= abstendo), subordinate (= subordinando), corrente, nas-
cente, andante, ridente (= rindo), luzente, constituinte, seguinte,
servente.
In the case of many of these words their derivation has
fallen into oblivion, so that they are considered qualifying
adjectives. Some of them are : brilhante, constante, importante,
distante, regente, doente, contente, eminente, excellente, etc.
yntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 339
Others have become substantives, as for instance:
Corrente current, vertente slope, regente regent, fabricante,
disponente, correspondents, descendente descendant, ascendente,
proponente, lente, etc.
43. Thema.
At war less brilliant than his brother, and at peace less
foreseeing than his father, Dom Affonso the Third neverthe-
less united the qualities of the one and the other in an eminent
degree. The most prominent feature of his character seems
to have been cunning obstinacy, which did not exclude an
excessive indulgence towards his favourites, especially for those
who had helped him to arrive to the brilliant position of
king. His reign was a period of real social progress, in which
civilisation extended and the popular class made important ac-
quisitions.
Weary with constant disappointments, Peter the First,
Emperor of Brazil, retired unexpectedly at night-time on board
the English man-of-war, where he abdicated in favour of his son on
the 7 th of April, 1831. Dumbfounded by this sudden resolution,
the higher officers retired to their houses, repentant of their
behaviour. The people dispersed in silence (see 87) during
the night, while the most prominent functionaries, from fear
(see 87) of the consequences of the abdication, decided the
following morning to proclaim the prince constitutional em-
peror, appointing him a regency composed of three members.
In virtue of the Reform Law of 1834, a single regent then
governed Brazil until a decree of 1841 declared the majority
of the emperor.
44. Leitura e versao.
Terremoto de LisUa (1775).
Na manha do primeiro de novembro a cidade estremeceu,
abalada profundamente, e come^ou a desabar. Eram nove horas,
dia de Todos os Santos: nas casas ardiam as velas nos orato-
rios, e as egrejas regorgitavam povo a ouvir missa.
Toda a gente, numa onda, correu as praias; mas, rolando
em massa, estacou perante a onda que vinha do rio, galgando
a inundar as ruas, invadindo as casas. Por sobre este en-
con tro ruidoso, uma nuvem de po que toldava os ares e es-
curecia o sol, pairava, formada ja pelos detritos (=destro9os)
das constructs e das mobilias, que o abalo interno da terra
vasculhava ( varria), e os desabamentos enviavam, em esti-
Ihas, para o ar.
A onda do povo afflicto, retrocedendo, a fugir do mar,
trope9ava nas ruinas; e as quedas, e a metralha dos muros
22*
340 Lesson 18.
que tombavam, abriam na floresta viva, agitada pelo vento
da desgra^a, clareiras de morte, montoes de cadaveres e po^as
de sangue, dos membros decepados, com inanchas brancas dos
cerebros derramados contra as esquinas. E as casas erguiam-
se com as paredes desabadas, os tectos abertos sobre o esque-
leto dos tabiques, mostrando a nii todos os interiores funestos,
neste dia em que, para muitos, Deus julgara e condemnara
LisbOa.
For isso o rouco trovao dos desabamentos se ouvia cor-
tado pelos ais dos moribundos, e pelos gritos dos homens e
das mulheres, abra9ados as cruzes, aos santos, as reliquias,
solu9ando ladainhas, ungindo moribundos, parando esgazeados
a cada novo abalo da terra, que nao cessava de tremer, ar-
rostando-se pelo chao de joelhos, e com as maos postas, a face
em lagrimas, a clamar:
Misericordia! Misericordia!
Casas, palacios, conventos, mosteiros, hospitaes, egrejas,
campanarios, theatres, fortalezas, porticos, tudo, tudo caia,
Se visses somente o palacio real, diz uma testemunha, que
singular espectaculo, meu irmao! Os varoes de ferro, tor-
cidos como vimes, as cantarias estaladas como vidros!
A onda do rio sorvia n'um momento o caes do Terreiro
do Pa90, com os barcos atracados, coalhados de gente. Dos
andares altos precipitavam-se sobre as lages das ruaa. medo
crescia, vinha a loucura: viam-se mortos arrastados pelos vivos,
viam-se mutilados coxeando, gente correndo desgrennada, semi-
mia, homens e mulheres, velhos e creancas dilacerados, san-
grentos, arrestando uma perna fracturada, esvaindo-se em
sangue por algum membro decepado.
Gritos, chores, clamores, impreca9oes, ais, preces, um bor-i
borinho de vozes desvairadas acompanhava os gemidos com-
primidos dos soterrados nos escombros. No turbilhao das ruas
havia quedas e mortes, abra9os e agonias.
A mesma loucura dos homens era o desvairamento dos
brutos: os machos, desbocados, arrastavam os cavalleiros e a
cale9as, precipitando-se nos despenhadeiros da cidade montu-
osa; e as massas de gente, viva, moribunda e morta, de en-
volta com os entulhos, rolavam nas ruas ladeadas pelos esque-
letos das casas como uma imagem desolada do que seria o cahos.
Quando a terra se subvertia, quando o mar vinha subindo
afogar a terra, quando no ar faiscavam as linguas flammiferas
rutilantes, que Iembrac9a podia haver das inve^oes humanas?
Abra9ados, confundidos, na communidade do pranto, fidalgos
e freiras, mendigos e senhores, viloes e cavalleiros, abra9avam-
se na communidade da fome, do frio, da nudez, do terror.
The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjugation. 341
De rastos a cidade inteira, sacudida pelo abalo formidando
(= formidavel), reunia toda a sua eloqnSncia n'uma palavra
linica :
Misericordia! Misericordia! (Oliveira Martins.)
Nineteenth Lesson.
The Gerund and the Periphrastical
Conjugation.
93. The participle in -ndo or gerund is in-
variable. It is employed:
(a) Referring to the subject of a verb:
Caminhando vagarosamente e parando a espacos, tinliam
seguido os dois ao longo do rio.
(b) Referring to the object or some adverb (of
cause, manner, etc.):
Encontrou-os dormindo (= que dormiam; see N.B. ).
OlTia os ceus, olha a terra, a luz do dia expirando
( que expira) nas vagas.
N.B. When it may be doubtful whether the gerund
refers to the subject or to the object, another form must be
chosen; for instance:
Encontrei-os vindo da minha casa may be:
I met them when I came from my house, or:
I met them when they came from my house.
Such a phrase had better be expressed thus:
Encontrei-os ao virem (dies) da minha casa.
Encontrei-os ao vir (eu) da minha casa.
(c) In absolute form i.e., independent of any part
of a phrase and with its own subject. In this case it
expresses a circumstance (cause, time, etc.) of the verb
of the principal sentence. Ex.:
D. Jorge, parecendo-lhe (= a quern parecia or como Ihe
parecia) opportuna a occasiao, determinou tentar a
fortuna. Isto aconteceu, estando tu ( while you
were) na India.
N.B. I. An absolute participle may be employed without
a subject:
342 Lesson 19.
(a) when employed impersonally: chovendo nao sairei
(if it rains . . .) ;
(b) when, the verb being a personal one, the subject is
not expressed:
Isso esclarecer-se-hd indagando a causa.
That will be cleared up by inquiring the cause.
N.B. II. The composed gerund is subject to the same
rules :
Havendo elle falado, todos resolveram partir.
After he had spoken, everybody resolved to go away.
Tendo Augusto Cesar (QIC A. C. tendo; see Remark) capti-
vado em guerra Adiatorix, trouxe-o a Roma.
Remark. When the subject of the gerund is at the same
time that of the verb in the principal sentence, it may pre-
cede or follow the gerund; otherwise it only follows: Tendo
os Portugueses descoberto o caminho maritimo da India, o
oriente abriu-se d cultura do occidente.
94. If the gerund expresses a circumstance of
time, a supposition or condition, while the verb of the
principal sentence designs something as happening in
future or as a habit, the gerund may be preceded by
the preposition em:
Em elle entrando (= as soon as he will enter), falar-
Ihe-ei.
Nao ha amigos nem inimigos politicos em se largando o
mando.
95. The simple gerund expresses a simultaneous-
ness with the action of the principal verb ; the composed
gerund something preceding it. Yet the former is often
employed instead of the latter, if there be no misunder-
standing :
Musa, o emir d'Africa, desembarcando (for tendo de-
sembarcado) nas costas de Hespanha com um novo
exercito, rendia Hispalis.
The Periphrastical Conjugation.
96. Most frequent is the employment of the
gerund in the periphrastical conjugation (conjugagao
periphrdstica) i.e., joined to a form of the verbs estar,
andar, ficar, ir, vir, ter, haver. Thus employed, it adds
to the verb the meaning of certain circumstances:
The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjugation. 343
a) With the verb estar the gerund expresses an
action commenced but not yet finished:
Estava estudando; estd chovendo; estd-me parecendo que
tudo sera em vdo.
N.B. The same meaning is expressed by estar followed
by the preposition a and an infinitive : estava a estudar ; estd
a chover. Estar followed by para and an infinitive expresses,
however, an action immediately impending : Estou para partir.
(b) With the verbs andar, ficar the gerund ex-
presses lasting action or state:
Ando estudando; elle andava meditando; ficou gosando.
N.B. The same meaning is expressed by an infinitive
joined by a to these verbs: ando a estudar; andava a medi-
tar; ficou a gosar.
(c) With the verbs ir and vir the gerund expresses
the gradual realisation of an action:
A vermelhiddo foi avultando; vinha amanhecendo.
Jd estds a ver que as terras que o genro do rei fosse
tomando aos Mouros, iam, e verdade, augmentando o
condado, mas iam ficando tambem terras de Leao,
porque de Leao era o condado, e vasalo do rei
espanhol o D. Henrique.*
Percorrendo o corpo do homem, o sangue vae espa-
lliando por este a sua substdncia.*
Se for estudando diligentemente, poderd urn dia saber
bem a lingua portuguesa.
N.B. Employed with an infinitive without any prepo-
sition, these verbs mark an immediate future: vou levar esta
carta ao correio; vae abrir a portal
(d) The auxiliary verbs ter and haver, with following
de and infinitive, express necessity:
Tenho (or hei-)de escrever uma carta.
N.B. Cf. haver in the future and conditional tenses.
The singular and the 3 rd person pi. of haver may be joined
to de by a hyphen:
Hei-de, has-de, ha-de ir, havemos de, haveis de, hdo-de ir.
(e) A conjunction of vir and an infinitive preceded by
a has nearly the same meaning as these verbs employed
absolutely:
344 Lesson 19.
Isto vem a significar is hardly to be distinguished from
isto signified (= isto por fim signified).
Isso vem a ser o mesmo that is rather the same.
N.B. Fir a ser often means tornar-se to become.
45. Thema.
Brazil.
(See the map on the inner front-side of this book.)
Brazil has for limits in the north the French, Dutch and
English Guianas, Venezuela and the republic of Columbia ; in
the east Equador, Peru, Bolivia and Paraguay; in the south
Argentinia and Uruguay ; in the south-east, east and north-east
the Atlantic ocean. It is well known that the discovery of
this country was due to chance, and that Pedro Alvaras
Cabral, after having circumnavigated the Cape of Good Hope,
when sailing (fazer viagem) to the Indies, was thrown there
by a tempest in 1500. From that moment this vast region
belonged to the Portuguese crown, though it was little
known before the year, 1534 when D. Joao III. divided it
into several provinces (capitanias), of which he made grants
to various private persons who undertook to populate and
cultivate them. Yet the shipwreck of some, the frequent
incursions of the Indians, and various other accidents which
the recipients of these grants experienced, and at last their
death, were so many obstacles to the prosperity of these
various States. Martim Affonso de Sousa was the only one
who remained to witness the prosperity of his province, to
which he gave the name of Sao Vicente, because he had
anchored there on the 22 nd of January, the day on which the
Church celebrates the memory of S. Vicent the martyr. The
remainder of the coast of Brazil was after that time infested
by innumerable adventurers of different nations who came to
purchase and traffic with the Indians.
46. Leitura e versao.
Brasil.
Desejando el-rei D. Joao III dar uma certa consistencia
aquellas capitanias, creou o titulo de governador, e o conferia
a Thome" de Sousa, a quern os donatarios foram sujeitos, e
quern em 1549 fundou a cidade de S. Salvador da BaMa. Morto
el-rei D. Sebastiao em Africa, Filippe II, tendo-se apoderado
de Portugal por fallecimento do Cardeal-rei, se tornou tambem
de facto senhor do Brasil. Em 1624 os hollandfises invadiram
a maior parte d'este pais r porem Filippe IV, tendo recobrado
a cidade da Bahia, despachou a D. Jorge de Mascarenhas,
The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjugation. 345
marques de Montalvao, com o titulo de vice-rei; o qual foi
deposto pouco tempo depois, quando os Portugueses, sacudindo
o jugo dos espanhoes, pozeram no throno de sens avos o
duque de Bragan9a com o nome de Joao IV (1640). Nesta
epoca varias concessoes haviam entrado naturalmente nos do-
minies da coroa, outras foram mais tarde compradas aos her-
deiros dos primeiros donatarios, e a colonia, inteiramente res-
taurada em 1654, foi administrada por governadores generaes
de provincia, e um vice-rei na Bahia, ao qual eram sujeitos
os primeiros, conservando todavia a faculdade de comnmni-
carem directamente com o soberano. Era entao bem pouco
iconhecido o sul do Brasil, e o interior ainda menos. Assim
todo o maritimo tornou a ser dividido em cinco governos:
Para e Maranhao na costa septentrional, e Pernambuco, Bahia
e Rio de Janeiro na oriental; e o chefe da dynastia de Bra-
gan9a houve por bem conferir a colonia o titulo honroso de
principado, ordenando que d'ali em diante o herdeiro presump-
tive da coroa tomaria o titulo de principe de Brasil.
Com a chegada em 1808 do principe regente, D. Joao,
foram todos os portos do Brasil franqueados as na^oes estran-
jgeiras, e uma carta regia de 2 de dezembro de 1815 elevou
o principado do Brasil a dignidade e cathegoria de reino. Falle-
cendo em 1816 a rainha D. Maria I, o creador da primeira
monarchia hereditaria da America, vendo-se a ponto de perder
aa Europa o throno de seus avos, se transferiu a Lisboa em
,1821, deixando no Brasil D. Pedro, sen filho primoge"nito, em
^ualidade de principe regente. Porem os acontecimentos obri-
^aram este principe a separar-se de Portugal e a erigir o
Brasil em impe"rio independente, sendo acclamado imperador
aa cidade do Rio de Janeiro em 12 de outubro de 1822; e
depois de haver dado uma eonstituie.ao ao impe"rio, foi reco-
ihecido nesta nova qualidade por el-rei seu pae, por um tra-
,ado celebrado em 1825. Desde entao o Brasil viu seus portos
;oalhados de navios mercantes de todos as naQoes ; sua cultura
> indiistria come^aram a desenvolver-se. cafe, a9ucar e
ilgodao, tendo uma extrac9ao rapida, e o pre90 d'estes ge"neros
ndo gradualmente subindo, os proprietaries e agricultores tra-
^aram de augmentar a produc9ao, ao passo que o luxo se foi
ntroduzindo nas cidades, nas villas, e ate" nas propriedades
uraes no meio dos campos.
Conrersa^ao.
Quaes sao os limites do Brasil, ao norte? a oeste? ao
sul? a leste?
Como se deu o doscobrimento do Brasil? E em que
anno?
346 Lesson 20.
A quern ficou pertencendo?
Quaes foram as medidas tomadas por D. Joao III rela-
tive, ao pai's?
Que obstaculos se Ihes oppozeram?
Qual foi a primeira capitania prospera?
Que aconteceu ao restante da costa?
Qaal foi a primeira cidade fundada por um portugues?
e como se chamou?
Nas maos de quern foi ter o Brasil, depois da morte de
D. Sebastiao e do rei-cardeal?
Em que data e contemporaneo a 'que acontecimento em
Portugal, foi deposto o primeiro vice-rei, instituido
por Filippe IV V
Que dynastia conferiu o titulo de principado ao Brasil?
E quern o elevou a dignidade de reino?
Quern emfim foi o primeiro imperador do Brasil?
Quern foi o ultimo e quando ficou deposto?
Que espe"cie de govSrno tern o Brasil actualmente?
Twentieth Lesson.
Tenses of the Indicative.
(See P. I, L. 18 and 19.)
Present Tense.
97. The Present of the Indicative is used:
(a) To denote, as in English, that a thing is now
taking place, or habitually takes place. In the first
case the periphrastical form may be employed, as in
English. Ex.:
Saio; estou lendo. Saio sempre depois do jantar.
(b) In narrative instead of the Preterite, in order
to give more vivacity to the description, and to make
the event, as it were, present. This is called the
historical or narrative Present. Ex.:
A Bastilha e dbandonada d demoligao; d'ahi a pouco
um montdo de ruinas indica o logar onde estava . . .
lodos correm para por a cidade na defensiva ar-
ranca-se o calgado das ruas, fazcm-se barricadas
(c) For an action or state marked as having con-
tinued for some time up to the present :
Tenses of the Indicative. 347
Desde quando estd aqui ? How long have you been here ?
Estou aqui ha ires dias.
I have been here these three days.
Jd ha muito que estuda o portugues?
Have you already been long studying Portuguese?
Ha muito que o nao vejo (que me nao escreve).
I have not seen him (he did not write me) for a long time.
(d) For the Future, when speaking of actions which
are to be completed in a short time, as:
Volto jd I shall come back directly.
Amanhd vou d praia to-morrow I shall go to the sea-
side.
98. The Future Tense:
(a) Denotes that something will happen, as:
Estudaremos esta ligao. Digo-o, sustento-o e sustentd-
lo-hei.
(b) It is used as a softened form of the Imperative,
implying the expectation of fulfilment. Ex.:
Se cd vier alguem, dir-lhe-hds que nao estou.
If anybody comes (you will) tell him, that I am not
at home.
Honrards pae e mde honour thy father and thy mother
Nao matards thou shall not kill.
(c) It is used to express uncertainty, an approximate
statement, a possibility, or a modest form of declaration.
Ex.:
Haver d paz no tumulo?
Will there be peace in the tomb?
Tive aviso, haverd qunize dias, que adoeceu.
I was advised about a fortnight ago that he has be-
come ill.
Sera tempo de ir a casa it is time to go home.
Assim sera. It may be so.
Uma coisa vos confessarei. I beg to confess to you
something.
99. The immediate future is expressed by the
Present of ir (eu vou) or vir (venlio) and the simple
Infinitive (see 96, (c) N.B.):
Vou contar-lhes um conto. I shall tell you a tale.
Vein convidd los para um passeio he invites them for
a walk.
348 Lesson 20.
Eemark. After the conditional se = if, whether, quando
when, and emquanto while, as well as after como, assim que,
logo que the Future of the Subjunctive is to be employed
(see L. 23).
100. The Preterito Imperfeito (see P.I, 115) is
used:
(a) To express what was customary or habitual, or
to describe an action as simply going on in the past,
or a state as existing in the past whether in principal
or subordinate sentences. Ex.:
Era tdo poderosa no primeiro quartel do seculo XVI a
esquadra portuguesa, que D. Manuel trazia de ordi-
ndrio trezentos ndus nas conquistas da Asia, da Af-
rica e da America.
(b) In familiar speech it is employed instead of the
First Conditional:
Se a apanhasse, esbofeteava-a if I could seize her, I should
box her ears.
101. The Preterito perfeito is used:
For an action occurred in the Past; it serves as
the ordinary narrative tense for past time:
Estive no theatro (h)ontem; fui ver o Othello.
Em virtude da lei das reformas de 1834, um regente
unico governou o Brasil, ate que um decreto de 1841
declarou a maioredade do imperador.
N.B. Of dever the Imperfect is always used instead of
the Perfect:
Elle divia (not: deveu) ser (or ter sido) (h)ontem mats
attencioso para comtigo.
He ought to (or should) have been more attentive to
you yesterday.
102. Two simultaneous actions of the Past are
put into the Imperfect, while two actions following one
another are put into the Perfect:
Eu escrevia o que o professor dizia.
I wrote what the teacher said.
Uma telha caJiiu-Uie na cdbega e elle morreu em seguida.
A tile fell on his head and he died at once.
Tenses of the Indicative. 349
103. When a lasting action is interrupted by a
new one, the former is expressed by the Imperfect,
while the latter by the Perfect:
Eu lia quando recebi a tua carta.
I was reading when I got your letter.
104. With regard to the translation from Eng-
lish into Portuguese, it may be summarised that the Per-
fect is to be employed whenever you may add one of
the adverbs then, noiv, thereupon, thereafter: and the
Imperfect when still, already, just may be added, or
when the verb may be rendered by tvould, used to and
the infinitive. Ex.:
Aggredimos o inimigo que recuou we attacked the ene-
my, who (then) retreated.
Perseguimos o inimigo que recuava we pursued the
enemy, who (already) was retreating.
105. The difference between the Preteritos im~
perfeito and perfeito is with certain verbs quite keen in
its meaning. Ex.:
Eu tinha I had (possessed) Eu tive I had (I got)
havia there was houve there arose, began, hap-
pened
eu sabia I knew- (already) eu soube I learned, heard
eu conhecia I knew eu conked I made the acquain-
tance of
die vestiu he put on
die vestia he was dressed . dregsed
elle trazia he carried, he was elle trouxe he brought
.dressed
ella dizia she would say ella disse she said
levantdvamo-nos we used to levantdmo-nos we got up, rose,
get up etc.
106. Most frequently the Preterito perfeito is
employed where in English the Perfect is used. Ex.:
Chegou he has arrived. Vi-o I have seen him. Tive
uma carta I have got a letter. Deram-me noticias delle they
have given me news from him. Esteve no concerto de (h)ontem?
Were you at the concert last night?
107. The Preterito indefinido, however, expresses
repetition or continuation of a fact from a certain point
of time until the moment of speaking. (In English
the Present may sometimes be employed instead). Ex. :
350 Lesson 20.
Todas as constituigoes teem facultado a certas autoridades
o direito de perdoar.
All constitutions have given (or gave or give) to cer-
tain authorities the privilege of absolution.
Sometimes this tense serves only to emphatically
declare an action as altogether finished for the speaker:
Teriho dado fim as minhas investigates.
I put an end to my investigations.
108. The Pluperfects (Preterites mais-que-perfeitos
composto and simples) express an action preceding
another. Ex. :
Eu jd tinha jantado quando meu irmao cliegou.
I had already dined when my brother arrived.
Faldramos em negocio . . . We had spoken of business.
109. The Mais-que-perfeito simples may be
employed instead of the Condicional as well as instead
of the Imperfeito Suty. (the latter especially in the first
part of the conditional sentence) and instead of the
Presents conditional in the second part. Ex.:
Quizera (= queria) ser-lhe agradavel.
I should like to be of some use to you.
Se o contentamento fizera ( fizesse) milagres, tivera-me
(= ter-me-hia) nesta hora a seus pes.
If joy did wonders, you would have me ... at your feet.
But it is also absolutely employed, especially in
popular interjections:
Quern (me) dera!
Would it were so! That would be a good thing!
Pudera! I say! Wouldn't it! To be sure!
Prouvera Deus! God grant!
110. The Imperativo expresses request, order,
permission, or prohibition. It is formed out of the Pre-
sente Subj., but for the 2 nd persons which are formed
out of the Presente Indicativo, if they are not in nega-
tive sentences. Ex.:
Ndo lebas coisa que ndo vejas, nem assignes coisa que
ndo Mas.
Don't drink what you do not see, nor sign what you
did not read.
Tenses of the Indicative. 351
111. The Conditional expresses:
(a) That something soon happened or would have
happened on certain conditions. Ex.:
Se nao fossemos orgulhosos, nao nos queixariamos do
orgulho dos mais.
If we were not proud, we should not complain of
the pride of others.
Elle teria sido feliz, se tivesse sabido moderar os seus
desejos.
He would have been happy if he had known how to
moderate his desires.
N.B. I. The Presente Conditional (or even the Imper-
feito Ind.) is sometimes employed instead of the Preterito
conditional, the verb of the dependent clause being put into
the Preterito comp. indie, instead of the Mais-que-perfeito.
Caso e que se elle nao tern ( tivesse) sido demittido
tdo depressa, o roubo dava-se (instead of dar-se-ia or
properly ter-se-ia dado) com certeza- there is no doubt
that, if he had not been dismissed so suddenly, the
robbery would certainly have taken place.
6te a teem (instead of tivessem} visto ali haveriam apor-
tado certamente e encontrariam (instead of teriam
encontrado) confirmados as informagoes de Pedro da
Covilha, que d'aquella povoagao dera preciosas infor-
magoes na sua carta a D. Jodo IT, pois ali fora
poucos annos antes . . . Em Sofala certamente en-
contrariam (for teriam encontrado) navios da costa
do Malabar.*
(Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)
N.B. The Preterito conditional, composed jvith tivera
or houvera, may be employed in conditional clauses instead
of the Mais-que-perfeito Subj.:
Teria ido, se tivera (for tivesse) sabido que . . . (cf. 109).
(c) In certain cases the Conditional (or the M.-q.-
perfeito simples instead) is used to express astonishment,
avaliation, or a softened form of declaration:
Seria verdade? Can that be true? Haveria no theatro,
quando muito, trezentas pessoas, there may have
been at the most in the theatre about 300 persons.
Vim-me embora seriam dez horas I went home at
about ten o'clock. Nao diria isso I should not say
so. Antes diria. I should rather say, as in English.
352 Lesson 20.
(c) Frequently the Presente conditional (without a
dependent clause) is used to express an expectation, an
arrangement, the fulfilment of which depends of the
future. Ex. :
Esse manual ser-lhe-hia guia seguro pelos caminhos tor-
tuosos da politica.
This handbook was meant to be a reliable guide to him
on the tortuous ways of politics.
Eu far-lhe-hia ver as bellezas do men pais.
I intended to show him all the beauty of my home.
47. Thema.
Extract from Portuguese History.
The history of Portugal properly begins with the reign of
the Count Henry of Burgundy. All that is anterior to this
belongs more to the history of Lusitania and in a more gene-
ral meaning to that of the peninsula. When in Leon Al-
phonse the Sixth was reigning, the Count Henry, a descendant
of Hugo Capet (= Capeto) offered (= came to offer) his ser-
vices to that monarch, and received from him in reward the
hand of his daughter D. Thereza and the country of Portugal.
Is is certain that they were already married in 1095 and
that the Count Henry already in 1097 governed Portugal
from the Minho to the Tagus. The successor of this first Portu-
guese regent was his son Dom Affonso Henriques 1 who, after
having conquered many tracts of land from (see 48 c) the
Moors, was victorious at last on the 25 th of July, 1139, at the
famous battle of Campo de Ourique against five Moorish
kings, while the day before he had been (gerund) proclaimed
king by his soldiers, [a] title that was confirmed to him
by the nation in the Parliament (as Cortes} of Lamego in
1143. Already the monarch had caused the independence of the
kingdom to be recognised by the King of Leon. The suc-
cessors of Affonso Henriques continued their conquests:
D. Sancho the First conquered Algarve, D. Affonso II. Alcacer
do Sal, and D. Sancho II many tracts and places of the
Alentejo.
The kingly power then began [to be] in fight with the
ecclesiastical state, [which was] most powerful at those times
and from that fight resulted the deposition of D. Sancho II
by [a] bull of the Pope Innocence IV, and the government
of D. Affonso III, his brother. D. Diniz strove especially to
make Agriculture and Science flourish, to which purpose he
created the first university in Lisbon. His successors conti-
Tenses of the Indicative. 353
med the work of civilisation until the unfortunate reign of
D. Fernando J, last monarch of the first dynasty.
The nation united in Parliament proclaimed in 1583 King
of Portugal, John, Grandmaster of the Order of Aviz (Mester
de Aviz), who settled the independence of Portugal which was
attacked by Castile, and by his valour and good administration
he obtained the love of his people. The descendants of this
monarch reigned until 1580, when the Cardinal King Dom
Henrique died. This is doubtlessly one of the most beautiful
periods of Portuguese history.
48. Leitura e versao.
Os descobrimentos dos Portugueses, as suas victorias na
Asia e Africa, tornaram o seu nome temido e respeitado em
toda a parte. DSsde a gloriosa toaaada de Ceuta em 1415 ate
a desgracada batalha de Alcacer Quivir em 1578, este povo,
dotado de uma actividade sem exemplo, descobre os archi-
pelagos da Madeira, (das) AQores, (das ilhas) Canarias e (do)
Cabo Verde, (a) costa e ilhas de Guin6 ; explora e faz muitos
estabelecimentos no litoral da Africa occidental: dobra o
Cabo das Tormentas; submete ou faz tributaries os principes
mouros da costa oriental africana; arrebata aos arabes a
navega9ao da India e (do) Mar Vermelho; e assombrando
os povcs do Oriente com prodigios de valor, estabelece-se em
Ormuz, Diu, Damao, Goa, Bombaim, Cochim, Ceylao, Malaca,
abrindo-se caminho pela Oceania para Java, Borneo, Timor,
Molucas, China e Japao, ao passo que descobre a Nova
Hollanda, Nova Guine e outras terras. Pedro Alvares
Cabral descobre o Brasil (1500) e em m6nos de um seculo,
os vastos e ferteis terrenos entre o Amazonas e Prata, se
acham submettidos ao dominio portugues. Mais de cincoenta
reis ou regulos foram tributaries do rei D. Manuel, e os mais
poderosos monarchas da Europa e do Oriente solicitaram a
sua ailiansa.
Nao foi menor o cuidado pelas letras neste glori6so
periodo. D. Affonso V forma a bibliotheca de Evora; D.
Manuel I manda reformar e aperfei9oar a legislacao. Foi
neste periodo e no reinado de Joao III que se introduziu em
Portugal a inquisi^ao (1540) e a Companhia de Jesus (1541).
A morte do cardeal-rei D. Henrique (1580) seguiu-se a
occupacao castelhana, que durou at 1640 ; e Portugal, que
no reinado de D. Manuel chegara ao maior grau de esplendOr,
caiu nesse periodo na maior prostrayao.
No anno de 1640 recuperou esta na^ao a sua independe"ncia
pela gloriosa revolu9ao que elevou ao throno D. Joao IV, tronco
dadynastia deBragan^ahapouco ainda reinante. Portugal alliou-
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 23
354 Lesson 21.
se depois com a Inglaterra e Hollanda contra Espanha na
ce"lebre Guerra de Successao. Esta guerra terminou pelo Tra-
tado de Utrecht em 1713. Naquelle tempo e reinando
D. Joao V, constnriram-se obras grandiosas, como foram o
mosteiro, templo e palacio de Mafra e o aqueducto das Aguas
Livres. Mas o tesouro ficou exhausto e a nac.ao em deca-
dencia, de que so a poderia tirar um ge"nio e perseveranQa
como o do marques dePombal, ministro de D.Jose" I (1755 1777)
em cujo reinado se reorganisaram as finai^as, o exercito e a
marinfia, foram expulsos os jesuitas, e a inquisic.ao levou o sen
primeiro golpe, at<$ ser de todo extincta em 1820.
Em 1807 os francses invadiram Portugal, mas foram
repellidos pelo exercito anglo-portugu3, que Ihes deu severas
119608 em Vimieiro, Bussaco, Badajoz etc. Em 1820 uma
revoh^ao estabeleceu o systema constitucional. A rainha
D. Maria I, tendo ido em 1807 ao Brasil com o principe regente
D. Joao e a corte, la fallecera em 1816. D. Joao VI entao
voltou a Portugal em 1821, sendo-lhe negado o desembarque,
ate elle ter confirmado o systfima constitutional, que foi des-
truido em 1828. Em 1833 porem foi restabelecido por
D. Pedro IV (como B. Pedro I imperador do Brasil), filho de
D. Joao VI, o qual pelo seu valor e constancia soube reivindi-
car o thrOno para sua filha, a senhora D. Maria II, fallecida
a 15 de Novembro de 1853. Foi ella a bis-avo de Dom
Manuel II, ultimo rei de Portugal, desthronado em 1910.
Twenty-first Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood.
112. The Subjunctive denotes an action or a
state as existing in the mind of the person speaking,
and not as a fact:
I do not think he is so old. Nao creio que seja tao velho.
We feared he would go. Eecedmos que se fosse embora.
It is the mood of uncertainty, and is employed after
verbs expressing desire, tendency, order, hope, merit,
fear, doubt:
Desejo (espero, quero, duvido) que Carlos estude.
113. The Subjunctive is used:
A. In principal clauses (oragoes principaes or sub-
ordinantes):
The Subjunctive Mood. 355
(a) In the Imperative mood for the first and third
persons when affirmatively, and for all three persons
when negatively employed:
Estude (elle, V*), estudemos, estudemf
Ndo pe$as a quern pediu, nem sirvas a quern serviu.
Que esteja ou nao bom tempo.
N.B. In the third person que may precede the verb;
que estude(m)!
(b) In clauses where talvez precedes the verb:
Talvez elle diga perhaps he may say. Yet here the
Indicative may be employed.
(c) In clauses expressing wishes or interjections:
Praza a Deus que assim seja! Viva! Morra! Deus
o salve! Possa eu um dia pagar-llie as suas finesas!
Assim as suas prendas fossem devidamente desen-
volvidas!
(d) In clauses of admission being equivalent to a
conditional clause:
Falle elle (= se elle falar), tudo se calard.
B. In subordinate clauses (oragoes sulordinadas)
beginning with qiie 1 and not representing indirect speech.
The conjunction que requires the Subjunctive:
(a) After all verbs, substantives, adjectives and
other particles which express cause or impediment of
an action or occurrence, an admission, approval or dis-
approval, hope, convenience, etc., such, as: Desejar,
querer, pedir, aconselhar, consentir, admittir, impedir,
ordenar, approvar, propor, suppor, merecer, prohibir,
decretar, resolver, esperar, convir. desapprovar, acliar mal
(bom, melhor, peor).
Examples.
Fie com que elle visse o seu erro I caused him to re-
cognise his error.
1 "Que" may be omitted in the complementary accusative
clause whenever the verb is also accompanied by a dative com-
plement which is the subject of the accusative clause; e.g.,
Candido de Figueiredo propunha d Academia das Sciencias, en-
car r eg asse uma comissao da reforma (ou revisao) da ortografia,
antes que se comegasse o famigerado Dicciondrio (in spe), de que
era director Latino Coelhov (Carol* Michaelis de Vasconcellos).
28*
356 Lesson 21.
Impediram (or obstaram) que entrassemos.
They opposed our entrance.
Aprovo (desaprovo) que faga isso.
I approve his doing so.
Suponhdmos que esse facto se de.
Suppose that will happen.
Ndo Hie aconselho que parta. I don't advise you to part.
Nao se pode admitir (or e inadmissivel) que se digam
taes eoisas. Such things cannot be allowed to be said.
Elle mereeia que se Ike concedessem todos as honras.
He would be worthy of all honours bestowed upon him.
(b) After the expressions (verbs, substantives, ad-
jectives) of fear:
Receei que o meu amigo estivesse doente.
Tinha medo (estava com medo) que perdesse o comboio.
De medo que lest, for fear.
Ndo temas que fiques castigado!
Estou a tremer (e de receiar) que haja mallogro.
I tremble for fear there may be a failure.
(c) After expressions of astonishment, surprise,
joy, grief e.g.:
Admiro (-me) que elle venha (or tenha or tivesse vindo).
I wonder that he will or has come.
Fiquei surpreendida que tivesse chegado.
I was surprised he had come.
Folgo (or estimo) que tenha recuperado a saude.
I am glad he is well again.
Sinto que nao Hie possa valer.
I am sorry I can be of no use to you.
(d) After verbs or impersonal idioms expressing
that it is agreeable or deplorable, rare or frequent,
possible, probable, astonishing, important, just, necessary,
useful, etc. e.g.:
j de sentir it is deplorable, a pity
e de crer f \ it be assumed
e admissivel |
e de desejar it is desirable
e raro (vulgar) it is rare (common)
e possivel (provdvel) it is possible (probable)
e admirdvel (or de admirar) it is astonishing
parece incrivel it seems incredible
importa it is a matter of consequence
The Subjunctive Mood. 357
e justo it is just
e necessdrio (util, perigoso) it is necessary (useful,
dangerous)
a ndo ser que unless, except.
Ex.: Importa que se comprehenda e exercite hern o em-
prego do conjunctiva, para que haja nella a maxima
facilidade.
To this group belong also the nouns predicatively
employed :
e honra it is an honour
e vergoriha it is a shame
e tempo \ it ig time
sao horas /
e justiga it is justice
e asneira it is foolishness
caso e que the question is.
(e) After duvidar and other terms expressing doubt,
when employed affirmatively, the English "whether" is
translated by que:
Duvido que elle saiba I doubt that (or whether) he knows.
j muito duvidoso que seja despachado o requerimento
It is rather doubtful whether the request will be
agreed to.
However : Ndo ha duvida (ninguem duvida) que Cintra
e urn logar dos mais bonitos da Europa. There is
no doubt that Cintra is one of the finest places in
Europe.
N.B. I. Sometimes, however, the subjunctive is employed
even with duvidar in a negative clause: Ndo duviddmos que
o sr. Jose diga a verdade.
N.B. II. After ignorar the subjunctive may be employed:
Ignorava que vivesses (or que vivias) na aldeia I did not
know that you lived in the country.
N.B. III. After the verbs expressing knowledge or
meaning of something happening or existing (verbos sensitivos),
as ver, saber, j^llgar, and those declaring something as happen-
ing or existing (verbos declarativos), as dizer, declarar, an-
nunciar, the verb after "que" may be in the subjunctive mood,
in case the verb of the principal clause is employed negatively
or in a negative interrogation.
Ndo digo que elle ndo saiba.
I don't mean to say that he does not know.
358 Lesson 21.
Entao nao achas que fosse melhor ter metis cuidado?
Don't you think it would be better to be more
careful ?
N.B. IV. In an interrogative accessory clause the verb
may be in the subjunctive.
Nao sabia quaes fossem as suas ideias e medidas.
I did not know which were his ideas and measures.
N.B. V. In the same case after se whether, with dever,
haver de added in thought, the verb may be employed in the
subjunctive :
Nao sei se dlga (= nao sei se devo or deva dizer or:
nao sei se hei-de or haja de dizer) I don't know
whether I am to say.
49. Thema.
It is not advisable that during a thunderstorm many people
should crowd together in a church unless there is a lightning-
conductor. It is indispensable that a nation should fulfil its
destiny and always strive after high ideals. I should have
rendered him this service, if I had had the means to do so.
These flowers would not have faded if they had been watered.
I shall do what he wants me to, provided he behaves well.
Do not go upon the lake while the ice is not solid, lest you
break through. He will give it you on condition that you shall
give it back to him to-morrow. It is impossible that he should
have written that. It is convenient for you to go to find him.
It is a pity that you have not seen him. It is a shame that
you should deny thus what you have done. It would be a
crime if you should let him do that. What would they say
if I should send them this parcel? We should comfort her
if she needed it. However sad the news is, I shall impart
it to her. You ought patiently to endure these trials, until
a time will come when you will no longer be oppressed. It
is just that you should be rewarded. Do not believe him,
whatever he may say. God grant (= querer) he may suc-
ceed. Tell him, so that he may know it. Even if he should
come to-morrow, he would no longer be in time.
50. Leitura e yersao.
Passeio d Eiviera portuguesa.
Visto que ja conhecemos o mappa de Portugal nos seus
tragos geraes, vamos agora fazer uma visita aos arrabaldes
da capital. Como esta calor, recommenda-se que tomeTnos o
combdio de Cascaes, para que nos leve a Eiviera. Pois sigam-
The Subjunctive Mood.
359
me, se forem do meu parecer. Vejam, alem esta o comboio
prestes a partir. Nao se demorem ! Corram e subam, para
que nao o percamos. Eis-nos installados! Ainda bem que o
alcancamos, pois duvido que haja outro antes do meio-dia. Sen-
tem-se e descansem da corrida ! Ora querem ver que o Carlos
esta sem folego! Nao se precipitasse tanto! Agora reparem:
Do lado esquerdo do comboio ve-se o Tejo e as margens da
Outra Banda. D'ali se gosa um panorama encantador de Lisb6a
e do rio, por tal forma magnifico que sera muito para lasti-
mar que nao seja visto pelo estrangeiro que visite Lisboa.
Ora por pouco que tivessemos passado, sem a ve"r, a Torre
de Belem, uma das maiores maravilhas de architectura, que
ha no mundo. E que uma fabrica de gaz impede que se
veja, a nao ser do lado do rio. Que pSna que se tenha dado
licenca de collocarem essa fabrica de maneira que seja tao
difficil obter um relance d'olhos d'um monumento erigido para
que sempre relembre os feitos dos Portugueses no seu periodo
de maior heroismo e gloria.
comboio agora vae passando pelas povoasoes de Ddfundo,
Pedroucos, Paco d'Arcos, Alges, praias consideradas de mar,
visto que o rio aqui leva agua salgada, e frequentadas pela
melhor gente de Lisboa, comquanto nao estejam longe da
capital. E que ha tantas e tao boas praias por todo a costa
portuguSsa que facilmente se Ihe encontra onde nos sintamos
bem e fiquemos curados dos nossos males.
Agora permittam que Ihes chame a attenc.ao para o sitio
que estamos atravessando e que se chama Caxias. Nao e senao
justo que aqui se mencione um instituto pedagdgico que faz
honra ao pais: 6 a Casa de Correccao, estabelecida n'aquelle
vasto edificio que, se bem que tenha sido um mosteiro e por
conseguinte nao destinado desde logo ao seu fim actual, e um
modelo no genero. E raro o alumno que ali nao se sinta (or
sentisse) bem e em que os esfo^os dos professores, tendando
a que todos cheguem a ser bons e uteis, nao consigam (or
conseguissem) o seu fim.
E nao esquecamos que aqui ha ainda outra coisa a ad-
mirar: uma casa de campo, deshabitada, que foi do rei, ou seja o
quintal que Ihe pertence, uma especie de parque com avenidas e
alegretes contornados de buxo artificialmente copado, e em
parte do tamanho de um homem. Foi, como ja disse, d'el-rei,
que porem nunca habitou aqui que eu saiba. Outra quinta
real, e essa lindissima, no que diz respeito ao palacio em estilo
de renaseenca, esta situada nao longe d'aqui na estrada de
Cintra, em Quelus. Tambem tern parque rococo com altas
sebes de buxo. Mas o maior attractive que eu Ihe conheco,
e" o profundo silencio em que esta mergulhado.
360 Lesson 22.
Ja estamos a beira-mar. Notem aquelle grande edificio
sobre os rochedos lambidos pela quebranca! Nao e como quern
quizesse atirar-se ao mar? E o Sanatorio de Carcavellos cons-
truido em 1902 para que de" acolhimento a meninos de 4 para
12 annos. Nao longe d'ahi esta outro sanatorio, o de Sanf Anna
de Parede que, tendo cem camas, recebe tanto adultos como
crian9as que sejam tuberculosas. E ha quern affirme que cada
cama custou 16.000 marcos, a ser verdade que o sanatorio,
edificado em 1904, tenha custado 1.600000 marcos approxima-
damente.
Do nosso lado direito devia-se v6r outro edificio, mais
antigo e nao mfinos interessante, se as verduras e alguns
grupos de casas nao no-lo occultasse. E o palacio do marques
de Pombal que foi o grande ministro de D. Jose I. Estamos
em Oeiras.
E ja vamos passando Sao Joao d'Estoril, Estoril e Monf
Estoril, onde nos encontramos na parte da Bahia de Cascaes,
mais restrictamente chamada Riviera portuguesa. Proponho
que desc,amos para lanchar no Real Hotel MonV Estoril d'onde
se gosa uma vista formosa a nao poder ser mais linda. De-
pois daremos um passeio ate Cascaes, para v6r a cidadella, resi-
dencia d'el-rei quando ca esta, e uma formacao das mais
curiosas de rochedos, em forma de cratera, aberta no fundo,
e chamada B6ca do Inferno*.
Twenty-second Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood (continued).
C. In Adverbial Clauses (oragdes circumstanclaes).
114. The subjunctive is employed after the
following coDJunctions (cf. P. I, L. 34) :
(a) The concessive (concessivas) : ainda que, posto
que etc., as soon as the clause expresses only supposition
and not a reality:
Nao me queixaria d'elle, ainda que me maltratasse.
But:
Ainda que o amava, por ser valoroso, nao era cega pelos
seus defeitos.
N.B. Sometimes the concessive clauses may have the
subjunctive, even when expressing a reality:
Se bem que (or comquanto que) os Alpes sejam mais
altos que os Pyreneos, elles sao mais fdceis de at-
travessar.
The Subjunctive Mood. 361
f>) The final (finaes):
Ibedecei as leis, para que vos obedegam.
;) The consecutive (consecutivas) : que:
Is generos de mais necessidade devem ser tao baratos
que estejam ao alcance de todos os bolsos.
JB. /Sew que and que ndo always require the subjunc-
tive. Ex.:
Caso venha e que nao (or sem que} ckegue a liora . . .
(d) Nao porque, nao que:
Procedeu assim, nao porque gostasse, mas por entender
ser este o seu dever.
(e) Contanto que, a ndo ser que, supposto que, dado
que, dado caso que, caso que, caso always require the sub-
junctive. Ex. :
Pdde ir contanto que nao se demore.
(f) Se if, whether, expressing condition; como se
as if; quer . . . quer; como quer que (cf. se followed by
the future in the following Lesson, 115 (a)):
Se nao fosse a grande distancia, iri a vel-o.
Falou como se tivesse perdido o juizo.
N.B. I. Instead of como se in the preceding example
might be employed como quern (see E).
N.B. II. 8e, introducing an indirect interrogation, is
followed by the indicative: preguntou-me se era grande a
distdncia.
Sa(li)irei quer chova quer nao chova . . . whether it be
raining or not.
Como quer que seja however it may be.
Como quer que o nao visse as he did not see him anyhow.
(g) Ate que, depois que and antes que, when ex-
pressing a future, an intention:
Esteja em casa ate que seu irmao volte.
Depois que tenha chegado, saiam ambos antes que se
feche a porta.
(h) Como, when, employed with the imperfect or
pluperfect, it expresses a series of events; sometimes
also when expressing the reason:
Napoleao, como tivesse sido vencido e aprisionado pelos
alliados, foi levado para a ilha de Elba.
Como ndo quizesse acompanhar-me, sai so.
362 Lesson 22.
D. In Relative Clauses.
(a) When expressing a supposition and not a reality:
Pompeo aspirava a honras que o distinguissem de todos
os capitdes do seu tempo.
Se encontrar um livro que Ihe agrade, compre-o.
Se nao chove, a raiz duma planta nao encontra na terra
dgua que sugue.
(b) When expressing a quality which restricts the
generality of an idea, this idea belonging to a negative
or interrogative-negative attribute:
Ainda nao encontrei homem algum que nao tivesse (or
tenha) sido logrado nos sens sonhos de felicidade.
Quern ha que tenha sido sempre feliz?
N.B. Pouco is considered as attributing a negative
meaning :
Ha poucos homens que saibam aproveitar bem o tempo.
(c) Expressing purpose:
Enviei-lhe uma pessoa que o avisasse do que havia aeon-
tecido.
Remark. Relative clauses which do not belong to any
of the groups above require the indicative : Elle sabe os meios
de que pdde dispor e sabe os deveres que tern de cumprir.
Conhecia perfeitamente a sociedade em que vivia.
E. Quern in the meaning of "somebody who" or
"people who" and depending on ha, apparece or the
like, or following como (cf. C (f ) N.B.) equally requires the
verb in the subjunctive mood:
Ha quern assim pense; havia quern assim pensasse.
Falou com quern tivesse perdido o juizo.
However : Ha algumas pessoas que assim pensam.
Also expressions as seja quern for que, quern quen
que seja and the like require the subjunctive:
Elle estd innocente, seja quern for que diga o contrdrio. \
F. Finally, the subjunctive is employed in the forH
mulas que eu saiba as I know, and queira ou nao queira\
whether he wants to or not:
Nao ha, que eu saiba, expressao mais suave.
The Subjunctive Mood. 363
51, Thema.
T should want to find a book that might serve me as
a guide on my travels. Man is the only sentient being that
in a state of freedom may destroy itself. Please to send me
a servant who knows how to wait upon people. I should be
very sorry if you should depart without bidding me good-bye.
It will be well that you may know why I kept silence. Per-
haps it will be sufficient if you tell him that he will be dis-
missed immediately if he should not do his duty. It is
time that we return home, for it begins to rain. It may
be assumed that to-morrow the weather will be good. I
promised that I should keep her company, in case you should
be obliged to remain here. Dom Joao de Castro, a brilliant
modern author and a descendant of the famous Portuguese
viceroy of the same name, says in the preface to his Jor-
nados no Minho : "The reader who will like substantial
treatises, may halt here with his curiosity, for my 'Jornadas'
are nothing but a slight beating of wings . . . When I should
be a man so I intended when still a child I should
rove through old castles ; on my command (= vos) the draw-
bridges were to sink and the confined ladies of the castle
should hail me as their invincible deliverer ..." You do not
know whereby the ancestor of this author has become an his-
torical person, and you ask me whether I do. May I ask
leave to tell you briefly in the following paragraph the his-
tory of this hero, so intimately connected with that of his
country.
52, Leitnra e versao.
Dom Joao de Castro.
D. Joao de Castro seria immortal na, historia de Portugal,
ainda que nao tivesse sido vice-rei da India e como tal feito
facanhas como havera poucos as tenham feito. TalvSz elle
seja mais conhecido pela sua probidade e desinteresse, que
nao ha quern Ih'a possa negar ou Ihe levasse a palma. Nasceu
em Lisboa no anno de 1560; e como descendesse de uma fa-
milia illustre, passou a India no vice-rei nado de D. Antonio
de Noronha, e era governador de Ormuz quando foi chamado
para viee-rei da India. Tinha ja militado em Tanger e acom-
panhado o imperador Carlos Quinto na tomada de Tunis. Por
essa occasiao, como este monarcha quizesse dar-lhe a sua parte
dos despojos, D. Joao de Castro recusou, nao porque despre-
zasse todo o pre"mio material da sua valentia, mas por entender,
dizia, que so pertencia ao seu soberano recompensal-o como
merecesse. Quando D. Joao de Castro tomou conta do govSrno
da India, era I)iu governada por D. Joao de Mascarenhas que,
364 Lesson 23.
posto nao dispuzesse de mais de 300 Portugueses, a defendeu
valorosamente da forcu cem vfizes maior com que a amea9ara o
rei de Cambaia. novo vice-rei nao hesitou em Ihe man-
dar alguns soccorros de soldados, assim como sens dois filhos,
dos quaes um morreu na pra$a pela explosao duma mina.
Defendia-se Diu heroicamente haveria seis mezes, quando D. Joao
de Castro chegou (1546). Posto que nao i'6sse facil illudir o
inimigo, conseguiu fazel-o, entrando na pra9a com 4000 homens.
Alguns dias depois fez uma sortida e, agredindo as trincheiras
dos sitiantes, ganhou completa victoria, uma das mais sangui-
nolentas e memoraveis, que nos tern transmittido a historia.
Ficou a cidade arruinada, visto que o combate abrangesse
ruas, largos e arredores. Era indispensavel que se reconstru-
issem as fortifica9oes, mas nao havia dinheiro que chegasse.
Neste apuro D. Joao de Castro cortou alguns eabellos da barba,
e sobre este penhor pediu (que) Ihe emprestassem 20 000 par-
daus 1 os habitantes de Goa, os quaes Ihe forneceram o di-
nheiro precise e sem que tivessem de se arrepender da sua
confianca, pois a singular hypotheca foi resgatada no praso
fixo. E nunca houve, nem nunca havera homem que possa
gabar-se de barbas tomadas em mais alto valor. Foi esse
rasgo de magnifico aprumo que, mais do que os feitos com
que honrou a sua espada e as armas do seu pais, Ihe gran-
gearam a popularidade de que, passados quasi 4 se"culos, ainda
gosa o nome de D. Joao de Castro.
Mai tinha conseguido restabelecer a boa ordem no vice-
reine, quando a morte o veio surprehender a 6 de junho de
1547. Teve de ser enterrado a custa do piiblieo, visto nao
se achar nos seus cofres mais do que um cilicio, e tres reaes 2 ,
por isso que D. Joao de Castro, nao aspirando a bens que nao
fossem os do seu pais, em vz de amontoar tesouros, despendia,
generosamente os seus ordenados no servi90 do Estado.
Twenty-third Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood (continued).
A. The Future Tense.
115. The Future of the Subjunctive is employed,
instead of the Future indie., whenever you want to ex-
press the uncertainty of some future event:
1 Indian coin of about 360 reis or Is- 4 d - in value.
2 Old Indian coin of different value. There neeve silver
and copper reaes
JThe Subjunctive Mood. 365
.fter the conditional conjunction se:
ier if he should come; se ndo desejar mais nada in
ase you don't want anything more ; se Deus quizer
lease God.
ever: se vejo (se vi) whenever or if I see (saw),
lere se is not conditionally employed and does
UUL express a future, but a repetition.
(b) After qiiando when:
Quando vier when he will come; quando forrnos a casa
when we are to go home.
(c) After emquanto while, as long as:
Emquanto fizer este traballio . . . Emquanto ndo puder
contar com augmento de ordenado . . . Ordeno que
nao saia emquanto ndo tiver estudado a ligdo (cf. B,
118 c).
(d) After segundo, conforme, assim como, assim que
according to, corresponding to, thus, so as to:
Serds ou ndo bem succedido, segundo te houveres.
You will or will not succeed according to your mode
of procedure.
Cvnforme fizerdes, far-vos-hdo.
As you do, you will be done to.
Poy onde vds, assim como vires, assim fards.
Filho es, pae serds, assim que fizeres, assim terds.
(e) In relative clauses which refer to something
uncertain in the future:
Aquelle que vier he who may come.
Traga o trabalho que estiver feito bring the work that
will be ready.
Seja o que Deus quizer be it as God pleases (God's will
be done).
(f) Often after the relative como as and quern (he)
who (cf. (d)):
Como quizer as you please; como The parecer as you
think.
Quern boa cama fizer, nella se deitard as you make
your bed, so you lie on it.
116. The Perfect Future subj. is employed instead
of the same tense of the indicative, on the same con-
ditions as the Imperfect Future:
Avisem-me quando os cavallos tiverem chegado.
Let me know when the horses will have arrived.
366 Lesson 23.
B. Agreement of Tenses.
117. In the Subjunctive Mood the agreement
of tenses is, as a rule, the same as in the Indicative.
Therefore only some exceptions may be noted:
(a) There is no Preterito perfeito definido in the
Subjunctive (corresponding for instance to the verbal
form /m), but only a Preterito perfeito indefinido (cor-
responding., for instance, to tenho sido:tenha sido) and a
Preterito imperfeito, which, according to the character
of the clause, may alternate with the former. Ex.:
Example: Elle esteve hontem doente; ndo creio que esti-
vesse hontem doente.
Example: Elle tern estado (or esteve) doente; ndo creio
que tenha estado doente.
118. The Future tenses of the subjunctive are
only employed in the above mentioned cases (see A).
However, it should be noticed that:
(a) An action to be done in the future is expressed
by the present tense, in an accessory clause, if it de-
pends on a verb employed in the present tense of the
principal phrase:
Ordeno que elle vd amanhd.
(b) Such an action depending on a preterito in the
principal clause, must be expressed by the imperfect
subj.:
Ordenei que elle fosse amanhd.
(c) If the action is relatively future i.e., if it will
be already past when another, equally future, action is
to be or will have been done, this future tense is thus
expressed:
Ordeno que ndo saia, emquanto ndo tiver estudado a
ligdo.
Ordenei que ndo saisse, emquanto ndo tivesse estudado
a ligdo.
119. In certain cases the imperfect may supply
the pluperfect:
Ndo puzesses ( ndo tivesses posto) a mdo numvelho!
You ought not to have laid your hand upon an old man!
Quern me dissesse (or diria) isso !
Who might have told me so before!
The Subjunctive Mood. 367
120. On the other hand, the Preterite perfeito
indefinido is sometimes employed instead of the Pluper-
fect subj. (see 111, N.B.I).
63. Thema.
I cannot believe any longer in your promises unless you
give me the necessary securities. If you had been more thought-
ful, you would have spared us these painful discussions.
A thoughtless man never profits by those lessons which Life is-
giving him at any moment, although he has to pay for them
dearly. Also there are many people who remain ignorant even
after having travelled (personal form) through the most cul-
tured countries. They pass, as if they were blindfolded, be-
fore the greatest wonders of Nature or the most beautiful
monuments which Art may have created, if they are not
accompanied by somebody who will open for them their eyes_
Now the thunderstorm is over; as soon as the sun will
come forth, while the rain is still continuing, we shall see a
rainbow. Also if you place yourself before a fountain, with
your back against the sun, you will see forming itself in the
falling drops a bow like the rainbow, which proves that this
phenomenon is due to the sun. If we want the proof that
the sunlight is formed out of various colours, it will be suffi-
cient that we cut a disc of pasteboard on which the seven
colours are put in strips of paper, disposed from the centre
to the circumference, so as to complete a certain number of
successive spectrums. If then we cause the disc to turn round,
this will appear white. That is the so-called "experiment of
Newton."
64. Leitura.
grande erudito Consiglieri Pedroso, quando presidente
da Sociedade de Geographia de Lisboa, submeteu a delibera9ao-
da assembleia com o intiiito de estabelecer um accordo luso-
brasiliense uma se"rie de propostas, de que extraimos as seguintes :
Estudar a forma mais adequada de se realisarem con-
gresses periddicos luso-brasileiros, que devam em prazos a fixar
reunir-se alternadamente em Lisboa ou Porto e no Eio de
Janeiro ou outras cidades brasileiras, com o intuito de discutir
todos os assumptos de ordem intellectual e econdmica, que in-
teressam em commum e exclusivamente as duas na9oes, e onde
haja de fazer-se a propaganda das deliberates que pelos mes-
mos congresses e pelos governos dos dois paises tenham de
ser tomadas a beneficio de ambos os povos respeitando-se
escrupulosamente a independencia de cada um d'elles, e evi-
tando-se toda e qualquer interferencia, por minima que seja,.
368 Lesson 24.
na vida interna e no modo de ser dos dois paises respectiva-
mente.
Estudar a forma de se ultimar urn tratado de commercio,
ou antes um largo entendimento commercial entre as duas
na^oes, procurando-se a maneira ate onde for possivel veneer
as difficuldades naturaes inherentes ao assumpto de que
uma a outra concedam respectivamente vantagens especiaes,
que deixem de ser transmittidas aos outros estados, nao sendo
portanto attingidas pela clausula de nac;ao mais favorecida,
inscripta actualmente nos tratados ja existentes tanto de Portu-
gal, como do Brasil com os paises estrangeiros.
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
The Infinitive.
I. General Use of the Infinitive.
121. Portuguese language distinguishes two
forms of the Infinitive:
(a) the impersonal and (b) the personal.
While the former expresses an action quite generally,
without saying by whom, the latter includes in its
ending at the same time the subject.
122. The impersonal or simple infinitive occurs
purely (without preposition) or prepositive (= depending
on a preposition) e.g.: escrever; de, para, por escrever.
Sometimes it substitutes (with or without the article) a
noun, and may be subject, object, or predicate:
Viver e um beneficio da natureza, commum a todos.
Educar os filhos e o dever mais sagrado dos paes.
Nao the resta sendo pedir esmola.
Gosto de cantar.
vida da mintia vida
6 vida do men viver
Viver sem ti nao e vida
Viver sem ti e morrer. (Portuguese folk-lore).
123. The subject-infinitive may also be placed
after the predicate:
Praia e o bem falar, ouro e o bem calar.
Mais vale calar que mal falar.
$ melhor ir por aqui.
The Infinitive.
369
grande defeito do rato e ser muito guloso
j@ fdcil faser
Bom saber e calar, aU ser tempo de falar.
uma vergonha (uma Idstima) ndo saber ler
A sua velha poltrona onde Ike e grato dormir urn curto
so(m)no benefico . . .
124. The Infinitive is employed as a complement:
(a) As a direct complement:
Nao sei (que) faser I don't know how (or what) to do.
Esse homem de Estado quer ser chefe do governo (= quer
a chefia) this statesman wants to be the head of
Government.
Elle pediu de beber he asked for a draught,
(b) As an indirect complement of verbs or adjectives,
answering to the question: of what, to what, etc.:
homem e capaz de se enganar (= de engano). Elle
prepara-se para fugir (= para a fug a)
Pensa em partir (= na partida).
125. The simple Infinitive is also employed as
an attribute; as such it is preceded by de after nouns
of which it is the complement. In English it is generally
rendered by the gerund. Ex.:
A arte de escrever e jd antiga. A Austria tinha inten-
gdo de ficar neutral (the art of writing . . .).
publico ndo tern interesse em os ouvir. Elle fez
mengao de se retirar (. . . no interest of hearing . . .).
pais estd numa situagdo de se lastimar.
126. The Infinitive employed as a substantive
may express any part of a proposition:
andar cansa walking tires. Era um ndo acabar de rir
there was no end of laughing. Soava um correr
de cavallos a trot of horses was heard. Desde o ama-
nhecer ate ao anoitecer from dawn to nightfall.
127. The Personal Infinitive has its own
subject which may or may not be expressed by its
termination. It may also be accompanied by a noun
or pronoun:
Seria justo confessarmos o nosso erro
Ndo ha maior erro que ndo reconhecer um homem seu
erro (or ndo reconhecerem os homens . . .).
Ao ouvir os pdssaros cantarem no bosque ... .
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 24
370 Lesson 24.
128. The subject of the Personal Infinitive may
even be an indefinite, an impersonal one. The action
then is expressed by the third person plural. In Eng-
lish this form may be rendered by the passive voice:
Calei-me par nao me accreditarem I remained silent be-
cause they did not believe me (or because I was not
believed.
Eetiro-me para nao me importunarem.
I retired that I might not be bored.
See also the Infinitive as representing a dependent
clause, Lesson 28 151.
N.B. I. As may be seen by the examples, the Infinitive
may also be accompanied by complements of any kind; e.g.:
suave decorrer do tempo . . . um longo agonisar . . . o
agraddvel passear pelos campds.
N.B. II. Generally the substantiated Infinitive is em-
ployed only in the masculine and singular form. With a
small number, however, the employment of the infinitive as a
substantive is so natural that even the plural is formed of
it; e.g.: o jantar dinner, jantares; os ditzeres, os poderes, o&
deveres, os haveres, os andares, os saberes etc.
55. Thema.
Water is an indispensable element : for men and animate
to drink ; to cook foods ; to fertilise the ground ; to water the
plants ; to produce steam that causes the locomotive to go on
land and the powerful steamers on sea. "What future
awaits us," exclaims Trindade Coelho, "if we do not assist
agriculture? Continuous impoverishment of our race, which will
be undermined by disease; our impossibility of creating
new industries or of developing those already existing, which
all depend on the mother-industry; the impossibility of our hav-
ing commerce, for want of (= for not having) something in which
to exercise it; misery and hunger not very far off, when, in
exchange for products indispensable to Life, we shall have given
the last crumbs." Is there anything more lamentable than
not knowing how to read and to write? Can you tell us
how to reach the railway-station? I have a great pleasure
in being of use to you. Please come along with me;
for I have to go the same way. When do you think of
coming back? I don't know yet, but I hope I shall not
be long.
The Infinitive.
371
56. Leitura e yersao.
Eodrigues de Freitas.
)uem estudar com atten9&o as pequenas obr as-prim as
reunidas n'este volume (Pdginas Avulsas de J. J. Modriguse
de Freitas), curvar-se-ha por certo com respeito e sympathia
perante o autor. Notara nao so o vasto saber positive e a
justSza das doatrinas expostas, mas tambem as variadas apti-
does literarias, e a arte rara de narrar acontecimentos e exte-
riorizar ideias, com precisao e sobriedade . . . Se em seguida
fememorar os factos principaes da sua vida piiblica, como lente
na Academia polyte"chnica, eximio publicists, chefe de partido
e deputado, penso que deve ficar impressionado pela nobre
rectidao da sua indole e pela perfeita unidade que sempre
houve entre o sen pensar, o seu dizer e o seu obrar . . .
Ficariam, comtudo, incompletos os breves trac,os Ian9ados n'este
singelo monumento, erguido a memoria de Rodrigues de Freitas
pelas maos piedosas' que o ampararam e acariciaram em vida r
se alguem dos poucos que tiveram a ventura de serem ad-
mittidos na intimidade do seu lar, nao manifestasse a profunda
e consoladora impressao, produzida pela sua personalidade no
trato familiar, AJguem que pode seguir a evolu^ao das ideias
e dos ideaes de ambos . . . e leu em admiraveis cartas a es-
posa r medita^oes . . . fragmentos e esbo9os infelizmente, mas
tao bellos que provocam urn doloroso pesar por o destino nao
Ihe haver concedido tempo e for<;as para terminar as suas in-
vestiga^oes sociaes, nem para coordenar as suas ideias filoso-
fico-religiosas . . . Quando em vida, em horas de desalento,
procurava alguma ideia sublime que o avigorasse r era na Ora-
9ao de Benjamim Franklin que a encontrava, repetindo:
0h bondade todo-poderosa, pae misericordioso, guia in-
dulgente. Augmenta o meu saber de sorte que eu reconhe9a
os meus verdadeiros interesses. Firma-me na resolu9lo de
seguir os conselhos que esse me der. Acceita os servi9os que
eu possa prestar a teus outros filhos, como signal unico de
reconhecimento que me e dado offerecer-te pelos favores que
me concedes sem cessar.*
(Carolina MichaSlis de Vasconcellos : prearnbulo (dbbr.) das
Paginas avulsas por J. J. Rodrigues de Freitas.)
24*
372 Lesson 25.
Twenty "fifth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
II. Use of the Personal and the Impersonal Forms
of the Infinitive.
129. Whenever the pure infinitive is employed
in quite a general meaning, without referring to some
subject, the impersonal form is used:
Os preceitos do direito sao : viver honestamente, nao em-
pecer a outrem, e dar o sen a cada um.
130. When the infinitive has its own subject
expressed, the personal form is employed (cf. 127).
Ao chegarem os fugitives a planicie, um dos desconhecidos
estava ali.
131. The personal form is employed also when-
ever an action is spoken of which has a special though
unexpressed subject (cf. 128): Passei sem me verem.
132. The impersonal form is employed when-
ever the infinitive has the meaning of an imperative
(cf.136,b).
133. After the verbs mandar, fazer, deixar-se,
the simple and pure infinitive is employed:
Mandei-o entrar. Fal-o-hei subir. Deixou-se prender.
N.B. If, however, the infinitive is separated from the
subordinating verb, the personal form may be used : Mandeis-o
em dia e liora marcados seguirem o sen caminho.
134. The impersonal form of the infinitive is
used after the following verbs:
Acdbar de, andar a, cessar de, comegar a (or de), con-
tinuar a, costumar, chegar a, desejar and the verbs
of similar meaning deixar de, entrar a, dar em,
estar a, ser feito para, haver de, ir a, langar-se a,
metter-se a y ser mandado, ousar, poder, por-se a,
querer, recusar, saber, soer, ter de, tratar de, tornar
a, vir a. (Also for these verbs see 133, N.B.)
135. In any other cases the personal as well as
the impersonal forms may be employed, considering
always that the use of the one or the other is subject
The Infinitive. 373
to the clearness, the emphasis, and the harmony of the
clause. Ex. :
Accrescentava que as nolicias recebidas do Alentejp
continuavam a ser favordveis. Ensinou a ser reis
os reis do mundo. For esta pergunta nos ensina a
sermos curiosos. Obriga os cercados a lidar. Obri-
gdra os Mossulmanos a concederem-lhe . . . As aves
aqudticas pareciam, nos sens voos incertos, ora vaga-
rosos, ora rdpidos, folgarem com os primeiros dias
da estagdo dos amores. Viam-se lampejar as armas
e ajuntarem-se ondas de vultos humanos.
III. The Independent Infinitive.
13G. The Infinitive is employed independently:
(a) When substituting a noun e.g.:
bem fazer floresce, e todo o mal perece.
Mais custa mal fazer, que bem fazer.
Bern parece o bem faser (see 123 125).
(b) When substituting an imperative:
Companheiros, despedir esta noite da montariha e das
tristezas, e apparelhar para amanha me seguirdes I
N.B. In this case the subject (tu, vos) is never expressed.
(c) In exclamations expressing surprise, disillusion,
astonishment:
Nao haver quern me salve! Pensar que tudo seria
em vao!
67. Thema.
To err is human. To obey is the duty of youth. Bea-
ding, writing and arithmetic are the most elementary attain-
ments which ought to be taught to everybody and which all
ought to learn. The strong beating of his heart prevented
him from going fast. To recognise the limits of one's knowledge
is to be wise. It is not virtue never to err, bat avoiding
error as much as possible may well be called so. It is easy
to blame, but difficult to make it better. I want to see this
work finished, for it is easily to be done (cf. 146, 2 ; N.B. III).
Already you have often promised to improve yourself, yet I do
not yet see that you have succeeded in doing so. It must be
acknowledged that in the last decennium the women's rights
movement has learnt how to convince the righteously and justly
thinking people of the justice of its existence and advocacy.
374 Lesson 26.
Rowing is a good exercise, as, by putting the arms to strong
movement, it obliges us to breathe deeply. For it is not
enough for us to breathe good air and well nourish ourselves ;
it is also necessary to take some exercise and to be clean.
58. Leitura e yersao.
(a) rato e um animal muito interessante e engrac. ado ; e
nao obstante (elle) ser o mais incommode e atrevido dos nossos
visinhos, costurnamos gostar d'elle, porque a sua viveza e in-
telligencia nao deixam de fazel-o sympathico. rato seria ate
de estimar, se nao fosse tao guloso e prejudicial; pois ale"m
de devorar tudo o que topa, e de furtar para levar aos filhos,
parece que tern o prazer de destruir o que pode alcan^ar, e
nao ha nada que resista ao seu dente afiado, A brincar, o
rato domestico da cabriolas muito engrac. adas e sabe tomar
posi96es e fazer momices que lembram os dos palhaQOS. E
para ir ter com uma gulodice, tanto 6 capaz de ir pelo chao
como por uma corda. Apanhado e mettido n'uma gaiola, a
principio assusta-se muito, ignorando o que Ihe vae succeder.
Task: The preceding to be put in the plural: Os ratos
saojdnimaes muito inter essantes, etc.
(b) Um leao dignou-se travar conhecimento com uma lebre
muito le"pida. A lebre perguntou-lhe, se era verdade que um
misero gallo pudesse com o seu canto afugentar facilmente
um leao. leao respondeu que era verdade sem duvida, e
que nao era raro terem os grandes animaes quasi sempre al-
gum fraco. E assim, por exemplo, ja teria ella ouvido dizer
que o grunhir de um porco causava assombro e terror a um
elephante. A lebre interrompeu-o, dizendo que era agora que
ella comprehendia a razao porque as lebres se assustavam
tanto a ouvirem ladrar um cao.
Twenty-sixth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
IT. The Dependent Infinitive.
A. Without a preceding preposition.
137. Those verbs which according to their meaning
require to be completed by another verb with the same
subject, are followed by the simple (impersonal) infinitive:
>'L'' Ninguem pdde fugir d morte.
The Infinitive. 375
With the simple infinitive and without a preposition
are employed:
Poder, parecer, custumar, soer (to be in the habit)
saber (in the meaning of "to be able"), ousar, nao
duvidar, recear, propor-se, tencionar, emprehender,
intentar, meditar, projectar and similar verbs, tentar,
recusar, merecer; e.g.:
A lingua bi-partida da vibora agita-se tao furiosamente
fora da bocca, qiie parece phosphorejar e despedir
faiscas.
macaco pode receber uma verdadeira educagao.
Propoz-se tentar fazel-o, sem bem saber projectar urn
piano.
N.B. In relative clauses the infinitive may sometimes
precede the personal verbal form; e.g.: . . . cortando o esteiro
o mais abaixo que ser possa.
138. Without a preposition the infinitive is em-
ployed also after the following verbs:
v$r, ouvir, sentir, deixar, mandar, fazer though the
infinitive has not the same subject with these verbs,
but refers to their object; e.g.:
ouvi cantar = I heard (somebody) sing.
Ouviram-no falar; manddram-me entrar; (in passive
form: elle foi ouvido falar, fui mandado entrar).
N.B. I. After deixar, mandar, fazer, vir, ouvir the ac-
tive infinitive may be understood in a passive meaning; then
its subject is governed by por or de. In English the infinitive
is rendered by one of the participles: Deixei-me tyrannisar
por ella I allowed myself to be tyrannised by her. principe
fazia-se respeitar (made himself respected) dos vassallos.
Ex.: Ouvimos bater o tambor, tocar a rebeca, cortar a
madeira; vimos arder a casa We heard the drum beaten, the
violin played, the wood sawn ; we saw the house burning.
It may be noticed that when these verbs are followed, be-
side the infinitive, by an accusative of the third person, this
is substituted by the dative:
Eu vejo-lhes verier Idgrimas tristes (instead of: eu as
vejo . . .).
139. Most of the verbs of saying and thinking
(verbos sensitives e declarativos), as pensar, julgar, contar,
declarar, affirmar, negar, duvidar, perdoar, dizer, entender,
376 Lesson 26.
etc., may be followed by the pure infinitive, instead of
a clause depending on que; e.g.;
Julgas saber (= que sabes); affirmou nao haver perigo
(= que nao havia p.).
Rule. The infinitive is generally simple when
its action relates to the same subject as that of the
capital verb.
N.B. After some verbs the infinitive may be preceded
by de; e.g.:
Jurou exterminar (or de exterminar) os inimigos.
140. The transitive verbs querer, preferir, desejar,
gostar, aborrecer and those analogous are followed by an
infinitive pure and simple whenever both actions have
the same subject: Desejo entrar.
(The subjects being different, a dependent sentence
with que is employed instead: Desejo que elle entre.)
N.B. Desejar may be followed by de : desejo deir; but
desejo ir is more popular.
141. The transitive verbs diligenciar, procurar,
evitar, conseguir, obter, decidir, resolver and those ana-
logous are followed by the pure infinitive, whether the
two actions have or have not the same subject:
Consegui ser premiado; consegui ser elle premiado.
I succeeded in getting a prize; I obtained a prize
for him.
N.B. In the latter case you may say: consegui que elle
fdsse premiado.
142. The infinitive pure and simple is employed
in final clauses after the verbs ir and vir; the subjects
of these verbs and of the infinitive are the same:
Fui procurd-lo I went to call on him. Veio ver-me he
came to see me. Indo encontrd-lo a dormir ... to find him
asleep. Ir ter or vir ter (com) = to turn to, to call on, to
fall in (with). Esta rua vae ter d ponte. Fui ter com elle;
veio ter comigo.
143. The expression nao fazer sendo is equally
followed by the infinitive pure and simple:
Nao faz sendo brincar he does not do anything but
play.
The Infinitive. 377
144. The pure infinitive follows as an accusative
complement the verbs ser, ter por origem, dar em re-
sultado, ter por consequential, haver por galarddo ( to
get as a prize) and those analogous [N.B. here in its
personal form], as also the verb fazer in its meaning
u to cause." Ex.:
Isto deu em resultado serem todos castigados.
The result of it was that all of them were punished.
Se brincares com o lume, terd isso por consequencia
queimares-te.
If you play with the fire, the consequence will be your
burning yourself.
Tao grande e a sua desgraga one fas cliorar as pedras.
So great is her misfortune that it causes the stones to
weep.
145. Without any preposition or with de the in-
finitive follows the verbs dever (= must, ought) and
dignar-se (to deign, to be pleased). Ex.:
Elles deviam (de) contentar-se.
They ought to be satisfied.
Dignae-vos, senhor, (de) ouvir o vosso servo.
Be pleased, Lord, to hear thy servant.
146. The pure infinitive (subject) follows certain
adjectives and substantives employed as a predicate
(see 123), such as: precise , fdcil, daro, difficil, justo,
possivel, bom, mettior, vergonha, Idstima etc. e.g. : e fdcil,
foi precise, sera melJior sdir (but cf. 148, 3, N.B. HE),
as also the impersonal verbs, such as:
importa it is important custa-me it is painful to me
convem it is convenient nao custa nada it is not diffi-
cult.
147. The pure infinitive is employed after some
prepositions, such as:
por (e.g. : nao saiu por nao ter que vestir he did not
go out, because he had nothing to put on).
sem (e.g. : sem pestanejar without twinkling).
para (e.g. : para nao o metindrar that I may or might
not offend him . . .)
. . . para elle me dizer that he may or might tell me.
378 Lesson 26.
59. Thema.
On the Education of Children.
There will be no lack of those who will laugh on hearing
speak of education of a child only three or four years old.
Nothing, however, (is) more serious and necessary than to
understand how to profit by the sincerity of this age, which
does not yet know how to lie, in order to recognise the future
man in the child.
It offers the best opportunity for improving all good
qualities of character yea, even to make the best of its
defects, to change them into virtues, without twisting the will
or wronging the individuality. From the infant-school, where
the mother had placed the child, because (see 147), it
was impossible to have it at home from its third (tr. : since
the third) year, it passes over to attend the public schools.
It has its compendiums which speak (a with inf.) to it of things
that it had not the slightest idea of. Each step is a diffi-
culty (see 147) to be vanquished ; each matter a novelty the
meaning of which the teacher, amongst so many pupils requir-
ing his attention, has had no time to explain to it. With
tears in its eyes and the book in its hands, the child will
seek her whom it loves best, that she may (see 147) ex-
plain to it what it cannot understand. And the poor mother
will not be able to help it, but will have to confess her igno-
rance. How often when finding the child nodding over a book
which it does not understand, would not the mother have
the wish to take it out of its hands and by clear reading
and intelligent explanation teach it how to understand the
meaning! But the "poor mother" cannot do so (fut.), because
she also does not know. And from day to day the conviction
of its mother's inferiority will take root in the child's mind
in the same measure as it acquires (see 148, 2) knowledge
and develops its intelligence.
(Anna de Castro Osorio: As mulheres portuguesas).
60. Leitura e versao.
A tignordncia* do povo portugues.
Ninguem de boa-f6 contesta ser o povo portugues igno-
rante. Todavia nao devemos exaggerar as consequSncias so-
ciaes d'este facto, mSsmo porque nao acredite o senhor F. que
o povo francos saiba chimica, o povo inglfis resolva equacoes
e o povo allemao discorra sobre metaphysics. Se o cuida,
illude-se completamente; e de saber l6r e escrever, e certo
que esse e meio caminho andado para o povo adquirir a ver-
The Infinitive. 379
dade y mas 6 tambem meio caminho andado para a turba se
imbuir de quanta mentirola e de quanta prote"rvia goza do
hoje commum privilegio da letra redonda. A ignorancia e
mal, mas a meia-sci6ncia e peor; e, nas condiQoes genericas so-
ciaes actuaes, nunca o povo pode attingir a plenitude do saber.
Nao tern tempo para estudar, nem vagar nem disposi^ao nas
horas livres que Ihe restam, desde que sa(h)e moido do seu
trabalho exhaustive. Assim, fore, a Ihe 6 recorrer aos e con-
fiar nos profissionaes ; confiar nos lettrados, nos publicistas e
nos politicos ... A independencia do espirito seguira tambem
os tramites de seus progresses. Conve"m nao desatender ao
facto significative de que em Portugal o registo civil tern sido
adoptado de preferencia pelo proletariado fabril, e 4 de notar
o avance civilisatorio da nossa gente nas artes e nas indiis-
trias . . . For o facto de o povo estar desconfiado, nao se
segue que elle seja insusceptivel de enthusiasmo . . . Por-
tanto, resumindo, nao me pareceram procedentes aquellas accu-
sacoes verberadas contra o povo portugues pelo sr. F., o qual
se mostrou desgostoso a ponto de dizer, aito e bom som, que,
emquanto uns nascem para ser ricos e outros para ser sabios,
elle nascSra para levar pancada e dar pouca.
(Bruno: Os modernos publicistas Portugueses.)
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
The Dependent Infinitive (continued).
B. With the preceding preposition de the infinitive
is employed:
148. 1. After substantives to which it is a com-
plement (see 125).
2. After many verbs of which it forms the com-
plement, -such as:
acabar to finish, having just come$ar, principiar to begin
done deixar to forbear
accusar to accuse desculpar-se to excuse
acertar to hit encarregar(-se) to take upon
admirar-se to wonder oneself
advertir to inform esquecer-se to forget
affligir-se to grieve excusar-se to withdraw
alegrar-se to rejoice fugir (de or a) to fly from
cessar to cease gabar-se to boast
380 Lesson 27.
gostar to like provir to come from
haver to be obliged parar to stop
impedir to hinder queixar-se to complain of
lembrar-se to remember ter de to be obliged
pedir to ask trata-se the question is
prometer to promise vangloriar-se to boast.
3. After adjectives, also followed by the genitive,
such as:
dvido eager digno worthy
cansado tired difficil difficult
capaz capable fdcil easy
certo sure impadente impatient
cioso, dumento jealous insaddvel insatiable
contents satisfied raro rare
descontente dissatisfied susceptivel susceptible.
desejoso desirous
N.B. 1. Some adjectives, expressing cause or design, may
be followed by the infinitive preceded by por; e.g.: impa-
denle, (des)contente, causado por . . .
N.B. 2. Some infinitives preceded by demay be employed
in the meaning of an adjective ending by -vel; e.g. : Pan-
dam menos de temer (= temivel). E'de presumir (= presu-
mivel). Foi acgao muito de louvar (= louvdvel).
N.B. 3. Certain adjectives (as fdcil, diffidl, raro), when
adverbially employed, are followed by the infinitive preceded
by de, the substantive determined by the adjective being the
.object of the infinitive; e.g.:
Enigmas difficeis de dedfrar (= de serem dedfrados)
riddles difficult to be guessed.
Compare, however: com esta natureza e fdcil crearem-se
os poetas here fdcil is a predicate.
N.B. 4. In some cases the infinitive thus employed is
still followed by a complement: sao fructos de enlevar olhos
fruits to gladden the eyes.
Eram lindas de fazer inveja they were so beautiful as
to cause envy.
4. In clauses of circumstance after certain pre-
positions conjunctionally employed:
alem de besides antes de before
afim de that a ponto de so that
d f6r$a de with much apesar de in spite of
The Infinitive. 381
depois de after perto de near to
em vez de instead of par falta de by want of
longe de far from sob condigdo de on condition
that.
Como o sr. Theophilo Braga diem de haver classificado
em generos poeticos as composites incluidas no Campo
de Flores as dassificou tambem por epocas chro-
nologicas . . .
5. After e e.g.:
de crer (advertir, mencionar etc.) qiie . . .
61. Thema.
Dear Friend,
Weary of travelling, I have just come back to my Penates
(recolher a Penates), dissatisfied with myself for having stayed
away for so many months that I ought to have been more
profitably employed. Yet such is our nature. We pine for
the opportunity to scamper through the world, with an in-
satiable appetite for seeking excitements we feel to be lacking
in the cramped surroundings of our home. And we go to
find what? A climate that does not agree (dizer) with
our nervous system, nor with our northern customs; a bed
fit only to break our bones, after having tired them by con-
tinual walking; people as indifferent to our presence as we are
insensible to their company; a hotel room destitute of every-
thing that hitherto seemed impossible to be done without. Only
in our home have we the opportunity of enjoying the calm
and the happiness that we vainly seek away from its doors.
But you will be surprised, dear friend, to hear thus
speak a man who, although having already finished his thirty-
seventh year, yet remains a bachelor. I know, of course,
that you consider me a theorist whose theories are all the
more difficult to understand, the longer he is in bringing
about their realisation. But I am determined to go on
theorising. It has occurred to me to invite you, my good
friend, to come here and stay some time with me, instead of
going to Italy. Also I hope you will bring your family. We
shall pass a couple of weeks so agreeably that they will com-
pensate me for all the vicissitudes of my travels, and I am
confident that you will have no cause to regret having ac-
cepted my invitation. Don't delay in letting me know that
you will come, and at the same time tell me the day and
hour I may expect you. I am longing to see you here.
Please remember me to your family.
Your sincere friend,
Henry.
382 Lesson 28.
62. Leitnra e versao.
A respiragao.
homem precisa respirar para viver.
Vamos estudar no seguinte as vias da respira9ao.
Todo o sangue do corpo, depois de circular por este,
volta pelas veias ao corac.ao, donde torna a partir, saindo do
cora<jao pelas arte"rias. No sen giro pelo corpo, o sangue vae
deixando por este a sua substancia. A substancia e dada ao
sangue pelos alimentos e tambem pelo ar. ar entra pela
boca e pelo nariz e vae aos pulmoes. sangue, depois de
percorrer o corpo do homem, e de deixar n'este a sua sub-
stancia, passa pelos pulmoes onde recebe mais ar. ar que
ahi recebe torna a dar ao sangue substancia, para este a es-
palhar outra vez por todas as partes do nosso organismo.
sangue quando chega aos pulmoes vae quasi escuro.
Quando sae dos pulmoes, depois de ser ahi bafejado pelo ar,
torna a ser vermelho-claro, isto 6", torna a carregar-se de sub-
stancia para ir espalhar pelo corpo. sangue nao para de
circular. Se parasse, o homem morria. Como 6 o corac,ao que
faz andar o sangue dentro dos canaes, se o cora^ao deixasse de
bater, o sangue deixava de andar, e sobrevinha a morte.
ar, depois de entrar pela boca e pelo nariz, vae em seguida
passar para o tubo da garganta chamado larynge ; e como este
tubo e" continuado por outro chamado trachea, o ar segue pela
trache'a e chega aos pulmoes. Como os pulmoes sao dois, a
trachea divide-se na raiz da garganta em dois ramos, cada urn
dos quaes vae dar a seu pulmao. Esses dois ramos em qne
a trachea se reparte, chamam-se bronchios, e estes penetram
pelos pulmoes: penetrando, o ar que vae dentro d'elles, en-
contra-se com o sangue nos pulmoes e ahi o bafeja. Bafejado,
o sangue torna a ficar vermelho, porque o ar transmittiu-lhe
parte dos seus elementos, os quaes elle vae em seguida espa-
lhar pelo corpo, para o medrar e dar-lhe vida.
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
The Dependent Infinitiye (continued).
C. With the preceding preposition a.
149. The infinitive preceded by a expresses:
1. When following a verb, the manner or some
circumstance of its action:
The Infinitive. 38S
Viemos a correr we came running.
Disse isso a rir he said so laughing.
Pediu-m'o a chorar he asked me crying for it.
Deteve-se a examinar um quadro he stopped to examine
a picture.
Encontrei-a a dormir I found her asleep.
2. When following a substantive, a design, the
object of which is the same substantive e.g.:
Havia grandes difficuldades a veneer there were great
difficulties to be overcome.
Ha muitas pequenas industrias caseiras a cultivar e a
fazer resurgir no nosso pais there are a great many
small home-made industries in our country to be
cultivated and revived.
N.B. Sometimes the infinitive joined by a or de to a
verb is equivalent to a verbal adjective and must be render-
ed by the past participle:
Uma occasido a ndo perder an occasion not to be lost.
caminho a trilhar the way to be taken.
FSuma fonte de receita muito de aproveitar it is a source
of income very much to be profited by.
3. In abbreviated clauses the infinitive preceded by
a serves to express an admission or condition:
A ser isto verdade (= se isto fosse porventura verdade)
ndo tornariamos a falar-lhe. A acreditd-lo teria
havido urna enchente.
4. The infinitive is preceded by a after the following
verbs:
animar-se a chegar a ser . . .
apparelhar-se a (or para) tornar a fazer
anticipar-se a atrever-se a
estimular-se a preparar-se a
excitar-se a abalan$dr-se a
principiar a 1 langar-se a
comegar a see ( 148, 2) obrigar a
appressar-se a aventurar-se a
tardar a or em metter-se a
continuar a por-se a
habilitar a resolver-se a
aprender a decidir-se a
entrar a determinar-se a
habituar a annuir a
1 But, principiar or come$ar por (dizer) to begin by (saying).
384 Lesson 28.
concorrer a ajudar a
cooperar a entreter-se a
ensinar a attender-se a
autorisar a convidar a
accostumar-se a vir a
costumar a levar a
conde(m)nar a arrojar a
comegar a
as well as after all those which may be followed instead
by an abstract noun preceded by a e.g.:
Se continuasses (nao tardasses, wincipiasses, entrasses,
te appressasses, tornasses, te abalangasses) a estudar;
chegarias a ser instruido. Abalan^ou-se a luctar (== d
lucta) ; resolveram-se a partir (d partida). Quern dd
o sen antes de morrer, apparelha-se a bem soffrer.
5. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verbs
of movement:
Corri a $alvo-lo I hurried to save him.
Arrojou-se a deter o cavallo he rushed to stop the horse.
N.B. Cf. the verbs ir and vir which, being employed
as auxiliary verbs of the periphrastical form, may be followed
by the gerund instead (see 96 and 142 : use of these
verbs with the pure infinitive).
6. The infinitive preceded by a after the verbs
cstar and andar, equally auxiliary verbs of the peri-
phrastical conjugation, as well as Hear, passar, etc. in-
dicates essentially manner or duration and may be
supplied by the gerund (see 151):
Ando a estudar or ando estudando.
Estas coisas ficam a pertencer or ficam pertencendo
sen foro intimo.
7. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verl
ensinar, autorisar, convidar, etc., being itself followed by
the direct object:
Ensinou o cdo a fazer hdbilidades he taught the dog to
perform tricks.
Convidou-a a dangar he invited her to dance.
Autorisou-me a publicar as cartas he authorised me to
publish the letters.
8. In an analogous way the infinitive with a joins
the verb dar, expressing, however, an action practised
The Infinitive. 385
by the dative complement of dar; and the verb por,
expressing the action practised by the accusative com-
plement of por.
Dar a dlguem uma coisa a provar (alguem is dative
complement of dar and subject of provar).
Por os filhos a estudar (os filhos is accusative comple-
ment of por and subject of estudar).
149. The infinitive may not only be preceded
by a or de, but by any other preposition (em, por, para,
com. sem, antes de, depois de, apesar de, nao obstante
etc.), having the same meaning as abstract nouns,
governed by these prepositions e.g.:
Reconsiderou depois de ter falado aos paes e antes de se
comprometer . . .
He changed his mind after having spoken to his parents
and before engaging himself.
Entrei sem me verem I entered without being seen.
Pedi-lhe para me acompanhar I asked him to accom-
pany me.
Ella estava aborrecida por nao saber como (or em que)
empregar o tempo.
She felt bored, as she did not know how to spend her time.
Deixdmo-nos ficar por jd nao haver tempo de akangar
o comboio.
We stayed because there was not time to catch the
train.
Com ser velho nao deixa de sentir com a gente moga.
Though he be old, he is able to feel with young people.
Andamos (or estdmos) mortos por ir para fdra.
We are dying to go abroad.
150. After the verbs consistir, insistir, perseverar,
persistir, teimar, porfiar, hesitar, tardar, attentar, confiar
and those analogous the following infinitive is preceded
by em.
Persistem (or teimam) em resistir they persist in resisting.
Hesitei em confiar n'elle I hesitated to trust him.
151. The infinitive is employed for the English
gerund and to shorten circumstantial clauses:
(a) The verbs perdoar and agradecer are followed
by the personal infinitive without preposition, and not
by a dependent clause with que:
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 25
386
Lesson 28.
the infinitive is employed
after :
afim de
para
Perdoou-lhes o haverem-no offendido he pardoned them
their having offended him.
Agradecerem-nos o te-los protegido they thanked us for
(our) having protected them.
N.B. The same is to be said of the impersonal verb
haver j e.g.:
Nao ha (= ndo e possivel) valer-lhe there is no ex-
celling him.
(b) The subject being the same in the principal
and the dependent clause:
instead of a personal form
with the conjunctions:
afim de que
para que
sem que
antes que antes de
depois que depots de
de modo (fdrma, maneira) que de modo (fdrma, maneira) a
por que por.
N.B. So it would be wrong to say: Cultivar a terra
de maneira a produzir, as terra in the first clause is the
complement: cultivar a terra de maneira queproduea would be
right.
152. Instead of a dependent clause with que
the personal infinitive without preposition may be
employed after those transitive verbs expressing ad-
mission, permission, suffering and those of opposite
meaning, such as : conceder, permitft)ir, admit(t)ir, prohibir,
sof(f)rer, tolerar etc.:
Proliibiu entrarem os navios de noite (instead of: pro-
hibiu que os navios entrassem he prohibited the ships
coming in at night.
63. Thema.
Women as Silkworm-breeders in Portugal.
If at some not very distant date the industry of silk
manufacture in Portugal should happen to be revived, it will
be due to the initiative of Mrs. Anna de Castro Osdrio, the
excellent writer, who is always eager to see her country
prosperous. Her idea is at the same time to provide working
women with better facilities for gaining a livelihood, an object
which the promoter of this industry never fails to keep in mind.
Construction. 387
This lady has recently explained to the president and
other aldermen of the municipal council of Setiibal how she
was led to conceive the idea referred to, and has requested
the assistance and protection of the council. She does not
deny that there are some difficulties, but she affirms that the
obstacles are not great, and hopes to overcome them with the
aid of the authorities.
She is of opinion that the industry of the sericulture
(i.e. of the breeding and selection of silk-worms) is one that
the women of Portugal must not allow to die out. With
five weeks' work of so slight a nature that it is rather a
pleasant distraction than an irksome task, each housewife or
daughter could realise a profit which to the one would provide
assistance towards the house-rent, and to the other additional
funds for increasing the stock of clothing. To the young
ladies this latter is generally a matter of great importance;
and with some reason, indeed, for their greatest concern is
how to make themselves appear most beautiful and attractive.
The beauty of women is a tribute to Art and Nature which
a cultured people should not allow to depreciate.
64. Leitura e versfio.
A mulher portuguesa como seri(d)cultdra.
Se esta industria se desenvolver em Setubal, como e" de
esperar, como indiistria caseira que deve ser, ali mesmo sera
montado um filatorio dos que o governo vae montar official-
mente. N'esse filatorio terao trabalho algumas mulheres, o
que vem a ser ainda uma grande vantagem, visto as fabricas
de sardinha em que andam a trabalhar, soffrerem ja muitas
crises de falta de peixe e as operarias sentirem a falta de
trabalho, que e" a mais dolorosa das faltas. T6dos aquelles
que desejarem experimentar esta industria, deverao dirigir-se
a presidente da Liga Republicana das Mulheres PortuguSsas,
a acima rnencionada escriptora e propagandista D. Anna de
Castro Osorio; porque a iniciativa pertence a esta beneme'rita
associac^ao que por todo o pais esta levantando (or a levantar)
o espirito da mulher portuguesa e fazendo-a entrar no caminho
do dever, apontando-lhe o trabalho como a linica fonte da
independencia e do brio individual.
Do norte ao sul do pais muitas socias da Liga se estao
preparando (or a preparar) para iniciarem nas suas casas esta
industria. que e necessario e saber cada uma a por9ao de
sirgo que podo criar para se fazer a dictribui9ao das folhas
das amoreiras cedidas pela Camara e tomarem os criadores as
responsabilidades exigidas pelas esta9oes officiaes, sendo a
25*
388 Lesson 29.
principal a de se compromet(t)erem a destruir tcda a semente
que nao seja seleccionada, isto 6 : a escolhida e fornecida pela
esta9ao official. intelligente professor da Escola Liberal de
Setiibal de boa vontade se presta a fazer na escola uma cri-
a^ao de experiencia, cujo producto revertera a favor da mSsma,
que tanto necessita de numerario para se poder sustentar e
poder continuar a exercer a sua missao.
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
Construction. Colloca$ao.
153. The simplest construction is: beginning by
the subject and what relates thereto; then the predi-
cate and its extensions; the determinative follows the
word it determines (e.g.: desejoso de gloria)', the ac-
cusative complement generally precedes the dative.
Interrogative clauses begin with the interrogative
word i.e., the thing asked for and what pertains to .
it; the dependent clauses by the conjunction or a rela- |
tive pronoun e.g.:
Sao alias as drvores que ha no jar dim? (The height \
of the trees is asked for.)
154. These general rules have numerous ex-
ceptions, based on the harmony of the speech or the j
emphasis bestowed on one or the other part of it. In |
the preceding lessons these exceptions, as well as those j
rules of construction inseparable from the subject spoken
of, have been mentioned.
It may still be noticed that an absolutely employed !
participle precedes its noun. Ex.:
Arrancada uma batateira, o pe traz agarrados vdrias j
batatas.
If a potato-plant is pulled out, its root bears various j
potatoes clinging to it.
Yet when the participle is preceded by em, the I
subject may be placed before:
Em a mina rebentando or em rebentando a mina.
Remark. Though the gerund generally precedes the I
noun, it may in elevated speech also be placed behind; e.g.:
A revolu$ao abriu as portas da historia, ap(p)elando para \
o povo, fechou-as, para o povo ap(p)elando.
Construction. 389
65. Thema.
Preparation of Olive-oil.
Olive-oil is extracted from the olive, which is the fruit
of the olive-tree. In some regions the olive is beaten down
with a pole (= varejar); in others, it is picked by hand.
After having been picked, the olive goes to the olive-pit,
where it remains for some time. While it is still in the pit,
the olive secretes (= escorrer) a watery fluid (uma agua-
dilha), dark and bitter, called olive-water (alpixe). From the
pit the olive is taken to the olive -crushing mill, which is a
sort of round stone tank in which one, two or three vertical
wheels, equally of stone, are moving, generally dragged by
an ox.
In the crushing-mill the olive is crushed. The pulp as well
as the stone of the olive is completely ground ( desfaser),
forming a dark paste. On the surface of this paste, when still
in the mill, a great quantity of oil appears. This oil, con-
stituting the first virgin oil, may be taken off (= recolher-se).
Prom the mill, the paste is taken in wooden porringers
to the olive-press (Idr or lastro de lagar). In the press the
paste is put into baskets (= ceira), disposed one above the
other. Upon the topmost basket are placed some blocks
(= madeira) and then is lowered (= faeer baixar) upon the
latter the so-called cross-bar of the press (viga do lagar),
which descends by means of an axle-tree in a spiral line or
in form of a screw (= fuss). This screw of the olive-press
ends in its lower extremity by a big stone weight. In pro-
portion to its coming down, the cross-bar presses (periphra-
stical form) upon the blocks which cover the baskets and
squeezes the paste contained in them.
66. Leitura e yersao.
Assim espremida, a massa larga um liquido, Este liquido
6 ainda azeite virgem que, seguindo por uma calha ou sulco
aberto no lar, vae cair dentro de uma talha de pedra. Ao
lado d'esta talha ha outra tambem de pedra, e as duas sao
ligadas superiormente por um sulco ou r6go; mas o azeite
virgem fica todo na talha que esta em communicasao directa
com o lar. Em seguida, faz-se elevar a viga do lagar, e as
ceiras ficam d'este modo desapertadas. Desapertadas as
ceiras, a massa de cada uma e caldeada, isto e", intimamente
misturada com agua a ferver. Caldeadas todas as ceiras, de
novo tornam a ser espremidas como o foram da primeira vez.
Esprernidas, o liquido que ellas largam segue pela calha do
390 Lesson 29.
lar para a primeira talha, onde encontra o azeite virgem que
a massa escorreu quando foi apertada a primeira vez.
Com o azeite proveniente do segundo aperto das ceiras
vae misturada urna porsao de agua, que e a agua que caldeou
a massa; e como o azeite vem sempre a tona da agua r o li-
quido logo que cae na talha reparte-se em duas camadas : em
baixo a agua, a qual se chama alpixe ; e em cima ou a tona
do alpixe, o azeite. Entre o azeite e o alpixe ficam as borras
do azeite.
As borras sao as fezes do azeite, e vao-se formando na
primeira talha, entre o fundo do azeite e o cimo do alpixe.
A medida que o azeite se vae escoando para a segunda talha,
as borras vao subindo na primeira; e tomariam para a se-
gunda, se o lagareiro nao tivesse o cuidado de as fazer depo-
sitar, isto e", de as fazer baixar ao fundo da primeira talha.
Depois de bem assentes, as borras ainda apresentam a super-
ficie uma certa quantidade de azeite, embora impure. Este
azeite das borras e aproveitado: serve para a candeia; para
untar os eixos dos carros; e para varios fins industriaes: fa-
brico de sabao etc.
Depois de completamente espremidas as ceiras, o que fica
dentro 6 o bagaco. bagac.o 6" o residue da pelle e do ca-
ro<jo das azeitonas. bagac,o da azeitona serve para alimen-
tac,ao dos porcos e das gallinhas, e ainda de combustivel. No
proprio lagar, a agua para caldear a massa 6 tambem aque-
cida com lume de bagaco. Este arde muito bem por ser oleoso.
Para todas estas operaQoes do fabrico do azeite ha hoje mecha-
nismos muito perfeitos.
391
Supplement.
Idioms.
Sou ingles. V a E a e por-
tuguSs?
Sou, sim, senhor. Para um
estrangeiro V a E a folia ra-
zoavelmente o portugues.
Como se chama isso? Como
se diz . . . ?
Isso ndo se pdde; isso ndo
pdde ser!
Entdo que tern ? Nao estd lorn ?
Isso passa; nao 6 nada.
Nao passou bem a noite ? Olhe,
que nao tern boa car a.
Passei a noite em claro.
Ndo se dd bem aqui? Estra-
nha o clima?
Nao estranhOj ndo, senhor. Dou-
me bem aqui.
E gosta de cd estar?
Gosto muito. Estou morto por
ver toda a cidade, todo o pais.
Onde e a pardgem mais prdxi-
ma do carro electrico?
Qual e o caminho mais curto
para Id?
Ndo ha pardgem mais perto ?
Julgava que houvesse uma im-
mediata ao hotel.
I am English. Are you a
Portuguese ?
Yes. For a foreigner you speak
Portuguese rather well.
What is this called ? How do
you say . . . ?
That can't be (done)!
What's the matter with you?
Aren't you well?
It will pass over ; it's nothing.
Didn't you sleep well? You
do not look well, indeed.
I passed the night awake.
Don't you feel well here?
Does not the climate agree
with you?
It is not that. Indeed, the
climate agrees with me.
And do you like to stay here ?
I do indeed. I am dying to
see the whole town, the
whole country.
Where is the next stopping-
place of the electric car?
Which is the nearest way
to it?
Is there no stopping-place
nearer?
I thought there was one
next to the hotel.
392
Supplement.
Ate logo! ate breve! ate a se-
mana (que vem) ! ate d proxi-
ma sexta-feira!
Nao faltava nada que eu per-
desse o comb6io.
Deixe ver isso!
Jd estd de caminho.
Estou com pressa.
Jd deram ome horas.
Sao horas do correio.
combdio jd nao tar da; estd
a chegar.
Sa(h)iu-lhe bem a empreza ?
Com licenga! A vontade!
Nao faga cerimonia!
Eu tinha vergonha de Ihe fallar.
Nao tern troco?
Nao ha remedio.
Vamos embora!
Isso e conforme! Depende!
Estd bem? Que Ihe parece?
Em que ftcdmos?
Segundo o meu parecer . . .
Ha alguem que procura o
senhor.
Quern me procura?
Diga que nao estou.
Espere ahi! Mande entrar
para a sola.
Nao fallemos mais n'isso!
Jd folia menos mal.
Estou constipado. \
Apanhei uma constipagao. J
Logo que eu me
campo . . .
Em que Ihe posso eu ser agra-
ddvel ?
Faga favor de se servir do meu
limitado prestimo.
Tttdo quando puder fazer, serd
com todo o
Good-bye for the present!
Until very soon! Until next
week! Until next Friday!
I was very near losing the
train.
Let me see that.
He is already on the way.
I am in a hurry.
It has already struck eleven.
It is post-time.
The train must be here di-
rectly.
Did you succeed in your en-
terprise ?
With your leave ! Be pleased !
Don't make any ceremony!
I was shy to speak to him.
Have you any change ?
There is nothing to be done.
Let us go away!
That's all according! That
depends !
Is it well so? What do you
think of it?
Where did we stop? What
did we agree upon?
According to my opinion . . .
There is somebody calling on
you.
Who is calling?
Tell him that I am not at
home.
Just wait! Show him into
the drawing-room!
Don't let us speak any more
of that!
You speak already rather well.
I have caught a cold.
r no As soon as I am in the coun-
try.
In what may I be agreeable to
you?
Please dispose of my modest
services.
All I can do will be done with
the greatest pleasure.
Some Portuguese Proverbs.
398
Some Portuguese Proverbs equivalent to
English.
Antes so que mal acompanhado.
Com taes me acho; tal me fago.
Chega-te aos bons, serds um
delles: chega-te aos maus,
serds peor do que elles.
Duro com duro, nao faz bom
muro.
Da Deus o frio conforme a
roupa.
Quern primeiro anda, primeiro
apanha.
Hora a hora, Deus melhora.\
Atrds de tempo, tempo vem. f
Quern porfia mata ca$a.
A cavallo dado nao se Ihe olha
o dente.
olho do amo engorda o ca-
vallo.
Faze-me as barbas, far-te-hei
o cabelo.
Como canta o db(b)ade, assim
responde o sachristao.
De noite a candeia a burr a
parece donzella.
Casa roubada trancas d
porta.
Tantas vezes vae o cao ao moi-
nho, que Id Ihe fica o fou-
cinho.
Malhar no ferro emquanto
estd quenle.
Quando ha vento, molha-se a
vela.
Emquanto o pdu vae e vem,
folgam as costas.
Contenta-te, goto, que farta o
farto.
Filho de peixe sabe nadar.
Better alone than in bad
company.
Birds of a feather no\f to-
gether.
Tell me whom you associate
with and I will tell you
who you are.
Hard with hard never made
any good wall.
Aptness comes with the office.
First come, first served.
After rain comes sunshine.
Patience overcomes all things.
Look not a gift horse in the
mouth.
The master's eye makes the
horse fat (or: the cattle
thrive).
One good turn deserves an-
other.
The young pigs grunt like the
old sow.
When candles are out, all cats
are grey.
To lock the stable-door when
the horse is stolen.
The pitcher goes so often to
the well that it comes home
broken at last.
To strike the iron while it is
hot.
To make hay while the sun
shines.
When the cat is away, the
mice will play.
Great wealth, great weariness.
What is bred in the bone will
come out in the flesh.
394
Supplement.
Pintura e peleja de longe se
Filho eSj pae ser&s, assim como
fizeres, assim achards.
Nao ha dgua mais perigosa
que a que nao soa.
Santos de casa nao fazem mi-
lagres.
Praia 6 o bom f attar; oiro e
o bom calar.
seguro morreu de velho.
Mais vale um <Ltoma que dois
4-te darei*.
Quern nao vae d guerra, nao
morre n'ella.
Nem todo o matto e ouregaos.\
Nem tudo o que luz e oiro. >
Nem todo o branco e farinha]
Nem zombandOj nem deveras,
com teu amo jogues as per as.
Picture and battle to be seen
from afar.
Do unto others as you would
be done by.
Still waters run deep.
A prophet is not without ho-
nour, save in his own coun-
try and in his own house.
Speech is silvern, silence is
golden.
Prevention is better then cure.
A bird in the hand is worth
two in the bush.
Who plays at bowls must be
prepared for rubbers.
All is not gold that glitters.
Those who eat cherries with
great persons will have
their eyes squirted out with
the stones.
Short Notes,
l.
Aos Ex mos Srs. Conselheiro A. de Lima e Ex ma Esposa,
D. Maria Jose Moreira da Silva
e o Coronel Nogueira da Silva e Mattos
apresentam os seus cumprimentos, pedindo a honra da sua
companhia para um copo de dgua que, na occasiao do casa-
mento de sua filha D. Beatriz com o ex mo Sr. capitao Antonio
de Lemos e depois da ceremonia, se offerece na 4 a feira, 15 do
corrente, as 2 hs. da tarde na rua dos Bem-casados No. 3.
Lisboa, casa de V as Ex* 8 , 8 de maio.
2. Resposta
(on a visiting-card).
A Ex ma Sr 11 D a Maria Jose" Moreira da Silva e Ill mo e
Ex mo Sr. Coronel N. da Silva e Mattos, agradecendo em seu
nome e no de seu marido a insigne honra do convite de
Short Notes.
395
D. Eugenia de Lima
apressa-se em partipar-lhes que Ihes dara a maior satisfacao
poder assistir ao auspicioso enlace da sua Ex ma Filha.
3. Outra resposta.
Cumprimentando o Ex mo Sr. Coronel Nogueira da Silva e
Sua Ex ma Esposa, os Condes de Valfl6r teem o inaxirno pesar
de nao poderem assistir a tao fausta festividade, visto estarem
de luto recente por uma parenta sua muito chegada. Fa-
zendo os mais sinceros votos pela felicidade dos Noivos e pe-
dindo a V as Ex as acceitem dfisde ja os seus cordiaes parabens,
pedem desculpa da sua nao-comparfincia.
4.
Meu illustre Amigo:
Por este peco lienca para Ihe apresentar o men particular
amigo, Dr. Fulano, eximio escriptor e deputado da na9ao, cujo
npme nao sera de todo desconhecido de V a Ex a . Nao precise
dizer que as atter^oes que a sua generosidade dispensar ao Dr. F.
tornar-me-hao ainda mais sen devedor. Nunca poderei pagar
nem mSsmo agradecer bastante, tantos e tao immerecidos fa-
vores, dos quaes ainda assim me sinto digno pela muito dedi-
cacao que Ihe consagro e na convic9ao que o melhor premio da
amizade e: acceitar-lhe as provas com a msma naturalidade
como sao dadas.
5.
Meu bom Amigo,
Caso o men Amigo disponha de algum momento vago
amanha entre uma e as quatro horas, peco o insigne favor de vir
falar-me a esta sua casa. Trata-se d'um assumpto urgente e que
merecera todo o seu interesse.
Ex mo Senhor e Amigo:
6.
Desconsolado de so h6je receber o seu bilhete d'ante-
hontem, por ter estado ausente, por este peco desculpa de nao
ter apparecido ahi, e Iicen9a de poder falar-lhe hoje a qualquer
hora que V* Ex* se digne determinar e que mais Ihe convier.
396
Supplement.
Poetry to be learnt by heart.
Popular Stanzas of Four Terses.
Amar e ser amado, que ventura!
Nao amar, sendo amado, e um triste horror:
Mas na vida ha uma noite mais escura,
E amar alguem qae nao nos tenha amor!
s Crespo.)
Ja nao tenho cora^ao,
Que m'o tiraram do pel to;
No logar onde elle estava
Nasceu um amor-perfeito.
Tu dizes que nao tens cruz
Para resar o rosario;
Casa-te, minha menina,
E teras cruz e calvario.
dia tern duas horas,
Duas horas, nao tern mais:
Uma 6 quando vos vejo,
Outra, quando me lembraes.
Os teus olhos sao escuros
Como a noite mais cerrada;
Mas apesar de tao nggros,
Sem elles nao vejo nada.
A folhinda do salgueiro
E a primeira novidade;
Quern madruga nao alcanna,
Que fara quern se ergue tarde?
Ninguem descubra o seu peito
A nenhuma amiga sua;
Quern o seu peito descobre
Seu segredo deita a rua.
Quern e pobre, sempre e pobre
Quern pobre nada tern;
Quern e rico, sempre 6" nobre,
E as ve"zes nao e ninguem.
Aqui tens meu cora9ao,
Fechadinho com tres chaves;
Abre-o, mette-te Id dentro
Que tu sosinha bem cabes.
Eu nao quero nem brincando
Dizer adeus a ninguem:
Quern vae, leva saudades,
Quern fica, saudades tern.
Amorsinho da minh'alma,
Ensina-me a tua arte:
Ensina-me a aborrecer-te,
Que eu nao sei senao amar-te.
Se os meus olhos te incommo-
dam r
Quando os ve"s na tua frente,
Manda entao que m'os arran-
quem,
Para eu te amar cegamente.
Ando triste como a noite,
Nada me alegra o sentido ;
Ninguem sabe o bem que perde;
Senao depois de perdido.
Ai quern me dera ter mae,
Inda que fosse uma silva!
Inda que ella me arranhasse,
Sempre eu era a sua filha.
Ja morreu a minha mae,
Ja la vae minha alegria;
Caixinha dos meus segredos,
Espelho donde me eu via.
Vae-te, carta venturosa,
Ver um bem que Deus me deu;
Antes tu, carta, ficaras,
No teu logar fora eu.
Carta, vae onde te eu mando,
Que uns lindos olhos vaes ver;
Carta, poe-te de joelhos,
Quando te forem a ler.
Poems of Modern Literature.
397
Aqui estou a tua porta,
Como o feixinho da lenha,
A espera da resposta
Que dos teus olhos me venha.
amor e o respeito
Nao fazem boa uniao;
Quando amor diz que sim,
Diz o respeito que nao.
Poems of Modern Literature.
corvo e a raposa.
E fama que estava o corvo
Sobre uma arvore pousado
E que no sofrego bico
Tinha um queijo atravessado.
Pelo faro aquelle sitio
Veiu a raposa matreira,
A qual, pouco mais ou mnos,
Lhe falou d'esta maneira:
Bons dias, men lindo corvo,
Es gloria d'esta espessura:
Es outra phSnix se acaso
Tens a voz como a figura.
A taes palavras o corvo
Com louca, estranha afoutSza
Por mostrar que e bom solfista,
Abre o bico e solta a prsa.
Lan9a-lhe a mestra o gadanho
E diz: Meu amigo, aprende
Como vive o lisongeiro
A custa de quern o attende.
Esta liQao vale um queijo,
Tern d'estas para teu uso.
Rosna entao comsigo o corvo
Envergonhado e confuso:
Velhaca! Deixou-me em branco,
Fui tolo em fiar-me n'ella.
Mas este logro me Hvra
De cahir n'outra esparrela.
(Bocage.)
Sol e o Vento.
Vento desafiou
Sol, um certo dia,
Para vrem dos dois
Qual mais poder teria.
E logo, n'um momento,
Sem mesmo ao repto esp'rar
pela resposta,
maluco do Vento
Com a sua maneira descom-
posta
Deitou-se a vr se despojava
Da capa que trazia
Um homem que passava.
Soprando rijo e agreste,
Na fiiria d'um sudoeste,
Tudo revolve e agita n'um es-
carceu . . .
Logo a primeira rabanada
Vai-se ao homem, e leva-lhe
o chapeu.
E riu, e riu de gosto, a gar-
galhada,
Zombando do homenzi-
nho
Que seguiu sereno e descuidado
seu caminho.
Supplement.
Este, pore"m, assim ja avisado,
Acautelou-se:
Puxou aroupa a si, abotoou-se. .
Mesmo que pondo tudo em
corrupio,
Vento iroso, por all abaixo
Estava frio,
Um frio no diacho!
Como 6 de calcular,
- Nao de espantar
Contrariado o Vento exasperou-
se,
E n'uma furia tal
Que ja nao e*ra Vento, antes
dir-se hia
Um vendaval!
As rabanadas,
Aos empuxoes,
As sapatadas,
Sudoesteteimavaretumbante
Tirar a viva for9a a grossa capa
Ao triste viandante.
Mas quanto mais soprava
E esbravejava
Sudoeste insoffrido,
Mais o homem na capa se em-
brulhava,
E, e claro, ate mais esta se
collava
Ao corpo do transeunte assim
batido.
Sol, do alto, que esta
scena via,
Ria de puro goso, ria,
ria .
Nao porque a aposta, emfim,
o interessasse
(Era bem mais que certo),
Mas uma liQaosinha dar quizesse
Ao Vento furio e esperto.
Por sua vez se foi ao nomen-
zinho
Da capa, e gravemente,
E sem maus tratos
Nem espalhafatos,
Quasi amigavel, delicadamente,
Devagarinho . . .
Dobrando a sua fora apenas
de calor,
Mas pouco a pouco, lento e
lentamente . . .
homem d'ali a pouco se despia,
Quasi insensivelmente
Da capa que trazia,
Da sua capa rica,
Por tal modo suava,
Em bica!
E concluiu, falando sentencioso
Para o Vento raivoso:
Se mais forca e poder que tu
eu tenho,
Nao sei . . .
Tu o diras!
Por mim, direi
Que faz
Muito mais do que a colera, a
paciencia,
Que mais vale a brandura que
a violencia.
(Paulino de Oliveira.)
A cigarra e a formiga.
Como a cigarra o seu gosto
E levar a temporada
De junho, julho e agosto
N'uma cantiga pegada,
De inverno tambem se come
E entao rapa frio e fome . . .
Um inverno a infeliz
Chega-se a formiga e diz:
Venho pedir-lhe o favor
De me emprestar mantimento,
Matar-me a necessidade!
Poems of Modern Literature.
E, em chegando a novidade 1 , En . . . cantar ao
Faco ate um juramento, Ah! cantar? Pois, minha
Pago-lhe, seja o que for! amiga,
Quern leva o estio a cantar,
Mas, pergunta-lheaformiga, Leva o inverno a dancar.
que fez durante o estio? (Joao de Deus.)
Rosas.
Trazeis-me rosas; d'onde as heis trazido,
Boa velhinda e minha boa amiga?
Eosas no inverno! permitti que o diga,
Sois feiticeira: d'onde as heis colhido?
Na primavera de meus annos, olho,
Mas vejo abrolhos e nao vejo flores:
E vos colheil-as, como as eu nao colho . . .
Sois feiticeira enfeiti9aes d'amores.
Enfeiticaes que a formosura, crde,
Nao vem da face avelludada e bel]a;
A formosura vem so d'alma; 6 d'ella
Que brota a fonte que nos mata a sde.
Vos sois velhinha, ja nao tendes cores
Que o rosto animem e que os olhos prendam,
Mas tendes prendas que o amor accendam,
Tendes ainda no inverno . . . flores. (Joao de Deus.)
Cangao das ires gotas de dgua.
Trgs irmas, tres gotas de agua e um passarinho bebeu-a;
que o infinito condensa, mas a terceira, tombando
sua mae, nuvem do ce*u, no mar, dizia chorando:
la d'aquella altura immensa <<Nestag ondag a ntes
desprendeu : desapareco mesquinha .. .
vem uma e cae sobre a nor
que d mingua de agua morria, Responde a onda marinha :
e mal a gota sentia, Ja sou maior que era de
voltava-lhe o vi90 e a cor; antes.
caiu outra ao pe" d'um ninho, (Affonso Lopes- Vieira.)
Mae.
Ella velava perto No ber90 fluctuante
Do filho que dormia, Moveu-se agora o infante
E Candida sorria E acorda pranteando . . .
Ao lyrio entreaberto. Nao ha quadro mais bello
Da lua um raio incerto Que a mae, solto o cabello,
No quarto se perdia; filho acalentando!
E a mae olhaya o Dia (Gon 5 alves Crespo.)
E a Luz do seu deserto. ^_ v J
x The first fruits of the year. 7~
400 Supplement.
Consulta.
Chamei em volta do meu frio leito
As memorias melhores de outra idade,
Formas vagas, que as noites, com piedade,
Se inclinam, a espreitar, sobre o meu peito.
E disse-lhes: No mundo immenso e estreito
Valia a pena, acaso, em anciedade
Ter nascido? dizei-m'o com verdade,
Pobres memorias que eu ao seio estreito . . .
Mas ellas perturbaram-se coitadas!
E empalidecerem, contristadas,
Ainda a mais feliz, a mais serena . . .
E cada uma d'ellas, lentamente,
Com um sorriso intimo, pungente,
Me respondeu: -^ Nao, nao valia a pena.
(Anthero de Quental.)
Ao caliir da folha.
Quando cahir a folha e tu te fores
A ter com minba mae que ja morreu,
Se nao Ihe posso dar mais que flores,
Leva Ihe beijos, abrac.cs, Que sei eu!
Diz-lhe que eu ainda sou como era d'antes
Assim sem esperai^as, sempre sem amores.
- Meus pobres olhos, sempre agonisantes,
Vao se mirrando mais so pisam dores.
Dize que os meus versos sao atormentados
Como so sabem rimar os des grades,
Diz-lhe que em breve . . . Nao, mas deixa la,
Podia a santa affligir-se. E agora,
Sempre sao maes quando te fores embora,
Nunca Ihe contes o que vae por ca.
(Albino Forjaz de Sampayo.)
calendar io.
E n'um instante a vida! . . . Dia a dia,
Desfolho o calendario com saudade.
A gCtta e gotta cae na eternidade
Esta porQao de vida fugidia.
Poems of Modern Literature. 401
Assim caminha em breve romaria
prazo em que gastei a mocidade
E so me traz mais pena cada dia,
Mais pranto, mais angiistia e mais edade! . . .
A manso e manso o tronco se desfolha
Do tempo que resume esta negrura
Onde se fazem brancos os cabellos . . .
E os dias vao cahlndo, folha a folha,
E embora todos feitos de amargura
Oh, quern pudesse ainda revivel-os!
(Conde do Casal Ribeiro.)
JBocage.
No sen corpo tao fragil quanta vida,
Cheia de luz, cheia de forpa ingente!
Luz que cegava e que inda ce"ga a gente . . .
Forc^a que a todos leva de vencida . . .
Foi-lhe a curta existencia uma comprida
Vida de lucta, e embora o Amor florente
E a Gloria Ihe sorrisse ternamente,
Foi-lhe penosa estrada dolorida . . .
Sen genio impetuoso de inspirado,
Que o fez tao grande e tao infliz o fez,
Minou-lhe o de*bil corpo arrebatado.
Ramo florindo em flammas muita vez,
Ramo que pela Morte desfolhado
Todo em perfume, em alma, se desfez.
(Paulino de Oliveira.)
Preguiga.
A pregui<ja, inda de peito, PreguiQa foi confessar-se:
Muito custou a criar! Fez exame de conscien-
Quasi que morreu de fome, cia?
Com preguiQa de mamar. Nao fiz, meu padre! mas
Pregui^a, ja crescidinha, A ^ '^
Quando por sen p^ andava Amanha . . . Tenha pacien-
Nao era andar! mais par'cia ciau>>
Que toda se espreguicava .
Pregu^a aprendeu costura,
Pregui^a foi a liQao: Mas, sempre que costurava,
Ler, escrever e contar? So para nao por dedal,
Deixava a memoria em casa, Sempre os seus dedos pi-
Com pregui9a de a levar! cava.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 26
402
Supplement.
A mae ralhou a Pregui9a,
Porque se nao penteara;
Torna-lhe ella : Ha quantos
dias
E que a mae nao lava a cara?
Pregui<ja, morta de somno,
Quasi de somno morria;
So por nao fechar os olhos,
Quantas noites nao dormia!
A Pregui9a abria a bocca,
Coisa em que ell a era mais certa :
Mas depois p'ra a nao fe-
char
Ficou sempre bocca- aberta.
Pregui9a e o Desmazelo
Juntarem-se em casamento:
Levando os dois, em bom dote,
Uma mao-cheia de vento.
A Preguisa teve dois filhos:
Oh que santa gera^ao!
A mais velha, Dona Fome;
mais novo, Dom Ladrao.
Quando a Pregui9a morrer,
Ate* o monte maninho,
Ate" fraguedos da serra
Darao rosas, pao, e vinho.
(Antonio Corre"a d'Oliveira.)
Ingratidao.
Era uma vez um moleiro
Que estava no seu moinho . . .
Come9ando seu caminho,
Vinha na serra Janeiro
Com longo acompanhamento
De sombras, de neve e vento,
Para honrar (se bem me lembro)
Desepedidas, bota-fora
Do velho e pobre Dezembro.
Inda estavam, a tal hora!
Ao borralho da lareira,
Moleiro e mais a moleira,
Depois de bem consoados,
Bem fartos e regalados . . .
Que minguas, la no casal,
Fome ou se"de, nao havia:
Pois, segundo se dizia,
moleiro, como tal,
Mettia a mao na maquia . . .
Mas, n'isto, ouviram
truz! truz!
Bater a porta . . .
- Jesus!
Quern sera? . . . Quern e?! -
Eesponde,
Fora, uma voz arrastada:
Alguem que pede pousada,
E uns restos de lume aonde
uecer ...
Torna, soberbo, o moleiro:
- Andar! andar, caminheirof
Esmola? . . . Nao pode ser!
Diz a voz:
Nao me conheces,
De certo! Se conhecesses . . .
Sou o Anno Velho: Eu sou
Quern para ti foi tao bom
Que tudo o que te fartou
Por minha gra9a e meu dom
lograste, dia a dia:
Alvo pao que tu comeste;
Doce vinho que bebeste;
azeite que te alumia;
Sol que seccou tua lenha . . .
Pois ha ingrato no mundo
Que negue pao d'um segundo
A quern um anno o mante-
nha?!
Volta o moleiro:
paspalho l
Do velho! Pois nao se atreve? . .
Faz' la a cama na neve,
Que ha de ser bom agasalho!
De que me serves, agora
Que ja vaes de pe"s a cova?
Anno Novo, sim! E nova.
Amizade ; nova vinha:
Poems of Modern Literature. 403
E taleiga venerada Poe-se a chover! a cbover!
De respeito e valimento, Gomeqa, o rio a crescer;
Poisme dara dafarinha. . . A crescer de tal feitio,
Que logo ao moinha, o rio
Ora, foi neste moinento Levou o rodisio e a mo!
Que o Anno Novo chegou; E nao ficou aqui so
Vae, ouviu tudo, e pensou: castigo:
01ha o coracao ruim! Desde entao,
Alma damnada! mofino! Tanto Ihe correu avesso
De aqui a um anno p'lo visto, Anno de tao mau comco :
Fazia-me o mesmo a mim . . . Que no moinho (de nome
Espera! que eu ja te ensino: Moinho da Ingratidao)
Has de pagal-as! - moleiro soberbao
E nisto, Acabou, morrendo a fome . . .
(Antonio Corrga d'Oliveira : Parabolas.)
A Ldgrima.
Manha de junho ardente. Uma encosta escalvada,
Seca, deserta e nua, a beira d'uma estrada.
Terra ingrata, onde a urza a custo desabrocha,
Bebendo o sol, comendo o po, mordendo a roeha.
Sobre unaa folha hostil d'uma figueira brava
Mendiga que se nutre a predegulho e lava,
A aurora desprendeu, compassiva e divina,
Uma lagrima ethe'rea, enorme e cristalina.
Lagrima tao ideal, tao limpida que, ao vel-a,
De perto era um diamante e de longe uma estrella.
Passa um rei com o seu cortejo de espavento,
Elmos, Ian9as, clarins, trinta pendoes ao vento.
No meu diadema, disse o rei, quedando o olhar,
Ha safiras sem conta e brilhantes sem par.
Ha rubins orientaes, sangrentos e doirados,
Oomo beijos d'amor a arder, cristalisados.
Ha perolas que sao gotas de magua immensa,
Que a lua chora e verte e o mar gela e condensa.
Pois brilhantes, rubins e perolas de Ophir,
Tudo isso eu dou, e vem, 6 lagrima, fulgir
N'esta c'roa orgulhosa, olimpica, suprema,
Vendo o globo a meus pe"s do alto do teu diadema.
404 Supplement.
E a lagrima celeste, inge"nua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Comrade de ferro, epico e deslurnbrante,
Passa no seu ginete um cavalleiro andante.
E o cavalleiro diz a lagrima irisada:
Vein brilhar, por Jesus, na cruz da minha espada!
Far-te-hei relampejar, de victoria em victoria,
Na terra Santa, a Inz da Fe", ao sol da Gloria!
E a volta ha-de guardar-te a minha noiva, 6 astro,
Em seu collo auroreal de rosa e de alabastro.
E assim alumiaras com teu vivo esplendor
Mil combates de heroes e mil sonhos d'amor.
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Montado n'uma mula escura, de caminho,
Passa um velho judeu, avarento e mesquinho.
Mulas de carga atras levam-lhe o thesoiro,
Grandes areas de cedro abarrotadas d'oiro.
E o velhinho andrajoso e magro como um junco,
craneo calvo, o olhar febril, o bico adunco.
Vendo a estrella, exclamou: 0h Deus, que maravilha!
Como ella resplandece e tremeluz e brilha!
Com rneu oiro em montao podiam-se comprar
Os imperios dos reis e os navios do mar.
E por esse diamante esplSndido trocara
Todo o meu oiro immense a minha mao avara.
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Debaixo da figueira entao um cardo agreste,
Ja ressequido, disse a lagrima celeste:
A terra, onde o lilaz e a balsanaina medra,
Para mim teve sempre um cora9ao de pedra,
Se a queixar-me, ergo ao ceo os bra90S por aeaso,
O c6o manda-me em paga o fogo em que me abraso.
Poems of Modern Literature. 405
Nunca junto de rnim ? uleerado de espinhos,
Ouvi trinar, gorgeiar a miisica dos ninhos.
Nunca junto de mim ranches de namoradas
Debandaram, cantando, em noites estrelladas . . .
Voa a ave no azul e passa longe o amor,
Porque ai! nunca del sombra e nunca tive flor! . . .
6 lagrima de Deus, 6 astro, 6 gota d'agua,
Cae na desola9ao d'esta infinita magoa!
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Tremeu, tremeu, tremeu . . . e cahiu silenciosa.
E algum tempo depois o triste cardo exangue,
Reverdecendo, dava uma flor cor de sangue,
D'um roxo macerado e dorido e desfeito,
Como as chagas que tem Nosso Senhor no peito . . .
E ao calix virginal da pobre flor vermelha
la buscar, zumbindo, o mel doirado, a abelha! . . .
(Guerra Junqueiro.)
406
English -Portuguese Vocabulary.
(The gender is indicated by f. (feminine) and m. (masculine). The
principal word is substituted by (a dash), when repeated.)
A alley avenida f., alea f.
allow permitir, dar licenga para,
consentir em
almost quasi
already jd
also tambem
always sempre
ambitious ambicioso
amiable amdvel, bondoso
among (par) entre
amuse divertir
ancestors antepassados m. pi.
anger zanga, despeito, colera,
ira
angry zangado; to be or get
zawgar-se
answer resposta f; v. res-
ponder
any algum; (neg.) nerihum
anybody alguem ; (neg.) ninguem
any more mais algum; (neg.)
nao . . mais
above em citna de, por cima de
about ao redor de, cerca de
able capaz, hdbil
absolve absolver
abstain abster-se
abundance abunddncia f.
abuse abusar, insultar
accept aceitar
accompany acompanhar
accustom acostumar
account conta f., lista f.
acquaintance conheeimento m,
acquire adquirir
act obrar, operar; s ac$ao f.,
acto m.
action a(c)gao f.
add acrescentar, adicionar
address dirigir(-se a); endere-
gar
admirable admirdvel
admiral almirante m.
admit admitir
advance adiantar, promover
advantage vantdgem f.
advice conselho m., aviso m.
affair negocio m., assunto m.
affect impressionar, afectar
afraid, to be , ter medo
after depots, conforme
afternoon tarde f.
again de now, mais uma vez
against contre
age idade f.', old velhice
agree convir
agreeable agraddvel
alike semelhante, igual
all tudo pr., todo adj.; that
tudo quanta
appear aparecar
apple maga f.
apply to aplicar, empregar em
approach aproximar
April abril (in dates A ) m.
archer besteiro m.
arm bra$o m.
army exercito m.
arrive chegar
arrow frecha f.
art arte f.
artist artista m. & f.
as co mo; . . assim que
ashamed envergonhado
ashes cinzas f. pi.
ask preguntar, pedir
assiduity assiduidade f.
assist assistir, socorrer
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
407
assistance assistencia f.
associate with frequentar, as-
sociar-se com
astonishing surpreendente
at a, em; at home em casa; at
first no principio: at once
duma vez; at last por fim;
at all de tddo
attack agredir
attain dlcangar, conseguir
attentive atento, atencioso
attract atirar
August agosto (in dates A ) m.
aunt tia f.
author autor m.
avarice avareza f.
avaricious avaro, avarento
avoid evitar
avow confessar
await aguardar, esperar.
B.
bad man, md\ ly mal
ball bala f\, baile m.
bare nu, despido-, ly apenas
bark v., ladrar; s. casca /"., cor-
tiqa f.
barley cevada f.
battle batalha /'.
beard barba f.
beat hater
beautiful formoso, Undo
because porque
become ficar, tornar-se
-bed cama f., leito m.
bee abelha f.
beer cerveja f.
before antes, ante, deante
beg pedir (esmola), mendigar
begin principiar, comegar
behind atrds (de)trds
believe era*, acreditar
belong to pertencer a, ser de
better melhor
between entre
beyond alem de
big grande, grosso
bird ave /., pdssaro m.
bite morder
bitter amargo, acre
black preto, negro
blame cemurar, repreender
blessing ben^ao f.
blood sangue m.
blush corar
boarding-house casa f. de lios-
pedes
body corpo w. ; every cada
urn, todos; no ninguem
boil ferver
bonnet cliapeu m.
book livro m.
boot bota f.
born nascido; to be nascer
bottle garrafa f.
box caixa f.
boy rapaz m. } menino m.
brave valente, corojoso
bread pdo m.
break romper, partir, quebrar
breakfast almoqo m.
bring trazer, levar
brother irmfto m.
build const ruir
burn arder, queimar
business negocio m.
but mas, por em
butter manteiga f.
buy comprar
by por; heart de cor; the
way ( the ) de passdgem ;
and logo, ao depois;
hard muito perto.
C.
cab trem de praga m.
cabbage couve f.
calf vitela f.
call chamar ; to mind lembrar ;
- at ir ter com
camel camelo m.
camp campo m.
candle vela f.
cane bengala f.
cap barrete
carnival carneval m., entrudom.
care cuidado m.
carpenter carpinteiro m.
carriage carruagem f.
carry carregar, levar
cast (away) deitar (fora)
castle castelo m.
408
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
cat gato m.
cattle gado bovino m.
cease cessar, acabar
censure censurar
celebrated celebre
certainly certamente, com certeza
chair cadeira f.
chamber quarto, sala
chase caga f.
chastise castigar
cheese queijo m.
cherry cereja f.
child crianya f.
china louqa f.
choose escolher
chorus coro m.
church igreja f.
city cidade f.
clamour clamor m., brado m.
class classe f., aula f.
clean limpo
clear claro, limpido
cloak capa f., capote m.
cloth patio m.', clothes vestudrio
m., roupa f.
clothe vestir
cloud nuvem f.
coach carrudgem f., trem m.,
carro m.
coast costa f.
coat casaco m.
coffee cafe m.
cold frio (m.), constipagao
colour cor f.
come vir ; in entrar ; outsair
comfort conforto m., comodidade
f.', v. confortar, consolar
command ordem f. (co}mando
m.', u. (co)mandar, ordenar
commence comego m.
commerce comer do in.
complain queixar-se
compel obrigar
compound composto
comrade camarada m., compa-
riheiro m.
conceal esconder
conceive conceber
condemn conde(m)nar
conduct conducta f., proceder m.;
v. conduzir
confess confessar
confidence confianr-a f., con-
fidencia f.
conquer conquistar
conqueror conquistador m.
conscience consciencia f.
consent consentir
consequence consequcncia /".
consider considerar
constrain constranger
construct construir
contain conter
contented contente
continue continuar
convince conven cer
cook cozinheiro; cozer
cool fresco (m.)
copy-book caderno m.
corn grao m.
correct corrector v. corrigir
cost custar
country pais m.
courage cordgem /., animo m.
course curso m., corrida f.
cousin primo m., prima f.
cover coberta /'., cobertor m.,
tampa f.
cow vaca f.
creator creador m.
creditor credor m.
crime crime m.
cry grito m., clamor m.
cultivate cultivar
cup chicara f., ta$a f.
currant groselha f.
custom costume m., hdbito m.
cut v. costar, talliar', s. corte
m., talhe m. y golpe m.
D.
damp (h)umido
danger perigo m.
dark escuro, sombrio
dart v. dardejar, s. dardo
daughter filha f.
dawn madrugada f., alva f.
day dia m.
dead morto; ly mortal(mente)
deaf surdo
dear querido, caro
death morte f.
debt divida f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
409
deceive enganar, lograr
December december (in dates
I)) m.
decision decisao f.
deer viado m. t gado m.
defect defeito m.
defend defender
delight in deleitar-se em
demolish demolir
dense denso
deny (de)negar, recusar
depart partir
departure partido
depend depender; upon des-
cansar em
describe descrever
description descrigao
deserve merecer
desire desejar
despise desprezar
destroy destruir
die morrer
difference diferenga
difficult dificil
difficulty dificuldade f.
diligent diligente
direct v. dirigir, enderegar; a.
directo, direito', ly jd, im-
mediatamente
direction direcgdo f., endereqo m.
disappear desaparecer
disciple discipulo m.
dissatisfy desagradar
dissipate dissipar, desbaratar
dissolve dissolver
distinguish distinguir
distress afligdo f.
divide dividir, partilhar
do fazer
dog cao m.
door porta f. ; way portal m.
doubt v. dumdar; s. diivida f.
dozen duzia f.
draw puxar, tirar-, (pictures)
desenhar; upon oneself
atirar-se
dream v, sorihar; s. sonho m.
dress v. vestir(-se) ; s. vestido m.,
fato in.
drink beber
drop v. gotejar, deixar cair; s.
goto, f.
drunk bebedo; to get embria-
gar-se
dry seco, enxuto
duchess ditquesa f.
duck pato m.
dumb mudo
during durante
dust po n., poeira f.
duty dever m., obrigagcio f.
dwell morar, residir
dye tingir.
E.
ear orelha f., ouvido m.
early cedo
earth terra f.
easily facilmente
easy fdcil
eat comer
edition edigcio f.
egg ovo m.
elect eleger
ell (measure) vara f.
elm (tree) olm(eir)o m.
elsewhere algures
embarrass v. embaragar', s. em-
bar ago m.
embellish embe(l)lecer
emperor imperador
empire imperio
employ impregar
end fim m., cabo in., con-
clusdo f.
enemy inimigo m.
engine (steam ) mdquina
enough bastante, assaz
enrich enriguecer
enter entrar (em)
entertain entreter, regalar
entertaining divertido
envy inveja
equal igual
equality igualdade f.
error erro m.
escape v. escapar, fuqir; s. es-
capada /"., fugida f.
esteem estima f., consideragao f.
evening tarde f., noite f.
event su(c}cesso m., acontecimento
m.
410
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
ever sempre
everybody cada MW, todos;
everything tudo; everywhere
em toda a parte
evil mal m.
example exemplo m.
execute executar, cumprir
exercise exercicio, prdtica
exhaust esgotar\ ed exhausto
exist existir
expect aguardar
extinct extinto
extinguish extinguir
extract v. extrair; s. extracto
extreme extremo
eye olho m.
F.
fable fdbula f.
face face f., car a f., rosto m.
fail faltar, falhar, errar
faint desfalecer
faithful fid, leal
fall cair
false falso
falsehood falsidade f.
family familia f.
fan leque m.
far longe
fat gordo
fate fado m., destino m.
father pai or pae w.: in-law
sogro m.
fault defeito m., falta f.
fear medo WL, receio m.
fearful recedso
feather pena f., pluma f.
February fevereiro (in dates F}
m.
feed comida f., alimento m,
feel sentir
feign fingir
fellow-traveller companheiro m.
de magem
ferocious feroz
fertilize fertilisar
few poucos
field campo
fight luta /"., combate in.
fill encher
find encontrar
fine bonito, fino
finish acdbar, terminar
fire s. fogo m.; v. desfechar
flag bandeira /".
flatter lisongear, adular
flatterer adulador m.
flee fugir
flock rebanho m.
florin florim m.
flour farinha f.
flourish florescer
flower flor f.
fly v. voar, fugir', s. mosca f.
fog nevoeiro m.
follow seguir
folly tolice f., pdndega f.
fool tolo m.
foolishness tolice f., asneira f.
foot pe m.
for (prep.} para-, (conj.) porque;
as enqiianto a
forbid prohibir ; God ! Dcus
ndo queira!
forehead testa f.
foreign estrangeiro
foresee prever
forest floresta f., bosque m.
forget esquecer, olvidar
forgive perdoar
fork garfo m.
formerly antes, outrora
forsake abandonar
fortify fortificar
fortnight, a quinze dias
fortune fortuna
forward(s) para diante, na
dianteira
found v. fundir
freeze gelar
French f ranees
frequently freqitentemente, a
miudo
fresh fresco
Friday sexta-feira f.
friend amigo, amiga; ly ami-
gdvel
friendship amizade f.
fruit fru(c)to m., frn(c)ta f.
fugitive fugitive
fulfil cumprir
full cheio,, plena
furniture mobilia f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
411
GL
gaiety alegria f.
gain v. ffanhar: s. ganho m.
game jogo, caga f.
gape bocejar, abrir a boca
garden jardim m.
gardener jardineiro m.
gate porta f., portal m., cance(l)la
f.
gather collier, apanhar
general a. geral; s. general m.
generous generoso
genius genio m., talento w.
gentleman cavallieiro m., senhor
m,
gentleness gentileza f., delicadeza
get procurar, ter; up levan-
tar-se
gift dddiva f., prenda f.
girl menina /"., rapariga f.
give dar
glad contente, alegre ; ]jgostosa-
mente
glass vidro m-, copo m.
glitter reluzir
glory gloria f.
glove luva f.
go tr; away ir-se (embora);
out sair; far from afastar-
se; for procurar; on
continuar
God Deits m.
gold ouro m.
good a. bom, boa; s. bem m.
goodness bondade f.
good-will boa vontade f.
govern governar, reger
gown vestido m.
grammar gram('m)dlica
grandfather avd m.
grandmother avo f.
grant conceder
grass herva f., reloa f.
graze pastar
great grande
green verde
grief desgosto m., mdgoa f.
grind moer
ground chao M., solo w.
grow cresccr; lean emma-
grecer; old envelhecer;
pale empalidecer ; red corar
tall crescer, estar crescido;
ihiuemmagrecer; worse
peorar better melhorar
- rich enriquecer
guilty culpado
H.
hail v. granizar ; aclamar, sait-
dar; s. graniza f. ! viva!
hair cabelo m., pelo m.
half s. metade f.; a. meio, meia
hand mao f.; v. passar
handsome bello
happen acontecer
happily felts mente
happiness felicidade f.
happy feliz
hard duro, dspero
hardly de todo, apenas', ever
quasi nunca
hare lebre f.
harvest colheita f.
haste pressa f.
hasten apressar-se, aviar-se
hat chapeu m.; to put on (take
off) one's hat pdr (tirar) o
chapeu
hate odiar
hatred 6dio m.
hay feno m.
head cabe^a
heal curar
health saude f.
healthy saudavel, sao
hear ouvir
heart coragao m. ; by de cor
heat ealor m.
heaven ceu m.
heavy pesado
helm leme m.
help ajudar, so(c)correr
henceforward d'aqiti para diante
here aqui
hide esconder, occultar
high alto, elevado
hill co(l)lina f.
hinder impedir
history liistoria f.
hit dar urn golpe em; acertar
412
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
hive colmeia f.
hold segurar
hole buraco m.
holiday ferias f. pi.
holy santo, sagrado
home casa ; go ir a or para
casa', at em casa
honest (h)onrado, (h)onesto
honour s. honra f.; v. lionrar
hope s. esperanea; v. esperar
horse cava(l)lo m.
hot quente; it is estd color
hour (li)ora f.
house casa f.
how como, que\ long (since
when)? desde quando?-,
much (many) quanto(s)?
however no entanto
human (h)umano
hunger fome f.
hungry esfomeado', to be ter
vontade (de comer)
hunter cacador m.
hunting caga f.
hurt ferir, prejudicar
husband marido m.
ice gelo m.
idea ideia f.
idle preguifoso
if se, caso que
ill a. doente; adv. mal
illness doen^a f.
image imdgem f.
imagine imaginar
imitate imitar
immediately i(m)mediatamente,
j
immortal i(m)mortal
importune importuno
impossible impossivel
improve progredir
in em; into para dentro de
inch po(l)legada f.
increase crescer, au(g)mentar
incredible incrivel
incur incorrer em
indeed na verdade; I e ver-
dade!
inhabit habitar
inhabitant habitant* m.
injure prejudicar
ink tinta f.; stand tinteirom*
inquire inquirir, indagar
inquisitive curioso
inscribe increver
insensible insensivel
instantly instantdneamente
instruct instruir
insult insulto m.
intend intender
interrupt interromper
introduce introduzir, apresentar
invade invadir
invent inventar
iron ferro m.
irreproachable irrepreensivel
island ilha f.
ivory marfim m.
J.
January Janeiro (in dates J )
jealous ciumento
jealousy ciume m.
jewel jdia f.
join juntar
joy alegria
judgment julgamento m.
jug cdntaro m., can$ca f.
July julho (in dates J ) m.
June junho (in dates J ) m.
just justo, exacto
just as no momenta em que
justice justiga f.
K.
keep ficar com, segurar, observe
kill matar
kindness bondade f.
king rei m.; kingdom reino m.
kitchen cozinha f.
knee joelho m.
knife faca f., navalha f.
know conhecer, saber
knowledge sciencia f., eo-
nhecimento(s) pi. m.
labour trabalho m., lavor m.
laborious trabalhoso
lady senhora /., dona f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
413
lamb anho w.
land s. terra f. ; v. desembarcar,
arribar
language lingua f., Ungudgem f.
large grande, largo
last v. durar, continuar; adj.
ultimo
late adj. defunto', adv. tarde
laugh rir
laughter riso m.
law lei f.
lawyer advogado
lazy preguisoso
lead s. chumbo m.
lead conduzir', into induzir
leaf folha f., folho m.
league legua f., liga f.
learn aprender, estudar
learned sdbio, erudito
least s. menos; at ao menos;
in the de todo
leave licenga f.', take of
despedir-se de
left a. esquerdo; s. esquerda f.
leg perna f.
lend emprestar
less menos
let deixar, arrendar; us go!
vam-os! him know! faga-lhe
saber !
letter carta /"., case carteira f.
liar mentiroso m.
liberty liber dade f.
lie estar (deitado); mentir
life vida f.
lift up levantar
like gostar de; a. semelhante;
adv. como
likely provdvel
lily lirio m.
limit limitar; s. fo'w#e m.
line linha f.
linen lirilio m.
lion Zmo m.
listen escutar, ouvir
little adj. pequeno; adv. jpcmco,
apenaSj mal
live viver, morar
loadstone, lodestone iwmw m.
locksmith serralheiro m.
long adj. longo, comprido; adv.
tempo
look at olhar; for procurar
looking-glass espelho m.
lose perder
loss perta f.
love s. amor; U amar
low baixOf vil
luxury luxo m.
M.
mad foZo, alienado
Madam mirifia serihora
magnificent magnlfico
maintain manter, suster
make fazer ; haste apressar-se
man homem m.
manners maneiras f. pi.
many muitos; so tantos-, as
as tantos como: too
demais
map ma(p)pa m.
March margo (in dates M )
mark out marcar, tragar
marriage casamento m.
marry casar
master s. mestre, patrao, amo in. ;
v. senhorear, conquistar
matter assumpto w., negocio m.,
cousa f.
May maio (in dates M ) m.
meadow prado w., devesa f.
meal refeigdo f., farinha f.
means meio m.
meat came f.
meddle (with) entremeter-se (em)
medicine remedio m., medicina f.
meet encontrar
melt fundir, derreter
member membro m.
memory memoria f.
mend emendar ; (a pen) aparar
merchant negociante , comerci-
ante m.
messenger mensageiro m.
metal metal m.
middle meio m.
mild amenOf suave
milk leite m.
miller moleiro m.
minute minuto m. y minuta f,
misfortune desgraga f.
mislead desencaminhar, induzir
em erro
414
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
Miss menina, senhora Dona
mist nevoeiro m.
mistake v. enganar-se: s. erro,
engano m.
mistrust desconfiar de
mock trogar de
modern moderno
modest modesto
modesty modestia f.
Monday segunda-feira f.
money dinheiro m.
month mes m.
moon lua f.
more mats
morning manha f.
mother mae f. ; -in-law sogra
motive motivo m.
mourning luto m.
mouse rato m., ratiriho m.
mouth boca f.
move mover (-sejjcomover, mexer
much muito', too demasiado',
how quanta?: as tanto;
as as tanto que
murder assassinar; assassinio m.
murderer assassino m.
music musica f.
mutton carneiro m.
nail unlia f., prego m.
naked nu, nua
name nome m.
namely nomeadamente; a. saber
napkin guarda-napo m.
nature natureza f.
naughty mint, mal-creado
near proximo, perto
nearly quasi, aproximadamente
necessary necessdrio, preciso', to
be precisar-se
necessity nccessidade f.
neglect v. descuidar; s. descuido
m.
neighbour visinho m.
neighbourhood visinhanga f.
neither . . nor nem . . netn
never nunca, jamais
new novOj fresco - yfey^ ,2.^
news noticia f.', paper jornal
m.
next proximo, seguinte
nice bonito^ gentil
niece sobrinha f.
night noite f.
no nenhum, ndo
nobility nobresa f.
noise barulho, ruido m.
noon meio-dia m.
nose nariz wi.
nothing (nao . .) nada
notwithstanding nem por isso
nourish alimentar. nutrir
November november (in dates
N-} m.
now agora
number numero m.
numerous numeroso.
0.
oak carvalho m.
oats aveia f.
obedient obediento
obey obeir
oblige obrigar, obsequiar
obliging obsequioso
observe observar, atender
obtain obter, alcangar
occupy o(c)cupar
October outubro (in dates )
m.
odious odioso
offend o(f)fender
offer s. o(f)ferta\ v. offerecer
often wuitas vexes
officer official
oil oleo m., azeite m.
old velho, idoso- : age velhice
f.; how are you'? quantos
annos tern?
omen augouro m.
omit ome(t)ter
on sobre, em cima de
once uma vez', on a time
outr'ora-, at de repente
only so, unico
open r. abrir; adj. aberto, franco
openness sinceridade f.
opponent adversdrio m.
opportunity o(p)portunidade
oppose o(p)por(-se)
opposite o(p)posto, em frente de
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
415
orange laranja f.
order s. ordem f.; v. mandar
other, an outra
otherwise alias, d'outra maneira
over sobre, por cima de', it's
all acabou-se
overtake a(t)tingir
owe dever
owl coruja f.
own proprio
owner proprietdrio m.
ox boi tn.
P.
pagan pagao in., paga f.
pain pena, dor, trabalho; on
of death sob pena de vida (or
de morte)
painful penoso, doloroso
paint pintar
painter pintor m.
painting pintura f.
palace paldcio m.; (king's )
pago m.
pale pdlido
paper papel m.
pardon v. perdoar; s. perddo m.
parents paes m. pi.-, parentesm.
pi
part parle f.; to take in
partilhar em
party partido m., partida f.
pass v. passar- s. passdgem f.,
passo MI., passaporte m.
passage passagem f., trajecto m.
patient s. doente m.; adj. paciente
pay v. pagar; s. paga f., paga-
mento m.
peace paz f.
peach pessego m.
pear pera f.
peasant lavrador, aldeao m.
pebble seixo m.
peculiar particular
pen penna f. ; -holder caneta f.
pencil lapis m.
penknife canivete m.
people povo m., gente f.
perceive perceber
perfectly perfeitamente
perform fazer, cumprir
perish perecer
permit permi(t)tir
persecute perseguir
person pessoa f.
persuade persuadir
philosophy filosofia f.
picture quadro m.
piece pega f., bocado m.
pierce furar, atravessar
pig porco m.
pill pilula f.
pin alfinete m.
pity piedade f.; it is a ^ uma
pena
place logar, assento; v. colo-
car
plain plant 'tie f.', adj. piano
plan projecto m., piano m.
plank prancha /'.
plant planta f.
plate prato m.
play 6'. jogo m., comedia f. ; v.
jogar, brincar
plaything brinquedo m.
please agradar a; if you please
se fas favor
pleasing agraddvel
pleasure prazer m.; to take
in comprazer- se
plum ameixa f.
pocket algibeira f., bolso m.- f
handcherchief len$o m. ;
book carteira f.
poet poeta m.
poison veneno m., envenenar
polite cortes
politeness cortesia f.
poor pobre
pope papa m.
poplar alamo m., choupo m.
populous povoado
portion parte f., porgao f.
position posifao f., situagao f.
post-office correio m.
pound arrdtel m.; libra f.
powerful poderoso
praise v. louvar, enaltecer: s*
louvor in.
pray resar, orar
prayer resa f., oragao f.
precious precioso
precision precisao f.
prefer preferir
416
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
prescribe prescrever
presence presenga f.
present adj. presenter s. jyre-
sente, regalo m.
preserve preservar, confeitar
pretence pretexto m.
pretend pretender, ftngir
pretty adj. bonito; adv. bem,
bastante
prevent impedir
prey preset f.
pride orgulho m.
principle principio m.
print imprimir
printing, act of imprensa f.
prison cadeia /., prisao f.
prodigious prodigioso
produce produzir
project projecto
promise s. iwomessa ; v. pro-
meter
proof prova f.
proper proprio, conveniente
property propriedade f.
proposal proposigao f.
propose propor
prove provar
province provincial f.
punctuality pontualidade f.
punish castigar
punishment castigo m.
pupil alumno, a; discipulo, a
purchase s. compra; v. com-
prar
purpose fim m., designio m.;
on de proposito
purse bolsa f.
pursue perseguir
put meter.
quarrel contenda, altercacao f.
queen rairiha f.
question s. pregunta f., questao
f. ; preguntar
quiet quieto, tranquillo
quite todo, inteiramente.
B.
railroad caminho m. de ferro
Tain chuva f.
rainy chuvoso
raise levantar, elevar
rally mote jar
rather antes, bastante
ray raio m.
reach atingir, chegar a.
read ler; to again tornar a
ler
ready pronto
reason razao f.
rebuild reconstruir
recall (re)lembrar
receive receber, acolher
recognise reconhecer
recollect lembrar-se
recompense recompense* f.
reconnoitre reconhecer
recover restabelecer
red vermelho
reduce reduzir
reed ca(n)na f.
reflect reftectir
refuge, to take refugiar-se
refuse recusar
regular regular
reign reinar
rejoice regosijar
relate contar, referir
relieve socorrer
rely fiar-se,- contar em
remain ficar
remedy remedio m.
remember lembrar-se; me to
him diga-lhe muitas lembrangas
minhas
rend rasgar
render devolver
renounce renunciar a
repair concertar, reparar
repeat repetir
repent arrepender-se
reply responder, replicar
report avisar, informar, referir',
s. relatdrio m.
repose descansar, repousar
reproach censurar, t
repulse repulsar
require reqwrir, exigir
resemble assemelhar, parecer-se
(com)
reside residir, morar
resolve resolver, decidir
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
417
rest descansar, ficar
restless desassocegado
restrain restringir
return voltar, tornar, restituir
reveal revelar
revenge vinganga f.
reward recompensa f.
ribbon fita f.
rice arros m.
rich rico
riches riqueza f., bens m. pi.
ridiculous ridiculo
right justo, direito ; hand
direita f.', you are tern
razao
ring annel i., argola /".; v.
(the bell) tocar
ripen madurecer
rise levantar-se
risk risco, perigo m.
river rio in.
road estrada, f.
rob roubar
robber ladrao m.
roof telhado m.
room espago m., aposento, quarto
m.
rose ro&a f.
rotten podre, putrido
round redondo
ruin ruina f.
rule regra f.
run correr; away fugir', to
acorrer; over percorrer;
- a ground frustrar-se.
sad triste
safe salvo
S.
sage
sail v. ir a vela-, s. vela f.
salad salada f., alface m.
sale venda f.
salt sel m.
same mesmo
satisfy satisfazer
Saturday sd(b)bado m.
savage selvagem
save salvar
say dizer
scarce apenas
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
scholar alu(m)no m.
school escola f., aula f.
scold ralhar
seal v. selar; s. selo m.
season estagao f.
seaman marinlieiro m.
seat logar m., assento m.
secret segredo m.
seduce seduzir
see ver
seek procurar
seem parecer
seize apanhar
seldom raramente
sell vender
send mandar, enviar; away
mandar embora, despedir;
for mandar, buscar
sense sentido m.
September setembro (in dates
S -) m.
servant criado, a
serve servir
set oif, out partir
settle arranjar
sew coser
shade, shadow sombra f.
shame vergonha f.
share partilhar em
shed (blood) derramar
sheep ovelha f., carneiro m.
sheet /bZfta /". (of a bed) ; len^o
m.
shine brilhar, luzir
ship wavio i., naw f. y vapor m.
shirt camisa f.
shoe sapato m.
shoemaker sapateiro m.
shop Zoja f.
shore margem f., praia f.
short breve, curto
show mostrar, manifestar
shrub arbusto m.
shun evitar, fugir de
shut fechar; in encerrar
sick doente
side Zado m.
sight visto /".
silence silencio m.
silk secZa /".
silly ^tarvo
silver prata f.
27
418
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
simple simples
since desde (que)
sincere sincere
sing cantar
sister irma; in-law cunliada
.f.
sit (down) sentar-se
skate patinar
skin pe(l)le f.
slander dizer mdl de
slaughter matatifa f.
sleep v. dormir', s. somno m.
slide, slip escorregar
small pequeno
smile sorrir; s. sorriso m.
smoke fumo m.', v. fumar
snow neve f. ; flakes frocos de
neve', v. nevar
so assim, tao; that tanto que;
many tantos
soap sabao m., sabonete m.
sober sobrio
soft mo(l)le, tneigo
soil solo m., cliao m. ; v. sujar
soldier soldado m.
solve (dis)solver
something alguma coisa, algo
(de)
song canto m.
soon breve, logo, cedo
sorrow desgosto m., mdgoa f.
sorry triste; I am sinto, teriha
pena
soul alma f.
sound sao, rijo; s. som
source fonte f.
south sul m.
speak falar
spell soletrar
spite, in of apesar de
spoil estragar
spoon colher f.
sport esporte m.
spot logar
spread espalhar
spring s. primavera f., mola f.',
v. saltar
spy espia f.
stagger cambalar
stain mancha, nodoa f.; v.
manchar
staircase escada(ria) f.
stake poste m., estaca f.: to be
at estar arriscado
star estretla f.
state estado m., condifao
stay ficar
step passo m.
stick pdu m., bengala f.
still ainda
sting morder
stir mover, mexer(-se)
stocking meia f.
stone pedra f.
stop parar
storm tetnpestade f.
strange estranho, estranjeiro
strawberry morango m.
street rua f., caminho m.
strength forgo, f.
strike bater, ferir; (clock) dar
horas
strong forte
study estudar; s. gabinete
stuff estofo m., materia f.
subdue subjugar, amansar
subject sujeito m., assumpto m~
submit submeter
subtract subtrair
succeed su(c)ceder, lograr
success su(c)cesso m.
successful bem su(c)cedido, feliz
such tal
suffer sofrer
suffice bastar
sufficient suficiente
sufficiently bastante
sugar assucar m.
T.
thunder trovdo m.
Thursday quinta-feira f.
thus assim
tiger tig re m.
till ate' (a)
time tempo m., vez f.
timid timido
tired cansado
to a, para; to-day lioje; to-
morrow dntanha
too, much demais, demasiado r
muito
tooth dente m.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
419
top cimo m.
towards para (com)
towel toalha f.
tower torre f.
town ctdade f.
tradesman negociante
tragedy tragedia f.
transgress infringir
translate traduzir, verier
translation tradu(c)Qao f., versaof.
travel viajar
traveller viajante m.
treasure tesouro m.
treat tratar; ill maltratar
treatment tratamento m,
treaty tratado m.
tree drvore f.
tremble tremer
trouble inquietar, desassocegar,
inco(m)modar
true verdadeiro ', it is e ver-
dade
trust confiar em, descansar em
truth verdade f.
try experimentar, procurar
Tuesday ter^a-feira f.
Turkish turco
turn volta f.
tutor preceptor, tutor m.
tyrant tyra(n)no tn.
U.
ugly feio
umbrella parasol m., guarda-
chuva m.
unawares inesperadamente
uncle tio m.
understand compre(h}ender, en-
tender
undertake empre(h)ender
undo desfazer
unfortunate desgragado
ungrateful ingrato
unhappy infeliz
unheard of inaudito
unknown desconhecido
unless a nao ser que
unsettled incerto
upon em, sobre f em cima de
uprightness rectiddo f.
use uso m., hdbito m.', v.
costumar
useful util
usually de or dinar io
utter (cries) dar (grltos).
V.
vainly debalde
valley val(le) m.
valour valor m., valentia f.
variety variedade f.
various vdrio
vast vasto
velvet veludo m.
very muito, bem.
vessel vaso m., navio m.
vice vicio m.
victory victoria f.
village aldeia f., vila f.
vinegar vinagre m.
violet violeta f.
virtue virtude f.
virtuous virtuoso
visit s. visita f.\ v. visitar,
fregiientar
voice voz f.
volume volume, tomo m.
vow voto m.; v. votar
voyage vidgem f.
W.
wait esperar
walk passear', s. passeio m.
wall muro m.
walnut noz f.
want falta; v. precisar; to
be ed foliar
war guerra f.
warm quente
watch relogio m.; v. velar,
observar
water dgua f.
way caminho m.
weak fraco
wear trazer, trajar, vestir
weariness cansago, aborrecimento
weather tempo m.
Wednesday quarto-feira f.
week semana f.
27*
420
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
weep cliorar
weigh pesar
well bem; to be estar bem
or bom
wheat trigo m.
when quando
where onde
whip chicote m.
white franco
whole inteiro, todo
why porqiie?
wicked ruim
wide largo
widow viuva f.'> er viuvo m.
wife esposa f., mulher f.
wild selvdgem
willing prompto ; to be querer
willingly gostosamente
win ganhar
wind vento m.
wind up (a watch) dar corda a
window janela f.
wine vinho m.
wing asa f.
winter inverno f.
wipe esfregar
wisdom sabedoria f.
wise sdbio, erudito, prudente
wish desejar
without sem
witness testemunha f.
woman mulher f.
wonderful admirdvel, maravi-
Ihoso
wood bosque, madeira f., pan m.
wool la f.
word palavra f.', to keep one's
cumprir com a sua pala-
vra
work obra f., trabalhom.; v>
trabalhar
workman operdrio m.
world mundo m.
worm verme m.
worse peor, pior
worth digno', to be voter
wound ferida f.; v. ferir
wretched desgra$ado, miserdvel
write escrever
writing letra f.
wrong injustiga; to be nao
ter razao.
Y.
year anno m.
yellow amarel(l)o
yesterday (h}ontem
yet ainda
yield ceder
yoke jugo m.
young now, mo$o
youth juventude, mocidade f.
Z.
zeal zelo m.
zealous zeloso
zero zero m.
zounds! porDeus! com a breca!
;
421
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
Abaixo fv'fiajfu] down; under
obolar [ubu'lar] to shake
abandonar [vbvndu'nar] to
abandon
ab(b)ade [v'bafo] m. abbot
dbelha [v'bvfo] f. bee
abengoar [aftensu'ar] to bless
aberto [v'bertu] open
abolir [abu'lir] to abolish
abwrrecer [uburrd 'serj to abhor,
displease
dbragar [vfirv ' sar] to embrace
abreviar [vfirdVi 'arjto abbreviate
obrigar [vbri'gar] to shelter
abrigo [v'brigu] m. shelter
abril [u'brit] m. April
atoir [v'ftrir] to open
dbuso [v'ftuzu] in. abuse
acabar [ulw'bar] to finish
acaso [v"kazu] m. chance
ocautelado [vlcautd 'ladu] cau-
tious
acautelar-se fekautd'larsz] to
provide
acgdo [a'syuj f. action
a(c)cento [v'sentuj m. accent
a(c)ceso [u'sezu] lighted
a(c)crescentar [vkrdfsen 'tar] aug-
ment, increase
a(c)cusar [vku'zar] accuse
aceitar [vsvi'tar] to accept
acender ft sender] to light,
kindle
acertar [usdr'tar] to hit
achar ft' far] to find
acido ['asj'd'itj acid, sour
acima [v'simv] over
adarar [vTdv'rar] to clear
ago f'asu] steel m.
[v
acolher vu'er receve
acompanhar [vkompv'jiar] ac-
company
aconselhar /#fco.s 'liar] to advise
acontecer [vkontd'ser] to happen
acordar [vkur'dar] to awake
acostumar [vkuftu'mar] to ac-
custom
acre f'aJcrd] =, sour
acreditar [vkreffi'tar] to believe
activo [a'tivu] active
acto ['atu] m. act, action
actor [a' tor] m. =
actriz [a'trif] f. actress
actual [a'tual] =
addigao [v&i'suu] f. addition
adiante [u&i'vntz] before, for-
ward
adiar [vfri'ar] to adjourn
adivinhar [vfovi'jiar] to guess
adoecer [u&ui'ser] to fall ill
adormecer [v&urmd'ser] to fall/
or lull asleep
advertir [vjfowr'tfaj to advise
afadigar [vfedi'gar] to fatigue,
tire
afamado [vfe'ma&u] famous
afastar [ufuf'tar] to remove
afazeres [ufu' zerif ] m. pi. busi-
ness
a(f)fecto [v'fetu] m. affect
a(f)fei$ao [vfwt''svu] f. affection
a(f)firmar [u fir 'mar] to affirm
a(f)flicto [u'flitu] afflicted
a(f)fligir fofli'ffir] to afflict
422
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
af(f)luente [vftu'entej m. affluent
agarrar [vgu'rrar] to seize
agasalho [ugie 'zafiu] m. lodging,
shelter
agradecer [vgrefo'serj to thank
agradecido fvgrvdd' sidu] thank-
ful
agradecimento [vgrvddsi 'mentuj
m. thanks
agrado [v'graffu] m. liking
dgua ['agwvj f. water
aguardar [vgwvr'darj to await
agudo [v'gu&uj sharp, pointed
aguia ['acftv] f. eagle
agulha [v'gufo] f. needle
ahi [v'i] there
ainda [u'indvj still
ajoelhar [ugui'fiar] to kneel
ajuda [e'guffv] f. help
ajudar [vgu'&ar] to help
alargar [vlvr'gar] to enlargen
olcanfor [alk^'sar] to reach,
obtain
amar [v'marj to love
amarelo em^'rclu yellow
aldedo [ahfy'vu] m. peasant
aldeia [al'dew] village.
dlegre [u'lcgrd] gay
alegria [viz gritf] f. gaiety, joy
alem [a'lvt] beyond
alfaiate [cAfui 'ate] m. tailor
alfandega[c&'f*nd9gB] f. custom-
house
alfinete [alfi' netd] m. pin
algibeira [algiftietra] f. pocket
dlgoddo [algu'&vu] m* cotton
alguem [at'gvij somebody
algum [al'citt] some
alimento f sit' mentuj m. nourish-
ment
Al(l)emanha [vld'majri'e] f. Ger-
many
al(l)emdo [vlz'mvu] m. German
al(l)i [v'li] there
alma ['almu] f. soul
dlmogar [almu'sar] to break-
fast
ctlmogo [ai'mosu] m. breakfast
alto f'attuj high, tall
altura [al'tumj f. height
alugar [vlu'gar] to hire, let
olumno [v'lunu] pupil, student
alvo ['atvuj m. white, aim
amanha amv'jiv] to-morrow
amargo [v'margu] bitter
amdvel [v'mavsi] amiable
ambtQdo [vmbi'svu] f. ambi-
tion
ambicioso [vmbist'ozu] ambi-
tious
anibos ['vmbuf] both
ameaga [umi'asv] f. threat,
menace
ameagar /vmiv'sar] to threaten
amendoa [v'menduv] f. almond
americano [vmeri'lwnu] Ameri-
can
amigdvel [vmi'gavst] amicably
amigo [v'miguj m. friend
amiudo [vmi'u&u] often
amizade [vmi'zafo] f. friend-
ship
amo ['emu] m. master
amor [v'mor] love
amostra [v'mostrv] f. pattern,
sample
ancido [usy'vu] m. old man
dncora ['vkuraj f. anchor
andar [vn'darj to go, walk
andorinha [vndu'riyiv] f. swallow
dngulo ['ugulu] m. angle, corner
angustia [u'guftw] f. anguish,
pain
anho ['vyiu] m. lamb
animal [vni'mai] m. =
dnimo I'vnimu] m. valour, cou-
rage
anjo ['uju] m. angel
a(n)nel ffnsij m. ring
a(n)nexo [v'neksu] annexed
a(n)niversdrio [vnivar'saiyu] m.
anniversary
a(n)nual [v'nual] annual, yearly
a(n)nunciar [vnus* f ar] announce
a(n)nuncio [u'nusiu] advertise-
ment
anoitecer [vnoUd'serJ to grow
night, darken
antever [vnte'verj to foresee
antigo [vn'tigu] ancient
antiguidade [untigi' ffafo] anti-
quity
apagar [vpv'gar] to extinguish,
quench
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
423
apanliar [epv'nar] to grasp,
catch, pick
apartar [vpur'tiir] to separate
apear, apiar [vpt'ar] to alight
apenas [u' penis f] scarcely
aperfeigoar [vpwfvisu'ar] to ac-
complish
apertar [vpzr'tar] to bind, tie,
press, squeeze
aperto [e 'pertuj m. crowd, throng
apoderar-se [vpufo'rarsej to
seize, to take possession
apontar [vpon'tarj to point,
aim at
-aposento [vpu'zentu] m. room
aposta [v'poftv] f. wager, bet
apostolo [u'poftulu] m. apostle
a(p)parecer [vpvra'ser] appear
a(p)parelho [vpv'rvfiu] m. ap-
paratus
a(p)pelido [epd'li&u] m. surname
a(p)plauso[v 'plauzujm. applause
<t(p)plicagao [vpliku 'svujf. appli-
cation
a,(p)plicado [vpU'lca&uJ diligent
a(p)proximar [vprosi'mar] to ap-
proach
apreqo /~&'presuj m. estimation
uprender [vpren'der] to learn
aprendiz [vpren'diif] m. ap-
prentice
apresentar [vprdzen'tar] to pre-
sent, introduce
apressado [vpre'saffu] hasty
aproveitar [epruvvi'tarj to profit
dptidao [apti'&vuj f. aptness
aqiiecer [vkz'ser] to warm,
heat
aquelle [v'kefo] that
itqui [v'kij here
<iquictar [vtyc'tar] to quiet
aquillo [v'kihi] that
ar [ar] m. air
arbitrdrio [erbi 'trariuj arbitrary
arbusto [ur'buftu] m. shrub
arcebispo [vrsa'bifpu] m. arch-
bishop
urco ['arkuj m. arch
areia [v'ruiv] f. sand
argola [vr'golu] f. ring
arguir [vryii'ir] to argue
aria ['arw] f. aria, air, song
drido ['ari&u] dry
arma ['armvj f. weapon
armazem [urmu'zui] m. ware-
house, magazine
arranjar [vrru'jar] to arrange,
dispose
arrdtel [a'rrat^J m. pound
arredores [urra' forif] m. pi. en-
virons
arrefecer [urrdfs'cer] to cool,
catch cold
arroz [u'rrof] m. rice
arte ['arid] f. art
artigo [vr'tigu] m. article
artilharia [vrtifa'ri'v] f. ar-
tillery
artista [ur'tiftu] m. artist
drvore ['arvurd] f. tree
asa ['azvj f. wing, handle
asno f'agnu] m. ass
dspero ['afpdru] rough
assado [v'sa&u] m. roast-meat
assdltar [vsal'tar] to assault
asseio [v'suiu] m. neatness
assentar [vsen'tar] to seat, put
assento [v'sentu] m. seat
assignatura [vsinv 'tuns] f. signa-
ture C-Jj^VS ^?V4
assim [v si] so
assistir [esif'tir] to assist
assucar [v'sukar] m. sugar
assunto [v'suntuj m. subject
assustar fesuftarj to frighten
astro ['aftruj m, star
atirar [vti'rarj to throw,
fling
atraigoar [utraisu 'ar] to betray
atrds [v'traf] behind, after
atraso [v'trazu] m. delay
atravessar [vtravd'sar] to cross
atento [v'tentu] attentive
au(g)mentp [au'mentu] m. aug-
f mentation, increase
Austria ['auftrivj f. =
autor [au'tor] m. author
dvido ['avi&u] covetous, greedy
aviso [v'vizu] m. communication,
advice
avo [v'vo] m. grandfather
avo [v'voj f. grandmother
azedo [u'ze&u] sour
azeitona [uzm'tonie] f. olive
424
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
cod-
azul [u'zul] blue
azulejo [vzu'lvgu] m. Dutch
tile glazed.
B.
bacalliau [bvku'fiau] m.
fish,
bacia [bu'si:v] f. basin
baga ['bag.u] f. berry, drop (of
sweat)
bagdgem [bu r gag'e'i] f. luggage
bago ['baguj m. grain of a
grape
bahia [bis 'in] f. bay; B
Bahia
bailar [bat'lar] to dance
baile ['bafld] m. ball
bainlia [bv'iyiv] f. sheath
bairro ['ba'irruj m. quarter of
a town /M UiXo, ^w-v^N
baixa ['baffej decrease; leave,
JB part of Lisbon
baixor [bai'farj to sink, fall
baixella [bai'fslu] f. furniture
for the table, silver-plate
baixio [bai'fiu] m. low water
baixo [bai'fuj low
bala f'balvj ball
balan^a [bv'lvsa] f. balance,
scales
balango [bv'lusu] m. belance
balcao [bal'kuuj m. balcony,
counter
baldado [bal'da&u] void
balde f'baMdJ m. bucket
baloi$ar [baloi'sar] to balance
bancada [bu"ka&ie] f. pew,
bench
banco f'bvku] m. bank
bandeira [bun'dwrv] f. flag,
ensign
bandeja [Wri 'd'B ge] f. tray, tea-
board
bando ['bvndu] m. band
banho f'bvyiu] m. bath; s. pi.
banns
baptismo [ba'tigmu] m. bap-
tism
barato fbv'ratu] cheap
barba ['barbv] f. beard ; chin
barbear [bvrbi'arj to shave
barca, barcaga ['barkv, bvr'kasvj
f. bark, ferry-boat, lighter
barco f'barlcuj m. bark, boat
barra ['barrvj f. bar, mouth of
a river; trimming
barriga [bu'rriyv] f. belly;
da perna calf of the leg
barril [bu'rrilj m. cask
barro f'barruj clay
barulho [bv'rudu] m. noise
bastante [bvf'tvnte] enough ;
rather
bastar [bef'tar] to be sufficient
batalha [bu' tali's] f. battle
batata [bv'tatv] f. potato
bater [bu'ter] to beat
beber [te'fter] to drink
bebida [to'bi&u] f. drink, potion
beieo ['bvi>su] m. lip
beijar [biei gar] to kiss
beijo [bvigu] m. kiss
beira ['bv}rv] brink, shore; B
Province of Portugal
beiramar [bwkru'mar] f. sea-
coast
belqa ['btfgvj m. and f. Belgian
Bttgica ['bd 3 ikis] f. Belgium
beleza [bd'lezv] f. beauty
bem [bv}J well
bemfeitor [buifui'tor] m. bene-
factor
bemquisto [but'tyftu] well-
beloved
bengao f'besuuj f. blessing
benefico [bd'ncfi>ku] beneficial
benevolo [bd'nsvuhi] benevolent
bento ['bentuj consecrated
benzer(-se) [be' zer(-sd)] to con-
secrate, to make the sign of
the cross
berrar [bd'rrar] to scream
besta ['beftv] m. beast, brute
biblia f'biblw] f. Bible
bicho ['bifuj m. worm
bico f'bikuj m. beak, bill
bife I'bifdJ m. beef
bilha ['biiftv] f. earthen pot
bilhete [bi'fietd] m. note,
billet
bispo ['bifpu] m. bishop
boato ['buatii] m. rumour
boca I'bokv] f. mouth
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
425
bocado [bu'kafru] m. mouthful,
piece
boi [boj>] m. ox
boia ['bow] f. buoy
tola I'tolvJ f. ball
bolo ['bolu] m. cake, biscuit
bolor [bu'lor] m. mould
bolsa ['bolsTs] f. purse
bolso ['bolsuj m. pocket
bom, boa [bo, bov] good
bondade [bon'da&d] f. goodness
bonito [bu'nitu] nice
borboleta [burbu'letv] f. butterfly
bordo f'borduj m. board
borraclia [bu'rrafv] f. leather
bottle
bota ['totej f. boot
botao [bu'tuu] m. button
botar jbu'tar] to cast, throw
bote ['botd]^ m. boat
botica [bu'tikv] f. apothecary's
shop
braco ['brasu] m. arm
bradar [bru'&ar] to shout
bramar [brv'marj to roar
branco f'brvkuj white
branquear [brvty' ar] to whiten,
bleach
brasao [brv'zvu] arms
brasileiro [bruzi'lviru] Brazilian
bravo f'bravuj brave, wild
breve ['brevd] brief
brilliar [bri'ftar] to shine, excel
brincar [brl'kar] to play
brda I'brov] f. bread of millet
bronze [brozd] m. brass
burgues [bur'gef] m. citizen
burro ['burru] m. ass
buscar [buf'karj to fetch
buxo ['bufuj m. box-tree
C.
cabega [kv'besv] f. head
cabe(l)lo [ku'behi] m. hair
caber [liu'ber] to find room (in)
cabo ['JcafiuJ m. end, handle
cobra, f'kabrvj f. goat
cabrito [kv'brituj m. kid
ca$a ['kasvj f. chase
cacho ['kafuj m. grape
caco ['JcalcuJ m. potsherd
cad a ['kv&vj every, any
cadeia [Icu'&vieJ f. chain
cadeira [ka'dwirv] f. chair
caderno [kv'ftsrnu] m. copy-
book
caes fka}fj m. quay
cafe [Ine'fs] m. coffee-house
ca(h)lv [kv'ir] to fall
caixa ['Iwifu] f. box
caixao [Jcai'fvu] m. coffin
calar llcv'lar] to keep secret
calgada [kai'sa&v] f. pavement
calgado [kal'ssL&a] f. shoes and
boots
collar [kal'sar] to put on
shoes
calculo ['kalkulu] m. calculation
caldeira [kal'duirv] f. kettle
cdldo ['kalduj m. broth
calice, calis f'kalifj m. chalice
callo ['kaluj corn, hard skin
calmo fkalmu] calm
color [ke'lorj m. heat
cama [ r kEmvJ f. bed
camara f'kvmvrv] f. chamber
camarote [kumv'rotd] m. cabin,
box
cdmbio ['kiimbiu] m. exchange;
letra de bill of exchange
cambista [kvm'btftv] m. money-
changer
caminho [kv'mijiuj m. way
camisa [ka'mizv] f. shirt
campainha [kumpv'iyiv] f. bell
campo ['k^mpuj m. field ; no
in the country
caneca [kv'mkv] f. mug, can
canel(l)a [kv'nelv] f. cinnamon
canliao [kv'yivu] m. cannon
canna f'kunvj f. cane, reed; de
asuccar sugar-cane
cano ['k isnu] m. pipe, tube
canon ['kunon] m. cannon
cansago [kv'sasu] m. weariness
cansar [M 'sarj to tire
cantar [kvn'tarj to sing
canto I'kvntuJ m. song
cao [kvuj m. dog
capa ['kapvj f. cloak, cover
capaz [kv'paf] capable
capel(l)a [kv'psle] f. chapel
capital [Icvpt'tal] =
426
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
capitcio [kvpi'tuu] m. captain
vapitulo [ku'pitulu] m. chapter
ca(p)tivo [kv'tivu] m. captive
cara ['karvj f. face
caracol [kvru'kol] m. snail;
helix
cardcter [kis' rater] m. character
earda ['ktirdaj card ing-comb
cardeal [kurdi'al] m. cardinal
cardo ['karduj m. thistle
cargo, f'kargvj f. load, burden
cargo ['kargu] m. charge
caridade [kvri'ffafo] f, charity
carne ['karndj f. meat
carneiro [kvr'nviru] m. mutton,
ram
caro ['karuj dear
carril [kv 'rritj m. track ; pi.
earns rail
carro ['karruj m. car, carriage
carrudgem [kvrru 'a $vi] f. car-
riage
carta f'kartv] f. letter
carteira [kvr'tvirv] f. pocket-
book
carteiro [kvr'teiru] m. postman
carvalho [kvr'vafiu] m. oak
mrvao [Twr'vuu] m. coal
casa ['kazu] f. house
casacao [kuzu'kuu] m. great-
coat
casamento [kvzu 'mentuj m. wedd-
ing
casar [ke'zar] marry
casca ['kafkvj f. bark, rind
cascata [kvf'katis] f. cascade
caso f'kazuj m. case, accident
caste(l)lo [kvftsluj castle
castigar [kuf'tigar] to punish
cosulo [Ita'zulu] m. hull, husk
cauda ['kauffe] f. tail, train
causa ['kausaj f. cause, plea
cautela [kau'tslvj caution,
ticket
cavalariQa [kuvulie'risv] f. stable
cavallo [kv'valu] m. horse
cear [st'ar] to sup
cebola [sd'bolv] f. onion, bulb
cedo f'sed'uj soon
cego ['seguj blind
ceifar [svi'far] to harvest, cut
(corn)
celebrar [sdld 'frrar] to celebrate
celebre ['ssldfird] famous
cem [sui] a hundred
censura [se'surv] f. censure
centra ['sentruj m. centre
cera [' seru] f. wax
cerco ['serkuj f. circle, circuit
cerebro [' ssrdftru] m. brain,
head
cereja [sd'nsgv] f. cherry
cerejeira [sdW ' suiru] f. cherry-
tree
cerrar fsd'rrarj to shut, close
up
certeza [sdr'tezv] f. certainty
certidao [sdrti'&iiu] m. certifi-
cate
certo ['ssrtuj sure, certain
cessar [sd'sar] to cease
'ceu [ssu] m. heaven, sky
chdcara ['fakvrv] f. Bras, farm,
country-house
chaga [ fag.u] f. wound
chamar ['f'emar] to call ? ']
chamma ['feme] f. flame, blaze
chao [feu] m. ground, soil,
floor
charuto [fu'rutu] cigar
chato ['fatu] flat
chave ['favdj f. key
chegar [fi'garj to arrive
cheio ['fvlu] full
cheirar [fui'rar] to smell
chicara ['fikvrv] f. cup
chim, chines [fl, fi'nef] m.
Chinese
chita ['fitu] f. printed calico
chorar ffu'rar] to cry, weep
chourigo [fo'risu] m. sausage
chover [fu'ver] to rain
christao [krif'tuu] (m.) Christian
chronista [kru'niftv] m. chro-
nicler
chumbo f'fumbuj m. lead
chuvoso [fu'vozu] rainy
cicatriz[sikis 'trifjf. cicatrice, scar
cidade [s/i r ff&fo] f. town
cigarro [s}'garruj m. cigar
cima ['sirwe] f. top; em on,
upon
cinco ['siku] five
cincoenta [si'kwentv] fifty
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
427
circo ['sirku] m. circus
circular [sfrku'l&r] to circulate
circulo f'sirkuluj m. circle
civil [sj'vil] civil, polite
clarear, clarificar [klun'ar,
Klvrtfi'kar] to grow light, to
clear
claro ["klaru] clear
classe ['klusdj f. class, species
clima f'klimvj m. climate
cobarde [ku'bardd] (m.} coward
coberta [ku'bertv] f. cover
cobertor [kubdr'tor] m. blanket,
quilt
cobertura [kubdr'tuns] f. cover-
ing
cobre f'kobrz] m. copper
cobrir [ku'brirj to cover
coclie ['kofij m. coach
coelho ['kins' fiu] m. rabbit
colher [ku'fier] to gather, pluck
collegia! [kuligi' at] collegiate
collo f'koluj m. neck, lap
collocar fkulukar] to put
colonia [ku'lpnfr] f. colony
colza ['kotzv] f. barley
combater [kombv 'terj to combat
combinagao [kdmbinv'sau] f.
combination
comboio [kom'boiu] m. train
combusttvel [kdmbuf'tivst] (m.)
combustible
comegar fkumd'sarj to begin
comedia [ku'ws&w] f. comedy
comer [ku'merj to eat
co(m)memorar [kumdmu'rarj to
commemorate
commercial [kumdrsi'al] =
co(m)merciante[kum9rsi 'vntz] m.
merchant
co(m)mercio [ku'mer&iu] m. com-
merce
com(m)etter [kums 'terj to commit
co(in)migo [ku'miyu] with me
co(m)misao [kumi'svuj f. com-
mission
co(m)moda ["komu'du] f. cheat of
drawers
comnosco [ko'nofku] with us
como ['komuj how
companlieiro [kompv 'jwiru] m.
companion
comparagdo [Wmpuris 'smi] f.
comparison
comparecer [kdmpvrz'ser] to
appear
compartimento [kompvrti 'men-
tu] m. division, compartment
compasso [Wm'pasu] m. com-
co(m)mover ['kumuverj to move
co(m)municagdo [kumunikv 'sun]
f. communication
compatriota [kompv 'triotvj m.
and f. country-man (-woman)
compendia [kom'pendiu] m. com-
pendium
completar [kompld'tar] to com*
plete
complicar [kdmpfa'kar] to com-
plicate
composto [kom'poftu] compound
eomprar [kom'prarj to buy
compre(he)nder [komprien'der]
to comprehend
comprido [kom'prid'u] long
eoncelho [ko'suftu] m. council;
district
concertar [kdsar'tarj to mend,
repair
concha ['kofe] f. shell
concorrer [koku'rrer] to concur
concorrencia [koku'rresivj f.
competition
concurso fko'kursuj m. con-
course, crowd
conde(m)nar [kondd'nar] to con-
demn
condiQao [kondi'suu] f. condition
condisclpulo [kondtf'sipulu] m.
school-fellow
conducta [kon'dutv] f. conduct
confessar [kofe'sarj to confess
confianga [kdfi'usu] f. con-
fidence
confer me [ko'formd] like, con-
form
confuso [kd'fuzu] mixed, con-
founded
congratular [kogrvtu'lar] to con-
gratulate
conhecimento [koyidsi'mentu] m.
knowledge
428
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
conquista [ko'kiftv] f. conquest
consciencia [kofst'esiv] f. con-
science
conseguir [kosd'girj to reach
conselho [ko'suftu] m. advice
consentir [kosen'tirj to consent
consider agao [kosiforv 'suu] f.
consideration
consider ar [kdsifo'rar] to con-
sider
consistir fkds'is'tirj to consist
consoante [kosu'untd] f. con-
sonant
consocio [ko'sostuj m. com-
panion, associate
console [ko'solu] m. consolation
constante [kof'tvntd] steady
constar [kof'tar] to appear, to
be said
constipado [kofti' 'paffuj ', estar
to have a cold
constituicao [koftitui'svu] f.
constitution
construcQao [koftru'suu] f. con-
struction
consulta [ko' suite] f. consulta-
tion
conta ["konte] f. account, bill
contagioso [kontis^ r ozu] con-
tagious
contar [kon'tar] to count, reckon
contente [kon'tenty] content
conter [kon'ter] to contain
conteude [kont'i'ud'u] m. contents
continuar [kontinu arj to con-
tinue
conto ['kontuj m. tale, story;
de reis = 1000 milreis
contra ['kdntre] against
convento [kd'ventu] m. convent
conversa, conversagao [ko'versv,
kovdrsv' svu] f. conversation
convicqao [kovik'svu] f. con-
viction
convidar [kovi'&ar] to invite
copia ['kopia] f. copy
cor [kor] f. colour
cor [kor], de by heart
coraQao [kurv'svu] m. heart
coroa [ku'rou, 'krou] f. crown
cor oar [ku'ruar] to crown
corpo f'korpuj m. body
correio [ku'rryiu] m. post,
courier ; - - geral chief post
office
corrente [ku'rrentd] f. current,
stream
correr [ku'rrer] to run, flow
correspondent [kurnfpon'de-
corresDondence
ir [kurrd jir/^to correct,
to mend
cortar [kur'tar] to cut
corte f'koridj m. edge, cat
cdrte ['korti/ f. court
cortejo [kur'tie^u] in. train, at-
tendance
cortes [kur'tef] polite
cortesia [kurtd' zi;u] f. courtesy,
bow
cortiga [kur'tisv] f. rind, bark
cortic.o [kur'tisu] m. bee-hive
cortir [kur'tir] to tan
corvo f'korvu] m. raven
coser [ku'zer] to sew, coast
along
costa ['koftu] f. coast, shore
costumar [kuftu'mar] to be ac-
customed
costura [kuf'turv] f. sewing
costureira [kuftu' rvyrv] /* seam-
stress
couro f'koruj m. leather
couve ['kov^J f. cabbage
cova ['kove] f. hole, grave
coxa ['kofv] f. thigh
cozer [ku'zer] to cook, boil,
bake
cozido [ku'zi&u] in. boiled meat
cozinha [ku'zinu] f. kitchen
crdneo f'krvniuj m. skull
cravo ['kravu] m. pink, clove
creagao [kriu'suu] f. creation
creador [kriu'ffor] m. creator
crear [kri'ar] to create
creatura [kriv 'turn] f. creature
credit o ['krsfritu] m. credit, re-
putation
crenga ['kresv] f. faith /
crer [krerj to believe
crescer [krdf'ser] to grow
criado, -a [kri'adu, kri'a&v] s.
servant
crianga [krt'vs'e] f. child
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
429
criar [kri'ar] to breed, produce,
educate
crime ['krintdj m. =
criminoso [krdmi'nozu] criminal
cru [kru] raw
cruel [kru el] =
cruz [kru:f] f. cross
cuidado [kui'd'adu] m. care
cujo ['kuguj whose
culpa ['kulpvj f. fault
cultivar [kulti'var] cultivate
cumplice ['kumplisdj m. accom-
plice
cumulo ['kumulu] m. heap
eunhcido, (-a) [ku'jia&u] s.
bro ther-(sister)-i n- law
cunho f'kujiu] m. stamp, coin
euro, ['kurvj s. cure, curate
curativo Ikurv'tivuJ curing
curioso [kun'osu] curious
curral [ku'rrcd] m. sheep-fold,
pen
curso ['kursu] m. course, race
curio ['kurtuj short
cuspir [kuf'pir] to spit
custa ['kuftv] f. cost, expense,
pain
custo ["kuftu] m. cost, diffi-
culty
cutelo [ku'tslu] m. knife
cutilada [kutt'la&u] f. cut, wound
czar [kd'zar] m. =
I).
dddiva ['dadivv] f. gift
dado [ dsi&uj die
dama ['dvmv] f. dame, lady
damasco [du 'majku] m. damask ;
apricot
da(m)no [denu] m. damage
dansa ['dvsvj f. dance
dar [darj to give J & 7
data f'datv] f. date
deboixo [dd'ftaifu] under
debalde [da'ftaido] in vain
debil ['debit] weak
debito ['de&'tuj m. debt
decencia [dd 'sesiu] f. decency
decidir [ddsd r &ir] to decide
decifrar [ddsi'frar] to decipher
decima ['desimv] f. tenth
declaragao [ddklvru'suu] f. de-
claration
declinar [ddkli'nar] to decline
declive [dd'klivd] m. steep
decoro [dd'koruj m. decorum
decorrer [ddku'rrer] to elapse
decreto [da'krstu] m. decree
decuplo ['dfkupluj tenfold
dedal [dd'&al] m. thimble
dedicar [de&i'k&r] to dedicate
dedo ['deffu] m. finger
defeito [dd'faitu] m. defect
defender [ddfen'derj to defend
deferir [ddfd'rir] to defer
defesa [dd fezaj f. defence
defeso [dd fezuj m. forbidden
definitive [ddfdnd'twu] definitive
defronte [fo fronto] opposite
defunto [dd'funtu] defunct
degredo [da'g.re&u] m. exile
deitar [dvi'tar] to lay down,
cast
deixar [dui'far] to let, leave
deleitar [ddfa} 'tarj to delight
delgado [dd'gafru] thin
deliberar [ddlibd'rar] to de-
liberate
delicado [ddli'ka&u] delicate
demaisj demasiado [dd'maifj dz-
mvzi'ad'u] too (much)
demente [dd'mentd] foolish, mad
demi(t)tir [ddmd'tir] dismiss
democrata [ddmu'kratv] m. demo-
crat
demora [dd'morv] f. delay
demostrar [ddmuf'trar] to de-
monstrate
denso [ r dcsu] dense, thick
dentado [den'tadu] toothed
dente ['dente] m. tooth
dentista [den'tiftv] m. dentist
dentro [dentru] within
dependents [ddpen 'dentz] depend-
ing
deplorar [ddplu'rar] to deplore
depor [dd'por] to deposit
deposito [dz'pozrtu] m. deposit
depressa [dd'presa] quicl
derradeiro [ddrru ftuiru] las
derreter [ddrrd'ter] to melt
derrota [dd'rrotv] f. defeat
430
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
desafogar [ddzvfu' gar] to free,
clear
desagraddvel [ddzvgrv 'davsl] dis-
agreeable
desalento [faza'lentu] \ ^
desammo [de zvmmu] /
desapparecer [ddzupvrd 'serj dis-
appear
desapprovar [ddzapru'var] dis-
approve
desarmamento [ddza rm v 'm entuj
m. disarming
desarrawjo [ddzis'rrvii] m. con-
fusion, disorder
desastre [dd 'zaftrd] m. disaster
desatar [ddzu'tar] to untie,
loosen
desa(t)ten$ao [ddzvte' suu] f. want
of attention
desa(t)tencioso
]
impolite,
inattentive
desa(t)tento
[ddzv 'tentu]
desbaratar [digbvns 'tar] to waste
desbastar [d^bvf'tar] to rough-
hew
desbotar [digtu'tar] to dis-
colour
descalgar [dtfkat'sar] to pull off
(shoe or glove)
descafyo [dtf'kcdsu] bare-foot-
ed
descansar [dti'kv'sar] to rest
descanso [d'if'kvsuj m. rest, re-
pose, ease
descarga [dif'kargu] f. discharge
descascar [d}fkvf'karj to peel,
husk
descender [difsen'derj to des-
cend, proceed
descer [dif'ser] to descend
descida [dif'sifo] f. declivity
descoberta [difku'bertu] f. dis-
covery
descobrir [dtfku'brir] to dis-
cover
desconfian$a [difkofy 'vsu] dis-
trust
desconhecido [difkojid'siffu] un-
known
desconsolo [difko'solu] m. af-
fliction
descontente [difkon'tentdj dis-
contented
descoser [difku'zer] to unsew
descredito [d'lfkrcditu] m. dis>
credit
descuido fdtf'kutffu] m. descuido
desculpa [dif'kulpv] f. excuse
desde [ f de$fo] since
desdem [di^'&^i] m. disdain
desejo [dj'zugu] m. desire
desembarago [ddzimbu 'rasuj m.
ease, quickness
desencaminhar [ddzikvmi 'jiarj
to mislead
desengano [ddze'gvnu] m. un-
deceiving
desenho [dd'zuyiu] m. drawing
desenvolver [ddzwot'verj to de-
velop, display
desertar [ddzdr'tar] to desert
desespero fddz}f'peruj m. des-
pair
desfazer [diffu'zer] to undo
desfeita [dtf fuitv] f. insult
desgraga [d]^' grass] f. disgrace-
designar [ddzi'jiar] to design
deslumbrar [dj>$lum'brar] to-
dazzle
desmaio [di^'ma^u] m. swoon
despacho [dif'pafu] m. dispatch
despedir [difpd oir] to dismiss
despir [dtf'pir] to undress
destino [dtftinu] m. destiny
destruir [dtftruir] to destroy
deter [dd'ter] to detain
determinado [ddtdrmi 'na&u] de-
cisive
detrds [dd'traf] behind
devagar favv'gar] slowly
dever fdd'verj m. duty
deveras [dd'veref] really ; indeed
devolver [ddvot 'verj to restore
dez [def] ten
dezembro [dd'zembru] December
dia [ f dia] m. day
didlogo [d}'alugu] m. dialogue
dictado [di'taffu] dictation, pro-
verb
di(f)feren$a [difd'rensu] diffe-
rence
di(f)ficil [dd'fisti] difficult
dignidade [dign* ffaffy] f. dignity
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
431
dilif/ente [dali'ge-ntej diligent
diminuir [ddmi 'nuir] to diminish
direcgdo [dirs'suu] f. direction
direito fdi'rvitu] straight, direct,
m. right, law; pi. duties
dirigir fart'gir] to direct
disclpulo [dif'sipulu] m. pupil,
disciple
dispensar [djfpen's&r] to dis-
pense
disponivel [dffpu'nivet] dis-
dispor [dif'por] to dispose
disputa fdjf'putv] f. dispute
dissolver [disol'ver] to dissolve
distdncia fdff'tvs^vj f. distance
distincto [dlf'tintu] distinct,
distinguished
diverse [di'versu] diverse
divida f divide J f. debt
dividir [ddVd'&ir] to divide
divino [dd'vinu] divine
dizer [di'zer] to say 1C]}
do [do] f. pain, compassion
dobra [ dobraj f. plait
dobrar [du'fyrar] to double
dobro ['dobru] double
doce f'dosdj m. sweet(meat)
docil ['dostfj docile
doenga [du'esu] f. illness
doente [du'ente] sick
dolor oso [dulu'rozu] painful
dom [do] m. gift
domestico [du'meftiku] domestic
domicilio [dumd'siljuj m. dwell-
ing
dominar [dumi'nar] to lord,
command
doming o [du'imgu] m. Sunday
dominio [du'min'iu] m. dominion
dona ['dome] f, (land)lady,
owner
dono ['donuj m. owner, land-
lord
dor [dor] f. pain
dormir [dur'mir] to sleep
dourar fdo'rarj to gild
doutor [do' tor] m. doctor
droga ['droyv] f. drug
droguista fdru 'gifte] m. druggist,
grocer
duplo ['dupluj double
duque, duquesa ['dukd, du'kezv]
duke, duchess
durctfao [durv'svu] f. duration
durante [du'rvntj] during
durar [du'rarj to last
dureza [du'rezu] hardness
duro ['duruj hard
duvida ['duvi&u] f. doubt
duvidar [duvi'&ar] to doubt
duvidoso [duvi'&osu] doubtful
duzentos [du 'zentus] two hundred
dtizia ['duzye] f. dozen.
E.
ebuligao [ibuli'suu] f. ebullition
economico fiJcu'nom'ikuJ econo-
mical
edi$ao [ifti'sau] f. edition
edificar [ifofi'karj to edify
edificio [ifo'fisfuj m. edifice
edited [idi'tat] m. edict
editor [iffi'tor] m. =
educar [iffu'Jcar] educate
e(f)fectivo fife'tivuj effective
e(f)feito [i'fvitu] effect
e(f)ficaz [ifi"kaf] efficacious
Egi(p)to [i'situ] m. Egypt
ei-lo(s), eil-a(s) or ei-la fisilu(f)..
'wluiif)] there is, there are
eira [ f ie}rv] threshing-floor
eis [v}fj there is
electrico [i'Utriku] electric(al)
elegante [ild' guntd] elegant
eleger [ilj>$er] to elect
eleigao [ilvt'svuj f. election
eleito [i'luitu] m. elected
eleitor [ilui'tor] m. elector
elevar fild 'var] to raise, elevate-
elogio [ilu'giu] m. elogy
eloquente [ilu'ltwentd] eloquent
embaixador [imbaifv ' &or] m>
ambassador
embarago [imbv'rasu] m. em-
barrassment
embarcar [imbur'kar] to embark
embeber fimfo'ber] to imbibe
embolsar [imbol'sar] to put into
a purse, pocket
embolso ftm'boisu] pocketing up
embora [im'boru] m. neverthe-
less; ir , se to go away
432
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
etnbranquecer fimbrvla'serj to
whiten, to grow white
embriagar [imbrlv'gar] to in-
toxicate; to transport
embrulhar [mibru'flar] to wrap
up
embrulho [im'brudu] m, parcel
emendar [imen'dar] to mend
tmigragao [imigrv'smi] f. emi-
gration
emmagrecer [imvyrd r sdr] to grow
lean
emmalar [miv 'lar] to embale
emmudecer [imufo'ser] to silence
emogao [imu'svuj f. emotion
empallidecer [impvlifo 'ser] to
grow pale
empenhar ftmpd 'jiar] to engage,
pledge
tmpenho [im'pejiu] in. pawn,
engagement
emplastro [im'plaftru] m. plaster
empregado [imprd'ga&u] m. of-
ficial, functionary^^ ^^V
empregar [Imprd'yarj to employ
emprego [im'preyu] m. employ-
ment
4mpre(h)ender [imprtyri der] to
undertake
empresa [im'prezv] f. enterprise
emprestar [imprdf'tar] to lend
eni2>rfatimo [im 'prsftymu] m.
loan
empurrao fimpu'rrvu] m. push
empurrar [impu'rrar] \ , ,
tmpuxar [impu'far] } to push
mcadernar [ikvfor'nar] to bind
(books)
encaminhar [iJcvm} f jiar] to direct,
guide
encanar [five f nar] to canalise
encanto [I'kientu] m. charm
encargo [i'hargu] m. charge
encarnado [ikur'na&u] incarnate
encarregado [ikurra'ga&u] char-
ged
mcerrar fisd'rrarjto shut or lock
up
vnchente [ifentd] m. inundation,
swelling
tncher [ifer] to fill, to rise
encobrir [ikubrir] to cover
encolher [iku'fier] to shrink,
shrug
encommendar [ikumen'dar] to
recommend
encontrao [ikon'truu] m. shock
encontrar [ikon'trar] to meet
encontro [t'kontruj m. meeting
encosta fi'tostvj f. declivity
encostar [ikuf'tar] to lean
endereQO [idd'resu] m. direction
endireitar [idinsi'tar] to make
straight
energico [i'mrgiku] energetic
enfadoriho [ife '&ojiu] tiresome
enfastiado [tfvffi r a&u] weary,
loathful
enfeitar [ifui'tar] adorning
enfeite [I'futfd] m. garb, attire
enfermar [ifdr'mar] to grow
sick, fall ill
cnfermo [1,'fermu] sick, ill
enforcar [if ur' Tear] to hang
enfraquecer [ifrvkz 'ser] to
weaken, slacken
ertganar [igu'nar] to deceive
engano [i'gvnu] m. error, mis-
take
engarrafar [igurrv 'far] to bottle
engenho fi'jvjiu] m. engine,
machine
engommar [igu'mar] to starch,
iron
engragado [igrv 'sa&u] merry,
graceful
engrandecer [igrundd' ser] to en-
large
engulir [igu'lir] to swallow,
j, devour
enigma [i'nigrwe] m. =
enjoar [igu'arj to be sea-sick
enlagar [ttv'sarj to interlace,
entangle
enleio [i'lieiu] m. perplexity;
charm
enlutctr [ilu'tar] to cover with
mourning
ennobrecer [inufird' ser ] ennoble
enredo fi'rre&u] m. intrigue
enrolar fir ru' lar] to roll, to
wrap
enrouquecer [trrofo 'ser] to make
hoarse
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
438
ensaio [I'sani] m. essay, rehear-
sal
entalhar fintt? Tiar] to carve
entao [in'tiiu] then; well?
ente ['entd] m. being
entender [mten'der] to under-
stand, mean
entendido [mten'did'o] intelligent
enterro [in'terro] m. burial
entoar [intu'ar] to tune
entrada [in'tra&e] f. entrance
entranlias [in'trvyivf] f. pi.
bowels, heart
entrar [in'trar] to enter
entre [ entrd] among, between
enlregar [tntry'gar] to hand,
deliver
entregue [in 'tregs] delivered up
entreter [mtrs'ter] to divert,
amuse
entrevista [intn'mftu] f. inter-
view
entristecer [mtriftz'serj to sad-
den
entrudo [m'truffu] m. carnival
enumeracao [inumarv 'svu] f.
enumeration
envelhecer [ivefo'ser] to make
or grow old
envenenar [wdnd'nar] to poison
enverdecer [ivdrdd'ser] to make
or become green
envolver [wol'ver] involve
enxame [I'fvmd] m. swarm
enxerto [I'fertu] m. graft, scion
enxofre ft fofry] m. brimstone
enxugar fifu'gar] to dry,
wipe
enxuto [I'futu] dry
epico ['spiku] epic
epidemia [ipd&i 'mia] f. epidemy
epiderma [ipi' ffermie] f. epi-
dermis
epigraphe [i'pigrufd] f. epigraph
epilogo [i'piluyu] m. epilogue
epistola [i'pistulu] f. epistle,
letter
epoca ['spulcvj f. epoch
equilibria [iki f li:fir}uj m. equi-
librium
equipdgem [iJci'pa^J f. equi-
page, furniture
Portuguese Conversation- Grammar.
equivaler [ikivu 'ler] to be equi
valent
equivoco [i"kiviiku] m. ambiguous
ermida [ir'mi'.d'Ts] f. hermitage
ermitao [irmi'tvu] m. hermit
errar [i'rrarj to err
erro ['erru] m. error
erudito [iru'&itu] well-read
erupgao [irup'suu] f. eruption
ervilha [ir'vifoj f. pea
esbogar [ijfiu'sar] to sketch
escada /'ifkad'u] f. stairs
escola [ij 'kalis] f. ladder, scale
escaldar [ifkcddar] to scald, burn
escapar fy'kv'parj to escape
escarlate ['ifkisr'latd] scarlet
escarnecer fifkurnd 'serj to scoff,
rail
escdrneo [ifkarn^u] m. mockery
escasso [if'kasu] scanty
esclarecimento fyklurasi 'mentu]
m. clearing
escola [tf'kalvj f. school
escolher [if ku' tier] to choose
esconder [tfkon'der] to hide
escosses [ifku'sef] m. Scotch
Escossia ftf'kosi'e] f. Scotland
escova ft'fkoivv] f. brush
escravidao [ykrvvi 'duujf. slavery
escravo [if'kravu] m. slave
escrever fifkrd'ver] to write
escripto [ifkritu] written
escriptor fifkri'tor] m. writer,
author
escrivaninha [ifkrivu 'nijria] f.
writing-desk
escrivao [ifkri'vvu] m. clerk
escrofulas ftf'krofuluf] f. pi.
scrofula
escrupulo fof'krupuluj m. scruple
\ escudeiro frfku 'd^}ruj m. squire;
upper servant
escudo [if'ku&u] m. shield
esculptor ftfkul'tor] m. sculptor
escumoso fyku'mosuj frothy
escurecer [ifkurd 'ser] to darken
escuro [if'ku:ru] dark
escusa fyfkuzis] f. excuse
escusado [tfku'zad'u] superfluous
escutar fifku'tar] to hearken
esforgar [iffur'sar] to streng-
then; se to endeavour
23
434
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
esforgo [ifforsu] m. effort
esgotado [iggu'ta&u] exhausted
esgrima [ig'griimis] f. fencing
esguio [i$'gi:u] lank
esmagar [tgmv'gar] to bruise
esmaltar [i$mal 'tar] to enamel
esmdro [i$'meru] m. care, dili-
gence
esmola [13 'molu] f. alms
espago [ifpasu] m. espace
espafoso [ifpv'so:zu] espacious
espada [if pate] f. sword
espalhar [ifpv'fiar] to scatter
Espanha fifpvjiv] f. Spain
espanhol [tfpv'fid] Spanish
espantar [ifpvn'tar] to startle
espanto [ifpvntu] m. fright
especial [ifpl&'al] =
especialidade [ifpisiuli' ftafo] f.
speciality
espfaie [ypsx&J f- species
espectador [ifpstv &or] m. spec-
tator
especulagao [ifpdkidis '&vu] f.
speculation
espelho [ifpufiu] m. mirror,
looking-glass
esperanga [ifpz'rusu] f. hope
esperar [yfp'rtf] to wait, hope
espertar [ifpdr'tar] to awake
esperto [ifpsrtu] sprightly, brisk
espesso [ifj'pesu] thick, close
esphera [iffeirie] f. sphere
espiga [ifpi:gv] f- ear (of corn)
espingarda [ifpl'gar&u] f. gun
espinha [ifpijiu] f. spine
espinho [ifpiyiu] m. thorn
espirito [ifpiriitu] m. spirit
espirrar [ifpi'rrar] to sneeze
esplendido [if plendi&u] splendid
esponja [tf'pdgv] f. sponge
espontdneo [ifpon'tuniu] spon-
taneous
espora [ifporu] f. spur
espdsOj -a [ifpozu, ifpozv] s.
husband; wife
espreitar [ifprui'tar] to spy
espremer [tfprd'mer] to press,
squeeze
esquadra fifkwafa'u] f. squadron
esquecer [ifke'ser] to forget
esquecido [ifke'siffu] forgetful
esqucrda fif'kerdv] f. left hand
esquerdo fafkerdu] left
esquina [ifkinis] f. corner
essencial [ise'&al] essential
estdbelecimento [iftvfobsi 'mentuj
m. establishment
esta$ao [iftv'svu] f. station
estada fjf'tato] f. abode
estado [iftadu] m. state
estaldgcm [iftie'la^'i] f. inn
estampa [}ft i emp'e] impression,.
print
estampilha [iftumpifa] f. stamp
estdncia [iftvsiu] f. station;
abode
estariho fyf't'ejiu] m. tin
estante [iftunla] f. book-shelf
estar [if tar] to be
estdtua [iftatuu] f. statue
estdtuto [iftu'tutu] m. statute
este, -a ['efa, 'sstie] this
esteiider [iften'der] to extend
esteril [ifteril] sterile, barren
estilo [ifti:lu] m. style
estima [if'tiim.?] f. esteem
estimar [ifti'mar] to estimate
estimulo [if'tiimulu] m. stimulus-
estio [iftiiu] m. summer
estivoH [ifti'vcd] =
estofo [iftofu] m. stuff, cloth
estojo [tf'to:$u,] m. case, box
estomago ftf'tdmvgu] m. stomacb
estorvo [iftorvu] m. obstacle
estrada [iftrafru] f. road
estrado [iftra&u] m. estrade
estragar [iftrv 'gar] to spoil
estrago [iftragu] m. damage
estrangeiro fiftrv 'gviruj foreign-
(er)
estranharfiftrv 'yiarjto wonder at
estranho [iftrvpiu] strange
estrebaria [iftrib'e'ri'.u] f. stable
estreitar [iftrui'tar] to straiten
estreito [iftrisitu] m. narrow, -
strait
estrella [if'trdu] f. star
estremecer [iftwrnd'ser] to shake,
tremble
estrondo [iftrondu] m. cracking
estudante '[iftu'&untz] m. student
estudar [iftu'dar] to study
estudioso [iftu'friozu] studious
Portuguese-English VocabuJary.
435
estudo fif'tu:ffujm. learning
estufa ftf'tufvj f. store, hot-
house
estupidez [tjtupi'def] f. stupidity
estupido [ff'twpiffu] stupid
eternidade [itwni'&afo] f. eter-
nity
eterno [i'tsrnu] eternal
ether ['etsr] m. ==
evacuar [ive'kwar] to evacuate
evadir [ive'dir] to avoid, es-
cape
evangelho [ivv'gvfiuj m. gospel
evasao [ivv'zuu] f. evasion
evidente [ivi'&entd] evident
evitar [ivi'tar] to avoid
exacto [ (ts)i' zatu] exact
exagerar [(u)izu$d f r ar] to ex-
aggerate
exce(l)lencia [(vjifsd'lensiv] f. ex-
cellence
exce(l)lente [(is)ifsd'lentd] excel-
lent
exce(p)gdo [ (u)ifs' svu] /". excep-
tion
exce(p)lo [tf'sEtu] except
excluir [ifkluir] to exclude
executar [izdku'tar] to execute
exemplo [i'zemplu] m. example
exercito [i' zsrsrtu] m. army
exigir [izi'$i:r] to claim
exilio [i'ziityu] m. exile
existir [izif'tiir] to exist
exito ['uizitu] m. success
expectativa [ijpete'tw'e] f. ex-
pectation
expedir [ifpz'&iir] to dispatch
experUncia fffpsrt'estv] f. ex-
perience
experimento [ifpori'mentu] m.
experiment
expirar ftfpi'rar] to expire, ex-
hale
explicar ftfpU'karJ to explain
exportar [tfpu'r'tar] to ex-
port
expressive [ifprd'siwu] expres-
sive
expresso [if'presu] express
expulsar [ifpul'sar] to expel
extenso [if'tesu] extensive
extracto [iftratu] m. extract
extraordindrio [tftrvordi 'narfuj
extraordinary
extremo ftf'trumu] \ ,
extremoso fiftrd'mozuj ) ^
F.
fdbrica ['faftrikis] f. fabric
fdbricar [fvbri'kar] to manu-
facture
fdbrieo [fu 'firi:kuj m. fabrication,
manufacture
fdbula f'fabulv] f. fable
fobuloso [fuftu'loizu] fabulous
facet ['faltta] f. knife
facada [fTs'lcafo] f. stab
fa$anha [fu'suym] f. exploit
face ['fan] f. =
fachada [fv'fadv] f. fa9ade,
front
facho ['fafu] m. torch, fagot
fdcil ['fasti] easy
facilitar [fvsdli f tar] to facilitate
facto ['factu] m. fact
factura [fa 'tuns] f. facture ; bill
fada ['tadu] f. fairy, fay
fadiga [fv '&i:gie] hardship,
fatigue
fado ['fadu] m. fate, popular
song
faia [faiis] f. beech
faisca [fu'ifk'e] f. flake, flash
falar [fu'lar] to speak
falcdo [fal'kiiu] m. falcon
fa(l)lecer [fvb'ser] to die
fa(l)lecimento [fvldsi'mentu] m.
death
fa(l)lencia [fm'lesiu] f. failure
fa(l)lido [fv'liiSu] in failure
fdlso ['falsu] false
falta ['fates] f. want
f altar [fat' tar] to want
fatio ['faltuj (de) bare (of)
fama ['fume] f. fame
familia [fu'mityie] f. family
faminto [fv'mmtu] hungry
famoso fv'mo:zuj famous
fanal [fu'nal] m. lighthouse
far da ['fardv] f. uniform
fardo ['fardu] m. pack
farejar [far}' jar] to scent
farelo [fv'rdu] bran
436
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
farinha [fv'rinv] f. meal, flour
faro ['f-dru] m. scent
farpa ['farpe] f. harpoon,
grapnel
farpear [fvrpi'ar] to harpoon
farrapo [fv'rrapu] m. rag
fartar [fur' tar] to satiate
farto [ fartu] satiated
fastio [fuftiiu] m. loathsome-
fatal [fv'tatj =
fatia [fv'tiw] f. slice
fatigar [fvti'yar] to fatigue
fqto ['fatu] m. clothes
fousto ['fauftu] fortunate
favct ['faw] f. beau
favo [ favu] m. honeycomb
favor [fv'vor] m. favour
favordvel [fvvu' ravsl] favourable
faxa ['fafvj f. band
fazenda [fv'zendu] f.farm; cloth,
fazendeiro [fuzen'dviru] m. co-
lonist
fazer [fu'zer] to make, do, }
fe [ff] f. faith
febra ['febrvj f. fibre
febre [febn] f. fever
fechar [ft 'far] to shut
feclio [fufu] m, bolt, bar
fecundo [fo'kundu]
feigao /fw'svu] f. form, aure
feijao [fw'gvuj m. French beans
feio [fwu] ugly
feira ['fmraj f. fair t
feitio [fui'tiu] m. fasliion, make,
shape
feito ['fwtu] m. fact, deed
feitoria [fwtu'riv] factory
feixe ['fwfi] m. faggot
fel [fel] m. gall
felicidade [fdw'&afo] f. felicity
felicitar [fdli&'tar] m. to felici-
tate
Ftlix if di!] Felix
feliz Ifi'lif] happy
femea ['femw] f. female
feminino [fdmd'ninu] feminine
fenda ['fendv] f. chink, crack
fender [fender] to cleave
feno ['fenuj m. hay
fera ['for] f. wild beast
feretro ['fsrdtru] m. bier
feria ['ferw] f. daily wages;
pi. holidays
ferida [fd 'ri&e] f. wound
ferir [fo'rir] to wound
feroz [fd'rof] fierce
ferradura [fdrra' &urvj /. horse-
shoe
ferrdgem [fz'rragui] f. iron-
work
f err amenta [fdrrv'mentv] f. iron
tools
ferrar [fz'rrar] to shoe
ferreo ['fsrriu] iron
ferro ['fsrru] m. iron
ferrolho [fd'rrofiu] m. bolt
fertil ['fertil] fertile
ferver [fdr'ver] to boil
festa [ feftu] f. feast
festejo [ftftvsuj m. } fpgtival
festivo [frftivuj 1 1
feto ['fetu] m. fern, fetus
feudo ['feu&u] m. fee, fief
fevereiro [fevd 'rvirujm. February
fezes [ fsz'if] f. pi. dregs
fiagao [fiv'svuj f. spinning
fiador [fits r &or] m. bail
fianQa [fi'vsv] f. security, bail
fiar [fi'ar] to spin
ficar [fi'kar] to remain, become
fidctlgo [fi'&algu] m. nobleman
fiel [fid] faithful
figado ['fiyv&u] m. liver
figo rfcy m - fig
fiffueira [fi'ffnr*] f- fig-tree
ftta, fileira ['file,
file, rank
fttha ['fifaj f. daughter
filho ['fifiuj m. son
filial [filial] f. =
filtro ['fittruj m. filter
fim [fi] m. end
finado [fi'naffuj dead
final [fi'nal] =
findar [fm'dar] to terminate
fineza [fi'nezi}] f. fineness, civility
fingir [fi'&ir] to feign
fio [fiu] m. thread
firma f'firmvj f. firm, signature
firmar [fir 'mar] to settle, to
sign
fir me ['firmd] firm
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
437
fiscal [fif'kal] =
ftta rftiv] f. ribbon
fixar [fik'sar] to fix
fixo f'fixsu] fixed
flexivel [ftek'sivst] flexible
floco ['floku] m. flock, flake
flor [ftor] f. flower
florescer [flurtf'serj to flourish
floresta [flu'rsftu] f. forest
fluctuar [flutu'ar] to float
fluido [ flu'id'uj m. fluid
focinho [fu'sijiuj m. snout
foco ['fclku] m. focus
fofo I fofu] soft, spongy
fogao [fu'gvu] m. hearth, stove
fogoso [fu'gozu] fiery
foguete [fu'getd] m. rocket
folar [fu'lar] m. Easter-gift
folgar [fol'gar] to rest, rejoice
folha f'fofiv] f. leaf
folhear [fofo'ar] to turn over
the leaves
folheto [fu'fietu] m. pamphlet
fome f'fojmd f. hunger
fonte ['fontd] f. fountain, spring
fora ['forv]' abroad; de with-
out
foral [fu'ral] m. charter
forca ['forkvj f. gallows, gibbet
forgo, ['forsv] strength, force
forQado [fur'sadu] m. galley-
slave
forgar [fur'sar] to force, compel
forcdso [fur'sozu] necessary
forja ['forjvj f. forge
forma ['form's] form
forma ['form's] f. mould
for mar [fur 'mar ] to form
formiga [fur'migv] f. ant
formdso [fur'mozu] beautiful
fornalha [fur'nato] f. furnace
forno f'fornuj m. oven
forrar [fu 'rrar] to line
fdrro ['form] m. lining
fortaleza [furtv'lezv] f. fortress
forte f'fortdj strong
f ortificar [furtafi'liar] to fortify
fortuna [fur 'turns] f. fortune
fosso ['fosuj m. ditch
foz [f.yfj f. mouth
fraco ['fralzu] weak
fractura [fra'turu] f. fracture
frade ['frafo] m. monk, friar
frdgil f'fr>l] fragile
franco f'frvku] frank, loyal;
post-paid
frango, -a ['frvgu, -v] chicken
franqueza [frv'kezv]. f. frank-
ness
franquia [fru'ki'.v] f. post-pay-
ment
fraqueza [frn'lzezie] f. weakness
frasco ['frafku] m bottle
fraternal^ fraterno [frvtdr 'nal,
frv'tsrnu] fraternal
frecha ['frefe] f. arrow
frbclieira Lfrej**r*] f- loop-
hole
fregues [frs'gff] m. customer
frei [frw] m. monk, brother
freio [fr'mu] m. bit, bridle
freira ['fruiru] f. nun
freixo ['frv]>fu] m, ash-tree
f rente ['frinte] f. front-side
frequentar [frdkwen'tar] to fre-
quent
frequente [frQ'kwente] frequent
fresco ['frefku] fresh
fretar [frd'tar] to freight
frete [ frste] m. freight
frieza [frf'ezv] f. coldness
frio [friuj cold
fronteira [frdn tvirv] f. frontier
frota ['frotv] f. feet
frouxo rfrofii] slack, loose
fructa [ frute] f. fruit
fructifero [fru'tifdru] fructi-
ferous
fructo ['frutu] m. fruit
fuga ['fugs] f. flight
fugir [fu'sir] to fly
fulminar [fulmi'nar] to fulmi-
nate
fumar [fu 'mar] to smoke
fumo ['fumuj m. smoke
fundagdo [fundu'svu] f. foun-
dation
fundar [fun'dar] to found
fundigao [fundisvu] f, melting,
fusion, casting-house
fundir [fun'dir] to found
funeral [fund' rat] m. =
funil [fu'nil] m. funnel
funileiro [funi'lviru] m. tinker
438
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
furia ['furw] f. fury
furioso [furt'ozu] furious
furtar [fur 'tar J to rob, steal
furto [ furtuj m. theft
fuso f'fuzuj m. spindle, spool
futil ['futttj futile
futuro [fu'turuj m. future
fuzilar [fuzi'lar] to shoot
0.
gabar [gv'bar] to praise
gabinete [gufti'netdj m. study,
closet
gado ['gaffu] m. cattle
gaiola [gal'olvj f. cage
gaivao [gai'vuu] m. martinet
galgar [gal' gar] to climb up
galgo ['galgu] m. greyhound
ga(l)lego [gv'le&u] m. porter
Gd(l)lia['galiv] f. Gaul, Gallia
ga(l)Hcismo [gvli'sigmii] m. Galli-
cism
ga(l)linha [gv'Ujiv] f. hen
ga( l)liriheiro [gvli 'jiwiruj m .
poulterer
ga(l)lo ['galu] m. cock
galope [gv'lopd] m, gallop
game(l)la [g.u 'mdv] f. porringer,
bathing-vat
gancho f'gvfuj m. hook, hair-
pin
gangrena [gii 'grenv] m. gangrene
ganlnar [ga'yiar] gain, earn
gariho ['gayiu] m. gain, profit
ganir [gu'nir] to howl
ganso f'gusu] m. goose
garfo ['garfuj m. fork
gargalhada [gvrg's' flad'e] f.
laughter
garganta [gvr' gvnfe] f. throat
garoto [gv'rotu] m. street-arab
garra f'garrvj f. claw, paw
garrafa [gu'rrafv] f. bottle
garrido [gu'rri&u] nice, smart
gastar [gvftar] to spend
gasto f'gaftuj m. expense
gato ['gatu] m. cat
gatuno [gv'tuno] m. rogue
gdvea ['gavtv] m. scuttle
gaz [gaf] m. gas
gazeta [gTe'zetu] f. gazette, news
paper
gazua [gv'zu'.u] pick-lock
geito ['jvttuj m. turn, skill
geitoso [$wi'tozu]_ fit, apt
gelar [&'lar] to freeze
gelea fo'lvw] f. jelly
gelo ['selu] m. ice
gemer [jd'mer] to lament
gemido [jd'miffu] m. groan
'ge(m)ma ['gemvj f. yolk
genera f'jendru] f. gender
generoso [^nd'rozu] generous
glnio ['3in}uJ m. genius, cha-
racter
gengiva fee 'siive] f. gums
genro f'gerru] m. son-in-law
'genie [ ' $entd] f. people
gentil [$8n'ti:l] genteel
gentio [gen'ttiu] m. heathen,
pagan
geral [^d'ral] general
germdnico [gdr'muniku] German
germinar [^drmi'nar] to germi-
nate
gesso f'gesu] m. gypsum
'gesto ['seftu] m. gesture
ginja ['513] f. common cherry
girar [$i'rar] to turn, move
round
girasol foirv'solj m.
giro [' fiiru] m. circulation
glacial [glv'sial] =
gttria ['glorw] f. glory
glorificar [glurdfi 'JcarJ to glorify
glorioso [gluri'ozu] glorious
goivo ['gotvuj m. gillyflower
gola ['golv] f, collar
golfo L'golfu] m. gulf
goloso [gu'lozu] lickerish
golpe ['goipdj ni. blow
go(m)ma [ r gomv] f. gum
gordo ['gordu] fat, greasy
gordura [gur'durv] f. grease
gorgeta [gur'getv] f. gratuity
gdrro ['gorru] m. cap
gosar [gu'zar] to enjoy
gpso [gozu] m. enjoyment
gosiar [guf'tar] to like
gosto ['goftuj m. taste, pleasure
gostosamente [guftozv 'mentd] with
pleasure
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
439
gostoso [guf'tozu] savoury
go(t)ta ['gotv] f. drop
go(t)tejar [guti'gar] to drop
governar [guvdr'nar] to govern
governo [gu'vernu] m. govern-
ment
graga ['grasv] f. grace, elegance
gracejar [grusi'$ar] to joke, jest
gracioso [grvsfr' ozu] graceful
grade [grafo] f. grating
grado [' gra&u] m. rank, will
granadeirp [grvnv' fteirv] m.
grenadier
grand&za[grvn'dezv] f. grandeur
grangear [grvg1>'ar] to obtain
graniso [grv'niizu] m. hail
grdo [gruu] m. grain, corn
grasnar [grvg'nar] to croak
gratidao [grvti'duu] f. gratitude
grata ['gr&tuj grateful
yratuito [grv'tuttvj gratuitous
grave ['gravd] =
gravura [grv'vu:rvj f. engraving
graxa ['grafvj f. blacking
grelha ['grvfivj f. roaster
gremio f'gremtu] m. guild, cor-
poration
grillo ['grilu] m. cricket
grisalho [gri'zaftu] greyish
grito ['gritu] m. scream, cry
grosa I'grjzv} f. gross
groselha [gru'zvfo] f. currant
grosseiro [gru'svfru] clumsy
yrosso ['grosuj big, thick
grunhir [gru'fiir] to grunt,
grumble
grupo ['grupu] m. group
guarda ['guardv] f. guard
guarda- chuva [gwar&u f fu:w] m,
umbrella
guarda-livros [gwar&v 'li:vrufj m.
book-keeper
guardanapo
napkin
guarda-portuo [givar&vpur 't
m. porter
guardar [gwvr'dar] to keep,
preserve
guerra ['gerrv] f. war
guerreiro [gs'rr^ruj m. warrior
guia ['ffi'Vj m. and f. guide
guiar [yi'ar] to guide
guindaste [gm'dafte] m. crane
gy(m)ndsio [^i'naziu] m. gym-
nasium
gy(m)ndstico [gi'naftiku] gym-
nastic.
H.
(h)dUl ['am] able
(h)obilitar [eMi'tar] to enable,
qualify
habitafdo [afiitv'svuj f. habitation
hdbito ['afoitu] m. habit
habitual [ubitu'al] =
Jiabituar [vbitu f ar] to accustom
hdlito ['alitu] m. breath
harmonia fermu'niv] f. harmony
hasta f'aftvj f. spear, lance
haste ['aftd] stem
hastear [vfti'ar] to hoist
haver [v'ver] to have
haveres [v'verif] m. pi. fortune
hebreu, -a [i'breu] Hebrew
hediondo [ify'dndu] hideous
helice ['elisd] m. helix, screw-
propeller &^k ,
helvetica [il'vstiku] Helvetic
her a ['erv] f. ivy
heranqa [i'riisv] f. inheritance
herdade [ir'da&d] f. heritage
herdar [ir'dar] to inherit
herdeiro [ir'dairu] m. heir
herde [i'roi] m. hero
heroico [i'roiku] heroical
herva ['srvuj f. herb, grass
hesitar [izi'tar] to hesitate
(h)iate [ f }a,td] m. yacht
hilaridade [Uteri' d adz] f. hilarity
hipp6dromo [i'po&rumoj m. race-
course
hirto ['irtuj stifiF 7 rigid
historiador [ifturiu' &or] m.
historian
historico [if'toriku] historical
historia fif'tor^J f. history
hoje ['o$ij to-day
hollandes [ol'Un'def] m. Dutch
(h)ombro ['dmbruj m. shoulder
homem ['omui] man
homendgem
age
homicida [u
murderer
m. hom-
m. and f.
440
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
homicidio [umd'si:&iu] m. murder
honesto [u'nsstu] honest
(hjontem ['ontu}] yesterday
hora ['orv] f. hour
horriv el [o 'rrivzlj \ , . , 1
horrordsoforrurosuj \ horllble
horta ['ortvj f. kitchen-garden
hortaliga [ortv'lisvjf. vegetables
hortela [ortd'lvj mint
hortelao [ortd'luu] m. gardener
horto ['ortuj m. garden
hospeddgem [ofpd'&a$vi] f. hos-
pitality
hospedaria [ofpd&v'riiv] m. lodg-
ing-house
hospede f'ofpdda] m. guest
hospital [ofpi'tal] m. =
hostil [of tit] hostile
humano [u'mvno] human
humido ['umi&u] damp
humilde [u'mildd] humble
hungaro ['tiguruj m. Hungarian
Hungria [u f gri:v] f. Hungary
I.
Iberico [i'bsrikuj Iberian
igar [i'sarj to hoist
ida ['iifre] f. going
idade [i'&afo] /". age
idioma [iffii'om*] m. idiom
idolatra [i'folvtrv] idolatrous
idolo f'i'duluj m. idol
idoso [i'&ozu] aged
ignobil [ig'nobil] ignoble
ignorante [ignu'rvntd] ignorant
ignoto [ig'notuj unknown
igualar [igwv'larj to equal
igualha [i'gwafie] f. like
ilha ['itfvj f. isle
ilharga [i'liargv] f. flank, side
i(l)legal [ild'galj =
impeto ['imp9tu] m. impetuosity
impetuoso [impdtu'ozu] im petuous
impio [im'piio] impious
implorar fimplu 'rarj to implore
impor [im'por] to impose
importagcio [impurtv' svu] f. im-
portation
importante ftmpur'tvnte] im-
portant
importar fimpur'tarj to import
importe [im'portd] m. cost, sum
importune [wipur'tuno] m. im-
portune
impossivel [impu'sivel] impos-
sible
impfoto [im'poftu] m. duty
impostor [impuf'tor] m. =
imprensa [im'presu] f. press
impressao [imprd'suu] f. im-
pressidn, print
impresso [mi'prssu] printed
imprimir [imprz'mir] to print
improviso [impru 'vi:zuj un-
foreseen
imprudente [wipru' tfentz] im-
prudent
impune [im'pune] unpunished
inaudito [inau'&itu] unheard of
incendio [I'send^u] m. confla-
gration
incenso [i'sesu] m. incense
inchar fi'far] to swell
incidente [isi'ffente] m. inci-
dent
inclinado [ikli'na&u] inclined
incluir [iklu'ir] include
incluso [I'lduzu] enclosed
inco(m)modo [I'lcomu&u] inconve-
nient, s. m. molestation
incorrer [iku'rrer] to incur
incredulo [i'kre&ulu] incredulous
incrivel [I'Ttrivcl] incredible
inculto [i'kultu] incult
incumbir [ilcum'bir] to charge
indagar [mdv'gar] to inquire
indemnisar [mddmni f zar] indem-
nify, compensate
independente [inddpendentd] in-
dependent
indice ['indisd] m. index
indi(f)feren$a [mdifd 'resv] /. in-
difference
indigena [m'digdnv] m. indi-
genous
indigente [indi'jentd] indigent
indigno [m'dignu] unworthy
indio ['mdiu] Indian
indistincto [indaf'tintu] indis-
tinct
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
441
individuo [ulj'vifrwu] m. indi-
vidual
indizlvel [mcU'zi.-vclJ unutterable
indole ['induh] m. character
indomito [in'domitu] untamed
indulto [I'duUu] m. privilege
industria [in' duiftriu] f. industry
induzir [indu'zir] to induce
inedito [I'ns&itu] imprinted
infa(l)Uvel [ife'liivet] infallible
infdncia [I'fusieJ f. infancy
infante [I'fvnte] infant
inferior [if or}' or] =
inferno [I'fsrnu] m. hell
Inftmo [ 'tfimuj verymean ,
meanest
influir [iftu'ir] to influence
influencia fiflu' esw] f. influence
informe ft' forme] formless
ingenuo [I'gsnuo] ingenuous
ingrato [i'gratu] ungrateful
inhospito [in 'of pita] inhospitable
inimigo [inz'imgu] m. enemy
injusto [i$ufhi] unjust
i(n)nocente [inu'sentz] innocent
inquieto [iki'etu] uneasy
inquirir [ikd'rir] to inquire
insahibre [isv 'luftrd] insalubrious
insecto [i'stuj m. insect
inserir [lS3 r rir] to insert
insignificante fiszgnifi 'kuntd] in-
significant
insipido [i'si:pi&u] insipid
instar [if 'tar] to insist
instrucgoo [iftru'svu] f. in-
strucion
instruir [iftru 'ir] to instruct
insua ['isuvj f. islet
insulto [I'suttu] m. insult
insurgente fisur'genfo] insurgent
mtegro [mtdgruj entire, righ-
teous
inteiro [m'tmru] ire, whole
inte(l)ligivel [intzli '^L'vsij intelli-
gible
intengao [inte'svu] /*. intention
intender [inten'der] to intend
intento [in'tentu] m. intention
interesseiro [intdrz' suiru] selfish
inter jeigao [mtdrjvt'svuj f. in-
terjection
interlocutor [inhrluku, 'tor] m. =
intermedia [inter 'meffiuj m. me-
diation
interno [m'ternoj m. internal
interprete [in'terprztej m. in-
terpreter
interrogar [interru 'gar] to inter-
rogate
interromper [interrom 'per] inter-
rupt
interrupto [inte 'rrutuj inter-
rupted
intestino [mtjf'tiinu] m. intestine
intimo ['mtimuj intimate
intrepido [in'trepidn] intrepid
intruso [m'truzo] m. intruder
inundar [inun'dar] to overflow
inutil [i 'nu:tilj useless
invctdir [ivu r dir] to invade
invdlido [I'valiffu] invalid
invasao [wv'zvu] f. invasion
inveja [i'vs^v] f. envy
invengcio [we'suu] f. invention
invernal [iwr 'nal] winterly
inverno [i'vermi] m. winter
invest ir [imf'tir] to invest
invocar [ivu'lcar] to invocate
ir [i:r] to go *-o|
iro, ['iris] f. wrath
irma [ir'mv] f. sister
irmanar [irmv'nar] to match
irrational [irrvsfu 'naij irra-
tional
irregular [irr2g.u'lar] =
irritar [irri'tar] to irritate
irrupgao [irrup 89uJ f. irruption
isento [i'zentu] exempt, free
J.
Jd [ga] already
jacintho [gv'sintuj m. jacinth
jacta ['jalctu] m. throw
jamais [sa'maif] (n)ever
Janeiro [$v 'nvwu] m. January
jane(l)la [gv'nslie] f. window
jantar [^n'tar] m. dinner
Japdo [su'piio], a Japan
japones [^pu'nef] Japanese
jar dim [$vr'di] m. garden
jarra ['game] f. jar
j azer [gu 'zer] to lie f"'
jaziga [gv'ziigu] m. grave
442
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
jejuar [gdgu'ar] to fast
jejum f&'gft] m. fasting
Jerdnymo fed'ronimu] Jeroni-
mo
Joao [jw'vu] John
joelho [ f $wu(iu] m. knee
Jogo ['joguj m. play
joia ['32113] f. jewel
Jorge [ ' &rd] m. George
jornada [gur'naffis] f. journey
jornal [gur'nat] m. journal
Jose [gu'zs] m. Joseph
joven sovui] m. and f. young
man or woman
jitdeo, judia [au'&eu, z
Jew, Jewess
jugo ['zugu] m. joke
juiz [ju'if] m. judge
julgar feul'gar] to judge
iulho ['zuftu] m. July
junco ['$uku] reed
junta [' ^iintTs] f. juncture, as-
sembly
juror [311' rar] to swear
juro ['sum] m. rent, interest
justiga [^uj'tisv] f. justice
justificar [$uftdfi"kar] to justify
justo [suftu] just
juventude [guven'tudj] f. juveni-
lity
L.
Ldbio ['latyu] m. lip
laQO ['la.su] m. knot
lacrar [Iv'krarJ to seal
ladear [lu&i'ar] to flank
ladeira [le'&uire] f. declivity
lado I'lsidu] m. side
ladrao, ladra [Iv'ffrvu, la, '&rvj s.
thief
ladrilho [Iv'drlfru] m. brick,
tile
lagar [Iv'gar] m. wine-press
lagarta [lu'gartv] f. caterpillar
lagarto [Iv 'gartuj m. lizard
lage ['lag] f. flagstone
lago ['lagu] m. lake
Idgrima ['lagrimv] f. tear
lama ['Ivmej f. dirt, mud
lambareiro [Ivmbu'rviru] glut-
tonous
lamber [Ivm'ber] to lick
lamentar [lumen' tar] to lament
Idmpada ['lunipvcTv] lamp
lampejar [lump}' gar] to shine,
lighten
langa ['lusv] f. lance
lan$ar [Iv'sarJ to throw, vomit
lance ['lusd] m. throw, occasion
lancha ['IvfsJ f. launch
lango ['Ivsu] m. throw, distance
languir [Iv'gir] to languish
lanifero [Iv 'niforuj wool-bearing
lanterna [ten' terms] f. lantern
lapa ['lapis] f. cave, den
lapidar [lepi'&ar] lapidary
laranja [lu'rvgv] f. orange
lareira [lu'rvirv] f. fireplace
largar [Ivr'gar] to let go
largo ['largu] large, ample
largueta [Ivr'geziB] f. largess,
generosity
largura [Ivr'gurv] f. wideness
lasca ['lafkvj f. fragment
Idstima ['la/time] f. pity
lastro ['laftru] m. ballast
lata ['late I f. tin-plate
latdo [lu'tuu] m. brass
lateral [lete'rat] =
latido [Iv'tii&u] m. yelping
latim [ITS 'ti] m. Latin
latino [lis'tiinu] m. Latin
latoeiro [Ivtu'viru] brazier
lavadeira [luve'dviru] f. laund-
ress
lavar [Iv'var] to wash
lavatorio [Ivvv 'toriu] m. washing-
stand
lavoura [lis'^orTs] f. husbandry
lavrador [luvrv ffor] m. peasant,
husbandman
lavrar [Iv'mar] to work, to till
leal [li'al] faithful, loyal
ledo [ty'iiu] lion
lebre ['IsbraJ f. hare
lectivo [le'ti:vuj scholastic
legal [Id 'gal]
legar fa 'gar] to leave, bequeath
legenda [Id'^en&is] f. legend
legwtl [ld'$i:vel] legible
legua ['Isgwu] f. mile, league
lei [IviJ f. law
leildo [lui'lvu] m. auction
leitdo [Ivi'tuu] m. sucking-pig
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
443
leite ['luito] m. milk
leiteira flvi'twrv] f. milkmaid
leito ['Ivrtu] bed, couch
leitor [Ivi'tor] reader
leitura [Ivt'turu] f. lecture,
reading
lenibranga [lem'brvsv] f, re-
membrance
lembrar [lem'brar] remember
leme f'lemd] m. helm
lengo ['lesu] m. handkerchief
lengol [le'sol] sheet
lenJia ['Ivjiv] f. wood
lente ['lentd] s. f. =; s. m. pro-
fessor, reader
Unto [ lentu] slow
leque ['lefo] m. fan
ler [ler] \>Q read I ^
lesma ['legmv] f. slug
leste ['lefts] m. East
Utra ['letne] f. letter, type,
change
letreiro [Id 'truiru] m. inscription
levantar [Idmn 'tar] to raise, lift
levar [Id'var] to carry
leve ['lew] light
liber dade [litor'dafo] f. liberty
libra ['lifirie] f. pound
licenga [li'sesv] f. permission,
leave
licito ['li'situj lawful
lida ['liifa] f. toil, labour
lide [ r li:fo] f. combat, fight
liga ['li:gl f- garter; alliance
ligadura [liys'&wrs] f. ligature
ligar [li'gar] to tie
ligeiro [li'getruj light, slight
lilaz [li'Uf] f. lilac
lima ['limvj f. file
limao [li'mvu] m. lemon
limit e [li'mitdj m. limit
limoeiro [limu 'isiru] m. lemon-
tree
limpar [Urn' par] to clean
limpo I'llmpu] clean, neat
Undo I'llnduJ beautiful
lingua ['llguvj f. tongue, lan-
guage
linha f'liyivj f. line
linho ['liyiuj m. linen
liquido ['li:~ki&u] liquid
Us ['liriu, li:f] m. =, lily
liso ['liizu] smooth
lisongear [lizogi'ar] to flatter
livido ['li:vi&u] livid
livrar [li'vrarj to deliver, save
livraria [livru ' ri:u] f. library
livre f'li:vrdj free
lixo ['liiju] m. filth,
lobo ['lobuj m. wolf
lodo f'loduj m. mud
logo I'loftu] directly
lograr [lu'grar] to obtain, suc-
ceed
logro [logru] m. cheating, fraud
lombo I'ldmbuJ m. loins
lona ['lows] f. sail-cloth
longe ['logt] far
longinguo [lo'^Jcivu] remote
longo ['iQgu] f. long
louca ['lorn] f. table-plate, china
louco ['loku] mad
louro ['loruj fair; m, laurel
lousa riozv] f. slate
louvar [lo 'var] to praise
lucro ['lukruj m. profit
lugar [lu'gar] m. spot place
lume ['lu:md] m. fire
lusitano, luso ['luizu] Portuguese
lustre I'luftre] m. lustre, gloss
luta ['lute] f. fight
luto ['lutuj m. mourning
luva f'lu:vvj f. glove
luxo ['lufu'j m. luxury
luz [lu:f] f f. light
luzir [lu'ziir] to shine
lyceu [li'seuj m. lyceum.
M.
Magd [ms'svj apple
macaco [mv'kaku] m. monkey
magada [mu'safre] f. blow with
a mace
mdchina ['makinv] f. machine
macio [mv'siiu] smooth, soft
madrugada [muffru' ga&e] f. day-
break
maduro [mv'&uro] ripe
mae fmi*] m. mother
magnifico [mag.'nifilcu] magnifi-
cent
mdgua f'maguv] f. bruise;
grief
444
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
mayro ['magruj m. meagre, lean
maioria [mvjii'ri:v] mayoralty,
majority
mais [maif] more
malentendido [malentSn'did'uJ m.
misunderstanding
malevolofmv'levulujm.malevoleni
malha ['mafia] f. mash
mallogro [mv'logru] m. failure
malvado [mal'vafru] m. wicked
mamifero [mv'mifzru] m. mam-
miferous
mancebo [mu'sebu] m. youth
mancha ['mvfv] spot, stain
manco ['muku] lame
mandar [mun'dar] to command,
send
maneira [me'nuir'e] f. manner
manga ['mugu] f. sleeve
manha ['mvjiv] f. handiness,
cheat
manha [nw'yiv] f. morning
mania [inns' nine] f. mania,
madness
manifestar [mundfif'tar] mani-
fest
mano, mana ['mvnu, 'mums] s.
brother, sister
manso ['mvsu] f. tame
mania f'mvntv] f. blanket, horse-
cloth
manteiga [mvn 't&tgis] f. butter
manto ['miintu] m. mantle
mao [mvuj f. hand
mar [mar] m. sea
maravilha [murv'vifa] marvel,
wonder
mar ca, ['marku] f. mark /**+~*p
margo ['marsuj m. Marcn
mare [mis' re:] f. tide
mdrgem ['margvtj f. border
marido [mu'ri:&u] m. husband
marinha [mu'riyiv] f. marine,
navy
marinheiro [mvri 'nieiru] m.
mariner
marmelo [nwr'mslu] m. quince
maroto [mu'rolu] m. knave
marques [mvr'keif] m. marquis
tnartello [mur'telu] m. hammer
mas fmvfj but
mascara / 'mafJcvrvJ f. mask
massa f'masvj f. haste
mastigar [mvfti'garj to chew
mastro ['maftru] m. mast
mata ['mate] f. wood, forest
matdborrao [matebu'rrvu] m.
blotting- paper
matar [mu'tar] to kill
maternal [mvtwnal] 1 maternal
materno [mv Urnu] \
matinal [mieti'nal] early
mato ['maiu] m. thicket, wood
mdximo ['masimu] greatest,
principal
mediano [msjty'vnu] middling
medico ['ms&iku] m. medical
medida [md'cfii&e] f. measure
medir [md'&ir] to measure
medo I'med'u] m. fear, ff^^i'\^
medrar [md'ffrar] to tnrive
meigo ['mvfguj gentle, meek.
meio [mwiu] m. half, middle
mel [mrtj m. honey
meldo [md'lvu] m. melon
melhor [m'i'fior] better
membro ['membru] m. member
memdria [mo'moriTs] f. memory
mengao [me'sau] f. mention
mendigo [m8n'di:gu] m. beggar
menor [md'norj minor
menos ['menuf] less
mensal fme'satj monthly
mente ['mentdj m. mind
mentir [men'tir] to lie
mentira [men'tirv] f. lie
mercado [mdr'kaffu] m. market
mercadoria [mdrke&u'riiv] f.
ware, goods
merce [mdr'sej f. mercy
mercieiro [mars} 'v}ru] m. mercer,
retailer
merecer [mdrd'ser] to deserve
merenda [mz'rendv] f. afternoon
tea
mergulhar [mdrgu'fiar] to sub-
merge
mes [mef] m. month
mesa ['mezv] f. table
mesmo ['megmuj same
mestre, mestra ['meftw, 'me/tors]
s. master, teacher
metade [md'ta&d] f. half
metrico ['meiriku] metrical
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
445
meter [md'terj =
mexer [mi'fer] to move
www [mf'arj to mew
tnigallia [mi'gvriv] f. crumb
milagre [mi'lagn] m. miracle
['mirfvi f. mile
I'mvfiuJ m. millet
['miimu] caress, mimic
mimoso [mi'mozu] tender
mina ['mi:ws] f. mine
mineiro [mi'nviru] m. mineral
MinJio I'mijiuJ m. Minho, pro-
vince and river of Portugal
minima f'mi:nimuj least
midlo [mt'olu] m. crumb; brains
mirar [mi'rar] to look at
miseria [mi'zcr^] misery
missa ['mists] f. mass
mister [mtftsr] necessary
misturar [miftu'rar] to mix
mo [mo] f. mill-stone
mdbil ['moftil] movable
moUlia [mubi'tyvj f. furniture
mocJio ['mofuj m. owe
mdQO I'-mosuJ young
moda ['mQ&v] f. fashion
moderar [mufo 'rarj to moderate
modesto [mu'&eftu] modest
mddico ['mofrikuj moderate
modista [mu'diftv] milliner
modo ['moduj m. mode, manner
moeda [mu'e&v] f. coin
to grind
spring
moldura [mol'duiris] frame
molliar [mu'fiar] to moisten,
wet
molle ['mold] soft; lax
memento [mu'mentuj m* moment
monarc(h)a [mu'narkvj m. mo-
narch
monje ['motfj m. monk
monstro fmoftru] m. monster
montanfia [mon'tvpu] f. moun-
tain
monte ['mdntdj Mount
morada [murad'a] f. dwelling,
abode
moralidade [murvli'dadd] f. mo-
rality
morango [murvgu] m. straw-
berry
morar [mu'rar] to dwell
morder [mur'der] to bite
morrer fmu'rrerj to die
morte ['mortd] f. death
morto ['moriu] dead
mosca ['mofkvj f. fly
mostarda [muf'tardv] f. mustard
mosto ['moftu] m. must
mostrador [muftrv '&or] m. coun-
ter ; dial-plate
mostrar [mus'trar] to show
mouraria [morv 'riiv] f. quarter
of the Moors in Lisbon
mouro f'moru] m. Moor
movel ['movsl] m. piece of fur-
niture
mover [mo'ver] to move
movimento [movi'mentu] m. mo-
vement
muar [mu r a,r] m. and adj.
mule, mulish
muda ['mu&e] f. change
mudar [mu'&ar] to change
mudo ['mu&u] dumb, silent
mugir [mu'gir] to low, to roar
muito ['mulntu] much
mula ['mulvj f. (she-)rnule
mulher [mu'fisr] f. woman, wife
multa ['muttv] f. fine
mundano [mundunu] worldly
mundo ['mundu] m. world
muralha [mu'rafo] f. wall
murchar [mur'far] to wither
murmurio [mur'mu:no] m. mur-
mur
muro ['muru] m. wall
musgo f'musgu] m. moss
musica ['muzikvj f. music
mutuo ['niutwuj mutual
myope [ r mi:upd] short-sighted
mysterio [mif'tertuj m, mystery
N.
Nabo ['nafiu] m. turnip
nada ['na&u] nothing
namorado [n&mu'rad'u] amorous
ndo [wen] no
nariz [nv'rifj m. nose
narragao [nvrrv'svu] f. narra-
tion
446
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
nascen$a [wef'sesu] f. birth,
origin
nascente [nvf'sento] m. spring
nascido [nvf'sid'u] m. born
nascimento [nvfsi'mentu] m. birth
native [nu'tiivu] native
natureza [nutu'rezv] f. nature
naufrdgio [nau'fragiu] m. ship-
wreck
ndufrago ['naufrvguj m. ship-
wrecked
naval [nu'val] =
navalha [we 'vaflis] f. razor,
pocket-knife
nave ['navs] f. =
navegdvel [nvvd 'gavel] navigable
navio [nu'vi:u] m. ship
nebuloso [ndftu'loizu] foggy
necessidade [nasdsi' ftaffd] f. neces-
sity
negar [na'garj to deny
negociante [ndQusfr'vntd] m. mer-
chant
negro ['negru] (m. =*), black
nenhum [nd ' jium] none
neto ['nstu] m. grandson
nevar [nd'varj to snow
neve ['nsva] f. snow
nevoeiro [ndvu'vvru] in- fog
niriho I'nijiu] m. nest
nitido ['ni;ti&u] neat
nd ['no] m. knot
ndbre ['ntibrd] noble
no$ao [nu'suu] f. notion
nddoa ['no&wvj f. spot, stain
noite f'noHd] f. night
noiva ['n&t-ve] f. bride
nojo ['noguj m. tedium, disgust
nome ['novnd] m. name
nomear [numt'ar] to name
nor a ['nyre] f. daughter-in-law
nos [nof] we
nos [nuf] us
nota ['note] f. note
notar [nu'tarj to note, mark
notdvel [nu'tavsl] notable
noticia [nu'tvsw] f. notice
nova ['novu] f. news
novMlo [nu'velu] m. clue
novo ['novuj new
nu [nu:] bare, naked
nuca ['nuTc'e] f. neck
nu(l)lo I'nulu] null
numero ['numaruj m. number
numeroso [nunid'rozu] numerous
nunca ['nukv] never
ntipcias f'nupsivf] f. pi. wed-
ding
nutrir [nu'triir] to nourish
nuvem ['nu:wtj f. cloud
0.
Obedecer [ofofrd'ser] to obey
obediente [ofid&'i'entd] obedient
obito I'dbitu] m. death
obrar [o'frrarj to work
obrigagao [obrigv'svu] f. obli-
gation
obrigado [obri'ga&u] obliged
obscuro [ofyf']m:ru] dark, obs-
cure
obsequiar [oftdZdkt' ar] to oblige
observagao [obdSdrvo's^u] f. ob-
servation
obstdculo [ofyf'takuhij m. ob-
stacle
obter [ofo'ter] to obtain
o(c)casido [okvzi r vu] f. occasion
o(c)cidente [o&' dentd] m. west r
Occident
o(c)correr [oku'rrer] occur
ocio [' osftu] m. leisure
6culo f'oJculuJ m. eyeglass
odio ['otyu] m. hatred
oeste ['weftd] west
o(f)fender [ofen'der] to offend
o(f)fensa [o'fesvj f. offense
o(f)ferecer [ofdrd'ser] to offer
o(f)ficial[of9si'al] official, officer
o(f)ficina [ofd'siin'e] f. office,
(work) shop
o(f)fieio [o'fiis'iu] m. charge
olhar [o 'ftar] to look at
olho ['oftu] m. eye
oliveira [oli 'vvirvj f. olive-tree
onde [dndd] where
opiniao [opin^'un] f. opinion
o(p)por [o'porj to oppose
o(p)portuno [opur'tumu] oppor-
tune
6(p)timo ['otimu] best, very good
ora ['orv] now
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
447
oragao [orv'suu] f. prayer,
clause
orar [o'rar] to pray
ordem ['ordvi] f, order
ordenado [ordd'na&u] m. salary
orelha [u'rvfiv] f. ear
orgao ['orgvu] organ
orgulho [or'gufiuj m, pride
oriente [orl'entd] m. orient, east
orificio [or^'fiisiu] m. orifice
origem [o'ri:$ui] f. origin
ornar [or'nar] to adorn
orvalho [or'vaftu] m. dew
osso ['osuj m. bone
ourives [o'riiv^f] m. goldsmith
euro [o'ru] m. gold
ousado [o'za&a] bold, daring
ousar [o'zar] to dare
outono [o'to:nu] m. autumn
outrem f'otrvi] somebody else
outro f'otruj another
ouvido [o 'miffu] m. hearing, ear
ouvir [o'vir] to hear
ovelha [u'vufo] f. sheep
ovo f'ovuj m. egg
oxdld [ofu'la] would to God!
P.
Pachorra [pv'forrv] f. forbea-
rance, patience
pacificp [pis 'si:fiku] peaceable ;
pacific
pacote [pu'krtd] m. packet
pa$o ['pasu] m. palace
pddaria [pa&v'ri:vj f. bakery
padecer [pvfo'ser] to suffer
pddeiro [pa'&viru] baker
padrdo [pu'&ruu] m. pattern
padririho [jm'&riyiu] m. god-
father
pai [pai] m. father
paga ['pagu] f. pay(ment)
pagamento [pu$u'mentu] w?.(pay-)
ment
pagao [pie 'gvuj m. pagan
pdgem ['pajvtf m. page
paisdgem [pai'za^] f. lands-
cape
pais [pisi:f] m. country
paixao [pai'fuu] f. passion
pdldcio [pu'la&u] m. palace
palavra [pu'lavru] f. word
polha ['pads] f. straw
pdllido f'palid'uj pale
pdlma ['pcdmu] palm(-tree)
palmeira [pal'm^rie] f. palm-
tree
pdlpar [pal' par] to tonch
pdlpebra [ 'palprtrvj f. eyelid
pancada [pv'Tta&v] f. blow
panella [pu 'nelv] f. kitchen-pot,.
cooker
panno ['pvnu] m. cloth
pdo [pvu] m. bread
papel [pie' pel] m. paper
para ['p&rvj for
parabens [puru 'bvifj m. pi. fe-
licitation,
pardgem [pv'ragvi] f. halting-
place; abode
paraiso [purv'iizu] in. Paradise
parar [pv 'rar] to halt, to dwell
partial [pur'dal] m. sparrow
pardo f'parduj grey
pavecer [purd 'serj to seem
pareddo fpurd'sifritj alike
pareddo [purd'tfeu] m. big wall,.
mole
parede [pv'refoj f. wall
parelha [pv'rvlhv] f. pair, team
parente [pv'rentd] related (re-
lation
pardchia, paroquia [pv'rokw] f-
parish
imroc(h)o ['pariiku] m. son
parque ['parkdj m. park
parreira [pv'rrvirv] f. vine
parte ['partd] f. part
participar [pvrtesi'par] to par-
ticipate, partake
particular [pvrtiku'lar] =
partida [pur'tidv] f. depart
partido [pvr'ti&u] m. party
partir [pur'tir] to depart; to
break
pascer [puf'ser] to pasture
Pdscoa f'pafkwv] f. Easter
pasmar [peg 'mar] to puzzle, to-
be stupefied
passa [ r pasv] f. raisin
passdgem [pv'sa$ui] f. passage
passar [pu'sar] to pass
pdssaro ['pasvru] m. bird
448
Portuguese-English V ocabulary.
passear [pvsf'ar] to (take a)
walk
passeio [pv'suiu] m. walk
passo ['pa.su] m. step
pasta f'paftvj f. portfolio;
paste
2)astar fyvf^tar] to pasture
pastel [pref'tel] m. pie, pastry
pastelciro [pvftd'luiru] m. pas-
try-cook
pasto ['paftu] m. pasture
pastor [pie f tor] m. shepherd
pato ['p&tu] m. duck
patrao [pu'trvu] patron
patria f'patriv] f. native country
patricio [pv'triis'iu] m. patrician
patroa [pv'trov] f. mistress
pauta fpOMte] f. tariff; lines
pautado [pan 'ta&oj ruled
pacao [pv'viiu] m. peacock
pavilliao [pwi 'fivu] m. pavilion
paz [pafj f. peace
pe [pe] m. foot
peao [pi'uu] m. pedestrian
pega ['psse]^ piece, play
peccado [pd'ka&u] m. sin
pedaQO [pd'dasu] m. piece, bit
pedido [pd'&iiffu] m. request,
commission
pedinte [pd'ffmte] m. beggar
pedir [pd'&ir] 'to ask, beg, desire,
order Zo^
pedra [pe'&ru] f. stone
pega ['pegvj f. magpie
pegar [pz'gar] to glue, to lay
hold of
peito f'pvitu] m. breast
peixe ['pvift] m. fish
pel(7)e ['pelj f. skin
pel(l)ica [p& 'liikv] f. kid-leather
pel(l)o f'pelu] m. hair
pena ['peme] f. pain, punish-
ment; ter to be sorry
pender [pen'derj \ to hang,
pendurar fpSndu'rarJ } suspend
penedo [pd'ne&u] m. rock
penetrar [pmd'trar] to penetrate
penhor fpi'jiorj m. gift, talent
penhorar [pijiu'rarj to engage,
oblige
penitencia [pwi'tesju] f. peni-
tence
penna ['penv] f. pen, feather
pewoso [pd ' nozu] painful
pensar [pe'sar] to think
pente [penis] m. comb
pent ear fpent} f arj to comb
peqwno [pd'kenu] little
pera ['peris] pear
perante [pd'rvntd] before
perceber [pwsa'fter] to perceive
percorrer [pjrku'rrer] to run
through
per da ['perdu] f. loss
perdao [pdr'dau] m. pardon
perder [pdr'der] to lose
perdoar [pdr'dwar] to pardon
perecer [pdra'serj to perish
pereira [pd'ruirv] f. pear-tree
perfeito [por'fvituj perfect
periodo [pd'riu&u] m. period
2)ermissao [pdrmi's&uj f. per-
mission
perna ['pern's] f. leg
perola ['pcrulv] f. pearl
persa ['persu] m.&f.& a. Persian
perseguir [pdrsd'gir] to per-
secute
persiano [pdrsi>'vnu] a. Persian
pertencer [pdrie'ser] to belong
perto ['pertu] near ps**^ <*
pesado [pd'za&u] heavy
pesar [pd'zar] to weigh
pesca ['psfkvj f. fishing
pescogo [plf'kosu] m. neck
peso f'pezu] m. weight
pessego f'pesdgu] m. peach
2)essimo ['pesimu] worst, very
bad
pessoa [pd'sou] f. person
pez [pef] f. pitch
pharmdcia, f armada [fur 'masw]
f. pharmacy
photo graplio } fottigrafo [fu 'to-
grvfuj m. photograph
physico, fisico['fi:ziku]m. physical
pia [pi:v] f. trough, basin
picar [pi'karj to sting
pimenta [pi' mentis] f. pepper
piriheiro [pf>' nviru] m. pine-tree
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
449
pinlio ['pijiu] m. pine-wood
pintainho [pmtv'ijiu] m. dab-
chick
pintura [pin'tura] f. picture,
painting
piano ['pie nu] m. project
planta f'plvntv] f. plant, sole,
ground-plan
plum a [' plum's J f. feather
p6 [po] f. dust, powder
poire ['pobrej poor
pogo ['posuj m. well
poder [pu o&r] m. might, power
prato ['pratu] m. dish
prazer [prv'zer] m. pleasure
prazo ['prazu] m. term
preceder fyrasd'der] to precede
precioso [prds^'ozu] precious
preciso [prd'sizu] necessary,
precise
preqo f'presuj m. price
prefdcio fpr}'fas}uj m. preface
pregar [pre'garj to preach
pregar [pw'gar] to nail
,prego ['prsyu] nail, hat-pin
preffuigoso [prdgi'sozu] lazy
poet a, poetisa [pu'ctv, pui 'tizv] ^fpergunta [por 'guntvj f. question
" nf ^^~ '
poet
pois fpoifj now, afterwards,
then, well
polvora ['ptivurv] f. powder
poniba ['pombv] f. pigeon
pombal fpom'bal] m. dove-cot
/ P
I [p
/>
ponla f'pontvj f. point, top
ponte ['pontdj f. bridge
ponto f'pQntu] f. stitch, point
ponlual [pontio'al] punctual
por [por] to put ) <7"7
porco ['pprliu] dirty, m. hog
porque ['purkd] because; why
porta ['port's] f. door
portador [purtv'&or] m. bearer
portanto [pur'tvniuj conse-
quently
portdtil [pur'tatil] bearable,
pocket ....
porte ['portd] m. post-pay, depart-
ment
portugues [purtu 'gefj Portuguese
posse ['poso] f. possession
possivel [pu 'si:vij possible
possuir [pusu'ir] to possess
2wsta ['poftv] post
poste ['poftd] m. stake, pillar
posto ['poftu] m. place, post
posto que [poftujfo] though
pouco ['pcikuj little
poupar [po'par] to spare
'povoado [pu'vuadu] populous,
inhabited
praga f'prasv] f. place
prado ['prafru] m. meadow
praia ['prai^s] f. shore
pranto ['priintu] m. weeping
prata ['pratis] f. silver
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
fprdgw 'izu] m. pre-
judice
prtmio ['prsMiu] m. premium,
prize
prenda f'prendu] f. present,
talent
presa f'prezv] f. prey
presente [prd 'zentz] (m.) present
pressa f'prcsv] f. hurry
prestar [prtf'tar] to lend, give
prestimo f'preftimujm.iitness, use
presunto [prd'zuntu] m. ham
pretexto fprd'teftu] m. pretext
preto f'pretuj m. negro, black
prim aver a f prim's 'vervj Spring
primeiro fpri'mvtruj first
principe f'prts'ipdj m. prince
prindpiar [prisdpi'ar] to begin
prisdo [pri'zuu] f. prison
probUma fpru 'blemvj m. problem
procissao fprusi'svu] f. pro-
cession
procurar [pniku'rar] to procure,
seek
prodigio [pru' d~i:$}u] m. prodigy,
marvel
prodigo ['pro&igu] prodigal
profissao fprufi'svu] m. profes-
sion
prof undo [pru'fun&u] profound
progresso [pru'grssuj m. pro-
gress
projectil [pru'^etil] m. projectile
prdlogo [ f prolug/u] m. prologue
prome(t)ter [prumd 'ter] promise
pronto [prontu] ready
pronuncia^ fpru'nuswj f. pro-
nunciation
450
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
propor [pru'porj propose
pr6prio f'prjpnuj proper
proseguir [prusd'gir] to pro-
secute
prova ['provv] f. proof
provdvel [pru'vavsl] probable
proveito [pru'vvrtuj m. profit
prdximo f'prnsimu] next ; m.
fellow- creature
Prussia ['pruswj f. Prussia
prussiano [prusi'vnu] m. Prus-
sian
fyjsalmo f'salmu] m. psalm
piiblicar [pufjli'kar] to publish
pulmao [pul'mvu] m. the lungs
pulo ['puluj m. leap, jump
pulsagao [pulsv 'svuj f. pulsation
pulso ['puisuj m. pulse
punho f'pujiuj m. fist; ruffle
puro f'puruj pure
puxar [pu'farj to push
Quadrado [kwu'&ra&u] square
quadragesimo [kii-u&rv 'gezimu]
fortieth
quadro ['kwa&ru] m. picture
quadrupede [kum 'ffrupdfo] m.
quadruped
qual [kwal] which
qualidade [kweli'&a&d] f. quality
qualificar [kiwldfi'kar] qualify
qualquer [kwcd'ker] any
quando ['kwunduj when
quantia [kwen'tins] f. sum
quantidade [kwvnt} 'ffafoj f.
quantity
quanto ["kwvntu] how much?
as much as
quarenta [kwe f rente] forty
quarto ['Ivwartu] room
quasi ['kwazi] almost, nearly
quotorze [kis'torzd] fourteen
quatro [ kivatru] four
que fa, JciJ which; that; what?
quebrar [kz'firar] to break
queda ["ksdu] f. fall
queijo ['kyigu] m. cheese
[kvi'mar] to burn
'
quei.xa ['kwfu] f. complaint
queixo ['kvffuj m. chin
quern [kvi>] who
quente I'kentdJ hot
quer . . quer [her] whether . . or
querer [kd'rer] will, want /^
querido [kd'ri&u] beloved
questdo [ktf'tvuj f. question
quieto [kfi'etuj quiet
quinhentos [ki'jientuf] five
hundred
quinquagesimo [kwikwv 'gezimu]
fiftieth
quintet, ['kmtv] f. fifth; farm
quintal [km'tal] m. =, garden
quinto f'kmtu] fifth
quinze [ r klz9] fifteen
quotidiano [kotd&i'vnu] daily
R.
Rabeca [rrv'fakv] f. violin
rdbo ['rraftu] m. tail
raga ['rrasis] f. race
rachar [rrv far] to rend, cleave
raciocinio [rrvslu'sintuj m. rea-
son(ing)
radiante [rrvdi'vntd] radiant
rairiha [me 'im] f. queen
raio ['rraiuj m. ray, beam;
flash of lightning
raiva ['rraive] f. wrath
raiz [rru'ifj f. root
ralhar [rrv fiar] to scold
ramalhete [rrumu' fieta] m, nose-
gay
ramo ['rramu] m. branch
rapariga [rrvpa'rig.u] f. girl,
lass
rapaz [rris 'pafj m. boy, lad
raposa [rru'pozu] f. fox
raro ['rraru] rare
rasgar [rrvg'gar] to tear
rasgo f'rraggu] m. stroke, trait
raso ['rrazu] shorn
rato ['rratu] m. rat
razao [rru'zvu] f. reason
real [rri'al] =
rebocar [rrdbu'kar] to tow
recado [rrd'ka&u] m. message,
errand
reea(h)ir [rrekv'ir] to relapse
recebedor [rrdsdbd' &or] m. col-
lector
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
451
receber [rrasiberj to receive
receio [rrd'ss^u] m. fear
receoso [rrdsi'ozu] apprehensive
receita [rra'svitvj f. income
recente [m'sentd] recent
recepQao [rrdsi'svu] f. reception
rccibo [rd'sibu] m. receipt
recfproco [rr sipruku] reciprocal
recita ['rrssitv] f. representation
reclame [rra'lclvmuj m. bird-call
recobrar [rrzku'brar] to recover
recolher [rrdlcu'/ierj to gather,
with draw
recolhimento [rrakufii'mentu] m.
gathering
recompensa [rraktim'pensvj f. re-
compense
reconciliar [rrdkosyty'ar] recon-
cile [ful
reconhecidofrrd 'Uujid 'si^/thank-
recordagao [rrskurtfu ' svu] f. re-
membrance
recreio [rra'krv}uj m. recreation
rectidfo [rreti'&uu] f. rectitude
recto ['rretu] righteons
recuar [rrd'Ttwar] to draw back
recusa rrd'kuzu] f. refusal
rede ['rreddj f. net (-work)
redempgao [rradvl'sviij /. re-
demption, ransom
reduzir [rw&u'zir] reduce
reflectir [rrdfU'tirJ reflect
reflexao [rrdfls'svu] f. reflection
reflexo [rrd 'fleksuj m. reflex
refugio [m'fu&u] m. refuge,
shelter
rega ['rregvj f. irrigation, wa-
tering
rega$o [rrd 'gasuj m. lap, bosom
regador [rrd 'gv '&or] m. watering-
pot
regalo [m'galu] m. pleasure;
muff
regar [rw'garj to water
regateira [rrdgv'tatrv] f. huck-
steress
regedor [rr^d'&or] m. governor
regeneragdo [rwgdndris 'svu] f.
regeneration
reger [rrl>'$er] to govern
regicida [rr}gd 'si&is] m. and f.
regicide
regist(r)o [rn' $ift(r)u] m. re-
gister
rego ['rreguj m. furrow
regosijofrrdgu'zijujm. joy, mirth
regra ['rregrvj f. rule(r)
regressar [rragrd'sarj to return
regua ['rregwv] f. ruler
regular [mgu 'lar] =
rei [rrvij m. king
reinado [rnei'na&u] m. reigu
reinar [rrui'nar] to reign
reino ['nuinu] m. kingdom
rtis [rr&f] m. pi. Portuguese
(copper) coin
reitor [rrvi'tor] m. rector
rejeitar [rr}$ei'ta,r] reject
relagcio [rrdlv'svuj f. relation
reldmpago [rrd'lvmpvguj m.
lightning flash
relatdrio [rrtiv'toriu] m. report,
account
relevo [rrd'levuj m. relief
relogio rra'lojiu] m. watch
relva ['rrdvu] f. turf
remar [rrd' mar] to row
remate [rn'matd] m. conclusion,
cornice
remediado [rrdmd&l' a&u] well-off
remediar [rrsmdd^ar] to remedy
remedio [rrd'mediu] m. remedy
remessa [rrd'mesu] f. remittance
remeter [rramd'ter] to remit
remo^ ['rremu] m. row
remorso [rrd' worm] m. remorse
remoto [rrd'motu] remote
renda ['rrendv] f. lace
rendeiro [rreri dwru] m. tenant,
renter
render [rren'der] to render;
subdue
rendimento [rrendi'mentu] m.
revenue
rendoso [rren'dozu] productive
renegar [rrdnd'gar] to disown
renovar [rranu'var] to renew
renovo [rrd 'novuj shoot, offspring
renunciar [rrdntist'ar] to re-
nounce
reo [rreu] m. accused
reparar [rrdpu'rar] to repair
reparo [rrd'paru] m. satisfaction,
attention
29*
452
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
reparti$ao [rrapurti'svu] f. re-
partition
repente [rrz 'penfa] (de} suddenly
repentino [rrdpen'tinu] sudden
rcpetir [rnp9 tir] to repeat
repleto [rra'pletu] overcrowded;
fat
repolho [rrd'poftu] m. headed
cabbage
reposteiro [rrdpuf'tuwu] m. cur-
tain
repouso [rrs'pozuj m. repose, rest
repre(h)ender[rrdprierider]vepre-
hend
represa [rw'prezu] f. lock, sluice
reproduzir [rrdpru&u' zir] repro-
duce
repuxo [rrz'pufu] m. spout
requerer [rrdkz'rdr] to solicit J y
res [rref] f. cattle
res [rrsf] (do chao) m. groundfloor
resentir (-se) [rrdsen'tir(-sd)] to
resent
resfriar [rrtffri' ar] to cool
resina [rre'ziinv] f. resin
resistir [rrdZ'if'tiir] to resist
resma ['rregmv] f. ream
resoluto [rrzzu'lutu] resolute
resolver [rwzol'ver] to resolve
respeito [rr'if'pv'itu] m. respect
respirar [rnfpi'rar] to breathe
responder [rrifpon f der] to answer
restituiQao [rriftitui'siiu] f. res-
titution
resto ['rrsftu] m. rest
resumir [rrdzu'mir] to resume
resurgir [rrdsur'gir] to revive
resuscitar [rrdsufsi'tar] resusci-
tate
retalho [rrd'tafiu] m. remnant
reter [rrd'ter] to withhold, re-
strain
retirar [rrati'rar] to retire
retrato [rrd'tratuj m. portrait
reuniao [rriuni'vu] f. reunion
reverente [fflto'r&ntoj reverent
reverso [rrd'vsrsu] m. opposite,
back -side
revez [m'vef] m. reverse, mis-
fortune
revezar [mm f zar] to do by turns
revisao [rravi'zuu] f. revision
revistar [rrdvif'tar] to revisit
reza ['rrezv] f. prayer
rezar [m'zar] to pray
r(h)eumatismo [rreum v 'tigmuj m .
rheumatism
ribeira [rri'bvfrv] f. brook, bank
ribeiro [rri'twiru] m. rivulet
ridicule [rrd'&ikulu] ridiculous
rifa f'rrifv] f. lottery
rijo f'rrigu] strong, hard
rim [rri] m. kidney
rima ['rrimv] f. rime
rio ['rriu] m. river
riquesa [rri'kezv] f. riches,
wealth
rir frrirj to laugh
risca [rrifka] f. stroke
riso [ r rri:zu] m. laughter
roca ['rroka] f. distaif
roch a ['rrofv] f. rock
rocio [rru'si'uj m. square
roda ['rro&v] f. wheel
rodear [rrufty 'arj to turn round,
encircle
roer [rruer] to gnaw
rogar [rru'gar] to entreat
rogo ['rroguj m. request, en-
treaty
rol [rrd] m. roll, list
rola f'rrolv] f. turtle-dove
rolo ['rrolu] m. roll, cylinder
romance [rru'musd] m. =
romano [rru'mvnu]
rosa ['rrozv] f. rose
i] ;
) f'rroftu] m. face
roto ['rrotuj torn
rotulo ['rrotuluj m. label
roubar [rro'tarj to rob
roubo ['rrofiu] m. robbery
rouco ['rroTtu] hoarse
roupa ['rropa] f. clothes
rouxinol [rrofi'nd] m. nightin-
gale
roxo f'rrofuj violet
rua I'rruns] f. street
rude ['rru&z] =
rugir [rru'gir] to roar
ruido [rru'i&u] m. noise
ruivo ['rruivuj ruddy
rumo f'rrumuj m. rhumb-line
russo ['rrusu] Russian
rustico ['rruftikuj m. rustic
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
453
S.
Sabao [se'tuuj m. soap
sd(b)bado ['safovtifu] Saturday
saber [su'ber] to know
sdbio f'safyu] wise, learned
sabonete [sebu'netd] m. soap
sabor [sis 'borj m. taste, savour
sabre / 'safirs] m. sable
sacar [sis r kar] to draw, pull
saca-rolhas [sake 'rofaf] m. cork-
screw
sa(c)co [ ' saku] m. sack, bag
socriflcio [sTskrd'fi:giu]m. sacrifice
socudir [s'e'ku'&ir] to shake
sadio [sa'di:u] healthy, sound
safar (-se) [sv'far(sd)] to run
away
sctgrado [sv'gradu] sacred
sa(h)ir [se'ir] to go (out)
saia [saiiy] f. petticoat
saibro ['saibruj m. gravel
sal [sat] m. salt
salada [su'laftu] f. salad
saldrio [su'lariu] m. salary
salgar [sctt'qar] to salt
sctlitre [su'liitrd] m. saltpetre
saliva [sis 'Uivv] f. =
salmao [sal'mvu] m. salmon
salsa ['salsu] f. parsley
saltar [sat 'tar] to jump
saltear [satfri'ar] to assault
salto ['saituj m. jump
salvar [sal'var] to save
salvo ['salvu] safe
sanar [sis'nar] to cure, heal
sanear [svni 'arj to make whole-
some
sangria [sv'gri:v] f. bleeding
sangue [ sugd] m. blood
santificar [suntefi'Jcar] to sanctify
santo ['svntu] m. saint
sapateiro [svptftvtru] m. shoe-
maker
sapato [sis'patu] m. shoe
sapo f'sapuj m. toad
saque f'sakd] m. pillage, (drawing
of a) bill of exchange
sarctiva [su'rvive] f. hail
sardinha [svr'diyiis] f. sardine
satisfa(c)ao [sistyffis 'svu] f. satis-
faction
satisfazer [svtiffv ' zer] to satisfy
saiidade [svuo&fib] f. melancho-
ly, longing
saiidar [suu'&ar] to salute
saude [sv'ufo] f. health
saudoso [suu'&ozu] melancholic
scenario [sd'nartu] m. scenery
sce(2))tro ['setruj m. sceptre
sciencia [si 'es}v] f. science
scientifico [s^en'tiflkuj scientific
scismar [si$ 'mar] to muse, medi-
tate
se [se] f. see, cathedral
sebe I'ssfid] f. hedge
sebo f'sebuj m. tallow
se(c)ca f'ssku] f. dryness
se(c)co ['seku] dry
secreto [sd'kretu] secret
seculo ['sskulu] m. century
seda ['se&isj f. silk
sede ['ss&d] f. seat
sede ['sefoj f. thirst
sege ['setf] f. chaise
segredo [sd'gre&u] m. secret
seguir [sd'gir] to follow
segundo [sd'gunduj m. second
segurq [sa'guru] secure
m. bosom, lap
six
seva svivis] f. sap, juice
seixo ['svtfu] m. pebble
se(l)la f'sdv] f. saddle
se(l)lo ['selu] m. stamp
selvdgem [sel'vagui] savage
sem [sv}J without
semana [sd'misnie] f. week
semear [sdmt'ar] to sow
semente [sa'mento] seed
semi . . . f'sdmi . . .]
sempre ['seprdj always
senao [sd'nvu] except, safe
sen h a [svjvs]f. sign, mark, watch-
word
senhorio [stijiu'ri'uj m. landlord
sensivel [se'sivel] sensible
sentenga [sen'tesv] f. sentence
sentir ['sen'tir] to feel
separar [sdpu'rar] to separate
sequito f'sskituj m. suit
ser [ser] to be; m. being
serao [sd 'rvuj m. evening (-party)
sereno fo'renuj serene
_
[swu]
faff]
454
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
serio ['serlu] serious
serpente [sdr 'pente] m. serpent
serra ['ssrrii] f. saw; chain of
mountains
serralheiro [s9rru 'fi&iru] m. lock-
smith
sessdo [sa'suu] f. session
sessenta [sz'sentu] sixty
severo [sd'vsru] severe
sexo ['sslcsu] m. sex
sexta-feira [suifte'f'eiris] Friday
silencio [si'lesfuj m. silence
si(l)ldba f'silvbe] f. syllable
sim [si] yes
sincere [si'seru] sincere
singelo [si'gelu] simple
singular [sigu'lar] m. =
sino [ r si:nu] m. bell
sitio ['si:t}uj m. spot, place
sit(uad)o ['sit(uad~)u] situated
s6 [so] alone, only
soar [su'ar] to ring, sound
sob f'sobz] under
sobre [scibrd] upon, on
sobremesa [sobrd 'mezu] f. dessert
sobrenome [stibrz 'nomdj m. sur-
name
sobrinho [su'brijiu] m. nephew
sobrio ['sobriuj sober
so(c)co ['sokuj m. sock; blow
so(c)corro [so 'korruj m. succour
socio ['sos^u] m. member, partner
so(f)frer [su'frer] suffer
so(f)frivel [su'fri'vrij tolerable
sogra f'sogrv] f. mother-in-law
sdyro f'sogruj m. father-in-law
sol [srt] m. sun
sola ['sdlis] f. sole
solar [su'lar] m. mansion-house
soldado [sot'daffu] m. soldier
soldo ['soldu] m. (soldier's) pay
sole(m)ne [su'lsnd] solemn
solidao [suli'ffvu] f. solitude
solido ['soli&u] m. solid
solitdrio [suli'tariu] solitary
solo ['soluj m. soil
soltar [sol 'tar] to free, loosen
solto ['sottu] free, loose
sow, [sdj m. sound
sombra [ f sdmbrv] f. shade
sombrio [som'briiu] shady, dull
so(m)ma ['some] f. sum
so(m)no ['sonuj m. sleep
sonho ['sonu] m. dream
sopa ['sopn] f. soup
soprar [su 'prar] to blow
sopro f'sopruj m. blowing, breath
sorrir [su'rrir] to smile
sorte ['sortd] f. sort, fate
sossego [su'segu] m. calmness
suar [su'ar] to sweat
sub . . . [sub] . . .]
subida [subi:&v] f. ascent
stibito f'subitu] sudden
sublime [su'bliimd] =
subme(t)ter [submd'terj to subject
submisso [sub'misu] submissive
subscri(p)sqo [sufyjkri'svu] f.
subscription
substdncia [sufyf'tvs'iv] f. sub-
stance
su(c)ceder [suso'tfer] succeed
su(c)cesso [su 'SESU] m. success
sueco [ f sweku] m. Swedish
sufficiente [sufdsi 'entdj sufficient
suicida [sui'si:&u] m. f. suicide
Suissa [sw'isv] f. Switzerland
sujeito [su'gvitu] subject
sujo [ f su$u] m. dirty
sul [sul] m. South
su(m)mo ['sumuj highest
suor [su'or] m. sweat
super fide [supzr'fi.'Std] f. super-
ficies
superfluo [su 'psrfluu] superfluous
superior [supd'rior] m. =
superstiqao [suporfti 'suuj f. su-
perstition
su(p)plemento [suplz'mgntu] m.
supplement
su(p)por [su'por] suppose
su(p)portar [supur'tar] support
supremo [su'premu] supreme
supra . . . ['supruj . . .] =
surdo ['surdu] deaf
surdo-mudo [surdu' -mu&u] deaf-
mute
surpresa [sur'prezv] f. surprise
surto fsurtuj anchored
suspeito [sufpvituj m. suspect
suspiro [suf'piiru] m. sigh
sustento [siiftentuj m. sustenance,
food
susto ['suftu] m. fright
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
455
T.
Tdbacaria [tebv'kv'rii'e] f. to-
bacco-shop
tabaco [tu'baku] m. tobacco
tabe(l)liao [tufo'limi] m. notary
tabokiro [tvftu'luiru] m. fray,
gaming- board
tabuleta [tuftu'letv] sign (-board)
tabua ['tabws] f. table(t)
taga ['tasv] f. bowl
tacdo [tu'hiiu] m. heal
tacto ['tatu] m. touch
talhar [tu'fiar] to cut
tottie ['ta/idj m. form, shape
tdllio ['tafiu] m. cut, chopping-
block
tolvez [tal'vef] perhaps
tamanho [tv'mvjiu] (so) great
tanto f'tvntu] so much
tao [tvu] so, such
tapar [tv'par] to cover
tapete [tu'petd] m. carpet
tardar [tvr'dar] to tarry
tarde ['tarda] f. afternoon, eve-
ning
tarefa [tv'refu] f. task
taxa ['tufv] f. tax, rate
tecelao [tdsd'luu] m. weaver
tecer [to'ser] to weave
tecido fa'si&u] m. tissue
tecto ['tetu] m. roof
tela ['tells] cloth, linen
telegrapho fo'legrvfu] m. tele-
graph
telha ['tufa] f. tile
temer [te'mer] to fear
tempo f'tempuj m. time
testa ['tEftu] f. forehead
testemunha [tyftd r mujiv] f. testi-
mony, witness
texto ['teftu] m. text
tia ['ti:uj f f. aunt
tijolo [ti'golu] m. brick
u l
i&iit
timido ['timiffu] timid
tingir [tt'$ir] to dye
tinteiro [tm'tuiru] m. inkstand
tinto ['tintu] dyed, red
tio ['ti'uj in. uncle
tirar [ti'rar] to draw
toolha [tu'aliv] f. towel
tocar [tu'car] to touch
todo ['toffuj (adj.) all
tomar [tu 'mar] to take
tomo ['tomuj m. tome
tonel [tu'nsl] m. tun, cask
tormento [tur'mentuj m. torment
tornar [tur'nar] to (re)turn, 'V^
torre ['torrd] f. tower, steeple
torrente [tu'rrentd] f. torrent
torto ['tortuj crooked, tortuous
tortura [tur'turv] f. torture
tosse [ f tos9] f. cough
toucinho [to'sijiuj m. bacon
touro ['torn] m. bull
trabalho [trv'baftu] m. work
tra$o ['trasu] m. touch, sketch
tradusir [tne&u'zir] to translate
trdfego ['trafdgu] m. \ tr _ ffip
trdfico ['trafikuj m. ) tratfl<
traidor ['trai&or] m. traitor
trojo [tra$u] m. garb
tranqui(l)lo [trU 'kwilu] tranquil
transcrever [trvfkrd'verj trans-
cribe
transports [trvf'port9j m. trans-
tempo [ lempuj m. time <kA. wcwwpi
temporal [tempu'ral] m. =5f(T Vv ^ port
tenaz [td 'nafj f. tenacious transtorno [trvf'tornu] m. distur
bance
tratar [tru'tar] to treat, deal
trato [train] m. treatment
trave ['trav&] f. beam
travessa [tfe 'vests] f.
tengao [te'svu] f. intention
tencionar [tes^u'nar] to intent
tenente [td'nentd] m. lieutenant
tentar [ten' tar] to tempt
tepido ['tepi&u] tepid
terminar tdrmi'nar] terminate
terra ['terra] earth, ground
terreiro fa'rrvtru] m. terrace,
square
terremoto [tdrrd'motuj m. earth-
quake
tesoura [td'zoru] f. scissors
cross-
beam
trazer [tru'zer] to carry, bring
trecho ['tnefu] m. excerpt
trem [trui] m. carriage
tremer [trd'mer] to tremble
trevo ['trevu] trefoil
treze ['trezd[ thirteen
456
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
trezentos [trd'zentuf] three hund-
red
trigo ['trigu] m. wheat, coin
Trindade [inn 'dafo] f. Trinity
triplice ['triplisd] triple
triste ['triftd] sad
trocar [tru'karj to change
troco I'trokuJ m. change
tronco ['troku] m. trunk
tropa ['tropvj f. troop
tropel [tru'psl] troop, multitude
trovao [tru'vuuj m. thunder
trovejar [true}' gar] to thunder
tudo I'tu&u] the whole, all,
everything
tumulo f'tumuluj m. tomb
turco ['turlcu] m. Turk
turvo f'turvu] muddy
U.
ultimo ['ultimu] last
undnime [u'nunim9] 1 unanimous
unlia ['uyiu] f. nail
imido [uni'vu] f. union
unico ['uniku] only, sole
unidade [uni'&ad'd] f. unity
unir [u'nir] to unite
urbano [ur bvnuj civil
urgente [ur'$entd] m. urgent
urso ['ursu] m. bear
urze I 'urzd] f. sweet broom
uso ['uzu] m. use
usual [uzu'al] =
usura [u'zuru] f. usury
util ['util] useful
uva ['uvv] f. grape
T.
Vacca ['valcie] f. cow
vacua f'vakwuj void, empty
vaga ['vage] f. wane
vagar [vv'gar] m. leisure
vago [ r vag.u] vacant, vague
vaidade vai'd'ad'd] f. vanity
[vai'&ozu] vain
ald] m. post-office order
volente [ve 'lenta] valiant
vctler [vv'lerj to be worth/ ^6
vdlido ['vali&u] valid, efficacious
volido [ve'liffu] m. favourite
valor [ve 'lor] m. value
valsa ['valsu] f. valse
vantdgem [v^n'ta^J f. advan-
tage
vantajoso [viiniv r $ozu] advan-
tageous
vao [vvu] void, vain ; ?.. void
vdrio f'variuj various
varrer [vu'rrer] to sweep
vasa f'vazv] f. slime
vasar [vu'zar] to empty
voso ['vazu] m. vase, vessel
vasto f vajtu] vast
vazio [ve'ziiu] empty
veado [vi'adu] m. deer
vegetal [wgd'tal] m. vegetable
vela ['vein] f. sail
velho ['vsfiu & 'vufiuj old
ve(l)ludo [vd'lu&u] m. velvet
veloz [w'lof] swift
veneer [ve'ser] to vanquish
venda {'vends] f. sale
vender [ven'der] to sell
ceneno [vd'nenu] m. poison
vento fventu] m. wind
venire ['ventwj m. belly
ventura [Centura] f. fortune .- /
VerOade fwravfoj f. truth
verdadeiro [vdrdv' dviru] true
verde ['verdd] green
vergonha [vdr'gojiv] f. shame
verme ['vermin m. worm
vermclho [vdr'mvfiu] red
versdo [vdr'suu] f. version
verier [vdr'ter] to spill; trans-
late
vesper a ['vsffyrv] f. eve
vestido [vif'tidu] gown, dress
vestir [vif'tir] to dress
ves [vef] f. time. t^VfZe ?.
via ['viiis] f. way, passage
vidgem [vi'agu'i] f. journey
vicio f'vi&uj m. vice
victima [vitima] f. victim
Victoria [vi'toriie] f. victory
vida ['vidv] life
vide ['mifo] f. vine
vidro ['vid'ru] glass
vi(l)la ['vilu] f. village
vinagre [vi'nagrd] m. vinegar
vinda ['vmdvj f. arrival
vindima [vln'dimw] f. vintage
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
457
vingar [vi'gar] to revenge
viriha ['vijwj f. vineyard
viriho ['vijiuj m. wine
vintem [vin'tui] m. Portuguese
coin of 20 reis
violento [viu'lentu] violent
violeta [viu'lete] f. violet
vir [virj to come 'T 4 <3J V/x0i
virar [vi'rar] to turn
virgtda ['virgulu] f. comma
wril [vi'ril] manly
virtude [vir'tufo] f. virtue
vista ['viftvj f. view
visto [\~iftu] seen
viuvo [vt'uvu] m. widomer
vivo f'vivu] alive
viziriho [vd'ziyiu m. neighbour
voar [vu'ar] to fly
volta ['vottvj f. turn
voltar [vol'tar] to (re)turn,
volume [vu'lumd] m. volume
volver [vol'ver] to go back, to
stir
vontade [von'tafo] f. will, wish
voo [vou] m. flight
voto ['votu] m. vote
voz [vofj f. voice
Z.
Zanga ['zugu] f. anger
zangar [zv'gar] to irritate
zelo ['zelu] m. zeal
zero I'ZETU] m. zero
zombar [zdm'bar] to mock
zumbido [zum'bi&u] m. 1 huni-
zunido [zu'nifru] in. ] ming.
29**
Educational Works and Class-Books
METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER
FOR THE STUDY OF MODERN LANGUAGES.
PUBLISHED BY JULIUS GllOOS, HEIDELBERG.
With each newly-learnt language one wins a new soul. Charles V.
At the end of the 19 th century the world is ruled by the interest for
trade and traffic; it breaks through the barriers which separate
the peoples and ties up new relations between the nations.
William II.
,,Julius Groos, Publisher, has for the last fifty years been devoting his
special attention to educational works on modern languages, and has published
a large number of class-booK.s for the study of those modern languages most
generally spoken. In this particular department he is in our opinion unsur-
passed ~by any other German publisher. The series consists of 298 volumes
of different sizes which are all arranged on the same system, as is easily
seen by a glance at the grammars which so closely resemble one another,
that an acquaintance with one greatly facilitates the study of the others.
This is no small advantage in these exacting times when the knowledge of
one language alone is hardly deemed sufficient.
The textbooks of the Gaspey - Otto - Sauer method have, within the
last ten years, acquired an universal reputation, increasing in pro-
portion as a knowledge of living languages has become a necessity of modern
life. The chief advantages, by which they compare favorably with thousands
of similar books, are lowness of price and good appearance, the happy union
of theory and practice, the clear scientific basis of the grammar proper com-
bined with practical conversational exercises, and the system, here
conceived for the first time and consistently carried out, by which the pupil is
really taught to speak and write the foreign language.
To this 'method is entirely due the enormous success with ivhich the
Gaspey- Otto -Sauer textbooks have met: most other grammars either
content themselves with giving the theoretical exposition of the grammatical
forms and trouble tlie pupil with a confused mass of the most far-fetched
Irregtdarities and exceptions without ever applying them, or go
to the other extreme, and simply teach him to repeat in a parrot-
like manner a few colloquial phrases without letting him grasp the
real genius of the foreign language.
The system referred to is easily discoverable : 1. in the arrangement of
the grammar; 2. in the endeavour to enable the pupil to understand a
regular text as soon as possible, and above all to teach him to speak the
foreign language; this latter point was considered by the authors so particu-
larly characteristic of their worKs, that they have styled them to distinguish
them from other worfis of a similar kind Conversational Grammars.
The first series comprises manuals for the use of Englishmen and
consists of 55 volumes.
Our admiration for this rich collection of worfys, for the method dis-
played and the fertile genius of certain of the authors, is increased ivhen we
examine the other series ', which are intended for the use of foreigners.
In these worlds the chief difficulty under which several of the authors
liave laboured, has been the necessity of teaching a language in a foreign
idiom ; not to mention the peculiar difficulties which the German idiom offers
in writing school-books for the study of that language.
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
We must confess that for those persons who, from a practical point
of view, wish to learn a foreign language sufficiently well to enable them to
write and speak it with ease, the authors have set down the grammatical
rules in such a way, that it is equally easy to understand and to learn them.
Moreover, we cannot but commend the elegance and neatness of the type
and binding of the boo%s. It is doubtless on this account too that these
volumes have been received with so much favour and that several have reached
such a large circulation.
We willingly testify that the. whole collection gives proof of much care
and industry, both with regard to the aims it has in view and the way. in
which these liave been carried out, and, moreover, reflects great credit on the
editor, this collection being in reality quite an exceptional thing of its lc.ind"
(Extract from the Literary Review.)
All books bound.
English Editions.
Elementary Modern Armenian Grammar by Chilian . . . .
Arabic Grammar by Thatcher .....' ........
Key to the Arabic Grammar by Thatcher .............
Arabic Chrestomathy by Harder .............
Danish Conversation -Grammar by Thomas .........
Key to the Danish Conversation - Grammar by Thomas .........
Dutch Conversation-Grammar by Valette. 3. Ed .......
Key to the Dutch Co nvers.- Grammar by Valette ...... .
Dutch Reader by Valette. 2. Ed .......... . .
French Conversation-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 14. Ed. . . net
Key to the French Convers.-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 8. Ed. . . .
Elementary French Grammar by Wright. 4. Ed.
French Reader by Onions
Materials for French Prose Composition by Otto-Onions. 5. Ed.
French Dialogues by Otto-Corkran
Conversation-Grammar by Otto. 29. Ed ..... net
Key to the German Convers.-Grammar by Otto. 21. Ed ........
Elementary German Grammar by Otto. 9. Ed .........
First German Book by Otto. 9. Ed .............
German Reader. I. 8. Ed.; II. 5. Ed.; III. 2. Ed. by Otto . . each
Materials for translating English into German by Otto-Wright. 7. Ed.
Key to the Mater, f. tr. Engl.i. Germ, by Otto. 3. Ed. ........
German Dialogues by Otto. 5. Ed .............
Accidence of the German language by Otto-Wright. 2. Ed. ...
Handbook of English and German Idioms by Lange . . .
German Verbs with their appropriate prepositions etc. by Tebbitt .
The Hanssa language (DieHaussasprache; la langue haoussa) by Seidel
Hindustani Conversation -Grammar by Clair-Tisdall . . .
Key to the Hindustani Convers.-Grammar by Clair-Tisdall ...... .
Italian Conversation-Grammar by Sauer-de Arteaga. 9. Ed. net
Key to the Italian Convers.-Grammar by 8auer-de Arteaga. 8. Ed .....
Elementary Italian Grammar by Motti. 4. Ed. . .......
Italian Eeader by Cattaneo. 2. Ed .............
Italian Dialogues by Motti ......... . .....
Japanese Conversation-Grammar by Plaut .........
Key to the Japanese Oonv. -Grammar by Plant ............
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
English. Editions.
Modern Persian Conversation-grammar by fcJt. Clair-Tisdall .
Key to the Mod. Persian Gonvers. -Grammar by St. Clair-Tisdall
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar by Ey
Key to the Portuguese Cpnvers.-Grammar by Ey .
Russian Conversation-Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Key to the Russian Convers. -Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Key to the Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Russian Reader by Werkhaupt and Roller
Spanish Conversation-Grammar by Sauer-de Arteaga. 7. Ed. net
Key to the Spanish Convers.-Grammar by Sauer-de Arteaga. 5. Ed.
Elementary Spanish Grammar by Pa via. 2. Ed
Spanish Reader by Arteaga
Spanish Dialogues by Sauer-Corkran
Elementary Swedish Grammar by Fort. 2. Ed
Turkish Conversation -Grammar by Hagopian
Key to the Turkish Convers.-Grammar by Hagopian
Arabic Edition.
Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre fur Araber von Hartinann . .. . .
Armenian Edition.
Kleine englische Sprachlehre fur Armenier von Gulian ....
Bulg-a.ria.n Editions.
Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky. 2. Aufl.
Kleine englische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . .
Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky .
Kleine russische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gav/riysky . .
r>ixtcli Editions.
Kleine ngelsche Spraakkunst door Ooster
Kleine Fransche Spraakkunst door Welbergen
JCleine Hoogduitsche Grammatica door Schwippert. 2. Dr. . .
Kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff
Sleutel bij de kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff
French Editions.
Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicolas. 18. Ed
Corrig6 des themes de la Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicolas. 7. d. . .
Petite grammaire allemande par Otto-Verrier. 10. Ed
Lectures allemandes par Otto. I. 8. &!., II. 5. d., III. 2. Ed. each
Erstes deutsches Lesebuch von Yerrier
Conversations allemandes par Otto-Verrief. 5. Iild
Grammaire anglaise par Mauron-Verrier. 10. ^ld
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire anglaise par Mauron-Verrier. 5. jd. . .
Petite grammaire anglaise par Mauron. 7. Ed
Lectures anglaises par Mauron. 3. Ed
Conversations anglaises par Corkran. 2. lild
Grammaire arabe par Armez
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire arabe par Armez
Chrestomathie arabe par Harder
La langue congolaise par Seidel-Struyf
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
Fi-endi Editions,
Grammaire espagnole par Bauer-Serrano. 6'. Ed. ...... 4
Corrige des themes de la gramm. espagn. par Sauer-Serrano. 5. Jfed.
Petite grammaire espagnole par Tanty. 3. Ed
Lectures espagnoles par Arteaga
Grammaire grecqne par Capos
Corrige des themes de la Grainmaire grecque par Capos
Petite grammaire hongroise par Kont
Corrige des themes de la petite grammaire hongroise par Kont
Chrestomathie hongroise par Kont
Grammaire italieime par Sauer. 11. ^d
CorrigS de8 themes do la Grammaire italienne par Sauer. 7. Ed
Petite grammaire italienne par Motti. 5. Sd
Chrestomathie italienne par Cattaneo. 3. ]d .........
Conversations italiennes par Motti. 2. ld
Grammaire japoiiaise par Plaut
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire japonaise par Plaui
Grammaire neerlandaise par Valette. 3. iSd
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire neerlandaise par Valette
Lectures nderlandaises par Valette. 2. ld
Grammaire portugaise par Armez
Corrige de la Grammaire portugaise par Armez
Grammaire ronmaiiic par Lovera
Corrig6 des themes de la Grammaire roumaine par Lovera
Grammaire russe par Fuchs-Nicolas. 4. ]d
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire russe par Fuchs-Nicolas. 4. U
Petite grammaire russe par Motti. 2. Ed
CorrigS des themes de la petite grammaire russe par Motti. 2. jd
Lectures russes par Werkhaupt et Boiler
Petite grammaire snedoise par Fort
Editions.
AraMsche Konversations-Grammatik v. Harder, 2. Aufl. . . .
SchlQssel dazu v. Harder. 2. Aufl ..............
Arabische Chrestomathie v. Harder ............
Bnlgarisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Gawriysky ....
Schlttssel dazu v. Gawriysky ................
Ckinesiscbe Konversations-Grammatik v. Seidel ..... .
Schliissel dazu v. Seidel .................
Kleine chinesische Sprachlehre v. Seidel ..........
Schlttssel dazu v. Seidel .................
Danische Konversations-Grammatik v. Wied. 2. Aufl .....
Sehltissel dazu v. Wied. 2. Aufl ........... ; . . . .
Duala Sprachlehre und Worterbuch v. Seidel ........
Englisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Gaspey-Runge. 25. Aufl.
Schliissel dazu v. Runge. 5. Aufl ..............
Englisches Konversations-Lesebuch.v. Gaspey-Runge. 6. Aufl. . .
Kleine englische Sprachlehre Y. Otto-Runge. 7. Aufl .......
SchHissel dazu v. Runge .... ......... .....
Englische Gesprache v. Runge. 3. Aufl ........
Materialien z. t^bersetzen ins Engtische v. Otto-Runge. 4. Aufl. . .
Englische Chrestomathie v. Siipfle- Wright. 9. Aufl ......
Handbuch englischer und deutscher Idiome v. Lange ......
Ewe Sprachlehre und Worterbuch v. Seidel .........
Kleine finnische Sprachlehre v. Neuhaus .........
Franzdsische Konversations-Grammatik v. Otto-Runge. 28. Aufl.
Schltissel dazu v. Ruuge. 5. Aufl ...............
Method Gaspey-Otto Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
Editions.
Franz. Konv.-Lesebuch I. 10. Aufl., II. 5. Aufl. v. Otto-Runge. a . .
Franz. Konv.-Leseb. f. Madchsch. v. Otto-Runge I. 5. Aufl., II. 3. Aufl. a
Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre v. Otto-Runge. 9. Aufl ......
Schlussel dazu v. Runge ..................
Materialien z. Qbersetzen ins Franzosische v. Runge .......
Franzosische Gesprache v. Otto-Runge. 9. Aufl .........
Franzosisches Lesebuch v. Siipfle. 11. Aufl. . . . .....
Italienische Konversations-Grammatik v. Sauei. 12. Aufl. . .
Schlflssel dazu v. Cattaneo. 4. Aufl ..............
Italienisches Konversations-Lesebuch v. Sauer. 5. Aufl ......
Italienische Chrestomathie v. Cattaneo. 3. Aufl ........
Kleine italienische Sprachlehre v. Sauer. 10. Aufl .......
Schlussel dazu v. Cattaneo. 2. Aufl ..............
Italienische Gesprache v. Sauer-Motti. 5. Aufl .........
ttbungsstiicke zum tfbers. a. d. Deutschen i. Ital. v. Lardelli. 5. Aufl.
Japanische Konversations-Grammatik v. Plaut ......
Schlussel dazu v. Plaut ........... '. ......
Marokkanische Sprachlehre v. Seidel .........
Nengriechisehe Konversations-Grammatik v. Petraris . . . .
Schlflssel dazu v. Petraris ........... ......
Lehrbuch der neugriechischen Yolkssprache v. Petraris .....
Niederiandische Konversations-Grammatik v. Valette. 2. Aufl.
Schlussel dazu v. Valette .................
Niederlandisches Konv.-Lesebuch v. Valette. 2. Aufl. . .....
Kleine niederlandische Sprachlehre v. Valette. 3. Aufl ......
Polnische Konvorsations-Grammatik v. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl. .
Schlttssel dazu v. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl ......... .....
Portugiesisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Ey . . . . . .
Schlussel dazu v. Ey ..................
Kleine portugiesische Sprachlehre v. Kordgien-Ey. 5. Aufl. . . .
Human isclie Konversations-Grammatik von Lovera .....
Schlussel dazu von Lovera .................
Russische Konversations-Grammatik v. Fuchs. 5. Aufl. . . . .
Schliissel dazu v. Fuchs. 5. Aufl ...............
Russisches Konversations-Lesebuch v. Werkhaupt .......
Kleine russische Sprachlehre v. Motti. 3. Aufl .........
Schlflssel dazu v. Motti. 3. Aufl ................
Scliwedisehe Konversations-Grammatik v. Walter. 2. Aufl. . .
Schliiasel dazu v. Walter. 2. Aufl ..............
Kleine schwedische Sprachlehre v. Fort. 2. Aufl ........
Spaxiisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Sauer-Ruppert. 10. Aufl.
Schlusssl dazu v. Ruppert. 4. Aufl ...............
Spanisches Lesebuch v. Arteaga ............ -. .
Kleine spanische Sprachlehre v. Sauer. 7. Aufl ........
oghlussel dazu v. Kunge. 2. Aufl ................
Spanische Gesprache v. Sauer. 4. Aufl ............
Spanische Rektionsliste v. Sauer-Kordgien ..........
8naliili Konversations-Grammatik v. Seidel ........
Schliissel dazu v. Seidel . . ... ............
Suahili Worterbuch v. Seidel ..............
T&cliechisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Maschner .....
Schlussel dazu v. Maschner .................
Tnrkische Konversations-Grammatik v. Jehlitschka .....
Schlussel dazu v. Jehlitschka ............... .
Kleine ttngarische Sprachlehre v. Nagy. 2. Aufl ..... .
Schliissel dazu v. Nagy ..................
Ungarische Chrestomathie v. Kont .............
Method Gaspey-Otto-Saner
for the study of modern languages.
Grreelz Editions.
Kleine deutsclie Sprachlehre fur Griechen von Maltos
Deutsche Gesprache fiir Griechen von Maltos ...
Kleine englische Sprachlehre fur Griechen von Deffner
Kleine russische Sprachlehre fur Griechen von Maltos
Italian Editions.
Grammatica araba di Farina ........
Chiave della grammatica araba di Farina ........
Grammatica francese di Motti. 3. Ed .......
Chiave della grammatica francese di Mutti. 2. Ed ......
Grammatica elementare francese di Sauer-Motti. 4. Ed.
Letture francesi di Le Boucher ..........
Conversazioni francesi di Motti ..........
Grammatica del dreco volgare di Palumbo ....
Grammatica inglese di Pavia. 6. Ed .......
Chiave della grammatica inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed ......
Grammatica elementare inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed. . . .
Letture inglesi di Ls Boucher ..........
Grammatica elementare portoghese di Palumbo . .
Grammatica russa di Motti . ; ........
Chiave della grammatica russa di Motti ........
Grammatica spagnnola di Pavia. 3. Ed ......
Chiave della Grammatica spagnuola di Pavia. 2. Ed. . .
Grammatica elementare spagnuola di Pavia. 3. Ed. . .
Grammatica elementare svedese di Pereira ....
Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 8. Ed. ...
Chiave della Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 4. Ed.
Grammatica elementare tedesca di Otto. 6. Ed .....
Letture tedesche di Otto. 5. Ed ........ . .
Antologia tedesca di Verdaro ...........
Conversazioni tedesche di Motti. 2. Ed .......
Avviamento al trad, dal ted. in ital. di Lardelli. 5. Ed.
Folish Edition.
Kleine dentsche SprachJehre fiir Polen von Paulus .
Editions.
Grammatica allema por Otto-Prevot. 4. Ed
Chave da Grammatica allema por Otto-Prevot. 2. Ed
Gramatica elementar alema por Pre>6t-Pereira. 4. Ed.
Grammatica francesa por Tanty-Vasconcellos. 2. Ed.
Chave da Grammatica francesa por Tanty-Vasconcellos. 2. Ed.
Livro de leitura francesa por Le Boucher
Livro de leitura inglesa por Le Boucher
Grammatica elementar sneca por Pereira
Tfconrnan Editions.
Gramatica francesa de Leist .
Cheea gramaticii francese de Leist
Elemente de grarnaticS, francesa de Leist. 2. Ed.
Conversa^iunl francese de Leist. 3. Ed
Gramatica germana de Leist
Cheea gramaticii germane de Leist
Elemente de gramatica germana de Leist. 2. Ed.
Conversa^iuni germane de Leist. 2. Ed. . . .
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
Editions.
English Grammar for Russians by Haufl' ........
Key to the English Grammar for Russians by Hauff ........
French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel ........
Key to the French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel .......
German Grammar for Russians by Hauff ........
Key to the German Grammar for Russians by Hauff ........
Italian Grammar for Russians by Mo2ejko ........
Key to the Italian Grammar for Russians by Mozejko .......
Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitch . . .
Key to the Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Iasacovitch ....
Elementary Swedish Grammar for Russians by Fort-Issacovitch
Editions.
Kleine deiltsche Sprachlehre tur Serben von Petrovitch . .
Kleine englische Sprachlehre fur Serben von Petrovitch .
Kleine frauzosische Sprachlehre fur Serben von Petrovitch
Editions.
Gramatica alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed
Clave de la Gramatica alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed
Gramatica elemental alemana por Otto-Ruppert. 7. Ed
Gramatica francesa por Tanty-Arteaga. 2. Ed
Clave de la Gramatica francesa por Tanty-Arteaga 2. Ed
Gramatica sucinta de la lengua francesa por Otto. 5. Ed. . . .
Libro de lectura francesa por Le Boucher
Gramatica inglesa por Pavia. 3. Ed ,
Clave de la Gramatica inglesa por Pavia. 3. Ed
Gramatica sucinta de la lengua inglesa por Pavia. 5. Ed. . . ,
Libro de lectura inglesa por Le Boucher
Gramatica sucinta de la lengua italiana por Pavia. 4. Ed. ,
Gramatica sucinta portllguesa por Carrillo .......
Gramatica sucinta de la lengua rnsa por d'Arcais
Clave de la Gramatica sucinta rusa por d'Arcais
Swedish Edition,
Kleine dentsche Sprachlehre tur Schweden von Walter . . .
Tchechi Editions.
Kleine dentsche Sprachlehre tut ischechen von Maschner . .
Franzosische Konv.-Grammatik fur Tschechen von Maschner
Schlussel dazu von Maschner
Editions.
Kleine dentsche Sprachiehre tur i'iirken vou Wely Bey-Bolland
Deutsches Lesebuch fur Tiirken von Wely Bey-Bolland .....
Conversation-Books by Connor
English-German. 2. Ed.
English-French. 2. Ed. . .
English-Italian. 2. Ed. . .
English-Russian
English-Spanish
English-Swedish
Deutsch-Danisch
Deutsch-Franzosisch. 2. Aufl.
Deutsch-Italienisch. 2. Aufl.
Deutsch-Niederlandisch . .
Deutsch-Portugiesisch . . .
in two languages:
Deutsch-Rumanisch . . .
Deutsch-Russisch. . . .
Deutsch-Schwedisch . . .
Deutsch-Spanisch . 2. Aufl.
Deutsch-Turkisch . . . .
Fran9ais-Italien. 2. SSd, .
Fran9ais-Espagnol . . .
Fran9ais-Portugais . . .
Fran9ais-Russe ....
Italiano-Spagnuolo . . .
Method Graspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages,
Conversation -Books by Connor
in three languages:
English-German-French. 14. Ed
in four languages:
English- German-French-Italian. 2. Ed
The Traveller's Companion by Motti.
No. 1. for Germans: Englisch .
2. r Franzosisch
3. Italienisch .
No. 21. for Englishmen : German
22. French
23. Italian . .
No. 41. for Frenchmen : Allemand .
42. Anglais
43. T Italien . .
No. 61. for Italians: Tedesco .
, 62. Ingiese .
, 63. Francese .
German Language by Becker
Spanish Commercial Correspondence by Arteaga y Pereira .
Danisclier Sprachfiihrer von Forchhammer
Richtige Aussprache d. Musterdentschen v. Dr. E. Dannheisser, br.
Kiigliwche Handelskorrespondenz v. Arendt. 2. Aufl
Kurze franzffsisclie Grammatik von H. Runge
Franz. Sprachl. f. Handelssch. v. Dannheisser, Kiiffner u. Offenmuller
1 4 alien i sell e kaufm. Korresp.-Gramm. v. Dannheisser u. Sauer. 2. Aufl.
SchlUssel dazu v. Dannheisser
II correttore italiauo von Mayo-Gelati
Anleitung z. deutscheii, franz., eiigl. u. ital. Geschafts-
briefen von Oberholzer u. Osmond, br
8panische Handelskorrespondenz von Arteaga y Pereira . . .
Kleines spanisches Lesebuch f. Handelsschulen v. Ferrades-Langeheldt
Langue alleinaitde par Becker
Le claiiois parle par Forchhammer
Correspondance commerciale espagnole par Arteaga y Pereira
Lengua alemana de Becker
The Publisher is untiringly engaged in extending the range of educa-
tional works issuing from his Press. A number of new books are now in
course of preparation.
The new editions are constantly improved ^nd kept up to date.
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKE1
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
TVNews
OpenLibrary